LIBRARY 
 
 OF THE 
 
 University of California. 
 
 Class 
 
JOHANNINE VOCABULARY 
 
BV THE SAME AUTHOR 
 
 CLUE : A Guide through Greek to Hebrew 
 Scripture (Diatessarica — Part I). 
 
 Demy Svo, Cloth^ Price 'js. 6d. net. 
 
 THE CORRECTIONS OF MARK (Diatessarica— Part II). 
 Demy 8vo, Cloth, Price 15^. net. 
 
 FROM LETTER TO SPIRIT (Diatessarica— Part III). 
 Demy 8vo, Cloth, Price 10s. net. 
 
 PARADOSIS (Diatessarica— Part IV). 
 Demy 8vo, Cloth, Price *]s. 6d. net. 
 
 See pp. 365 foil, of this volume. 
 
 AGENTS IN AMERICA 
 
 THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 
 66 Fifth Avenue, New York 
 
JOHANNINE VOCABULARY 
 
 A COMPARISON 
 
 OF THE WORDS OF THE FOURTH GOSPEL 
 WITH THOSE OF THE THREE 
 
 BY 
 
 Edwin A. Abbott 
 
 " Oratio imago animi^ Language 
 most shews a man." 
 
 Ben Jonson, Syha. 
 
 OF THE 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF 
 
 LONDON 
 
 Adam and Charles Black 
 1905 
 
3^ 
 
 
 (JTambriUge : 
 
 PRINTED BY JOHN CLAY, M.A. 
 AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS. 
 
TO 
 
 MY DAUGHTER 
 
 BY WHOM THE MAIN MATERIALS FOR THE WORK 
 
 WERE COLLECTED AND CLASSIFIED 
 
 AND THE RESULTS CORRECTED AND REVISED 
 
 THIS BOOK IS DEDICATED 
 
 192500 
 

 % 
 
 /? 
 
 m 
 
PREFACE 
 
 ABOUT eight or nine years ago, when writing or 
 l\ revising for the press a commentary on the 
 Fourth Gospel, I attempted — among ottftl^ prepara- 
 tions for so manysided a task — to construct a key to 
 certain verbal difficulties somewhat on the lines of a 
 work that I wrote nearly forty years ago, called A 
 Shakespearian Grammar, My *'Johannine Grammar" 
 never went beyond a rough draft : but, rough though 
 it was, it decided me against publishing my commentary, 
 by helping me to understand a great deal that I had 
 never understood before, and by forcing me to perceive 
 that a great deal more remained to be understood. 
 
 Studied with the aid of this rudimentary Johannine 
 Grammar, the author of the Johannine Gospel revealed 
 himself in a new light — as a prophet and yet a player 
 on words ; one of the most simple of writers yet one of 
 the most ambiguous ; with a style, in parts, apparently 
 careless, parenthetic, irregular, abrupt, inartistic — an 
 utterer of after-thoughts and by-thoughts putting down 
 words just as they came into his mind, according to 
 Mark Antony's profession, '' I only speak right on" — 
 but, in general effect, an inspired artist endowed with 
 an art of the most varied kind, not metrical, not 
 
 vii 
 
PREFACE 
 
 rhetorical, never ornate, yet conforming to rules of 
 order, repetition, and variation, that suggested, at one 
 time the refrains of a poem, at another the arrange- 
 ments of a drama, at another the ambiguous utterances 
 of an oracle, and the symbolism of an initiation into 
 religious mysteries. 
 
 At the same time the problem presented by the 
 divergence of the Johannine from the Synoptic voca- 
 bulary began to seem more difficult to explain in 
 accordance with old hypotheses but more capable of 
 new solutions. Biographers, though differing in the 
 style and vocabulary of their comments, cannot lawfully 
 differ in their reports of conversations. Yet the fourth 
 or latest of these biographers appeared to differ in 
 this unlawful manner from the three, and this to an 
 extent that seemed amazing unless deliberate, and, if 
 deliberate, only justifiable on the ground that he knew 
 his divergences to be substantially in accordance with 
 what he conceived to be the essential truth. Perhaps (I 
 reflected) the Fourth Evangelist might be in the right : 
 but, if so, what about the Three ? Did, or did not, 
 Jesus of Nazareth use, and use repeatedly, such words 
 as ''faith," ''repentance," "forgiveness".'^ Did He 
 condemn "hypocrisy"? Did He bid men "watch" 
 and "pray"? Did He hold up to His disciples the 
 example of " little children " in order to answer their 
 questions about "the greatest"? If He did, as 
 assuredly He did, how was it possible that a Fourth 
 Gospel — even a supplementary Gospel — could give a 
 fair and truthful account of Jesus and set down at great 
 length His discourses, both to the disciples and to 
 
 viii 
 
PREFACE 
 
 Others, without so much as mentioning (1676 b) one of 
 these fundamental words ? 
 
 In order to answer these questions I began to con- 
 struct a list of Synoptic words rarely or never used by 
 John, and a list of Johannine words rarely or never 
 used by the Synoptists : and I found that these — when 
 compared and illustrated by quotations — shewed that 
 in many cases John was in reality neither so silent nor 
 so divergent as I had supposed. Where he had ap- 
 peared to be taking up entirely new ground, he was 
 sometimes saying the same thing as one or more of the 
 Synoptists, only in a different way. 
 
 These conclusions were brought home to me more 
 forcibly than ever when I recently began to prepare 
 for the press a treatise on what might be called The 
 Fourfold Gospel, that is to say, the passages where the 
 Fourth Gospel intervenes in the Tradition of the Three. 
 For the purposes of that treatise it seemed desirable 
 to refer to a ''Johannine Grammar" and a ''Johannine 
 Vocabulary " in print, instead of embodying large ex- 
 tracts from a manuscript. I therefore decided on 
 printing those two volumes at once. 
 
 The "Johannine Grammar," which will form the 
 Second Part of this work, could hardly be made 
 intelligible to a reader unacquainted with Greek. But 
 the "Johannine Vocabulary" stands on a different 
 footing. There is nothing to prevent an " unlearned " 
 reader from understanding, for example, that a differ- 
 ence is intended (as Origen says there is) when the 
 Fourth Gospel describes some as " believing in " our 
 Lord, and others as " believing in His name " ; and 
 
 ix 
 
PREFACE 
 
 that a play on words describes the people in Jerusalem 
 as "trusting in His name" whereas Jesus ''did not 
 trust Himself to them" ; and that a contrast is drawn 
 between *'the beloved disciple" and Thomas, both of 
 whom "saw and believed" — but in what different 
 circumstances ! These, and a score or so of other 
 distinctions, relate to a single word (1463/^//.) "be- 
 lieve," and can all be understood without any knowledge 
 of Greek. For this reason I decided to publish the 
 Johannine Vocabulary as a separate volume^ less costly, 
 and more intelligible to the general reader than the 
 Johannine Grammar which, I trust, will speedily follow. 
 I am indebted to several friends — in particular to 
 Mr W. S. Aldis and Mr H. Candler — for corrections 
 of proof and useful suggestions of a general character, 
 and to Dr Joseph B. Mayor for valuable criticism on 
 points of Greek. Nor must I omit thanks, due to all 
 connected with the Cambridge University Press, for 
 their admirable printing of the work and their arrange- 
 ment of the Vocabularies. 
 
 EDWIN A. ABBOTT. 
 
 Wellside 
 
 Ha7npstead 
 
 24 May^ 1905 
 
 1 It must be understood, however, that Part I, though obtainable 
 separately, frequently refers, on points of grammatical detail, to Part II, 
 which will contain the Index to the whole work. 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 PAGE 
 
 References and Abbreviations . . xvi — xviii 
 Introduction 
 
 § I The problem (1436-43) 
 
 § 2 How to deal with the problem (1444—9) 
 
 § 3 A specimen of allusiveness, "hating one's own life" (1450) 
 
 § 4 Another specimen, " reclining the head " (1451 — 8) 
 
 § 5 Inferences (1459—62) 
 
 BOOK I 
 JOHANNINE "KEY- WORDS" 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 
 " BELIEVING " 
 
 § I "Believing," or, "trusting," a key-word in the Fourth Gospel 
 (1463—6) 
 
 § 2 Why John prefers "believe" to "belief" (1467—8) 
 
 § 3 " Believing," in the Old Testament (1469—71) 
 
 § 4 " Believing," in Philo (1472—3) 
 
 § 5 "Believing," in the New Testament, excluding the Fourth 
 Gospel (1474—7) 
 
 § 6 Antecedent probability of a restatement of the doctrine of 
 "believing" (1478—9) 
 
 xi 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 § 7 " Believing," in the Fourth Gospel (1480—1) 
 
 § 8 " Through whom," or " what," do all " believe " ? (1482) 
 
 § 9 " Believing in the name " (1483—7) 
 
 § lo Our Lord's first mention of "believing" or "trusting" (1488) 
 
 § 1 1 Christ's disciples " beheved in him " (1489—90) 
 
 § 12 " Believing the Scripture " (1491—2) 
 
 § 13 " Believing," in the Dialogue with Nicodemus (1493—1500) 
 
 § 14 After the Baptist's last words (1501—2) 
 
 § 15 In Samaria (1503—7) 
 
 § 16 The nobleman's "believing" (1508—9) 
 
 § 17 " Believing" the testimony of the Father (1510—1) 
 
 § 18 After the Feeding of the Five Thousand (1512-9) 
 
 § 19 " Not believing " (1520—1) 
 
 § 20 " Believing witnesses " (1522—3) 
 
 § 21 After the Healing of the Blind Man (1524—7) 
 
 § 22 The Raising of Lazarus (1528—36) 
 
 § 23 " Believing in the light " (1537—44) 
 
 § 24 The Last Discourse (1545—9) 
 
 § 25 The Last Prayer (1550) 
 
 § 26 After the Death and Resurrection (1551—61) 
 
 CHAPTER II 
 " AUTHORITY " 
 
 § I " Authority," in the Triple Tradition of the Synoptists (1562) 
 
 § 2 " Authority," in the Apocalypse (1563—4) 
 
 § 3 Luke's view of " authority " (1565—71) 
 
 § 4 Christ's " authority," how defined by the Synoptists (1572—5) 
 
 § 5 " Authority," in the Fourth Gospel (1576—8) 
 
 § 6 " Authority " to become " children " of God (1579—80) 
 
 § 7 The " authority " of the Son to " do judgment " (1581—5) 
 
 § 8 " Authority " in connexion with " life " (1586—94) 
 
 xii 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 CHAPTER III 
 
 JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 § I The use of synonyms in this Gospel (1595 — 6) 
 
 §2 "Seeing" (1597—1611) 
 
 §3 "Hearing" (1612—20) 
 
 § 4 " Knowing " (1621—9) 
 
 § 5 "Coming" (1630—9) 
 
 § 6 " Worshipping " (1640—51) 
 
 § 7 " Going away (or, back)," and " going on a journey " (1652 — 64) 
 
 BOOK II 
 
 JOHANNINE AND SYNOPTIC DISAGREEMENTS 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 JOHANNINE DEVIATIONS FROM SYNOPTIC VOCABULARY 
 
 § I Introductory remarks (1665 — 71) 
 
 Synoptic Words comparatively seldom or never used 
 BY John (1672—96) 
 
 CHAPTER II 
 SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY 
 
 § I Introductory remarks (1697—1706) 
 
 JOHANNINE Words comparatively seldom or never used 
 BY THE Synoptists (1707—28) 
 
 Additional Note (1728 in—p) 
 
 Xlll 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 BOOK III 
 JOHANNINE AND SYNOPTIC AGREEMENTS 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 
 WORDS PECULIAR TO JOHN AND MARK 
 
 § I Antecedent probability (1729—30) 
 
 § 2 The fact (1731—2) 
 
 § 3 Parallels and Quasi-parallels (1733) 
 
 John-Mark Agreements (1734—8) 
 
 § 4 Jn xii. 9 " the common people," lit. " the great multitude " 
 (1739-40) 
 
 § 5 Inferences (1741—4); Additional Note (1744 (i)— (xi)) 
 
 CHAPTER II 
 
 WORDS PECULIAR TO JOHN AND MATTHEW 
 
 § I Parallelisms very few (1745 — 7) 
 
 § 2 " Light of the world," " my brethren " (1748—9) 
 
 John-Matthew Agreements (1750—5) 
 § 3 Inferences (1756—7) 
 
 CHAPTER III 
 WORDS PECULIAR TO JOHN AND LUKE 
 
 § I Antecedent probability (1758—9) 
 
 § 2 The fact (1760—1) 
 
 § 3 Quasi-parallels (1762—3) 
 
 John-Luke Agreements (1764 — 75) 
 § 4 " Son of Joseph " (1776—8) 
 § 5 " The Lord " meaning " Jesus " (1779—81) 
 §6 "Sons of light "(1782— 3) 
 § 7 "My friends " (1784—92) 
 
 § 8 " Standing in the midst " applied to Jesus (1793—7) 
 § 9 " Stooping (?) and looking in " (1798) 
 § lo What does Trapa/cwTrro) mean ? (1799—1804) 
 
 xiv 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 CHAPTER IV 
 
 WORDS PECULIAR TO JOHN, MARK, AND MATTHEW 
 
 § I Introductory remarks (1805 — 9) 
 
 John-Mark-Matthew Agreements (1810—16) 
 § 2 Absence of Quasi-parallels (1817) 
 
 CHAPTER V 
 WORDS PECULIAR TO JOHN, MARK, AND LUKE 
 
 § I Introductory remarks (1818 — 9) 
 
 § 2 " Latchet," " spices," " rouse up " (1820—2) 
 
 § 3 Mark, Luke, and John, on "rejection" (1823—31) 
 
 John-Mark-Luke Agreements (1832 — 4) 
 § 4 " The Holy One of God " (1835) 
 
 CHAPTER VI 
 
 WORDS MOSTLY PECULIAR TO JOHN, MATTHEW, AND LUKE 
 
 § I Verbal Agreements numerous, but parallelisms non-existent 
 (1836—8) 
 
 § 2 " Lay the head to rest " (1839—46) 
 
 § 3 John-Matthew-Luke Agreements (in English) (1847—50) 
 
 Words mostly peculiar to John, Matthew, and Luke 
 (1851-66); Additional Note (1866 (i)— (iv)) 
 
 CONCLUSION 
 § I Review of the evidence (1867—74) 
 § 2 What remains to be done (1875—7) 
 § 3 Johannine Grammar (1878—80) 
 
 APPENDIX ON PREPOSITIONS 
 § I Introductory remarks (1881—3) ; statistics (1884—5) 
 
 ADDENDA 
 
 Supplement to the Vocabularies 1885 (i)— (ii) 
 
 INDICES 
 
 See end of Part \\^ Johannine Grammar 
 XV 
 
REFERENCES AND ABBREVIATIONS 
 
 REFERENCES 
 
 (i) Black Arabic numbers^ e.g. (275), refer to subsections indicated 
 in this volume or in the preceding volumes of Diatessarica : — 
 
 1— 111=^ Clue. 
 273— bb2 = Corrections. 
 bbZ— 11^^ =Fro7n Letter to Spirit. 
 1150—1435 = Paradosis. 
 
 (ii) The Books of Scripture are referred to by the ordinary ab- 
 breviations, except where specified below. But when it is 
 said that Samuel, Isaiah, Matthew, or any other writer, wrote 
 this or that, it is to be understood as meaning the writer^ 
 whoever he may be., of the words in question^ and not as 
 meaning that the actual writer was Samuel, Isaiah, or Matthew. 
 
 (iii) The MSS. called severally Alexandrian, Sinaitic, Vatican, and Codex 
 Bezae, are denoted by A, i<, B, and D ; the Latin versions by 
 ^, b^ etc., as usual. The Syriac version of the Gospels discovered 
 by Mrs Lewis and Mrs Gibson on Mount Sinai called the 
 "Syro-Sinaitic" or "Sinaitic Syrian," is referred to as SS. It is 
 always quoted from Mr Burkitt's translation. 
 
 (iv) The text of the Greek Old Testament adopted is that of B, edited 
 by Professor Swete^ ; of the New, that of Westcott and Hort. 
 
 (v) Modern works are referred to by the name of the work, or author, 
 the vol., and the page, e.g. Levy iii. 343^, i.e. column i, page 343, 
 vol. iii. 
 
 ABBREVIATIONS 
 
 A, B, D, and N, see (iii) above. 
 Apol.= Justin Martyr's First Apology. 
 Buhl = Buhl's edition of Gesenius, Leipzig, 1899. 
 Burk. = Mr F. C. Burkitt's Evangelion Da-mepharreshe, Cambridge 
 University Press, 1904. 
 
 C. before numbers = circa, "about" {e.g. c. 10). 
 
 Chr. = Chronicles. 
 
 Chri. = /y^^ words of Christ, as distinct from narrative, see 1672"^. 
 
 Clem. Alex. 42 = Clement of Alexandria in Potter's pages. 
 
 1 Codex B, though more ancient than Codex A, is often less close to the 
 Hebrew than the latter {Clue 33). 
 
 XVI 
 
REFERENCES AND ABBREVIATIONS 
 
 Dalman, Word^= Words of Jesus, Eng. Transl. 1902; Aram. G^.= 
 Grammatik Aramdisch, 1894. 
 
 Diatess. = the Arabic Diatessaron, sometimes called Tatian's, trans- 
 lated by Rev. H. W. Hogg, B.D., in the Ante-Nicene Christian Library. 
 
 Y.Ticy. =^ Encyclopaedia Biblica. 
 
 Ephrem = Ephraemus Syrus, ed. Moesinger. 
 
 Epistle, the = the First Epistle of St John. 
 
 Esdras, the First Book of, is frequently called, in the text, Esdras. 
 
 Euseb. = the Ecclesiastical History of Eusebius. 
 
 Field = Origenis Hexaplorum quae supersunt, Oxford, 1875. 
 
 Gesen. = the edition of Gesenius now being published by the Oxford 
 University Press. 
 
 Heb. LXX = that part of the LXX of which there is an extant Hebrew 
 Original. 
 
 Hor. Yi€ti. = Horae Hebraicae, by John Lightfoot, 1658 — 74, ed. 
 Gandell, Oxf. 1859. 
 
 Iren. = the treatise of Irenaeus against Heresies. 
 
 Jer. Targ. (or Jer.) I and 11 = severally the Targum of "Jonathan Ben 
 Uzziel" and the fragments of the Jerusalem Targum on the Pentateuch. 
 Where Jer. II is missing, Jer. I is often indicated by Jer. 
 
 K.= Kings. 
 
 L.S. = Liddell and Scott's Greek Lexicon. 
 
 Narr. = //2 narrative, as distinct from {a) speech of Christ, {b) speech 
 generally (1672^). 
 
 Onk. = the Targum of Onkelos on the Pentateuch. 
 
 Origen is generally referred to in H net's edition, 1668. 
 
 Oxf Cone. = The Oxford Concordatice to the Septuagint. 
 
 Pec, affixed to Mt, Lk., etc., means peculiar to Matthew, Luke, etc. 
 
 Philo is referred to by Mangey's volume and page, e.g. Philo ii. 234, 
 or, as to the Latin treatises, by Aucher's pages (P. A.) (see 1608). 
 
 Resch = Resch's Paralleltexte (4 vols.). 
 
 S. = Samuel ; s. = "see." 
 
 Schottg. = Schottgen's Horae Hebraicae, Dresden and Leipzig, 1733. 
 
 Sir. = the work of Ben Sira, i.e. the son of Sira. It is commonly called 
 Ecclesiasticus (see 20«). The original Hebrew has been edited, in part, 
 by Cowley and Neubauer, Oxf. 1897 ; in part, by Schechter and Taylor, 
 Camb. 1899. 
 
 SS, see (iii) above. 
 
 Steph. or Steph. Thes. = Stephani Thesaurus (Didot). 
 
 Sym. = Symmachus's Version of the Old Testament. 
 
 Tromm. = Trommius' Concordance to the Septuagint. 
 
 Tryph. = the Dialogue between Justin Martyr and Trypho the Jew. 
 
 Wetst. = Wetstein's Comm. on the New Testament, Amsterdam, 1751 
 
 W.H. = Westcott and Hort's New Testament. 
 
 A. V. xvii 2 
 
REFERENCES AND ABBREVIATIONS 
 
 {a) A bracketed Arabic number, following Mk, Mt., etc., indicates the 
 number of instances in which a word occurs in Mark, Matthew, etc., 
 e.g. ayd-nr^ Mk (o), Mt. (l), Lk. (l), Jn (7). 
 
 {b) Where verses in Hebrew, Greek, and Revised Version, are 
 numbered differently, the number of R. V. is given alone. 
 
 XVlll 
 
V OF THE 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF 
 
 INTRODUCTION 
 
 § I. T/ie problem 
 
 [1436^] The first step towards helping readers of the 
 Fourth Gospel to solve the problem presented by its voca- 
 bulary and style is to make them see that a problem exists. 
 The A.V. very frequently, and the R.V. not infrequently, 
 conceal its existence. Take, for example, the Dialogue 
 between our Lord and Peter after the Resurrection, in which 
 the former tenderly implies a reproach for past professions of 
 'Move {d'yairav)!' while the latter, penitent and humiliated, 
 does not venture to say any longer that he " loves " Jesus, but 
 only that he " likes {(j^tXelv) " Him. The English " like " is too 
 inaccurate to be admitted (even with an apology) into the 
 rendering of such a passage; and there is no one word in our 
 language that can exactly give the meaning; but, since it 
 implies a humble protest on the part of the Apostle that he 
 still retains a lower kind of love for his Master, we may, for 
 want of anything better, paraphrase it as " I still love (1716/, 
 1728 m — -/)." Then the dialogue would run as follows : 
 
 [1437] Jesus. Simon, son of John, lovest thou me more 
 than these ? 
 
 Peter. Yea, Lord, thou knowest that I still love thee. 
 Jesus. Feed my lambs. 
 
 ^ [1436 d\ See References on pp. ^wx.foll. This is the fifth part of the 
 series entitled Diatessarica. The fourth part i^'- Paradosis'') terminated 
 with subsection 1435. 
 
 I 2 — 2 
 
[1438] INTRODUCTION 
 
 The Master now repeats His question on a lower level, 
 dropping the clause " more than these " : 
 
 Jesus. Simon, son of John, lovest thou me ? 
 
 Peter. Yea, Lord, thou knowest that I still love thee. 
 
 Jesus. Tend my young sheep \ 
 
 On the third occasion, Jesus comes down to a yet lower 
 level, to the standard that the humiliated disciple has himself 
 adopted : 
 
 Jesus. Simon, son of John, lovest thou me stilll 
 
 Peter. Lord, thou knowest all things, \}ciOW Jeelest (1624 <^) 
 that I love thee still. 
 
 Jesus. Feed my young sheep I 
 
 [1438] The words " lovest thou me more than these " are 
 apparently intended to mean " more than these thy companions 
 whom thou hadst in mind when thou didst say, in effect. 
 Though all should desert thee, yet will I never I" The Fourth 
 Gospel nowhere puts into Peter's mouth this contrast between 
 what he would not do, and what '' alV might do, yet the 
 Evangelist appears to imply the contrast here^ That is to 
 say, the author writes allusively, alluding to tradition that he 
 has not himself recorded. 
 
 [1439] Observe, also, the thrice repeated " Simon, son of 
 John." It appears to call attention to the very first words 
 uttered by Jesus to Peter, when " Jesus looked steadfastly at 
 him and said, Thou art [at present] Simon, son of John ; thou 
 
 1 [1437 d\ The Syro-Sinaitic version (which will be denoted hence- 
 forth by SS) has here "my ewes," and in xxi. 17 "my sheep." W.H. 
 marg. and R.V. txt. have "my sheep," both here and in xxi. 17. 
 
 2 [1437 b'\ Jn xxi. 15 — 17. A.V. makes no attempt to distinguish the 
 two Greek words ; R.V. translates both by " love " in its text, but adds in 
 margin that the Greek words are different. 
 
 3 [1438 d\ Mk xiv. 29 " Even though all shall stumble yet not I." 
 Simil. Mt. xxvi. '^2>' Lk. xxii. 33 words Peter's protest quite differently. 
 
 * [1438^] Similarly he says (Jn iii. 24) "For John [the Baptist] 
 was not yet cast into prison," alluding to the imprisonment as a well- 
 known fact though he himself nowhere mentions it. 
 
INTRODUCTION [1442] 
 
 shalt be called Cephas," i.e. a stoned From the level of that high 
 and hopeful prophecy the Lord seems here deliberately to 
 descend as though He had asked too much from His follower : 
 he was not Cephas, after all — not yet at least — only the original 
 Simon after the flesh, " Simon, son of John." Here again the 
 Evangelist is writing allusively, but with allusion to a tradition 
 recorded by himself. 
 
 [1440] Lastly, although the text is somewhat doubtful, 
 the three classes indicated by SS, the " lambs " and the "sheep" 
 that need "feeding," and the "ewes" that need "tending," 
 appear to correspond symbolically to the distinctions indicated 
 in the First Epistle of St John : " I write unto you little 
 children...! write unto you fathers...! write unto you young 
 men." The Lord might simply have said, as St Paul says to 
 the Ephesian elders, " Feed the flock," but He adopts a three- 
 fold iteration with slight variations, the impressiveness of 
 which can be more readily felt than analysed and explained. 
 
 [1441] Thus, the dialogue resolves itself into a short 
 dramatic poem with a triple refrain, apparently alluding to 
 traditions mentioned in other Gospels but not in this one. 
 Most simple yet most beautiful, artless yet in harmony with 
 the deepest laws of art, it combines a passionate affection with 
 subtle play on words and a most gentle yet powerful sug- 
 gestion of loving reproach and helpful precept. The conclusion 
 is at once pathetic and practical — that professions of love for 
 the Saviour must be tested by labour for those whom the 
 Saviour loves. 
 
 [1442] This passage illustrates the Johannine use of 
 synonymous words and the iterations and variations charac- 
 teristic of the Fourth Gospel ; but it does not illustrate the 
 Johannine use of different forms of the same word, as, for 
 example, of the word "understand {^LvcaaKO)),'. which the 
 Evangelist employs, in one and the same sentence (1627), first 
 
 1 Jn i. 42. 
 3" 
 
[1443] INTRODUCTION 
 
 as Aorist, then as Present, to mean " understand spiritually 
 and grow in understanding spiritually," but elsewhere as 
 Perfect, to mean " understand spiritually and perfectly." It 
 does not illustrate the subtle shades of meaning denoted by 
 slight variations of a clause, e.g. " believe " with a Dative, 
 meaning " believe a person," and " believe " with " into," 
 meaning " fix one's belief on a person," and again, " believe 
 into the name of a person " — which will be discussed in the 
 first chapter of this work. Lastly, it does not illustrate one 
 of the author's most striking characteristics, his frequent 
 obscurity or ambiguity. 
 
 [1443] A mere glance at the R.V. marginal notes on the 
 Gospels will shew the reader that, in the Synoptists, the notes 
 mostly suggest alternative readings^ but in the Fourth Gospel 
 they suggest alternative renderings. The former imply cor- 
 ruption in editors or scribes ; the latter imply obscurity in the 
 author, of which the following is an instance : 
 
 John i. 1—5 (R.V.) 
 
 Text Margin 
 
 "All things were made by "Allthings were made //^w?/^/^ 
 
 him ; and without him was not him ; and without him was not 
 
 anything made that hath been anything made. That which hath 
 
 made. In him was life.... And been made was life in him .... And 
 
 the light shineth in the darkness ; the light shineth in the darkness ; 
 
 and the darkness apprehended it and the darkness overcame it 
 
 not." not." 
 
 " Oratio imago animi " : the specimens given above should 
 suffice to shew that, in this case, the "oratio" is of a very 
 extraordinary character ; that, if we can get back from the 
 "imago" to the "animus," we shall discover a very extra- 
 ordinary mind ; and that the attempt to get back involves a 
 laborious as well as fascinating problem. 
 
INTRODUCTION [1445] 
 
 § 2. How to deal with the problem 
 
 [1444] Many details of Johannine style may be explained 
 by merely collecting parallel instances, as, for example, the 
 author's use of ambiguous verbal forms (2236) capable of 
 being rendered indicatively, imperatively, or interrogatively 
 ("Believe in God," "Ye believe in God," "Believe ye in God?"), 
 of " and " to mean " and [yet] " (2136) etc. This statement 
 applies to most things in his Gospel that proceed from the 
 author himself, that is to say, from the author uninfluenced 
 by other authors. So far, a Johannine Grammar and a 
 Johannine Vocabulary would help us to solve most of our 
 difficulties : and it is hoped that the reader may find such 
 help further on in the Chapter of Synonyms, the Grammar, 
 and the various passages indicated in the Textual Index. But 
 the case is altered when we come to ambiguities, symbolisms, 
 and even literal statements that have the appearance of being 
 allusive. Take, for example, the phrase quoted above from 
 the R.V. text as " The darkness apprehended it not," but from 
 the margin as '' The darkness overcame it not." How will 
 our Johannine Vocabulary or our Johannine Grammar help 
 us here .? 
 
 [1445] In the following way. In the first place, help 
 may be derived from the Alphabetical Index referring to 
 "Ambiguities (verbal)" at the end of the second part of this 
 work. This will refer the reader to other instances where 
 ambiguity arises from the twofold meaning of a word, e.g. 
 where Jesus Himself is described as using language that was 
 ambiguous or obscure to His disciples at the time, as when 
 He spoke about " this temple," and about Lazarus as having 
 " fallen asleep," and said to them, '* A little time and ye behold 
 me not." In the next place, the Textual Index (on Jn i. 5), 
 or the alphabetical Verbal Index, will refer the reader to a 
 footnote on KaTaXafx^dvw (1735 e — h) which occurs in the 
 Vocabulary under the heading of words common to Mark and 
 
 5 
 
[1446] INTRODUCTION 
 
 John. There it is shewn that the word generally means 
 " catch," " take possession of," " take as a prize," and that it is 
 used by St Paul in a play on words, by Philo in the sense of 
 "apprehending" God, and by John himself in connexion with 
 "a darkness" that "catches" people by surprise. The con- 
 clusion suggested is that the primary meaning is " apprehended^' 
 but that there is also a secondary meaning, " take captive!' 
 
 [1446] If John is an allusive writer there is an ante- 
 cedent probability that he would allude to the narratives of 
 the Evangelists that preceded him. Indeed it would not have 
 been surprising if he had quoted from them. There are, in 
 fact, a few passages, more particularly those bearing on the 
 Baptism, the Feeding of the Five Thousand, the Riding into 
 Jerusalem, and the Passion, where John, whether quoting 
 or not, does at all events exhibit a slight verbal agreement 
 with the Synoptists, more especially with Mark. Manifestly, 
 the first step to be taken by anyone wishing to study the 
 relation of the Fourth Gospel to the Three, would be to set 
 down all these passages of fourfold tradition, and their con- 
 texts, in parallel columns, and to annotate the Johannine 
 disagreements and agreements with each of the earlier writers. 
 A work of this kind, however, would be a work by itself, far 
 too bulky to form a chapter in the present volume^: but some 
 of the results of this work will be found in the foot-notes 
 appended to the Vocabularies given below. 
 
 [1447] At this point the reader must be careful to 
 distinguish the Triple Tradition (318) in which Mark, 
 Matthew, and Luke agree, from other Traditions — Single or 
 Double — embodied in one or more of the Synoptic Gospels. 
 There is, for example, Matthew's story of Christ's birth and 
 infancy ; and there is Luke's story of the birth of John the 
 
 1 Under the tide of The Four/old Gospel, I hope soon to publish 
 such a treatise. It was completed some time ago, but its publication 
 was deferred so that it might be revised with the aid of the present 
 work. 
 
INTRODUCTION [1449] 
 
 Baptist, followed by an account of the birth, childhood, and 
 early youth of Jesus. These two may be called Single 
 Traditions, of an introductory character, in which Matthew 
 and Luke contain hardly any points of agreement. Other 
 Single Traditions occur at intervals in Matthew and Luke, 
 as, for example, Matthew's story of Peter walking on the 
 waters and the parables peculiar to Matthew, and Luke's story 
 of " the woman that was a sinner," and the parables peculiar 
 to Luke\ 
 
 [1448] As to Double Traditions, there is one, com- 
 paratively short, peculiar to Mark and Matthew, describing 
 the feeding of the four thousand, the walking of Christ 
 on the waters, related also by John, and the healing of 
 the Syrophoenician's child. There is another, far ampler^, 
 peculiar to Matthew and Luke, containing the Lord's Prayer, 
 many passages from the Sermon on the Mount, and other 
 doctrinal matters, besides the Temptation, the healing of 
 the centurion's son, and the message of the Baptist to Christ, 
 " Art thou he that should come ? " with its sequel. 
 
 [1449] The bearing of these remarks will be better appre- 
 ciated when the reader examines particular words in the 
 Vocabularies given later on. He will find for example that 
 Matthew, Luke, and John agree in using two words, " murmur " 
 and " hallow " (or " sanctify "), never used by Mark. But the 
 former does not occur in any important parallel passage 
 of the Double Tradition, whereas the latter occurs there, 
 as part of the parallel versions of the Lord's Prayer, in the 
 words " Hallowed be thy name." The latter (" hallow ") is 
 likely to be far more important than the former (" murmur") 
 for the purpose of ascertaining whether the Fourth Gospel is 
 written allusively to the Three. For there is far more reason 
 
 ^ The Single Traditions peculiar to Mark are few and comparatively 
 unimportant. 
 
 2 This, owing to its relative importance (318 (ii)), is regularly called 
 "The Double Tradition" for brevity. 
 
[1450] INTRODUCTION 
 
 to suppose that John would write with a desire to illustrate 
 this doubly supported tradition about " sanctifying " or " hallow- 
 ing" than that he would be influenced by the non-parallel 
 uses of the word " murmur " in Matthew and Luke^ For this 
 reason, in the Vocabulary common to Matthew, Luke, and 
 John, all words found in parallel passages of the Double 
 Tradition are indicated by a special mark. 
 
 §3. A specimen of allusiveness, ^'hating ones own life'' 
 
 [1450] Sometimes special circumstances may indicate a 
 probability of Johannine allusiveness, even where a word or 
 phrase is mentioned by only one of the Synoptists. This is 
 certainly true {Paradosis, p. ix. preface) in many instances 
 of similarity between Mark and John : but an instance will 
 here be given bearing on Luke and John. Luke records 
 a saying of our Lord that no one can become Hiis disciple 
 unless he hates his own life. This is in the Double Tradition 
 of Matthew and Luke : but the former omits the clause. 
 Matthew also has in the context " whosoever loveth father 
 more than me,' where the parallel Luke says that a man must 
 ''hate'' his father^. These facts suggest that, as we might 
 have anticipated, the tradition about '' hating " one's " life " 
 caused difficulty, and that Luke, though later than Matthew, 
 has here retained the earlier text, which Matthew has 
 paraphrased. John has '' hateth his own life',' but with a 
 qualification that makes the meaning clearer : — " Whosoever 
 hateth his own life in this world^!' It must not, of course, 
 be assumed, on the strength of this single passage, that John 
 
 1 [1449 «] The word yoyyv^ta "murmur," used four times in Jn, 
 occurs once in Mt, viz. xx. 11, of labourers, in a parable, and once in 
 Lk., viz. V. 30, of "the Pharisees and their scribes." It happens that 
 Mk never uses it. Consequently it appears in the " Words common to 
 John, Matthew, and Luke." But there is not the slightest reason to 
 suppose that Jn alludes to either of the passages in Mt.-Lk. 
 
 2 Mt. X. 37, Lk. xiv. 26. ^ Jn xii. 25. 
 
 8 
 
INTRODUCTION [1452] 
 
 is alluding to Luke's Gospel'^ ; for he may have known the 
 saying from other sources. But it is almost certain that 
 John is alluding to the saying contained in Lukes Gospel^ with 
 an intention of explaining it, not by altering the Lord's hard 
 word "hate" (as Matthew appears to have done) but by 
 adding something in the context to justify the "hating." 
 
 §4. Another specimen, ^'reclining the head'' 
 
 [1451] In the Greek Vocabulary of words common to 
 Matthew, Luke, and John will be found (1858) KXivw with 
 a footnote calling attention to the phrase kXlvco fC€(f)aXijv 
 "recline the head." This might escape the notice of a reader 
 unacquainted with Greek^: but it is of great interest as 
 pointing to the conclusion that John knew the Double 
 Tradition of Matthew and Luke, and occasionally alluded 
 to it. This was made fairly probable by the apparent 
 allusion ("hating one's own life") mentioned in the last 
 section. If a second instance can be produced, the two will 
 be mutually strengthened. 
 
 [1452] The only instance of " recline the head " in 
 Matthew is in the well-known saying of our Lord (Mt. 
 viii. 20) " Foxes have holes and birds of the air have nests : 
 but the Son of man hath not where to recline his head," 
 where no one denies that the meaning is "recline the head 
 in sleep." The only instance in Luke (ix. 58) is in a parallel 
 tradition agreeing with this passage of Matthew not only in 
 meaning but in word, verbatim, and the meaning is equally 
 indisputable there, " recline his head." 
 
 1 Probably he is alluding to it ; but the probability cannot be 
 demonstrated without a comparison of a great number of passages in 
 the Gospels. 
 
 2 Such a reader would, however, find references to the explanation of 
 the phrase if he turned to the Textual Index, and also in the Verbal 
 Index, under "head": the latter would refer him to the footnote on 
 kXiVq) K€(fia\r]v as well as to this section. 
 
[1453] INTRODUCTION 
 
 [1453] The only instance of " recline the head " in John 
 is in the description of our Lord's death as follows (xix. 30) 
 "When, therefore Jesus had received the vinegar he said, 
 It is finished, and (lit.) having reclined his head he de- 
 livered up his spirit!' The parallel Mark and Luke have 
 simply " he expired {e^eirvevaevy Matthew has " He let go 
 (or, sent away) (d(j>rjKev) his spirit." Taking the conservative 
 and orthodox view that these three accounts of the Synoptists 
 were accepted as authoritative by Christians several years 
 before the end of the first century, we assume that the Fourth 
 Evangelist knew these expressions, and preferred to describe 
 the act otherwise. As regards the last part of his version 
 (" he delivered up his spirit ") an obvious reason for his 
 preference suggests itself. The Johannine phrase brings out, 
 more clearly than those of the Synoptists, the notion of 
 martyrdom or self-sacrifice. But what as to the " reclining " 
 of '' the head " ? Some may at first assume (as perhaps R. V. 
 " bowed his head ") that the physical act of bending the head 
 (" inclining,'' not " reclining ") is mentioned as typical of 
 resignation or worship (1462 a). Their second thought may 
 be that resignation and worship are not so prominent in the 
 Johannine conception of Christ as the higher feeling of absolute 
 and unalterable filial devotion. 
 
 [1454] In fact, however, neither that first assumption about 
 " inclining " nor that second thought about antecedent prob- 
 ability ought to have come so soon into our minds. The 
 first thought should have been, What does kXlvo) Ke(f)aXr}v 
 mean elsewhere in Greek literature and more particularly 
 in any Greek literature likely to be studied by John ? Here 
 a surprise awaits us. For Stephen's Thesaurus gives no 
 instance of the phrase, under either of the two Greek words. 
 The phrase is also absent from the Concordance to the LXX, 
 though each of the two words, singly, is extremely common. 
 There is indeed abundant mention of " bowing " in the Bible, 
 but the LXX and other translators never use this phrase for it. 
 
 10 
 
INTRODUCTION [1456] 
 
 One reason appears for its non-use when we find Luke 
 describing certain women as "bending (k\lv(o) their /aces" 
 to the ground ; for this suggests that " face " would be used 
 in mentioning the '^ bending forward " or " bowing," whereas 
 " head " would be used in " bending backward'' or " reclining." 
 " Recline," indeed, is the most natural meaning, because the 
 verb is used so frequently in Greek for " reclining on a couch, 
 or bed," the active, KXivw, being sometimes used to mean 
 " cause to lie down V' and the noun, kXlvt], being frequently used 
 in N.T., as well as elsewhere, for " couch." 
 
 [1455] From the grammatical and literary point of view, 
 then — which is also the scientific point of view — the phrase 
 should mean "recline the head'' in sleep, and there is not a 
 particle of literary evidence for any other conclusion. But 
 it may be urged that " from a common sense point of view " 
 this meaning is out of the question, because "reclining the 
 head in sleep " cannot possibly be intended by John, and 
 " bowing the head in meek submission " is absolutely re- 
 quired. 
 
 [1456] This may be " common sense," but it is certainly 
 not in accordance with the Johannine " sense " of what is fit 
 and seemly for the Messiah. For where, in the whole of the 
 Fourth Gospel, shall we find Him doing anything in " meek 
 submission"? He i?> not " meek V'. not at least in the usual 
 sense of the term. Nor does He ever " submit " to the 
 Father's will. It is His "food^" to do it. The first words 
 of the Evangelist's Prologue tell us that the Logos was " with 
 God," and its last words identify the Logos with " the Only- 
 begotten," who is 'Hn the bosom of the Father'' Almost every 
 
 ^ Eurip. Ah. 268 ixedere jxedeTe fi rjdr}, KXivare /i', " /^/ me lie down^"* 
 Orest. ii.'j kXivov /i' es evvrjv, "lay me down on the bed." 
 
 2 [1456 d\ Where Mt. xxi. 5 quotes Zech. ix. 9 "meek and riding upon 
 an ass," Jn xii. 15, quoting the same prophecy, omits "meek." 
 
 ^ Jn iv. 34. 
 
 II 
 
[1457] INTRODUCTION 
 
 subsequent page contains some doctrine suggesting that the 
 home of the Son is the home, or immediate presence, of the 
 Father ; that He came from this home to do the Father's 
 will; that He is "going to the Father" because the work 
 is on the point of completion ; and that He was from the 
 beginning, and is, " one with the Father." What more 
 natural, then, not indeed for a common-place writer, but for 
 such a one as we are considering, that he should connect the cry 
 " It is finished " with the statement that the Son, in finishing 
 the Father's work, found at last that perfect rest which He 
 could never find on earth ? Other martyrs, such as Stephen, 
 might be described as " falling asleep," but this would have 
 been inappropriate for the Johannine character of the Son 
 of God, the Strength of Israel, who can " neither slumber nor 
 sleep," but who might well be described as laying His head 
 to rest on the bosom of the Father. 
 
 [1457] Chrysostom's interpretation, though it does not 
 expressly say that the phrase means " rest," does clearly 
 distinguish it from bowing the head in token of submission ; 
 for he mentions it as an indication that our Lord acted " with 
 authority!' Moreover he contrasts the action with that of 
 ordinary men who, as he says, " recline the head " after 
 breathing their last, whereas Christ did it before^ : and surely 
 
 1 [1457 a] Chrysost. ad loc. Aa^cov ovv (f)rjai, TeriXeaTai. El8es drapdxois 
 Koi fier i^ova-'ias Travra tt pdrrovra ; Kal to i^rjs Se tovto 8r]\ol.. 'ETreifij) yap 
 Trdvra aTrrjpTicrdr], Kkivas r^v KecfiaXrjv (ovSe yap avrr] irpoa-r}\o)To), to rrvevfia 
 d(f)r]K€, TOVT€(TTiv, dne-^v^f. KatVoi ov p.€Td to kXIvul ttjv KC(f)aXr}v to eKTrvevaai • 
 ivTavda de TovvavTiov. Ovde yap eTreidrj e^eTrvevaev, ckXivc ttjv <ecf)a\^Vj 
 OTTcp e^' Tjpcov yiveTai' dX^' eVeiSi) €K.\ive ttjv K€(f)a\r]v, t6t€ e^eTTvevae. 
 Ai' wv TrdvTcov edrjXaxrev 6 evayyeXLCTTTjS oTi tov ttovtos Kvpios avTos rjv. 
 
 [1457^] It may, however, be urged against Chrysostom that the 
 position of a man lying, or sitting up, in bed, is quite different from that 
 of one crucified, and that, in the latter case, the head must be inclined 
 forward in death. I have seen one modern French realistic picture 
 of the Crucifixion representing the head so bent down that the face is 
 hardly visible. But (i) that attitude, as far as I know, is quite exceptional 
 
 12 
 
INTRODUCTION [1459] 
 
 it must be admitted that the usual course with a dying man 
 (1462 a — c) would be that his head would bend backward or 
 sideward^ not forward m the act of"' bowing" 
 
 [1458] Possibly it may be objected that the universally 
 admitted usage of Matthew, and of Luke, and the apparent 
 interpretation of Chrysostom, do not constitute sufficient 
 evidence of the use of kXIvco K6^a\7]p in the sense " lay one's 
 head to rest" to establish the conclusion that John used it 
 thus. But the reply is that the evidence, so far as it goes, tends 
 indisputably to that conclusion, and that tkere is no evidence 
 at all derivable from Greek literature to justify the supposition 
 that he tised it in any other sense^. The verdict " insufficient 
 evidence" on the one side is, therefore, met by the verdict 
 " no evidence at all " on the other. The right course would 
 seem to be, either to mark the passage as corrupt and leave it 
 untranslated, or to translate it in accordance with such evidence 
 as at present exists. 
 
 § 5. Inferences 
 
 [1459] From the facts above stated it follows that, 
 whereas the grammar of the Fourth Gospel may be in large 
 measure studied by itself, the vocabulary of that Gospel — 
 though often capable of being illustrated and elucidated from 
 
 in the pictures of the Crucifixion ; (2) it seems possible that the head — 
 being, as Chrysostom says, "not nailed to [the cross]" — would have 
 freedom to droop backwards, or at all events sidewards, under the 
 relaxing touch of death, in an attitude of rest as distinct from an attitude 
 of submission : and that is all that is needed to satisfy the linguistic 
 requirements, namely that kXlvco means "bend in rest," not "bend in 
 resignation." 
 
 ^ [1458 rt:] The only basis for the hypothesis that John may have used 
 kX/i/o) K€cf)a\r]v to mean "bow the head (in resignation)" is that which may 
 be obtained from translations of the Greek. It is very natural that 
 translators should take the phrase to mean " bow." Such a view would 
 harmonize with the spirit of Roman imperialism. It might also seem to 
 some to suit the Synoptic character of Christ. But it certainly does not 
 harmonize with the Johannine character. 
 
 13 
 
[1460] INTRODUCTION 
 
 Johannine sources alone — will sometimes not be fully under- 
 stood without reference to the vocabulary of the Synoptists. 
 Hence we shall proceed to study John's use of words from 
 two points of view, first the Johannine, then the Synoptic. 
 
 [1460] We shall begin with one clue-word, so to speak, 
 " believe " — which pervades the whole of the Fourth Gospel 
 in such a way that to follow the Evangelist's use of it is to 
 trace, in brief, the development of his doctrine as well as the 
 methods of his style. From a summary of passages about 
 " believing " we shall try to gain a general view of the writer's 
 use of words — his repetitions of the same word in the same 
 phrase, his repetitions of the same word in a slightly different 
 form of the phrase, his repetitions of the same (or nearly the 
 same) phrase with a slightly different form of the word. 
 From "believe" we shall pass to other words, and especially 
 to those that are synonymous, treating them in the same way 
 and always keeping in view the author's general intention 
 in the use of the word as well as the meaning of the particular 
 passage under discussion. 
 
 [1461] In the next place we shall compare the vocabulary 
 of the Fourth Gospel with those of the Triple, Double, and 
 Single, Traditions of the Synoptists. As regards the Triple 
 Tradition, this will be done negatively, as well as positively. 
 That is to say, we shall shew what words John does 7tot use 
 though they are frequent in the Synoptists, as well as what 
 he does use although the Synoptists rarely or never use them. 
 The statistics of these uses must of course be expressed by 
 bare numbers : but the footnotes to many of these numbers 
 will quote passages of importance containing the words, and 
 will adduce facts bearing upon their interpretation. Some of 
 these footnotes will be intended to suggest research rather 
 than demonstrate conclusion. 
 
 [1462] For example, under the head of " Remission of 
 sins," connected by Mark and Luke with John the Baptist, 
 it will be shewn (1690 a — A) that Matthew omits it there ; 
 
 H 
 
INTRODUCTION [1462] 
 
 that he also substitutes " debts " for " sins " (the same Hebrew 
 word having either meaning) in his version of the Lord's Prayer; 
 and that the Greek word Aphesis^ or Remission, was the word 
 regularly applied to the Remission of Debts in the Sabbatical 
 Year — contended for by Jeremiah and Nehemiah, but recently 
 abrogated (so it is said) by Hillel the venerated head of the 
 Pharisees. In its bearing on the Fourth Gospel this detail 
 is not of great importance (except as explaining why the 
 author may have avoided the term, deeming it to be obscure 
 or misunderstood). But it might have important bearings on 
 the history of the origin of the Church, and possibly — for us 
 now — upon its prospective development \ 
 
 ^ [1462 d\ As regards Jn xix. 30 (R.V.) " bowed his head," it should 
 be noted that "bow" and "head" together, in the English O.T. Con- 
 cordance, occur six times, and always in connexion with worship 
 expressed or implied : " bow down " and " head " occur four times 
 similarly, and once apparently in a bad sense (Is. Iviii. 5) "to bow down 
 his head as a bulrush." 
 
 [1462 b'\ I have not found kX/vo) K€(f)a\rjv in the very copious Indices 
 to Aristotle and Lucian. The suggestion that the phrase simply meant 
 "the head drooped in death " appears to me to ignore two considerations. 
 (i) If a Greek author meant this, he would have used — as I/iad xi'ii. 543 
 iKkivOrj d' irepaxTe Kaprj — the passive, and all the more certainly because 
 the passive may mean {Iliad vii. 254 iKklvBr]) "bent his body," so that 
 the active is only used in very few instances to mean " lay on a couch," 
 "lay to rest," "lean anything" etc. (2) Even if kXiVo) Ke(f)aXr]v could 
 mean " I droop my head," such a phrase — appropriate enough in Homer 
 or Virgil, Hippocrates or Galen, to describe the death of a warrior or 
 a patient — could not have been used by the author of the Fourth Gospel 
 to describe the outward sign of the spiritual departure of the Son of 
 God to the bosom of the Father. 
 
 [1462 c] In 1457 <z, the extract from Chrys., after eKirvevo-at, prob. om. 
 by error (Cramer) yiverai, dWa fiera to eKTrvevaai to KXivai. We may 
 fairly presume that Chrys. — when saying (in effect) " the act occurred with 
 Him, before death; with us, it occurs after death" — repeats icXtrat for 
 brevity, to denote the "«<:/," though, strictly speaking, the act of Christ 
 was KXti/at, the act with us is K\i6r\vai (not indeed being an " act " at all,, 
 but a passive relaxing of the muscles). 
 
 A. V. 15 
 
BOOK I 
 JOHANNINE " KEY-WORDS " 
 
 17 3—2 
 
CHAPTER I 
 
 " BELIEVING " 
 
 § I. ^'Believing" or, "trusting,'' a key -word in the 
 Fourth Gospel 
 
 [1463] The Johannine use of the word ''believe" deserves 
 a separate consideration for two reasons. In the first place, 
 in a work dealing with Johannine grammar and vocabulary, 
 the word is of special importance because the Evangelist uses 
 it in various phrases and with various constructions in such a 
 way as to throw light upon his general style and method of 
 composition. In the next place, he exhibits "believing" in 
 so many different phases, attributes it (in different phases) to 
 so many persons and classes, assigns so many sayings about 
 it to our Lord Himself, and makes so many evangelistic 
 comments about it in his own person, that a summary of the 
 Johannine dicta about "believing," amounting almost to a 
 summary of the Gospel itself, may give a clue to its scheme 
 and motive. 
 
 [1464] Look at the Gospel as a drama, and you will find 
 that few of the leading characters are not placed at some 
 time in such circumstances as to shew us — or make us ask — 
 what, or whom, and how, and why, they " believed," or why, 
 and what, and whom, they were exhorted to believe. The 
 Baptist himself, though he soon disappears from the scene, is 
 connected with the very first mention of the word because his 
 
 • 19 
 
[1465]. "BELIEVING 
 
 rudimentary work was to produce "belieP." After that, 
 Nathanael is gently reproved — apparently for believing too 
 easily^. Then came the " glory " of Christ at Cana, and " his 
 disciples believed in him^" Many at Jerusalem "believe," or 
 " trust," because of His signs ; but — a strange play upon the 
 word — Christ " did not trust himself to them"*." Nicodemus 
 and the Samaritan woman are instructed in believing or 
 exhorted to believed The nobleman, pleading for his sick 
 child, is told that people in his condition " will not believe " 
 without " signs and wonders." But he does believe — " himself 
 and his whole house^" Then Peter makes his confession, 
 " We completely believe and know." He says " we," and 
 speaks in the name of " the Twelve." Yet Christ has said to 
 the disciples "there are some of you that believe not"; and 
 now He declares that one of the Twelve " is a devil'." After 
 this, " many " of the multitude, " many " of " the Jews," the 
 man born blind, Martha, " many even of the rulers " (after a 
 fashion) — all, in turn, believe or avow beliefs In the Last 
 Discourse, Philip and the disciples are stimulated to believe ; 
 and they confidently protest their belief just before their 
 Master warns them that they will abandon Him^ It is also 
 said that the world is to be judged because men "do not 
 believe^*'." Finally, in His Last Prayer, the Lord declares 
 that the disciples " have believed " and prays that the world 
 " may believe"." 
 
 [1465] Speaking in his own person, and describing the 
 Passion, the Evangelist breaks off from his narrative to 
 protest that he " sayeth true" "that ye also may believe^V 
 After the Resurrection there is a curious repetition of tra- 
 ditions about " seeing " and " believing." It is said that " the 
 
 1 i. 7. 
 
 2 i. 50. 3 ii 11;.^ 4 ii^ 23—4. ^ iii. 12, iv. 21. 
 
 « iv. 48, 53. ' vi. 64—70. 8 vii. 31, viii. 30, ix. 38, xi. 27, xii. 42. 
 » xiv. I— 12, xvi. 30—1. 1^ xvi. 9. " xvii. 8, 20 — i. 
 
 12 
 
 xix. 35. 
 
 20 
 
"BELIEVING" [1467] 
 
 other disciple" (but not Peter his companion) ''saw and 
 
 believed!' Thomas says "If I see not I will not believe'' \ 
 
 and Christ's last use of the word is in a solemn combination 
 of blessing and warning, " Blessed are they that have not seen 
 and believed^!' Then immediately follows the Evangelist's 
 statement, "These things have been written that ye may 
 believe... and that, believing, ye may have life in his name'*": 
 and this is the Evangelist's last dictum about " believing." 
 
 [1466] Almost the only leading characters not connected 
 with the word " believe " are Mary the sister of Lazarus and 
 Mary Magdalene. These are not said to believe in anyone or 
 in anything nor do they ever use the word. But both "weep^'* 
 in the Lord's presence. And the weeping of one precedes the 
 weeping of Jesus and the Raising of Lazarus ; the weeping of 
 the other precedes the first manifestation of the Risen Saviour 
 Himself Do not all these widely differing facts converge to 
 the conclusion that the Evangelist recognises many kinds and 
 shades of believing and desires to subordinate it, even at its 
 highest, to some still higher process of receiving spiritual 
 truth ? 
 
 § 2. Why John prefers " believe " to " belief" 
 
 [1467] The Synoptic Vocabulary shews that John never 
 uses the noun " faith," " belief," or " trust," but that he com- 
 pensates for this by an abundant use of the verb " have faith," 
 "believe," or "trust." His reason for doing this may be 
 illustrated by two passages in Mark. One of these gives, as 
 part of Christ's first public utterance, the words " Believe in the 
 Gospel" not repeated in any shape by the parallel Matthew or 
 Luke and unique in N.T.^ Another is (lit.) " Have [thel 
 faith of God" where the context refers to the uprooting of 
 
 1 XX. 8, 25, 29. 2 XX. 31. 3 xi. 33, XX. II. 
 
 4 Mki. 15, SS ''his {i.e. God's) Gospel"; b and/om. "in," and so 
 does Origen (Huet ii. 150). 
 
 21 
 
[1468] "BELIEVING" 
 
 trees or mountains and teaches that everything — but possibly 
 the meaning is every spiritual thing — will be granted to faiths 
 Here again the other Synoptists deviate from Mark. Matthew 
 omits the words " of God," and says " If ye have faith": Luke, 
 in a different context, has "If ye have faith as a grain of 
 mustard seed I" 
 
 [1468] These textual divergences are very natural. The 
 influx of wonder-working faith into the Christian Church must 
 have been felt much more definitely than it could be ex- 
 pressed. Men were conscious that " faith " had led them from 
 death into life. Yet some found it difficult to explain to 
 others precisely why they had " faith." The First Epistle of 
 St Peter bids converts be ready to " give a reason " for the 
 " hope " that was in them : so, the Fourth Evangelist might 
 naturally desire to help Christians to " give a reason " when 
 they were asked to explain or describe the faith that was in 
 them : " Why, and what, or whom, or in whom, or to whom, 
 or to what, do you trust.?" This he does by substituting the 
 verb for the Synoptic noun and by adding various objects or 
 modifying phrases answering these questions. 
 
 § 3. "Believing" in the Old Testament 
 
 [1469] The Hebrew verb, "trust," or "believe," is radi- 
 cally connected with the words " support," " nourish," " foster- 
 father," "foster-mother," "nurse," "pillar (of a house)l" In 
 the Passive, it means "supported," "confirmed," "steadfast." 
 In the Causal, it means " stand firm," " trust," " believe" — but 
 " believe " in a moral sense, not a mere act of the intellect. 
 The best (or least inadequate) rendering is often "trust," 
 
 ^ Mk xi. 22 e)(eT€ nicmv deov : a and k om. ^foC, D has el e^^re ttiotiv 
 Tov Oeov, ^ a b etc. ins. et — conforming the text to Mt. or Lk. 
 
 2 Mt. xxi. 21 eav exV'^} L^- xvii. 6 ei fxere. 
 
 3 For these and the following facts relating to the Hebrew forms see 
 Gesen. $2/0//. 
 
 22 
 
BELIEVING " [1470] 
 
 because our English " trust " is connected etymologically with 
 " true," and with words suggestive of firmness and confidence. 
 The Hebrew aman, "support," is connected with our amen 
 (an utterance of " confirmation ") and with the Hebrew emeth, 
 " truth," and dmoun " master-workman," the word applied 
 in Proverbs to the Wisdom that cooperated with God in the 
 Creation\ This Hebrew "trust" differs widely from that 
 kind of belief (upon more or less of evidence) which we mean 
 in English when we say " I believe it is about half past two." 
 
 [1470] In Hebrew, one may trust (i) absolutely, (2) " to " 
 a person or thing, (3) "in" a person or thing, or (4) "that" 
 a statement is true. The third of these constructions is 
 usually employed in describing trust in God^ e.g. "And he 
 [Abraham] trusted in the Lord and he counted it to him for 
 righteousness." But the LXX— rendering Abraham's "trusting" 
 by 7rt<7T6uft), which is never followed by a preposition in classical 
 Greek^ — has " he trusted the Lord " (dat). This often-quoted 
 passage reveals the general inability of classical Greek to 
 represent Semitic traditions about ^' trust'' in God. Now and 
 then, especially with a negative, the translators of O.T. use 
 " in " to denote that Israel did not " stand fast, or trust, in 
 God^"; but, as a rule, they are content with the dative to 
 represent both of the Hebrew prepositions. As for the Greek 
 " to," " trust tol' iricTTeveiv et?, it is never thus used by 
 the LXX. 
 
 ^ Prov. viii. 30. 
 
 '-^ Gesen. 53a "the usual construction with God Gn. xv. 6." 
 
 '^ Steph. 
 
 * [1470 a] With negative in Ps. Ixxviii. 22 " because they trusted not 
 m (3) (eV) God and hoped not in (2) (cVi) his salvation,'" Jer. xii. 6 "trust 
 not in (2) them" (comp. Sir. xxxii. 21 "Trust not m (H) the way," firj 
 TTKTTeva-rjs iv obai) ', without negative in Ps. cvi. 12 (R.V.) "then believed 
 they his words," Dan. vi. 23 (Theod.) R.V. " because he had trusted in his 
 God"(Aom. eV). 
 
 [1470 <^] 'Etti never occurs with ir. in LXX except in Wisd. xii. 2 
 IT. eVi (re (i.e. God). 
 
 23 
 
[1471] "BELIEVING" 
 
 [1471] Besides this inadequacy in Greek construction 
 there is inadequacy in the Greek verb itself to represent 
 the moral meanings of the Hebrew verb in its different forms 
 and its associations with firmness and stability. When Isaiah, 
 playing on these shades of meaning, says " If ye be xvoX. firm 
 [in faith] ye shall surely not be made firm [in fact]" (i.e. "if 
 ye will not believe ye shall not be established") the LXX has, 
 for the latter clause, "ye shall surely not understand^": and 
 a similar saying in Chronicles ''Believe in Jehovah and ye 
 shall be confirmed" (lit. '' Be firm in Jehovah and ye shall be 
 made firm ") is rendered by the LXX " Trust in Jehovah 
 and ye shall be trusted" perhaps meaning " ye shall h^ proved 
 trustworthy ^" 
 
 § 4. " Believing" in Philo 
 
 [1472] Philo, being a Greek in language but a Jew in 
 faith and theological tradition, shares in the linguistic in- 
 adequacies of the LXX (which seemed to him an inspired 
 version of the Hebrew) but shews a Jewish sense that 
 Abraham's "trust" was something more than Greek "be- 
 lieving." Traces of this appear in his frequent mention, or 
 implication, of the instability of all other " trust " as compared 
 with the firmness or stability of trust in God : " It is best to 
 trust completely {ireiricrrevKevai) to God and not to the misty 
 reasonings and the unstable imaginations [of men]. Abraham, 
 at all events, trusted to God and was esteemed righteous^": 
 "He [Abraham] saw into the unfixedness and unsettledness of 
 material being when he recognised the unfaltering stability 
 that attends true being, to which [stability] he is said to 
 have completely trusted*." The praise of Abraham's faith is 
 justified, he says, because nothing is so difficult or so righteous 
 
 ^ Is. vii. 9 ovbf /xj) a-vvrjre, Sym. dtajxevelTe, Theod. Tria-revBeirjTe. 
 ^ 2 Chr. XX. 20 ev7ri(rT€v6r)o-€(r6€, comp. Sir. i. 15, xxxvi. 21. 
 ^ Philo i. 132 quoting Gen. xv. 6 as diicaios evofilaBr). 
 * [1472 rt] Philo i. 273 ".dvldpvTOV koi dararov Karelde rrfv yevecriv ore 
 rfjv irepi to ov avevboiacrTOv eyvco jSe^aiorriTa " § Xc-yerat TreTTtcrreu/cci'at." 
 
 24 
 
BELIEVING " * [1473] 
 
 as " to anchor oneself firmly and unchangeably upon true 
 BEING alone\" In the course of a long eulogy on it, he says 
 that ** the only good thing that is void of falsehood and stable 
 is the faith that is toward God " or " the faith toward true 
 BEING^." Elsewhere he calls this faith "knowledge," and 
 again connects it with stability : — not that Abraham could 
 obtain the knowledge of God's essence, he says, but he 
 obtained clearer impressions of His Being and Providence, 
 " Wherefore also he is said to have been the first to have 
 * trusted God! since he was the first to have an unaltering and 
 stable conception, how that there exists One Cause, the 
 Highest, providing for the world and all things therein. And, 
 having obtained knowledge, the most stable of the virtues, he 
 obtained at the same time all the rest^" 
 
 [1473] All these extracts bear on one passage of 
 Scripture — that which describes the faith of Abraham. But 
 they suffice to shew that, in the middle of the first century, 
 a non-Christian Jew would have great difficulty in conveying 
 to Greeks all that was meant by the Hebrew " trust " when 
 it meant "trust in God." This difficulty would be greatly 
 increased by the influx of so stupendous a revelation as the 
 Incarnation ; and we have now to see how the earliest 
 Christian writers grappled with it. 
 
 Man gey prints xi as the object of tt. : but we might read ^ Xeyerai " ireirLo-T- 
 €vic€vai" "in which respect he is said to have 'believed.'" For the perf. 
 (here and i. 132) comp. Demosth. 2 Philipp. § 6 01 Oappovvres koL 
 TTeTTia-TevKOTes avrco and (Steph.) Philostr. Epist. 40 TreiriaTevKas a-eavrff 
 KOL reddpprjKas, i.e. "trust absolutely." 
 
 ^ Philo i. 486 TO eVi p.6vcd tco ovtl jSe/Sai'o)? /cat aKKivas opfxelv. This 
 illustrates the use of eVt quoted above (1470 <^) from Wisd. xii. 2. 
 
 ^ Philo ii. 39 p,6vov ovv d-^evbes Koi ^e^aiov dyaObv rj Trpos tov 6c6v 
 TTiVrts, and rr^v Trpos to *0v itiotiv. 
 
 ^ [1472^] Philo ii. 442 koI ov rrpoTepov dvi]<€v rj rpavoTepas Xa^elv 
 (f)avTa(rLas...Trjs VTrdp^eoiS avTOv kol npovoias fj diKaiov. Aio koi TriCTTevaat 
 Xe'yerat Ta dea rrpSiTos, eVeiSi; koL TrpwTos dK\ivr] koi ^e^aiav €(r)(€v VTroXrj'^iVy 
 ays ecTTiv ev avriov to dvcoTUTOij kol Trpovoel tov T€ Kocrfxov ical rail/ eV avTO. 
 KTr]crdp.evos de eTTKTTrjfxrjv ttjv dp€Tci)v ^e^aiOTaTrjv, crvveKTOTO /cat tcls aWas 
 andaas. 
 
 25 
 
[1474] "BELIEVING" 
 
 § 5. '' Believing^ I' in the New Testament, excluding 
 the Fourth Gospel 
 
 [1474] The Epistles to the Thessalonians and the Corin- 
 thians rarely use irLo-revai except absolutely^, and never with 
 '' Christ," " in Christ " etc. : but the Epistle to the Galatians, 
 before quoting the words about Abraham's ''trust" and 
 righteousness," says " We trusted to {eU) Christ Jesus that we 
 might be made righteous {hiKaiwdcofiev) from trust in Christ 
 (e/c TTiarecof; Xpiarov) " and then quotes " Abraham trusted 
 God (dat.) and it was reckoned to him for righteousness^" 
 The Epistle to the Romans begins by quoting the text 
 "Abraham trusted God (dat.)..."; it then speaks of him as 
 " trusting on {iiri with accus.) him that maketh righteous the 
 ungodly," and then, " But {^having regard or looking'] to {eh 
 he) the promise of God he doubted not through trustlessness 
 but was filled with power by trust... but it was written... also 
 for our sakes...who trtist on {iiri with accus.) him that raised 
 Jesus our Lord from the dead^" Later on, quoting Isaiah, 
 " He that trusteth shall not make haste," the Apostle twice 
 follows a version of the LXX in an erroneous insertion " He 
 
 ^ The active alone is discussed in the following pages : Trcareveadai, 
 "to be believed" or "to be entrusted with," is not considered. 
 
 2 [1474 <2] It is always absolute in these Epistles except i Thess. 
 iv. 14 "If we trust that Jesus died and rose again," 2 Thess. ii. 11 "that 
 they should trust a lie," ii. 12 "those who have not trusted the truth," 
 I Cor. xiii. 7 "trusteth [in] all things (iravTo)." 
 
 3 [1474^] Gal. ii. 16, iii. 6. In the early portion of this chapter — for 
 the sake of indicating the differences of Greek phrase, and the different 
 shades of meaning of the Greek verb — TriaTcveiv will be rendered "trust" : 
 TT. avra, "trust him,'' tt. eV avrov (or, rarely, avra) "trust on him," tt. els 
 avTov, " trust to him." But the reader must be warned that " trust untOy 
 or into him " would be a more adequate rendering of tt. els, if only it were 
 English. It implies "looking trustfully unto" or perhaps sometimes 
 "passing mto" (1475, 1517). 
 
 * Rom. iv. 3, 5, 24. 
 
 26 
 
BELIEVING " [1475] 
 
 that trusteth on him (dat. eV auroJ)^"; but, speaking in his 
 own person he says, " How shall they call on him to (eh) 
 whom they have not trusted^?'' and he tells the Philippians* 
 that to them "it is given not only to trust to (ek) him but 
 also to suffer for him^" 
 
 [1475] In what sense does the Apostle use " to,'' or " into'* 
 with " trust," contrary to Greek usage ? Does he mean that, as 
 a convert is baptized into Christy so, by the spiritual act of 
 " trust," his pevsonsdity passes into that of Christ ? Or does he 
 mean that the convert "trustfully looks to Christ," — a thought 
 that seemed to be implied in the statement that Abraham *' [look- 
 ing-] to the promise of God... was filled with power by trust" ? 
 The latter is suggested by the Pauline noun-phrases " the trust 
 to (ek) Christ," " the love to (eh) all^" It is also favoured by the 
 Petrine expression, " To whom, for the moment [indeed] not 
 seeing, yet trusting'^ " — which implies that " trusting " means 
 " looking to Christ with the eye of trust," as also later on, 
 " that your trust and hope may be to God^" Compare the 
 Epistle to the Hebrews " looking only to (a^opSivre'i el<;) Jesus 
 the chief leader and perfecter of our faith," which resembles 
 
 ^ Rom. ix. 33, quoting Is. xxviii. i6 (KAQ have this ; it probably 
 arose from conflating "not" as "to him" {779 a)), rep. Rom. x. ii. 
 
 2 Rom. X. 14. 3 phii_ I 29. 
 
 * [1474^] The First Epistle to Timothy has i. 16 "them that are 
 destined to trust on (eirl with dat.) him to (els) eternal life." Here the 
 writer might use eVt because he was going to use els in a different sense 
 later on. But eVi with the dative is contrary to Pauline usage (except in 
 quoting). The dat. is used in 2 Tim. i, 12 ol8a w Treiria-TevKa and Tit. iii. 8 
 01 TreTTto-revKOTes deoi. 
 
 ^ [1475 rt;] Rom. vi. 3 "as many as were baptized into (els) Christ 
 Jesus were baptized znto (els) his death," i Cor. x. 2 " they all baptized 
 themselves {i^anTia-avTo) into {els) Moses," i Cor. xii. 13 "were all 
 baptized into one body," Gal. iii. 27 " for as many of you as were baptized 
 into Christ." 
 
 ® Col. ii. 5 Tr]S els Xp. Trio-rfCDf, i. 4 rr]v dyoLTrrjv [^v ex^Te] els irdvras, 
 Philem. 5 rrfv nia-Tiv tjv ex^is els (marg. npos) tov Kvpiov. 
 
 ^ I Pet. i. 8 els bv apri /xj) opiavTes Tria-Tevovres 8e.... 
 
 ^ I Pet. i. 21 TT]v rr. vpcov k. eXirida eivai els 6e6v. 
 
 27 
 
[1476] "BELIEVING" 
 
 the doctrine of Epictetus that we are to " look only to (d(j>op- 
 <wi/T€9 ek) God in all things great or small \" 
 
 [1476] In the Acts — besides occasional instances of the 
 dative — "trust on (iTrl)" occurs along with "trust to (et9)V' 
 In the former, eVt is used, not with the dative as in Isaiah 
 (5<AQ) but with the accusative. The dative would mean 
 " resting on," the accusative " coming to rest on " ; and the 
 latter might imply " becoming a convert " which is perhaps the 
 meaning in three passages. The Epistle to the Hebrews, 
 though it very frequently uses the noun "trust" (which it 
 defines as being " that which gives substantiality to the things 
 one is hoping for ") uses the verb only twice, once absolutely 
 and once with oti^ — a construction apparently very rare in 
 classical Greeks The Epistle of St James indicates that 
 Christians had begun to discuss the relation between " trust " 
 (or "belief") and "works"; and — before quoting " Abraham 
 believed God " — it twice uses the verb so as to warn its 
 readers that " believing " may be non-moral : " Thou believest 
 that God is one... the devils also believe and trembled" 
 
 1 [1475 <^] Heb. xii. 2, Epict. ii. 19. 29. 'Acpopav €ls=" look away from 
 [other things] to." Epictetus says about his ideal Hercules (iii. 24. 16), 
 " For he had heard not as mere talk [but as truth] that Zeus is the Father 
 of men : yes, he thought Him and called Him his Father, and looking only 
 towards Him (rrpos eKcivov dcf>opS)v) he regulated his every action (eTrparrev 
 a errpaTTe)." 
 
 2 [1476«] In Acts ix. 42, xi. 17, xvi. 31, tt. 67rt = "become a convert," 
 in Acts xxii. 19 "believers." In Acts x. 43 tt. els describes the means for 
 remission of sins, xiv. 23 els ov TremaTevKeicrav seems to express intense 
 trust as the preparation for a dangerous enterprise, xix. 4 is doubtful, 
 since els top 'I. (i) maybe a resumptive repetition of els ("with reference 
 to") TOP epxppevov^ or (2) may depend on wiaTevaaxriv. 
 
 3 [1476 <^] Heb. iv. 3, xi. 6. The latter, requiring a belief that God 
 "is" and that He "rewards," is like Philo's definition of Abraham's faith 
 (1472) concerning the virap^is of God and concerning the fact that He 
 7rpovoe7. 
 
 * [1476^] Steph. quotes no instance of tt. on, but comp. Epictet. 
 Fragm. 3 el ^ovKei ayaOos elvai rrpwrov Triareva-ov on kukos ei, and 
 Xen. Hiero i. 37 has TTKTrevuai foil, by las. 
 
 ^ J as. ii. 19 {bis\ 23. 
 
 28 
 
BELIEVING" [1477] 
 
 [1477] In the Synoptists we have seen above (1467) that 
 Mark is not exactly followed by Matthew or Luke in the two 
 precepts that he attributes to our Lord, " Trust in the Gospel " 
 and " Have trust in God." We must now add that the 
 Triple Tradition does not agree in a single saying of Christy 
 using this verb^. Also, as regards the noun " trust," the only 
 verbatim agreement in the Triple Tradition in the words of 
 Christ is in the saying to the woman with the issue, "Thy 
 trust hath saved thee^." 
 
 1 [1477 d\ The only triple agreement about " trusting " is in a passage 
 where the chief priests and elders express their fear that Jesus may- 
 condemn them for not "trusting" the Baptist, Mk xi. 31, Mt. xxi. 25, 
 Lk. XX. 5, " If we say from heaven, he will say, Why \then'\ did ye not trust 
 him .?" Other instances are peculiar to two Evangelists or to one : for 
 example, Mk v. 36, Lk. viii. 50 "only trust" is om. by Mt. Mk xiii. 21, 
 Mt. xxiv. 23 "trust [them] not" is om. by Lk. (the rep. in Mt. xxiv. 26 
 "trust [them] not" is om. by Mk as well as Lk.). At the end of the 
 Healing of the Centurion's servant, Mt. viii. 13 "As thou hast trusted, so 
 be it " is om. by the parall. Lk. and so is Mt. xxi. 32 " Ye did not trust 
 him... the harlots trusted him... that ye might trust him" om. in the parall. 
 Lk. vii. 29 — 30. Mt. ix. 28 "trust ye that I am able to do this.?" occurs in 
 a miracle peculiar to Mt. After the Resurrection, " trust on " occurs in 
 a tradition peculiar to Lk. xxiv. 25 " slow of heart to trust on (tt. eVi with 
 dat.) all that the prophets have spoken." The words " He that shall have 
 trusted and shall have been baptized," and " these signs shall follow them 
 that shall have trusted," are in the Mark Appendix (Mk xvi. 16 — 17). 
 
 2 [1477^] Mk V. 34, Mt. ix. 22, Lk. viii. 48. There is also an 
 agreement, though not verbatim^ in Mk iv. 40 " Have ye not yet trust V^ 
 Lk. viii. 25 has "Where is yowx trustV^ and Mt. viii. 26 "O ye of Httle 
 trust.^' In Mk x. 52 (Bartimaeus), Lk. xviii. 42, "thy trust hath saved 
 thee " the words are om. by the parall. Mt. xx. 34 {two blind men), but in 
 another healing of two blind men Mt. ix. 29 has " let it be according to 
 your trust.^^ In Mt. xv. 28 "O woman, great is thy trust^^^ the parall. 
 Mk vii. 29 has " on account of this word, go thy way." Where Mt. xxiii. 
 23 has "kindness (eXeos) and trust" the parall. Lk. xi. 42 has "the love of 
 God." But the Double Tradition agrees in Mt. viii. 10, Lk. vii. 9 " I have 
 not found so great trust... in Israel," and Mt. xvii. 20, Lk. xvii. 6 ''^ trust as 
 a grain of mustard seed." As regards Mk xi. 22 and parall., see 1467. 
 
 29 
 
[1478] "BELIEVING" 
 
 § 6. Antecedent probability of a restatement of the 
 doctrine of " believing " 
 
 [1478] Reviewing the New Testament doctrines con- 
 cerning "faith," "trust," or "behef," apart from the Fourth 
 Gospel, as they would present themselves to an Evangelist 
 writing at the end of the first century, we see that he might 
 naturally desire to supplement them. He might wish to 
 guard his readers against attaching too much importance to 
 that kind of " faith " which, in practice, produced wonderful 
 cures of disease — as St Paul cautions the Corinthians, " Though 
 I have faith so that I could move mountains, it profiteth me 
 nothing^" Again, there was a danger that some might take 
 the faith of Abraham to be little more than a belief that God 
 would give him his heart's desire, quite apart from the 
 goodness or badness of that desire^. To meet this, it would 
 be well to shew what Abraham's faith really implied ^ The 
 Epistle to the Hebrews had defined faith, and we know from 
 
 * [1478 «] I Cor. xiii. i : comp. Mt. vii. 22 " In thy name have we cast 
 out devils" (uttered by those whom the Lord rejects) and see Christ's 
 answer to the Seventy when they say (Lk. x. 17) "Even the devils 
 are subject to us in thy name." 
 
 2 [1478 d] Irenaeus parallels the faith of Abraham with that of 
 Christians thus (iv. 21. i) " illo quidem credente futuris quasi jam factis 
 propter repromissionem Dei : nobis quoque similiter per fidem speculan- 
 tibus eam quae est in Regno haereditatem propter repromissionem Dei.'' 
 But the Jews believed that Abraham left his country as a martyr and exile 
 at God's command in order to preserve the worship of the One God : and 
 the Targum taught that he had been cast into a fiery furnace by Nimrod 
 in order to make him apostatize. The trust of Abraham, then, was 
 a trust that the kingdom of God established in his heart would be 
 established, through his descendants, in all the world — a very different 
 thing from the mere belief that he would have a son in his old age from 
 his wife Sarah. 
 
 3 Jn viii. 56 "Abraham rejoiced exceedingly in order that (2097) he 
 might see my day ; and he saw it and was glad." 
 
 30 
 
BELIEVING " [1479] 
 
 Clement of Alexandria^ that some very early Christians 
 added a second definition. Probably there were many defini- 
 tions. St Paul had spoken much about the worthlessness of 
 "works of the law," and the value of "faith," even before works 2. 
 St James had said that " faith without works " was " dead^" 
 Both had argued truly ; but they appeared to differ. The 
 Fourth Evangelist might feel that, without arguing, a Gospel 
 might set forth Christ's doctrine of trust in a Father in such a 
 way as to reconcile these apparently conflicting statements. 
 
 [1479] Lastly, the writer we have in view would probably 
 have some regard to the difficulties of Greek believers 
 including the educated classes, and to their notions about 
 " faith " or " belief" " Whatever we believe," said Aristotle, 
 "comes to us through syllogism or induction^": how could this 
 be reconciled with any Christian doctrine of believing } Un- 
 fortunately we have no Celsus in the first century to represent 
 Greek scepticism. But St Paul's words, " the Jews desire 
 signs, and the Greeks seek after wisdom V' and the absence 
 or insignificance of " faith " and " believing" in the teaching of 
 Epictetus^, and the statement of Clement of Alexandria'' that 
 
 1 [1478 c] Clem. Alex. 432 calls it " voluntary preconception, an assent 
 of reverence for God," 7rp6Xr)\f/ii ckoixtlos, Beoac^das crvyKardBeais. Then 
 he adds the definition of Heb. xi. i. Then he says (433) "But others 
 have explained {aTredcoKav) faith as a uniting assent to a!n unseen object 
 {d(f)avovs irpdyfjiaTos ivcoTiKrjv avyKaTddeo-iv)." He derives faith from (rrda-is 
 {? as a contraction of eTrio-rao-Ls) calling it (629) " a settlement of our 
 soul concerning true BEING (tt^v irepl to ov ardcnv rrjs yj/vxrjs T]fia)v)." 
 By a " uniting " assent, he means " that which makes a man at one " with 
 the Word, (635) "To trust to (els) Him and through Him {81 avrov) is to 
 become — being undistractedly made one (direpiairdcrTais hovfievov) in 
 Him — a single being (p,ova8LK6v)." See Hort and Mayor on Clem. 899. 
 
 2 Rom. iii. 20 — 28, iv. 2 — 6, ix. 11, 32, xi. 6. ^ Jas. ii. 17. 
 
 * Aristot. Ana/. Prior, ii. 25 (23). ^ i Cor. i. 22. 
 
 ® [1479 <«] Epictetus has {Fragm. § 3) "If you wish to become good, 
 first believe that you are bad," but iriarevo) does not appear in the Index 
 of Schweighauser exc. as n. ri rivi in a corrupt passage (i. 26. 14). 
 
 ^ [1479^] Clem. Alex. 432 ttLcttls de, rjv 8ia^dk\ova-iv, kcvtjv kol ^dp^apov 
 vofii^ovres "EXKrjves. 
 
 A. V. ^ 31 
 
[1480] "BELIEVING 
 
 the Greeks mocked at faith — all point to the conclusion 
 that what Celsus said in later days against the Christian 
 exhortation to "believe^" would be said by Greek philo- 
 sophers in the first century as soon as they came into contact 
 with the preachings of the Gospel. For the sake of the Greeks, 
 then, it was needful to point out the immense difference 
 between ''believing that'' a conclusion is logically deduced 
 from premises, or ''that'' a fact is proved by evidence, and 
 that other kind of belief, or trust, in a Person, which, as the 
 Christians asserted, made men become the children of God. 
 
 § 7. " Believing^' in the Fourth Gospel 
 
 [1480] It remains to consider the Johannine traditions 
 about " believing," or " trusting." The best way of doing this 
 will be to note the different expressions, ("trust {absol.)" 
 "trust {dat.y "trust to (ek)," "trust to (et?) the name of',' 
 " trust that',') in the order in which the Evangelist introduces 
 them, and to trace their principal recurrences, so as to give an 
 outline of his doctrine as expressed in Christ's words and in 
 Evangelistic comments. Here it may be observed that " trust 
 in " and " trust on " are not mentioned. The former, since it 
 occurs only once in N.T.^ might well not be used by John : 
 and indeed " abide in," rather than " believe in," represents his 
 doctrine about the highest and ultimate relation of the 
 believer to God. " Trust on',' also, would be inconsistent with 
 his view, which is, that man does not " rest on " Jehovah as on 
 
 1 [1479^] Orig. Cels. i. 9 "But Celsus says that certain people 
 discarding discussion (/XT/Se ^ovXofievovs 8i86vai ^ Xafi^dveiv \6yov) con- 
 cerning the objects of their faith {irepl &i/ Triarevovai) use the [cry], ' Do not 
 examine but trust ' (M?) e^era^e dWa iriaTfvcrov)^ 
 
 2 [1480 <3:] Mk i. 15 TTKTTfvfTe iv Tw euayyeXico, see 1467 : eV, written e, 
 might be so easily repeated after the final e in Trtoreuere that we might be 
 justified in omitting it as corrupt (with b and /) if the phrase were not so 
 rare. Ign. Philad. 8 eV tg) eua-yyeXio) ov 7ri<rT€v<o is not an instance (Lightf.). 
 The phrase may have been common with a certain class of early Greek 
 Evangehsts but deprecated by their successors. 
 
 32 
 
"BELIEVING" [1482] 
 
 the Rock of the Psalmist, but that he is 
 
 a child is " in " his father's house, or " in " his father's heart. 
 
 [1481] The Epistle to the Hebrews, discussing '* faith," 
 begins with definition and proceeds to historical exempli- 
 fication. This is the oppo'site of the Johannine plan, which 
 prefers " narrowing down," that is to say, first, a broad, vague, 
 and sometimes even inaccurate statement, afterwards cor- 
 rected ^ modified, defined by reference to persons and circum- 
 stances, and finally left with the reader not as a definition but 
 as an impression. Thus John will begin by speaking of 
 "trusting^" absolutely in a context that will lead his readers 
 to ask " through whom or what " is this " trust " to be attained. 
 Then he will speak of those who " trusted to the name [of the 
 Logos]^" as receiving " authority " to become " children of 
 God," but will leave it an open question whether they availed 
 themselves of that authority. The first use of the word by 
 our Lord Himself will be in a gentle reproach to an 
 enthusiastic convert for "trusting" too easily^ Soon after- 
 wards, the Evangelist, in his own person, recurring to his 
 phrase " trusting to the name," will say, — with a play upon 
 words — that although " many " in Jerusalem were so impressed 
 with His "signs" that they ''trusted to (et?) his name',' yet 
 "Jesus himself did not trust himself to (dat.) them^''\ These 
 remarks will suffice to shew the need of careful discrimina- 
 tion when John varies his phrases in the following passages. 
 We may not understand the meaning of each variation, but 
 that each has some meaning we may feel certain. 
 
 §8. ''■Through whom!' or "what',' do all "believe"? 
 
 [1482] i. 7 " That he [the Baptist] might bear witness 
 concerning the light that all might trust through him (St' 
 avroif)." The meaning probably (2302 — 4) is "that all men 
 
 ^ Comp. iii. 22 "and he \i.e. Jesus] was baptizing," with iv. 2 "Yet 
 Jesus himself was not baptizing," and see 1925. 
 
 2 i. 7. 3 i_ 12. 4 i ^o 5 ii^ 23—4. 
 
 33 4—2 
 
[1483] "BELIEVING 
 
 might trust through the Hght," i.e. by seeing things clearly and 
 truly through the pure light of the Word of God and not 
 through the mists and twilights of their selfish fears and 
 desires, or through the darkness of sin. Here, without sup- 
 plying an object to the verb " trust," the Evangelist suggests 
 — by mentioning the medium — that, in any case, the kind of 
 "trust" or "belief" that his Gospel will delineate is not the 
 trust of ignorance or superstition. It is to be the trust of 
 those who see things as they are. Even if it could be shewn 
 that " through him " meant " through the Baptist," it would 
 still remain true that all men are to be led to " trust " through 
 the Light as the higher instrument, the Baptist being the 
 lower one. 
 
 § 9. " Believing in the name " 
 
 [1483] i. 12 "But as many as received {l\a^ov) him, to 
 them gave he authority to become children of God, namely, 
 to those trusting to his name {toU Tnarevovaiv eh to ovofxa 
 auToO)." The " he " is the " light " previously mentioned in 
 i. 9 — II, "There-was [from the beginning] the light, the true 
 [light], which enlighteneth every man, [by its continual] 
 coming into the world. He was in the world and the world 
 through him came into being, and the world recognised him 
 not. To his own [house] (eZ? ra IBca) he came, and his own 
 household (ol lBlol) received him not into [their hearts] 
 (irapeXa^ov). But as many...." Compare ii. 23 "Many 
 trusted to his name {iirlo-Tevaav et? to ovojjba avTov) beholding 
 his signs, which he was [then] doing. But Jesus himself 
 would not trust himself to them {ovk eirio-revev avTov 
 auTot?) — 
 
 [1484] On this last passage Origen says, " We must hold 
 fast to Him rather than to His name, lest, while ' doing 
 mighty works in His name,' we should [be forced to] hear 
 His [reproachful words] uttered when men boasted about His 
 
 34 
 
« BELIEVING " [1485] 
 
 mere name^" On the first (i. 12) he observes that receiving 
 " authority to become the children of God " is not the same 
 thing as " becoming children." " Receiving authority " Origen 
 regards apparently as a rudimentary stage belonging to those 
 who have " merely rudimentary belief {airkova-repov Trco-rev- 
 ovT6^ fjLovov)." Holding fast to Htm, as distinct from ''His 
 name," belongs to those who have a more perfect insights It 
 may be urged that these so-called " rudimentary believers " 
 are described by the Evangelist as having been born from 
 God (i. 13 " who were begotten, not... nor from the will of man 
 but from God "). But Origen describes the stages of develop- 
 ment thus : first, men receive the light, and, with it, authority 
 to become children of God ; then, " having been brought into 
 being from God, they also hear His words^" and pass into the 
 higher stage. 
 
 [1485] Origen's meaning becomes clearer if we remember 
 that " to receive the light " is much the same as " to be 
 enlightened {(fxoTL^ecrOai)!' Now the noun "enlightenment" 
 is mentioned by Justin Martyr in his Apology as being the 
 name given by Christians to "baptism"; and the noun and 
 the verb (" enlighten," " enlightenment ") were probably used 
 before the second century in the sense of " baptism " and 
 *' being baptized'*." Moreover " baptism " is regularly con- 
 
 ^ Origen (Huet ii. 196) is referring to the "boast" in Mt. vii. 22 — 3 
 *' In thy name have we done many mighty works," and to the reproach 
 in the Lord's answer, " I never recognised you, depart from me." 
 
 ^ Origen, ib. ii. 324 — 5 ^lopaTucayrepov Karavoovvres ra Ti]S dfoae^eias 
 TTpdyfxara. 
 
 ^ Origen, ib. yevonevoi e< tov deov, koL to. prjfxara aKOvovaiv avrov. 
 
 ^ [1485 rt] In Heb, vi. 4 "Those who have been once enlightened and 
 have tasted of the heavenly gift," the Syriac versions give (Westcott) 
 " who have once descended to baptism " and " who have once been 
 baptized," and the text is explained (Suicer 1490) by most Greek and 
 Latin Fathers as referring to baptism. Comp. Heb. x. 32 " Call to mind 
 the former days wherein having been enlightened, ye endured a great 
 conflict of sufferings," i.e. your conversion exposed you to persecutions. 
 
 [1485 <^] This is confirmed by Justin Martyr, who expressly says that 
 
 35 
 
[1486] " BELIEVING 
 
 nected with the phrases " to the name," " in the name," in the 
 Acts, and once in Matthew\ Thus a good deal of indirect 
 evidence suggests that the Evangelist here has in mind the 
 profession of faith or trust made in baptism. And this inter- 
 pretation is adopted by Chrysostom : " Why did he say, not 
 * made them children of God', but 'gave them authority to become 
 children of God'} Because he was shewing us that we need 
 all diligence to preserve, unstained and untainted — throughout 
 our whole lives — the image of sonship by adoption stamped 
 upon us in our baptism. And at the same time he made it 
 clear that no one will be able to take from us this authority 
 unless we first deprive our own selves of it!' 
 
 [1486] In support of this distinction between "trusting 
 to the name of I' and " trusting /^," the Lord Himself, Origen, 
 referring to Jn iii. i8^ says "'Trusting to His name' differs 
 from * trusting to Him.' Accordingly, he that is to have 
 immunity from judgment on account of trust, has that im- 
 munity from judgment through ' trusting to Him,' not [through 
 'trusting] to His name.' For the Lord said, 'He that trusteth 
 to me is not judged,' not ' he that trusteth to my name is not 
 judged.' " And he goes on to say that " trusting to His name " 
 
 "enlightenment" was the name given by Christians to the "washing" of 
 baptism, and then proceeds to use the noun and verb in that sense, Apol. 
 6l Kokivrai Se tovto to \ovrp6v (f)coTi(rfi6s,».Kai eV ovofiaros de 'l. Xp....Ka\ 
 eV ovofiaros Trvevfiaros dylov...6 (f)(OTi^6fi€vos Xoverai, 65 KOivas ev^ns Troirjao- 
 fxevot virip re eavrSyv koi tov (pcoTLcrOevTos... Tryph. 122 ravra vfids pev els tov 
 yqopav Koi tovs tt poarjXvrovs elprjadai vopi^ere, tco ovtl be els rjpas e'lprjrai tovs 
 dia 'lr)(Tov TretpcoTia-pevnvs. The Jews reply that the prophecy npos tov 
 vopov \eyeL Koi tovs cfycoTL^opevovs vtt' avTov, and " these " (they add) " are 
 the proselytes [of the Law]." This illustrates the fact that Jews as well as 
 Christians applied the term to proselytes. 
 
 ^ [1485 <:] Acts ii. 38 (x. 48) ev rw ovopoTi 'Irja. Xp., viii. 16 (xix. 5) els to 
 ovopaTov Kvpiov 'lr](rov, Mt. xxviii. 1 9 els r, 6. tov irarpos... Comp. I Cor. i. 13, 
 15 els TO 6. n., and els to epbv 6. The Index to Hermas gives ^anTi^ai only 
 in the phrase Vis. iii. 7 /3. els to ovopa tov Kvpiov. 
 
 ^ Jn iii. 186 Tnarevoav els avTov oh KpiveTai. 6 pr] TriaTevccv rjbr] KeKpiTai 
 OTi pr) TrenlaTevKev els to ovopa tov povoyevovs vlov tov 6eov. 
 
 36 
 
'^BELIEVING" [1487] 
 
 is inferior to "trusting to Him^" That is to say, "to trust to 
 the name of the Son of God " avowing that trust in baptism, 
 is only a preliminary stage in the upward progress of a 
 Christian. 
 
 [1487] Concerning this stage the ancient Appendix to 
 Mark says " He that shall believe and be baptized shall be 
 saved, but he that shall not believe (avrtcrTTyo-a?) shall be 
 judged guilty {KaraKpiOrjaeraLY" But, according to the Fourth 
 Gospel as interpreted by Origen, this stage of belief, or trust, 
 does not bring full "salvation," though the rejection of it 
 brings condemnation. Origen's conclusion appears to be 
 sound, and in harmony with Johannine thought and language, 
 namely, that " to trust to the name of Jesus " implies a lower 
 kind of trust, aprofession of belief in baptism, which professed 
 belief, if not followed up and developed by spiritual action, 
 might come to nothing^ 
 
 ^ [1486 rt] Huet ii. 196. Chrysostom (like others in Cramer ad loc.) 
 ignores the distinction between '■^ him''^ and '''■the 7iame" and says "He 
 \i.e. the behever] is not liable to judgment in this particular point" 
 i.e. for having rejected the Christian faith. If the believer leads an 
 impure life, says Chrysostom, he will be punished all the more for 
 his sins, "but on account of unbelief he is not punished because he 
 believed once for all {airnTTias de eveKa ov KoXa^erai 8ia to Tnareva-ai 
 anai)." 
 
 2 [Mk App. xvi. 16.] 
 
 3 [1487 a] According to this view, eVio-rfwcrcv ds to 6. tov Kvplov might 
 mean, in effect, "he became a Christian convert and was baptized." In 
 the present tense the phrase might be used to remind "believers" of 
 their responsibility as converts. Dealing only with rr. els in i Jn v. 10 — 13, 
 we find (l) 6 maTeixov els tov vlov r. Oeov, (2) ov Trerrio-TevKev els ttju 
 fxapTvplav ^v p,epapTvpr}K€v 6 Beos, and then, " These things have I written 
 to you that ye may know that ye have eternal life — [to jyou, /say,'] that 
 trust to the name of the Son of God^^ where perhaps the meaning of the 
 italicized words is, "you, who did not merely once for all" — a-na^, as 
 Chrysostom says — "profess baptismal faith but continuously exercise it." 
 
 [1487^] I Jn iii. 23 is difficult, and doubtful because NAC and 
 W. H. marg. read TTio-Tevcojxev where B and W. H. txt read Triorevcrcopev. 
 All have the dative, thus, "And this is his commandment that we trust 
 the name (tt. rw o.) of his son Jesus Christ and love {dyan(bp,ev) one 
 
 37 
 
[1488] "BELIEVING" 
 
 § lO. Oicr Lord's first mention of '' believing]'' 
 or ^' trusting^'^ 
 
 [1488] i. 50 " Because I said unto thee I saw thee under 
 the fig-tree thou believes 1 1 Thou shalt see greater things than 
 these." We noted above (1481) that the EvangeHst's first use 
 of " believing " was absolute, no object being inserted. So it 
 is here, and the "belief" is not defined so far as this sentence 
 goes. But it is partially defined as being a reply to 
 Nathanael's words, " Rabbi, thou art the Son of God, thou art 
 King of Israel." That, then, is what Nathanael "believes" 
 and it seems definite enough, at first sight. But is it clear 
 what precise meaning Nathanael attached to the phrase, and 
 whether he meant " a king " or " the king " of Israel ? Both of 
 these terms are capable of conventional meanings. All that we 
 are allowed to know for certain is (i) that Nathanael believed 
 these to be facts about Jesus because the latter declared that 
 He had " seen him under the fig-tree " at the moment when 
 Philip called him, (2) that Jesus replied as above. But the 
 tenor of the reply justifies us in inferring that this faith — 
 which was based upon a " sign," though not a " sign " of action 
 or of healing — was not regarded by our Lord (and con- 
 sequently not by the Evangelist) as of the highest order, and 
 that He promised Nathanael a more spiritual basis for a 
 higher kind of belief 
 
 another," Perhaps the writer substitutes the unusual dative for the 
 preposition in order to suggest a trust that is not formal or conventional : — 
 " that we trust [in heart as well as in word] that name [which we 
 professed to trust in when we were baptized] and that we give effect to it 
 by a life of brotherly love." But the text is so doubtful that nothing 
 certain can be said about its meaning. 
 
 ^ [1488 fz] It will not be thought necessary to remind the reader 
 henceforth that nia-Tevo means "trust" as well as "believe." "Believe 
 in" (not "believe on," which would better correspond to tt. eni) will often 
 be used except where some special context requires the word " trust." 
 
 38 
 
VERSITY 
 
 ^LLFORN Nfe^ELIEVING" [1490] 
 
 § II. Christ's disciples '''believed in him'' 
 
 [1489] ii. 1 1 " This beginning of his signs did Jesus in 
 Cana of Galilee, and he manifested his glory, and his disciples 
 believed in him {eirla-revo-av et? avrov)." The word " be- 
 ginning" appears to have been interpreted by Origen as 
 denoting spiritual precedence, not chronological order. This 
 sign, he says, performed for those who were in health, was 
 superior to the signs performed for the sick\ He evidently 
 (without denying the literal miracle) regards the wine as 
 spiritually efficacious, and probably as an anticipation of the 
 Eucharist. If so, it would seem to him more than a mere 
 coincidence, that at the time when the wine passed into the 
 bodies of the disciples, faith passed into their souls. 
 
 [1490] But although we may feel certain that the 
 Evangelist records the miracle as a literal one, yet we cannot 
 regard it as equally certain that he takes the miracle to be 
 the cause of the "belief" of the disciples. Had their faith 
 been of that kind, would it not have been like the faith of 
 Nathanael above-mentioned, and like that of Nicodemus and 
 other Jews later on, a faith not in the Lord but in His signs ? 
 And is it not (in part at least) for the purpose of dissipating 
 such an impression that John adds "and he manifested 
 his glory'' 1 "Glory," in the Fourth Gospel, is of a spiritual 
 nature. The Lord had recently promised Nathanael that he 
 and all the disciples should see heaven (646 <3:) permanently 
 opened and the angels of God ascending and descending on 
 the Son of man. Did not this refer to the life of the Son of 
 
 ^ [1489 «] Huet ii. i6o. According to Chrys., the disciples, "even 
 before this, had wondered at Him: now they believed in Him," 
 €7riaT€V(rav els avTov oi jx. avrov ol koI irpo tovtov Bavfid^ovres avrov. 
 Cramer's version adds, after avrov, "because then they received some 
 increase of their faith in Him (on nep t6t€ TrpoaSrjKijv ibi^avro nva rfjs els 
 avrov TTLcrreois)." Whoever added this probably disliked the notion that 
 the disciples now, for the first time, " believed in " Christ. 
 
 39 
 
[1491] "BELIEVING" 
 
 God on earth and to His words as well as His works ? If 
 even the officers of the Sanhedrin, sent to arrest Jesus, recoiled 
 from their task with the words " Never man spake thus," 
 might not Christ's own disciples say even more ? As for the 
 miracle, it is said by the Evangelist to have been known to 
 the servants that drew the water, but (at the time at all events) 
 not to the Master of the Feast and apparently to none of 
 those that were sitting at the table. The servants, then, if 
 any one, ought to have " believed " in consequence of the 
 miracle. But they are not said to have believed. This 
 "belief" is predicated only concerning His disciples, whose 
 eyes had been so far opened that they could to some extent 
 discern His " glory." Hence they " believed in him." 
 
 § 12. ''Believing the Scripture'' 
 
 [1491] At this point there comes, incidentally and out of 
 chronological order, a mention of "trusting the Scripture," 
 thus, ii. 22 " When therefore he was raised from the dead, his 
 disciples remembered that he meant^ this : and they trusted 
 the Scripture and the saying that Jesus said." Chronologically, 
 this " trusting the Scripture " comes after the Resurrection, and 
 after the time when the disciples had begun, in the fullest 
 sense, to " trust to (et?) Christ." This is confirmed by xx. 9 
 where it is said that the beloved disciple, seeing the grave- 
 clothes in the tomb of the risen Saviour " believed — -for not 
 even yet did they know the Scripture that he must needs rise 
 from the dead"-!' 
 
 1 [1491 «] "Meant," e'Xeye. R.V. "spake," A.V. "had said," but see 
 Tense Imperf. (2469). If the meaning had been " spake," the Gk 
 should have been eXaXrjo-ev ; if it had been " had said," the Gk should 
 have been elnev or (xi. 13) elprjKei. 
 
 2 [1491^] There is difficulty in the unique construction, with the 
 preposition, in the Epistle (i Jn v. 10) " He that doth not trust God hath 
 made God a liar because he hath not trusted to the testimony that God hath 
 
 40 
 
BELIEVING" [1493] 
 
 [1492] Later on, the dative is used somewhat similarly 
 in V. 46 — 7 "For if ye trusted Moses ye would trust me... 
 but, if ye trust not his writings, how will ye trust my words ? " 
 The plural "writings {r^pa^^ara)" denotes the five books of 
 the Law : and in the single passage in which John uses the 
 plural of Graphe, he perhaps wishes us to see the Pharisees 
 (v. 39) " searching the Scriptures," book by book, and yet unable 
 to extract their meaning. But in the passage under con- 
 sideration John uses the singular, " the Scripture," without 
 quoting any special text ; and for reasons given later on, it is 
 probable that he means " the Scripture as a whole,'' " the 
 Scripture as the written Word of God',' or "the revealed 
 will of God in the Law and the Prophets." To " trust " this^ 
 in the full sense of " trusting," required the aid of the Holy 
 Spirits 
 
 § 13. ''Believing',' in the Dialogue with Nicodemus 
 
 [1493] The preface to the Dialogue with Nicodemus says 
 that while Jesus was in Jerusalem during the Passover " many 
 believed in his name beholding his signs, which he was [daily] 
 performing^" We have seen above (1483 — 7) that this pro- 
 bably implies that they " were baptized in Christ's name'* 
 
 testified concerning his Son {pv TrcirlarevKev els rrjv fiaprvpiav ^v fiefiaprv- 
 prjKcv 6 Oeos irepl tov vlov avrov).^^ Probably the writer uses the phrase as 
 Ignatius speaks of {Trail. 2) "trusting to (els) the death of Christ/' 
 {Smyrn. 6) " trusting to (els) the blood of Christ," in order to indicate that 
 God's testimony was of the nature of a Person to whom one looks in trusts 
 
 1 On "The Scripture" meaning "The Scripture as a whole," see 
 1722 a— i. 
 
 ^ [1493 <«] ii. 23 decopovvres avrov to. arjpela a iiroUi, i.e. "beholding his 
 signs, which he was frequently, or daily, performing " (not " beholding the 
 signs that he was performing"). The relative clause adds, not defines. 
 For want of understanding this, the text has been corrupted as follows : 
 SS "believed our Lord because they were seeing the signs that he did ta 
 them ^^ : a b and / om. avrov : e (besides omitting avrov) has " signa quae 
 faciebat in eos qui infirm i erant." See 1564 b. 
 
 41 
 
[1494] "BELIEVING" 
 
 The Evangelist appears to have assumed that, when Jesus 
 succeeded the Baptist, the former took up the work of 
 baptizing disciples. The Synoptists make no mention of 
 this ; but John informs us of it immediately after the Dia- 
 logue thus, iii. 22 " After these things came Jesus and his 
 disciples into the land of Judaea ; and there he was tarrying 
 with them and was baptizing," and a little later he says that 
 Jesus, or rather His disciples, baptized more converts than 
 were baptized by John^ This is antecedently probable ; for 
 one baptized by the Baptist, as Jesus had been, would 
 hardly have discontinued the practice of the great Prophet 
 without some strong reason ; and, if Jesus had discontinued 
 it, would not some one of the Evangelists have mentioned 
 the discontinuance? Supposing that Jesus, the Baptist's 
 successor, continued to baptize, we are the better able to 
 understand why the subject is introduced at once when 
 Nicodemus comes to Jesus by night. 
 
 [1494] The Rabbi, it would seem, was thinking about 
 being baptized and came to consult Jesus about the matter. 
 He is at once warned by our Lord that baptism with water 
 is insufficient : there must be regeneration from above and 
 with the Spirit. This introduces the notion of " believing," 
 but, at first, only in a general sense, believing in spiritual as 
 distinct from material existences. When Nicodemus ex- 
 claims, "How can these things be?" Jesus replies (iii. 12) 
 ^' If I told you earthly things and ye believe not, how will ye 
 believe if I tell you heavenly things ? " Then He concludes 
 (iii. 14) "As Moses lifted up the serpent in the wilderness, 
 so must the Son of man be lifted up that everyone that 
 believeth may in him have eternal life." 
 
 [1495] The meaning of this allusion — so obscure to us — 
 would be comparatively easy to a Jew familiar with the 
 doctrine about the Serpent in the Wilderness set forth by 
 
 1 Jn iv. 1—3. 
 42 
 
"BELIEVING" [1497] 
 
 Philo, Barnabas, and the Targums^ and with Jewish thought 
 about the Serpent as being the author of man's fall. As the 
 first Serpent and the first Adam brought sin, so a second 
 Serpent and a second Adam must take away sin. The first 
 Serpent was the passion for pleasure and self; the second 
 Serpent is to be the passion for kindness and the love of 
 others. Thus interpreted, these difficult words teach one of 
 the deepest of all truths, that men will never be really- 
 reformed on the lines of mere law or on the lines of mere 
 asceticism. Never will a human being be reshaped from 
 without, as by a sculptor's hand. He must grow from a 
 germ of life within, his heart going up, and his desires going 
 up with it, out of himself, into a new Man, a second Adam, 
 the Man from heaven. 
 
 [1496] Here, according to the best interpretation, the 
 Dialogue ends ; and the Evangelist proceeds with a comment 
 of his own. Comparing Christ's first utterance about belief 
 (to Nathanael) with this. His second utterance (to Nicodemus), 
 we find Him in the former promising Nathanael a vision of 
 " greater things," but here implying that Nicodemus and his 
 friends would fail to believe "the heavenly things." But in 
 neither case does the Lord define "belief" Only by the 
 allusion to the Brazen Serpent, along with the mention of 
 regeneration by the Spirit, we are led to ask what is 
 meant by " believing," and what are to be its processes and 
 objects. 
 
 [1497] The passage that follows has been taken by many 
 as a part of Christ's own utterance ; but it contains ex- 
 pressions ("only begotten Son," "believe in the name of," 
 "do truth") used elsewhere by the Evangelist and not used 
 
 1 [1495 «] See Philo i. 79, 82, 315, Barn. xii. 7, Targ. on Numb. xxi. 
 6 — 9 — all full of interest, but not possible to discuss here. This is our 
 Lord's first mention of '-'• life'" in this Gospel. Comp. Numb. xxi. 9 
 " when he looked unto the serpent of brass he lived.^^ 
 
 43 
 
[1498] "BELIEVING" 
 
 elsewhere by our Lord ; it speaks of Redemption in the 
 past tense as an EvangeHst would speak after Christ's death ; 
 and the tone of the passage is like that of other Evangelistic 
 comments in this Gospels It answers' the question " To what 
 are we to trust?" suggested by the words, "in order that 
 he that trusteth may in him have eternal life." 
 
 [1498] iii. i6— 18 "For God so loved the world that 
 he gave his only begotten Son that everyone that trusteth to 
 him might not perish but might have eternal life...//^ that 
 trusteth to him is not under judgment (ou Kpiverai). He 
 that trusteth not is already judged [guilty] because he hath 
 not trusted to the name of the 07ily begotten Son of God'^T 
 The comment of Barnabas on the healing efficacy of the 
 Serpent may be of use here : " When any of you shall be 
 bitten (saith the Scripture) let him come to the Serpent that 
 is hanging on the tree and let him hope and believe that it, 
 though dead, is able to make alive and straightway he shall 
 be saved {i.e. healed)^" This is a very rudimentary and 
 erroneous definition of "trusting": but it helps us to under- 
 stand why John does not attempt to define, and prefers to 
 suggest. And his suggestion here is that we are to trust — 
 not in a " dead " person or " thing," nor that a person or thing 
 can " make alive," but — to {eU) an " only begotten Son," who 
 will make us alive (as will be shewn hereafter) not in spite 
 of the fact that He has died, but because He has died (as the 
 seed dies to live and to give life). 
 
 1 [1497 d\ These arguments are alleged by Westcott for the conclusion 
 that iii. i6 — 21 is "a commentary on the nature of the mission of the 
 Son." To these may be added (2066) the frequent use of -^ap. Also 
 6 ^6os (nom.) — which occurs here in iii. 16, 17 — is very rarely used by our 
 Lord as compared with 6 Ilari^p, but in the Epistle it occurs about 12 times. 
 
 2 Comp. I Jn iv. 9 " Herein was the love of God manifested in us that 
 God hath sent his only begotten Son into the world that we might live 
 through him." 
 
 ^ Barn. xii. 7 cX^cVo) eVi rov o(f)iv...Ka\ eXTrio-drco iriarTevcras otl avros &)v 
 veKpos dvvarai ^(ooTroirja-ai <a.\ irapaxprjyi-a a-aOrjo-eTai. 
 
 44 
 
''BELIEVING" [1501] 
 
 [1499] The metaphors for describing this giving of eternal 
 life through the uplifted Son of man upon the Cross are 
 various. Life may be regarded negatively as deliverance 
 from sin. In that aspect, our burden of sin may be described 
 as falling from our shoulders as we kneel before the Cross, 
 ■or as taken from us and nailed to it with the Crucified One. 
 But John probably looks at life positively, as a union with 
 Christ, who, when we look to Him with the eye of faith, 
 draws us to, or into, Himself, or passes into us that we may 
 pass into Him. 
 
 [1500] Greek philosophers, as we have seen, condemned 
 Christian faith as irrational ; and in modern times some might 
 liken it to that " fancy," or imaginative love, which is " en- 
 gendered in the eye." Probably John would have accepted 
 this comparison, only asking us to remember what the eye 
 of the soul is and what is the object of the soul's vision. 
 He would have admitted that no man can come to the 
 Father unless he is, so to speak, " enamoured " with — or as 
 Jesus said, "drawn by" — the ideal Sonship. No water can 
 suffice to cleanse away sin. The pure fire, and passion, of 
 the Spirit can alone drive out the impure fires and passions 
 of the flesh. 
 
 § 14. After the Baptist's last words 
 
 [1501] iii. 36 " He that trusteth to the Son hath eternal 
 life ; but he that refuseth to obey the Son shall not see life, 
 but the wrath of God abideth on him." This is part of a 
 comment by the Evangelist on the last words of the Baptist 
 " He must increase but I must decrease " ; and it shews why, 
 even as compared with the greatest of prophets, the Son 
 " must increase " while their claims on humanity decrease, 
 because, while they represent God's messages, He represents 
 God's Fatherhood, " Refuseth to obey," or " rebelleth," is 
 closer than R.V. ("obeyeth not {marg. believeth not)") to 
 
 45 
 
[1502] "BELIEVING" 
 
 the Biblical use of direidelv, which denotes stubborn dis- 
 obedience to, or rebellion against, parents, or God, or obvious 
 truths 
 
 [1502] Here, then, ''trusting to'' is indirectly defined, 
 by being contrasted with '' i^ebelling against'' \ and thus the 
 notion of " loyalty to," " allegiance to," is connected with 
 the former. The words are parallel to the above quoted 
 Evangelistic comment (iii. i8) "He that trusteth not [to the 
 Son] is ah'eady judged',' where the meaning was " is already 
 condemned." This is now more emphatically expressed : 
 " the wrath of God remains permanently on him." The 
 Evangelist has in view a " rebel " answering to the appeal 
 of the Gospel of God, " I will not believe that thou art my 
 Father," to which the reply must be, " Then thou dost thyself 
 make me remain thy Judge." 
 
 § 15. In Samaria 
 
 [1503] iv. 21 " Trust me {iriarevk fiov) woman, that the 
 hour Cometh when neither in this mountain nor in Jerusalem 
 shall ye worship the Father." 
 
 iv. 39 — 42 " Now from that city many trusted to him, 
 [many, I mean] of the Samaritans, on account of the word 
 of the woman, when she testified, ' He told me all that ever 
 I did'... (40) and he abode there two days and many more 
 trusted because of his [own] word, and they said to the 
 woman, * No longer on account of thy speaking do we trust. 
 For we ourselves have heard and know that this is truly the 
 Saviour of the world." 
 
 [1504] The second of these passages may be conveniently 
 taken first, because its motive is clear, namely, to emphasize 
 
 1 [1501^] See Rom. x. 21 quoting Is. Ixv. 2 and Rom. ii. 8 ''rebel 
 agaitist the truth." The adj. occurs in Rom. i. 30, 2 Tim. iii. 2, " rebellious 
 against parents," also in Lk. i. 17, Acts xxvi. 19, Tit. i. 16, iii. 3. The 
 verb occurs nowhere in the Gospels except here. 
 
 46 
 
"BELIEVING" [1504] 
 
 the importance oi personal trust in Christ. But the statement 
 is not quite consistent. For let us suppose that fifty (" many") 
 " believed on account of the word of the woman," and that a 
 hundred and fifty ("many more") "believed on account of 
 his {i.e. Christ's) word." How could the hundred and fifty 
 say to the woman " no longer do we believe on account of thy 
 speaking^"? The Diatessaron and SS try to meet the difficulty 
 by dropping " more " (" many believed because of his word "). 
 Codex e has ''much more (multo amplius) did they believe 
 because of his word." This makes admirable sense ; but it is 
 unfortunately not supported by other authority^ And, had 
 it been the original, why should it have been altered ? Pro- 
 bably the text is correct and the meaning, though not logically 
 expressed, is this : " Some (say, fifty) believed because of the 
 woman's word ; but many more (say, a hundred) believed for 
 the first time, or {as regards the fifty) had their belief 
 strengthened, because of Christ's word : and all these came to 
 the woman saying, ' The beginning of our belief came from 
 you : but now we have heard Him for ourselves and we 
 believe because of His word^'.'" 
 
 1 [1504 a\ Even supposing that fifty of the hundred and fifty had first 
 believed "on account of the word of the woman" and were now 
 strengthened in their belief "on account of Christ's word," yet the 
 fact would remain that a hundred had never owed their belief to the 
 woman, and could not use such language to her. 
 
 2 [1504 <^] Codex e seems to have read nAeiONeniCTeycAN. This 
 could easily arise from nAeioNeceniCTeycAN : and ifKeiovcs and TrXeiovs 
 are found as v.r. in Acts xxvii. I2, i Cor. xv. 6. Elsewhere in N.T. 
 TrXeioi/es (nom.) is found of persons four times (Acts xxvii. I2, xxviii. 23, 
 I Cor. XV. 6, Heb. vii. 23) and -n-Xeiovs (nom.) thrice (Acts xix. 32, xxiii. 13, 
 21). Both Origen and Heracleon read "many more" (Huet ii. 244, 248). 
 
 3 [1504 £:] Heracleon (according to Origen, Huet ii. 248 b) wished to 
 supply yiovrjv after \a\tdv ("No longer do we believe because of thy 
 speaking alone "). This, however, taken strictly, would indicate that he 
 regarded all the speakers as being originally indebted to the woman for 
 their faith. 
 
 [1504^] Origen says (Huet ii. 245 e) 'H /xev ovv dpxrj tS>v dnb ttjs 
 
 A.V. 47 5 
 
[1505] '^ BELIEVING" 
 
 [1505] We are not obliged to suppose that the Samaritans 
 first described as having " trusted to " the Lord received this 
 faith, before seeing and hearing Him, on the mere report of 
 the woman. The " fifty " may have been so far prepared by 
 the woman to believe that, as soon as they entered His 
 presence, they actually and genuinely believed in Him, but 
 with a rudimentary belief. The Evangelist appears to recog- 
 nise a lower and a higher faith, even while describing the 
 lower by the phrase hitherto applied to the faith of the 
 disciples and true believers (" trusting to hint "). Thus a new 
 shade of distinction is introduced, belief varying according to 
 what the Greeks call the hui ri, or " Why?'' In the former 
 case, the answer to the Why ? is " Because of the word of the 
 woman"; in the latter, "because of His word." 
 
 [1506] Let us now return to our Lord's own saying about 
 " belief," or '* trust," early in the story. Under ordinary cir- 
 cumstances, and in an ordinary speaker, we might suppose 
 
 the words " Trust me, woman, that the hour cometh ," to 
 
 have been merely an asseveration meaning " I assure you that 
 it is so." But we must have regard to the fact that this is 
 an utterance of Christ, the third passage in which He mentions 
 "trusting"; and the Gospel has hitherto appeared to be 
 carrying us from stage to stage in the development of a 
 doctrine about "trusting." We have also to consider the 
 conclusion of the narrative, and the way in which it seems to 
 point a moral about " trusting " and different kinds of " trust." 
 The result should convince us that we are bound to try first 
 of all to make sense of our Lord's words in their literal and 
 
 ^afiapeias 7ri(TT€v6vT(Ov rjv iroXXwv Xoyos 6 r. y^^^'-'^os iiapTvpov(rr)S...r) §e 
 av^r)cns koi 7rXr)dv(rfi6s tojv ttoXXw TrXeiovcov TTiareuovTOiv ovk4ti 8ia top 
 \6yov T. yvvaiKos ak\a dia top Xoyov avrov, where, for rjv ttoXXcoi/, we should 
 perh. read twv ttoXXoov contrasted with rav ttoXXw TrXeidi/cDi/. Origen's 
 antithesis "The begm?iing,..h\i\. the increase and multiplication^^ may be 
 intended to convey a suggestion that the increase extended to the ^''belief^^ 
 and not only to the Jiu?nber of those '■^believing." 
 
 48 
 
BELIEVING" [1507] 
 
 weighty meaning by taking them as a precept, " Trust me." 
 Taken thus, they call on the woman (to whom afterwards He 
 vouchsafes the unique revelation of His Messianic nature) to 
 " trust Him " that the House of Worship is not Jerusalem 
 or Gerizim but Spirit and Truth. These,' He says in effect, 
 are the true Temple. 
 
 [1507] The Evangelist has already described Him as 
 meaning " the Temple " when He mentions Himself ^ So, 
 here, the incarnate Temple of God is described as taking 
 compassion on this poor Samaritan woman — who, amidst all 
 her temptations of the flesh, has this additional peril, namely, 
 that her idea of God is a Person much quarrelled about by 
 learned Jewish and Samaritan Rabbis — and He asks her^ to 
 "trust" Him, when He assures her that prayer is not a 
 
 1 ii. 21 "He was saying [this] (2469) concerning the temple of his 
 body," better perhaps "meant this to refer to the temple etc." 
 
 ' 2 [1507 <2] He does not speak as one commanding (aorist, 7riaTevcrov)y 
 but rather as one requesting (pres. Trla-reve). In this Gospel, Christ never 
 uses the authoritative imperative of this verb. Neither does Mk v. 36 
 " Fear not, only believe {Trio-reve)." But the parall. Lk. viii. 50 has rriaTeva-ov : 
 and so has Acts xvi. 31. Some Christians abused it, according to Celsus 
 (Origen, Ce/s. 1. 9) ^rja-l 84 nvas fxrjde ^ovXofxevovs didovai fj Xafx^dveiv \6yov 
 TTcpl hv TTio-Tevovai, XPW^^'' '^<? " M'7 ^^^^o-C^ aXKa iri(TT€V(TOv kol rj iriaris (rov 
 o-cbo-ct ere" (printed by Dindorf as two sayings, the second being, "Thy 
 faith will save thee"). 
 
 [1507 d] The aorist imper. occurs, however, in Soph. Oed. J^. 646 Trpos- 
 6eb)v...iTi(rr€V(rov rdde, where it seems to imply the urgency of entreaty 
 rather than authoritative command. In Eurip. He/. 710 \6yots 8' ipolcri 
 Trio-Tevaov rdde, it is authoritative. In these, and in two other instances 
 quoted by Steph., tt. is connected with a neut. accus. Herodian viii. 3. 22 
 TO di napdho^ov rrjs aTro^daecos Troiei irdwa Trto-revo-ai, AristOt. Prior. 
 Analyt. ii. 23 IlicrTevopev yap airavra rj did cruXXoytcr/Moi) rj 81 € n ay coy rjs. 
 Comp. Habak. i. 5 epyov iyco ipyd^opai...o ov p.r) TTLO-TfvaijTe, where the 
 antecedent of o is prob. "the doing of the deed," not "the deed": 
 but Acts xiii. 41 quoting this repeats epyov before o. In N.T. this neut. 
 accus. occurs thrice, Jn xi. 26 iricrTeveis tovto, 1 Cor. xi. 18 fiepos n 
 TTio-retla), xiii. 7 irdvra Triarevet. It is probably of a semi-adverbial 
 character like Eurip. Or. 1103 yvvai^l Triarevco ^paxv. Steph. gives no 
 instance of a non-neuter accus. with iria-nvu). 
 
 49 5—2 
 
[1508] " BELIEVING 
 
 sectarian or provincial business. Nathanael had been gently 
 reproached by the Lord for " trusting " before he had seen the 
 " greater things " ; Nicodemus had been warned that " he that 
 trusteth " must look upward to the Son of man " lifted up " in 
 order that he " might have in him eternal life " ; now the 
 woman of Samaria is bidden to " trust Him!' in the assurance 
 that worship (which is the "looking upward" of the heart) 
 will be effectual wherever it is offered " in spirit and truth." 
 This cosmopolitan subordination of local worship ("Jerusalem," 
 " Gerizim ") prepares the way for the sublime confession at 
 the end of the story — based, not upon faith but upon know- 
 ledge, and not on seeing but on hearing — "We have heard 
 him ourselves and know that this is indeed the Saviour of 
 the Worldr 
 
 § 1 6. The nobleman's ''believing'' 
 
 [1508] iv. 48 " Except ye see signs and wonders ye will 
 assuredly not believe {ov fir) 7ria-T€var)T6)\" Compare this with 
 iv. 50 " Go thy way, thy son liveth. The man believed the 
 word that Jesus had spokenl' from which it appears that he 
 did " believe," in some sense, before he had seen any " signs 
 and wonders." It follows that we must take the words 
 " ye will assuredly not " like similar words in xviii. 11 ("I am 
 assuredly not to drink it!" (933—6, 1007)) and like many 
 other exclamations. of Jesus, as being of a semi-interrogative 
 nature (2236). The utterance, though addressed to the 
 nobleman, is not about the nobleman alone. The pronoun 
 is not " thou" but "j^," and the full meaning of this condensed 
 sentence might be paraphrased in modern English thus : " I 
 know the ways of your class, the Herodians, the courtiers, the 
 men of the world. None of you, as a rule, will believe without 
 seeing signs and wonders ! Is it to be so with you also 1 " 
 It is exclamatory as regards the class but interrogative as 
 regards the individual. 
 
 50 
 
"BELIEVING" [1510] 
 
 [1509] At the same time the Evangelist takes pains to 
 shew that the man passes through stages of belief. He 
 "believed/' in some sense, at once: but he merely believed 
 " the word that Jesus had spoken," namely, " thy son liveth." 
 Afterwards, when he ascertained that his son had actually 
 recovered in the hour of this utterance, then (iv. 53) '''he 
 believed — he himself and his household." What he now 
 "believed" we are not told. But we are led to infer (i) that 
 it was a belief, or trust, "in," or "to" Jesus Himself, (2) that 
 it was, even now, not a perfect belief, for it had been caused 
 in part by a "sign and wonder." We perceive in this 
 narrative — which contains the fourth utterance of Jesus 
 about " trusting " or " believing " — a recognition of two facts : 
 first, that a certain class of people will not " trust " without 
 "signs and wonders," and, secondly, that the Lord, while 
 sometimes working such "signs," endeavours to raise them 
 to a trust that is above " signs V 
 
 § 17. ''Believing'' the testimony of the Father 
 
 [1510] Hitherto, except in the Dialogue with the Sa- 
 maritan Woman ("trust me") our Lord has never mentioned 
 the object of trust. Now, it is brought before the reader 
 in the course of a controversy with the Jews arising from an 
 act of healing on the sabbath. Jesus asserts that He " sees " 
 His Father performing such acts as these, that He, the Son, 
 does them because the Father, who has sent Him, has given 
 
 1 [1509 «] The Nobleman in Jn is, in some respects, parallel to the 
 father of the " lunatic " in Mk. The former, when he hears the words " ye 
 will not believe," does not deny the weakness of his belief but says, in 
 effect, "Come down at all events and do what you can for my child before 
 it is too late." This is not unlike the father's ^'- If thou canst,^' in Mk. Only, 
 in Mk, the father frankly avowed the mixed nature of his feeling "I beheve, 
 help thou mine unbelief." All this beautiful tradition of Mk's is left out 
 by Mt. and Lk. Jn gives something corresponding to it. 
 
 51 
 
[1511] "BELIEVING" 
 
 them to Him to do, and that they are His Father's " testi- 
 mony " : (v. 24 — 47) " He that heareth my word and trusteth 
 him (dat.) that se?it me hath eternal life and cometh not into 
 judgment, but hath passed out of death into life.... (38) and 
 ye have not his word (or. Logos) abiding in you, because 
 whom he sent, him (dat.) j^^ trust not.... (44) How can ye 
 trust (Trcareva-ai), receiving glory from one another and the 
 glory that is from the only God ye seek not!.... (46) If ye 
 trusted Moses (dat.), ye would trust me (dat.), for he wrote 
 concerning me. But if ye trust not his writings (dat.) how 
 will ye trust my words (dat.) ? " 
 
 [1511] Here, "trust" means ''believe tJie testimony of I' 
 and it is implied that if the Jews had thus trusted Moses, 
 they would have trusted the Son, and if they had trusted 
 the Son they would have trusted the Father. And con- 
 cerning this last " trust " it is said that the man possessing 
 it "hath eternal life." The section is mainly of a negative 
 character. Even the strong phrase "hath eternal life" is 
 followed by the negative "cometh not into judgment" ; and 
 life is regarded as being in its commencement (" hath passed 
 out of death into life"). The context teaches that those 
 who do not possess within their hearts, in any degree, the 
 Word or Logos of God, having no affinity with the law of 
 moral harmony and order, cannot revolve about His " glory," 
 but make their own " glory " the centre of their actions. 
 Having broken loose from the attractive force of God's over- 
 ruling and universal Fatherhood, they no longer look to Him, 
 or trust Him, as Father, but look always to themselves. 
 
 § 18. After the Feeding of the Five Thousand 
 
 [1512] The Feeding of the Five Thousand is almost 
 expressly said by our Lord to have failed in producing 
 "trust" even in the hearts of those who received the bread- 
 " Ye seek me," He says to them, " not because ye saw signs 
 
 52 
 
"BELIEVING" [1513] 
 
 but because ye ate of the loaves and were filled. Work not 
 [for] the food that perisheth but for the food that abideth 
 unto life eternal.... This is the work of God that ye trust ^ 
 to him whom God [hath] sent.... The bread (or, loaf) of God 
 is the One^ that cometh down from heaven and giveth life 
 to the world... I am the bread of life. He that cometh to 
 me shall surely not hunger and he that trusteth to me shall 
 surely not thirst at any time. But I [have] said to you that 
 ye have both {icai) seen [? me]^ and do not trusts 
 
 [1513] These words of Christ, and those of the Jews 
 which are interspersed between them, present great difficulty 
 because of the apparent blending of the literal and the 
 spiritual. In particular, the last sentence has perplexed com- 
 mentators because Jesus is nowhere recorded to have said 
 "ye have both seen me and do not trust." But the words 
 may be intended to sum up all that Jesus has just said, 
 thus : " Your notion of the Bread of Life is greedy enjoyment ; 
 but the true Bread is trust in God. You say, ' How must we 
 work the works of God?' : I reply, 'The one work of God is 
 to trust to his Messenger' You say, 'What doest thou 
 (TToteZ?), or workest thou (ipyd^r)), that we may see and 
 trust thee^ }' and you point to the Manna as being ' bread 
 from heaven ' : I reply, ' The Manna was not the Bread from 
 Heaven. That is a thing of the past. But the true Bread 
 is now being offered to you, every day and every hour, by 
 
 1 vi. 29 Lva 7ri(TT€vr)T€. On the distinction between this and 
 7ri(TT€v(rT)T€, See 2524 — 5. 
 
 2 [1512 a] vi. 33 6 yap apros r. Oeov ea-rlv 6 Kara/SatVcoi/, where 6 Kara^aivcov 
 is taken by the Jews as meaning " the dread (or, loaf) that cometh down," 
 but it may mean " the man that cometh down." " One " is an attempt to 
 represent this ambiguity. 
 
 3 [1512^] vi. 36. W. H. bracket pe, which is omitted by SS, as well as 
 AK and most Latin MSS. But its difficulty explains (without justifying) 
 its omission; and there is no satisfactory way of explaining how it could 
 be erroneously inserted. 
 
 * vi. 30 (dative), but Jesus had used (vi. 29) the preposition " to." 
 
 53 
 
[1514] "BELIEVING" 
 
 the Father. The Bread is not anything that I 'do (iroico) 
 or work (ipyd^ofjLac).' It is I myself. I am the Bread. You 
 ask for a sign that you may 'see and believe.' Voii have 
 seen me, and I have been telling you this, and yet you do not 
 believe^! " 
 
 [1514] If that is the meaning, Jesus is reproaching the 
 Jews for not seeing the divine facts of human life, somewhat 
 as Epictetus reproaches cultured Greeks for denying the 
 existence of Demeter at the very moment when they were 
 eating bread I According to Johannine doctrine, the Bread 
 of Life is not to be sought above the clouds but wherever 
 we see good men and women, who diffuse peace and 
 trust around them. Jesus was the incarnation of such 
 goodness. 
 
 [1515] An underground stream of Jewish thought, coming 
 to the surface in Mark's Gospel but not in Matthew's and 
 Luke's, is possibly reappearing here — a tradition about the 
 spontaneousness of God's kindnesses and about the calm and 
 trustful spirit in which they are to be received. Mark says 
 that the Kingdom is like a man that sows seed "and sleeps 
 and rises night and day" and the seed grows "he knows 
 not how," and "the earth of itself'^ bringeth forth fruit." 
 This tradition about God's giving to me7i in their sleep appears 
 in the Psalmist's contrast between worrying drudgery and 
 trustful work, " Except the Lord build the house, they labour 
 but in vain that build it; except the Lord keep the city, 
 the watchman waketh but in vain. It is vain for you that 
 ye rise up early, and so late take rest and eat the bread of 
 
 1 vi. 26 — 36. ^ Epict. ii. 20. 32. 
 
 3 [1515 «] Mk iv. 28 avToixdrr], SO Philo, on Isaac (the self-taught, 
 avTO^aOrjs) i. 57 1 — 2 ecrri Se kol rpiros opos rov avrofiadovs to dvajSaivov 
 avTOfiarov (that which cometh up of itself). Comp. also Clem. Rom. 
 22 — 3, on "the faith that is in Christ," in connexion with trustful 
 acceptance of God's mercies ending with words that (Lightf.) " strongly 
 resemble Mk iv. 26 sq." 
 
 54 
 
"BELIEVING" [1517] 
 
 anxiety. He giveth unto his beloved in sleep as {abundantly 
 as to j/ouy." 
 
 [1516] So here, Christ's principal saying appears to be 
 a protest against that faithless kind of work which might be 
 called " dead works," the craving for which might lead some 
 to accumulate not only purifications but even almsgivings, 
 not from love for man but from faithless dread of God. 
 In answer to the question put by the Jews, "What are we 
 to do that we may work the works of God?" Jesus replies 
 in effect, ^^ Do, in the first instance, nothing — nothing, at 
 least, that you would call ^ doing! Simply trust to God's 
 Messenger." 
 
 [1517] As regards the metaphor implied in " trusting 
 to" we observe that it occurs in different contexts that may 
 imply different shades of meaning. " He that cometh to me 
 shall surely not hunger and he that trusteth to me shall surely 
 not thirst at any time^ " implies approach to. " This is the will 
 of my Father that every one that beholdeth the Son and 
 trusteth to him should have eternal life^ " implies looking to. 
 But does not this " beholding " correspond to " beholding the 
 Serpent lifted up in the Wilderness"? And, if so, does it 
 not mean that kind of " looking to " Jesus on the Cross which 
 draws the sinner to, or into Jesus, so that he can exclaim 
 with the Apostle, "I have been crucified with Christ^"? 
 
 1 [1515 b'l Ps. cxxvii. I — 2. On " in sleep," see Gesen. 446 a\ "as abun- 
 dantly" Gesen. 486 <«. For the latter, Targ. has "convenienter et recte," 
 but it takes " sleep " as the object (as A.V. and R.V. txt). The Targ. also 
 takes " bread of cutting cares " as " the bread of the miserable for which 
 they have toiled," thus " In vain will ye labour for yourselves, ye that rise 
 up early to practise robbery for yourselves, ye that delay and sit quiet to 
 perpetrate crime, devouring the bread of the miserable for which they have 
 toiled." The first verse of the next Psalm (cxxviii. i) appears to paint the 
 opposite picture of trustful toil. " Blessed is every one that feareth 
 {i.e. reverences) the Lord, that walketh in his ways. For thou shalt eat 
 the labour of thine hands and happy shalt thou be." 
 
 2 vi. 35. ^ vi. 40. 
 * Gal. ii. 20, comp. Rom. vi. 6. 
 
 55 
 
[1518] "BELIEVING" 
 
 The Evangelist himself suggests this in the context ; for 
 he adds (as words of Christ) " No man is able to come unto 
 me except the Father draw him," and, later on, " I, if I be 
 lifted up, will draw all men unto me\" 
 
 [1518] Another aspect of the spiritual union expressed 
 by saying that men are " drawn " towards Christ may be 
 described by saying that Christ is taken into men as their 
 food. Accordingly, this Dialogue goes on to speak first of 
 "trusting to" the Son, and then of "eating the flesh of" 
 the Son, as implying the possession of eternal life^ 
 
 [1519] The conclusion of the section dissipates any 
 literalistic impressions that might be derived from these 
 intense verbal efforts to represent invisible truths so as to 
 force upon us their reality. The disciples are warned by our 
 Lord that " It is the spirit that giveth life, the flesh profiteth 
 nothing: the words that I have spoken to you, [these] are 
 spirit and [these] are life^"; and Peter bases his allegiance 
 to the Lord, and his confession at the close of the narrative, 
 not on the miracle of the loaves and fishes, but on Christ's 
 words : " Lord, to whom shall we go } Thou hast words 
 of eternal life^r Similarly the Samaritans said, " We have 
 heard [him] and know that this is of a truth the Saviour 
 of the world." And Peter, moved by the "words," now 
 says, " We trust completely {TreincrTevKaiJbev) (2442) and know 
 that thou art the Holy One of God^" 
 
 § 19. "Not believing'' 
 
 [1520] Hitherto the Evangelist has made no mention, 
 in his own person, of any actual refusal to believe, or " not 
 
 1 vi. 44, xii. 32. 
 
 2 [1518 rt] Comp. vi. 47 "He that trusteth hath eternal life" (where eiV 
 i\ii though rightly omitted by W. H. from txt has to be supplied, in 
 thought, from the preceding words), and vi. 54 "He that eateth my flesh 
 ...hath eternal life." 
 
 3 vi. 63. 4 vi. 68. ^ vi. 69, see 1629. 
 
 56 
 
BELIEVING " [1521] 
 
 believing^" But now, after the "scandal" created by the 
 Doctrine of Bread, when many of the Lord's disciples deserted 
 Him, John tells us that (vii. 5) " Not even his own brethren 
 were disposed to trust (or, were \thefi\ trusting) to him (2466)." 
 And at the end of the chapter the chief priests and Pharisees 
 ask triumphantly (vii. 48) " Has any one of the rulers trusted 
 to him, or [any one] of the Pharisees ? " This implies a general 
 " not believing," and Nicodemus, " one of the rulers," who is 
 present, does not say anything to the contrary. 
 
 [1521] On the other hand, it is said that " many of the 
 multitude trusted to him," alleging the number of His signs^ 
 — according to which standard Elisha would be called twice 
 as great a prophet as Elijah, since he worked fourteen signs 
 to his Master's seven ! There can be little doubt that the 
 Evangelist does not intend his readers to magnify this kind 
 of "belief," or "trust." It is divided by an immense interval 
 — this arithmetical belief — from that genuine spiritual de- 
 pendence on the Messiah implied in our Lord's words 
 following not long afterwards (vii. 37 — 8) " If any man thirst, 
 let him come unto me and drink. He that trusteth to me,... 
 rivers shall flow from his belly, [rivers] of living water." 
 This carries His doctrine a stage beyond the previous an- 
 nouncement, "//"(? that trusteth to me shall surely never 
 thirst " : for it implies that the believer will satisfy not only 
 his own thirst but also that of others. The faithful convert 
 will convert others to faith l 
 
 1 [1520 rt] It has occurred, but only in Christ's words e.g. iii. 12, v. 38 
 etc. : but there is an approximation to an Evangelical statement in vi. 64 
 "He knew... who they were that did not believe." 
 
 2 vii. 31 "The Messiah, when he shall come, will he do more signs 
 than this [man] hath done ? " 
 
 3 [1521^] In vii. 39, the aorist participle probably includes future 
 believers (2499), who were destined to receive the Spirit after having 
 "trusted to him." 
 
 57 
 
[1522] "BELIEVING" 
 
 § 20. " Believing witnesses " 
 
 [1522] A large part of the next chapter (viii. i — 46) 
 treats of "trusting" as illustrated by the Law about ''two 
 witnesses!' The Father and the Son are declared to testify 
 conjointly^ Apparently the meaning is that Christ's words 
 and acts of healing, by diffusing physical as well as spiritual 
 health among men, testify that they are in accordance with 
 the Laws of Nature, or in other words, with the words of God 
 the Father. In this chapter, the dative is twice used by our 
 Lord, because the meaning is " trust the evidence of" a witness, 
 and because He speaks negatively, blaming the Jews because 
 they will not even trust Him as a witness, much less trust 
 to Him as their Deliverer^, He also once uses (again with 
 a negative) the phrase "trust that'^ as follows (viii. 24) 
 " Except ye trust that I AM [HE], ye shall die in your sins." 
 This is discussed elsewhere (2223), and an attempt is made 
 to shew that it means, unless ye trust in God's purpose to 
 make Man one with Himself 
 
 [1523] Another passage, not in Christ's words but in 
 narrative, distinguishes between ( i ) " many," who " trusted to 
 him," and (2) "those who had trusted him, [being] Jews^" 
 The latter are described as shortly afterwards becoming 
 Christ's bitter opponents, then as "liars," and as "children 
 of the devil." This is one of the most cogent of many 
 passages indicating that John sometimes denotes great differ- 
 ences of meaning by slight differences of word, and that he 
 takes pains to shew that the word " believe " might represent 
 a transient emotion, or might have a non-moral significance. 
 
 1 viii. 18. 
 
 ^ viii. 45 — 6 {bis) ov iricmv^rk fioi. 
 
 ^ viii. 30 — I TToXXoi i IT la-rev a- av els avrov... rovs Trenia-TevKOTas ovtm 
 ^lovdaiovs. On this, see 2506. 
 
 58 
 
BELIEVING" [1525] 
 
 § 21. After the Healing of the Blind Man 
 
 [1524] A new phase of " trusting " is introduced by our 
 Lord when He says to the blind man, whom He has healed, 
 ix. 35 " Thou [at all events] dost trust to (av Trto-reuet? et?) 
 the Son of man^?'^ To Nathanael, stimulating him to a 
 higher trust, Jesus had said that he should see "the angels 
 ascending and descending on the Son of man." He had 
 also said to Nicodemus, " The Son of man must be lifted 
 up that every one that trusteth may in him have eternal 
 life^" — which implied some connexion between "trusting" 
 and the Son of man : but Jesus had never, up to this time, 
 expressly connected " trust " and " the Son of man," as He 
 does here. 
 
 [1525] The phrase seems to denote a trust in, so to speak, 
 the humanity of God, a trust in Man with all his physical 
 and intellectual imperfections ^ as being a revelation of God 
 superior to the revelation of Him contained in the heavens. 
 The blind man has been battling for his Healer against the 
 logic and brow-beating of the Sanhedrin, and has been cast 
 out of the Synagogue. Now he receives his reward. The 
 Saviour, finding him, does not say to him as to the impotent 
 man of Bethesda, " Sin no more," but " Thou [I am sure] 
 dost trust to the Son of man." The sequel illustrates the 
 Johannine conception of faith, and, it may be added, the 
 
 1 [1524 «] On the reasons for taking this as a statement in inter- 
 rogative tone, see 2242. It corresponds to the interrogative statement 
 made to the nobleman iv. 48 " Ye will surely not believe " (1508). The 
 meaning is, "Though all the rulers of Jerusalem refuse to believe, thou at 
 all events, I am sure, dost believe." 
 
 2 i. 51, iii. 14. 
 
 2 [1525 a] Ps. viii. 3 — 5 "The Son of man," in John, is never "the Son 
 of man " as conceived in Daniel seated on the clouds. It is rather the 
 ideal of the Psalmist, as also the ideal suggested in Mk ii. 10 ("the Son 
 of man hath authority upon earth to forgive sins ") and ii. 28 (" the Son of 
 man is lord also of the Sabbath..."). 
 
 59 
 
[1526] "BELIEVING" 
 
 real nature of faith. The man does not even know the 
 meaning of the phrase ; yet he has in his heart the conception 
 of the Person, and is already, virtually, a believer, " Yea, and 
 who is he, Lord, that I may trust to him ? " and then, " Lord, 
 I do trust" 
 
 [1526] As a contrast, the unbelief of the Jews is more 
 and more emphasized. Far from " believing," in the Christian 
 sense, because of the cure of blindness, they are confirmed 
 in -their belief that the Healer is a " sinner^" Jesus, in 
 Solomon's porch, makes one more appeal to them, asking 
 for a lower kind of faith than He had hitherto mentioned. 
 He does not now say "trust to me," nor "trust me'' but 
 " trust works " (x. 37 — 8) : " If I am not doing the works 
 of my Father, trust me not : but if I am doing [them], even 
 if ye be not trusting me, trust the works" He seems to 
 mean, " Only trust that the works are kind as well as 
 wonderful. Only trust in their motive. Then you may go on 
 from that to something higher." For, after " tricst the works" 
 He adds, " that ye may recognise, and grow in the recognition 
 (2511), that in me is the Father and I in the Father." 
 
 [1527] This section concludes with the statement that 
 Jesus, after the Jews had attempted to stone Him in the 
 Temple, went away again beyond Jordan " and abode there " 
 and "many trusted to him there-." The adverb "there" 
 occurs seldom in John at the end of a sentence, and still more 
 seldom at the end of a section. Possibly it is emphatic and 
 is intended to contrast the safety of the Lord, and the 
 multitude of believers, beyond Jordan, with the persecution 
 and unbelief in Jerusalem^'. 
 
 1 The only mention of " believing," in the Evangelist's words, at this 
 stage, is (ix. 18) ''The Jews therefore did not believe concerning him that 
 he had been blind and recovered sight until they called his parents...." 
 
 - X. 40, 42. 
 
 3 [1527 «] 'Efcet is certainly emphatic in Jn xi. 8 "Goest thou again 
 there [of all places]?" meaning "the very place where they sought to 
 stone thee." 
 
 60 
 
BELIEVING" [1529] 
 
 § 22. The Raising of Lazarus 
 
 [1528] " Trusting" is repeatedly mentioned in the Raising 
 of Lazarus as, in part, the cause of the miracle, or of the 
 manner in which it is performed. When our Lord prays 
 aloud at the grave, He says (xi. 42) " For the sake of the 
 multitude that standeth around I said [it] that they may 
 trust that thou didst send me " ; and previously, to the 
 disciples (xi. , 14 — 15) "Lazarus is dead, and I rejoice on 
 account of you — in order that ye may trust — that I was not 
 there." The latter passage is obscure (2099) : but it seems 
 to include the meaning that the Lord's absence has been 
 ordained in order that the belief of the disciples in Him may 
 be strengthened by the sequel i.e. the Raising of Lazarus. 
 Nevertheless, "in order that ye may trust" (aorist) is gram- 
 matically remarkable if it means " that ye may grow in trust," 
 or " that ye may continue to trust me." It would most 
 naturally mean " that ye may become believers " ; but, in 
 that sense, it could not be applied to those who were already 
 Christ's most devoted disciples \ 
 
 [1529] Difficulty is also presented by the contrast be- 
 tween (i) the words uttered by our Lord to Martha and 
 (2) what is commonly interpreted as His subsequent reference 
 to them : 
 
 (i) (xi. 23 — 6) "Thy brother shall rise again... I am the 
 resurrection and the life. He that believeth in (eU) me, even 
 though he die (or, be dead), shall live ; and every one that 
 is living and believing in me shall assuredly never die. Thou 
 believest this"- ? " 
 
 1 For the difference between Trto-Tevarjre and iriarevr^Te, see 2524 — 5. 
 
 2 [1529 rt] xi. 26 Tn<TT€V€is TovTo. On this construction, rare in N.T. 
 see 1507^. It is a short way of saying, "Thou believest me as to this.?" 
 "Believe" has advantages over "trust" in the rendering of this passage. 
 
 61 
 
[1530] "BELIEVING 
 
 (2) (xi. 40) " Said I not unto thee^ * If thou shalt believe 
 ('Ear TTLa-revo-rjf;) thou shalt see the glory of God ' ? " 
 
 To the disciples our Lord had said that the sickness 
 of Lazarus was to be for the glory of God and of the Son 
 of God 2; but not to Martha. And there is nothing in 
 Christ's first utterance to her to suggest that He is looking 
 forward to any "rising" of Lazarus from the dead before 
 that general "rising again" which He Himself mentions to 
 her. Nor is there anything in it to indicate to Martha that 
 her " believing " was to be a condition of her " seeing " her 
 brother raised from the dead. On the contrary, the story 
 shews that Martha was quite ready to believe that Jesus 
 could have saved Lazarus from death, and could, even now 
 that he was dead, restore him to life^ But any expectation 
 of this kind would naturally be suppressed in her by Christ's 
 mention of the " rising again " in general terms, applying to 
 all believers^ 
 
 [1530] But may He not have uttered these words to 
 Martha on a previous occasion } Bearing in mind the saying 
 of Jesus to Nathanael, " Thou shalt see greater things than 
 these," we ought to find no difficulty in supposing that He 
 uttered similar sayings to other converts. To Martha, there- 
 fore, at some time before the Raising of Lazarus, perhaps at 
 
 1 [1529 b'\ Or as W. H. (on idv) " that, if thou shalt believe, thou shalt 
 see." But it is more in accordance with Johannine usage to print on 
 *Eai/ as above. See on " recitativum (2189—90)." 
 
 2 xi. 4 "This sickness is not unto death but for {virip) the glory of 
 God in order that the Son of God may be glorified through it." 
 
 3 xi. 21 — 2 "If thou hadst been here my brother had not died. Even 
 now I know that whatsoever thou shalt ask God, God will give thee." 
 
 * [1529^] xi. 23 — 4 "'Thy brother shall (or, will) rise again {dvaa-rri- 
 a-erai)'...^ I know that he will rise again i7i the rising again {dvaa-Trjaerai iv 
 TTJ dvaa-rdcrei) in the last day...'" The following words " I am l/ie rising 
 again (ai/aoT-acrts) and the life. He that believeth in me shall Hve even if 
 he be dead, and every one that liveth and believeth in me shall never die," 
 seem expressly intended to include all "believers," and to exclude all 
 expectation of a material or special revivification for her brother. 
 
 62 
 
BELIEVING" [1532] 
 
 her conversion, He may have said, " If thou shalt believe, 
 thou shalt see the glory of GodV' no doubt in a spiritual 
 sense — as Origen interprets the saying to Nathanael and the 
 disciples^ — meaning that she should see the mysteries of the 
 divine Love. But, in such a saying, " the glory of God " 
 would include that particular "glory" which accrued to the 
 Father in heaven from the signs worked by the Son on 
 earth — a " glory " that the Pharisees did not discern because 
 they did not " believe." 
 
 [1531] Assuming the relation between Jesus and the 
 family of Lazarus to be as John records it, we are con- 
 fronted, in the death of Lazarus, with a crisis in the Christian 
 Church — the first death in a family of "believers." Many 
 years afterwards, the Thessalonians were startled by the 
 death of a believer as being something disappointing and 
 unsettling. They seem to have expected that the Lord 
 would come from heaven and take all the saints up to His 
 presence before death could touch them. How much more 
 might the death of a friend of Jesus cause a chill to fall 
 on the faith of some, in our Lord's lifetime, who " supposed 
 that the kingdom of God was immediately to appear^" ! 
 
 [1532] According to this view, Jesus, face to face with 
 a threatening crisis for some of His dearest friends, is here 
 strengthening the faith of one of them by referring to some 
 
 1 [1530 <2] Comp. Mk iv. ii "To you is given the mystery of the 
 kingdom of God" (where Mt.-Lk. have "to know the mysteries..."; and 
 "to see the mystery" would make good sense) also Mk ix. i "There are 
 some of those standing here that shall not taste of death till they see the 
 kingdom of God having come in power" (Mt. xvi. 28 "the Son of man 
 coming in his kingdom," Lk. ix. 27 simply " the kingdom of God "). 
 
 ^ [1530 b\ Orig. Cels. i. 48 tovto de to dvoi^dfjvai tovs ovpavovs TrpoKiyatv 
 Tois ixaSrjTais 6 (rcoTrjp ecrofievov oyJAOfxevois avro... Kal ovtcos UavXos rjpTrdyrf (Is- 
 rpirov ovpavbv Trporepov Idcov avrbv dvoixOevTa... "I do not suppose," he 
 says {zd.\ "that the sensible heaven has been opened and its material 
 frame {crcofxa) divided by opening in order that Ezekiel might record such 
 a thing." 
 
 3 Lk. xix. II. 
 
 A. V. 63 6 
 
 OP THE 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF 
 
[1533] " BELIEVING " 
 
 previous utterance to her, not recorded in the Gospel. Strange 
 though this may seem, it is the explanation adopted by 
 Westcott of words uttered by Jesus on another occasion, 
 " But I said to you ' Ye have both seen [me] and did not 
 believe^ ' " : and its adoption there is more difficult than here, 
 because here there is some antecedent probability that our 
 Lord would have made to Martha the same sort of promise 
 that He made to Nathanael and others. 
 
 [1533] Reviewing all the mentions of " believing " in the 
 Raising of Lazarus, we are led to see some similarity between 
 the attitude of Christ here and His attitude in the Synoptic 
 Gospel when preparing for an act of healing where " belief," 
 or " faith," cannot be expected from the person to be healed 
 or revivified. The Synoptists describe our Lord as stimulating 
 the faith of the parents, or as being moved by it to perform 
 a cure (" Only believe," " ' If thou canst,' all things are possible 
 to him that believeth," "O woman, great is thy faith^"): so, 
 in the Johannine healing of the nobleman's son, the father 
 is stimulated (1508) by the words "Ye will not believe'": 
 and so, in this critical conflict, John describes the Lord as, 
 so to speak, marking out the field of battle and strengthening 
 the weakness of His friends and allies, that their faith may, 
 in the order of the Father's purposes, enable the Son to 
 perform the coming miracle. 
 
 [1534] Even though we may be obliged to reject some 
 of the details of the Raising of Lazarus as unhistorical, we 
 may be able to accept the fact that our Lord did occasionally 
 restore to life those who would ordinarily be described as 
 "dead." And the first death among His disciples might well 
 cause questioning to the Saviour. Was He to raise up the 
 dead in this case ? If so, was He to do so afterwards in every 
 case.? He might feel sure from the beginning, that the 
 
 1 vi. 36. 2 Mk V. 36, Lk. viii. 50, Mk ix. 23, Mt. xv. 28. 
 
 3 iv. 48. 
 
 64 
 
BELIEVING" [1536] 
 
 sickness of a particular sufferer was to be " for glory " and 
 not " for death " : but whether the " glory " included deliver- 
 ance from physical death, might not be revealed to Him at 
 first ; and the strain on the faith of His disciples and friends 
 might profoundly affect Him, even at the very time when 
 He taught Martha that the Son of Man Himself, in His unity 
 with the Father, was "the Rising Again and the Life^" — 
 and that no man, once joined to the Father through the Son, 
 could ever die. 
 
 [1535] The sudden departure of Martha from Jesus, 
 after her profession of faith in Him 2, may be supposed to 
 have prevented her from receiving any of those suggestions 
 (of a miraculous revivification) which had been thrown out 
 by Him to the disciples. And they are no more than 
 suggestions. Jesus says, at first, " I go to wake him," and 
 is understood literally : but afterwards " He said plainly, 
 Lazarus is dead," and makes no mention of any purpose to 
 raise him from the dead. Without much straining of the 
 narrative, we may suppose that our Lord did not receive 
 the full revelation of the divinely purposed rising again of 
 Lazarus till He stood near the grave, with His disciples and 
 Martha and Mary, all believing in Him, and all prepared to 
 believe in Him — whatever He might do or not do. 
 
 [1536] Whatever uncertainty may attend the traditions 
 concerning " believing " in connexion with Martha, the 
 Evangelist leaves us under no doubt as to the effect of 
 the miracle on the " believing " of the Jews and as to its 
 general consequence : " Those that came to Mary believed 
 in him " ; but the chief priests and Pharisees said (xi. 48... 53) 
 " If we let him [continue] thus, all will believe in him, and 
 the Romans will come and take away our [holy] place and 
 
 ^ The same word is practically repeated in "Thy brother shall rise 
 again^^ and "I am the rising again^^ (xi. 23, 25). 
 2 xi. 28 "Having said this she went away." 
 
 65 6—2 
 
[1537] "BELIEVING" 
 
 our nation... From that day therefore they took counsel to 
 kill him." Thus, like all the public signs of Jesus, the sign 
 of the Raising of Lazarus produces a mingled harvest, tares 
 and wheat, belief and unbelief. Or, to take the metaphor 
 preferred by John, the increasing light produces in some souls 
 a shadow of increasing darkness. 
 
 § 23. ''Believing in the light'' 
 
 [1537] In the next chapter the darkness just mentioned 
 is described as becoming darker than ever — and this, as an 
 indirect consequence of " believing." That the chief priests 
 should " take counsel for " the death of Jesus, dealing with 
 Him as a magician, was at all events from their point of view 
 not an immoral act ; but now they purpose the death of a 
 man against whom they bring no charge (xii. ii): "They 
 took counsel to kill Lazarus also, because, on his account, 
 many of the ]qv^s... began to believe in {iirlarevov el^) Jesus^y 
 
 [1538] Perhaps the imperfect tense (" they began to 
 believe ") and the fact that these ''Jews " did not believe in 
 Jesus on account of Himself but '' 07i account of Lazarus,'' 
 and the emphasis laid by the Evangelist on the great part 
 played by the " sign " in winning for Jesus a welcome from 
 "the multitude," are all intended to prepare the reader for 
 finding that this "belief" will speedily end in nothing; and 
 that more real importance is to be attached to the quiet 
 approach of the Greeks to our Lord, through the mediation 
 of Philip, " Sir, we would see Jesus^." At all events " the 
 multitude" is soon afterwards mentioned — for the last time 
 in the Gospel — as taking the Voice of the Father from 
 Heaven to be thunder, or, at best, the voice of an angel ; 
 and their last words to the Son of man, — who had lived and 
 
 ^ Or, " believed from time to time," i.e. now some, now others. But 
 "began to believe," or "were disposed to believe," is more probable. 
 2 xii. 20 — 21. 
 
 66 
 
"BELIEVING" [1539] 
 
 was about to die, for their sake — are " Who is this Son of 
 man^? 
 
 [1539] This was darkness indeed, as a conclusion of a 
 Gospel of light : and the rest of this section treats of " be- 
 lieving," or rather " not believing," under the metaphor of 
 darkness and light. In this connexion, there are two sayings 
 of Jesus about believing. The first of these is addressed to 
 the multitude after they have asked the question " Who 
 is this Son of man^?" He no longer bids them believe in 
 the Son of man, nor in Himself, but in "the light." The 
 Epistle says " He that loveth his brother abideth in the 
 light " ; and " He that saith he is in the light and hateth 
 his brother is in the darkness^" This appears to be the 
 predominant thought here. As light was the first created 
 thing in the creation of the world, so what corresponds to it, 
 namely, love, is the first principle in the spiritual world, the 
 medium through which God is discerned by man. Christ's 
 hearers were in danger of losing the last spark of this 
 spiritual faculty through their subservience to conventional 
 religion and through their conventional desire to persecute 
 non-conformity. In the presence of these spiritual weaklings 
 Christ abates His claim. He does not say " Believe in me, or 
 Believe in the Son, that ye may become the sons of God," 
 but " Believe at all events in the light, so far as"* ye have it 
 still with you, that ye may become sons of light." 
 
 1 xii. 34. 
 
 2 [1539 «] Jesus had said nothing here about a "Son of man." His 
 words were, "And /, if I be Hfted up from the earth, will draw all men 
 unto me." But His doctrine to Nicodemus had mentioned " the lifting 
 up of the Son of man," and perhaps the Evangelist wishes to describe the 
 "multitude" as rebeUing against this new term (which they had heard 
 from Jesus on previous occasions) and as preferring the familiar and (for 
 them) conventional term "Christ" or "Messiah" : "We have heard from 
 the Law that the Christ abideth for ever, and how sayest thou that 
 the Son of man must be lifted up? Who is this Son of man} ^ 
 
 3 I Jn ii. 9— lo. 
 
 * xii. 36 "So far as." On o)?, as distinct from ewy, see 2201. 
 
 67 
 
[1540] "BELIEVING" 
 
 [1540] This expression " sons of light " is followed by an 
 evangelistic comment indicating that the appeal was vain ; 
 and the language suggests that the light, henceforth, was 
 hidden from the Jews. " These things spake Jesus, and he 
 went away and was hidden (2538) from them!' Then the 
 Evangelist sums up his account of the national unbelief. 
 " Though he had done so many signs," he says, " they did 
 not believe in him^r Their unbelief was a judicial retribution 
 predicted by Isaiah : " For this cause they were not able to 
 believe'^ because again Isaiah said, * He hath blinded their 
 eyes....'" Then turning from the nation as a whole to their 
 "rulers," he concludes with an astonishing remark. In spite 
 of the general unbelief we should not have been surprised 
 to hear that " a few," or " some " of the rulers believed : but 
 John says : " Nevertheless, however, of the rulers also m,any 
 believed in him ^ ; but on account of the Pharisees they would 
 not confess [him] in order that they might not be put out 
 of the synagogue ; for they loved the glory of men rather 
 than-* the glory of God." 
 
 [1541] This remarkable statement may be perhaps best 
 explained by supposing that these " many rulers " had not 
 only made formal profession of belief in Jesus (having been 
 perhaps baptized by His disciples) but had also believed in 
 Him with some degree of genuine conviction, and with 
 attachment, calling themselves His disciples — but, like Joseph 
 of Arimathaia, "secretly, for fear of the Jews^" If so, it 
 would seem that John deliberately uses the phrase " believed 
 in him " in order to shew how even such " believing " might 
 come to naught without "confession^." He is more severe 
 
 1 xii. 37 ovK eni(TT€vov, see 2466, perh. "they were not disposed to 
 believe in him." ^ xii. 39. 
 
 ^ xii. 42 oficos fxevTOi Kol €K Ta)V dpxovTcov TToXXoi €TrLcrT€V(rav els avTov. 
 
 * xii. 43 "Rather than," fiaWov rfnep, almost = " and not," see 2092. 
 
 ^ xix. 38. 
 
 ® Comp. Rom. x. 9 — 11 "If thou shalt confess with thy mouth Jesus 
 [as] Lord, and shalt believe in thy heart that God raised him from 
 
 68 
 
"BELIEVING" [1543] 
 
 on them here than on Joseph of Arimathaea later on. 
 Joseph's motive for secrecy, says the Evangelist, was " fear 
 of the Jews " ; the motive of these " many " was " the love 
 of the glory of men rather than of the glory of God." But 
 he infers this " love of glory " from the fact that they feared 
 to be "cast out of the synagogue." 
 
 [1542] Many people, now-a-days, would consider this an 
 austere inference. A man may "love the glory of God" 
 more than " the glory of men," and yet may be deterred from 
 doing what is right, if his love of God's glory is weaker 
 than his fear of being cast out from friendship, from social 
 intercourse, and from community of worship, with his 
 neighbours and kinsmen. All the more reasonable is it to 
 suppose that John, when concluding his history of the growth 
 of belief and unbelief among the Jews during Christ's 
 preaching of the Gospel, wishes to brand with the stamp 
 of inferiority, or spuriousness, that sort of faith in Christ 
 which might be called " belief in Him " and yet did not 
 lead to public confession. 
 
 [1543] We now come to the last saying of our Lord 
 about "believing," — the last, that is to say, in His public 
 teaching: xii. 44 — 6 "Jesus cried aloud and said, He that 
 believeth in me believeth not in me but in him, that sent me^ 
 and he that beholdeth me beholdeth him that sent me. I, 
 light ^, have come into the world in order that everyone that 
 believeth in me may not abide in the darkness T This is not 
 said to have been addressed to any class in particular. It is 
 a warning to all the world that "belief" in Christ is not really 
 
 the dead, thou shalt be saved : for with the heart man believeth unto 
 righteousness ; and with the mouth confession is made unto salvation. 
 For the Scripture saith, Whosoever believeth on him shall not be put to 
 shame." Perhaps John implies that if these rulers had "confessed," they 
 would not have been " put to shame," nor would they have been afterwards 
 ashamed of Christ crucified. 
 
 ^ On the force of this appositional construction, see 1933. 
 
 69 
 
[1544] "BELIEVING" 
 
 belief in Him unless it is belief also in Him that sent 
 Christ, nor is it true belief if the believer " abide in darkness " 
 i.e. in doubt, or fear, or unbrotherly feeling towards his fellow- 
 men. 
 
 [1544] The announcement is to be read along with the 
 description of the "belief" of the rulers, many of whom — 
 once, at all events — " believed in him." There are degrees of 
 " darkness." Some of these " rulers " had perhaps so far 
 turned against their Master that they now agreed with 
 Caiaphas that " one man must die for the people " ; these were 
 " abiding in the darkness " of midnight. Others, like Joseph, 
 had not voted with Caiaphas ^ ; but Joseph is not recorded 
 to have spoken or voted against Caiaphas, and these, too, 
 may have kept silent " through fear of the Jews." The 
 conduct of this second class was typified by Nicodemus, of 
 whom it is twice said that "he came to Jesus by night V 
 It was not the blackest of the "night" — the "night" asso- 
 ciated with Judas^ : but still it was the night or twilight 
 of men " abiding in darkness " and not " believing," — not 
 at least in the full sense of the term. With these warnings 
 against false or formal or fearful belief, and with these 
 commands to "believe in the light," the public teaching of 
 Christ is brought to its close. 
 
 § 24. The Last Discourse 
 
 [1545] After the Washing of Feet and the exhortation 
 to the disciples to imitate their Lord's action, the discourse 
 
 ^ Lk. xxiii. 51. 
 
 2 Jn iii. 2, xix. 39. 
 
 3 [1544a] Jn xiii. 30 "Having received the sop, therefore, he went 
 out. Now it was night P The only other mention of "night" in the 
 Evangelist's words (apart from Christ's) refers to the disciples on the 
 night before Peter returned to our Lord through the water (xxi. 3) 
 "/« that night they took nothing^ 
 
 70 
 
"BELIEVING" [1546] 
 
 turns on the "stumbling^" that would be caused by the 
 impending betrayal and death of Christ ; and the only 
 mention of believing in this chapter is (xiii. 19) "From 
 henceforth 2 I say [it] to you before it come to pass, that 
 ye may believe, when it hath come to pass, that I am [he]." 
 The aorist subjunctive, which is probably the correct reading, 
 may denote that the verb refers to "believing" the particular 
 prediction just mentioned, so that the words mean " that ye 
 may believe that I am he [concerning whom, it has been written 
 ^ He that eateth my bread, . .']^" This is Origen's explanation ; 
 and, if it is correct, the passage describes our Lord as 
 endeavouring to strengthen the faith of the disciples to meet 
 a particular emergency (as in the Raising of Lazarus'*). 
 
 [1546] Finding that they are still weak and their 
 hearts full of trouble, He presently recurs to the thought 
 of " trusting " or " believing," and now in a general sense 
 (xiv. i) " Ye believe (or, Believe^ in God. Believe i?i me also" 
 and (speaking to Philip) (xiv. 10) " Believest thou not that 
 I am in the Father and the Father in me ? " Then He 
 addresses all the disciples, (xiv. 11 — 12) '^Believe me that 
 I am in the Father and the Father in me : but, if [ye can] 
 not [believe me, i.e. my mere word], believe on account of the 
 works [by] themselves" ''He that believeth in me, the works 
 
 ^ The -ze/^n/ " stumbling " is not used till xvi. i "These things have 
 I spoken unto you that ye may not be caused to stumble {tva fir) o-KavdaXia-- 
 S-qre)." But the thought of " stumbling" extends from xiii. 19 onwards. 
 
 2 [1545 <«] "From henceforth" may perhaps mean, that Christ had 
 not said it before, because He desired to give Judas the opportunity 
 of repenting during the Washing of Feet. But there had been no 
 repentance, and this had been indicated by the words (xiii. 10 — 11) 
 "Ye are not all clean." Since therefore the treachery could not be 
 averted, the Saviour says that " from henceforth " He will not conceal it. 
 
 3 [1545 <^] So Origen ad too. Huet ii. 394 E 1va...'jrt(rrev(rr]T€ ort eya elfii 
 irepl ov ravra imrpo^rjTfvTai. Origen comments at great length on this 
 passage (Huet ii. 394—8). In the first three quotations of it, the text has 
 7ri(rT€v(rr]T€y but in the three following ones iricrrevijTey see 2524. 
 
 * xi. 15 tva TriarrevarjTe, see 2525. 
 
 71 
 
[1547] "BELIEVING" 
 
 that I do he also shall do; and greater works than these 
 shall he do because I go to the Father." He concludes by 
 declaring that He has carried out the intention, mentioned 
 above, to warn the disciples before the evil falls upon them 
 (1545), " / say \it\ to you before it come to pass (Trpo rov 
 yevia-Oai) that ye may believe {TriarevcrrjTe) when it shall have 
 come to pass, that I am he!' These words He repeats, except 
 the last clause, saying (xiv. 29) ''And now I have said \it'\ 
 to you, before it hath come to pass {irpXv yevkaQaC) that, when 
 it shall have come to pass, ye may believe {irtcneva-r^Te).'' The 
 object of belief ("that I am he") is not repeated, but 
 presumably it is omitted merely for brevity ; and the aorist 
 subjunctive here, as above, indicates a particular, not a 
 general, belief — a belief that Christ's sufferings were fore- 
 ordained and prophesied. The main object of belief men- 
 tioned in this section is of a general character, the Unity 
 of the Father and the Son (" I in the Father and the Father 
 in me^"), implied by a belief in the Father inseparable 
 from a belief in the Son ("Ye believe {or, Believe) in God. 
 Believe in me also^"). 
 
 [1547] In all these exhortations and strengthenings, 
 "belief," in its various forms, is not regarded as an end or 
 ultimate object. It is merely an imperfect condition, a 
 process of passing into unity with the Father in the Son, 
 so as to " abide " in love. " Abiding " not " believing,!' 
 "peace" not "faith," are the ultimate objects. Hence, in 
 the chapter that describes Christ as the Vine, and the 
 disciples as the branches that ''abide" in the Vine (xv. 
 I — 2y), there is no mention of " believing." But the following 
 chapter once more takes up the task of strengthening the 
 disciples against the trials of " persecution " : and now Jesus 
 explains that these persecutions arise from unbelief for which 
 the world will be condemned. The Paraclete will convict 
 
 72 
 
BELIEVING" [1549] 
 
 the world of sin, He says, " because they believe not in me^!' 
 This harmonizes with what He told the Jews : " This is the 
 work of God, that ye believe in him whom he \i£. the Father] 
 sent 2." The "work" of God being "belief," it follows (for 
 those who accept Christ's teaching about a devil) that the 
 " work " of the devil, or " sin," is unbelief or disbelief And 
 the object of the unbelief is the same as the object of 
 the belief, "he whom God hath sent," that is to say, God's 
 messenger or representative in every age and society, those 
 men and women who are, as Plato says, " most like God," 
 
 [1548] This high and pure "belief," which the world 
 had not, the disciples had, (xvi. 27) " For the Father [of] 
 himself loveth you because ye have loved me and have 
 believed that I came forth from \the house of\ the Father!' But 
 the disciples themselves, even while possessing this precious 
 belief, appear to confuse it with one of a baser and less 
 enduring metal — belief based upon the evidence of signs : 
 for, because Jesus has read their thoughts, they say to Him 
 (xvi. 30) "Now we know that thou knowest all things... 
 hereby (eV tovtw) we believe that thou camest forth from God." 
 This mischievous complacency in the possession of a definite 
 religious belief based upon definite evidential proof — the root 
 of how many evils to Christendom ! — Christ hastens to 
 destroy : " For the moment ye believe I Behold the hour 
 Cometh and hath come for you to be scattered, each to his 
 own, and to leave me alone." 
 
 [1549] This is the last mention of " believing " made by 
 our Lord in His teaching to the disciples, before the Resurrec- 
 tion : and it is of the nature of a warning against making 
 "belief" one's end, and, so to speak, "believing in believing." 
 We are not to aim at believing but at " peace," and this, 
 a peace, not gained through conformity with the selfish 
 world, but through believing in the unselfish Messenger, 
 
 ^ xvi. 9. 2 yj 29. 
 
 73 
 
[1550] "BELIEVING" 
 
 whom the Father has sent to conquer the selfishness of the 
 world. This we are taught by the last words of the Last 
 Discourse (xvi. 33) " These things have I spoken to you that 
 in me ye may have peace. In the world ye have tribulation. 
 But be of good cheer, I have conquered the world." 
 
 § 25. The Last Prayer 
 
 [1550] Our Lord, in His Last Prayer, prays for the 
 unity of the disciples, but not that they may "believe," or 
 "have faith." The latter petition He here reserves for "the 
 world." Concerning the disciples — in spite of His warning 
 that their belief will not prevent them from deserting Him — 
 He says (xvii. 8) " They believed that thou didst send me!' 
 Both for them and for those whom He calls (xvii. 20) " the 
 believers through their word " — that is, the converts made 
 by the Apostles — He prays that they may be "all one," 
 one with the Father, and with the Son, and with each other. 
 But in connexion with "the world" He mentions the word 
 "believing" as an object to be attained hereafter, thus 
 (xvii. 21) "In order that they also \i.e. the Church] may be 
 in us, in order that the world may grow in the belief {irioTevri) 
 that thou didst send me!' The verb is in the present (not 
 the aorist) (2524 /<?//.) and the prayer is that the world may 
 receive a living and growing belief, not a mere formal one, 
 that Jesus of Nazareth was sent by God — a belief, not based 
 on signs and wonders but on the unity of the Church 
 with the Father and the Son, through the Spirit, in brotherly 
 love. 
 
 § 26. After the Death and Resurrection 
 
 [1551] There remain — besides an utterance of our Lord, 
 which will be considered last of all — four statements about 
 "believing" made by the Evangelist. The first of these 
 attests the flow of blood and water from the side of Jesus 
 
 74 
 
"BELIEVING" [1553] 
 
 on the Cross : (xix. 35) "And he that hath seen hath testified, 
 and his testimony is true ; and he (2383) knoweth that he 
 saith true that ye also may grow in belief (TrLarevrjre)" If 
 W. H. are right, as they probably are, in reading the present 
 subjunctive, the belief is of a general and vital kind, including 
 a belief in the Lord as "the fountain for sin and for un- 
 cleanness\" 
 
 [1552] Next comes the earliest mention of "believing" 
 after the Resurrection : (xx. 8) " Then therefore entered in the 
 other disciple also, he that came first to the tomb, and Ae 
 saw and believed {eihev koL iTrio-Tevcrev) : for not even yet 
 did they know the scripture, [how] that he must rise from 
 the dead." Apparently this disciple " believed " in Christ's 
 resurrection, simply on the evidence of the open tomb and 
 the grave clothes — although the open tomb suggested to 
 Mary Magdalene something quite different, namely, that 
 the Lord's enemies had taken away the body. With this 
 must be taken the reply of Thomas to the assertion of the 
 disciples that they had "seen" the Lord, (xx. 25) "Except 
 I see in his hands the print of the na.ils.., I will assuredly not 
 believer From the sequel it would seem that Thomas and 
 the beloved disciple were alike in one respect, since both 
 ''saw and believed!' What our Lord says about this will 
 be considered later on. 
 
 [1553] The fourth Evangelistic mention of " believing " 
 describes the object of the Gospel (xx. 31) "But these things 
 have been written that ye may grow in the belief (Tno-Tevrjre) 
 that Jesus is the Christ the Son of God, and that, believing 
 [this] (7ri(TT6vovT€^), ye may have life in his name." Accepting 
 once more W. H.'s reading, the present subjunctive, we 
 interpret it as denoting the object to be not the profession 
 of faith on the part of converts, but the growing faith, or 
 
 ^ [1551 (t;] Zech. xiii. i. If the aorist were read the meaning might be 
 belief in this special fact, or that " ye might become believers," but more 
 probably the former. 
 
 75 
 
[1554] « BELIEVING " 
 
 abiding faith, of those already converted. But why does the 
 writer introduce the words " in his name " (" life in his name ") 
 since we have seen above (1483 — 7) that Origen is probably 
 correct in supposing "believing in his name''' to be an inferior 
 stage of belief to " believing in him " ? The answer is that 
 he does not speak here of '^believing in the name** of Jesus, 
 but of ''having life in his name!* And "name" here, as in 
 the Epistle^ is connected with the word " Son," implying that 
 life is found in the divine Sonship of Christ. There is, 
 therefore, no reference here to the rudimentary or initial 
 faith professed at baptism. The writer is addressing believers 
 already baptized in the name of Jesus Christ the Son of God, 
 and he says to them, in effect, " I write unto you, children 
 of God, in order that you may grow in the faith that Jesus 
 is the Messiah, the Son of God, and that, growing in this 
 faith, you may have life in His Sonship." 
 
 [1554] Last comes the saying of our Lord (xx. 29) 
 " Because thou hast seen me thou hast believed ! Blessed 
 [are] they that [shall] have not seen and [yet] [shall] have 
 believed!* to be considered along with the statement that 
 "the other" disciple ''saw and believed*,* and that Thomas 
 said "except I see...\ will assuredly not believe'^!* Both 
 Origen and Chrysostom appear to take the aorist participles 
 as referring to future believers (" those after the apostles **Y. 
 
 1 [1553^] I Jn iii. 23 '■' the name of his Son!' \. 13" the name 0/ the Son 
 of God" In I Jn ii. 12 "on account of his name'' follows the words 
 "I write unto you, tittle children {reKvia), because your sins are forgiven," 
 and appears to mean that both the " childhood " and the " forgiveness " 
 are "on account of" the divine Sonship of Christ. These are the only 
 instances of " name " in the Epistle. 
 
 ^ MaKapioi ol fXTj IBovres koi TriaTeva-avrcs, comp. xx. 8 koI cidev /cat 
 f7ri<TT€va-ev, and xx. 25 eav firj iSa)...ov /X17 TriOTevora). 
 
 3 [1554 a] Origen blames those who thought that a superior blessing 
 was pronounced on those who had " not seen," because, he says, "according 
 to their interpretation the successors of the apostles {ol fifra rovs dn-ooTo- 
 \ovs) are more blessed than the apostles themselves" (Huet ii. 195c). 
 
 76 
 
BELIEVING" [1556] 
 
 The aorist participle might have that meaning even if the 
 time of the " blessing " had been defined as present by the 
 insertion of " are" as in the Sermon on the Mount " Blessed 
 are ye when men shall revile you^'' \ and it may much more 
 easily have this meaning where the time of the blessing is 
 left undefined. Antecedently, it seems likely that this refer- 
 ence to future believers should be at all events included, 
 and very unlikely that it should be restricted to, say, a score 
 of unmentioned persons, thus : — " blessed are those who, in 
 the course of the last week, have believed [on the strength 
 of the testimony of those who saw me at the beginning of 
 the week], and who have not [themselves] seen [me]." 
 
 [1555] But are we to suppose that those who believe 
 without having seen are more " blessed " than those who 
 believe because they have seen ? Origen earnestly maintains 
 that this is unreasonable. The meaning is, he says, that the 
 former class also is " blessed," not that it is more " blessed." 
 In that case, however, is not the statement a truism ? And 
 what is the force of making the statement to Thomas, unless 
 it suggests a gentle reproach of some kind, e.g. that some 
 of those who will believe without seeing are more blessed 
 than some of those who believe after seeing? Moreover, 
 is no contrast intended between the beloved disciple, who 
 *^saw and believed,'' but without asking to "see," and Thomas 
 who ''saw and believed" but not till he had refused to believe 
 unless he was allowed to feel as well as to see } 
 
 [1556] Chrysostom, at all events, recognises such a 
 contrast as likely to occur to his readers. His words are 
 as follows, "And yet, some one may say 2, the disciples 'saw 
 
 Chrysostom even paraphrases the aorist by the future "He pronounces 
 a blessing not on the disciples alone but also on those who shall believe 
 after them {rov^ fier cKcivovs iria-TevaovTas)" 
 
 ^ Mt. V. 1 1 fiaKupioi eare orav oveidiaoxnv v/xas (sim. Lk. vi. 22). 
 
 2 [1556 a] The Latin translation in Migne gives " inquies " for (fyrjalv. 
 But it might mean "the sacred writer says." This is the general meaning 
 of (fiT](riv in quotations. 
 
 77 
 
[1557] "BELIEVING" 
 
 and believed/ [True,] but they sought no such thing [as 
 Thomas sought] (ovSkv tolovtov e^rjrriaav), but on the 
 evidence of the napkins {a)OC diro rcov crovhapicov) they 
 straightway accepted the word concerning the resurrection, 
 and before they had beheld the body [of the risen Saviour] 
 they exhibited the belief [that He had risen] in completeness." 
 
 [1557] These words call attention to yet one more 
 difficulty in the context. For the Gospel says "^^," i.e. " the 
 other disciple " (not Peter), " saw and believed," and it 
 suggests that Peter, though he had seen, had not " seen and 
 believed." But Chrysostom assumes that both the disciples ^^saw 
 and believed^ So, too, says an ancient Greek commentary 
 in Cramer: "When these, having beheld the linen cloths, and 
 having believed, departed to their homes in amazement.'* 
 And SS reads the plural ''they saw and believed^" 
 
 [1558] These readings are not in the least surprising. 
 What is surprising is that any MS. has been allowed to 
 preserve the present reading, which implies unbelief, or 
 slowness of belief, in Peter as compared with "the other 
 disciple." Yet this, by reason of its difficulty and the consent 
 of all the uncial MSS., must be accepted as the true reading. 
 And it raises a question similar to that which is suggested 
 by Chrysostom, Does not the Evangelist mention two kinds 
 of " seeing and believing " ? The beloved disciple " saw and 
 believed " on the mere evidence of what was to be seen in 
 the open grave. He did not "seek" what Thomas sought: 
 he did not say, " Until I have seen the mark of the nails in 
 his hands I will assuredly not believe " ; he " saw " much less 
 than Thomas demanded to see, and yet he " believed " ; 
 surely the Lord would pronounce him " blessed " ! 
 
 Accepting the text, as it stands, concerning the two 
 disciples (without Chrysostom's alteration ''they believed," 
 
 ^ [1557 «] The Latin MSS. have '''■he saw and believed," but some 
 of these agree with N in carrying on the sing, thus " for not even yet did 
 he know the Scripture." 
 
 78 
 
"BELIEVING" [1560] 
 
 and without the Latin alteration ''he knew") we arrive at 
 the following probable inferences concerning the Evangelist's 
 meaning and motive. 
 
 [1559] (i) He regards "belief" upon detailed ocular 
 evidence as inferior to that kind of "knowledge" which is 
 given to us by the Spirit interpreting the Scripture as a 
 whole ^ — that is to say, by the Spirit of God interpreting 
 the history of man in the light of the Incarnation. Yet 
 both ''belief" and "knowledge" must play their several 
 parts. The beloved disciple, he says, '''believed'' on slight 
 ocular evidence. Afterwards he "knew" and " kneiv" too, 
 that things ''must be'' thus and thus, i.e. "knew" as con- 
 fidently as men of science "know," though in a different 
 sphere, and with a different sense (a faculty that some would 
 call "feeling" rather than "knowing"). 
 
 [1560] (2) He wished to shew that there were many 
 different roads to this " knowledge " of the risen Saviour. 
 Peter, in one sense, was the first to approach to it. Peter 
 entered the tomb first, and was the first to see the signs of 
 the Resurrection, but he did not at once " believe." For him, 
 this revelation was to come later and through "appearing," in 
 accordance with the traditions of the Church : " He appeared 
 to Cephas, then to the Twelve^" and "The Lord is risen 
 indeed and hath appeared unto Simon I" The tradition 
 of the manifestation near Gennesaret said that Peter came 
 first to Jesus through the waters^ — perhaps the waters of 
 repentance — " but the other disciples " came soon afterwards, 
 " for they were not far off ^ " ; yet the beloved disciple had 
 been the first to say "It is the LordV' recognising Him by 
 the voice, before Peter and the rest had recognised Him by 
 vision. Again, Mary Magdalene did not " believe " so soon 
 as the beloved disciple. After he had " believed," she re- 
 
 1 For this, the Johannine meaning of " the Scripture " (sing.) see 1722 /. 
 
 2 I Cor. XV. 5. 3 Yk^ xxiv. 34. * j^ xxi. 7—8. 
 ^ xxi. 8. 6 xxi. 7. 
 
 A. V. 79 7 
 
[1561] "BELIEVING" 
 
 mained " weeping\" Nor did she ''see and believe!' On the 
 contrary, she ''saw'' without "believing" \ for she "supposed 
 it was the gardener." But she was the first to "hear!' And 
 when the Shepherd, risen from the dead, "called" the first 
 of the flock " by name," she was the first to hail Him, and 
 the first to " see " as well as the first to " hear." She, too, like 
 Thomas, desired to " touch." But the refusal of her request 
 did not shake her faith, or rather, we should say, cancel 
 her knowledge. Thomas, latest of believers, insisted on 
 "touching" as well as on "seeing," as a condition of "be- 
 lieving." It is not stated that he " touched." But the Lord 
 said to him, apparently in the way of gentle reprooP, " Be- 
 cause thou hast seen me thou hast believed ! " Then He 
 did not add, "Blessed are thine eyes because they have 
 seen=^," but " Blessed are they that have not seen and believed!' 
 [1561] (3) This is the last of the Lord's many utterances 
 about "believing" in the Fourth Gospel ; and, if it is read in 
 the light of His other sayings, illustrated by the Evangelist's 
 own remarks and narratives bearing on the same subject, 
 it confirms the conclusion that " believing " is to be regarded, 
 in different aspects, not as a consummation or a goal, but as a 
 number of different stages, by which different individuals pass, 
 in accordance with their several individualities, toward the one 
 centre, " Jesus, the Christ, the Son of God " in whom they are 
 to " have life*." 
 
 1 XX. II. 
 
 2 [1560/?] Yet, as it is said, of the woman, (Lk. vii. 47) "her sins, 
 which are many, are forgiven because she loved much," so here the 
 narrative says, in effect, concerning Thomas, "His doubt, which was 
 great, became blessed because he believed much." It was reserved 
 for the doubter to say, with inspired conviction, "My Lord [is] also my 
 God." On the reasons for this rendering, see 2049—51. 
 
 3 Comp. Mt. xiii. 16, Lk. x. 23. * Jn xx. 31. 
 
 80 
 
CHAPTER II 
 
 "AUTHORITY" 
 
 § I. '' Authority I' in the Triple Tradition 
 of the Synoptists 
 
 [1562] All the Synoptists agree in saying that our Lord 
 taught " as one having authority l^ or that " his word was 
 with authority'' and, later on, that the Pharisees asked Him 
 "by what authority'' He acted: and in five of these six 
 passages R.V. and A.V. agree in using the word ''authority" 
 to express i^ova-la^. But in a much more important passage, 
 where Jesus Himself says, " that ye may know that the Son of 
 man hath authority on earth to forgive sins," the texts both 
 of A.V. and R.V. have "power" although R.V. has ''authority" 
 in its margin ^ Clearly our Lord used the word here in a 
 good sense. It is very commonly found with "give',' and it 
 generally means " power that is delegated," that is to say, not 
 tyranny that is seized, but a right lawfully given, or an 
 office or magistracy duly and lawfully appointed. Through- 
 out the Synoptic Gospels, in most cases if not in all, 
 " authority " is the best translation. In Mark, R.V. gives 
 
 1 Mk i. 22, Mt. vii. 29, Lk. iv. 32; Mk xi. 28 — 33, Mt. xxi. 23 — 7, 
 Lk. XX. 2 — 8. In Lk. iv. 32 "his word was with authority^'' A.V. has 
 "powerP 
 
 2 Mk ii. 10, Mt. ix. 6, Lk. v. 24, see 1594 <:. 
 
 81 7—2 
 
[1563] " AUTHORITY 
 
 " authority to cast out devils," and '' authority over the unclean 
 spirits " ; and similarly in Matthew, " All authority hath been 
 given unto me in heaven and earth " : but in these three 
 passages A.V. has " powers" 
 
 § 2. ^' Authority l' in the Apocalypse 
 
 [1563] In the Apocalypse, this delegated power or 
 " authority " is most frequently applied to messengers of God 
 commissioned to punish (vi. 8) " There was given unto 
 them \i.e. to Death and Hades] authority over the fourth 
 part of the earth to kill..." R.V. naturally shrinks from 
 using the word when it is applied to ''locusts" (from the 
 smoke of the pit) to which ''authority (R.V. power) was 
 given as the scorpions of the earth have authority (R.V. 
 power)!' " and in their tails is their authority (R.V. power) 
 to hurt men five months^" Yet even there the context 
 indicates that these supernatural " locusts " (like the terrestrial) 
 have a ''permitted power," so that " power " alone does not 
 quite express the meaning. And certainly " authority " is 
 better in the description of the two Witnesses, who "have 
 the authority to shut the heaven that it rain not during the 
 days of their prophecy, and they have authority over the 
 waters... V There R.V. has, twice, " power " ; but it returns 
 to " authority " in the following, " Now is come the salvation 
 and the power, and the kingdom of our God, and the authority 
 of his Christ V 
 
 [1564] It might be supposed, from this, that R.V. goes 
 on the principle of rendering " delegated power " to reward 
 and " delegated power '' to punish by two different words, 
 calling the former " authority " and the latter " power." But 
 R.V. uses ''authority" repeatedly concerning the Dragon 
 
 ^ Mk iii. 15, vi. 7, Mt. xxviii. 18. ^ Rgy. ix. 3, 10, comp. ix. 19. 
 
 3 Rev. xi. 6. * Rev. xii. 10. 
 
 82 
 
AUTHORITY " [1564] 
 
 and the Beasts and then returns to " power," when describing 
 the angel that "came out from the altar, he that hath 
 authority over the fire^." Very rarely is the word connected 
 with God as in the following, " They blasphemed the name 
 of the God that hath the authority over these plagues ^" R.V. 
 uses " authority " of evil powers in the following : " The ten 
 horns... are ten kings... they receive authority {AN. power) as 
 kings with the beast for one hour... they give their... power and 
 authority (A.V. strength) unto the beast ^" but of a good 
 angel " coming down out of heaven having great authority^ 
 {KN . power)!' An alternative is given by R.V. in describing 
 the blessings of those who have part in the first resurrection, 
 " Over these the second death hath no authority (so R.V. 
 marg., but R.V. txt and A.V. ''power''), but they shall be 
 priests of God*'." The following instance is particularly note- 
 worthy, "Blessed are they that wash their robes that their 
 authority may be {T) over the tree of lifeV R.V. "that they 
 may have the right (A.V. have rightyj' 
 
 1 [1564(2] Rev. xiii. 2 — 12 "the dragon gave him... great authority 
 (so A.V.)... and they worshipped the dragon because he gave his authority 
 {KN . power) unto the beast... and there was given to him authority (A.V. 
 power) to continue forty and two months... and there was given to him 
 authority (A.V. power) over every tribe and people and tongue and 
 nation. ..and he exerciseth all the authority {AN. power) of the first beast 
 in his sight." 
 
 2 Rev. xiv. 18. 
 
 ^ [1564 b'\ Rev. xvi. 9 to ovofxa tov deov tov €-)(ovtos i^ovaiav. This 
 was, perhaps, intended to represent the heathen polytheistic thought about 
 " the god that has authority over these plagues." But it might mean 
 "the name of the [one] God, who has authority" (R.V. "of the God 
 which hath," A.V. " of God, which hath "). A.V. and R.V. often use " the 
 ...which" where Shakespeare would have used ''the... that {2273a)." 
 
 * Rev. xvii. 12, 13. ^ R^y ^viii. i. ^ i^^y ^x. 6. 
 
 ^ [1564^] Rev. xxii. 14 Iva caraL 77 i^ovcria avrav i-irX to ^v\ov t^s C^rjSi 
 A.V. "right to the tree of life," R.V. "the right [to come] to the tree 
 of life." See 1594(5. 
 
 ^ All the instances in Rev. have been given above, except Rev. ii. 26 
 "He that overcometh...to him will I give authority over the nations," 
 which is capable of a twofold interpretation. 
 
 83 
 
[1565] "AUTHORITY 
 
 §3. Lukes view of '' authority''' 
 
 [1565] The two following parallel passages in the Double 
 Tradition (318 (ii)) exhibit Luke alone as using the word 
 "authority." Perhaps Luke, in both, means "authority" in 
 a bad sense, or rather "authority" given by God for the 
 purpose of punishing evil, as in the Apocalypse. The first 
 passage gives the words of Satan in the Temptation thus : 
 
 Mt. iv. 9 Lk. iv. 6 — 7 
 
 "All these things will I give "To thee will I give all this 
 
 thee if thou wilt fall down and authority and their ^ glory, be- 
 worship me." cause they have been delivered 
 
 to me, and to whomsoever I 
 will I give it. If thou therefore 
 wilt worship before me it shall 
 be all thine." 
 
 The second is from the Preparation of the Twelve 
 Apostles, where they are warned by our Lord, to fear, not 
 destruction of body but destruction of soul : 
 
 Mt. X. 28 Lk. xii. 4 — 5 
 
 "And be not ye afraid of " But I say unto you, [being] 
 
 them that kill the body but are my friends. Be not afraid of 
 not able to kill the soul: but be them that kill the body, and, 
 afraid rather of him that is able after these things, have nothing 
 (8vva/u,€voi/) to destroy both body beyond to do : but I will point 
 and soul in hell." out to you whom to fear. Fear 
 
 him that — after killing — hath 
 authority to cast into hell. Yea, 
 I say unto you, fear him." 
 
 Compare the " casting," in Luke here, with " Lest the 
 Judge deliver thee to the Exactor {irpaKTopi) and the 
 
 1 ^^ Their glory," i.e. the glory of (Lk. iv. 5) "all the kingdoms of 
 the world." 
 
 84 
 
"AUTHORITY" [1567] 
 
 Exactor cast thee into prisoner It seems probable that Luke 
 attributes the ''casting into helV (or ''into the prison'') to 
 Satan acting as God's instrument of punishment. 
 
 [1566] In the first passage of Luke this " authority " does 
 not extend to " destroying in hell," but only to " casting into 
 hell." In the second passage (Lk. xii. 58 — 9) it is said that the 
 prisoner will not come out " until " he has paid " the uttermost 
 farthing" — which may imply that ultimately he will come 
 out According to this view, Satan and his angels would 
 seem to be, like the angels in the Apocalypse, the instru- 
 ments of God's justice, having " authority " from the Judge 
 to punish man's sins ; and Luke's interpretation of Christ's 
 saying is, " Do not fear earthly enemies ; but fear your spiritual 
 enemy, who, if you sin, has authority from God to cast you 
 into Gehenna." Matthew, however, seems to have taken the 
 precept as meaning " fear God, the Judge " ; and this, from 
 very early times, appears to have been the view of the 
 Christian Fathers, who, even when following Luke's version, 
 have substituted "is able" for "hath authority!' so as to 
 suggest God rather than Satan 2. 
 
 [1567] Elsewhere, Luke uses the word "authority" in 
 several passages peculiar to himself, of which the most 
 notable are Christ's words to the Seventy, " Behold I have 
 given you the authority (R.V. om. "the!' A.V. "power") to 
 
 1 Lk. xii. 58 = Mt. v. 25 "and the Judge to the Officer {vnrjpirrj) and 
 thou be cast into prison." 
 
 2 [1566 «] Justin Mart. Apol. 19, as Lk., but "is able," bwatievov, 
 Clem. Horn. xvii. 5. 4 mostly Lk., but "fear him that is able to cast both 
 body and soul into the Gehenna of fire," Clem. Alex. 972 {Exc. Theod.) 
 8vvdfievov...€ls yeevvav /3aXetj/, but 981 (freely) tov bvvdfxevov .,Jv yeevvr] 
 aTToXea-ai. On the Other hand Iren. iii. 18. 5, quoting Mt. mostly, ends 
 with Lk., thus, "timete autem magis eum qui habet potestatem (=hath 
 authority) et corpus et animam mittere in gehennam." Clement's Ancient 
 Homily § 5 (Lightf.) has, "Fear him that, after you are dead, hath 
 authority over soul and body to cast into the Gehenna of fire." 
 
 85 
 
[1568] "AUTHORITY" 
 
 tread upon serpents and scorpions V' and His utterance at the 
 moment of being arrested where (as a parallel to Mark's 
 " but that the Scriptures might be fulfilled ") Luke has " But 
 this is your hour, and the authority of darkness I" 
 
 [1568] This last expression, "the authority of dark- 
 ness," occurs in the Epistle to the Colossians where it is 
 said that the Father "delivered us from the authority of 
 darkness and removed us to the kingdom of the Son of 
 his love^" There, the antithesis between "authority" and 
 " kingdom " suggests that the writer uses the former in the 
 sense of temporary power, delegated and misused. In 
 this sense, and hence in the sense of blind "despotism" 
 (" doing and saying what one likes ") it is used sometimes 
 by the later Greek writers, as also in English poetry'', 
 
 1 Lk. X. 19. 
 
 2 [1567 d\ Lk. xxii. 53. Comp. Lk. xii. 11" When they bring you before 
 the synagogues and the rulers {dpxds) and the authorities (A. V. powers)^'' 
 XX. 20 " to deliver him up to the rule (dpxv) ^^^ l^ l^^ authority (so 
 R.V., but A.V. the power and authority) of the governor," Lk. xxiii. 7 
 "in }Atro6^s jurisdiction^^ (so R.V. and A.V. and this transl. is necessary 
 here). 
 
 3 Col. i. 13. 
 
 * [1568 a'\ The English poets vary in their use of the word, according 
 to temperament, perhaps. Milton, for example, would probably never 
 apply the word " authority " to the angels of God's chastisements, because 
 he regards them as {Comus) "slavish instruments of vengeance" in the 
 hands of "the Supreme Good." In his poems, such phrases as "true 
 authority in men," "reason and authority," "authority usurp'd," "the 
 authority which I deriv'd from heaven," generally shew, by their context, 
 the meaning of the ambiguous word. Milton is followed by Cowper, who 
 mostly uses the word in a good sense except where " authority grows 
 wanton," or " sleeps." But Shakespeare lays great stress on the evil of 
 " the demi-god Authority," on " art made tongue-tied " by it, and on the 
 hypocrisies of "authority and shew of truth." Shelley is even more 
 vehement against " the supine slaves of blind Authority." Wordsworth's 
 Prelude describes " blind Authority beating with his staff the child that 
 might have led him," but it would be hasty to infer that he condemns 
 Authority in the abstract. For the context mentions " Decency and 
 Custom starving Truth," and no one could suppose that Wordsworth 
 
 Z6 
 
AUTHORITY " [1569] 
 
 though mostly in such context as to make the meaning 
 clears 
 
 [1569] In the plural, " ruling powers " and " authorities " 
 are frequently mentioned together in N.T., referring to 
 human or to angelic powers, — sometimes in a good sense, 
 sometimes in a bad one^. 
 
 condemns "decency." Tennyson's use is perhaps best exemplified by 
 the line in Morte d" Arthur "Authority forgets a dying king." Pope's 
 poems (excluding the Translations) do not contain the word. These 
 facts bear on the various uses of the word in N.T. They also serve 
 as a general warning against applying to N.T. writers the rule, "Ab uno 
 disce omnes." 
 
 ^ [1568 <^] In the instances quoted by Lightf. on Col. i. 13, Demosth. 
 428 inserts ayav^ Xenoph. Hiero § 5 r?}? etV to rrapov, Plut. Vzt. Euin. 13 
 avayayyoi rats i. ib. Alex. 33 Tr\v e. koi rov ojkov rr^s 'A. bvvaii€(os^ Herodian 
 ii. 4 avirov. 
 
 2 [1569(3:] Lightf on Col. i. 16 refers to Lk. xii. 11, Tit. iii. i (comp. 
 Lk. XX. 20). Angelic powers are meant, good, in Eph. iii. 10, Col. i. 16, 
 ii. 10, but bad in Eph. vi. 12, Col. ii. 15. Lightf adds "in one passage 
 at least (i Cor. xv. 24) both [good and bad] may be included." 
 
 [1569 <^] In Rom. xiii. i, vTrepexovaats c^ovaiais, ''''higher authorities^^ 
 (R.V. '''the higher powers," but there is no article) the epithet might be 
 added, in part, to distinguish them from " evil^^ or " lower^'' authorities, 
 and it might be rendered '''supreme^'' as in i Pet. ii. 13 "to the king, 
 as supreme" 'Yrrepexfo, when an object is not expressed or obviously 
 implied, appears to mean " preeminent among things of its own kind^^ 
 so that the word in Rom. would not mean " higher than we subjects are " 
 but "preeminent among authorities." In Wisd. vi. 5 01 virepexovres 
 means rulers of the highest kind, and the context includes "kings." In 
 I Pet. ii. 1 3, the writer passes from " the king as supreme " to " governors " 
 "sent from time to time (7re/x7rd/iei/oi) " to punish evildoers and reward 
 well-doing. In Rom. xiii. i, after "supreme authorities," the writer goes 
 on to speak of " the rulers," and he says that " there is no authority except 
 [ordained] by God" and recommends "doing good" as the way "not 
 to fear the authority." 
 
 [1569^] The context of Rom. xiii. 1 indicates that St Paul has in 
 view the Imperial authority of Rome — to which he was more than once 
 indebted for deliverance from Jewish persecution — and its adequate 
 representatives throughout the empire. He wrote before the Neronian 
 persecution, at a time when he might fairly say that " supreme authori- 
 ties" in the empire deserved obedience. He adds "There is no [real] 
 
 87 
 
[1570] "AUTHORITY" 
 
 [1570] Luke in his Gospel — not in his Acts — seems to 
 favour the view expressed in an early saying of Jewish 
 Tradition that governors were essentially bad, and that one 
 should not " make oneself known to the governments" In 
 the following three versions of our Lord's doctrine on true 
 government and true greatness, it will be observed that 
 Mark guards himself — while Luke does not — against being 
 supposed to attack all " ruling " and all " authority." Mark 
 
 authority (or, "no [such] authority") that is not [ordained] by God." 
 Such a protest might be needful against Talmudic views of "authority" 
 (1570 a) among the Jewish members of the Roman Church. Though it 
 is conceivable that the Apostle would have included even Herod Antipas, 
 Pilate, Felix, Festus, and Caiaphas among " authorities " to whom " sub- 
 jection " was due, he would probably not have included them among 
 "supreme authorities." And it is certain that he would not have said 
 of the murderer of John the Baptist, " For the rulers are not a fear to the 
 good work but to the evil." 
 
 [1569^] On Col. i. 13 "from the authority of the darkness" Chrys. 
 says, "It is a grievous thing to be under the devil at all (^ttXws-) : but 
 to be thus with authority^ this is still more grievous {to 8e koL fxer e^ovaias 
 TovTo ;^aXe7r&)repoi/)." This may imply a distinction between (i) those 
 who are attacked by the prince of darkness without having committed 
 any special sin that makes them subject to him, (2) those whom the 
 prince of darkness has received " authority " to " cast into prison " 
 because, for example, they have refused to agree with the adversary 
 (Lk. xii. 58 quoted above). Job would be an instance of the former 
 class. 
 
 1 [1570 <2] Aboth i. 11 "Shemaiah said, 'Love work; and hate lord- 
 ship [Rabbanuth] ; and make not thyself known to the government^ " 
 paraphrased thus by Dr Taylor " Avoid growing great and coming under 
 the notice of the ' rashuth ' ( = e^ovo-m, concretely) in such a way as to 
 excite jealousy or suspicion." Comp. Aboth ii. 3 "Be cautious with those 
 in authority^ for they let not a man approach them but for their own 
 purposes." The feeling that a poor magistrate or governor may be much 
 more dangerous than a rich king perhaps underlies Prov. xxviii. 2 — 3 
 "For the transgression of a land many are the princes thereof... a poor 
 man that oppresseth the poor is like a sweeping rain, which leaveth no 
 food" : and Caesar, in later times, might be a refuge against a Pilate, 
 a Felix, or a Festus. The words ^^ danger" and ^'- dungeon^^ are ety- 
 mologically — and very naturally — derived from '•'• doininium" i.e. lordship. 
 
 88 
 
"AUTHORITY" 
 
 [1571] 
 
 inserts, ist " they that seem to rule," or, ^' are reputed to rule,' 
 2nd " they that use authority to the utmost^ " : 
 
 Mk X. 42 
 
 "...they that are 
 reputed to rule the 
 nations lord it {ko.- 
 TaKvpL€vov(rLv) over 
 them and their' great 
 ones^' use authority 
 to the utmost over 
 them." 
 
 Mt. XX. 25 
 "...the rulers of 
 the nations lord it 
 over them and the 
 great ones use au- 
 thority to the utmost 
 over them." 
 
 Lk. xxii. 25 
 "The kings^ 
 
 of 
 
 the nations are lords 
 (Kvptevovcrtv) (1594^ 
 over them and those 
 who use authority 
 over them are called 
 benefactors." 
 
 [1571] Luke appears to be alluding to the name Euergetes^ 
 or Benefactor, assumed by several Eastern kings, one of whom, 
 it is said, was called by the Alexandrians Kakergetes, or Male- 
 factor^ It seems antecedently improbable that so bitter and 
 pointed a saying as Luke's, if actually uttered by our Lord in 
 this context, could have been dropped by Matthew as well 
 as Mark, in their report of it. As Luke appears to be 
 
 1 [1570 <^] Mk X. 42, 1st, hoKovvTe^ apx^iv, 2nd, Kar- before i^ova-ia- 
 ^ovo-iv. Mt. omits doKovvTcs but has kut-. Staph, gives no other instance 
 of KaT€^ov(rLa.^€Lv. Lk. has I St, /SacriXeis', and 2nd, e^ovaid^ovTes. The 
 LXX has €^ov(rid(eiv freq. but Kare^ovo-ta^eii/ nowhere. 
 
 [1570 c] Kar appears to mean " to the utmost," " oppressively," 
 perhaps with allusion also to the idiom "have authority against {Kara 
 with gen.)." This idiom occurs in Jn xix. 11. Comp. the use of Kara- 
 in I Cor. vii. 31 R.V. "those that use the world as not abusing it (marg. 
 using it to the full ^ Karaxpoifxevoi)," ix. 18 "so as not to use to the full 
 (so R.V. but A.V. abuse) my authority (/xi) Karaxprjo-aaOai rrj e^ovcria)" 
 A similar abuse or excess is implied by Mk-Mt. in KaraKvpievovo-iv. 
 
 2 [1570 d] " Tkeir ' great ones ' " i.e. those whom t/iey call " great 
 ones." Mark, not long before, has recorded a discussion on the question 
 (ix. 34) "Who is the greatest?" Matthew has missed the force of 
 "-their" as well as ''reputed.'''' 
 
 3 [1570 e] Lk.'s " kings " goes sdll further away than Mt.'s " rulers " 
 from Mk's "reputed to rule." Comp. Col. i. 13 " authority oi darkness 
 ...the kingdom of his Son," on which see 1568. 
 
 * [1571 d\ Wetstein (Lk. xxii. 25) quoting Athenaeus xii. p. 549 E. 
 Wetst. gives abundant instances of this title. 
 
 89 
 
[1572] "AUTHORITY" 
 
 deviating from the exact tradition in other details mentioned 
 above, we may perhaps take this detail as a paraphrase (or 
 misunderstanding of a Semitic original). But in any case, 
 regarded all together, Luke's divergences from Mark and 
 Matthew indicate a disposition in his Gospel to interpret 
 official " authority " in a bad sense. 
 
 § 4. Christ's '* authority l^ how defined by the Synoptists 
 
 [1572] Mark and Luke agree, though not verbatim, in 
 associating their evangelistic statements about our Lord's 
 " authority " with authority over devils, i.e. the power of 
 casting out unclean spirits, an instance of which they givQy 
 in detail, immediately afterwards — together with the comment 
 of the multitude: 
 
 Mk i. 22 — 7 Lk. iv. 32 — 6 
 
 "And they were amazed at "And they were amazed at 
 
 his teaching : for he was teaching his teaching, because his word 
 
 them as one having authority was in authority..,. 'What is 
 
 and not as the scribes.... 'What this word, that in authority and 
 
 is this ? A new teaching ! With power he commandeth the un- 
 
 authority doth he command even clean spirits . . . M " 
 the unclean spirits. . . ! '" 
 
 [1573] Matthew altogether omits this instance of exorcism 
 and all reference to its "authority." But he inserts the 
 tradition — in Mark's fuller form, with the phrase " and not as 
 the scribes" — immediately after the Sermon on the Mount, 
 thus (Mt. vii. 27 — 9) "'...and great was the fall thereof.' 
 And it came to pass, when Jesus had finished these words, 
 the multitudes were amazed at his teaching: for he was 
 teaching them as one having authority and not as their scribes." 
 
 [1574] Two distinct kinds of " authority " might be sig- 
 nified by the two clauses in Mark. The first is authority of 
 doctrine. Christ taught '■^not as the scribes^' who appealed to 
 
 1 Or "What is this word ! Because {i.e. For) in authority...." 
 
 90 
 
"AUTHORITY" [1575] 
 
 previous traditions and interpretation of the Law ; He 
 appealed to the consciences of His hearers and to the purity 
 and high morality of His precepts ("Ye have heard that 
 it hath been said to them of old.... but I say unto you"). 
 The second is authority over the minds and souls of men, 
 manifesting itself especially in the casting out of devils 
 (" With authority doth he command even the uriclean spirits "). 
 Matthew refers here only to the first i^'not as the scribes "y, 
 Luke only to the second {^'the unclean spirits''). 
 
 [1575] In the healing of the paralytic, a spiritual 
 *' authority " of the highest kind is distinctly claimed by our 
 Lord in the words " The Son of man hath authority upon 
 earth to forgive sins^" But here the evangelistic records of 
 the comments of the multitude in Mark and Luke are 
 singularly disappointing. In these two Gospels the multitude 
 say nothing about the " authority " to forgive, but merely 
 " We have never seen [things] thus " or " We have seen 
 strange things to-day^ " — commenting only on what they had 
 " seen," namely, the cure of the disease. Matthew alone has 
 something more to the point, a brief indication that the 
 multitude did actually comment on Christ's assertion that 
 the Son of man had " authority to forgive." " They glorified 
 God, who had given such authority to men\" In Mark, 
 the multitude does not even repeat its previous exclamation 
 " A new teaching ! " And Mark and Luke leave the impres- 
 sion that, when this particular " Son of man " had passed 
 away, the "authority to forgive" would, or might, simul- 
 
 1 [1574 d\ But, immediately after this mention of Christ's " authority," 
 Matthew places the healing of the centurion's servant at a distance, with 
 the words of the centurion (viii. 9) " I also am a man under authority 
 having under myself soldiers." The centurion evidently supposed that 
 as he and his soldiers were severally subject to authority, so diseases 
 were subject to the authority of Christ, who had only to say " Go," and 
 the disease would go. '^ Mk ii. 10, Mt. ix. 6, Lk. v. 24. 
 
 3 Mk ii. 12, Lk. v. 26. ^ Mt. ix. 8. 
 
 91 
 
[1576] "AUTHORITY" 
 
 taneously pass. But Matthew's version suggests that a new 
 ''''authority'' had been sent down from heaven to remain among 
 " men." 
 
 § 5. '^Authority I' in the Fourth Gospel 
 
 [1576] "Authority" in the Fourth Gospel may be re- 
 garded first in the Evangelist's order, illustrating the way in 
 which he develops his doctrine about it. Thus treated, the 
 subject begins with what Matthew, as above quoted, calls 
 the " authority " given to " men." The Logos was not 
 received by His own, but (i. 12) "As many as received him, 
 to them gave he authority to become children of God." 
 Then comes the authority given to the Son, which is thrice 
 mentioned, (v. 26 — 7) "As the Father hath life in himself, 
 even so gave he to the Son also to have life in himself; 
 and he gave him authority to do judgment {jcpidiv iroidv) 
 because he is Son of man," (x. 18) " No one taketh it \i.e. my 
 life] away from me, but I lay it down of myself; I have 
 authority to lay it down and I have authority to take it again. 
 This commandment received I from my Father," (xvii. 2) 
 " Thou \i,e. the Father] gavest him authority over all flesh, 
 that — all that thou hast given him, to them he may give 
 eternal life," 
 
 [1577] The last mentions of the word are in a dialogue 
 between our Lord and Pilate, thus (xix. 10 — 11) " Speakest 
 thou not unto me? knowest thou not that I have authority 
 to release thee and have authority to crucify thee ? " to which 
 the reply is, " Thou wouldest have no authority against me 
 except it were given thee from above : therefore he that 
 delivered me unto thee hath the greater sin." The detailed 
 meaning of our Lord's reply (1390 — 2) may be uncertain, 
 but it is clear that He is correcting a false notion of authority, 
 which Pilate regarded as meaning "despotism," the power 
 of ruling over others as one likes. The Gospel takes the 
 Pauline view (1569 b) that " supreme authorities " are ordained 
 by God. 
 
 92 
 
"AUTHORITY" [1580] 
 
 [1578] Deferring the consideration of the above-mentioned 
 " authority " given to men to " become children of God," and 
 reviewing the mentions of the "authority" given to Christ, 
 we find that the latter includes (i) "doing judgment," 
 (2) "laying down life and taking it again," (3) "authority 
 over all flesh " for the purpose of " giving eternal life " to 
 " all that the Father has given " to the Son. 
 
 §6. '' Atithority'' to become ^^ children'' of God 
 
 [1579] Against Pilate's notion of "authority" as being 
 the power to do as one pleases the Evangelist tacitly protests 
 at the very beginning of his Gospel by connecting it with the 
 word " children {reKva)." This at once implies obedience and 
 willingness to obey and love the Father. But it also implies 
 adoption into the whole family of the Father, whence follows 
 an obligation, or rather a spontaneous impulse, to love and 
 help the other children. This corresponds to the Synoptic 
 doctrine " become as a little child {iraihiovy or " receive the 
 kingdom of God as a little child." The Synoptic Tradition 
 of our Lord's answer to the question, " Who is the greatest ? " 
 is that He replied " He that is the least," meaning " He 
 that makes himself as the least and humblest of the family 
 in serving the rest." In one Synoptic passage, our Lord 
 likens this service to His own service, " Even as the Son 
 of man came not to be ministered unto but to minister and 
 to give his life a ransom for many\" This teaches that 
 " to become a child of God " means to become naturalised 
 in self-sacrifice: and this is the Johannine conception of 
 the "authority" bestowed upon men by the Son of God, 
 preeminence in child-like imitation of the Father in heaven. 
 
 [1580] As compared with the Synoptic doctrine in which 
 the authority given to men consisted in the power of driving 
 
 1 Mk X. 45, Mt. XX. 28, Lk. diff., see 1275—88. 
 93 
 
[1581] "AUTHORITY" 
 
 out evil spirits^ the Johannine doctrine is expressed more 
 amply and more permanently. The latter bears some re- 
 semblance to the tradition peculiar to Matthew (1575) namely 
 that God had given unto men authority to forgive sins. 
 But "authority to forgive" might be interpreted by a man 
 of Pilate's nature as being "the power of giving immunity 
 from punishment according to one's own pleasure." Hence 
 the advantage of the Johannine doctrine (" become children "), 
 which teaches that "authority" goes hand in hand with 
 spiritual childhood. The true " authority " to forgive rests 
 with those childlike souls that can see and hear the Father 
 in heaven forgiving before they themselves pronounce the 
 words of forgiveness on earth. According to John, human 
 authority at its highest implies perpetual and voluntary 
 dependence upon divine will. 
 
 §7. The ^'authority'' of the Son to ^^ do judgment'' 
 
 [1581] It is a remarkable fact that the first mention of 
 " authority " in connexion with the Son — whether uttered by 
 our Lord or by the Evangelist — is in the statement that " the 
 Father judgeth no one " but gave the Son " authority to do 
 judgment because he is Son of man^" ; and yet the Evangelist 
 has previously said (iii. 17) "God sent not the Son into the 
 world to judge the world but that the world through him 
 should be saved." Other statements about "judging" are 
 (v. 30) "As I hear I judge and my judgment is true," and 
 
 1 [1580 (i\ See Mk iii. 15 (parall. Mt.-Lk. om.) "authority to cast out 
 the devils," vi. 7 "authority over (genit.) the unclean spirits," Mt. x. i 
 " authority over (genit.) unclean spirits so as to cast them out and to heal 
 every disease and every sickness," Lk. ix. i " power and authority over 
 (e'rri w. accus.) all the devils and to heal diseases." See also Lk. x. 19 
 (to the Seventy) " I have given you the authority to tread upon (eVaVco) 
 serpents," probably denoting powers of evil. 
 
 2 v. 22 — 27. Both V. 26 — 7 and v. 21 — 3 might be evangelistic 
 comments (2066/5). 
 
 94 
 
AUTHORITY " [1583] 
 
 (viii. 15) "I judge no man : yea, and if I judge, my judgment 
 is true: because I am not alone, but I and the Father that 
 sent me." Elsewhere, using a different noun {Kpifia instead 
 of KpiaL<;) Jesus says (ix. 39) " For judgment came I into 
 this world that those who see not may see and that those 
 who see may become blind." 
 
 [1582] These verbal inconsistencies must have perplexed 
 readers restricting their conception of Christ's judgment to an 
 image of Him, on a future day, seated on a cloud, detached 
 from those whom He is judging. Probably they were meant 
 to perplex and to force men to enlarge their conception. To 
 the same conclusion tend other Johannine sayings, one, for 
 example, that declares the judgment to be already in action, 
 (iii. 18) " He that believeth not is judged already I' and 
 another that defines judgment thus (iii. 19) "Now this is 
 the judgment that light hath come into the world and men 
 loved darkness rather than light!' Elsewhere Christ says 
 that not He Himself but His word will judge: (xii. 47 — 8), 
 " I judge him not... he... hath one that judgeth him : the word 
 that I spake, the same shall judge him in the last dayV' 
 (xvi. 8 — 11) *' He \i.e. the Paraclete] shall convict the world 
 concerningy?^<^w^;//...concerningy^^<^;;^^;// because the prince 
 of this world hath been judged'.' 
 
 [1583] In one aspect, the "judgment" here contemplated 
 seems to be described almost impersonally, as a Law of the 
 spiritual world by which the souls that love the light are 
 divided from those that hate it. When the Son of man is 
 uplifted on the Cross to save the world, those that see and 
 reject Him are by the very act of rejecting "judged already."' 
 Those that trust in Him pass out of the sphere of judgment 
 into life and unity with Him. The others, by their own act,, 
 pass into darkness. It suggests the action of light in attracting 
 some creatures while repelling others ; or it may be likened 
 
 1 Comp. viii. 50 " There is (emph.) he that seeketh and judgeth." 
 A. V. 95 8 
 
[1584] "AUTHORITY" 
 
 to the power of the sun to harden clay while it melts wax. 
 Such illustrations have this objection, they at once raise 
 questions about necessity and free will. These problems are 
 recognised by the Evangelist, but their solution is not 
 attempted. He assumes that human souls are not by 
 unalterable nature divisible into "clay" and "wax\" Un- 
 belief is sin, and sin divides unbelievers from believers. 
 Their own sin judges, in some sense, the sinners. In another 
 sense, the Son of man judges them. But His object is, not 
 to "judge" but to "save." 
 
 [1584] In another aspect, "doing judgment" is perhaps 
 intended to be distinguished from "judging." The former 
 is used in O.T., sometimes along with " doing righteousness," 
 but sometimes by itself, to mean " righting the wrongs of 
 the oppressed I" It occurs in the famous appeal of Abraham 
 to God in behalf of Sodom: "That be far from thee... to 
 slay the righteous with the wicked.... Shall not the Judge 
 of all the earth do right t " A reason is given for the 
 entrusting of this "authority to do judgment" to the Son, 
 and it is " because he is Son of man." That is to say, not 
 because He is God and knows all secrets, but because He 
 is man and has felt all human sufferings, " a man of sorrows 
 and acquainted with griefs." In raising up the oppressed, 
 the Champion of Justice must also cast down the oppressor : 
 but the result is good for both in Plato's sense of justice — 
 "doing the best for all." 
 
 [1585] Mark never uses the word "judgment." Matthew 
 and Luke use the phrase "in the day of judgment," or "in 
 
 1 [1583 «] Comp. Rom. ix. 21 "Hath not the potter authority over 
 the clay...?" where the "authority" depends on the knowledge of the 
 potter to do what is best with every kind of clay : but the parallel is 
 between the "potter" and the all-wise Creator rather than between 
 " man" and "day." 
 
 2 Deut. X. 18, Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.) 18 etc. For "do righteousness and 
 judgment," see Gen. xviii. 19 etc. 
 
 96 
 
"AUTHORITY" [1586] 
 
 the judgment," to mean a day, or season, in which condemna- 
 tion will be pronounced. John's definition of "the judgment," 
 as given above, and his accumulation of apparently deliberate 
 verbal inconsistencies as to the Person judging, indicate 
 a desire on the part of the beloved disciple to separate the 
 conception of His beloved and adored Master from that of 
 a Judge with flaming fire taking vengeance on His enemies — 
 and to lead his readers to see His "authority to do judgment" 
 in other aspects. When the Evangelist says " the word that 
 I spake shall judge him," we are reminded of the "still small 
 voice" that questioned Elijah, and akin to this, perhaps, is 
 the saying that the Comforter, or Holy Spirit, will "convict 
 the world concerning judgments" Both of these passages, 
 and others in this Gospel, suggest that human conscience is 
 to play a part in ratifying the judgment that is pronounced 
 with "authority" by the Logos. 
 
 § 8. ^^Azithority" in connexion with ^'life" 
 
 [1586] The previous section bore on the saying " He 
 [i.e. the Father] gave authority to him [i.e. the Son] to do 
 judgment," which is preceded by the words " As the Father 
 hath life in himself, so also to the Son he gave to have life 
 in himself" — thus connecting the gift of "life in oneself" 
 with the gift of "authority to do judgment." We have now 
 to consider two sayings that connect "authority" still more 
 closely with "life." Both of them are in the first person so 
 that they are certainly to be taken as proceeding from our 
 Lord Himself, and not — like the saying in the last section — 
 possibly from the Evangelist. 
 
 1 [1585^] Jn xvi. ii. "The day of judgment" is not mentioned 
 in the Gospel. The nearest approach to it is (v. 29) "resurrection of 
 judgment" contrasted with "resurrection of life." "The day of the 
 judgment" occurs once in the Epistle, not in connexion with "adver- 
 saries," or "the wicked," but with ourselves (i Jn iv. 17) "that we may 
 have confidence in the day of the judgment." 
 
 97 8- 
 
[1587] "AUTHORITY" 
 
 [1587] The first occurs in the Parable of the Good 
 Shepherd, which is really a discourse on good rulers. It 
 describes the natural king, the king called by God, as ruling 
 by his voice, not by coercion. He does not drive the sheep, 
 he leads them. He calls them each by name; they hear him 
 and follow. The secret of this success is, that this ideal 
 Shepherd is ready to lay down his life for the sheep : 
 (x. 17 — 18) "Therefore doth the Father love me because 
 I lay down my life that I may take it again. No one taketh 
 it away from me, but I lay it down of myself. I have 
 authority to lay it down and I have authority to take it 
 again. This commandment received I from my Father." 
 
 [1588] No one " has authority " to lay down his life 
 except that he may, in some sense, take it again, any more 
 than the Sower has "authority^" over "the grain of wheat" 
 to throw it into the fire. No one "has authority'' to lay 
 down his life for his own sake alone, that is, for his own 
 honour or pride or to secure eternal happiness — without any 
 regard to others. If life is to be " laid down " with 
 " authority/' it must be laid down out of " love " for others — 
 love for the Father and His children, not for the Father 
 alone. The " army of martyrs " is " noble," but not unless 
 it is ennobled by " love " : " Though I give my body to be 
 burned and have not love, I am nothing." But the man 
 that lays down his life in the harvest field of humanity to 
 bring forth fruit, the true Martyr, does not, and cannot, do 
 this in his own strength, but because he has been ennobled 
 and strengthened to do it, and has received high rank and 
 " authority " in the kingdom of Heaven. He does it, in one 
 sense spontaneously, but, in another, obediently, saying in 
 the moment of martyrdom, " This commandment received I 
 from my Father." 
 
 * The Sower might be said to have "authority" over the seed as "the 
 Potter " has (1583 a) over the clay, but authority based on knowledge 
 of Law, and obedience to Law. 
 
 98 
 
"AUTHORITY" [1590] 
 
 [1589] This, the Johannine view of "authority," is a 
 wholesome antidote against complacency and a strong stimu- 
 lant to well-doing. " Even the devils are subject to us in 
 thy name," say the Seventy to Jesus, in a tradition peculiar 
 to Luke. But their Lord's reply warns them against rejoicing 
 in this authority, and bids them rejoice rather that their 
 names were written in heaven \ Much more, we may be 
 sure — from what He said in the Triple Tradition — would He 
 have bidden them rejoice in making themselves lords over 
 their own passions for the sake of being servants of mankind 
 in the spirit of Him who " gave his life for the sheep." While 
 it discourages selfish asceticism and artificial self-humiliations 
 — which perhaps St Paul meant by his term " voluntary 
 humiliation " — the Johannine doctrine keeps the eye of the 
 possessor of " authority " fixed on the source of all authority, 
 namely, the Father, whose " commandment " cannot be 
 "obeyed" without perpetual regard to His children. 
 
 [1590] The next passage connecting " authority " with 
 "life" occurs in the beginning of the Lord's last prayer, 
 (xvii. I — 2) "Father, the hour is come, glorify thy Son, that 
 the Son may glorify thee : even as thou gavest him authority 
 over all flesh — that, all that thou hast given unto him, to 
 them he should give eternal life," where the italicized words 
 may be compared with those peculiar to Matthew describing 
 the sending forth of the Apostles to preach the Gospel to 
 the world, "^// authority hath been given unto me in heaven 
 and earth, Go ye, therefore, and make disciples of all the 
 
 nations^ " It cannot be supposed that the author of this 
 
 tradition in Matthew meant that "all authority... in earth" 
 had been given to the Saviour in such a way as to necessitate 
 the immediate conversion of the whole " earth " to Christianity. 
 The meaning must be that the Son had been appointed by 
 the Father to be Lord of men de facto in heaven and de jure 
 on earth. 
 
 1 Lk. X. 17 — 20. ^ Mt. xxviii. 18. 
 
 99 
 
[1591] "AUTHORITY 
 
 [1591] This limitation is expressed in John by the words 
 "all that thou hast given him." The phrase (2444) denotes 
 the Church on earth. The whole sentence and the context 
 recognise that "all flesh" will not own the "authority" of 
 the Son. Even among the Apostles, one, " the son of 
 destruction," must be " destroyed V' or "lost": the Son 
 Himself acknowledges this. But He also acknowledges that 
 the " glorifying " of the Father consists in giving " eternal 
 life," and that the Son has " authority over all flesh " to offer 
 this gift, whether accepted or not. The impression left upon 
 us is, that although the " destruction " of " the son of de- 
 struction " must take place that the Scripture, that is, the will 
 of the Father, may be fulfilled, and although " all flesh " will 
 not at once accept the gift of life, yet, in the end — whether 
 by ultimate acceptance or not we are not told — by some 
 means God will be fully "glorified." And there the Evan- 
 gelist leaves the insoluble problem of sin. 
 
 [1592] As regards " authority," it is defined by the term, 
 unusual in N.T., " all flesh," a term used repeatedly in O.T. 
 to describe the destruction of all animate nature with the 
 exception of Noah and his companions, in the delugel It 
 is also used by Luke in his Gospel and in the Acts in quota- 
 tions from Isaiah and Joel describing the vision of glory, 
 or the outpouring of the Spirit, in the kingdom of God^ 
 In both these senses it may be intended here to denote 
 that the authority of the Messiah is to extend to Gentiles as 
 well as to Jews, and to dominate human nature. 
 
 [1593] The last mention of "authority" in the Fourth 
 Gospel is in a dialogue that serves the purpose of summing 
 up the Evangelist's doctrine about it by contrasting the 
 
 1 Jn xvii. 12. 
 
 * Gen. vi. 12, 17, 19, vii. 15, 16 etc. 
 
 3 Lk. iii. 6 (Is. xl. 5), Acts ii. 17 (Joel ii. 28). It is also in i Pet. i. 24 
 (Is. xl. 6). It does not occur elsewhere in N.T. without negative, "no 
 flesh » Mk xiii. 20 etc. (2260—3). 
 
 100 
 
UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF 
 
 "AUTHORITY" [1594] 
 
 wrong with the right conception. It exhibits the nominal 
 Ruler, who has the semblance of authority, and is proud of 
 it, sitting in judgment on the real Ruler. The former is 
 a mere slave. Of his own will, he would release Jesus. 
 But the crowd cries " Thou art not Caesar's friend," and 
 Pilate ''therefore brought Jesus forth." Again the "Governor" 
 struggles for permission to release the innocent, and again 
 the crowd cries " We have no king but Caesar." " Then, 
 thereforel' Pilate "delivered him unto them to be crucified^" 
 Yet this same man had just said to his prisoner, " Knowest 
 thou not that / have authority to release thee and / have 
 authority to crucify thee ^ t " 
 
 [1594] Jesus, in His reply, contents Himself with pointing 
 to the responsibility that attaches itself to "authority." It 
 is "given," He says, "from above." As for the true meaning 
 of the term, Pilate — who asked " What is truth ? " — was no 
 more competent to receive it than were the Pharisees to 
 whose question (" By what authority^ ? ") Christ had refused 
 to answer. To grasp the conception of true " authority " 
 we must be able to grasp the conception of the Good Shep- 
 herd : and to do this — so the Gospel tells us — the Jews 
 were absolutely unable. They said " We see," but they were 
 blind, Jesus spoke to them about the Shepherd, but they 
 could not touch the fringe of His meaning. " They did 
 not know what the things were (1721 a) that he was speaking 
 to them^" In that Parable, Christ had virtually replied 
 by anticipation to Pilate's boast "/ have authority!' The 
 false Ruler says to the true, " I have authority to take thy 
 life": the true Ruler replies, "I have authority \o lay it down^" 
 
 1 xix. 12—16. 2 xix. lo. 3 Mk xi. 28 etc. (1562). 
 
 * ix. 39 — X. 6. 
 
 ^ [1594 d\ The mischief that might arise from regarding the 
 "authority" of Christ as a magical power of casting out evil spirits, or 
 of imparting the Spirit of Holiness — a power limited to the Twelve in 
 Mark, and to the Twelve and the Seventy in Luke — is seen in the request 
 
 101 
 
[1594] " AUTHORITY 
 
 of Simon Magus in the Acts (viii. 19) to be allowed to purchase "this 
 authority ^^ namely, to impart the Spirit. A protest against superstitious 
 or servile views of it seems also to underlie several passages in the 
 Epistles to the Corinthians where St Paul refuses to use certain material 
 apostolic privileges that had come to be connected with apostolic 
 "authority" (i Cor. ix. i — 5) "Am I not an apostle f-.-HdiVQ we no 
 authority to eat and drink [at the cost of the Churches]... even as the 
 rest of the Apostles...?''^ There was, perhaps, a danger that some of the 
 large number called Apostles or Missionaries in the first century, while 
 saying (i Cor. vi. 12) '■^ I have authority {e^ea-nv) to do all things," might 
 forget to say (id.) "But I will not be brought under the authority of any 
 {ovK e^ovo-iaa-drjo-ofiai viro rtvos)." That is to say, they might be tempted 
 to rule over converts in the spirit of Pilate rather than in the spirit 
 of Christ (Mk x. 42, i Pet. v. 3) "exercising lordship to the utmost 
 (KaraKvpievovres)." Comp. Didach. xi. 12 " But whosoever shall say in the 
 spirit, * Give me money, or other things,' ye shall not listen to him." 
 
 [1594 <^] As regards Rev. xxii. 14 (quoted in 1564^) r) e^ova-ia avrav eVt 
 TO ivXov, the interpretation is complicated by the fact that Rev. has 
 (l) accus. also in vi. 8 edodij avroU e. eVi to TeTapTov r. yrjs, xiii. 7 edodrj 
 avTto €. €irl iracrav (f)vXr]v, xvi. 9 tov 6eov tov exovTos r. e. eVt r. -rrXrjyas 
 TavTas, but (2) genit. in ii. 26 dcoaco avT(o i. iir\ tmv edvMv, xi. 6 e. e'xova-iv 
 eVi r. vSaro)!/, xiv. 186 ex^^ ^'- ^'"''- '"• """^pos. Perhaps eVt with accus. may 
 imply '■^extending over" suggesting "extending /^." Or, if criticism 
 decides that the book is composite, that might explain the variation. 
 
 [1594 <:] In Mk ii. 10, Mt. ix. 6, Lk. v. 24 (referred to in 1562) 
 Lk. (and sim. Mt.) has i. e'xei eVi ttjs yrjs (whereas Mk has eVt ttjs yi]9 at 
 the end of the Lord's words) thus suggesting the meaning " hath 
 authority over the earth^^ as in Revelations (1563 — 4). There is great 
 variation in the Latin versions between "in terra," "in terram," and 
 *' super terram." In LXX, e^ovo-ia with eVi is very rare (Sir. xxx. 28 
 (xxxiii. 19) (f)iX(o fxr) 8as e. eVi (re, Dan. iii. 97 (LXX, not Theod. nor Heb.) 
 €. 80VS €(f)' oXtjs Trjs x^P^^) '• but €^ovaid((o eVi with accus. is in Neh. v. 15, 
 ix. 37, I Mac. X. 70 (of oppressive authority). 
 
 [1594^] Lk. xxii. 25 (1570) probably avoids fcaraKvpieuo), not because 
 he wishes to soften the word, but because, outside the LXX, it meant 
 " overcome" as in the only instance mentioned by Steph., Diod. xiv. 64 
 " having overcome [in a naval engagementy 
 
 102 
 
CHAPTER III 
 
 JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 § I. The use of synonyms in this Gospel 
 
 [1595] In the Introduction (1436—7) it was pointed out 
 that the Dialogue in the Fourth Gospel between our Lord 
 and Peter, after the Resurrection, interchanged the words 
 " love {djairav) " and " like {<\>iXelv) " in a manner hardly- 
 capable of being briefly and literally expressed in any 
 English Version, and not expressed by our Revised Version 
 except by a marginal note stating that the two Greek words 
 for " love " are different. The whole of this Gospel is 
 pervaded with distinctions of thought, represented by subtle 
 distinctions of word or phrase — words and phrases so far 
 alike that at first the reader may take the thought to be 
 the same, though it is always really different In discussing 
 the word " trust " or " believe," for example, it appeared that 
 " trust to the name of," " trust to," and " trust," signified 
 different things. Again, the word "authority" was shewn 
 to mean a different thing in most Synoptic passages from 
 what it means in the Fourth Gospel ; and, even in the Fourth, 
 Pilate uses it in one sense and our Lord in another. If the 
 writer thus emphasizes the various shades of meaning in the 
 same words ("trust" and "authority") we must anticipate 
 that he will do the same thing in using different (though 
 synonymous) words, and that his play upon " loving " and 
 " liking " will have many parallels in his Gospel. 
 
 103 
 
[1596] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 [1596] Some of these will be hard to detect. For 
 example, the word (f>iX€co, or " take as a friend," which is 
 for the most part (1728 m—p) a lower word than a^airaay, is 
 applied by our Lord Himself (on the very first occasion on 
 which it occurs in this Gospel) to the love of the Father 
 for the Son, thus (v. 20) " For the Father taketh as a friend 
 the Son and sheweth him all that he himself doeth." Codex 
 D and a few other authorities alter this to " loveth." A most 
 natural alteration ! But if we compare what Christ says 
 later on where He declares that henceforth He will call 
 His disciples "friends" because He intends to tell them all 
 His secrets^, we shall find that the meaning is, not that the 
 Father ''loveth" the Son (which is assumed) but that the Son, 
 to speak in metaphor, is of age to be a fellow-counsellor with 
 the Father, who treats Him as a friend, and ''sJuweth him 
 all that he himself doeth!' These remarks will suffice as an 
 introduction to a discussion of some of the most important 
 of the Johannine synonyms. 
 
 §2. ''Seeing" 
 
 [1597] A distinction between "seeing" and "beholding" 
 is clearly implied in the saying of Jesus to the disciples 
 (xvi. 16) "A little [while] and ye no longer behold me 
 (decopelri fjue), and again a little [while] and ye shall see me 
 (osfreo-de fie)." The disciples repeat the saying in perplexity. 
 It is repeated again by Jesus in His reply to their questionings 
 with one another. In each of the three cases the same 
 distinction is observed, apparently indicating that " behold " 
 
 1 [1596 rt] XV. 14—15. So, in Genesis (xviii. 17), God refuses to hide 
 His plans from Abraham, His (Jas. ii. 23) "friend." The same meaning 
 is probably intended in Jn xvi. 27. On the other hand, in xx. 2 "the 
 disciple whom Jesus lovetV (rj-ydrra in xiii. 23, xix. 26, xxi. 7, 20) is 
 perhaps called " the disciple whom Jesus (1436) sti'/t toved (ecfiCkei)" because 
 he had not yet "believed," so that he is regarded as under a cloud. 
 
 104 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS [1598] 
 
 means "behold with the bodily eye" but "see" means "see 
 spiritually^" 
 
 (i) SecopcLv. 
 
 [1598] This distinction is pretty regularly maintained. 
 "OyjreaOai is repeatedly used of spiritual promise (i. 39) 
 " Come and fe shall see'^l' (i. 50) " thou shall see greater things/' 
 (i. 51) ''ye shall see the heaven opened and the angels of 
 God," (xi. 40) '* thou shall see the glory of God," and thrice 
 in the passage referred to above, concerning the resurrection 
 of Jesus. This makes seven mentions. Then occurs the 
 thought that our ''seeing'' Christ depends on Christ's "seeing''' 
 us, just as man's " knowing " God is sometimes identified both 
 in N.T. and in O.T. with God's "knowing" man^ The seven 
 
 1 [1597^] Comp. Philo i. 578 "that which receives the divine appari- 
 tion (r. Bilav <f)avTaa-iav) is the eye of the soul. For, else, what the mere 
 bodily eyes behold {decopovai) they apprehend with the cooperation of 
 light (avvepyco ^eori ;^pa)/i6J/oi KaraXaji^dvovcnv)..." (i. 579) "Whenever 
 you hear that God appeared {6(f)$evTa) to men, understand that this takes 
 place apart from material light {(fxoTbs ala6r]Tov)" 
 
 [1597 b'] '0(f)drjvai, " appeared," or " was seen," is the word regularly 
 used by St Paul to describe the manifestations of Christ after the 
 Resurrection (i Cor. xv. 5 — 8). Jn xxi. i, 14 uses e(f)avepd)dT} "was 
 manifested" or efftavepaxrev eavrov "manifested himself" (Mk App. [xvi. 
 12, 14] €cf)av€pd)6r]). But in predicting His self-manifestation, Jesus 
 (xiv. 21) uses en(fiavi((o, saying that He will "make himself mar^ifest" 
 to the believer and not to the world because He and the Father will 
 "come to him and make an abiding place in his heart (Trap' avroJ).'^ 
 This illustrates what Philo says, that, whenever God has " appeared to '^ 
 (or "been seen by") men, it has been "apart from material light." It 
 is unfortunate that in English we render Scf)6r) in two ways, (i) "was 
 seen by," (2) "appeared to." If it is rendered "was seen by," we must 
 remember that the sight is (in many cases) not received by the bodily eye. 
 If it is rendered " appeared to," we must remember that the thing seen 
 is to be regarded as real and objective^ though spiritual. 
 
 2 [1598 d\ Some inferior MSS. read " Come and see," assimilating the 
 phrase to the ordinary Rabbinical formula (on which see Wetst., Schottg. 
 and Hor. Heb. ad loc.) expressed in Jn i. 46 "Come and see." 
 
 ^ [1598 <^] Comp. Gal. iv. 19, where St Paul, after saying "But now, 
 having known God^'' corrects himself and adds — "or rather being known 
 by God" i.e. being taken into the family circle of God and being recognised 
 as His children. 
 
 105 
 
[1598] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 promises, therefore, of ''seeing'' are summed up in a promise 
 of ''being seen" (xvi. 22) "/ will see you (oyjrofjbaL vjxas:) and 
 your joy no man shall take from you." On the other hand 
 Oewpelv, at all events at the outset of the Gospel, is used of 
 unintelligent, superficial, or at least inferior "beholding." 
 People (ii. 23) " behold " Christ's signs, but Jesus does not 
 trust them ; the Samaritan woman asserts that she (iv. 19) 
 ''beholds" (in a mere feeling of wonder) that Jesus is "a 
 prophet " : the multitude that (vi. 2) " beholds " Christ's signs 
 is avoided by Him because they unintelligently desire to 
 make Him a king by force; the disciples (vi. 19) "behold" 
 Jesus walking on the water — " and feared." When a higher 
 signification exists, it seems derived from a special context, 
 as in vi. 40 " Everyone that beholdeth the Son and believetk'* 
 and so (xii. 44, 45) " He that believeth on me...believeth on 
 him that sent me... (45) and he that [thus, in a spirit of 
 belief^ beholdeth me beholdeth him that sent me." Or else, 
 a better meaning is derived from antithesis, as when the 
 world's " beholding " with coarse material vision is contrasted 
 with the rudimentary spiritual "beholding" which Jesus 
 appears to acknowledge in the disciples even before the 
 Resurrection, (xiv. 17 — 19) "The Spirit of truth, which the 
 world cannot receive because it does not behold it (Oecopet) 
 nor so much as have an understanding of it (ovSe yLvcoaKec) ; 
 ye have an understanding of it... (19) Yet a little while and 
 the world beholdeth me no more ; but ye (emph.) behold me : 
 because I live, ye shall live also," i.e. " the world shall cease 
 to behold my visible and material body, but ye shall still 
 behold me with the faith of affection ^" 
 
 1 [1598 c\ This should be compared with the higher standard of 
 spiritual vision adopted later in xvi. 16—19, "Ye behold (eeapdre) me 
 no more," i.e. ye shall rise above the beholding in the flesh, and also 
 above the beholding in mere half-faith. Literally, the Evangelist (as 
 often) contradicts himself. He appears to do it with a deliberate 
 purpose (1925). 
 
 106 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS [1600] 
 
 [1599] In the post-resurrection narrative, there appears 
 a remarkable and systematic distinction between "verbs of 
 seeing," intended apparently to lead up to the words of 
 Jesus that even any kind of mere ''seeing'' is inferior to 
 believing (xx. 29 "Blessed are they that have not seen 
 (lB6vT€(;) and have believed^") — although "believing" itself 
 is only a preparation for "abiding" in the Son. 
 
 [1600] The Resurrection is regarded as a mystery. Insight 
 into it is gradually bestowed on the disciples in three different 
 stages^ First Mary Magdalene "notes (^XeTret)" the stone 
 removed from the tomb. Then the two disciples run towards 
 it. The disciple whom Jesus loved (1696 a) reaches the 
 tomb first. He "glances in (Trapa/cvyfra^^)" and "notes 
 (I3\€7r€i)" something more than Mary — the linen swathing 
 bands that had (xix. 40) once ''bound" the body, now 
 discarded. He does not venture, however, to enter the 
 darkness of the sepulchre. Peter is the first to do this, 
 and there he " beholds {Oewpel) " — steadfastly and in perplexity, 
 but still not as yet in faith — the napkin, which had confined 
 the head of Jesus, now discarded. Then (as a third stage) 
 the beloved disciple is described as passing through three 
 
 1 [1599 a\ Mere usage may sometimes cause a change from one verb 
 to another even where the meaning is the same. For example, Ibatv is 
 the regular word for past " seeing " {^Xeyjras being very rare), and iSXeVf, 
 not iSf, is used, especially by Mk, to mean "look to it," "take heed." 
 'EwpaKo, used by Mary Magdalene (xx. 18) "/ Aave seen the Lord," 
 implies probably more than mere material seeing, and perhaps not 
 material seeing at all. It is very unlikely that the Evangelist supposes 
 that Caiaphas, had he been standing by the side of Mary, would have 
 seen the Saviour. See 1601. 
 
 2 [1600 «] Comp. Schottg. ii. 76 (quoting Tanchum. 77 a) "When God 
 reveals His Shechinah to the Israelites, it is not done in a moment"; 
 " Come and learn [a mystery] from the case of Joseph, who did not for 
 many years reveal himself to his brethren. So therefore God revealed 
 Himself by degrees and slow degrees." 
 
 3 [1600 <^] On Tra/jaKUTrrco, which occurs in N.T. only here (xx. 5, 11), 
 possibly in Lk. xxiv. 12 and certainly in Jas. i. 25, i Pet. i. 12, see 
 1798—1804. In the Epistles it has a spiritual meaning. 
 
 107 
 
[1601] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 processes : he " entered in " and " saw (elBev) " and " believed." 
 We are not told that he "saw" anything but the grave- 
 clothes and the empty grave : but it is implied that he " saw " 
 the truth of the Resurrection. 
 
 [1601] The two depart, and Mary is left alone. Twice 
 she is mentioned as "weeping." Then she, too, "glanced 
 into (irapeKvyjrev ek) " the tomb, and " beholds (Oecopet) " two 
 angels ; but still there is no faith. Twice is the question put 
 to her, "Why weepest thou?" In the second case, it is 
 put by Jesus, and the word Oecopel is repeated. She "be- 
 holds" Him, but not intelligently: she mistakes Him for 
 some one else. Not till she is ''called by her name^" does 
 she recognise and answer. Thus her faith is apparently 
 caused not by sight but by hearing ; and, although she really 
 has seen Jesus, and, in her report to the disciples, she says, 
 " I have seen (ecopaKo) the LordV' the intention appears to 
 be to emphasize the spiritual truth that the mere " beholding'' 
 {OeaypLo) of an image of the risen Saviour is not a true 
 ^'seeing'' (opaac^). Philo lays stress on the statement that 
 the children of Israel ''saw the voice of the Lord (icapa rrjv 
 <f)(ovr)vy" So Mary's vision was caused by a " voice." She 
 only beheld {Oewpel) the form, but may be said to have seen 
 (edopaKe) the voice, of Jesus. Thomas refused to believe 
 unless he might touch the Lord, Mary is forbidden to 
 "touch" Him: nor is it said that He "shewed her his 
 hands and his side" in order to convince her (as He is 
 said to have convinced others) that He was not "the 
 gardener." In one sense, then, she might be said to have 
 believed, like the beloved disciple, because she discerned the 
 truth, though she had not "seen" with the outward eye 
 the body of Jesus : and perhaps Mary and the beloved 
 
 1 Comp. Jn X. 3 — 4 " He calleth his own sheep by name and leadeth 
 them out... and the sheep follow him for they know his voice." 
 
 2 XX. 18. ^ Philo i. 443, quoting Ex. xx. 18. 
 
 108 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS [1603] 
 
 disciple are both included in the blessing pronounced upon 
 those who have ''''not seen (tSorre?)^ and believed." 
 
 [1602] In the third and last and specially sacred mani- 
 festation of Jesus to the Seven, this notion — i.e. of revelation, 
 not through sight, but through some other cause — is still 
 further developed. While the disciples are fishing, Jesus 
 suddenly " stood on the beach." The disciples do not 
 recognise Him by sight, nor even by voice, when He calls 
 them ''children" and directs them towards success. It is 
 not till they have obeyed His word and have been rewarded, 
 that the beloved disciple exclaims to Peter, " It is the Lord." 
 Then — with a repetition quite needless but for the writer's 
 desire to insist on belief through hearing — the narrative 
 describes how " Simon Peter, having heard that it was the 
 Lord!' plunged into the sea and hastened towards Him^ 
 And even while the disciples are participating in the sacred 
 meal of ^the Loaf and the Fish they are (so it is implied) 
 unable to recognise Him by sight, but only by knowledge, 
 ■''None of the disciples dared to question him, 'Who art 
 thou?' knowing that it was the Lord^" If they had recog- 
 nised Him by sight, where was the need to "question".? 
 The writer indicates that their knowing — though it was 
 "absolute knowledge'' (elBoref;) — proceeded not from sight 
 but from inward conviction. 
 
 [1603] Being thus used to express a rudimentary stage 
 of " seeing " spiritual truth, Oeaypelv is not used at all in the 
 Epistle metaphorically, and only once literally*. 
 
 1 [1601 a] XX. 29. Note that the Evangelist does not, and could not, 
 write 01 firj ecopuKores. In that spiritual sense, Jesus could not pronounce 
 a blessing on " those who have not seen " : for opaa-is means " true 
 vision." 
 
 ^ xxi. 7. 3 xxi. 12. 
 
 * [1603 <2] I Jn iii. 17 Beapfj r. d8e\(f)6v avrov xp^^civ ^xovra^ i.e. stolidly 
 beholding one's brother in need and doing nothing to help him. 
 
 109 
 
[1604] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 (ii) SedaOat. 
 
 [1604] This word, being connected with " theatre " and 
 with the notions of a spectacle and a multitude, will be 
 rendered here " contemplate " — a rendering inadequate but 
 intended to distinguish it^ from Oewpelv "behold." It is used 
 twice of Jesus. The first instance is when He " contemplates '* 
 His two earliest disciples (i. 38) " following " Him. These 
 are the beginning of the Church. It is used again when 
 He (vi. 5) lifts up His eyes to heaven and "contemplates" 
 the great multitude coming to the Feast of the Bread from 
 heaven. These represent the developed Church. Elsewhere 
 it is used of disciples, or believers, contemplating some mani- 
 festation, not of God, but of the glory of God (i. 14, 32, iv. 35, 
 xi. 45) and so in i Jn i. i, iv. 12 (" No man hath contemplated 
 God "), 14. 
 
 (iii) 'Opav. 
 
 [1605] John's use of this verb is confined to the future 
 
 ^ [1604 a] Qeaardai cannot perhaps be expressed in English so as to 
 distinguish it from Beapelv. " Contemplate " is quite inadequate, and 
 so are "gaze at" and "survey." In N.T., Beaa-Oai is almost always 
 connected with a number of people either as "seeing" or as "being seen," 
 e.g. with the muhitudes going out to "see the sight" of John the Baptist 
 (Mt. xi. 7, Lk. vii. 24), or with the king coming in to see the assemblage 
 of his guests (Mt. xxii. 11). In the Synoptists, the only exception to this 
 is Lk. V. 27 where Jesus watches Levi engaged in his public occupation 
 (parall. Mk ii. 14, Mt. ix. 9 dhiv). But Mk App. [xvi. 11] iBtaQr) 
 v'n avTTJs is applied to Jesus seen by Mary Magdalene alone after the 
 Resurrection. 
 
 [1604 d] In Jn (i. 32) it is appHed once to the Baptist seeing the 
 Holy Spirit descend on Christ. In Rom. xv. 24 it probably means 
 that the Apostle wishes to have the joy of beholding the assembly of 
 the whole of the Roman Church. It is perhaps impossible to say 
 confidently how the writer differentiates Jn i. 18 Seov ovdels empuKev 
 TTtriTTore from I Jn iv. 12 deov ovdels na>7roT€ TfBiarat. The former would 
 most naturally apply to the revelation of God received individually by 
 Patriarchs and Prophets, the latter to that received by the saints of the 
 collective Church. The absolute God has been seen by none, whether 
 singly or collectively. 
 
 1 10 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS [1606] 
 
 oyjro/jLai and the perfect icapaKa^. 'Ecopa/ca, in John, means 
 that kind of " having seen " which has produced a permanent 
 result enabling the man that " hath seen " to " bear witness." 
 There are few exceptions to the letter, and none to the spirit, 
 of this rule. It is possible, however, to " have seen " — so far 
 as the bad can " see " — and to " disbelieve," or even to " have 
 seen" and to "hate," not only the Son but even "the Father": 
 and the mention of " the Father " shews that spiritual sight, 
 not material, is contemplated^. It is characteristic of the writer 
 that, while he says " God no one /lat/i seen at any time'," he re- 
 presents Jesus as apparently blaming the unbelieving Jews for 
 not having " seen " the " form " of the Father (" Ye have neither 
 heard his voice nor seen his form, and ye have not his word 
 abiding in you"*"). Jesus also says : "Not that any one hath 
 seen the Father except him who is from the Father," and 
 " He that hath seen me hath seen the Father^" The object 
 is to shew that the pure in heart must needs ''■have seen" the 
 Father in the Son. 
 
 [1606] 'E(opaK(o<; is applied to ''having seen'' (through 
 divine revelation) the fountain of blood and water that gushed 
 from the side of Jesus. Here, too (as in i. 34, iii. 32), 
 "witnessing" follows close on "having seen" \ (xix. 35) "He 
 that hath seen hath borne witness^!' 
 
 1 [1605 ^] It would be interesting to ascertain the motives that led 
 the writer to dispense with the present. (In Philo the pres. is freq., 
 especially of Israel "seeing God." In the LXX it is often used as a 
 noun, e.g. 2 S. xxiv. 11 "David's seer {rov opatvra (A -^tov) AaveiS).") 
 In Jn vi. 2, many MSS. read edopcov : but probably the scribes cancelled 
 the first two letters of the original eeecopcoN (for -oyN). 
 
 2 vi. 36, XV. 24 " They have both seen and hated me and my Father." 
 ^ i. 18. * V. 37. '" vi. 46, xiv. 9 (comp. xiv. 7). 
 
 ^ [1606 a] Besides these two passages there is iv. 45, " The Galileans 
 received him, having seen (ttopaKorey) all the things that he did in 
 Jerusalem." Although the writer may intend to correct the very un- 
 favourable impression given of the Galileans by Luke (iv. 29), yet, in 
 a context describing such transient faith or "receiving" as this, we 
 should rather expect decopelv than 6pav. In vi. 2 eapav in some MSS. 
 
 A. V. Ill 9 
 
[1607] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 (iv) BXeireip. 
 
 [1607] BXcTretv is used of material sight, especially in 
 connexion with the healing of blindness (ix. 7 — 25, five times). 
 In the same connexion it means (with a play on the word 
 (ix. 39 — 41)) spiritual seeing. It is also used of "looking" 
 in ordinary life (xiii. 22 "they looked on one another ")^ 
 Only by a rare metaphor is the word used of the Son of 
 God, in heaven (v. 19) "looking at" the deeds of the Father 
 (in which sense Philo also uses it of the Eldest Son of the 
 Father in heaven " looking at {^Xeirwv) " the acts of the Father 
 as patterns for His own action) ^ 
 
 (v) Alpeiv 6<j)6a\fjLov<; etc. 
 
 [1608] The act of "raising the eyes" or "looking up" 
 is regarded by Philo (on Gen. xviii. 2, P. A. 242) as sym- 
 bolical. Jesus uses it in a symbolical sense when He bids 
 the disciples (iv. 35) "lift up" their "eyes" and behold the 
 spiritual harvest. But it is also thrice used by the Evangelist 
 concerning Jesus. In the first case, (vi. 5) it precedes the 
 sign of the Bread of Life. In the second, it precedes (xi. 41) 
 the raising of Lazarus. In the third (xvii. i) it introduces 
 the last prayer of the Son to the Father ; and there, as 
 if a climax was intended, the Evangelist writes, not simply 
 " lifting up," but " lifting up to heaven!' 
 
 (vi) ^\hdv etc. 
 
 [1609] The thought implied by this verb often differs 
 according to its grammatical form owing to considerations 
 
 has wrongly supplanted e^ecopouv (1605 a). Possibly, here too, after 
 navra, Stood an original TeGecopHKOTec which has been altered to 
 ecopAKOxec. 
 
 ^ Comp. i. 29, xi. 9. In xx. i, 5, xxi. 9, 20 it refers to things "seen" 
 or " noted " after the Resurrection. 
 
 2 [1607 a] Philo i. 414 Tovtov ^€v yap Trpecr^vraTov viov 6 rayv optoov 
 ai/e'reiXe Trarrjp, ov erepcidi npiOToyovov atvofiacre, koI 6 yevvijOels fiivTOi 
 ^Lfxovp,evos ras tov Trarpos 68ovs, npos Trapabeiyp.aTa dpx^eTVTra CKeivov 
 jSXcTrcoi', €p6p(f)ov etdr]. 
 
 3 See also Philo i. 95, 299, 645, ii. 13. 
 
 112 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS [1609] 
 
 other than grammatical. In the participle and the sub- 
 junctive, this is the customary verb to express ordinary 
 seeing, so that its use implies no special meaning. But in 
 Gen. i. 31 it is used in the past indicative (elBev) concerning 
 the Creator surveying His work and pronouncing it good, 
 and this stamps that tense as likely to be used by Philo and 
 his school to express that kind of "sight" which precedes 
 some spiritual utterance or process. Also, in Rabbinical 
 writers, " Come and see " is commonly used as a preface to 
 the statement of some profound mystery^, and this is hinted 
 at in the reply of Philip to Nathanael (i. 46) " Come and see 
 (tSe)," as if, in answer to Nathanael's incredulous words, " Can 
 Qxvy good come out of Nazareth?" God replied through the 
 mouth of the unconscious instrument, Philip, " Come and see 
 [tke mystery of mysteries^ the Supreme Good\^r Another use 
 of this formula is where the Jews themselves invite Jesus to 
 " come and see " the apparent triumph of death, unconsciously 
 inviting Him to the highest manifestation of His own divine 
 and life-giving power in triumphing over death (xi. 34) : 
 " ' Where have ye laid him ? ' They say unto him, ' Sir, come 
 and see! Jesus wept^." 
 
 1 See Hor. Heb. on Jn i. 47 (R.V. i. 46). 
 
 2 In the Johannine Epistles this vb. occurs thrice, i Jn iii. i tScre 
 TTOTaTrrjv aydir-qv dedcoKev..., v. l6 edv ris idij r. d8€X(f>6v, 3 Jn xiv. eXTri^o)... 
 (re tSeii/. 
 
 ^ [1609 a] "Come and see'' must be distinguished from (i. 39) (R.V.) 
 " Come and ye shall see (o-^eaOe) " (A. V. " Come and see " reading idere), 
 which is not a Rabbinical precept but a Messianic promise. The context 
 there is full of emblematic meaning. It contains the very first utterance 
 of Christ, '■^ What seek ye?" — which is, according to Philo (i. 196 
 commenting on Gen. xxxvii. 15), the utterance wherein Elenchos {i.e. 
 the Convicting Logos or Spirit) addressing the wandering soul, asks it 
 what is the object of its existence. 
 
 [1609 (^] The two seekers after truth reply, " Rabbi... where abidest 
 thou ?," unconsciously asking the Son to tell them of His eternal Abiding- 
 place, the " Eternal Home," " the bosom of the Father." The Saviour 
 does not say to them (see Chrysostom) as He says, in effect, to the 
 
 113 9—2 
 
[1610] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 [1610] In the indicative, elBov is used of the disciples 
 (i. 39) " coming and seeing " where Jesus " abides " ; Abraham 
 also (viii. 56) " saw," prophetically, the glory of the Messiah, 
 and Isaiah (xii. 41 "saw") is probably represented as seeing 
 it in the same way. When the beloved disciple entered the 
 tomb of Jesus, he " saw " and " believed " (1552—60). Applied 
 to Jesus it occurs thrice to describe His mysteriously " seeing " 
 Nathanael under the fig-tree^ the blind man to whom He 
 gives sight, and Mary to whom He restores Lazarus from 
 the dead 2. 
 
 [1611] Philo, commenting on the statement (Gen. i. 31) 
 that "God saw (elSev) his works," deprecates the literal 
 meaning, and apparently implies that the words indicate 
 a transference of knowledge or intellectual " sight " from Him- 
 self to His creatures^. Certain it is that in each of these last 
 two cases, when Jesus "saw (eZSez^)" a human being, the act is a 
 prelude to a transference from Him of (i) sight, (2) life* and, 
 in the case of Nathanael, the threefold eihev prefaces a trans- 
 ference of spiritual life. 
 
 § 3. ''Hearing'' 
 
 [1612] A difference between the Johannine and the 
 Synoptic view of '* hearing/' as a means of receiving the 
 
 Scribe (Mt. viii. 20, Lk. ix. 58) " Foxes have holes — but the Son hath 
 no abiding-place." On the contrary, He promises that, if they will 
 " come," they shall " see " the abiding-place. 
 
 1 i. 47 — 50 "Jesus sawi^dhev) Nathanael coming...! saw (eldov) thee... 
 Because I said to thee I saw (eldov) thee...." 
 
 2 ix. I, xi. 33. In the latter, it is said that "when he saw her 
 weeping and the Jews that had come with her weeping he... troubled 
 himself." In the healing of the impotent man the participle is used 
 (v. 6) TovTov Idoiv 6 'I..., and also in xix. 26 'I. ovv Idoiv ttjv fx-qripa.... 
 
 3 [1611 a'\ Philo i. 442 Aeyerm yap on (Gen. i. 31) EtSei/ 6 Oeos ra ndvra 
 oaa €7roir)(rev, ovk 'iaov tq>, o-^iv eKaarois npoae^aXcv, aXX eidrjaiu koI yvatcriv 
 Koi KaToXrj^Lv (Sv erroirjo-ev. That this represents God as " teaching," 
 appears from the following words, Ei^e to'lvw (VTrpeires vcfirjyela-^ai koi 
 8i8d(TKfiv KOI beiKVVvai.... 
 
 114 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 [1613J 
 
 revelation of Christ, is perceptible in their different ways of 
 representing the last part of the following passage of Isaiah — 
 which is quoted by Jesus Himself in the Three Gospels, and 
 by the Evangelist in the Fourth. The Hebrew is (R.V. txt) 
 (Is. vi. 9 — lo), "Go and tell this people, Hear ye indeed, but 
 understand not, and see ye indeed, but perceive not. Make 
 the heart of this people fat, and make their ears heavy, and 
 shut their eyes: lest they see with their eyes, and hear with 
 their ears, and understand with their heart, and turn again and 
 be healed!' 
 
 Mkiv. II-I2 (lit.) 
 "...in parables. 
 That seeing {fi\k- 
 7roi/T€s) they may 
 see and not per- 
 ceive (tSwo-tv), and 
 hearing they may 
 hear and not un- 
 derstand, lest at 
 any time they 
 should turn and 
 it should be for- 
 given them." 
 
 Mt. xiii. 13 Lk. viii. 10 
 
 Jn xii. 39-40 
 "...inpar- "...inpar- "For this cause 
 
 ables. Be- ables, that they could not 
 cause seeing seeing they believe, for that 
 they do not may not see Isaiah said again, 
 see and hear- and hearing He hath blinded 
 ing they do they may not their eyes and he 
 not hear, understand." hardened their 
 neither do heart; lest they 
 
 they under- should see with 
 
 standi" their eyes and 
 
 perceive (i/or/o-w- 
 crti/) with their 
 heart, and should 
 turn and I shall 
 {i.e. should) heal 
 them." 
 
 [1613] This is not the place to discuss all the differences 
 of these four versions, but merely to indicate that John, in 
 quoting this prophecy, consistently drops all that refers to 
 hearing (" make their ears heavy,' " lest they. . .hear with their 
 ears''). Did he do this because it seemed superfluous, the 
 
 1 Mt. continues, "And there is being utterly fulfilled for them the 
 prophecy of Isaiah saying, 'By hearing ye shall hear.. .lest at any time... 
 they should turn, and I shall {i.e. should) heal them ' " — quoting the LXX 
 version of the whole of the prophecy given above. 
 
 115 
 
[1614] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 metaphor of the " eyes " being sufficient ? It is probable that 
 he deemed no word in Scripture superfluous. But he may 
 have had regard to the whole tenor of his own Gospel — the 
 revelation of the incarnate Word. How could the Word be 
 heard by those whose " ears " have been " made heavy " by 
 God ? To modern readers it will occur at once that this 
 difficulty is no greater than that which is suggested by the 
 parallel question, " How could the Light of the World be 
 seen by those whose ' eyes ' have been ' blinded ' by God ? " 
 Logically, that is true. But under the influence of traditions 
 about the (Ps. Iviii. 4) " deaf adder that stoppeth her ear," and 
 (Jer. viii. 17) "adders that will not be charmed," some might 
 reserve this particular metaphor (of " deafness ") to denote 
 incurable spiritual defect. 
 
 [1614] It is a remarkable fact that John does not relate 
 a single instance of the cure of the deaf He does not even 
 mention the word "deaf" in the whole of his Gospel. Using 
 the word "hear" in two senses, (i) "perceiving by the sense 
 of hearing," (2) " hearkening to " or "obeyingV' he represents 
 
 1 [1614 a] 'Akovco with accus. = '"'■perceive by hearing" with genit. = 
 " hearken to," or " obey." The following passages illustrate the difference 
 between the two constructions. 
 
 [1614^] (i) 'Akovo) with accus. iii. 8 "thou hearest its voice," but 
 knowest not its home, object, and meaning ; v. 24 " He that heareth 
 my word and believeth...," i.e. not merely hears ; v. 37 "Ye have never 
 [so much as\ heard his voice," much less understood and obeyed it ; 
 viii. 43, 47 (1614 d) ; xix. 8 " When therefore Pilate heard this word 
 (Xoyoi/)" — to be contrasted with xix. 13 "Pilate thtreiort, giving ear io 
 these words (Xoyfoi/)," i.e. intimidated by them and obeying them. 
 
 [1614^] (2) 'Akovco with genit. v. 25 — 8 "the [spiritually] dead shall 
 hearken to the voice {(fxovrjs) of the Son of God and they that hearken 
 shall live.. .all that are in the tombs shall hearken to his voice," and shall 
 obey by coming forth to judgment, whether for good or ill ; (vii. 40) 
 "having hearkened to these words, said, 'This is truly the prophet,'" 
 X. 3, 16, xviii. 37, of those '■^hearkening to" the voice of the Good 
 Shepherd, or " my voice," xii. 47 " Every one that shall hearken to my 
 words and not observe them," i.e. understand them, and either not obey 
 them, or obey them for a time, but " not keep {(jivXd^T]) them." 
 
 116 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS [1616] 
 
 Jesus as saying to some of the Jews that they were unable to 
 '' hear " His word, even in the former sense. The context im- 
 plies that they were of the nature of "the deaf adder" — which 
 will not hear the voice of (vii. 24, comp. Ps. Iviii. i) "righteous 
 judgment" — the Serpent or Slanderer: "Why do ye not recog- 
 nise the meaning of ('yivcoaKere) my speech ? Because ye are 
 not able to hear my word^ Ye are from your father the devil!' 
 
 [1615] The importance attached by John to " hearing " as 
 compared with " seeing " appears in several passages and not 
 only in the rebuke to Thomas. When Mary Magdalene 
 returns from the tomb to the disciples, " I have seen the 
 Lord " is not the whole of her tidings. She adds that " He 
 said these things to her " : and it has been shewn above (1601) 
 that she believed in the Resurrection, not because she " saw," 
 but because she heard. The Prologue of the Gospel, it is 
 true, mentions what we have called above (1604) — most 
 inadequately — "contemplating." "And the Word became 
 flesh and tabernacled among us and we contemplated his 
 glory." But if this is compared with what may be called the 
 Epilogue, that is to say, the Epistle, it will appear that this 
 " contemplation of," or " gazing on," the earthly form and life 
 of the Logos, was but a rudimentary and transient manifesta- 
 tion. The higher manifestations are described as ''hearing'^ 
 and ''seeing',' both of them in the perfect: — "what we have 
 heard [and retain in our hearts]," " what we have seen [and 
 keep in our minds]." In contrast to this the " contemplating " 
 is spoken of in the past, along with the " handling " — " we 
 contemplated," "our hands handled." 
 
 [1616] The whole passage in the Epistle^ is well worth 
 study for the light it throws on John's use of synonyms and 
 
 1 [1614^] Jn viii. 43. In antithesis, it is said (viii. 47) "He that 
 is from God perceives-by-hearing the words {aKovf^i to. pr}}iaTa) of God,' 
 i.e. he has the faculty of perceiving the voice of God. Sir. xii. 13 ("Who 
 will pity a snake-charmer?") shews that "deaf adders" were frequent. 
 They represent unjust rulers in Jer. viii. 17. See Ency. 4394. 
 
 2 I Jn i. 1—5. 
 
 117 
 
[1617] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 for other reasons. " We have heard'' is repeated thrice, and 
 so is " we have seen!' On the other hand, '' we bring tidings " 
 {aira'yyeWo^ev) is repeated twice, and then the verb occurs 
 a third time, slightly varied — " we publish tidings " {avay^eX- 
 \oiLL€i'). The first words in the Prologue are, " /;/ the beginning 
 was the Word'' — which implies "hearing." The first words 
 in the Epilogue are " That which was from the beginning, that 
 which we have heard!' Then the writer says " that which we 
 have seen with our eyes'.' Why did he not also say "that 
 which we have heard with our ears," in parallelism, and after 
 the manner of Isaiah? This is one of many questions 
 (arising out of Johannine style) to which the answer must be 
 that the author had some motive, but that we do not know 
 what it is. We may however fairly conjecture that the motive 
 is connected with his omission of Isaiah's clause about 
 '^hearing',' to which attention was called above (1613). 
 
 [1617] The Epistle continues in aorists, " That which we 
 contemplated and our hands handled." It seems to mean 
 " saw and touched m the flesh " — transient facts, but facts on 
 which the permanent " having heard " and the permanent 
 "having seen" are based. And the writer does not make 
 these earthly manifestations two (" that which ive contem- 
 plated, that which we handled") but only one. "Handling," 
 — perhaps, better, " feeling in the dark " — may well allude to 
 doctrine — such as Paul utters but not of necessity distinctively 
 Pauline — that God placed men on the earth " if perchance they 
 would handle him and find him\" According to this view, 
 the Epistle teaches us that what men's hands handled " con- 
 cerning the Word of life," was a rudimentary though necessary 
 manifestation. It was preparatory for something higher, just 
 as the " contemplation " or " spectacle " of the glory of the 
 Incarnation was preparatory for the higher "seeing," or 
 ''vision," of the glory of God. 
 
 ^ Acts xvii. 27. 'irT]\a(fido} (Steph.) almost always means "/^^/ in the 
 dark." 
 
 118 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS [1620] 
 
 [1618] After saying that the subject of this hearing, 
 seeing, contemplating and touching was " the Word of life," 
 the writer repeats himself thus : " And the life was manifested, 
 and we have seen and bear witness and bring tidings to you." 
 He then breaks off to define the subject of the tidings as 
 being " the eternal life that was with {irpo^) the Father and 
 was manifested to us." Then he repeats himself once more, 
 " That which we have seeit and have heard we bring tidings of 
 to you also." 
 
 [1619] Why " to you also " } Because of a feeling of 
 "fellowship." And this leads him to think of the "fellow- 
 ship " of the Father (whom he has just mentioned) with the 
 Son (whom he has not yet mentioned but mentions now) as 
 follows, " in order that ye also may have fellowship with us. 
 Yea, and our fellowship is with the Father and with his Son 
 Jesus Christ." 
 
 [1620] Another way of saying " for the sake of fellowship" 
 would be " for the sake of making men feel joy together 
 in brotherly love." Accordingly, the writer defines his object 
 a second time in connexion with "joy" and with "light," the 
 type of joy, " And these things we write unto you in order 
 that our^ joy may be fulfilled [by your fellowship therein]. 
 And this is the tidings {dyyekla) that we have heard from 
 him and publish as tidings (dvayyiWo/jiev) to you, that God is 
 light and in him is no darkness at all." Thus gradually the 
 writer has led us on from stage to stage ; and from " that 
 which was from the beginning " we have been brought down 
 to " fellowship." Now he is fairly on the way to apply his 
 high theology concerning " fellowship " in heaven to practical 
 morality about " fellowship " on earth, and here we must leave 
 him. But we shall have examined this passage to little 
 purpose if we have not perceived that every stage is carefully 
 considered, every word weighed, and every repetition de- 
 
 1 V.r. "your joy." 
 119 
 
[1621] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 liberate. In particular, we are to note the threefold repetition 
 of " hearing " and " seeing " and the prominence given to the 
 former. ''That which we have heard'' begins, and ''the 
 tidings that we have heard'' concludes, these reiterations of the 
 avenues by which the Logos has revealed itself to men. In 
 harmony with this doctrine, Mary Magdalene believes because 
 she " hears," though she does not " see," or sees amiss — and it 
 is " hearing " that elicits the Samaritan confession, " This is 
 the Saviour of the world \" 
 
 § 4. "Knowing" 
 
 [1621] The verbs of " knowing " are olha and ^LVijudKca. 
 OtSa means " I know," or, in a popular sense, " know all 
 about " : 'yLvd)aK(jd means " I acquire knowledge about," " come 
 to know," " understand," '" recognise/' " feel." 
 
 (i) Olha. 
 
 [1622] It is only in a popular sense that man can be said 
 to "know (all about) {olha)" God, or even about a human 
 being (for the soul, in the strict sense, is beyond human 
 knowledge). In the last words of Jesus (xvi, xvii), olha is not 
 used at all. In the Epistle it is never used with a personal 
 object, but, generally, only about the " facts " of revelation. 
 Yet by some of the prophets (Is. v. 13 (LXX), xlv. 5, Jer. iv. 
 22, ix. 6) it is brought as a charge against the people, or their 
 leaders, that they neither " know " {olha) nor wish to " know " 
 God ; and Jeremiah (xxiv. 7, xxxi. 34) predicts a time when 
 all shall " know " Him. Many of the Jews may have assumed 
 that they, having discarded idolatry, the sin of their fore- 
 fathers, were not only distinguished from (Is. Iv. 5) "the 
 nations" {i.e. Gentiles) that "knew not God," but were also 
 entitled to say that they themselves "knew God." The 
 Evangelist exhibits Jesus as denouncing this assumption and 
 as declaring that the Jews are entirely ignorant of Him. 
 
 [1623] Their ignorance proceeded from their attempt to 
 
 1 See 1503—7, 1560, 1601. 
 120 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS [1624] 
 
 rise to the conception of God through a written Law, and not 
 through God's Creation as a whole, including the Law but 
 also including Man. As there was no humanheartedness in 
 their conception of God, so there was nothing divine in their 
 conception of Man. If, therefore, many of the Jews thought 
 they "knew all about" God, when they affixed to Him the 
 labels authorised by Moses and the Prophets, much more 
 would they suppose that they " knew all about " man. And, 
 of course, Jesus would be no exception to their rule of 
 universal knowledge. According to them, it was enough to 
 say that they " knew all about " the " father and mother " of 
 Jesus, and it followed that they " knew all about " Him. The 
 Messiah Himself would be no Messiah to them if they knew 
 " whence he is " : He must needs come from some incompre- 
 hensible source : else He has no title to allegiance. 
 
 [1624] With manifest irony the Evangelist makes the Jews 
 say to one another (vi. 42) " Do not we {emph. T^yaet?) know his 
 father and his mother [too] ? " Later on, they say (vii. 27) 
 " As to this man, we know (oiSafjuev) whence he is ; but as to 
 the Messiah, when he is to come, no one is to understand 
 {yivdiaKei) whence he is." Jesus repeats their assertion (2236) 
 half as an assertion of theirs, half as an exclamation of His 
 own, and then points out its falseness (vii. 28) " ' Both me do 
 ye know and ye know whence I am ! ' [So ye say] and [yet] 
 I am not come from myself ; but he that hath sent me is true, 
 whom ye (uyu-et?) [being false] know not: I {ifyw) know him...," 
 and again (viii. 14) " I know whence I came {rjXdov) and 
 whither I return ; but ye {vfiels:) know not whence I come 
 {epxofiaLy or whither I return^" and (viii. 19) " Ye neither 
 
 ^ [1624 a] A distinction appears to be drawn between " I came " and 
 ** I come" (or "am coming"). The Logos "came" from the Father 
 (1637) when He (i. 11) "came" in the special act of the Incarnation: 
 but the Logos is also constantly "coming" from the Father to the created 
 world, in a myriad of non-special acts or sustaining processes. Even in 
 this lower and less personal sense — as the source of the "ever coming" 
 Logos — the Father is not known to the Jews. 
 
 121 
 
[1625] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 know me nor my Father ; if ye had known (^Secre) me, ye 
 would have known my Father also {av rjBeLTey Now for the 
 first time ycvcoo-Kecv is applied to " God," as object, in order to 
 introduce a solemn protest, in which Jesus thrice repeats the 
 word oUa in connexion with the Father, (viii. 55) ''Ye have 
 had no understanding of {e<yv(iiKaTe) him ; but I knozv (i.e. have 
 absolute k7iowledge of, olSa) him ; and if I say that / know 
 (olBa) him not, I shall be a liar like unto you : but I know 
 (oUa) him\" 
 
 [1625] Henceforward, this popular use of olBa, in the words 
 of Jesus, applied to " the Jews," is dropped, with the single 
 exception of xv. 21 ("They know not him that sent me"). 
 But the Jews — having above asserted (vii. 27) " We know this 
 man whence he is," now say (ix. 29) : " But this man we know 
 not whence he is." They mean, apparently, that they do not 
 know with what authority He comes. But they are intended 
 by the Evangelist to testify unconsciously against themselves, 
 " We know not the Living God." For " God " is the " whence 
 he is." 
 
 (ii) Tlvcoo-kco. 
 
 [1626] Even when used in the perfect, this verb is quite 
 distinct in meaning from olSa. Strictly speaking, we ought 
 not to say that the Father, or the Eternal Son, ytvcua-Kci 
 " comes to know," " understands," or " feels " : but the Evange- 
 list, after applying the word to the Good Shepherd, who 
 (x. 14) "understands (ytvaxTKet)" and is understood by, His 
 sheep, delights in applying it, in a spiritual metaphor, to the 
 Father and the Son (id. 15) : " Even as the Father 7tnderstands 
 me and I understand the Father " : and he has previously 
 used it of Jesus entering into and " understanding " the 
 
 ^ [1624 <^] For other instances of olha and yti/oxrKO) in the same 
 sentence, see 1626 and comp. Jn xxi. 17 "Lord, thou hast absolute 
 knowledge of (oldas) all things, thou imderstandest (or, feelest, yiv Manas) 
 that I still love thee " (where the meaning seems to be that the All-knowing 
 must have sympathy enough to understand the sincere though imperfect 
 love of a sinful but penitent creature). 
 
 122 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS [1626] 
 
 weaknesses of those who " believed on his name*/' He 
 sometimes (1624^) uses the word so as to imply "sympathy"; 
 and we may then render it by " feel." The present tense is 
 especially frequent. Note the contrast with the aorist in the 
 following distinction (x. 38) " Even if ye do not now believe 
 in me, believe in my works, that ye may come to know 
 definitely by evidence {fyvSire) and that ye may continue in the 
 ever grozving knoivledge {^ivwaK'^Te) that the Father is in me." 
 Here the aorist (7Z/COT6) means '* ascertain," the present 
 {rfiv(i)crK7)Te) "feel by constant experienced" In several 
 passages there is a contrast between yivwcrKw and olha : (xiii. 7) 
 " What I do thou hast no knowledge of {olt>a<;^ now^ : but thou 
 shalt tmderstand {yvwarj) hereafter." Note also the distinction 
 between ySeore and eyvcoKeoTe in the two following sentences, 
 the former addressed to the Pharisees, the latter to the 
 disciples. 
 
 (i) (viii. 19) " If you had known all about {fjhetre) me, [as 
 you assumed], you would have had absohcte knowledge of 
 {ySecTE av) the Father." 
 
 (ii) (xiv. 7) "If you had learjted to understand and 
 sympathize with (iyvooKeire) me, you would also have had 
 absolute knowledge of (ySecre dv) the Father : from henceforth, 
 [understanding me] you feel afid understand {yivwcrKere) him 
 and [indeed] have seen him^" 
 
 1 Jn ii. 24 — 5 "Jesus would not trust himself to them because he 
 [by] himself could understand all [men] {bta to avrbv yivaxxKeiv Travras)... 
 for he [by] himself 67??^/^ understand (avros yap iylvaxTK^v) what was 
 in man." 
 
 2 [1626 a'\ Comp. the distinction between the aorist and the present 
 subjunctive of TncrT€va>. Both in Trtoreuo) and in ytvaxTKO) the pres. subj. 
 expresses a living and growing faith or knowledge (2524). 
 
 "^ [1626 b'\ With a negative, olda and 'iyvaxa need not mean " I have 
 not a perfect knowledge," " I have not a perfect understanding." They 
 may mean simply " I have no knowledge, or no understanding," eg. xiv. 9 : 
 " So long a time have I been with thee, and hast thou ?to understanding 
 ofipvK eyvcoKas) me, Philip,^" 
 
 * [1626 c] The writer seems to take a pleasure in varying his terms, 
 
 123 
 
[1627] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 [1627] It is interesting to observe how the EvangeHst, 
 while always using the perfect of " see " {kcopaKo) prefers the 
 present of " come to know " {'yivayaKw) : naturally, because — 
 whereas a thing " seen " is sometimes taken in at a glance — 
 " knowing," if it is genuine " knowing," is in constant growth ; 
 (xiv. 17) "The world doth not behold {SewpeZ) it [i.e. the 
 Spirit] nor grow in the understanding of \^ivitJ(TKei\ it : ye 
 (emph.) grow in the understanding of (v/jueU ycpoja/cere) it 
 because it abideth with you." Note the contrast between 
 (xiv. 31) Lva <yvw 6 Koa/jLOf; and (xvii. 23) iva jivooa/ct) 6 K6a/JL0<;: 
 the former means, " in order that the world may lea7'7i once for 
 all [from the crucifixion and sacrifice of Christ] " ; the latter, 
 " in order that the world 7nay gradually learn [from the 
 spectacle of the divine unity of the Church]." The present is 
 also found in the definition of eternal life (xvii. 3) " This is 
 life eternal that they should grow in the knowledge of 
 {^iv(ii(TKro(TC) thee, the only true God." The same thing is 
 expressed in the Epistle, where the writer speaks of this 
 special " knowledge " as the result of a special " intellect " or 
 "understanding {hiavoia)',' which God gives us, (i Jn v. 20) 
 " The Son of God hath come and hath given us an under- 
 standing {hidvoLav), that we may have the living and growing 
 knowledge of i^ivwa-Koybev) {sic) him that is true." 
 
 [1628] In the Epistle, f^ivwaKco is constantly used for the 
 spiritual instinct by which we feel, or recognise, spiritual 
 truths, (i Jn ii. 3) " Hereby we understand {yivcoo-KOjULev) that 
 we have reached a perfect understa^iding of (iyvwKa/jbei^) God." 
 Comp. I Jn ii. 5, 18, 29; iii. 19, 24; iv. 2 etc., and especially 
 iv. 6 — 7 "He that feeleth, or understandeth, (ytvwaKcov) God, 
 giveth ear to us; he that is not from God giveth not ear to us: 
 
 not for the sake of variation, but for the sake of detaching his reader 
 from fixed formulae: xv. 21 "These things will they do because they 
 know (oXdao-Lv) not him that sent me," xvi, 3 " These things will they do 
 because they did not recognise (or, did not receive the knowledge of) 
 {eyvoio-av) the Father or me." 
 
 124 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS [1629] 
 
 from this we feel^ or understand, the Spirit of truth and the 
 Spirit of error. . .. Everyone that loveth is born of God and 
 feeleth {yivwaKei) God...; he that loveth not nevei' felt {ovk 
 eyvco) God." 
 
 [1629] In the Gospel (vi. 69) the Confession of St Peter 
 places belief before knowledge — as if the former prepared the 
 way and the latter followed, the former being the more 
 rudimentary and the latter the higher development — "We 
 Aave a perfect belief {ireiriorTevKa^ev), and we have a perfect 
 knowledge {lyvdiKayLev), that thou art the Holy One of God." 
 On the other hand, i Jn iv. 16, reversing the order, says, "We 
 have a perfect knowledge and we have a perfect belief [as to] 
 the love that God hath in us." In the former the meaning 
 seems clear, " We believe, nay more, we know." But in the 
 latter {e'yvwKaixev kol ireTTLa-TevKa/jbev ttju aydirr^v), the accusa- 
 tive appears to be governed by the compound verb " know 
 and believe," since Tna-revo) could not have an accusative 
 of the object (1507 b) unless it were neuter — and the question 
 arises, What is the reason for so harsh a construction ? 
 Possibly the writer had in mind the beautiful saying in the 
 Ephesian Epistle (iii. 19) "to know the love of Christ which 
 passeth knowledge." When St Paul has used the phrase 
 "having recognised God," he corrects it into "or rather 
 having been recognised by God (1598^)." So here, the 
 writer perhaps began to say "we know the love that God 
 hath," and then broke off into " believe," as though to imply 
 that it is "beyond knowledge" unless the "knowing" daily 
 grows in conjunction with "believing^" 
 
 1 [1629 a] There is great difficulty in Jn xvii. 25, (lit.) "O righteous 
 Father, on the one hand (Kai) the world recognised (('yv<o) thee not : but 
 I recognised (eyvcov) thee...." Does this mean (i) that the pre-incarnate 
 Son "recognised" the Father from the beginning, or (2) that the in- 
 carnate Son recognised the Spirit of the Father when He was baptized 
 and sent forth to preach the Gospel ? Chrysostom tries to explain it, 
 but soon falls into a change of tense that breaks the antithesis, eyco /xeV 
 
 125 
 
[1630] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 § 5. " Coming'^ 
 
 [1630] The First Epistle to the Corinthians, after "the 
 salutation of me Paul with mine own hand," has "If any 
 man loveth not the Lord let him be anathema. Maran athar 
 " Maran atha " is explained by R.V. margin as " Our Lord 
 cometh^r This proves that the two Aramaic words were used 
 to Corinthians, about the middle of the first century, by an 
 Apostle familiar with them, as a kind of watchword. Like 
 many other watchwords, it was misunderstood at an early 
 period. The earliest epitaph known to contain it quotes as 
 follows " If any of our own [folk] {j^v IBioyv) or other 
 person, dare to deposit a body here, besides us two, may he 
 give account to God and let him be anathema mai'anatJian 
 (sic)^" This inscription is said by the Editor to be of the 
 fourth or fifth century : but it is highly probable that at 
 a very much earlier period Greeks took the phrase to be 
 a kind of curse, as it is taken popularly now and has been for 
 centuries. The juxtaposition of "anathema" in St Paul's 
 Epistle would facilitate the misinterpretation. Nor would it 
 be corrected by the knowledge, — which a few Greeks might 
 retain and transmit to a gradually diminishing number — that 
 the word had some connexion with the " Lord coming." 
 "That" — the misinterpreters might say — "justifies our view. 
 The Lord is 'coming' — to smite sinners with a curse." 
 
 ere otSa IxKKoi 8e ae ovk eyvaaav. It happens that eyvav is followed by 
 jcai, and efNcoKiM might arise from a corruption of epNcoKAKAi, which 
 is the reading of D. More probably, however, the aorist is used for 
 antithesis in contrasting the Son with the World : and perhaps the 
 words are meant to suggest the two forms of recognising above 
 mentioned. 
 
 1 I Cor. xvi. 22. 
 
 2 [1630^] Boeckh /user. Gr. 9303. Hastings Diet renders ns tmv 
 Idiav " private person " : but the above seems to make better sense. 
 There is of course no punctuation in the Epitaph. 
 
 126 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS [1632] 
 
 [1631] Yet there are good reasons for thinking that it does 
 not mean "the Lord is come, or coming," but " Come, LordV 
 In any case it was certainly used in the second century, and 
 probably in the first, as a part of the Eucharistic Liturgy, 
 where " cursing " is out of the question : " Let grace come 
 (iXderco) and let this world go {irapeXdenoy. Hosanna to the 
 Son of David. If anyone is holy, let him come (lit. be 
 a comer, ipxea-Oco) [to the Lord]. If anyone is not [holy] let 
 him become repentant {/jbeTavoeLTco). Maran atha. Amen." 
 If the phrase is imperative, then this invocation is singularly 
 apt and impressive after receiving the sacred bread and wine : 
 " Come, Lord, [into our hearts] !" Of course the prayer may 
 also have reference to another "coming," namely, "on the 
 clouds " ; and the latter, which might easily overshadow the 
 former, might be taken to mean " Come, Lord, to avenge thy 
 saints," and nothing else. The formula, as used at the close 
 of the Apocalypse, " Yea, I come quickly : Amen, come, Lord 
 Jesus'' seems to refer to the " coming on the clouds^." Yet, in 
 the same book, the preceding invitation to " come " suggests a 
 spiritual meaning : " And the Spirit and the Bride say. Come. 
 And he that heareth, let him say. Come. And he that is 
 athirst, let him corneal' very much resembling the combination 
 of " If any one is holy let him come," and " Come, Lord," in 
 the Didache. 
 
 [1632] In the account of the Baptism, all the Gospels 
 agree in assigning to John the Baptist the word '' cometh''' 
 in connexion with the Deliverer whom he heralded. More- 
 over Matthew and Luke represent the Baptist as using the 
 word in a message sent to Christ, '* Art thou he that cometh ? 
 
 1 [1631 «] Enc. and Hastings' Diet. (" Maranatha ") both take this 
 view. 
 
 2 [1631 b] Didach. x. 6. It is difficult to express ikBfiv and irapeXdeiv 
 exactly : " pass into our hearts " and " pass away," or " appear " and 
 " disappear," might express one aspect of the play on the words. 
 
 ^ Rev. xxii. 20. * Rev. xxii. 17. 
 
 A. V. 127 10 
 
[1633] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 or look we for another^?" Taken together, the two traditions 
 demonstrate that "he that cometh," as a title of the Lord 
 Jesus, would be known to His followers in Galilee before any 
 thought of Him as " coming on the clouds of heaven " had 
 entered their minds. 
 
 [1633] Apart from the utterances of the Baptist, all the 
 Gospels agree that when Jesus rode into Jerusalem the crowd 
 welcomed Him with the words, " Blessed is he that cometh ! " 
 This is a quotation from the Psalms, and the words might be 
 addressed to any pilgrim entering the City; but, if "he that 
 cometh " was already a Galilaean title for the new Deliverer, 
 the successor of David, then it becomes almost a certainty 
 that the multitude used the phrase in the sense of " prince " or 
 " king " : and accordingly all the Evangelists insert some 
 paraphrase of this kind^ This confirms our view of "he that 
 cometh " as a technical Jewish term. According to Matthew 
 and Luke these words are quoted by our Lord Himself in 
 a warning to Jerusalem : " Ye shall assuredly not see me 
 [Mt. + henceforth] until ye shall say. Blessed is he that cometh 
 in the name of the Lord." But Luke places these words long 
 before the Entry into Jerusalem, apparently taking the predic- 
 tion to be fulfilled on that occasion. Matthew places them 
 after the Entry (when the Lord is bidding farewell to the 
 Temple) apparently looking forward to a second coming ^ 
 
 [1634] Except in the Entry into Jerusalem there appears 
 in the Triple Tradition little or nothing to indicate a desire to 
 use the word " cometh " about Jesus in a technical or mystical 
 manner to suggest a Messiah or Deliverer. But there is 
 perhaps an allusion to a " coming " of a different kind. The 
 warning to " watch," and the words " in an hour that ye think 
 
 1 Mt. xi. 3, Lk. vii. 19. 
 
 2 [1633 rtj Mt. xxi. 9 "the son of David," Lk. xix. 38 "king," Jn xii. 13 
 "king of Israel," Mk xi. 10 adds a whole clause "Blessed is the coming 
 kingdom of our father David." 
 
 3 Lk. xiii. 35, Mt. xxiii. 39. 
 
 128 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS [1635] 
 
 not, the Son of man cometh" are followed, not long afterwards, 
 by a threefold "coming" of Christ to the disciples at Gethse- 
 mane, each time finding them asleep. Matthew here thrice 
 applies the historic present ^^ cometh " to Jesus. In Mark (who 
 does the same) this is not surprising, as he uses the historic 
 present freely. But the fact that Matthew here, and here 
 alone, applies this form to Jesus\ suggests that on this special 
 occasion he may have retained Mark's tradition as having 
 a symbolical association. The connexion between ''he that 
 comethl' and a " king," pointed out above (1633), is illustrated 
 by the prophecy of Zechariah " Behold thy king cometh " : and 
 Matthew is the only Synoptist that quotes this*^. 
 
 [1635] Passing to the Fourth Evangelist we may note first 
 the fact — and it is a most important one considering how 
 seldom he agrees with the Synoptists in quoting the same 
 passages from Scripture — that he too, like Matthew, quotes 
 from Zechariah, in connexion with the Entry into Jerusalem, 
 the prophecy, " Behold, thy king cometh!' Moreover, through- 
 out his Gospel, he seems to take a pleasure in using the 
 words " cometh," or " he that cometh," about Christ, as though 
 to suggest that He is the realisation of the popular title of the 
 Deliverer, even though the people do not receive Him. That 
 He is ever ''coming',' like the sunlight, is suggested in the 
 Prologue^ In the Triple Tradition, the Baptist's words about 
 
 1 [1634 «] Mk applies epxerm to Jesus in iii. 20, vi. i, 48, x. i, xiv. 17, 
 37, 41, Mt. only in xxvi. 36, 40, 45. Mt. also thrice repeats epx^rai in 
 the previous warning (where Mk and Lk. have it only once and twice 
 respectively) xxiv. 42 — 4 "ye know not on what day your Lord cometh... 
 if he had known. ..in what watch the X^ixx^i cometh... 2X what hour ye think 
 not the Son of man cometh." 
 
 2 [1634 b'\ Mt. xxi. 5, quoting Zech. ix. 9. Matthew's fondness for this 
 particular word in connexion with "the last day" may perhaps be 
 illustrated by Mt. xvii. 11 "Elijah indeed cometh" (where the parall. 
 Mk ix. 12 has "having come") and certainly by Mt. xxv. 19 "But after 
 a long time the lord of those servants cometh and maketh reckoning 
 with them." 
 
 ^ i. 9, where "coming into the world" should be connected with "light." 
 
 129 10 — 2 
 
[1636] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 the Messiah (" cometh, or coming, after me ") seem to indicate 
 discipleship. "After me" is omitted by Luke. But John 
 retains the phrase, and interprets it so as to testify to the 
 Messiah, whom the Baptist "seeth coming unto him^"; and, 
 later on, speaking in his own person, he describes the Lord 
 
 not as "he that came," but '^ he that cometh from above he 
 
 that cometh from heaven I" The Woman of Samaria with 
 very misty views of the Messiah, the Five Thousand (who 
 wish to make "the prophet" Jesus a king), the Jews in their 
 discussions about the Messiah's birth-place, all use this word 
 *' cometh " — ignorant that the Messiah is always coming and 
 had actually come=^. 
 
 [1636] The present tense is also introduced into the 
 narrative of the Raising of Lazarus^ as though in sympathy 
 with the " coming " Deliverer concerning whom Martha says, 
 " Thou art the Christ, the Son of God, that cometh into the 
 world V' and similarly in the Entry into Jerusalem, "having 
 heard that Jesus cometh^'' which prepares the way for " Blessed 
 is he that cometh" and "Behold thy king cometh^!' In the 
 sacramental washing of feet, also, Jesus ''cometh to Simon 
 Peters" After the Resurrection, there are three instances of 
 " coming." The first is in the past tense ^, perhaps to denote 
 that Jesus, on this first occasion, had come from the Father (to 
 whom He had ascended) in a kind of second spiritual incarna- 
 tion. The second is in the present tense though the context is 
 
 1 i. 15, 27, 29, 30. 2 jij^ 21. 
 
 ^ iv. 25 " I know that Messiah cometh^^ vi. 14 "This is of a truth the 
 prophet that cometh into the world," vii. 27 "When Christ is to come 
 {cpXrjTai)" vii. 41 '"''Cometh Christ from Galilee?" vii. 42 "Christ cometh 
 from Bethlehem." 
 
 * xi. 20, 38. 
 
 * xi. 27. s xii. 12, 13, 15. 7 xiii. 6. 
 
 ^ XX. 19 "And, the doors having been '&\iw\....there-catne Jesus and 
 stood in the midst." On the past tense used to express the "coming" 
 in the Incarnation, see 1637. 
 
 130 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS [1637] 
 
 similar to that in the firsts The third is also in the present, 
 but the context is quite different. It describes Jesus as first 
 saying ["Come] hither! break your fast," and then as 
 Himself coming. " There cometh Jesus and taketh the bread 
 and giveth to themV 
 
 [1637] In our Lord's own words, the Aorist is generally 
 used to describe His coming, or being sent, from the Father, 
 and the Perfect to describe His arrival in the world, as though 
 He said, " I came (or, was sent) from heaven ; I am come to 
 earth." The Evangelist also prefers the Aorist to describe 
 the former aspect. For this reason, " come forth'' is always in 
 the Aorist when describing the Incarnation I In the Last 
 Discourse Jesus thrice uses the Present " I am coming," to 
 express His future coming to the Disciples, even where it is 
 joined with a Future : " I am, coming to you and will receive 
 you to myself^" Once, He uses the Future " We shall come'' 
 
 1 XX. 26 " There-cometh Jesus, the doors having been shut, and stood 
 in the midst." 
 
 ^ [1636 c?] xxi. 12 — 13. Perhaps the disciples are to be regarded as first 
 obeying the Lord by coming and recHning around the "(one) loaf" 
 and the "(one) fish" ; and then the Lord "comes" and gives them "the 
 loaf" and " the fish " (r6 o^apiov). In the Washing of Feet Jesus " comes " 
 to Peter separately. So, perhaps, He comes round to each in turn here. 
 
 3 [1637 d\ viii. 42 " I came forth (e^^XOov) from God and am come 
 (rJKa)) ; for indeed I haT/e not come {eXrjXvOa) from myself but he sent me." 
 ''Hk(o is also in Ps. xl. 7 — 8 " Lo, / a^n come... I delight to do thy will," 
 quoted as a Messianic utterance in Heb. x. 7, 9, " Behold / a^n come 
 {rJKO}) to do thy will." 'E^^XBov is similarly used in Jn xiii. 3, xvi. 27, 28, 
 30, xvii. 8. In Jn i. 1 1, " He came (^XOev) to his own," it cannot be said 
 that the notion of coming from the Father predominates ; but it does in 
 viii. 14 " I know whence I came." And the Aorist is also used when the 
 "coming" is regarded as a Mission — the Son being sent by the Father 
 in order to do something — ix. 39 "For judgment I came into this world," 
 X. 10 "I ca7ne that they might have Hfe," xii. 47 "For I came not to 
 judge the world." This seems to be the meaning of eXOav in i Jn v. 6, 
 " This is he t/tat came through water and blood," i.e. that came from the 
 Father to redeem mankind. 
 
 * xiv. 3, comp. xiv. 18, 28. 
 
[1638] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 to describe the joint visit of the Father, the Son, and the 
 Spirit to the soul of the believer^ 
 
 [1638] His last use of the verb is in the Present, twice 
 repeated, and it is very significant. " If I will that he 
 [i.e. the beloved disciple] remain ivhile I am coming, what is 
 that to thee? Follow thou me." The words would most 
 naturally mean " during the short interval, while I am coming'' 
 as we use the phrase in English, meaning, " I am on the point 
 of coming," and as it is used in Greek, in the First Epistle to 
 Timothy^ But they lend themselves to an inner meaning 
 that would harmonize with Origen's view concerning the 
 " beloved disciple " who, he says, was in the bosom of the Son 
 spiritually even as the Son was " in the bosom of the 
 Father ^" 
 
 [1639] According to this view we might suppose that the 
 author of the Fourth Gospel, accepting the old traditional 
 Johannine name of God, " He that is and WAS and IS 
 COMING^" wished to differentiate it from the merely gram- 
 matical associations of Past, Present, and Future, and there- 
 fore laid stress, consistent stress throughout the whole of the 
 Gospel, on the claim of the Logos to be called COMING not as 
 being future, but as being ever present to come and save. 
 Hence in the Prologue of his Gospel, he describes the Light, 
 from the beginning, as " coming into the world." Now, at its 
 close, after describing the Son as, in one sense, having come, 
 and as having prepared "the beloved disciple" to wait for 
 Him, and to represent Him, on earth, he suggests that, in 
 a second sense, the Son is still " coming " to help such 
 a disciple, and in a third sense, that He will hereafter " come " 
 to make those who thus wait one with Himself ^ 
 
 1 [1637 b'\ xiv. 23. Is this intended to emphasize the fact that (vii. 39) 
 " there was not yet the Spirit because Jesus had not yet been glorified " ? 
 
 2 I Tim. iv. 13, see 1735 «. 
 
 2 Orig. on Jn xxi. 20 foil. (Huet ii. 405 — 6). ^ Rev. i. 4. 
 
 ^ [1639 a\ A comparatively unimportant use of epx^rai may be noted 
 
 132 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS [1640] 
 
 § 6. " Worshipping'^ 
 
 (i) UpocTKvvio), in the Samaritan Dialogue. 
 
 [1640] In the Dialogue with the Samaritan Woman, Jesus 
 is represented as using irpoaKwem twice with dative, twice 
 with accusative, and, in two more instances (" ye worship that 
 which (o) ye know not, we worship that which (o) we know ") 
 with construction that must remain doubtful because the ante- 
 cedent may have been intended to be either dative or 
 accusative^ The accusative is certainly employed at the end, 
 iv. 23—4 (R.V. but see 2167, 2398) "For such doth the 
 Father seek to be his ivorshippers {rom irpoaKwovvra^ avrov). 
 God is Spirit and thej/ that worship him (01 irpoaKwovvTef; 
 avrov) must worship in spirit and truth." When we ask 
 what is the meaning of ''such]' we are led back to the 
 preceding sentence " The true worshippers shall worship {to) 
 (dat.) the Father in spirit and truth." The question arises 
 
 in the Johannine phrase "the hour cotneth^'' or "the hour cometh aiid 
 now is" where the Synoptists say "the days will corned'' Similarly when 
 two men are waiting for the same train, one, looking at the station-clock, 
 may say " The train will soon be coming^'' while the other, at the same 
 moment, catching sight of the train itself some two or three miles away, 
 may say, "The train is coming." John represents Christ in the latter 
 way, speaking as a Seer, "^px'^rai is used by John thus seven times 
 (1891). On the last occasion, instead of "and now is," there is added 
 the Perfect (xvi. 32) " The hour cometh and hath come." 
 
 [1639 <^] "The hour hath come" occurs thrice: (i) (xii. 23) "There 
 cometh Andrew and Philip and they tell Jesus [about the desire of the 
 Greeks to see Him]. But Jesus answered them saying. The hour hath 
 come that the Son of man should be glorified," (2) (xvi. 32) " Behold the 
 hour cometh and hath come that ye should be scattered each to his own 
 and leave me alone ; and yet I am not alone because the Father is with 
 me," (3) (xvii. i) "Father, the hour hath come, glorify thy Son." In the 
 context of the first instance occur the words (xii. 27) " Father, glorify thy 
 name." We may, therefore, say that in each of the three instances the 
 Son is regarded as in close communion with the Father who sees the 
 accomplishment of the fore-ordained future as though it were past. 
 
 1 Orig. Comm. (Huet ii. 213 B) indicates that Heracleon (jjdfo-av rivt 
 TTpoa-KvvoxxTi) took the antecedent to be dative. 
 
 133 
 
[1641] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 what was meant by the variation of case, and the attempt to 
 answer it necessitates an examination of the general use of the 
 word irpoaKweco. 
 
 (ii) Ilpoa-Kvv€co, outside N.T. 
 
 [1641] From Herodotus^ downwards, it was recognised 
 that " to worship {irpoa-Kvvelv) " a king by prostration was 
 a slavish or barbaric custom unworthy of Greeks. The 
 Spartans said, and the other Greeks agreed with them, that it 
 was not in accordance with law and custom (eV vofiw) to 
 "worship a man." The Greeks did not suppose that such 
 " worship " implied a belief that the man so worshipped was 
 a god — any more than Jack Cade supposed himself to be 
 a god when he said that his people were to " worship " him as 
 "their lord^." But whereas Englishmen felt that a vassal 
 might '' worship " his " lord," Greeks, before the Christian era, 
 felt that they could not "worship" any human being. In 
 almost all cases — the exceptions perhaps being where they 
 desired to emphasize the attitude of worship — the Greeks used 
 nrpoa-Kweco, in this sense, with the accusative^. 
 
 1 Steph. quoting Herod, vii. 136, viii. 118, Demosth. 549. 16 np. tovs 
 v^pi^ovras coarrfp iv tols ^ap^dpois. See also L. S. 
 
 2 [1641 a] 2 Hen. VI. iv. 2. 81 "I thank you, good people, there shall 
 be no money : all shall eat and drink on my score : and I will apparel 
 them all in one livery, that they may agree like brothers and worship me 
 their lord.^^ 
 
 3 [1641/^] See Wetst. (on Mt. ii. 2) who quotes Aelian V. H. i. 21 
 as using the dative when he is going to describe the posture in detail^ 
 ^lafiTjvias al(rx^vT]S x'^P'-^ '"''^^ Ilepawv /Sao-iXei Trpoo-eKiivrjaev, but the 
 accusative when he merely states that one could not have audience of 
 the king nplv rj Trpoa-Kwiiaai avrov. Wetst, quotes Lucian Navig. § 30 
 with the accus. ; and in ib. § 37 npoa-Kweircoa-av rjfxiv Reitz reads vficov 
 gov. by ap^(o. The Index to Lucian gives no instance with the dative, 
 but several with the accusative. Also in Polyb. v. 86. 10, quoted by 
 Wetst. with dat., Steph. follows Reisk. in reading Trpoa-KXivova-i for 
 TTpoaKwova-i. Steph. adds "Apud Josephum plurima sunt utriusque 
 structurae exempla libris interdum dissentientibus " : in Ant. vi. 7. 5 
 the accus. and dat. are in consecutive lines ("God" being, in both cases, 
 the object) (see 1642 b), but in vii. 5. 5, ix. 13. 3, xx. 3. i, the accus. is used. 
 
 134 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS [1643] 
 
 [1642] The canon. LXX uses irpoaKweco more than 
 a hundred times with the dative to represent "bowing down 
 to " Jehovah, or to false gods, or to great men, and the dative 
 represents the Hebrew " to." The accusative occurs only six or 
 seven times, and then in connexion with some special circum- 
 stances, mostly implying contempt, after the manner of the 
 Greeks\ The coincidences of meaning in these cases are too 
 striking to be accidental and they indicate that a Jewish writer 
 might exceptionally use irpoo-Kweo) in the Greek style, with 
 the accusative, to denote exceptional " worship " (like that of 
 the sheaves) or " worship " that ought not to be paid except by 
 slaves (like the " worship " paid by Pharaoh's servants and by 
 the princes of Joash and refused by Mordecai), or even 
 ordinary idolatry I 
 
 (iii) Upoo-Kvveco in N.T. 
 
 [1643] Passing to N.T. we find a striking instance of the 
 juxtaposition of the two constructions in the Temptation, 
 where Satan uses the verb with the dative but our Lord in 
 His reply uses it with the accusative. In the Satanic verbal 
 demand for mere '■^prostration'' the Lord discerns a latent 
 demand for " worship " : and He answers the latter, not the 
 
 1 [1642 rt] In Gen. xxxvii. 7, 9, it describes the "sheaves" and the 
 " stars " worshipping, in Joseph's dream. In Ex. xi. 8, Moses says that 
 the servants of Pharaoh will come "beseeching" him {Trpno-Kwrja-ovo-i fie) 
 (lit. "bowing down to me "). In 2 Chr. xxiv. 17 the princes "came and 
 bowed down to (accus.) the king [Joash]. Then the king hearkened unto 
 them and they forsook the house of the Lord... and served the Asherim." 
 In Is. xliv. 15 it means worshipping idols ; and the Epistle of Jeremiah, 
 in consecutive verses, uses the accusative for the worship of false gods, 
 and the dative for that of Jehovah {Trpoa-Kwovvras avTd...(To\ del irpoa- 
 Kvvelv). A Greek insertion in Esther has the accus. twice in a single 
 verse (iv. 17) "As to my refusal to worship the haughty Haman...I will 
 worship no man " — which is quite in Greek style. 
 
 2 [1642*^] It would be interesting to ascertain the usage of Josephus, 
 and whether it varies in A7it. and in Wars. The instances given (1641^) 
 by Steph. are too few to be of much value ; but so far as they go, they 
 indicate that Josephus favoured the accus. and that Ant. vi. 7. 5 rw Beco 
 is a corr. of to Bed (966 a). 
 
[1644] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 former. We may suppose Satan to be saying " All that I ask 
 is that thou wilt bow down to me [Luke, before me\ — a mere 
 gesture, nothing more " ; whereto the Lord replies '' Thou 
 demandest, in effect, worship. And it is written. Thou shalt 
 worship the Lord thy God." In any case it can hardly be 
 doubted that some distinction is intended, especially as Luke, 
 while deviating slightly from Matthew in Satan's utterance, 
 agrees with Matthew, against both the Hebrew and the Greek 
 of Deuteronomy, in differentiating the construction of the 
 verb in our Lord's reply^ 
 
 [1644] In Mark, irpoaKwew with the accusative is once 
 used — where the parallel Luke has " fell down before him " — 
 perhaps to represent the demoniac as actually worshipping 
 Jesus, since he calls Him " the Son of the Most Highl" 
 Matthew — apart from the quotation in the Temptation — never 
 uses it with the accusative. Apart from the Temptation, 
 Luke never has irpoaKvveco at all, except in a possible inter- 
 polation describing the disciples as "worshipping" Christ after 
 the Resurrection. There it is used with the accusative^ The 
 dative is once used by Mark to describe the mock homage 
 paid to Christ in the Passion^ ; and several times by Matthew 
 to describe people prostrating themselves before Jesus^, or 
 
 1 [1643 6z] Mt. iv. 9 7rp. fiot, Lk. iv. 7 Trp. ivminov efxov : Mt. iv. lO, 
 Lk. iv. 8 Kvplov Tov 6c6v o-ov TTp. '. Dcut. vi. 13 "Thou shalt fear the Lord 
 thy God," (f)o^r]dr)(Tr) (but A TTpocTKvvrjaeis). Codex A corrupts the text 
 again in Deut. x. 20, presumably influenced by the Christian Gospels. 
 
 [1643 d] Antecedently we might have supposed that the Greek 
 Churches would frequently have altered the Hebrew "fear" (in "fearing 
 God ") into some word less likely to suggest servile terror, e.£\ " rever- 
 ence" : and, if that had been the case, it might have explained npoa-Kwelv 
 in this quotation. But in the LXX such alterations {e.o-. Jonah i. 9 a-e^ofiai) 
 are almost non-existent. 
 
 2 Mk V. 6 (but Tisch. avrco), Lk. viii. 28 TrpoaiTreaev avrco (Mt. om.). 
 
 3 Lk. [[xxiv. 52]]. 
 
 * Mk XV. 19, Mt.-Lk. om. 
 
 ^ Mt. viii. 2, ix. 18, xiv. ^;^^ xv. 25. The dative in Mt. ii. 2, 8, 11 
 describes homage or worship to be paid to the infant Christ. 
 
 136 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS [1646] 
 
 (once) before other superiors ^ One of these instances 
 describes the women prostrating themselves before Christ 
 after the Resurrection I In two instances Matthew uses it 
 absolutely, once when describing the mother of Zebedee's 
 children petitioning Jesus, and once describing the disciples 
 of Christ worshipping after the Resurrection I 
 
 [1645] Reviewing the Synoptic use of Trpoa-Kweo) we see 
 that Matthew is alone in using the dative to describe people 
 as prostrating themselves before Jesus. Mark never uses it 
 thus except to describe an act of mockery, and Luke never at 
 all — his reason perhaps being indicated by Peter's words to 
 Cornelius, when the latter had fallen and " worshipped " in the 
 Acts, " Rise up, I also am a manl" The Epistles avoid the 
 word : it is not used in any of them (outside quotations) 
 except once to describe a man suddenly converted " He will 
 fall down on his face and worship God^" On the other hand, 
 we have found the accusative used once by Matthew and 
 Luke to describe the actual worship of God ; once by Mark, 
 probably, to describe the worship of the Son of the Most 
 High ; once by an early tradition in Luke to describe the 
 worship of the risen Saviour. 
 
 [1646] These facts, so far as they go — suggesting that the 
 Synoptists reserve the accusative for the worship due to God 
 or to God's Son — contrast with the use in the LXX illustrated 
 above, and still more with the use in Revelation which remains 
 to be mentioned. The accusative is used in that book no less 
 than six times to denote the worship of "the Beast" or of 
 devils ^ Both grammar and history, on this point, might be 
 
 ^ Mt. xviii. 26. "^ Mt. xxviii. 9. 
 
 ^ Mt. XX. 20, xxviii. 17. 
 
 * [1645 a] Acts x. 25 : Upoa-Kwico occurs also in Acts viii. 27, xxiv. 1 1 
 (absol.) of going up to Jerusalem to "worship," and vii. 43 npoa-Kwelv 
 avTols (an addition to Amos v. 26) of idolatry. 
 
 ^ I Cor. xiv. 25. In Heb. i. 6, xi. 21 it is either quoted or allusively 
 used. 
 
 * Rev. ix. 20 "devils," xiii. 8, 12, xiv. 9, 11, xx. 4. 
 
 137 
 
[1647] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 illustrated by a letter from Tiridates to Nero, who is generally 
 supposed to have been " the Beast " mentioned in Revelation : 
 " I came unto thee, [as being] my God, to worship thee even 
 as the [God] Mithras ^" The Greeks would speak of the 
 worship of the Emperor in the Greek form {i.e. with the 
 accusative) and the author of Revelation (or of portions of it) 
 might sometimes adopt the Gentile phrase in speaking of 
 Gentile idolatry, while at other times he might employ the 
 construction most usual in Jewish Greek. 
 
 (iv) lipocTKvvea) in John. 
 
 [1647] Coming to the use of the word in the Fourth 
 Gospel, we find it with the dative describing the man born 
 blind " worshipping " Jesus^, and used absolutely concerning 
 "Greeks," who "went up to worship at the feasts" In the 
 Samaritan narrative, where the verb is frequent, it has been 
 noted above (1640) that the accusative comes twice after two 
 instances of the dative. That passage also attributes to Jesus 
 language (" salvation," " the Jews," " we worship that which 
 we know") quite inconsistent with His character and lan- 
 guage as elsewhere represented in this Gospel. It would 
 seem to be more appropriate to the Samaritan woman 
 mimicking the dogmatism of Jewish Rabbis : " Ye [Samari- 
 tans] worship that which ye know not : we [Jews] worship 
 that which we know, because salvation is from the Jews." 
 Origen's long discussion of the context, and his brief allusion* 
 to the views of a writer earlier than Heracleon, shew that in 
 
 1 [1646^] Wetst. (on Jn xx. 28) "Dio 63. Tiridates ad Neronem, eyo) 
 
 irpos ere -qXBov tov efxov deov, TrpocrKvvrjacov ere cos koI tov Midprjv." 
 
 2 Jn ix. 38 (D avTov). 
 
 3 Jn xii. 20. The verb is also used absolutely in the Samaritan 
 dialogue, iv. 20 (dzs), 24. 
 
 * [1647 a] Huet ii. 211 D UoXv 8e iari vvv iraparidfo-Bai tov 'HpaKXecovos 
 TCI prjTa, dno tov emyeypafifxevov UeTpov KrjpvypaTos TrapaXafi^avofieva... 
 dioTTfp €k6vt€s VTrepTidepeda, TavTa fxovov iirL(rr]p.€Lovp.evoL.... This appears 
 to mean " // is [foo] inuch at this point to quote from Heracleon the 
 [exact] sayings, alleged from the [work] entitled Peter's Preaching... 
 wherefore we deliberately pass them over, noting these alone...." The 
 Latin, instead of " [too] much " has " longe melius." 
 
 138 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS [1647] 
 
 very early times indeed the whole of the passage caused 
 difficulty. Origen's words even suggest that Heracleon 
 had before him (or thought he had) some tradition that inter- 
 preted " Ye [worship that which ye know not] " as ''ye Jews^." 
 
 1 [1647 b'\ Origen's text at this point is full of corruptions as indicated 
 by Huet's margin, and Heracleon's views do not come out very definitely. 
 But Origen clearly accuses Heracleon of having "accepted the word 
 v/Afts in an eccentric way and inconsistently with the context {Ibicos koI 
 Trapa rrjv aKokovOLav tcov prjTS>v...€K8e^dix€vos).^' Then follow these words, 
 in which I bracket what appear to be corrupt : To, 'Yfiels dvrl tov 'lovbaioi, 
 yOviKoi], 8iTjyrj<TaTO- olov Se eVrt Trpos ttjv ^afxapeTriv Xeyeo-Oai, ^'Ypeis o'l 
 'louSaioi' [77 Trpos ^afiapelriv, 'Y/ieis ol eBviKoi] ; "He explained the word 
 'You' as being instead of the word Jews [Gentiles]. But how absurd 
 it is that it should be said to the Samaritan, Ye Jews [or to a Samaritan, 
 Ye Gentiles] ! " 
 
 [1647^] All this confusion can be explained on the hypothesis that 
 Heracleon had before him a tradition arranging the words as part of the 
 Samaritan's speech thus " Our fathers worshipped in this mountain and 
 ye say, [that] 'In Jerusalem is the place where one must worship. Ye 
 [Samaritans] worship ye know not what, we [/ews] worship that which 
 we know, because salvation is from the Jewsy Heracleon regarded the 
 words " Ye worship " as uttered by the Samaritan, not in the character 
 of a Jewish Rabbi but in her own person against the Jewish Rabbis. 
 " Ye " therefore seemed to him to stand " in the place of the ^vordjews 
 {avrX TOV 'I.)." [Comp. Eustath. on Iliad \. iiy, to ''ri aTroXeV^ai" dvTi tov 
 " ^TTcp."] This was very natural — so far. And, if we read on and ask 
 how Heracleon explained " salvation is from the Jews," we find him 
 saying that salvation (Huet ii. 213 B — c) "came to pass in the Judaean 
 [land] but was not in [the Jews] the7n[s elves] (dXX' ovk eV avTols),'' and 
 also " From that nation salvation came forth and the Word [came] into 
 the world." In other words, he seems to say that salvation did not 
 belong to the Jews but " ca?ne forth from them " in order to pass to 
 others. 
 
 [1647^] It is not at all certain that this is Heracleon's meaning, or 
 that Origen represents Heracleon rightly, or that Origen's present text 
 represents Origen rightly. But the hypothesis of transposition of persons 
 goes some way toward explaining the undoubted fact that Origen discerns 
 in Heracleon's rendering of " ye " " inconsistency with the context." As 
 for the words I have bracketed in Origen, they appear to have been 
 added by some editor that took dvTi to mean " instead of^ in the sense 
 of " a juistake for,'' so that a blank seemed to need filling (" He inter- 
 preted the word 'ye' as meaning, instead of Jews "), Then he filled 
 
 the blank suitably by adding " Gentiles " and adapted the context. 
 
 139 
 
[1648] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 [1648] A very ancient tradition is quoted by Heracleon 
 from the Preaching of Peter to this effect : " Peter taught that 
 one ought not to worship after the manner of the (?) Greeks^., 
 serving stocks and stones, nor to pay one's devotions to the 
 Divine Being after the manner of the Jews since they, ivhile 
 supposing themselves to be alone in the knowledge of God, are 
 ignorant of Him, serving angels, and the month, and the 
 moon^." Heracleon seems to have quoted this as bearing on 
 the words in the Samaritan Dialogue " We (rj/jLek) — i.e. we as 
 distinct from others — worship that which we know." In any 
 case, this extract certainly confirms the view that the words 
 " we know " were uttered by the Samaritan in the character 
 of a Jewish teacher and not by our Lord in His own person ^ 
 The extract also illustrates the possibility of a reference to 
 twofold worship, suggested by the twofold construction of the 
 verb, in the passage under consideration. 
 
 [1649] The Jews thought it essential to prostrate them- 
 selves before God in Jerusalem, the Samaritans in Mount 
 Gerizim : Jesus — who, even when He prays, is not described in 
 this Gospel as " praying (7r/3oo-ev%o/>tat) " or as using the word 
 " pray " — cuts at the root of all local worship and even of all 
 rules about external attitudes of worship, by first denying the 
 claims of both mountains, and then indicating that the Person 
 worshipped is " the Father " towards whom " prostration " 
 would be out of place : " Believe me, woman, that the hour 
 cometh when neither in this mountain nor in Jerusalem shall 
 
 1 [1648 rt] Huet ii. 211 E. Uirpov 8idd^avTos fir/ deiv KaBeXflv as (marg. 
 /car' idviKovs, I suggest KaB* "'EWr^vas) TrpoaKwelv ra rijs v\r]s Trpdyixara 
 aTTobc^opivovs, Koi Xarpevovras ^vXois koi XlOoiSy fxrjTe Kara 'lovdalovs ae^eiv 
 TO Beiov, irrcimp Koi avToi povoi ol6p,evoi eTrlo-TaaBai 6e6v dyvooi(riu avTov, 
 XarpevovTcs dyyeXois Ka\ prjvl koi (TeXr]vij. 
 
 2 [1648 (^] "The month." Comp. Gal. iv. 10 "ye observe days and 
 months," Col. ii. 16 " Let no man judge you... in respect of a feast day or 
 a new moon or a sabbath." 
 
 3 Comp. Rom. ii. 17 "Thou bearest the name of a Jew... and gloriest 
 in God and knowest his will." 
 
 140 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS [1651] 
 
 ye prostrate yourselves before the Father." Then He con- 
 tinues^ still using the Jewish idiom, but qualifying it so as to 
 non-literalise its meaning : " Nay, the hour cometh, and now 
 is, when the true worshippers shall prostrate themselves before 
 the Father [not in Gerizim or Jerusalem and not in any 
 literal sense, but] in spirit and truth." 
 
 [1650] Now, having extended the area of what was once 
 mere Jewish and Samaritan " prostration " in Jewish and 
 Samaritan sanctuaries, and having made it coequal with the 
 area of "spirit and truth," the Dialogue proceeds, as in the 
 Temptation, to drop the Jewish phrase (with the dative) and 
 to take up the Greek or cosmopolitan one (with the accusa- 
 tive). Only the Evangelist has to bear in mind that the 
 Greek phrase with the accusative was frequently applied to 
 the polytheistic worship of " a god " or " gods." Hence, he 
 not only repeats "the Father" but also defines "the [one] 
 God," as being " Spirit," thus : " For such doth the Father 
 seek to worship him (accus.). The [one] God is Spirit [not 
 limited by place nor one that requires prostrations at his 
 feet] and they that worship him (accus.) must worship in 
 spirit and truth." 
 
 [1651] According to this view, there is here, as also in 
 the Temptation, a deliberate differentiation of two Greek 
 constructions capable of representing various distinctions 
 according to the nationality or individuality of the writer. 
 But both in the Temptation and in the Samaritan Dialogue 
 
 ^ [1649 «] '• Continues," /.(?. if the words "Ye worship... from the Jews" 
 are transposed (as above suggested) and assigned to the Samaritan 
 as personating a Jewish character. Origen says (Huet ii. 209 B — c) "The 
 phrase, ' The hour cometh ' is written twice, and, in the first instance, 
 ' and now is ' is not added : but in the second the Evangelist says ' Nay 
 the hour cometh and now isJ " But I do not understand him to mean 
 that these last words (iv. 23 — 4) are Evangehstic comment. If they were, 
 the accusative might be explained on that ground, as proceeding from 
 the EvangeHst and not from Jesus, and as being in a different style. 
 But there are many reasons against this. 
 
 141 
 
[1652] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 the Evangelists appear to use Trpoa-Kvvico with the accusative 
 as meaning such worship as ought to be paid to God alone, 
 i.e. not prostration but " reverence," which the Hebrews called 
 " fear " — " Thou shalt /ear the Lord thy God and him alone 
 shalt thou serve." This verb " fear " had been actually 
 paraphrased (1643 a) by Matthew and Luke as " worship " (in 
 the Greek idiom). Possibly John has in mind the Deutero- 
 nomic saying about " fear " and its Evangelistic paraphrase as 
 " worship " : and this is all the more probable as he says that 
 " perfect love casteth out fear^" But in any case we are safe 
 in asserting that John is here using two different forms of the 
 same phrase with differences of meaning, in an attempt to 
 represent the Lord as raising men's hearts from formal to 
 spiritual worship. 
 
 § 7. " Going away {or^ back)" and ^^ going 
 {on a joiirneyY " 
 
 (i) 'TiTOLfyw and Tropevo/jbai. 
 
 [1652] The importance of the distinction between these 
 tw^o words consists mainly in their application by our Lord to 
 
 1 I Jn iv. 18. 
 
 2 [1652 «] 'Yirayw, in Jn, mostly = "go back (or, home)" : 7ropevoixai = 
 "go (on a journey)." In contexts specifying an errand or place, vTrdyo), 
 in Jn, means simply " go away," as in (ix. 7) " Go a-way, wash in the pool 
 of Siloam" (rep. ix. 11) and perhaps in xxi. 3 inrdyco akievetv (unless it 
 implies 7'esumi7ig a former occupation). Elsewhere "home" may be 
 implied in "going back," as in (iv. 16) '■'■Go hofne, call thy husband," 
 (vi. 67) "Do ye also desire to go to your homes ?^^ (xviii. 8) "Let these 
 go to their several homes^^ (xi. 44) " Loose him and let him go ho?ne." 
 In vi. 21 "to the land to which they were makijig their way (vfr^yov)" 
 may refer to Capernaum as a home, or simply to the Western coast to 
 which they were " going back." In vii. 3 " Go (vnaye) into Judaea," the 
 meaning may be " go back," as it certainly is in xi. 8, " Dost thou go back 
 (virdyeis) again there," i.e. into Judaea. 
 
 [1652/^] In xii. 11 (R.V.) "By reason of him [i.e. Lazarus] (St' avrov) 
 many of the Jews went away (virrjyov) and believed {iiria-Tevov) on Jesus," 
 the meaning of vTrfjyou depends on the meaning of dt' avrov. If St* avrov, 
 
 142 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS [1653] 
 
 Himself, virdyo), "go away," being frequently thus used 
 throughout the whole of the Gospel, but Tropevofjuai, " go on a 
 journey," being sometimes used by Him along with virdyco in 
 His Last Discourse. The question is. What distinction, if 
 any, is intended to be drawn between them^ ? 
 
 (ii) Why Luke avoids virdyw. 
 
 [1653] The first point to notice is that virdyco, both in the 
 LXX and in the Synoptic Gospels, appears to have been what 
 may be called a " debateable " word, i.e. a word preferred by 
 some and disliked and deliberately altered by others. In 
 canon. LXX it occurs only once^ (Ex. xiv. 21) "The Lord 
 caused the sea to go [dack]," virrjyayev. But in Tobit, K has it 
 four times in the sense of " go home," whereas B has, in one 
 of these instances, iropevofxai^ and in others no certain 
 equivalent^ Precisely the same phenomenon, only on a 
 larger scale, meets us in the Synoptists. In the first four 
 
 in Jn, could mean "by reason of something in the past concerning him," 
 then it might mean here "on account of the raising of Lazarus," and 
 vTrriyov k. eViVrevov might be rendered "were in the habit of going away 
 to their several homes and believing as a consequence of a visit to 
 Lazarus in Bethany." But did nva in Jn appears generally (1884 a, b) 
 to mean " for the sake of a person, with reference to the. future " : and 
 in the preceding context (xii. 9), dia rbv 'irjaovv, "for the sake of Jesus," 
 means ''''for the sake of seeing Jesus." Hence xii. 1 1 must probably be 
 rendered " Many, for the sake of [seeing] him [/.<?. Lazarus], used to go 
 away {from their party, or, from Jerusalentl...^ In xii. 9 it is said that 
 "many came {^Xdav)...to see Lazarus" ; now it is implied that although 
 the rulers of the Jews discouraged visits to Bethany the temptation to see 
 Lazarus was so great that " many " from time to time slipped away, or 
 deserted their party for the sake of seeing him, and, if they did see him„ 
 they always used to believe. 
 
 1 [1652^] Before the Last Discourse our Lord never says nopevofiai, 
 except in the preface to the Raising of Lazarus, where the words (xi. 11) 
 " I go to awake him [i.e. Lazarus] " presumably refer (at least primarily}/ 
 to a literal journey into Judaea. 
 
 2 Setting aside Jerem. xxxvi. 19 (S*) vTrdyeis for vficls. 
 
 ^ [1653 <a:] Tob. viii. 21 vnaye vyiaivcov irpos rbv iraripa crov, B Tropev- 
 eadai p-erd vyeias, x. II and xii. 5 (K) vyiaivoiv vTraye (B om.), x. 12 vTvaye 
 Trpos Tov TTcvdepov aov (B ripa tovs ir. aov). 
 
 A. V. 143 II 
 
[1654] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 instances where Mark uses virariay (followed twice by Matthew) 
 Luke has severally aTreXdcov, iropevov, vTroa-rpei^e, and 
 TTopevov^. In the Riding into Jerusalem, Luke, for once, 
 follows Mark^ (and that too, against Matthew) ; but after- 
 wards Luke substitutes severally elaeXOovrcov and Tropeverac^. 
 The last of these instances is of particular importance be- 
 cause it is uttered by our Lord about Himself, " The Son of 
 man £-oet/i home (or, back) {yircuyei) even as it is written 
 concerning him," where Luke has, " The Son of man goeth 
 {iTopeverai) according to that which i^ decreed ^" 
 
 [1654] The reasons for Luke's dislike of the word may be 
 inferred from any good Greek Dictionary ; for it would shew 
 that, when intransitive, vira^oa may mean quite opposite 
 motions, such as "go back," "go quietly, or slowly, away," 
 " go on," or " come on " (in the sense of our vernacular " come 
 up ! " or " cheer up ! "). All these are exclusive of its transitive 
 meanings. Luke, therefore, may have been quite justified in 
 altering a word endeared to some by its use in the vernacular 
 Greek Gospel, but liable to ambiguity and perhaps not used 
 among the educated as Mark uses it. The naturalness of such 
 an alteration confirms the conclusion suggested by the agree- 
 ment of Mark and Matthew, namely, that our Lord was 
 reported in the earlier Greek Gospels to have said about Him- 
 self " The Son of Man goeth away, goeth back, or goeth home 
 {virar^eL)'' and that Luke changed this into "goeth (on a 
 journey) {iropeveTai)!^ 
 
 (iii) 'Tirayco, "go home." 
 
 [1655] John's first use of vTrdyo) is in a saying of our 
 Lord about the New Birth (iii. 8), " thou knowest not whence 
 it Cometh nor whither it goeth away, or goeth back {virdyei)" 
 He is speaking about the Pneuma, Breath, or Holy Spirit. 
 Playing on the word as though it were God's breath on earth, 
 
 1 Mk i. 44, ii. ii, v. 19, 34 and parall. Mt.-Lk. 
 
 2 Mk xi. 2 (where Mt. has nopevea-Be). ^ Mk xiv. 13, 21. 
 * Mk xiv. 21, Mt. xxvi. 24, Lk. xxii. 22. 
 
 144 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS [1656] 
 
 the wind, He says " It breatheth, or bloweth, where it willeth, 
 and thou hearest the voice, or sound, thereof." So far it 
 might mean " wind " — though Pneuma would very rarely be 
 used in this sense. But then, after describing its mysterious 
 motion. He says, " So, i.e. equally mysterious to thee, is every 
 one that is begotten of the Pneuma " — and the Rabbi at once 
 perceives that Jesus means " Spirit " now, and perhaps meant 
 it before. Probably He included the two meanings, since 
 men live amid the motions and voices of Pneuma in both 
 senses and are equally ignorant of their sources and ten- 
 dencies. Compare this passage with (vii. 33) "I go back 
 (vTrdyco) to him that sent me," and with (viii. 14) "I know 
 whence I came and whither I go back (virayw), but ye know 
 not whence I am coming and whither I go back!' It appears 
 from these passages that as the Breath or Spirit of God may 
 be regarded as exhaled when it comes forth to men and 
 inhaled when it goes back to God, so the Word or Son of 
 God is regarded as " coming " when He is manifested to men 
 as beginning to do a work appointed by the Father, and as 
 " going back " to the Father when He is manifested to men 
 as having accomplished the work^ 
 
 [1656] In the First Epistle of John it is said, " He that 
 
 1 [1655 d\ We might speak similarly of the " waters " of God, which 
 " come " as rain and " go back " partly as clouds, partly as trees, grass, 
 corn. These, in turn, in the shape of decaying vegetation, "go back" 
 directly to their Mother. Or else, as pasture, they " go back " indirectly, 
 helping the animal world to " go back " in a corresponding way, i.e. to 
 make its return, or pay its offering, to Nature. Comp. Is. Iv. i — 11 
 "Come ye to the waters. ..as the rain cometh down and the snow from 
 heaven and returneth not thither but watereth the earth and maketh 
 it bring forth and bud and giveth seed to the sower and bread to the 
 eater, so shall my word be that goeth forth out of my mouth : it shall not 
 return unto 7ne void^ but it shall accomplish that which 1 please^ and it 
 shall prosper in the thing whereto I sent it." In Ps. civ. 29 — 30 the same 
 Hebrew word "spirit" or "breath," LXX TrreO/xa, is repeated, "Thou 
 gatherest their spirit, they die... thou sendest forth thy spirit, they are 
 created." 
 
 145 II — 2 
 
[1657] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 hateth his brother is in the darkness and walketh {TrepiiraTeT) 
 in the darkness and knoweth not where he goeth [to his goal] 
 (virayecy" ; and the Gospel appears to suggest a similar igno- 
 rance of the " goal " of man's life as being implied in the 
 inability of the Pharisees to understand where the Son is 
 " going home," or " going to his goal." Perhaps their minds 
 were fixed on another notion of "going home" which is set forth 
 thus in the Jewish Prayer Book : " Know whence thou earnest 
 and whither thou art going, and before whom thou wilt in 
 future have to give account and reckoning. Whence thou 
 earnest : — from a putrefying drop ; whither thou art going : — 
 to a place of dust, worms and maggots ; and before whom 
 thou wilt in future have to give account and reckoning: — 
 before the Supreme King of kings, the Holy One, blessed 
 be heV 
 
 [1657] But a Jewish Teacher of the first century, com- 
 menting on the question of the Angel to Hagar, " Whence 
 contest thou and whither goest thou (Tropevr))?" says that it is 
 the voice of Conviction and that it is a reproach addressed to 
 the wandering soul that has deserted the service of the Higher 
 and Sovereign Purpose. And he adds expressly that this 
 poor vagrant's "going (TropevofjuaLy is indefinite: "Thou art 
 chasing after uncertainties, rejecting acknowledged truths^" 
 John, in the Gospel as well as in the Epistle, seems to 
 distinguish this mere "going (Tropevo/nat)" from the "going 
 home (vTrciya))" of a child of God, begotten of God and 
 returning to God. The "home" is the love of God, and the 
 way to it is the love of man. Those who will not receive 
 the Spirit of God have no conception of the " home " or the 
 
 1 [1656^] I Jn ii. ii. So Westc. ad toe, "the final goal {^knoweth not 
 whither) to which life is directed." But I cannot reconcile this with a 
 note of his on the same page, " vnayfi, goeth. The idea is not that of pro- 
 ceeding to a definite point {TropeveaBai) but of leaving the present scene." 
 
 2 Jewish Prayer Book, ed. Singer pp. 190 — i, quoting Aboth iii. i. 
 
 3 Philo i. 576. 
 
 146 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS [1659] 
 
 way to it. Concerning these Jesus says, at the close of His 
 Gospel, what perhaps is, in effect, (xii. 35) " He that walketh in 
 the darkness knoweth not his way home (ttov vTrdyei)." Con- 
 cerning Jesus Himself, His Gospel having been now preached, 
 the Evangelist says, first, " Now before the feast of the 
 Passover, Jesus, knowing that the hour had come that he 
 should pass away {fieraPfj) from this world to the Father," 
 and then, " Knowing that the Father had given all things into 
 his hands and that from God he had come forth, and to God 
 he was goiiig home (vTrdyecy" — and then follows the account 
 of the Washing of Feet, the legacy of Christ's example 
 bequeathed to the Disciples. 
 
 [1658] We see then that in this last passage the Evan- 
 gelist, after describing the impending death in his own words 
 as a " passage to the Father," adds clauses to shew the full 
 trust reposed by the Father in the Son, and concludes with 
 the word used previously by our Lord about Himself {"he was 
 going home"). From henceforth, Christ is represented as using 
 the word repeatedly, at first without any suggestion of the 
 goal or object of the " going back " or " going home," and as 
 it were provoking the Disciples to ask Him what the goal 
 may be. " Whither I go home ye cannot come," " Whither I 
 go home^ ye know the way," " I go home and I come to you^" 
 Towards the end of the Discourse, He becomes more definite: 
 " But now I go home unto him that sent me^," and, strangely 
 enough — though one of the Disciples has expressly uttered the 
 question "Whither goest thou home.-"^" — He says, " None of 
 you asketh me, Whither goest thou home.-*^" Finally He 
 declares, " I go home to the Father^." 
 
 (iv) 'T7ra7ft) applied to the Disciples. 
 
 [1659] Before comparing these passages with others (in 
 
 ^ xiii. I — 3. ^ xiii. 33, xiv. 4, 28. ^ xvi. 5. 
 
 * xiii. 36. ^ xvi. 5. ^ xvi. 10 
 
[1660] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 the same Discourse) in which Jesus speaks of "going" to the 
 Father, it will be well to mention one in which vTrayco is used 
 by Him about the Disciples, (xv. i6) "Ye chose not me but I 
 chose you and set (edrjKa) you tAat ye may go {tva vfiec^ 
 vTrdyrjTe) and may bear fruit and that your fruit may remain." 
 On this Chrysostom says, " / set you, that is, planted {i^v- 
 T€vcraY'; and then, " T/ial ye may go (he still keeps the 
 metaphor of the vine), that is, that ye may be stretched out 
 {iKTadrjreY" But this rendering '^stretched outl' i.e. "may 
 grow" " make progress," is against the regular Johannine usage, 
 of which, as we have seen, there are many instances. Hence 
 most modern commentators render it " That ye may go away 
 from me and bear fruit," Le. may go forth as missionaries. 
 But does this, as Chrysostom says, " still keep the metaphor"? 
 Is it not contrary to the whole drift of Johannine thought, 
 which represents the Disciples as unable to " bear fruit " unless 
 they '''abide in'' Christ, or ''abide in'' the Vine.? If virayua 
 had to be taken of literal motion, would it not mean in this 
 Gospel, not " go abroad," but " go away to your homes," as it 
 means when Jesus says to the Twelve " Do ye also desire to 
 go away from me V Lastly, would it not be a curious mixture 
 of metaphor (" bear fruit ") and literalism (" go away to the 
 cities of Israel ")? 
 
 [1660] For these reasons the best explanation is perhaps 
 a modification of Chrysostom's, based, not solely on the 
 metaphor of the Vine, but also on the whole Johannine con- 
 ception of "going home " as being the appointed errand of the 
 grain of corn, and the vine-branch, and the hnman soul, and 
 the Incarnate Logos. All these " came forth from God " and 
 are bound by the Law of their Nature to " go back home to 
 God." As the Spirit (1655) "goes home," so they that are 
 
 1 [1659 rt] Chrys. refers to Ps. Ixxx. ii "she stretched out (e^e'reii/e) 
 her branches." On ridijfii, " set," and very probably interpreted correctly 
 by Chrys. as "plant," see 1336^. It might include "grafting." 
 
 148 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS [1662] 
 
 born of the Spirit " go home " when they have done their work 
 on earth. Yet, even before they are " at home with the Lord " 
 (as St Paul says) in heaven, they are "at home" with Him on 
 earth, " abiding in " the Vine. There is, therefore, a confusion 
 of metaphor in a Hteral sense, but it is a deHberate confusion, 
 such as we find in the statements that the Father " is in " the 
 Son and the Son " is in " the Father. The meaning probably 
 is, not, " that ye may go away from me to Joppa, Antioch, or 
 Ephesus," but " that ye may go home with me by the way of 
 the Cross to the Father in heaven." 
 
 (v) UopevofiaL substituted for virayw. 
 
 [1661] There remains the most difficult passage of all, in 
 which the Saviour gives up, for a time, v7ra<y(i), and substitutes 
 iropevofjuai, "go {on a journey)!' Most unfortunately, the 
 interpretation of it is complicated by the context, in which 
 the words ordinarily rendered " I should have said [it] to you 
 because " (elirov av v/jllv ore) may mean — and (it will be main- 
 tained later on) probably do mean — " I should have said to 
 you t/ia^." Moreover the passage is full of emotion that is 
 reflected in the style. As Jesus elsewhere says that He came 
 not to judge the world but adds " Yea, and even if I should 
 judge (/cal eav Kplvo) Be iyco), my judgment is true^" so here, 
 He seems to say " I do not admit that I am going from you ; 
 I do not admit that there is any need to prepare a place for 
 you in my Father's House where I have supreme authority 
 and where there is room for all. I am not 'going on a journey 
 {iropevofiai)! I am going home (vTrayco)" Then, like a mother 
 with very young children. He instructs their ignorance by 
 dropping into their way of speaking : " But even if I should 
 'go on a journey I and even if I should 'prepare a place for you^ 
 yet where is the harm ? I will come again and receive you to 
 myselP." 
 
 [1662] From this point onward, to the close of the 
 
 1 viii. 1 6. 2 xiv. 2—3. See 2186 foil. 
 
 149 
 
[1663] JOHANNINE SYNONYMS 
 
 Discourse, Jesus occasionally uses iropevofjuat, " I go (on 
 a journey)," and aTrepxofiai, " I go away " in His efforts to 
 comfort and fortify the Disciples against the impending 
 assault \ This "going (on a journey)," He says, "will be 
 profitable " for them. It will strengthen the believer : 
 (xiv. 12) "Greater works than these shall he do because I £-o 
 {-jTopevofiat) to the Father," (xiv. 28) "Ye have heard that 
 I said to you * I go home (vTrdyco) and come [again] to you. 
 If ye loved me ye would have rejoiced that I go (Tropevo/juaL) 
 to the Father, for the Father is greater than I," (xvi. 5 — 7) 
 " I go home {vTrdyo)) to him that sent me : and none of you 
 asketh me ' Where goest thou home ? ' But, because I have 
 said these things to you, the sorrow [thereof] hath filled your 
 heart. But I tell you the truth : it is profitable for you that 
 I go away {direXdo}). For, if I go not away, the Paraclete will 
 assuredly not come unto you. But if I go {iropevOoi) I will 
 send him unto you " ; (xvi. 28 — 9) " I came forth from the 
 Father and have come into the world : again I leave the world 
 and go {iropevofjuai) to the Father." 
 
 [1663] This is the Lord's last word about "going" or 
 " going home," and it will be noted that He ends with the 
 former, the word (so to speak) of the Disciples, not the word 
 that He generally chooses for Himself On hearing it, the 
 Disciples joyfully exclaim (xvi. 29) "Now speakest thou 
 plainly" as though now they understood everything. But He 
 at once dashes down their joy : " Do ye now believe "^ Behold 
 the hour cometh and hath come that ye should be scattered 
 every man to his own and leave me alone." Clearly, if Christ 
 intended to strengthen the Disciples by predicting to them the 
 immediate future and by preparing them to stand by His side 
 before Pilate as fellow-martyrs, He did not succeed. But the 
 impression left on us by these mysterious interchanges of 
 
 ^ So perhaps St Paul says that he, like a nurse, uses babe language 
 to the new converts, i Thess. ii. 7, reading vtjttioi. 
 
 150 
 
JOHANNINE SYNONYMS [1664] 
 
 synonymous phrases of departure is that the Evangelist felt 
 that the departing was partly objective, partly subjective, and 
 that the Lord Himself could not succeed, and did not wish to 
 succeed, in doing more than prepare the Disciples ultimately 
 to realise the nature of the " going " and of the " going home " 
 and the " profitableness " of the " going away." 
 
 [1664] Logically, or spiritually, one might argue that, if 
 Peter had not denied his Master but had faced Caiaphas and 
 Pilate by His side, there would have been, in one sense, 
 no " going away " of the Lord, no severance (for him) from 
 his Master, not even when Jesus breathed His last upon the 
 Cross. For the eye and ear and hand of faith, Jesus would 
 still have been present, still speaking, still to be "handled." But 
 this was not decreed. It was not given to any man to pass 
 into the higher life save through the shadow of death ; and 
 this shadow was to be cast, partly on the minds of the 
 Disciples, partly on the Logos Himself, so there was indeed an 
 actual ''going away'' as well as a ^^ going home^!' 
 
 On the difference between ayairdo) and (f>i\e(o, see 1716 d—f 
 and 1728m — -/; d\r)drj^ and aX7]9Lv6<;, see 1121 d — i; diroareWo) 
 and Tre/jLTTco, see 1723 d — g ; Btd/€ovo<i and Bov\o<;, see 1717 d — g 
 and 1723/; irpdaao) and Troteo), see 1772^; and for other 
 synonyms see Verbal Index in Part II. 
 
 1 [1664^] In the Acts of John (§ 12) (ed. James) the beloved disciple, 
 weeping on the Mount of Olives, is represented as actually hearing 
 Christ's voice there, while He is hanging on the Cross below : but this 
 is obtained by a complete surrender of reality in the Passion. The 
 passage illustrates early Gnostic thoughts, of which the beginnings were 
 probably often present to the mind of the author of the Fourth Gospel : 
 "John" — says the Lord's voice — "unto the multitude down below in 
 Jerusalem I am being crucified and pierced with lances and reeds, and 
 they are giving me gall and vinegar to drink : but unto thee I am 
 speaking, and hearken thou to what I say." 
 
 151 
 
BOOK II 
 
 JOHANNINE AND SYNOPTIC 
 DISAGREEMENTS 
 
 153 
 
CHAPTER I 
 
 JOHANNINE DEVIATIONS FROM SYNOPTIC 
 VOCABULARY 
 
 § I. Introductory remarks 
 
 [1665] In order to use to the best advantage the following- 
 English alphabetical list placed here for future reference as 
 well as for an immediate cursory glance, the reader should 
 bear in mind that this Vocabulary deals almost entirely with 
 such words as are common to the Three Synoptists but omitted 
 or rarely used by John\ It omits, for example, the words 
 "blessed," "confess," " devil V' "judge," because they are not 
 used by Mark. These must be deferred till we discuss the 
 vocabulary of the Double Tradition of Matthew and Luke in 
 its relation to that of John. 
 
 [1666] This greatly restricts the scope of the present list 
 which, at the first glance, seems to teach us little but what we 
 knew before, namely, that John excludes from his Gospel 
 a great deal that may have interested the Churches in Galilee 
 and Jerusalem in the last half of the first century much more 
 
 ^ Occasionally the Vocabulary will give a typical word used by two 
 of the Synoptists and not by Jn, e.g. "to make common," used by 
 Mk-Mt. but not by Lk. See 1671 c. 
 
 2 [1665 «] i.e. did^oXos, ''the devil." Aat/ndj/ioi/ "^ devil," in the 
 sense of an "unclean spirit," is freq. in Mk. "Blessed," fUKcipios (not 
 fvXoyrjfievos etc.) is denoted above. 
 
 155 
 
[1667] JOHANNINE DEVIATIONS 
 
 than it appealed to the churches of Asia Minor, and to 
 the Roman world in general — and perhaps, in particular, 
 to fairly educated inquirers after moral truth, such as the 
 followers of Epictetus — at the beginning of the second 
 century. Under the heading " devils," for example, we note 
 without surprise that John omits all reference to "casting 
 them out." Many, too, will be prepared to find in his Gospel 
 no mention of several forms of disease such as "leprosy," 
 " deafness," " dumbness," and " paralysis." His desire to 
 subordinate the individuality of John the Baptist to his 
 instrumentality in testifying to Christ will also explain why he 
 is silent about " Herod Antipas " and his brother " Philip." 
 For this, and for other reasons, "divorce" and ''adultery" 
 (which are connected directly with the names of these two 
 princes and indirectly with the murder of John the Baptist) 
 are nowhere mentioned by him. Even the distinctive names 
 of " Sadducees," " Scribes," and " Publicans " — so important to 
 Jews — nowhere find mention in his cosmopolitan Gospel. 
 
 [1667] At these omissions we cannot be surprised, and we 
 learn comparatively little from them. We learn more from the 
 absence of words denoting special sins or temptations — for 
 example, " hypocrite " and " hypocrisy," " rich," " riches," " pos- 
 sessions," " money," " treasure," and the word " temptation " 
 itself And, as we proceed in our examination, we find 
 omissions of such a kind as to convince us that they do not 
 in all cases indicate omission of the subject but only 
 variation in the manner of expressing it. For example, it has 
 been pointed out that the Fourth Gospel does not contain the 
 words "repent," "repentance," "forgiveness," "watch" and 
 "pray." But who can believe that the author did not 
 recognise the necessity of these things, and the necessity that 
 every Gospel should indirectly, if not directly, inculcate 
 them ? 
 
 [1668] It would not be easy always to distinguish those 
 things which John really omits from those things which he 
 
 156 
 
FROM SYNOPTIC VOCABULARY [1669] 
 
 expresses variously ; still less would it be possible to assign 
 in each case his motive for the omission or variation of 
 expression. But an attempt has been made in several in- 
 stances to indicate, in footnotes to the following lists, the 
 Johannine substitute for a Synoptic word, and, in some few 
 instances, to suggest the motive. Generally, we may say that 
 John prefers to pass over local distinctions of sects, classes, 
 and rulers, material distinctions of physical evil, and moral 
 distinctions of various sins, in order to concentrate the mind 
 on the elements of the spiritual world, light and darkness, 
 spiritual life and death, truth and falsehood. Comparisons 
 and discussions as to "greatest" or "least," and even the 
 mention of the "little ones" so common in the Synoptic 
 Gospels, are absent here. The word "righteous" is never 
 used except in the words, " O righteous Father." The Synop- 
 tists contrast the "old" and the "new": the latest Gospel 
 never uses the word "old." The Synoptists frequently re- 
 present Jesus as "rebuking," "commanding," "having com- 
 passion," "being filled with indignation": John dispenses with 
 these words, mostly thinking it enough to say that Jesus 
 " said," or " spake," or " did " this or that, and leaving the 
 words and deeds of the Messiah to speak for themselves\ 
 
 [1669] Apart from these general Johannine equivalents, 
 it is occasionally possible to point out the definite Johannine 
 equivalent of a Synoptic term. For example, instead of the 
 word "parable (irapa^oXTJy' John uses " proverb (TrapoLfiia)" 
 (rendered by some, "dark saying"); and instead of "mighty 
 works (Bvvd/jL€L^y' he uses "signs (o-rjfjLela)" In the footnotes 
 to these terms in the several English Vocabularies in which 
 they appear the reader will find explanations of these 
 
 1 [1668 a] In the case of Lazarus, the Lord's " friend," John describes 
 an affection and a mysterious "self-troubling" of the Lord accompanied 
 with tears ; and on two other occasions he mentions " trouble " (1727 d) ; 
 but this is exceptional. 
 
 157 
 
[1670] JOHANNINE DEVIATIONS 
 
 deviations. The motive, in both cases, seems to have been 
 a desire to prevent spiritual truth from being buried under 
 religious technical terms or obscured by heated discussions 
 that had attached themselves to special terms. And in 
 making the second of these two changes (the change of 
 " mighty work " to " sign ") John is consistent throughout his 
 Gospel. For he avoids the word hvva^L<; not only when 
 meaning a " mighty work," but also in the sense of "power.'* 
 He abstains also from the kindred word " powerful," and from 
 the synonymous words " strength " and " strong." He seems 
 to desire to shew that heavenly power is far above mere 
 " might " and deserves a higher name. Accordingly, he calls 
 it by the term discussed in a previous chapter (1562-94), 
 " authority." 
 
 [1670] These remarks will suffice to guard the reader 
 against being misled by a mere statistical and superficial view 
 of the words and numbers in the appended Vocabulary. 
 The words are sometimes grouped together to prevent such a 
 danger. For example, under the head of " faith " it will be 
 found that, although John never uses this noun, he com- 
 pensates for it by using the verb, " have faith," or " believe," 
 far more often than the Synoptists. Similarly, lest the 
 reader should be misled by being told that Luke never uses 
 the noun " Gospel (evayyeXiov)," it will be pointed out that he 
 uses the verb "evangelize," or ''preach the Gospel (evayje- 
 X/for))" with a compensating frequency. 
 
 [1671] As a rule, where a word is only once or twice used 
 by one Evangelist and often used by other Evangelists, the 
 one or two passages are quoted in a footnote. Thus, under 
 the word " angels," a footnote, giving the three instances of 
 Johannine use, shews that it is only once used in an utterance 
 of our Lord, and there about angels "ascending and de- 
 scending on the Son of man " — a different aspect from any 
 mentioned by the Synoptists. So, another note on "children," 
 giving all the Johannine uses of the word, suggests a parallel- 
 
 158 
 
FROM SYNOPTIC VOCABULARY [1671] 
 
 ism between John's tradition about "becoming children of 
 God " and Matthew's tradition about " turning and becoming 
 as children." On every page, facts will be alleged, and 
 passages quoted, to shew how unsafe it is to draw an inference 
 from rarity of usage in one Gospel, and from frequency of 
 usage in others, without some reference to the passages 
 them selves ^ 
 
 1 [1671 a] The need of discrimination in dealing with the statistical 
 results of the following Vocabulary may be illustrated by the facts 
 collected under the words (i) " Astonish(ment)" and (2) "Twelve, the." 
 
 (i) Several of the words used by the Synoptists apparently in a good 
 sense to express the amazement or astonishment of the multitude at 
 Christ's miracles are altogether omitted by Jn ; and he nowhere applies 
 any such word to our Lord Himself (as the Synoptists do). Jn does use 
 one of these words {Bavixd^a) rather frequently. But z't will be shewn that 
 he appears to use it in a bad sense^ to describe unintelligent surprise. 
 
 [1671 b'\ (2) " The Twelve " are mentioned — as will be shewn by the 
 note — four times by Jn, but always in connexion with some mention of 
 treachery, possible desertion, or unbelief. Again, whereas Matthew 
 (x. 40, and sim. Lk. x. 16) represents Jesus as saying, apparently to the 
 Twelve, " He that receiveth you receiveth me," Jn, in the corresponding 
 saying, instead of '■^you" has (xiii. 20) ^^ whomsoever I shall send." Also, 
 while omitting the names of many of the Twelve as given (with some 
 variations) by the Synoptists, Jn records the calling of Nathanael, and 
 his subsequent presence at the Eucharist of the Seven, in such a way as 
 to suggest that he must have been if not identical, at all events on a 
 level, with one of the Synoptic Twelve. These facts seem to point to 
 some consistent purpose, although its exact nature (whether supplemen- 
 tary, or corrective, or both) may be difficult to determine. In any case 
 the fact remains that the Johannine mentions of "the Twelve" are 
 divergent from those of the Synoptists, except where the latter use the 
 phrase "Judas one of the Twelve." 
 
 [1671 c\ As the first Vocabulary is constructed largely for the purpose 
 of giving an English reader a general view of the Gospel words that Jn 
 does not use, I have inserted in it some words that do not occur in all 
 three Synoptists. So, too, in the later Vocabularies, matter will be 
 occasionally inserted that may not fall strictly under their several 
 headings, if it will be useful for further reference, and if it can be given 
 with such numeral statistics, or annotations, that the reader cannot 
 possibly be misled. See, in particular, 1838. 
 
 A. V. 159 12 
 
[1672] JOHANNINE DEVIATIONS 
 
 SYNOPTIC WORDS COMPARATIVELY SELDOM OR 
 NEVER USED BY JOHN^ 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 [1672] Add2 
 
 TrpoaTidrjfjii 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 Adultery, adulter- 
 
 jxoixaXis, fioixdofiai, 
 
 
 
 
 
 ous, etc. 
 
 fxoixda, noix€va>, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fioixos 
 
 5 
 
 12 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 Afar 
 
 fxaKpodev 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 Age, world [apart 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 from the phrase 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 els TOP alayva]^ 
 
 al^v 
 
 2 
 
 7 
 
 5 
 
 I 
 
 And (Hebraic)* 
 
 Kai 
 
 c. 400 
 
 c. 250 
 
 c. 380 
 
 c. 100 
 
 Angel or messen- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ger^ 
 
 ayyeXos 
 
 6 
 
 20 
 
 25 
 
 3 
 
 Angry, s. Indig- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nant 
 
 dyavaKTeo) 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 Anxiety, s. Care 
 
 fiepifiva 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 Apart, privately^ 
 
 KUT* idiav 
 
 7 
 
 6 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 Apostles (z'.e. the 
 Twelve) 7 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 aTTOOToXot 
 
 2 
 
 ' 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 1 [1672 *] " Chri." opposite to any word signifies " in Christ's words," 
 and " narr." signifies " in narrative." Thus " body " (Chri.) is put down as 
 occurring twice in Mk, but Mk uses it also twice in " narr." By " narr." 
 (unless called "strict narr.") is meant "outside Christ's words." "Narr.," 
 therefore, would include words assigned to the Baptist, Pharisees, 
 disciples, etc. (" Strict narr." excludes such words.) For Addenda see 
 1885 (i) foil. 
 
 2 "Add" is Hebraic in Lk. xx. 11, 12 (lit.) "he added to send," R.V. 
 " he sent yet." 
 
 3 [1672 a] "Age," "World." Jn ix. 32 R.V. "Since the world began 
 (cK Tov alS)vos)." For Jn's use of alcov elsewhere, always in the phrase 
 els TOV alS>va "for ever," see 1712 <^. 
 
 * "And" ("in oratione historica ex simplici Hebraeorum narrandi 
 modo," Bruder (1888) p. 456). The numbers are roughly given. See 2133. 
 
 ^ "Angel." The instances in Jn are i. 51 "Ye shall see... the an^e/s 
 of God ascending and descending on the Son of man," xii. 29 " an angel 
 hath spoken to him," xx. 12 "she beholdeth two angels." 
 
 ^ [1672 <^] "Apart, privately," freq. applied by Synoptists to Christ's 
 teaching. Contrast Jn xviii. 20 " I have spoken openly to the world. 
 I ever taught in synagogue and in the temple... and in secret spake 
 I nothing." 
 
 ^ "Apostles." Jn xiii. 16 "nor is an apostle greater..." means "any- 
 one sent " and is not confined to one of the Twelve. 
 
 160 
 
FROM SYNOPTIC VOCABULARY [1673] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Arise 
 
 dviardvai (in intrans. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 forms) 
 
 17 
 
 6 
 
 29 
 
 4 
 
 „ [used of the 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sun, clouds etc.] 
 
 )> )» 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 Ask, i.e. question ^ 
 
 €7r€pa)Td(o (not 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 epayrdco) 
 
 25 
 
 8 
 
 17 
 
 2 or I 
 
 
 ' €ic3afx^eofjLaL 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 eK7rXr](r(ronai 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 [1673] Astonish(ment)2. 
 
 €KcrTa(ris 
 e^icrrafxai 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ddfx^os, dafx^eofiai 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 6avfxd^(o 
 
 4 
 
 7 
 
 13 
 
 6 
 
 1 [1672^] "Ask," 2>. question. Jn ix. 23 "He is of age, ask him" 
 (marg. epayr-qo-are)) xviii. 7 " He asked them, Whom seek ye ? " see also 
 " pray " (1688) and " ask," €p(^rd(o (1708). N.B. " 2 or i " indicates v.r. 
 
 2 [1673 d\ " Astonish(ment)." In Jn, davfid^co is used twice in narrative. 
 In iv. 27 "they [the disciples] degan to marvel that he was talking with 
 a woman," it implies a shock of surprise at Christ's unconventional 
 conduct. In vii. 15, "the Jews therefore began to marvel saying, How 
 knoweth this man letters," the context seems to shew that the " marvel " 
 was not that of receptive awe, but that of perplexed hostility. In iii. 7, 
 v. 28, ^''marvel not," Jesus rebukes " marvel," as implying want of insight, 
 and in vii. 21, in answer to the Jews, who say "Thou hast a devil," He 
 says " I have done one work and ye all marvel" i.e. stare at it in 
 unspiritual amazement. So far, Jn's use suggests that he takes the 
 word in a bad sense (which it has generally in the Canonical LXX). 
 
 [1673 bl There remains Christ's reply to the Jews that (v. 18) 
 "sought the more to kill him" after the mighty work of healing 
 accomplished by Him on the sabbath. To these would-be murderers, 
 blind to the divinity of beneficence, Christ replies (v. 20) " Greater works 
 than these will he [the Father] shew him [the Son] — that ye may go 
 on marvelling (Iva vfiels OavfxdCrjTe)." If "marvel" is here in a bad sense, 
 as in O.T., this is akin to the famous saying of Isaiah quoted elsewhere 
 by John (xii. 38 — 40) that God "blinded" the eyes of men " Ikal they 
 might not (Jva prj) see with their eyes." So here the meaning would be 
 that the Father will shew the Son still greater works — and all that ye — 
 the pronoun is emphatic — ye, blind and resolute enemies of the light, 
 may go on persisting in your mafvel. 
 
 [1673 <:] It is not surprising that Mr Burkitt's Syriac text (SS is 
 illegible) renders this difficult passage '■'• And do not wonder," adding, 
 "that I have said [it] to you." But the comparison of Jn xii. 40 makes 
 the meaning consistent with the language of Isaiah, as well as with the 
 
 161 12 — 2 
 
[1673] JOHANNINE DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Baptism 
 
 ^dirTia-fxa 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 Baptist 1 
 
 ^aTrrtaTrjs 
 
 2 
 
 7 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 Bartholomew 
 
 Bap6o\onaios 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 Beat (I) 
 
 Sepo) 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 5 
 
 I 
 
 Beat (2) 
 
 TVTTTOa 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 Bed, couch (i) 
 
 kXIvt} 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 Bed, couch (2)2 
 
 Kpd^aTTOS 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 Beelzebul 
 
 B€€\C€^0V\ 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 Johannine use of the verb " marvel " — which, in the Fourth Gospel, 
 is not a virtue but a vice, quite distinct from '■''awe" or "■ reverence ^^ 
 
 [1673^] Mk vi. 6 has "And he marvelled {iOavyiaa-ev) because of their 
 unbelief" (in the visit to Nazareth) where the parall. Mt. xiii. 58 (? Lk. iv. 
 16 — 24) has no such statement. But Mt. viii. 10, Lk. vii. 9 have " But 
 having heard it Jesus marvelled {i6avp.acrev)" i.e. at the belief of the 
 centurion. In the former case, the word is equivalent to "shocked" 
 as in Gal. i. 6 (which means that the Apostle is "shocked" at the 
 Galatian instability) ; in the latter, it implies wondering admiration. 
 
 [1673^] It appears from Boeckh's Greek Inscriptions (4768 foil.) that 
 Ibatv iBavfxaaa, or flbov Kal eOavfiaaa, was the regular phrase in use among 
 tourists in the second century to record their impressions after visiting 
 the underground tombs at Thebes, " I saw and wondered." If the phrase 
 had already become hackneyed in that sense, John may have had an 
 additional reason for disliking BavfxdCa> as a word to express Christian 
 wonder or awe. An interpolated but very early tradition in Lk. xxiv. 12 
 says that Peter, after visiting the empty tomb " went away (aTr^XOev) to his 
 home (rrpos avrov) wondering at that which had come to pass." The 
 interpolation somewhat resembles Jn xx. 8 — to which says that one at all 
 events of the two disciples "-saw and believed" and then that they "went 
 away again to their homes {a'nT]K6ov oZv irpos avTovs)." Possibly Jn's 
 ^'saw and believed" contains an allusion not only to the general 
 hackneyed phrase '^ saw and wondered" but also to some particular 
 Christian application of it, such as appears in the interpolation — which 
 is regarded by W. H. as being of very early date. 
 
 1 [1673/J "Baptist," in the Synoptists, distinguishes John the son 
 of Zacharias from John the Apostle. In the Fourth Gospel, John the 
 Apostle is never mentioned by name, though probably implied in " the 
 disciple that Jesus loved," and in other phrases. The Fourth Gospel 
 mentions a John as father of Peter but only in Christ's words (" Simon, 
 son of John"). 
 
 2 "Bed." Kpd^arros (Mk ii. 4— 12, Jn v. 8— II, also pi. Mk vi. 55) is 
 a term condemned by the Grammarian Phrynichus. 
 
 162 
 
FROM SYNOPTIC VOCABULARY [1674] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 [1674] Begin 1 
 
 apxofiat 
 
 26 
 
 13 
 
 31 
 
 I 
 
 Behold ! (1)2 
 
 l^ov (not ide) 
 
 8 
 
 6i 
 
 55 
 
 4 
 
 Behold ! (2) 
 
 t8€ 
 
 9 
 
 4 
 
 o 
 
 15 
 
 Believe, believing, , 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s. Faith 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Beloved 3 
 
 dyaTTTfros 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 Beseech, etc.* 
 
 napaKoXea) 
 
 9 
 
 9 
 
 7 
 
 o 
 
 Bethphage 
 
 BTj6(fiayrj 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 Birds 
 
 vreTfivov 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 o 
 
 Blaspheme, blas- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 phemy ** 
 
 ^Xaa(f)r)ix4a), -ia 
 
 7 
 
 7 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 Bless, blessed 7 
 
 evXoyeco, -tjtos 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 15 
 
 I 
 
 Body (Chri.) 
 
 (TOijxa 
 
 2 
 
 II 
 
 9 
 
 o 
 
 Branch 8 
 
 KKdbos 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 1 [1674 «] "Begin," only once in Jn (xiii. 5) "He began to wash the 
 feet of the disciples." This unique use of the word in Jn (as contrasted 
 with its frequent use in the Synoptists) is very noteworthy and may have 
 been among the reasons that led Origen {adloc. Huet ii. 380 B) to interpret 
 it as meaning that Jesus " began " the purification now and completed it 
 afterwards. In such a writer as John, "began " must be assumed here to 
 have some definite meaning, and not to be used as in Mark. 
 
 2 [1674 <^] "Behold!" Jn iv. 35 and xvi. 32 (Chri.), xii. 15 (quot. 
 Zech. ix. 9), xix. 5 (Pilate) '-''Behold., the man!" Mk and Jn never use 
 it in narr. : Mt. and Lk. freq. use it in nam, and five times agree in using 
 it (352) against the parall. Mk. 
 
 3 "Beloved," always with "son" exc. Mt. xii. 18 (quoting Is. xlii. i 
 €KX«r60- But see "love,"aya7raa> (1716^ foil, 1728 m foil, and 1744 (i) foil). 
 
 * " Beseech." UapaKaXeco in Mk and parall. Mt.-Lk. is used of 
 "beseeching" addressed to Jesus; outside the Triple Tradition it 
 sometimes means "comfort," "exhort," e.g. in Mt. ii. i8, v. 4, Lk. iii, 18, 
 xvi. 25. 
 
 s " Bird." Mt. xxiii. 37, Lk. xiii. 34 have bv rpoirov opvis eTria-wdyei... 
 ^Opvis is not used by Jn. 
 
 ^ " Blaspheme " etc., in Jn, only x. 33 dXXd irepl ^Xa(T(f>r)p.ias, uttered by 
 the Jews, x. 36 vfxus Xdyere ort, BXa(r(f)T]ix€7s, by Christ replying to the 
 Jews. 
 
 ^ "Bless," in Jn, only xii. 13 evXoyqpivos 6 epxofievos..., the cry of the 
 multitude quoting Ps. cxviii. 26. For paKdpios, " blessed," see 1859 e. 
 
 8 " Branch," KXddos. But Jn has kX^/xo, " branch " in his Parable of 
 the Vine xv. 2, 4, 5, 6. 
 
 163 
 
[1675] JOHANNINE DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 [1675] Break (bread) i 
 
 xXao) 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 Bring word, s. 
 Tell 2 
 
 aTrayyeXXo) 
 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 II 
 
 I 
 
 Build, s. also 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Housed 
 
 oiKoSo/xeo) 
 
 
 4 
 
 8 
 
 12 
 
 I 
 
 Call, i.e. name* 
 
 KaXeo) 
 
 
 I 
 
 15 
 
 29 
 
 I 
 
 Call, i.e. summon, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 invite^ 
 
 KaX 60) 
 
 
 3 
 
 II 
 
 H 
 
 I 
 
 Call anyone to 
 (oneself) 
 
 TTpoo-KaXeofiai 
 
 
 9 
 
 6 
 
 4 
 
 o 
 
 [1676] Care« 
 
 fiepifjLva 
 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 Cast out, s. Devils 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Centurion 
 
 Mk KCVTVpicOV, 
 
 Mt.- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Lk. iKaTovrdpxqs 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 1 [1675 rt] " Break (bread)." The Synoptists never use this word except 
 in connexion with the Feeding of the Five Thousand (where Jn omits it) 
 and at the Eucharist. Mk and Mt. use it also in the Feeding of the Four 
 Thousand, which Lk. and Jn omit. 
 
 2 [1675 b^ " Bring word," airayyiXKoi^ in Jn, only xvi. 25 ''^ I will bring 
 word to (R.V. tell) you plainly about the Father." 'ATrayyeXXto in the 
 Gospels, apart from quotations, should never be rendered " tell " (as 
 in R.V. Mk v. 14, 19, vi. 30 etc.) but almost always "bring word" (as in 
 R.V. Mt. ii. 8, xxviii. 8) or " report." Epictetus ii. 23. 2 condemns those 
 who asserted that there was no "reporting power {bvvapis aTrayyeXriKr])" 
 in the senses (comp. Steph. quot. Sext. Pyrrh. i. 197 ovk aTrayyeXriKas). 
 There is a " spirit," he says, infused in the eyes, which goes forth from 
 them and returns to them with an impression of the things seen, and no 
 "messenger" is "so swift." The Sibyl (vii. 83) calls the Logos "a 
 reporter (dnayyeXTfipa) of logoi," and Steph. quotes Euseb. Dem. v. 202 B 
 Beov Xoyov iv dvdpaTra ttjstov Trarpos fvcre^elas ciTrayyeXTiKov. The word is 
 therefore appropriate to the Spirit of the Son in heaven, "reporting" to 
 man on earth. 
 
 3 [1675 c] " Build," in Jn, only ii. 20 " In forty-six years was this temple 
 built." Comp. Mk xiv. 58, xv. 29 parall. to Mt. xxvi. 61, xxvii. 40 about 
 the building of a new Temple (not mentioned in Lk.). 
 
 * "Call," i.e. name. Mk xi. 17, '''■shall be called 2, House of Prayer," 
 quoting Is. Ivi. 7 ; Jn i 42 '•''thou shall be called Cephas." 
 
 ^ " Call," i.e. invite, summon. In Jn, only ii. 2 " Now Jesus also was 
 invited^ and his disciples." 
 
 ^ "Care." Mk iv. 19 "the cares of the world" parall. to Mt. xiii. 22, 
 Lk. viii. 14. The verb p.^pip.vdv " be anxious (or, careful) " is in Mt. (7), 
 Lk. (5), Mk (o), Jn (o). 
 
 164 
 
FROM SYNOPTIC VOCABULARY [1676] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Charge 
 
 TrapayyAXo) 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 o 
 
 Child 1 
 
 TiKVOV 
 
 9 
 
 15 
 
 H 
 
 3 
 
 Child (little) 2 
 
 •naih'iov 
 
 12 
 
 i8 
 
 13 
 
 3 
 
 Child (infant) 
 
 vrjirios 
 
 O 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 Children (babes, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pl.) 
 
 ^p€(t)rj 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 Chosen, masc, i.e. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 the elect 3 
 
 €k\€Kt6s 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 [?I] 
 
 City (Chri.) 
 
 TToXlS 
 
 I 
 
 13 
 
 12 
 
 o 
 
 City (nam) 
 
 TToXlS 
 
 7 
 
 13 
 
 27 
 
 8 
 
 Cleanse, make 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 clean, purify 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 etc.'* 
 
 Ka6api((o 
 
 4 
 
 7 
 
 7 
 
 o 
 
 Clothe^ 
 
 Trepi^aXXo) 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 Cloud 
 
 v€<^fKrj 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 o 
 
 1 [1676 rt] "Child," TiKvov. Jn i. i2 "He gave them authority to 
 become children of God," viii. 39 "If ye are children of Abraham," xi. 52 
 "...that he might gather... the children of God." To " become children of 
 God" is apparently equivalent to being (Jn iii. 3) " born from above" 
 without which, it is said, a man " cannot see the kingdom of God " : and 
 the two expressions together appear to resemble the tradition peculiar to 
 Matthew (xviii. 3) " Except ye turn and become as little children ye shall 
 in no wise enter into the kingdom of heaven." TcKvia (pl.) is in Jn xiii. 33. 
 
 2 [1676 b] " Child (little)," Trmblov. Jn iv. 49 " Come down before my 
 child die," xvi. 2 1 " But when she is delivered of the child, she re- 
 membereth no more the anguish," xxi. 5 " Children, have ye (R.V.) aught 
 to eat ? " In the Synoptists, " (little) children " may be called a " funda- 
 mental word" of doctrine. In Jn it is never used except vocatively, and 
 hence, in the Preface (p. ix) it is said to be omitted. On xxi. 5, see 2235 r. 
 
 3 [1676^] "Chosen," masc. Jn i. 34 (SS) ''the chosen [one] of God/' 
 W. H. " son " (593 a). Comp. Lk. xxiii. 35 " the Christ of God Ihe chosen 
 [one]." Elsewhere the word is masc. pl. as in the Epistles, " the elect 
 [ones]." Jn has "choose" five times— Mk (i), Mt. (o), Lk. (4)— and 
 always in the words of Christ, concerning His choice (exc. Jn xv. 16 "Ye 
 did not choose me "). 
 
 * "Cleanse," used by the Synoptists mostly of "cleansing" from 
 leprosy, which (1666) Jn never mentions. 
 
 5 [1676^] "Clothe," in Jn, only xix. 2 "they clothed him with 
 {irepU^aXov avrov) a purple garment," probably written (1805-6) with 
 allusion to Synoptic parallels, including Lk. xxiii. 1 1 " Having clothed him 
 in gorgeous apparel {Trepi^dkcov ea-drJTa Xa/XTrpai/)." 
 
 165 
 
[1677] JOHANNINE DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 [1677] Colti 
 
 traXos 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 Come to» 
 
 irpocrepxofiai 
 
 5 or 6 
 
 51 
 
 II 
 
 I 
 
 Command (i) 
 
 €niTd(r(ra> 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 Command (2) 
 
 KiKevco 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 Command (3) 
 
 TT poaracrcrat 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 "Common," make 3 
 
 KOIVOCO 
 
 . 5 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 Compassion, com- 
 
 iTKcos 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 passionate, pity* 
 
 I eXee'o) 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 etc.* 
 
 \ (TTrXayxviCofiai 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 Condemn^ 
 
 KaraKpivco 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 [1678] Confess « 
 
 e^OfioKoyeofiai 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 Country, the c. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 round about 
 
 7repix(opos 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 Cross (Chri.) 
 
 aravpos 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 Crucify (Chri.)'' 
 
 aravpoat 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 Crucify with 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 (Jesus) 
 
 (rvvcrravpoo) 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 "Colt," in Jn, only xii. 15, quoting Zech. ix. 9. Jn lays much less 
 stress than the Synoptists lay on the Finding of the Colt. He uses the 
 word " ass," where Mk-Lk. use " colt," while Mt. uses " ass and colt " 
 (1861 d). 
 
 2 [1677 a] " Come to," in Jn, only xii. 21, of the Greeks, who " came to 
 Philip " saying, " Sir, we would see Jesus." In the Epistles, it occurs only 
 in I Tim. vi. 3 (?), Heb. (7), i Pet. ii. 4, and always of approaching a 
 source of grace. 
 
 3 [1677 <J] "Common," i.e. unclean. All these instances occur in 
 Mk vii. 2 — 23 and the parallel Mt. (Lk. omits the whole). Mk vii. 2, 5 
 also has {bis) Koti/6s (adj.) in the phrase Koivai^ x^P^^^- 
 
 * [1677 c] "Compassion." The Synoptic words meaning "pity" 
 sometimes correspond to the Heb. IDPI, which also means "kindness," or 
 " loving-kindness.'^ This might sometimes be expressed by " love," which 
 occurs in Jn more frequently than in all the Synoptists taken together. 
 
 5 [1677^] "Condemn." Jn, however, uses KpiVw, "judge" freq. (19) — 
 Mk never, Mt.-Lk. seldom {1714: d—f) — and often where the context 
 indicates "condemn," as Jn iii. 17, 18 (where A.V. has "condemn" 
 thrice). 
 
 6 [1678 rt] "Confess." Mk i. 5, Mt. iii. 6 ''confessing their sins," Mt. 
 xi. 25, Lk. x. 21 "I make confession., or acknowledgment^ to thee, Father." 
 Lk. xxii. 6 (act.) e^afiokoyrjo-fv, "Qudas Iscariot] ?nade an agreement?' 
 Jn (1861 rt) has 6p.o\oyea> but not of "confessing sins" (exc. in Epistle). 
 
 7 "Crucify" (Chri.) Mt. xx. 19, xxiii. 34, xxvi. 2 (1206). 
 
 166 
 
FROM SYNOPTIC VOCABULARY 
 
 [1679] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Crucify with 
 
 
 (another) ^ 
 
 avvaTavpooi 
 
 Cup 2 
 
 Trorrjpiov 
 
 Damsel 
 
 Kopdo-iov 
 
 Daughter^ 
 
 dvydrijp 
 
 [1679] David* 
 
 Aavfid 
 
 Deaf or dumb 
 
 Ka><f>6s 
 
 Death, put to^ 
 
 Oavaroa 
 
 Deny utterly^ 
 
 dirapviopLai 
 
 Desert, desolate 
 
 
 (adj.) 
 
 fprjfxos 
 
 Destroy^ 
 
 KaraXvo) 
 
 Devils (plur.) 
 
 daipovia 
 
 Devil(s), cast out 
 
 e<^dXK<o 8. 
 
 Devil(s), possessed 
 
 
 with 8 
 
 8aipovi^op,ai 
 
 Disease^ 
 
 voaos 
 
 Diseased^ 
 
 KaKcis i'xa)v 
 
 Mk 
 
 o 
 6 
 
 5 
 5 
 7 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 Mt. 
 
 o 
 
 7 
 
 3 
 8 
 
 17 
 
 7 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 Lk. 
 
 o 
 
 5 
 
 o 
 
 8 
 
 13 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 5 3 2 
 
 3 5 I 
 
 8 6 or 8 i6 
 
 7 6 or 7 7 
 
 Jn 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 o 
 I 
 
 2 
 O 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 o 
 o 
 o 
 o 
 
 I 
 o 
 o 
 
 1 [1678^] "Crucify with [another]." This occurs in Jn xix. 32. But the 
 Johannine context so differs from the Synoptic as to make the meaning in 
 Jn " crucified with Ike first malefactor^'' not " crucified with yesus^ Lk. 
 omits the word altogether. See 1817 c. 
 
 2 [1678 c\ " Cup." Lk. omits Mk x. 38—9, Mt. xx. 22—3 " Are ye able 
 to drink the cup...}" Jn's single instance is (Jn xviii. 11) "The ctip that 
 the Father hath given me..." 
 
 3 [1678^] "Daughter," in Jn, only xii. 15, quoting Zech. ix. 9 
 ^^ Daughter of Zion." 
 
 4 [1679*2] "David." Both Jn's instances are in vii. 42 "Did not the 
 Scripture say that from the seed of David, and from Bethlehem the 
 village where David was, the Christ is to come ? " 
 
 5 " Death, put to." Lk. xxi. 16 (diff. from parall. Mk xiii. 12, Mt. x. 21) 
 "they shall put to death some of you," comp. Jn xvi. 2 "he that killeth 
 {dtroKTdva^) you." For "death," see 1710 <r — d. 
 
 ^ " Deny utterly." Jn has "deny," dpviofiai, concerning Peter's Denial 
 xiii. 38, xviii. 25, 27, and i. 20 "confessed and denied not." 
 
 7 [1679 <^] "Destroy." But, corresponding to KoraXvo) used concerning 
 the temple or its stones (Mk xiii. 2, xiv. 58 etc.), Jn ii. 19 has Xixrare. 
 
 8 [1679 <:] "Devil(s), possessed with," in Jn, only x. 21 "Others said, 
 these are not the works of one possessed with a deviV But Jn has — 
 always in dialogue — haipoviov %\oi (5) and daifxoviov (i). 
 
 9 [1679^] "Disease." Jn has daOevda (2) and do-eepeco (8). The 
 former is used once in Mt. (viii. 17 "took our infirmities ") but that is 
 in a quotation from the Heb. (not LXX) of Is. liii. 4. 
 
 167 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF 
 
[1680] JOHANNINE DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Distant (also means 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "enough," "have 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 in full")! 
 
 anix<^ 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 Divide 
 
 IJ.epiC<^ 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 Divide asunder 2 
 
 Sm/uepifw 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 6 
 
 I 
 
 Divorce 3 
 
 aTToXiKo (R.V. "put 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 away") 
 
 4 
 
 9 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 Drink, give to drink 
 
 ttotI^co 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 [1680] Ear* 
 
 ovs 
 
 5 
 
 7 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 Earthquake^ 
 
 aeta-fios 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 Eat 6 
 
 eV^io) 
 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 12 
 
 
 
 Elders 
 
 TTpea^vTepoi 
 
 7 
 
 12 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 Elect, s. Chosen 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Elijah? 
 
 'HXei'ay 
 
 9 
 
 9 
 
 7 
 
 2 
 
 Ends 
 
 reXog 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 Enemy® 
 
 ix^pos 
 
 I 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 Enough (see note 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 above on Dis- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tant) 
 
 a-irix'^ 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 ^ " Distant etc." The numbers include the three meanings. 
 
 2 " Divide asunder," in Jn, only xix. 24, quoting Ps. xxii. 18 about the 
 division of Christ's garments. 
 
 3 "Divorce." These numbers do not include ottoXvo) = " release," 
 " send away " etc. 
 
 * "Ear." Jn xviii. 10, 26 has wrdpiov (i), uirlov (i), both about the ear 
 of Malchus. 
 
 s [1680 a] "Earthquake." Mk xiii. 8 (parall. Mt. xxiv. 7, Lk. xxi. 11) 
 predicts earthquakes in the Last Days. Mt. viii. 24 aeio-pos peyas eyevero 
 iv T. BaXdaarr) means "tempest," Mt. xxviii. 2 mentions an earthquake 
 at the time of the Resurrection (not in Mk-Lk.-Jn). 
 
 ^ [1680^] "Eat." This does not include (a) (\>ayciv and {b) Tpwyeiv. 
 ^ayelv is freq. in all the Synoptists, and fairly freq. in Jn. Tpwyeiv occurs 
 only in Mt. (i) (xxiv. 38 '-'• eating and drinking") Jn (5) always of eating 
 Christ's flesh, exc. in xiii. 18, quoting Ps. xli. 10, (Heb.) "he that eatetk 
 my bread." *Eo-^ia), the pres. tense, occurs in discussions about eating 
 with sinners, and in the narrative of the Eucharist etc. 
 
 ? " Elijah," in Jn, only i. 20, 25. 
 
 8 [1680 c\ " End," in Jn, only xiii. i " He [Christ] loved them to the 
 ^«^ (2319— 23)." There is nothing in Jn about "the end" as meaning 
 the Last Day etc. See 1715^. 
 
 . ® " Enemy." Mk xii. 36, only in quotation (Ps. ex. i) parall. to Mt. xxii. 
 44, Lk. XX. 43 (1856). 
 
 168 
 
FROM SYNOPTIC VOCABULARY 
 
 [1681] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Enter, go into 
 
 elcTTopevofxai 
 
 8 
 
 I 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 Exceedingly (i) 
 
 \iav 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 Exceedingly (2) 
 
 €Kir€pi.(T(rats 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Exceedingly (3) 
 
 Trepia-a-Ss 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 Exceedingly (4) 
 
 a(f)6dpa 
 
 I 
 
 7 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 [1681] Facei 
 
 7rp6(r<o7rov 
 
 3 
 
 10 
 
 14 
 
 
 
 Faith, or, belief 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 (1670) 
 
 TTLOmS 
 
 5 
 
 8 
 
 II 
 
 
 
 Faith, have, in, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i.e. believe 
 
 TTicrTeixo 
 
 10 
 
 II 
 
 9 
 
 c. 100 
 
 Faithful, believing' 
 
 ^ Triaros 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 I 
 
 Faithless (-ness), 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 unbelieving (-be- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lief)2 
 
 amarioi (-ia, -09) 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 Fall (Chri.)3 
 
 TTtTrro) 
 
 5 1 
 
 [I or 13 
 
 14 
 
 I 
 
 Fall (narr.) 
 
 TTLTTTtO 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 Fall against, fall 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 down before 
 
 TrpOO-TTLTTTOi 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 Fast, fasting 
 
 vrjcrrda, vrjariSj 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 vrjareva) 
 
 7 
 
 9 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 Fear(n.)* 
 
 (f)6^os 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 3 
 
 Fear (vb.) (Chri.)^ 
 
 (f)o^€op,ai 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 
 II 
 
 I 
 
 Fear (vb.) (narr.) 
 
 (f>o^eop,ai 
 
 10 
 
 10 
 
 12 
 
 4 
 
 1 [1681 a] " Face." In apparent reference to a passage where the 
 Synoptists use (Mk i. 2, Mt. xi. 10, Lk. vii. 27) 7rp6 Trpoa-airov, Jn iii. 28 
 uses efxirpoaBev. 
 
 2 [1681 b] " Faithful," " faithless," in Jn, only xx. 27 " Be not un- 
 believing (aTTio-Tos) (R.V. faithless) but believing (TrioT-ds-)." In idiomatic 
 English, '■''faithless'''' now means "not keeping faith," and is applied to 
 breaking one's word, breach of trust etc. Jn does not mean this. 
 
 3 " Fall" (Chri.), in Jn, only xii. 24 " Except the grain of corn having 
 fallen (ireo-cbi/) into the earth die." 
 
 * [1681 <r] " Fear " (n.). In Jn, always in a bad sense, and in the phrase 
 (Jn vii. 13, xix. 38, xx. 19) "because of the/^^r of the Jews," i.e. because 
 they were afraid of the Pharisees. Mk iv. 41 and Mt.-Lk. freq. use 
 <^o/3os in a good sense, to mean "^^e/^." Comp. the only passage 
 mentioning fear in the Epistle, i Jn iv. 18 "There is no fear \n love, but 
 perfect love casteth oy^Xfear, because ^^r hath punishment." 
 
 s [1681 «r] "Fear" (vb.). Jn vi. 20 "It is \ ', fear not." In Christ's 
 words it is always used thus negatively in Mk (2), and almost always 
 in Mt.-Lk. In Mt.'s narrative it is once used by an angel Mt. xxviii. 5 
 ^^ Fear not ye." 
 
 169 
 
[1682] JOHANNINE DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Few (plur.) 
 
 oXiyoi 
 
 2 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 Field 
 
 dypos 
 
 8 
 
 i6 
 
 JO 
 
 
 
 [1682] Firei 
 
 TTvp 
 
 4 
 
 12 
 
 
 I 
 
 First (adj. or noun, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 notadv.)(Chri.)2 
 
 Trparos 
 
 5 
 
 II 
 
 
 
 
 Flee 3 
 
 cf>evyo) 
 
 5 
 
 7 
 
 
 2 
 
 Forgive, forgive- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ness* 
 
 d(f)ir]fj,iy a<f>e(ris 
 
 12 
 
 i8 
 
 I? 
 
 2 
 
 Gain (vb.)^ 
 
 Kepdaivo) 
 
 I 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 Gathers 
 
 €iri(rvvdya) 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 Generation 
 
 yevfd 
 
 5 
 
 13 
 
 15 
 
 
 
 Gentile, s. Nations 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Gift7 
 
 8a>pov 
 
 I 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 
 Go before 8 
 
 Tvpodyoi 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 Go before 8 
 
 TTpoiropevofjLCU 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 Go before, go for- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ward® 
 
 Trpoepxopai 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 1 [1682 a] " Fire," in Jn, only xv. 6 " They gather them and cast them 
 into the y?r^," in the metaphor, or parable, of the Vine. Mt. twice uses 
 "fire" in connexion with "Gehenna," or "hell" (v. 22, xviii. 9) which 
 does not occur in Jn. 
 
 2 [1682 d] " First." Jn omits all discourses about " who shall be 
 Jirs/" as also about "who shall be the greatest'^ (1683 <^— 4 
 
 3 [1682 r] "Flee," in Jn, only x. 5, 12, of the sheep "fleeing" from 
 the stranger, and the hireling from the wolf. 
 
 * [1682^] "Forgive." This does not include dcfylrjpi meaning "leave," 
 "suffer." "Forgiveness" occurs nowhere in Jn, "forgive" only in xx. 23 
 " Whose soever sins ye forgive, they 2iX^ forgiven unto them." See also 
 (1690) " Remission of sins." 
 
 5 [1682^] "Gain." Comp. "reward," ^io-<9op, Mt. (10), but Mk (i), 
 Lk. (3), Jn (I). 
 
 ® [1682y] "Gather." Jn xi. 52 (ii/a kcli to, TeKva tov S(ov...(rvvaydyTj 
 els €v) uses avvdyco in a sense similar to that of eTria-wdyco in (a) Mt. 
 xxiii. 37, Lk. xiii. 34, TroardKis fjBeXrja-a eiriarvvayaye^v (Lk. inicrvvd^ai) to. 
 T€Kva (TOV (where, however, Jn speaks of the scattered children of God 
 generally, but Mt. Lk. refer to the children of Jerusalem), and in (d) 
 Mk xiii. 27, Mt. xxiv. 31 eVio-uva^et (Mt. -^ovcnv) rovs cKXeKTovs avrov 
 eK t5>v t€(t(t. dvipwv. All use crvvdya), Mt. more freq. than Mk Lk. and 
 Jn taken together. 
 
 7 [1682^] "Gift." See "gain," and " reward," freq. in Mt. Jn has the 
 form bwpfd once (iv. 10) " If thou knewest t\\e gift of God." 
 
 8 [1682^] "Go before, or, forward." Jn generally prefers simple 
 
 170 
 
FROM SYNOPTIC VOCABULARY [1683] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Good [applied to 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a person]^ 
 
 ayaOos 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 I 
 
 Gospel 
 
 fvayyeXiov 
 
 7 
 
 4 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 Gospel, preach the 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 (lit. speak gos- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pel)* 
 
 evayyeXl^o), -Ofxai 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 lO 
 
 o 
 
 Governor^ 
 
 rjyeyMtv 
 
 I 
 
 ID 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 Grass 
 
 Xopros 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 [1683] Great* 
 
 fxeyas 
 
 15 
 
 20 
 
 26 
 
 5 
 
 Great, sufficient 
 
 iKavos 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 lO 
 
 o 
 
 how great, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 how much. 
 
 ■ noaos 
 
 6 
 
 8 
 
 6 
 
 o 
 
 how many 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Greater (of per- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sons)^ 
 
 ixei^av 
 
 I 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 verbs with prepositions to compound verbs. Comp. Jn xiv. 2 " I go 
 to prepare (eroindaai) a place for you." This implies " going before." 
 
 ^ "Good," appl. to a person, in Jn, only vii. I2 "Some said. He [i.e. 
 Jesus] is goodP 
 
 2 [1682/] "Gospel, preach." See also "preach," "proclaim," i.e. 
 Krjpv(r(ra>, which Jn never uses. On the other hand, Jn uses XaXe'o), 
 " speak," more freq. than Mk and Lk. taken together. 
 
 3 [1682 y] "Governor," or ruler. Each of the Synoptists uses the word 
 once in Christ's prediction that the disciples will be tried before " rulers 
 and kings." The other instances of Mt. and Lk. (except Mt. ii. 6) refer 
 to Pilate. 
 
 * [1683 «] "Great" is never applied by Jn to persons as it is in 
 Mk X. 42 — 3 and parall. Mt., (Lk. "greater"). Jn applies it (fxeyas) only 
 to (vi. 18) "wind," (vii. 37, xix. 31) "day," (xi. 43) "voice," (xxi. 11) 
 "fishes." 
 
 ^ [1683 <^] "Greater," of persons. Mk's only instance is Mk ix. 34 
 "They had conversed with one another in the way [on the question]. 
 Who is the greatest [lit. greater"] (ris fxfi^cov)?" Mk represents Jesus, 
 in His reply, as saying "Whosoever of you desireth to beyfrj-/," but 
 Mt. and Lk. both in the parallel and elsewhere assign to Jesus the word 
 "greater^"' concerning "persons" — in particular about the Baptist (Mt. 
 xi. II ovK €yr)y€pTai...fi€i((ov...6 de ptKp6T€pos...iJ.ei^ei)v, and sim. Lk. vii. 28). 
 
 [1683^] Jn assigns to the Samaritan woman the words (iv. 12) "Art 
 thou greater than our father Jacob?" and to the Jews (viii. 53) "Art thou 
 greater than our father Abraham?" But when the word is used by 
 Jesus it is either used with a negative (xiii. 16) " the bond-servant is not 
 greater than his master 7ior the apostle greater than the [apostle's] 
 sender " (comp. xv. 20), or else applied to the Father as " greater " than 
 
 171 
 
[1684] 
 
 JOHANNINE DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Hand (Chri.) 
 
 X"> 
 
 5 
 
 9 
 
 9 
 
 5 
 
 Hand (narr.) 
 
 x*tp 
 
 19 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 
 10 
 
 Have (in full) (see 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 note above on 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Distant) 
 
 dir€X<o 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 Heal(i)i 
 
 depaTrevm 
 
 5 
 
 16 
 
 14 
 
 I 
 
 Heal (2)2 
 
 Idofiai 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 II 
 
 3 
 
 Hell, s. Fire 
 
 yecvva 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 Here (Chri.) 
 
 Sde 
 
 6 
 
 12 
 
 12 
 
 I 
 
 Here (narr.) 
 
 Ue 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 30^4 
 
 4 
 
 Herod (the Great) 
 
 'HpSdrjs 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 Herod (Antipas) 
 
 'Hpo)8r)s 
 
 8 
 
 4 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 Herodians 
 
 'Hpoodiapoi 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 Herodias 
 
 'HpcoSias 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 High 
 
 vyl^rjXos 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 Highest 
 
 vylria-Tos 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 [1684] House (1)3 
 
 otfcta 
 
 19 
 
 26 
 
 24 
 
 5 
 
 House (2) 
 
 OIKOS 
 
 12 
 
 9 
 
 32 
 
 3 
 
 House-master 
 
 olKodeO-TTOTTJS 
 
 I 
 
 7 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 Hunger (vb.)* 
 
 Treivdo) 
 
 2 
 
 9 
 
 5 
 
 I 
 
 the Son (xiv. 28) or "greater" than all things (? x. 29 W.H. marg.). 
 John assumes that all that is great and good in men comes to them from 
 their being in the Father (or the Father in them) so that arithmetical 
 comparisons between man and man are out of place. Comp. Plato 69 A 
 {Phaed. 13) which declares that the balancing of /Aet'^o) 7rp6s eXdrrco is not 
 " the right exchange with a view to virtue." 
 
 1 [1683^] "Heal" (i), in Jn, only v. 10 "The Jews therefore began 
 to say to him //%«/ ^ad been healed (rw red e pair €vp.iv(o\^^ i.e. the man that 
 had been (Jn v. 5) "in his infirmity." 
 
 2 [1683^] "Heal" (2). Mt. xiii. 15, Jn xii. 40 are quotations from 
 Is. vi. 10. Jn V. 13 6 Se laOds (Tisch. d<r6€va>v) is called 6 redepaTrevnevos 
 in Jn V. 10. Jn iv. 47 "that he would come down and /lea/ his son," 
 is a request to Jesus. It will be seen that Jn never uses OepaTrevco or 
 Idofiai in his own person except participially to describe people that have 
 been healed. 
 
 3 [1684^] "House" (i). It means "household" in Jn iv. 53 and 
 perh. in viii. 35 ("doth not abide in the house for ever"). It means 
 "the Father's house" in xiv. 2, and the house of Martha and Mary in 
 xi. 31 and xii. 3. See also "build." 
 
 * " Hunger," in Jn, only vi. 35 " He that cometh unto me shall 
 assuredly not hunger." 
 
 172 
 
FROM SYNOPTIC VOCABULARY [1685] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Husbandman^ 
 
 yeatpyos 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 I 
 
 Hypocrite, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hypocrisy 
 
 viroKpiTTjs, -la-is 
 
 2 
 
 14 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 Increase, grow 2 
 
 av^dvco 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 Indignant, be- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 come^ 
 
 ayavaKrito 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 Inherit, inherit- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ance, inheritor 
 
 KXrjpovoficay, -t'a, -os 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 Isaac* 
 
 'lo-aaK 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 Israel^ 
 
 'la-pariX 
 
 2 
 
 12 
 
 12 
 
 4 
 
 James (son of 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Alphaeus etc.)^ 
 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 James (son of Zebe- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 dee or brother of 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 John)6 
 
 
 10 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 Jericho 
 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 John (son of 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Zebedee) 
 
 
 10 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 Just, justify etc., 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s. Righteous 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [1685] Kingdom^ 
 
 ^aaiXeia 
 
 19 
 
 56 
 
 45 
 
 5 
 
 Know, recognise 8 
 
 €7riyiv(6(rK(o 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 1 " Husbandman," in Jn, only xv. i " My Father is the husbandman!^ 
 
 2 " Increase," in Jn, only iii. 30 "He must increase but I must 
 decrease." 
 
 3 [1684^] " Indignant, become." 'Opyi^op-ai, " be angry," occurs Mt. (3), 
 Lk. (2), but Mk (o), Jn (o), and therefore is not in this vocabulary. 
 
 * " Isaac." In Mk, only xii. 26, quoting Ex. iii. 6. 
 
 ^ [1684 r] "Israel." Jn iii. 10 "Art thou the teacher of Israel and 
 knowest not these things?" appears to contain a shade of irony. It is 
 the only Johannine instance of the use of "Israel" in the words of the 
 Lord. The others are i. 31, 49, xii. 13. Of Lk.'s instances, 7 are in his 
 Introduction. 
 
 ^ [1684 <^] "James." These names and numbers are given as in 
 Bruder (1888). But the distinctions are doubtful. The important fact is 
 that " James " does not occur at all in Jn. 
 
 7 [1685 a] " Kingdom." " The kingdom of God, or, of heaven etc.," 
 occurs more than 80 times in the Synoptists. In J n it occurs only in the 
 Dialogue with Nicodemus, iii. 3, 5, "the k. of God," and in xviii. 36 
 " my kingdom " (thrice repeated, rj ^. v ifxr^). 
 
 8 [1685 b] " Know, recognise." For ytvdcrKa, and otSa, see 1715. 
 
[1686] JOHANNINE DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Lame^ 
 
 Xa>\6s 
 
 I 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 Lamp, lampstand^ 
 
 Xv^vos, -ia 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 I 
 
 Last (excluding 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "last day")^ 
 
 €<rxaTos 
 
 5 
 
 10 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 Lawful, it is* 
 
 f^eoTiv 
 
 6 
 
 10 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 Lead astray, go 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 astray, err 
 
 TrXavda 
 
 4 
 
 8 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 Lead away 
 
 dirdy(o 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 Leave 
 
 KaraXetTro) 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 Leaven (n. and vb.) C^firj, -oat 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 Leper, leprosy 
 
 Xenpos, -a 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 [1686] Liken, compare « 
 
 ' o/jLoioa) 
 
 I 
 
 8 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 Little ones« 
 
 IxiKpoi 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 Manifest, known 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 (adj.)^ 
 
 cf)av€p6s 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 Market-place 
 
 dyopd 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 Marry, marriage ^ 
 
 ya/xeo), -I'^o), -os etc. 5 
 
 18 
 
 13 
 
 2 
 
 Marvel, s. Astonish 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 [1685 c] " Lame," in Jn, only v. 3 "A multitude of them that were 
 infirm, blind, lame, withered." 
 
 2 [1685 rt?] "Lamp," Xvxvos. The only instance in Jn is v. 35 "He 
 [i.e. John the Baptist] was the lamp.^^ 
 
 3 [1685 e\ " Last " is not applied to persons etc. in Jn, but " the last 
 day," i.e. the Day of Judgment, fcrxdrr] fjpepa, occurs 7 times in Jn and 
 never in Synoptists. 
 
 * " Lawful, it is," in Jn only v. 10 " It is not lawful for thee to take up 
 thy bed," xviii. 31 "// is not lawful iox us to kill anyone." 
 
 ^ [1686 rt] " Liken," Mk iv. 30. " Like," o/xotoy, is also freq. in Mt. (9), 
 Lk. (9) (but abs. from Mk) in connexion with parables. In Jn ofioios 
 occurs twice, Jn viii. 55 "like you," ix. 9 "like him." 
 
 6 [1686/^] "Little ones," in Triple Tradition, only in Mk ix. 42, 
 Mt. xviii. 6, Lk. xvii. 2 "one of these little ones" [Mk + " tkat believe^^ 
 Mt. + " //^rt/ believe in me"]. The most reasonable explanation of Lk.'s 
 omitting "that believe in me" and of Mk's omitting "in me" is that the 
 bracketed words were early glosses explaining or defining " little ones." 
 
 ^ [1686 c] " Manifest." The vb. (fyavepoo), however, occurs Mk (i +[2]), 
 Mt. (o), Lk. (o), Jn (9). Besides Mk iv. 22 it occurs in Mk App. xvi. 12, 
 14 concerning the Resurrection. In Jn xxi. i (bis), 14 it refers to the 
 Resurrection. See 1716 /, 7. 
 
 8 [1686^ " Marriage," ydfios occurs in Jn ii. i, 2 of the "marriage" at 
 Cana. 
 
FROM SYNOPTIC VOCABULARY 
 
 [1687] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Mary (mother of 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 the Lord)i 
 
 yiapla{\i) 
 
 
 I 
 
 5 
 
 12 
 
 o 
 
 Matthew 
 
 MadOaios 
 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 Mercy, s. Com- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 passion 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Middle, midst 
 
 fieaos, ev 
 
 fieo-a, fls 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 TO fieaov etc. 
 
 5 
 
 7 
 
 14 
 
 4 
 
 Might, mighty 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 work 2 
 
 dvvafiis 
 
 
 lO 
 
 13 
 
 15 
 
 o 
 
 Mighty (possible, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 able) (I) 
 
 dvvaros 
 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 o 
 
 Mighty (2)3 
 
 laxvpos 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 o 
 
 Mock4 
 
 ifXTrai^co 
 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 o 
 
 Money, silver^ 
 
 dpyvpiov 
 
 
 I 
 
 9 
 
 4 
 
 o 
 
 Mountain 
 
 opos 
 
 
 II 
 
 i6 
 
 12 
 
 4 
 
 [1687] Nations (plur.)^. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i.e. Gentiles 
 
 edvTj 
 
 
 4 
 
 12 
 
 9 
 
 o 
 
 Near, be or draw 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 near (vb.)^ 
 
 iyyiCco 
 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 i8 
 
 o 
 
 Neighbour^ 
 
 TrXrjcTLOV 
 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 1 " Mary." Mk vi. 3 " Is not this the carpenter, the son of Mary ? " 
 
 2 [1686^] "Mighty work." Instead of dwdfieis, "mighty works," 
 which is the usual Synoptic word for Christ's miracles, Jn uses arjucla, 
 " signs." To express " power," in a certain sense, he freq. uses i^ovcria, 
 where R.V. gives '■'■ power" in txt. but sometimes ''''right^'' sometimes 
 " authority^'^ in margin. " Authority " would perhaps be the best word in 
 almost every case (1562 — 94). 
 
 3 [1686/] " Mighty" (2). Note that in Mk i. 7, Mt. iii. 11, Lk. iii. 16, 
 John the Baptist says, concerning Jesus, ^^ Mightier (laxvporepos) than 
 I " : whereas Jn i. 27 gives the context but omits these words. 
 
 * "Mock," in Mk x. 34, xv. 20, 31 concerning the "mocking" in the 
 Passion, predicted or practised, and so in Mt.-Lk. exc. Mt. ii. 16, 
 Lk. xiv. 29. 
 
 ^ "Money." Mk xiv. 11 " They promised to give him [Judas Iscariot] 
 money." Jn ii. 15 has Keppara "(copper) money." 
 
 6 [1687 a] " Nations." The sing., however, €$vos occurs 5 times in Jn 
 (1718/) and also in Mk xiii. 8, Mt. xxiv. 7, Lk. xxi. 10 ^^ nation against 
 nation" Mt. xxi. 43 "a nation" Lk. vii. 5, xxiii. 2 "our nation?' 
 
 7 [1687 <^] "Near." The adv. eyyvs "near," occurs Mk (2), Mt. (3), 
 Lk. (3), Jn (II). 
 
 ^ [1687 r] "Neighbour." In Jn irXrja-iov occurs only in Jn iv. 5 
 "Sychar, near to the parcel of ground..." 
 
 A. V. 
 
 175 
 
[1688] 
 
 JOHANNINE DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 O! 
 
 a, 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 Oath (s. also Swear' 
 
 ) opKOS 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 Oil 
 
 eXaiov 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 Oldi 
 
 rraXaios 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 or 5 
 
 
 
 Olives (Mt. of) 
 
 eXaioiv (al. -av) 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 Other, another 2 
 
 erepos (not aXXos) 
 
 [I] 
 
 10 
 
 34 
 
 I 
 
 Parable^ 
 
 Trapa^okr] 
 
 13 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 
 
 Paralytic 
 
 TrapaXvTiKOS 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 Pass, pass by (i) 
 
 Trapipxpp.aL 
 
 5 
 
 9 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 Pass, pass by (2)* 
 
 irapdya) 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 Pay, render, re- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 quite^ 
 
 aTToSi'dco/xt 
 
 I 
 
 18 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 [1688] People^ 
 
 Xaos 
 
 2 
 
 14 
 
 37 
 
 2 
 
 Philip (founder of 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Caesarea) 
 
 ^iXimros 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 Philip (husband of 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Herodias) 
 
 '^iXlTTTTOS 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 Physician 
 
 larpos 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 Pity, s. Compassior 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 Plant (vb.) 
 
 (f)VT€VQ> 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 f>oor (Chri.)^ 
 
 TTTaxos 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 8 or 9 
 
 I 
 
 Power, s. Might 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tray, prayer 
 
 Trpocrevxopai, -rj 
 
 13 
 
 19 
 
 22 
 
 
 
 •Preach, proclaim 
 
 Kr}pva(ra) 
 
 12 
 
 9 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 (Prepare 8 
 
 eroi/ia^o) 
 
 5 
 
 7 
 
 14 
 
 2 
 
 1 [1687^] "Old." Compare, however, i Jn ii. 7 about the ''old 
 commandment" (dis). 
 
 2 [1687^] "(An)other," in Jn, only xix. 37 "Again another Scripture 
 saith...." As it occurs only in Mk App. [xvi. 12] (as indicated by the 
 bracketed [i]), and not in Mk, it ought not, strictly, to come in this list. 
 
 3 " Parable," Trapa^oXr), is, in Jn, irapoip.la. See 1721 c — d. 
 
 * " Pass by" (2), Trapdyco, in Jn, only ix. i '' And, passing- by, he saw a 
 .man blind from birth." 
 
 ^ "Pay, render," in Mk only xii. 17 "-Render therefore to Caesar...." 
 :See" Render (1691)." 
 
 6 [1688 (i\ " People," in Jn, only in the saying of Caiaphas (xi. 50, 
 Kviii. 14) that " one man " was to " die for the peopled In Mk vii. 6 it is in 
 A quotation from Is. xxix. 13 ; in Mk xiv. 2 it is in a saying of the chief 
 priests ; in Mk xi. 32 W.H. have oxXov. 
 
 "^ [1688 bl " Poor " (Chri.), in Jn only xii. 8 " The/^^r ye have always," 
 •om. by SS and D. 
 
 ® [1688 c\ " Prepare," €Toip.d(a), in Jn, only xiv. 2 — 3 (bis) " I go to 
 prepare a place." Also KaTaa-KevdCo) occurs Mk (i), Mt. (i), Lk. (2), Jn (o). 
 
 176 
 
FROM SYNOPTIC VOCABULARY 
 
 [1689] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Prepared, ready ^ 
 
 eTOLflOS 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 Prevent, hinder 
 
 KQ>\va> 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 6 
 
 o 
 
 Priest 2 
 
 lepevs 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 I 
 
 Prison 3 
 
 (f)v\aKr} 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 
 6 
 
 I 
 
 Privately, apart '^ 
 
 kut' I8iav 
 
 7 
 
 6 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 [1689] Publican 
 
 reXcovrjs 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 lO 
 
 o 
 
 Put on (a garment),! 
 
 evdvco 
 
 
 
 
 
 (mid.-) be clothed 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 o 
 
 in5 ) 
 
 1 rrepipa A Aoj 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 Ransom 
 
 Xvrpov, -ooj, -cocris 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 Read (scripture) ^ 
 
 avayivaxTKOi 
 
 4 
 
 7 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 Ready, s. Prepared 
 
 eroLfios 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 Reason'' 
 
 diaXoyi^Ofxai, -kt/xos 
 
 8 
 
 4 
 
 12 
 
 o 
 
 Rebuke 
 
 iTTLTipdoi 
 
 9 
 
 7 
 
 12 
 
 o 
 
 Receive^ 
 
 bexofiaL 
 
 6 
 
 lO 
 
 l6 
 
 I 
 
 Recline, lie, some- ) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .■ I 
 
 avaKkivco 
 
 J 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 times cause to > 
 
 
 
 
 
 lie9 ) 
 
 KaraKkivco 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 5 
 
 o 
 
 Recline with^ 
 
 (TwavaKeLfxaL 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 ^ " Prepared," " ready," in Jn, only vii. 6 " but your time is always 
 ready'^ 
 
 2 " Priest," in Jn, only i. 19 '■^priests and Levites." 
 
 ^ " Prison," in Jn, only iii. 24 " For John was not yet cast into ^r/i-<?;/." 
 The numbers above do not include (f)vXaKT] meaning " watch," for which 
 see 1696. 
 
 4 " Privately," see " Apart " (1672 d). 
 
 5 " Put on," see " Clothe" (1676). 
 
 ^ [1689 a] " Read (scripture)," Jn has dvayivaxTKco once, but not of 
 scripture, xix. 20 "This title, therefore, the Jews read." 
 
 ^ [1689 d] " Reason," when used in the phrase " reasoned among them- 
 selves," is sometimes synonymous with " murmur," yoyyy^co, which occurs 
 Mk (o), Mt. (i) (in parable), Lk. (i), Jn (4) — or with SiayoyyvCo which 
 occurs in Lk. alone (2). 
 
 ^ [1689 c] " Receive," dexopai, in Jn, only iv. 45 " the Galilaeans 
 received him": but Xafx^dvoj, "receive i.e. welcome (a person)," occurs 
 Mk (o), Mt. (o), Lk. (o), Jn (11) (1721/—^). napaXa/x/Sai/co occurs Mk (6), 
 Mt. (16), Lk. (6), Jn (3), always of persons except in Mk vii. 4, but not 
 always of friendly reception. 
 
 ^ [1689^] "Rechne" (almost always at meals). 'Ai/a/cet/iai and dva- 
 TTiTrro), in a similar sense, occur in all the Four Gospels. 
 
 177 
 
 13- 
 
[1690] JOHANNINE DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Reedi 
 
 KoXafxos 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 [1690] Remission of 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sins 2 
 
 d<\>e<TLi dfxapTicov 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 1 [1689^] "Reed." Mk xv. 19, 36, Mt. xxvii. 29, 30, 48, Lk. om., 
 of the "reed" mentioned in the Passion : Mt. xi. 7, Lk, vii. 24 (the only- 
 instance) "a ree^ shaken by the wind": Mt. xii. 20 (quoting Is. xlii. 
 3) "a bruised reed." 
 
 2 [1690(2] "Remission of sins," acfxais dfiapnav, is connected by Mk 
 i. 4 and Lk. iii. 3 with the Baptist's preaching, but the parall. Mt. iii. 2 
 omits it and mentions "the kingdom of heaven" [Mt. xxvi. 28, however, 
 inserts " for the remission of sins " in the account of the Eucharist where 
 Mk-Lk. omit it]. The following facts bear on acfxais in LXX and on 
 Jewish traditions about the Hebrew original of the word. 
 
 [1690 d] (i) Apart from a few unimportant exceptions, acjieais, in 
 canon. LXX, means tke ^^re/ease" of the Sabbatical Year^ or of Jubilee^ 
 and is not connected with atonement except once in a passage describing 
 the scape-goat that is (Lev. xvi. 26) '"''for AzazelJ^ Josephus speaks 
 of Jubilee as the year {Ant. iii. 12. 3) "wherein debtors 2iYe freed from 
 their debts and slaves are set at liberty " ; and he says that " the name 
 denotes Aphesis.^^ Isaiah Ixi. i — 2 connects '■''liberty (a^eo-ii/) to the 
 captives" with ^'' the acceptable year of the Lord^^^ which (Ibn Ezra says) 
 means " the Year of Remission " : and this forms part of the text, so to 
 speak, of our Lord's first sermon in Luke (iv. 17 — 19). Debtors sometimes 
 sold themselves or their children into slavery ; so that remission of 
 servitude and remission of debt would naturally often go together. 
 
 [1690 <;] (ii) Part of the observance of Aphesis consisted in " re- 
 leasing" the land from service by abstaining from agriculture for a whole 
 year and allowing the poor to partake of such fruits or crops as grew of 
 themselves. That this institution was observed shortly before, and shortly 
 after, our Lord's birth, we know from the testimony of Josephus Ant. xiv. 
 16. 2, XV. I. 2, Philo in Eus. Praep. Evang. viii. 7 and Tac. Hist. v. 4. 
 Josephus says that it caused great distress when Herod besieged Jerusa- 
 lem (as well it might), and he quotes {Ant. xiv. 10. 6) a decree of Julius 
 Caesar remitting tribute for every Sabbatical Year. 
 
 [1690 d'\ (iii) That inconvenience was caused by the " remission " 
 of debts in the Sabbatical Year as late as the birthtime of Christ, we 
 know from the Mishna, which tells us that Hillel (probably about the 
 beginning of the Christian era) introduced a legal means of evading the 
 Law because people entertained the (Deut. xv. 9) "base thought" of 
 refusing to lend in view of the approaching Aphesis. But the Gemara 
 (/. Shebiith x. 4) adds (Schwab ii. 428) " Mais est-ce que cet acte [de 
 
 178 
 
FROM SYNOPTIC VOCABULARY [1690] 
 
 Hillel] a pour origine la Tora? Non ; seulement lorsque Hillel I'a 
 institud, il I'a bas^ sur une allusion biblique." 
 
 [1690^] (iv) In Jeremiah (xxxiv. 13—15) the act of "proclaiming 
 Aphesis" is shewn by the context to mean, or include, freedom from 
 servitude; and both that prophet and Nehemiah (Neh. x. 31 "that we 
 would forgo the seventh year and the exaction of every debt") contended 
 against the wealthy for that very observance of Aphesis which Hillel 
 practically abrogated. Hillel was the greatest and best of the Pharisees 
 and acted (no doubt) from perfectly pure motives ; but the Pharisees 
 of the next generation were called a "generation of vipers" by the 
 Baptist, and he refused to give them baptism. It is antecedently pro- 
 bable that peasants and fishermen would dislike the evasion of the Law, 
 and that the Baptist, the last of the prophets, who bade those that had 
 " two coats " to " give to him that had none," would with still more force 
 insist on the observance of the statute Law of the Nation, which no 
 Pharisee could abrogate. 
 
 [1690/] (v) Josephus tells us that the Baptist {Ant. xviii. 5. 2) 
 insisted that his disciples, before being baptized, should be " thoroughly 
 purified beforehand by righteousness^^ and he distinguishes " righteousness 
 towards one another^'' from "piety to God." Luke iii. 12, 14 tells us that 
 the publicans and soldiers said to the Baptist " What shall we do ? " 
 and were told how to exercise " righteousness " according to their ability. 
 These two witnesses convert the above-mentioned probability to a 
 certainty, that the Baptist would make rich men and Pharisees '■'■do" 
 something before he gave them baptism : and the least they could do 
 (according to the view of a Prophet) would be to observe the written 
 Law in all its requirements for the good of the poor. 
 
 [1690^] (vi) Both in Greek and in Hebrew, "release" means also 
 "forgive." In Aramaic (1181) "debt" and "sin" may be represented 
 by the same word. Hence '■''forgive us our sins" might be interchanged 
 with " release us from our debts" The conditional prayer, " Release us 
 from our debts as we release those that are indebted to us " might have 
 a twofold meaning. 
 
 [1690 y^] (vii) The fact that Matthew reads ''debts" for ''sins" in the 
 Lord's Prayer should be considered in this connexion. And many other 
 kindred questions deserve discussion, although they cannot be discussed 
 here, for example, whether John the Baptist did not intend something like 
 a compulsory socialism, and whether Jesus of Nazareth did not intend to 
 convert this into what should ultimately become a voluntary socialism. 
 Possibly it may appear that such an incident as the death of Ananias 
 and Sapphira was one of many signs that might reveal to the Apostles 
 and their successors the evil of importing into the Church what was 
 (practically) a compulsory socialism twenty centuries or more before the 
 Church was ready for even any form of voluntary socialism. 
 
[1691] JOHANNINE DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 [1691] Render, requite, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 payi 
 
 aTTobidayfjit 
 
 
 i8 
 
 8 
 
 o 
 
 Repent, repentance ficravoeo), -ma 
 
 
 7 
 
 14 
 
 o 
 
 Report, bring word 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 to, s. Tell 
 
 OTray-yeXXo) 
 
 
 8 
 
 II 
 
 I 
 
 Reproach 
 
 oveiSi^G) 
 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 Rest, the 
 
 \otn6s 
 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 o 
 
 Retain, seize, take 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hold of 2 
 
 Kpareco 
 
 IS 
 
 12 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 Reward, wages ^ 
 
 fiia-Oos 
 
 
 lO 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 Rich, riches* 
 
 7r\ov(rios, rrXoOroff 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 12 
 
 o 
 
 Right, on the^ 
 
 €K de^ioiv (jJLov) or 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ev Tols de^iois 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 4 
 
 o 
 
 Righteous, just 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 (appl. to men) 
 
 bUaios 
 
 2 
 
 c. 15 
 
 lO 
 
 o 
 
 Righteous (appl. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 to God) 6 
 
 dUaios 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 1 " Render," see " Pay" (1687), and the note on " Reward " below. 
 
 2 [1691 a] " Retain etc." Jn uses Kpareo) twice, but only in one 
 passage, and metaphorically (xx. 23) " Whose soever [sins] ye regain they 
 are retamedJ'^ The meaning is obscure. See 2517 — 20. 
 
 3 [1691 Ul " Reward," " wages." The two instances in Mk and Jn are 
 Mk ix. 41 "He shall surely not lose his reward^' Jn iv. 36 '■^Already,.. 
 is taking his reward^ The former regards the reward as future, the 
 latter regards it as present. 
 
 4 [1691 c\ "Rich," see "Poor" (Chri.) which is shewn (1688^) to occur 
 only once in Jn (where D and SS om. the mention). 
 
 ^ [1691^] "Right, on the." Jn makes no distinction of "right" and 
 "left" between the malefactors crucified with the Saviour. Also, he 
 never speaks of the Son as "^/ the right hand^'' of the Father, but as 
 "/«" the Father, or "^;/<?" with the Father, and similarly of the disciples 
 as being "zw" the Son. Jn xxi. 6 "on the right side" is not included in 
 the list above because " side {pipy]) " is added. 
 
 6 [1691^] "Righteous" applied to God occurs in Jn xvii. 25 "O 
 righteous Father." Applied to things, it occurs Mk (o), Mt. xx. 4 
 "Whatsoever is righteous (x.e.just) I will give you" ; Lk. xii. 57 "Why, 
 even of yourselves, judge ye not that which is righteous {to dUaiov)?" 
 i.e. judge Justly; Jn v. 30 " My judgment is righteous " vu. 24 "Judge 
 righteous judgment." Jn and Mk never use SiKaiow "justify," "make 
 righteous," which occurs Mt. (2) Lk. (5). On "righteousness," which 
 occurs Mk (o) Mt. (7) Lk. (i) Jn (2), see 1854^. The facts suggest that 
 Jn uses the adjective and noun in the Platonic sense of "just" and 
 "justice" rather than in the technical Hebrew meaning, "observant 
 of the requirements of the Law [of Moses]." On "judging justly," see 
 1714^—^. 
 
 180 
 
FROM SYNOPTIC VOCABULARY [1692} 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Rocki 
 
 irirpa 
 
 I 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 Root 
 
 piCa 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 [1692] Sadducee 
 
 ^addovKoios 
 
 I 
 
 8 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 Sake of, for the 2 
 
 ev€Ka 
 
 4 
 
 7 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 Salt 
 
 oKas 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 Sanhedrin, council ' 
 
 ^ crvvidpiov 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 Satan 4 
 
 2aTava5 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 I 
 
 Satisfy 5 
 
 XoprdCa 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 Save 6 
 
 areola) 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 17 
 
 6 
 
 2 [1692 a] " Sake." Jn however uses vTrc'p in xiii. 37, 38 (A.V.) "y2?r 
 thy, my, sake," (R.V.) "/^^ thee," "/<7r me." Comp. Jn xv. 21 "These 
 things will they do unto you because of (8m) my name," (A.V. and R.V.) 
 '"''for my name's sakeP Jn xii. 30 "/t?r your sakes" has dm, Jn xvii. 19 
 ^^for their sakes" has vTTf'p. For the difference between the Johannine 
 and the Synoptic view, see 1225 — 6. On the Johannine " sake," 8m, see 
 1721, and 1884 a—b. 
 
 ^ " Sanhedrin," etc. Lk. xxii. 66, Jn xi. 47. 
 
 4 [1692 <^] "Satan," in Jn, only xiii. 27 "Then {i.e. at that moment, 
 Tore) entered into him Satan," i.e. into Judas Iscariot ; Lk. xxii. 3 ("But 
 Satan entered into Judas") places the "entering" earlier. 
 
 ^ [1692^] "Satisfy," in Jn, only vi. 26 "Because ye ate from the 
 loaves and were satisfied" lit. fed as beasts with grass — probably used 
 by Jn in a bad sense, but not so by Mk vi. 42, Mt. xiv. 20, Lk. ix. 17 etc. 
 
 6 [1692^] "Save." In the words of Christ, ''save'' is used by the 
 Synoptists in the phrase "Thy faith hath saved thee" (after acts of 
 healing), " he that will save his soul {i.e. life) shall lose it," etc. But there 
 is no Synoptic statement that Christ came to ''save" except in the story 
 of Zacchaeus peculiar to Luke (Lk. xix. 10) " For the Son of man came 
 to seek and to save the lost." 
 
 [1692^] Mt. xviii. 11 (R.V. marg.) has "Many authorities, some 
 ancient, insert, ' For the Son of man came to save that which was lost'" : 
 Lk. ix. 56 (R.V. marg.) has, besides another insertion supported by 
 " some ancient authorities," the following one supported by " fewer " : 
 " For the Son of man came not to destroy men's lives but to save \them'\." 
 But W.H. omit both of these without marginal alternative. And they 
 are omitted by SS. 
 
 [1692/] Jn iii. 17 "God sent not the Son into the world that he 
 should judge the world but that the world should be saved through him," 
 is probably, as Westcott argues at some length, a comment of the 
 Evangelist, not an utterance of Christ : but the necessity for so long an 
 argument shews how easily comment on Christ's words might be taken 
 
 181 
 
[1692] JOHANNINE DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Scourge, i.e. pain- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ful disease 
 
 fldoTl^ 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 Scribe 
 
 ypafifiarevs 
 
 22 
 
 19 
 
 14 
 
 o 
 
 Scriptures, the 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 (pi.) (1722) 
 
 al ypa(f)ai 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 Seed (lit.) 
 
 crtrepfia, (nropos 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 Seed (metaph.)^ 
 
 (Tvipfxa 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 Seize, retain, take 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hold of 2 
 
 Kparefo 
 
 15 
 
 12 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 Sell (Chri.) 
 
 TTCoXeO) 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 O 
 
 Sell (narr.)3 
 
 rraXea 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 Set before* 
 
 iraparlBrfiMi 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 O 
 
 as part of Christ's words, and illustrates the growth of the interpolations 
 mentioned in the last paragraph. 
 
 [1692^] The Johannine version of the words of Christ certainly 
 represents Him as saying (a) Jn v. 34 "These things I say thatjK<? may 
 be saved" {b) Jn x. 9 " Through me if anyone enter in he shall be saved" 
 
 (c) xii. 27 " Shall I say, ' Father, save me from this hour ? ' " (933—40), 
 
 (d) xii. 47 " / came not that I might judge the world but that I might save 
 the world^^ The ist, 2nd, and 4th of these clearly imply spiritual 
 " saving." 
 
 1 [1692/%] "Seed" (metaph.). Jn vii. 42 "From the seed of David," 
 viii. 33 " We are Abraham's seed^'' viii. yj " I know that ye are Abraham's 
 seed." Jn xii. 24 has kokkos for "grain (of wheat)," to suggest the soul 
 dying that it may live. 
 
 2 " Seize." See above, " Retain" (1691 a). 
 
 3 "Sell" (narr.). All these relate to the casting out of them that 
 "sold" in the Temple. 
 
 4 [1692/] "Set before," i.e. set food before, Mk vi. 41, Lk. ix. 16, 
 in the Feeding of the Five Thousand; and Mk viii. 6 {bis)^ 7 in the 
 Feeding of the Four Thousand. But Mt. in the parall. to these three 
 passages of Mk omits TrapaTLdrjfii. Mt., when using this word, applies 
 it to spiritual food, or teaching by parables ^ xiii. 24, 31 "Another parable 
 he set before them." 
 
 [1692y] Lk. has x. 8 " Eat the things set before you," xi. 6 " I have 
 nothing to set before him," but also uses the middle to mean (xii. 48, 
 xxiii. 46) " entrust," "commend." Comp. Acts xiv. 23 ^Uommended them 
 to the Lord," but xvi. 34 (act.) ^^ set before them a table," i.e. fed them, 
 xvii. 3 " opening [the Scriptures] and setting before them [the doctrine'] 
 that it behoved the Christ to suffer." The word has these various 
 meanings in the Epistles also: i Cor. x. 27, i Tim. i. 18, 2 Tim. ii. 2, 
 I Pet. iv. 19. 
 
 182 
 
FROM SYNOPTIC VOCABULARY 
 
 [1693] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Seven, seven times 
 
 eirrd, -kis 
 
 8 
 
 II 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 Shed blood 
 
 iKxvvvoi alfia 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 2 or 3 
 
 
 
 Sick, s. Diseased 
 
 KOKcSff €X(OV 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 [1693] Sidon 
 
 2i8(6v 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 Silent, be (i) 
 
 o-iydo) 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 Silent, be (2) 
 
 (TKOTrdo) 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 Sinner, sinfuF 
 
 ifiapTcoXos 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 17 
 
 4 
 
 Sit (I) 
 
 KuBe^ofiai 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 Sit (2) 
 
 KaOijixai 
 
 II 
 
 19 
 
 13 
 
 4 
 
 Sit (3) 
 
 Kadi^o) 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 8 
 
 2 
 
 Sleep (I) 
 
 Kadevdo) 
 
 8 
 
 7 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 Sleep (2)2 
 
 KoifidofiaL 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 Smite (i) 
 
 Trardaa-di 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 Smite (2) 
 
 TV7rr(o 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 So,in the same way 
 
 Qi(rai)T(os 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 2 or 3 
 
 
 
 So as to, so that 3 
 
 S<TT€ 
 
 13 
 
 15 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 So to say, as it 
 were, about* 
 
 coa-ei 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 Sodom (1671 c) 
 
 26dofia 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 Sow5 
 
 aneipo) 
 
 10 
 
 16 
 
 6 
 
 2 
 
 Spit on 6 
 
 efXTTTVOi 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 Straightway (i a) 
 (1910 foil.) 
 
 evOvs 
 
 c. 40 
 
 7 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 Straightway (i d) 
 (1914 foil.) 
 
 eve^ois 
 
 
 
 II 
 
 6 
 
 3 
 
 1 "Sinner" occurs in Jn only in the dialogue about the man born 
 blind, four times, Jn ix. 16, 24, 25, 31 (1371 d). 
 
 2 [1693 a] " Sleep " (2). Koifxdoixai means the sleep of death in 
 Mt. xxvii. 52 "the saints that slept arose." In Jn xi. 11 "Lazarus has 
 
 fallen asleep {K€KoifXT)Tai),^' the disciples take the verb literally and 
 comment on it thus (xi. 12) "If he has fallen asleep he will recover (1858)." 
 
 3 [1693 (^] "So as to," "so that," occurs in Jn only in iii. 16 '^ so that 
 he gave his only begotten Son," a comment of the Evangelist, not a 
 saying of Christ's. See " save " above (1692/). 
 
 * [1693 c\ " So to say," " about" occurs in Mt. xiv. 21, parall. Lk. ix. 14 
 " about five thousand," but Mk and Jn, who also mention " five thousand," 
 do not thus qualify it. 
 
 ^ "Sow," in Jn, only iv. 36 — 7, of spiritual sowing. 
 
 ^ [1693 d'\ " Spit on," referring to the Passion, does not occur in Jn ; 
 but TTTvo), "spit," occurs in Mk vii. 33, viii. 23, Jn ix. 6 in connexion with 
 healing. See 1737 b. 
 
 183 
 
Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 rrapaxp^fia 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 lO 
 
 o 
 
 Icrxvs, Icrxvpos 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 o 
 
 lcrx^<^ 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 8 
 
 I 
 
 CKTelvco ;(eTpa(s) 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 aKav8aXi(a>, 
 
 8 
 
 19 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 (TKavdaKov 
 
 
 
 
 
 jStoy 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 5 
 
 O 
 
 vTrdpxovra 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 o 
 
 KTTjpara 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 7rd(rx<»> 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 o 
 
 Uavos 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 lO 
 
 o 
 
 ffKios 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 6pvva> 
 
 2 
 
 13 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 Xolpos 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 o 
 
 arvvayayrj 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 15 
 
 2 
 
 [1694] JOHANNINE DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Straightway (2)^ 
 
 Strength, strong 
 
 Strong, be 2 
 
 Stretch out the 
 hand(s)3 
 
 [1694] Stumble, make 
 to stumble, stum- 
 bling-block * 
 
 Substance, pos- J 
 sessions, living j 
 
 Suffer 
 
 Sufficient (marg. 
 worthy), great 
 Sun 
 
 Swear (s. also Oath) opvvo) 
 Swine 
 Synagogue^ 
 
 1 [1693^] "Straightway" (2). Uapaxpny^a is not strictly entitled to 
 a place here, but it is inserted to explain that Lk.'s deficiency in respect 
 of €v6vs and evBiois may be compensated by his excess in respect of 
 another word of similar meaning. Uapaxpfj p.a, both in Mt. and Lk., is 
 connected with miraculous results in the context exc. (a) Lk. xix. 11 
 "that the kingdom of God was destined to come immediately^^ {b) 
 Lk. xxii. 60 "And immediately, while he was yet speaking, the cock 
 crew." In («), the meaning is, perhaps, "come by special miracle"; 
 in {b\ attention seems to be called to a miraculous coincidence. 
 
 2 [1693/] "Strong, be" occurs in Jn only in xxi. 6 "They were no 
 longer strong [enough] to draw it \i.e. the net]." On Jn's non-use of 
 " strong," "mighty" etc., see the latter (1686/). 
 
 3 [1693^] "Stretch out the hands," in Jn only xxi. 18 "Thou shalt 
 stretch out thy hands,^' to which is added, " Now this he spake signifying 
 by what manner of death he \i.e. Peter] should glorify God," i.e. by 
 stretching out his hands on the cross. 
 
 4 [1694 «] "Stumble" etc. Jn has only the verb, vi. 61 "Doth this 
 make you to stumble V^ xvi. i "This have I said to you that ye be not 
 tnade to stumble.''^ 
 
 5 [1694 <^] "Synagogue," in Jn, only vi. 59 (R.V.) "These things said 
 he in [the, or, a] synagogue (eV (rvvayoiyr^) as he taught in Capernaum," 
 xviii. 20 " I ever taught in [the, or, a] synagogue (eV o-uj/ayw-y,^) and in the 
 temple." Perhaps " in synagogue " (like our " in church ") would be the 
 best rendering in both passages. 
 
 184 
 
FROM SYNOPTIC VOCABULARY [1695] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Take hold of, s. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Retain 
 
 K/jareo) 
 
 15 
 
 12 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 Teacher, Master 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 (voc.)i 
 
 hlhaCTKCLki 
 
 lO 
 
 6 
 
 12 
 
 2 
 
 Tell (R.V.), bring 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 word 2 
 
 aTra-yyeXXo) 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 II 
 
 I 
 
 [1695] Tempt, tempta- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tion^ 
 
 Treipa^o), -aa-fJios 
 
 5 
 
 8 
 
 8 
 
 I 
 
 Testimony* 
 
 fiaprvpiov 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 That {iL.e. in order 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 that) 5 
 
 oiras 
 
 I 
 
 17 
 
 6 
 
 I 
 
 Then {i.e. after all) 
 
 apa 
 
 2 
 
 7 
 
 6 
 
 o 
 
 Then {i.e. at that 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 time) 
 
 t6t€ 
 
 6 
 
 88 
 
 14 
 
 lO 
 
 Thirds 
 
 rpiTos 
 
 2 
 
 6 
 
 9 
 
 I 
 
 1 [1694^] "Teacher," voc, in Jn, only i. 38 'Pa^^e\ 6 Xe'yerai peO. 
 AiddcTKokej XX. 16 'Pa^^ovvel 6 Xe'yerai AiSao-KoXe. Jn viii. 4, where 8. occurs 
 without the Aramaic, is an interpolation. For " Rabbi " see 1815. 
 
 2 [16940 "Tell (R.V.)," in Jn, only xvi. 25 " I will tell you plainly 
 concerning the Father " (see 1675 d). Jn also has ay-yeXXo) (not used by 
 Synoptists) in xx. 18 "then cometh Mary Magdalene telling the 
 disciples." 
 
 ^ [1695 a\ " Tempt," in Jn, only vi. 6 " But this he said tempting him," 
 of Jesus "tempting" Philip. 
 
 * [1695 <^] "Testimony." In Mk-Mt., only in the phrase et? p. avrols 
 (or, Tols edvecri) which seems to mean "as a testimony against them" 
 (Mk i. 44, vi. II, xiii. 9, Mt. viii. 4, x. 18, xxiv. 14) or "a testimony with 
 regard to them in case they should disbelieve." Lk. ix. 5 (parall. to Mk 
 vi. 11) has 6tff p. fV avTovs, but Lk. v. 14 els p. avrols. Lk. xxi. 13 has 
 diTo^rjcreTai vplv els p. absolutely. This must be carefully distinguished 
 from paprvpia, a freq. Johannine term (1726). 
 
 5 [1695 <;] "That," i.e. in order that, Mk iii. 6 (Mt. xii. 14) ottcos avrov 
 aTroXecraa-Lv, Jn xi. 57 ottcos iTLao-coo-Lv avrov. It is noteworthy that the only 
 instance of ottcos in Mk-Jn refers to attempts to destroy or arrest Jesus. 
 Comp. Mt. xii. 14 ottcos avrov aTToXecraxriv, xxii. 1 5 ottcos avrov Trayi8evcr(0(riv 
 ev Xdycp, xxvi. 59 o7ra>s avrov OavaraxraxTLV. Lk. vi. II (parall. to Mk iii. 6, 
 Mt. xii. 14) has rl av TToirjo-aiev rw 'I. These figures have nothing to do 
 with Iva " in order that" (1726). 
 
 6 [1695 d] " Third," in Jn, only ii. i " On the tkird day there was 
 a marriage in Cana." " On the third day" in Mt.-Lk. always refers to 
 Christ's Resurrection; but Mk has '\after three days" (1297). 
 
 185 
 
[1696] 
 
 JOHANNINE DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Third time, the 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 (adv.)i 
 
 rpirov, €k rpirov 
 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 Throne (1671 c) 
 
 6p6vos 
 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 Time, season ^ 
 
 Kaipos 
 
 
 10 
 
 13 
 
 3 
 
 To-day 
 
 crjfiepov 
 
 
 7 
 
 12 
 
 
 
 Torment 
 
 ^aa-avl^o), -os 
 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 Touch 3 
 
 aTTTOfxai 
 
 II 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 I 
 
 Tradition (1671 c) 
 
 Trapabocris 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 Treasure, treasure- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 house, lay up 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 treasure 
 
 6r)(ravpi^co, -6s 
 
 
 II 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 Tree 
 
 Sevdpov 
 
 
 12 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 Turn, turn back^ 
 
 enia-Tpecfxo 
 
 
 4 
 
 7 
 
 I 
 
 Twelve (disciples, or (ot) dcSdeKa {fxaOrjTai, 
 
 
 
 
 
 apostles), the^ 
 
 aTroaroXoi) 
 
 II 
 
 8 
 
 7 
 
 4 
 
 Tyre 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 Unclean 
 
 uKaOapTOs 
 
 II 
 
 2 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 Understand, under- 
 
 (rvvirjfii, o-vv€(Tis, 
 crvvcros 
 
 
 
 
 
 standing 
 
 6 
 
 10 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 [1696] Verily ( 1)6 
 
 apr]v 
 
 14 
 
 C.30 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 Verily verily (2)" 
 
 dfiffv dfir]v 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 26 
 
 1 [1695^] "Third time" (adv.). This occurs in Mk xiv. 41, "cometh 
 t^e third time" Mt. xxvi. 44 "prayed a third time (en Tpirov)." In Lk. 
 xxiii. 22, Jn xxi. 14, 17 (dis) there is no parallelism. Jn xxi. 14 tovto rj8r] 
 Tpirov i<l>av(pa)6r) refers to a "third" manifestation of the Resurrection. 
 
 2 [1695/] "Time," "season," in Jn, only vii. 6—8 '' my ti?ne {bis).,. 
 your timeP 
 
 3 [1695^] "Touch," in Jn, only xx. 17 ''Touch me not." In the 
 Synoptists it almost always refers to Jesus touching the diseased or the 
 diseased touching Him or His garments. 
 
 "* [1695 h'\ " Turn," in Jn, only xxi. 20 " Peter, turning about {cTrioTpa- 
 <f)€is)" The active is applied to Peter in Lk. xxii. 32 " When once thou 
 hast turned again {eiria-Tpe-^as)." 
 
 ^ [1695 z] "Twelve, the," never mentioned by Jn except in connexion 
 with the treachery of Judas (vi. 70, 71) or some suggestion of desertion in 
 the context (vi. 67) "Will ye also go away?" or some unbelief (xx. 24) 
 "Thomas, one of the Twelve." 
 
 6 [1696 a] " Verily." No one has been able hitherto to explain why the 
 Three Gospels never use dfirjv doubly, and the Fourth never singly, in 
 reporting the sayings of Christ. Lk. also has dkr]6a)s thrice (ix. 27, xii. 44, 
 xxi. 3) with Xe'yo), a combination peculiar to him. 
 
 186 
 
FROM SYNOPTIC VOCABULARY [1696] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Villages (pl.)^ 
 
 Kcofiai 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 Vineyard 
 
 dfineXoiv 
 
 5 
 
 lO 
 
 7 
 
 o 
 
 Wallet 
 
 TT^pa 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 o 
 
 Watch (vb.) 
 
 ypTjyopeo) 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 Watch, a (of the 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 night) 
 
 <j)v\aKri 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 Way, road^ 
 
 686s 
 
 i6 
 
 22 
 
 20 
 
 4 
 
 Wealth, s. Riches 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Well-pleased, good 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pleasure 
 
 €v8oKeo>f -la 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 o 
 
 Widow 
 
 X'7P« 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 9 
 
 o 
 
 Wife (not "woman" 
 
 )yvv^ 
 
 lO 
 
 i6 
 
 i6 
 
 o 
 
 Wind 
 
 avefios 
 
 7 
 
 9 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 Wisdom, wise^ 
 
 ao<pLay (ro(l)6s 
 
 I 
 
 5 
 
 7 
 
 o 
 
 Within 
 
 €(Ta>6ev 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 Without, outside 
 
 €^co6ev 
 
 2 or 3 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 Witness* 
 
 fidprvs 
 
 I. 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 Woe 
 
 oval 
 
 2 
 
 13 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 Wonder, s. Astonish 
 Zebedee Ze^edaios 
 
 1 [1696^] "Villages" (pL). AH the Evangelists use Kiofirj (sing.), Jn 
 (3) referring to (vii. 42) Bethlehem or (xi. i, 30) "Bethany." 
 
 2 [1696^] "Way." Jn mentions " the Way" in only two passages, one 
 (i. 23 quoting Is. xl. 3) describing John the Baptist as bidding men "make 
 straight " ^/le way of the Lord, the other (xiv. 4, 6) describing Christ as 
 saying " whither I go, ye know the ivay^'' and " I am the way." 
 
 3 [1696^] "Wisdom," "wise." In Mk, "wisdom" occurs only in Mk 
 vi. 2 (parall. Mt. xiii. 54) "What is this wisdom that is given to this man?" 
 Mk nowhere uses "wise." Mt.-Lk. use also cj)p6viiJLos Mk (o), Mt. (7), 
 Lk. (2), Jn (o). 
 
 * [1696 e] "Witness." Mt. xxvi. 25 (parall. Mkxiv. 63), also Mt. xviii. 
 16 (alluding to Deut. xix. 15) cttI (rT6p.aTos 8vo fiaprvpav 17 rpmv a-raQfi irav 
 pTJfjLa. Comp. Jn viii. 17 "Yea, and it is written in your law, that of two 
 men the testimony is true dvo dvOpayTrcov 17 p-aprvpla dXijdrjs eariv)." In 
 Rev. ii. 13, xi. 3, xvii. 6 /ioprvs = " martyr" (even R.V. is obliged to render 
 it thus in txt. of xvii. 6) and prob. also (of Jesus) in i. 5, iii. 14 (meaning 
 " testifying by one's death "). Possibly this technical sense of fidprvs in 
 some Christian circles at the beginning of the 2nd century caused John 
 to abstain from it. 
 
 187 
 
CHAPTER II 
 
 SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS FROM JOHANNINE 
 VOCABULARY 
 
 § I. Introductory remarks 
 
 [1697] In the following list of words characteristic of the 
 Fourth Gospel and comparatively seldom (or never) used by 
 the Synoptists, one of the most noteworthy among many 
 noteworthy facts is that Mark only once mentions the word 
 ''Father" as expressing God's fatherhood in relation to men^ 
 The noun ''love!' too, never occurs in Mark. Matthew uses 
 the word once in a prediction that " the love of the many 
 shall wax cold." Luke speaks once of " the love of God " 
 where the parallel Matthew omits it^. Mark's deficiencies are 
 to some extent filled up by the two later Synoptists : but if we 
 put ourselves in the position of an early evangelist trying to 
 convert the world with nothing but Mark's Gospel in his 
 hands, we shall be all the better able to understand the atti- 
 tude of John towards Christian doctrine in general and Mark's 
 version of it in particular. Mark, for example, mentions God 
 as the Father of men once, and God the Father, in all, four 
 
 1 Mk xi. 25. Mk viii. 38, xiii. 32, xiv. 36 mention the word in relation 
 to the Son of man, but not in relation to men in general. 
 
 2 Mt. xxiii. 23 " Ye have left [undone] the weightier matters of the Law 
 namely, [righteous] judgment and kindness and faith," Lk. xi. 42 " Ye pass 
 by [righteous] judgment and the love of God." 
 
 188 
 
SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS [1699] 
 
 times : John uses the term a hundred and twenty times. 
 Mark abundantly uses the term Gospel, or Good News, but 
 nowhere tells us what the " good news " is : John nowhere 
 uses the term, but everywhere exhibits the Son of God as 
 bringing to mankind the best of good news, namely, that God 
 is a loving Father, and that men can find an eternal home in 
 His love. 
 
 [1698] Where the Synoptists speak of a Kingdom, there 
 John implies a Family. That is the great difference between 
 the Three Gospels and the Fourth. The latter nowhere 
 mentions the Kingdom of God except to represent Jesus as 
 warning a great Rabbi that it cannot be seen or entered 
 except after a new birth ; and in the first of these warnings, 
 the words '^ born from above " indicate that one must become 
 a child of the Family of Heaven. Something of this kind 
 appears to be latent in the Synoptic doctrines about " little 
 children " and " little ones." In this connexion the Synoptists 
 inculcate two distinct duties. One is the duty of " receiving " 
 /lU/e children ; the other is that of " receiving the Kingdom 
 of God as a little child," meaning, apparently, with an 
 innocent, pure, and sincere heart. A great deal is implied in 
 each of these precepts, and both are liable to be misunder- 
 stood. The second, for example, might encourage some to 
 suppose that they were to become " as a little child " in under- 
 standing \ and these would require the Pauline warning, "In 
 malice be ye babes, but in understanding be ye men\" 
 Against an error of this kind, men would be fortified by the 
 Johannine doctrine that " little children " meant " the children 
 of God," and that this was a title of "authority" — but 
 authority in a new sense, the " authority to lay down one's life " 
 for others (1586—94). 
 
 [1699] John teaches that, as there is an eternal unity in 
 the divine Family, namely, the Father, the Son and the 
 
 1 I Cor. xiv. 20. 
 
 189 
 
[1700] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 Spirit, so there is a foreordained unity for the human Family 
 (namely, those who receive the Spirit of the Father by 
 receiving the Son). Into that Family they must first be 
 "born" from above. Then they must "abide" in it. Or, 
 from another point of view, it must " abide " in them. They 
 must "eat the flesh" of the Son, so that the Son may be in 
 them, even while they are in the Son. They must also "drink" 
 His " blood." Other metaphors describe the members of this 
 Family as eating the " bread " that " descends from heaven," 
 the " bread of life," as " drinking " of the ** water of life," as 
 " coming to the light," and as " walking in the light." In a 
 family, "prayer" from the children to the father is out of 
 place. Hence John never uses the word " pray." The Son 
 speaks always of " requesting " or " asking," and He bids the 
 disciples "ask" what they will in His name. The Father's 
 "will" is the sole "law" for Him. If the Fourth Evangelist 
 mentions the Law, it is as being the Law of the Servant ("the 
 law of Moses ") or the Law of the Jews {''your law " etc.). 
 The Son never says, in this Gospel, " I have come to fulfil the 
 Law " but " I have come to do the will of him that sent me." 
 
 [1700] Instead of a Kingdom and instead of the laws of 
 a King, the Fourth Gospel proclaims Nature ; only, of course, 
 not materialistically, not a mere machinery, but, as we might 
 put it, Mother Nature. According to Epictetus, "Nature is 
 of all things the most powerful in man and draws him to her 
 desire^"; and he says elsewhere that there is nothing to which 
 man is so much drawn as to the Eu-Logon^; and man is by 
 
 1 [1700^] Epict. ii. 2o. 15. He is arguing against Epicurus, who, he 
 says, desired to eradicate the belief in {ib. ii. 20. 6) "natural human 
 fellowship {Ti)v (f)v(riKr)v Koivcovlav dvOparrois irpos dWr]\ovs) " and yet was 
 forced by Nature to act inconsistently with his own theory. 
 
 2 [1700 d] Epict. i. 2. 4 t6 evXoyov. " That which is reasonable " does 
 not fully express the Greek. It might be rendered "good Logos" (as to 
 fvTvxfs might be rendered " good fortune," to evyeves " good birth " etc.) 
 so as to give play to the many meanings of Logos. 
 
 190 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1702] 
 
 Nature created for " fellowship." John represents the Eu- 
 Logon, or Good Logos, as one with the Father in the Spirit of 
 Fellowship. But he also represents Him as incarnate and as 
 revealing the Spirit of Fellowship at a height never before 
 reached. The beast dies for the herd fighting against wolves, 
 and man dies for his country against foreigners. Both are 
 inspired by Mother Nature, the Spirit of Fellowship. But the 
 incarnation of the Good Logos dies as a Jew, crucified by 
 Jews, for "^// men " alike, with the prediction, " I, if I be lifted 
 up, will draw all men unto me " — i.e. I will draw all men into 
 harmony with Nature. 
 
 [1701] These remarks may be of use in preparing the 
 reader for a prominent feature in the following Vocabulary, 
 namely a predominance of simple terms such as a child might 
 use to describe family life. The one term wanting is " brother^ 
 This, in the Fourth Gospel, is merged in the relationship 
 between the Father and His children, and it is not used till 
 after the Resurrection : " But go unto my brethren, and say 
 unto them I ascend unto my Father and your Father." 
 
 [1702] Where the Fourth Gospel deals with history, it is 
 in a cosmopolitan spirit. Not only do the Synoptic distinctions 
 of " publicans," " sinners," " scribes," and " Sadducees," dis- 
 appear, but, instead of the old fundamental demarcation 
 between " the people," i.e. Israel, and " the nations," i.e. the 
 Gentiles, we find the term "Jews" used, almost as Tacitus 
 uses it, as the embodiment of narrow hostility to all that 
 is humane and truthful \ Both the Romans and the Greeks 
 — never mentioned by the Synoptists— are introduced by 
 John, the former as destined to " take away " the " place " of 
 the unholy "nation 2," the latter as exemplifying the devout and 
 
 ^ [1702 d\ On the corrupt attribution to Jesus of the words, " Salvation 
 is from the Jews," see 1647 — 8. On the other hand John alone uses 
 (i. 47) ^^ Israelite ^^ as synonymous with ^^ upright." 
 
 2 xi. 48. 
 
 A. V. 191 14 
 
[1703] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 intelligent world awakening to the truth — the "coming" of 
 the "isles," as Isaiah^ predicted, to the light of God's gloryl 
 
 [1703] Since the Johannine Gospel deals with Nature (in 
 the higher sense) and not with books or written codes of laws, 
 it naturally speaks of things that can be seen and known by 
 any one that will use his natural powers. The three Greek 
 words most commonly used to mean ''know'' and ''see'' (olBa, 
 yivaxTKO), and 6pd(o) are used more often in the Fourth Gospel 
 than in the Three taken together^ The same statement 
 applies to the word ^'testify" or "bear witness" {fxaprvpew). 
 The Evangelist regards the Gospel not as a message proceed- 
 ing from a prophet, but as a " testimony " to what the Son of 
 God " sees " the Father doing in heaven ; and what He sees 
 He can enable all the children of God to see. Hence comes 
 a great insistence on "the truth]' a word never used by the 
 Synoptists in the 7nodern aftd Johannine sense of truth in the 
 abstract. By " knowing truth," John means a correspondence 
 of the human mind to divine facts (that is to say, to the divine 
 
 1 Is. Ix. 9. See Jn xii. 20 — i, comp. vii. 35. 
 
 2 [1702 (^] This cosmopolitan view of things may, in part, explain Jn's 
 omission of many of the names given by one or more of the Synoptists, 
 e.g. Matthew, Bartholomew, Lebbaeus, or Thaddaeus, and the names of 
 the brethren of the Lord. 
 
 [1702 c\ But on the other hand " Cephas " appears for the first time in 
 the Fourth Gospel as the equivalent of the Synoptic " Peter," and we 
 cannot feel sure that Synoptic names may not be latent under " Natha- 
 nael" whom our Lord calls "An Israelite indeed, in whom is no guile." 
 
 [1702 <f] Jn and Lk. alone mention "Annas," Lk. in the phrase 
 " Annas and Caiaphas being High Priests." John explains that he was 
 not High Priest but the High Priest's influential father-in-law. Other 
 names that Jn has, in common with Lk. alone, are Martha, Mary, 
 Lazarus, Siloam. The whole group requires careful investigation, as also 
 do the names peculiar to Jn — Aenon, Bethany beyond Jordan, Bethesda {})^ 
 Salim, Sychar, etc. 
 
 3 [1703 d\ The exact statement about 6pda) is that, including forms of 
 oylrofiai, and wcfidrjv, it occurs in Jn 30 times, and in Mk-Mt.-Lk. 32 times. 
 The Perfect, edopaKUj occurs as follows, Mk (o), Mt. (o), Lk. (2 or 3), 
 Jn (19) 
 
 IQ2 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1705] 
 
 facts of love and self-sacrifice) analogous to that correspon- 
 dence between a man's words and his thoughts which is called 
 " sincerity " or " veracity," and to that correspondence between 
 his words and external actualities which implies knowledge 
 and is called "truth." 
 
 [1704] What some have called " the egotistic element " in 
 the Fourth Gospel will be found reflected in its abundant use 
 of " I," " my," " myself" etc. as shewn below. It must not be 
 supposed, however, that these pronominal forms exclude the 
 impersonal phrase " the Son of man." This is found in John 
 almost as often as in Mark, and he employs it towards the 
 close of his account of Christ's public teaching in a passage 
 that may perhaps explain in part why he substituted for it, as 
 a general rule, the first person (xii. 34) " How sayest thou 
 ' The Son of man must be lifted up ' ? Who is this Son of 
 man ? " This is the last utterance of the bewildered " multi- 
 tude." Other causes — moral causes especially — beside the 
 various meanings of " Son of man," caused their bewilderment. 
 But still it may have occurred to an Evangelist writing largely 
 for educated Greeks that this Jewish technical term — even 
 though it was actually and habitually used by our Lord 
 instead of the first personal pronoun, to denote ideal humanity 
 as created in God's image — ought to be sparingly used in 
 a Gospel intended mainly for Gentiles. 
 
 [1705] Instances will be found where John appears to be 
 alluding to words, names, or phrases, that might (1811) cause 
 difficulty to the readers of Mark and Matthew, as, for 
 example, John's use of the word translated " groaning " in the 
 Raising of Lazarus. It will also be noticed that the epithet 
 " eternal," or " everlasting," applied sometimes by Mark and 
 Matthew to " sin," " fire " etc., is applied by John to nothing 
 but " life," and that John's doctrine about " fire " is confined to 
 one brief metaphorical passage. Occasionally, attention will 
 be called to passages where John may be alluding to doctrines 
 like those of Epictetus. For example, the conception of the 
 
 193 14—2 
 
[1706] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 Son as ''testifying'' or ''bearing witness'' to the Father, can 
 be illustrated far more fully from Epictetus than from the 
 Prophets. Negatively, too, John's avoidance of the word 
 " Jmmblel' and his condemnation (in the Epistle) of ''fear" 
 indicate that he may have been impelled by Greek influence 
 to discard these and other Biblical terms that conveyed to the 
 Greeks a suggestion not of good but of evil. 
 
 [1706] Under the head of " trouble!' however, reasons will 
 be given for thinking that John is allusively dissenting from 
 Epictetus, with whom " freedom from trouble " was the highest 
 of blessings. Not improbably, many things in the Fourth 
 Gospel imply a similar dissent. For example, John lays great 
 stress (1226) upon the fact that the Son does all things "for 
 the sake of the Father or 'for the sake of the disciples. But 
 Epictetus says (i. 19. 11) " Whatever lives has been so framed 
 as to do all things for its own sake (avrov eveKa). For even 
 the sun does all things for its own sake, and, indeed, so does 
 Zeus Himself" Of course Epictetus could prove philosophi- 
 cally that this is consistent with real unselfishness. But from 
 the point of view of a plain man with no pretensions to 
 philosophy, this means either selfishness or solitude. And, 
 since God cannot be selfish, it reduces Him to a solitary 
 Being. John teaches that God was from the beginning not 
 alone, because the Word, or the Son, was with Him : and 
 instead of " doing all things for His own sake," He is revealed 
 in the Washing of Feet as making Himself — in the person of 
 His Son — the Servant of His creatures, doing all things " for 
 the sake of" others. 
 
 194 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1707] 
 
 JOHANNINE WORDS COMPARATIVELY SELDOM OR 
 NEVER USED BY THE SYNOPTISTS^ 
 
 English Greek Mk Mt. Lk. Jn 
 
 [1707] Abide, remain ^ /xeVw 2 3 7 40 
 
 ^ [1707 * s. 1885 (ii) foil.] This Vocabulary includes words characteristic 
 of the Fourth Gospel as contrasted with the words used by the Three 
 collectively. Occasionally — in order to group kindred words together, 
 or to supply a reader that may be ignorant of Greek with a fairly 
 complete alphabetical list of important Johannine terms — it will include 
 a word used by only two of the Synoptists (e.^. "judge," Kpivco, not found 
 in Mark) or sometimes only one (e.^. " manifest," (f)avep6(o, not found in 
 Matthew or Luke). But, where that is the case, such a word will be 
 repeated later on under one of the following headings : 
 
 (i) Words peculiar to Jn and Mk (1729—44). 
 
 (2) „ „ Jn and Mt. (1745—57). 
 
 (3) „ „ Jn and Lk. (1758—1804). 
 
 (4) „ „ Jn, Mk, and Mt. (1805—17). 
 
 (5) „ „ Jn, Mk, and Lk. (1818—35). 
 
 (6) „ „ Jn, Mt, and Lk. (1836—66). 
 
 2 [1707^] "Abide." Mk vi. 10 (sim. Mt. x. 11 and Lk. ix. 4, x. 7) 
 "There adzde until ye go forth," Mk xiv. 34 (Mt. xxvi. 38) '-''abide here 
 and watch." Jn uses the word to denote the abiding of the Word of 
 God, or Christ, in man (v. 38, xv. 4, 5 etc.), of man in Christ (vi. 56, 
 XV. 4, 5 etc.) or in Christ's Word (viii. 31), or in Christ's love (xv. 9, 10) ; 
 also the abiding of the Father in the Son (xiv. 10), and of the Son 
 in the love of the Father (xv. 10). It is also used, without respect to 
 locality, to denote the permanence of the "food" that "abideth unto 
 eternal life" (vi. 27), and of the "sin" of the proud (ix. 41). Jn, alone 
 of the Evangelists, in recording the descent of the Holy Spirit on Jesus, 
 says that (i. 32 — 3) " it abode on him." 
 
 [1707 <$] The predominance of the thought of "abiding" in the 
 writer's mind may be inferred from the fact that " abide " occurs in the 
 First Epistle of St John almost as many (23) times as in all the non- 
 Johannine Epistles taken together (25). 
 
 [1707^] In LXX, /AeVw freq. = D1p "stand upright," concerning an 
 ordinance that "stands," i.e. holds good, e.g. Prov. xix. 21, "The counsel 
 of the Lord — that shall sta7id (LXX ih rov axSava /xeV^i)," Is. xl. 8 " The 
 word of the Lord standeth (fievei) for ever," Deut. xix. 15 "at the mouth 
 of two witnesses... shall a matter stand (R.V. be established)," LXX 
 <rTr)(reTai. Mt. xviii. 16, merely alluding to Deut. xix. 15, has oTadji 
 
[1708] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Abiding-place^ 
 
 flOV^ 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 About (w. numbers 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 etc.) (I) 
 
 as 
 
 2 
 
 I or o 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 
 About (w. numbers 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 etc.) (2) (1670) 
 
 axrcl 
 
 O 
 
 I 
 
 7 
 
 o 
 
 Above, up 2 
 
 av(o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 Above, from above ^ 
 
 avcodev 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 5 
 
 Advocate, s. Paraclete 
 
 7rapa.KKr]Tos 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 4 
 
 Aenon* 
 
 Alva>v 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 Again ^ 
 
 TrdXiv 
 
 28 
 
 17 
 
 3 
 
 43 
 
 Age, s. Eternal 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Already, s. Novvr 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Always 
 
 7rdvTOT€ 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 7 
 
 Am, 16 
 
 elfii 
 
 4 
 
 14 
 
 i6 
 
 54 
 
 [1708] Ask (the Father) 7 
 
 ipatrdo) 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 6 
 
 '■'■made to stand" but Jn viii. 17, quoting it as "written," has ''is true." 
 In the same verse of Deut. "One witness shall not rise up (Dip**)" is 
 rendered by Jer. Targ. " The testimony of one witness shall not be valid" 
 and LXX renders it efipevet This illustrates the connexion in the Jewish 
 mind between "abiding" " standing fast" and "truth" 
 
 1 " Abiding-place." See Paradosis, 1393—7. 
 
 2 [1707^] "Above,"" up," means " heaven(ward) " except in Jn ii. 7 
 "filled them to the brim (ecoy aVo))." The only instance alleged of ewy 
 aVco is 2 Chr. xxvi. 8 "to the top," i.e. to the utmost. 
 
 3 [1707^] "Above," "from above." " Kvu>6ev in Mk xv. 38, Mt. xxvii. 51 
 is used of the veil of the temple "rent from top to bottom," in Jn xix. 23 
 of Christ's coat, or tunic, " woven from the top throughout," concerning 
 which the soldiers say "Let us not rend it." Elsewhere Jn (iii. 3, 7, 31) 
 uses it of the heavenly birth "from above" (comp. Jn xix. 11). In 
 Lk. i. 3 it means " from the source, or fountainhead." For the proof that 
 it does not mean " anew " in Jn, see 1903 foil. 
 
 ^ [1707/] " Aenon " is mentioned only in Jn iii. 23, " And John also 
 was baptizing in Aenon near to Salim, because there was much water 
 there." The locality of Aenon (as well as that of Salim) is disputed. 
 
 ^ [1707^] "Again" occurs in Lk., only vi. 43 (om. by many author.) 
 where, if genuine (but .-* TTAAl for TTAN), it would mean "on the other 
 hand"; xiii. 20 (D diff.) ; xxiii. 20 "But again Pilate..." (where the 
 parall. Mk xv. 12, and Jn xix. 4 also have " again "). 
 
 « "Am." See "I am" (1713). 
 
 7 [1708^] "Ask." Jn xiv. 16 " I will ask the Father," and so xvi. 26, 
 xvii. 9 {bis\ 15, 20, always in Christ's words, and in the ist person 
 (1704). 
 
 196 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1708] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Barley (adj.)^ 
 Bear, beget 2 
 Because (narr.)^ 
 Before (adv.) 
 Beget, s. Bear 
 
 KpiOivos 
 yew du) 
 
 OTl, 
 
 (to) TTpoTepov 
 y€Vvd(o 
 
 
 4 + [I] 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 5 
 3 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 4 
 9 
 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 18 
 26 
 
 3 
 18 
 
 Beginning (Chri.)* 
 Beginning (narr.)^ 
 Behold (vb.)6 
 Behold! See! Lo!^ 
 
 ^PXV 
 dpxh 
 6ecop€(o 
 'I8e 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 7 
 8 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 4 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 7 
 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 23 
 
 15 
 
 Bethany (beyond 
 Jordan)® 
 
 Brjdavia...Tr€pav 
 Tov 'lopddvov 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 1 "Barley," Jn vi. 9, 13. 
 
 2 [1708 ^] « Bear," " beget." The numbers above do not include the 
 use of yevvdo) (40 times) in Mt. i. 2 — 16. Both there and in Lk. i. 13, 57, 
 xxiii. 29, Jn xvi. 21, the vb is act. In Mt. i. 2 — 16 the act. means 
 "beget"; elsewhere it means "bring forth" (of the mother). In the 
 Synoptists it is never used spiritually, as it freq. is in Jn. 
 
 ^ [1708 c] " Because " occurs in Evangehstic statement (which alone 
 is here meant by "nam"), in Mt, only in ix. 36, xi. 20 and xiv. 5. 
 Mt. xi. 20 resembles Mk App. [xvi. 14] "reproached them because they 
 believed not." The numbers are taken from Bruder (1888). See also 
 1712 c. 
 
 ^ [1708^] "Beginning" (Chri.), occurs in Mk x. 6, Mt. xix. 4 con- 
 cerning the making of male and female "from the beginning id-K dpxqs)" 
 to which Mt. adds, as to divorce (Mt. xix. 8) att' dpxris 8e ov yiyovev ourcoy. 
 The other Synoptic instances are (Mk xiii. 8, Mt. xxiv. 8) " These things 
 are the beginning of travails {apx^] wdlvcov TavTo)'' and (Mk xiii. 19, 
 Mt. xxiv. 21) " from the beginning of creation (Mt. of the world)." 
 
 [1708 <?] Jn has viii. 44 "He was a murderer from the beginning 
 ((ztt' a.)," XV. 27 "because ye are with me from the beginning [dir d.)," 
 xvi. 4 "these things I told you not from the beginning (e^ d.)." Also 
 in reply to "Who art thou?" Jn has (viii. 25) eiTrei/ avTols [6] 'irjo-ovs Trjv 
 dpxrjv OTl Koi XaXS) vpTiv (txt interrog., marg. affirm.) (2154 — 6). 
 
 ^ [1708/] "Beginning" (narr.) occurs in Mk i. i " The beginning of 
 the Gospel...," Lk. i. 2 "those who were from the beginning eye- 
 witnesses...," comp. Jn i. i " In the beginning vfdis the word...." 
 
 ^ "Behold" (vb.). Used by Jn sometimes of unintelligent wonder 
 (1598). 
 
 7 " Behold ! " t'Se. Contrast " Behold ! " Ibov (1674). 
 
 8 [1708^] " Bethany beyond Jordan " is mentioned only in Jn i. 28 
 "These things were done in Bethany beyond Jordan, where John was 
 baptizing." Its locality is disputed, and there are v.r. Bethabarah, 
 Betharabah etc. See 610—16. 
 
[1709] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Bethesda^ 
 
 W.H. txt 
 
 BnOCadd, 
 
 
 
 
 
 " 
 
 marg. B7;^o-at8a 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 Break, destroy ^ 
 
 Xvci) 
 
 
 O 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 Brethren, the {i.e. the 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Church) (narr.)^ 
 
 Ol d8€\<f)0i 
 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 But* 
 
 dWd 
 
 
 43 
 
 36 
 
 36 
 
 10 1 
 
 [1709] Cana 
 
 Kavd 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 Catch, seize, take^ 
 
 TTia^Ci) 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 Cephas^ 
 
 Krjcpds 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 Choose (Chri.)^ 
 
 eKXeyofxai 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 5 
 
 1 [1708 /i] " Bethesda " is mentioned only in Jn v. 2 " Now there is in 
 Jerusalem by the sheep[gate] a pool which is called in Hebrew Bethesda 
 (v.r. Bethsaida, Bethzatha), having five porches." Other various readings 
 are Br)(add, BeX^e^a, Betzatha etc. Its locality is disputed, and so is the 
 interpretation of the " sheep[gate]," the ellipsis of which is said by 
 Westcott to be "(apparently) without parallel" (2216). 
 
 2 [1708/] "Break," " destroy," occurs in Mt. v. 19, Jn v. 18, vii. 23, 
 X. 35 oi breaking 2i "commandment," "the sabbath," "the law of Moses," 
 "the Scripture," Jn ii. 19 ^^ destroy this temple." These numbers do not 
 include Xva) = " loose," "unbind." 
 
 3 [1708/] " Brethren, the," i.e. the Church (narr.) : Jn xxi. 23 " This 
 saying therefore went forth among (eis) the brethren.^' Comp. Acts i. 15, 
 xiv. 2 etc. 
 
 ^ [1708 k'\ " But," oKKd^ mostly follows a negative : and Jn's habit of 
 stating things negatively and positively with a " but " appears early in his 
 Gospel, i. 8 oi'K...aXX' ii/a, i. 13 ovk i^ alixdroiv . . .dXiC €< deov (2055). 
 
 s " Catch." See 1721/ and 1723 b—c. 
 
 6 [1709 a] " Cephas," in Jn, only i. 42 " thou shalt be called Cephas 
 which is interpreted /*<?/r^j," i.e. a stone. Comp. Mt. xvi. 18 "thou art 
 Petrosi^ i.e. a stone. The naming is mentioned by the Synoptists thus, 
 Mk iii. 16 K. €7r€dr)K€V ovofia Ta> ^ifxcovi Tlerpov, Mt. x. 2 irpoiTos 2. 6 Xeyo- 
 ft,€vos IIcTpoSj Lk. vi. 14 2. ov k. Mvofiaaev U. See 1728/2- 
 
 ^ [1709 <5] "Choose" (Chri.) occurs, in Mk, only in xiii. 20 "the chosen 
 whom ke hath chosen^^ where Mt. has merely " the chosen." In Lk., 
 "choose" does not occur in the Lord's words except Lk. x. 42 "(Mary) 
 hath chosen the good part." In Jn it occurs almost always in the phrase 
 " I (Christ) have chosen," and in two instances with an allusion to Judas 
 Iscariot in the context (vi. 70 '•''Have not I chosen you the twelve, 
 and one of you is a devil," xiii. 18 "I know whom / have chosen^ but 
 that the Scripture may be fulfilled, ' He that eateth my bread lifted up 
 his heel against me ' "). 
 
 198 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1710] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Circumcision^ 
 
 rrepiTOixr) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 Clay2 
 
 irrjXos 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 Comforter, s. Para- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 clete 
 
 irapdK\r]TOS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 Cry (appl. to Christ) ^ 
 
 ' <pdC<o 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Cry aloud ^ 
 
 Kpavyd^Qi 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 Cut off 4 (1671^) 
 
 aTroKonTO) 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 [1710] Darkness (i)5 
 
 a-KOTLU 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 8 
 
 Darkness (2)^ 
 
 (T KOTOS 
 
 I 
 
 6 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 Death (lit.)« 
 
 6dvaT0S 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 Death (metaph.)^ 
 
 ddvaros 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 1 [1709^] "Circumcision." The verb TrepiTeixva occurs in Jn (i), 
 Lk. (2). In Lk. (i. 59, ii. 21) the verb is used with reference to the 
 circumcision of the child Jesus ; in Jn (vii. 22 — 3) the verb and the noun 
 are used to shew that, if circumcision is allowed on the sabbath, Christ's 
 act of heahng must be allowable. 
 
 2 "Clay." Jn ix. 6 — 15, of "making clay" in the heahng of the man 
 born blind. 
 
 3 "Cry," "cry aloud," Kpd^o and KpavydCo, see 1752 <2 — f. 
 
 * [1709 d] " Cut off." 'Attokottto) — a word freq. connected with mutila- 
 tion — is used by Jn (xviii. 10, 26), to describe the cutting off of the ear 
 of Malchus where all the Synoptists have d(\)aipi<o. Comp. Gal. v. 12. 
 See also 1734 <5. 
 
 ^ [1710 «] "Darkness." Moreover, in the Epistle, Jn uses (5) a-KOTia 
 and (i) a KOTOS, which is also in Jn iii. 19 "they loved rather t/ie darkness 
 (to aKOTos) tha7i the light (jj to ^cos)," where perhaps the neuter form is 
 preferred as supplying a more complete antithesis of sound illustrating 
 the antithesis of sense. 
 
 [1710 d] ^KOTia and o-kotos are always metaphorical in the Synoptists 
 except as to the darkness during the crucifixion (Mk xv. 33, Mt. xxvii. 45, 
 Lk. xxiii. 44). In Jn, aKOTia is metaph. except in vi. 17, xx. i, where 
 however it probably has a metaphorical suggestion, as "night" has in 
 Jn xiii. 30 "He [Judas Iscariot] went out straightway. Now it was 
 night." 
 
 6 [1710 r] "Death." The six instances of "death" (lit.) in Mk and 
 Mt. are all in verbatim agreement. Lk. (ix. 27) " shall surely not taste 
 death " agrees with only one of them (Mk ix. i, Mt. xvi. 28) uttered before 
 the Transfiguration. The only Synoptic metaph. instances are in Mt. iv. 
 16, Lk. i. 79, not parall., but both quoting Is. ix. 2 "the shadow of 
 death." 
 
 [1710^] Jn has B. (lit.) (xi. 4, 13) about Lazarus, (xii. 33, xviii. 32) 
 about the Crucifixion ("by what death he was to die"), and (xxi. 19) about 
 
 199 
 
[1710] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Denarii (plur.) (apart 
 from parables) 1(1671 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c) brjvdpia 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 Didymus^ 
 
 Aibvfios 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 Die3 
 
 a.7rodvr](rKa> 
 
 8 
 
 5 
 
 lO 
 
 28 
 
 Disobey 
 
 an € idea) 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 Draw (water, wine 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 etc.) 
 
 avrXeo) 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 4 
 
 Draw*, drag 
 
 €XKVa> 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 S 
 
 Eat^ 
 
 rptoyo) 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 5 
 
 Ephraim^ 
 
 'E(f>paLfi 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 ' 
 
 Peter's martyrdom. In v. 24, viii. 51 Jesus uses 6. metaphorically, but in 
 viii. 52, whereas Jesus had said " He shall not behold death^^ spiritually, 
 the Jews misquote it as "he shall not taste of death^'' and take it 
 literally. 
 
 1 [1710^] "Denarii." Mk vi. 37 "Are we to buy bread for two 
 hundred denariiV^ xiv. 5 " sold for above three hundred denarii^^ Jn vi. 7 
 "bread of [the price of] two hundred denarii" xii. 5 "sold for three 
 hundred denarii" I hope to discuss these passages in a future treatise. 
 
 2 "Didymus," applied (Jn xi. 16, xx. 24, xxi. 2) to Thomas, whom Jn 
 mentions 7 times, and each Synoptist once. 
 
 ^ [1710/] " Die," a.7ro6vr](TKO), is freq. in Jn in connexion with Lazarus, 
 and with Christ's " dying for the people " or " dying " on the Cross. 
 It is metaphorical in vi. 50 /xj) aTrodavrf, xi. 26 ov fir) diroOdvrj, but perh. 
 nowhere else. TeXeuraco, "die," occurs in Mk (2), Mt. (4), Lk. (i), Jn (i). 
 
 4 [1710^] "Draw." Metaph. in Jn vi. 44 "Except the Father dram 
 him," xii. 32 " I will draw all men unto myself," lit. in xviii. 10 (a sword), 
 xxi. 6, 1 1 (a net). Epictetus says that man (i. 2. 4) " is drawn (eXKOfievov) 
 to nothing so much as to the (1700) Good Logos," and (ii. 20. 15) 
 " nature " is " the strongest of all things in man, drawing him to her will 
 {^ovXrjiia) despite his reluctance and bewailings." He uses the Johannine 
 word €\<va) to mean "drag " (iii. 22. 3) or to describe the seduction of vain 
 imagination (ii. 18. 23). Acts (xvi. 19, xxi. 30) uses the two words to mean 
 " dragging " a person violently away. Jn uses IKkvo) in both meanings. 
 
 ^ [1710 h] " Eat," rpebyo). From the numerous instances of this word 
 in Steph. it would seem to be used in ordinary Greek exclusively to mean 
 eating vegetables, fruit, sweetmeats etc., never flesh. In Mt. xxi v. 38, 
 where it perhaps means "eating sweetmeats or delicacies," the parall. Lk. 
 xvii. 27 has eV^io). Jn has (vi. 54 — 8) " He that eatetk my flesh {dis\" "he 
 that eatetk me," "he that eateth this bread." Jn xiii. 18 uses it in quoting 
 Ps. xii. 9 " He that eateth my bread," where the LXX (which never uses 
 rpco-yo)) has ea-diayv. See also " eat " eadto) (1680). 
 
 " Ephraim." Jn xi. 54 " a city called Ephraim." 
 
 200 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1711] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Eternal, everlasting ^ 
 
 alcovios 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 4 
 
 17 
 
 [1711] Father (divine) 2 
 
 iravqp 
 
 4 
 
 44 
 
 16 
 
 120 
 
 1 [1710/] "Eternal," alavtos, in Jn is always used of "life," never of 
 "punishment," "fire" etc. In the Synoptists, it is used with ((orj (8), 
 TTvp (2), KoXaa-is (l), dfxdpTT]fia (l), aKr^vai (l). Lk., like Jn, always uses it 
 of good, never of evil. 
 
 2 [1711 a] " Father" (divine). Mk viii. 38 " When he shall come in the 
 glory of his Father" xi. 25 " that your Father who is in the heavens may 
 forgive you," xiii. 32 "...not even the angels of heaven, nor yet the Son, 
 
 but only the Father^"* xiv. 36 "Abba, Father " Apart from doctrine 
 
 about the Last Day (where the Father is mentioned in connexion with the 
 Son expressed or implied) Mk nowhere mentions God as the Father of 
 me7i exc. in the warning about forgiveness (xi. 25) parall. to Mt. vi. 14 — 15 
 but to nothing in Lk. But the single passage in Mk, containing an 
 apparent reference to the Lord's Prayer, confirms the belief (based on 
 Mt.-Lk.) that a large part of Christ's doctrine must have referred to "the 
 Father " by name. 
 
 [1711 b'\ Epictetus says (i. 3. i foil.) " If one were thrilled as he should 
 be with the thought that we [men] have all been uniquely (TrpoT^you/ieVcoy) 
 brought into being (yeyoi/a/xfv) by God, and that God is the Father of 
 both men and gods, I think we should be far from all ignoble and servile 
 notions about ourselves" : and again (z<^.), "If Caesar were to adopt you 
 as a son, there would be no enduring your arrogance. If you know that 
 you are son of Zeus, will you not be lifted up {eTrapdrjarr]) by that ? But 
 as it is, we do no such thing." We turn aside, he says, from the divine 
 sonship, which we have in virtue of "the purpose and the Logos" within 
 us, and we prefer our kinship (which we have in virtue of our body) with 
 the brute beasts. A man calls himself Athenian or Corinthian, (i. 9. 4 — 6) 
 "Why should he not also call himself 'Cosmian'?" (as being citizen of 
 the Cosmos) " Why not son of God ? " 
 
 [1711 c] John would agree with a great deal of this, but not (not, at 
 least, without a caveat) that a man should be " lifted up " by the thought 
 of being "son of God." His Prologue, indeed, distinguishes those 
 "begotten of God" from those begotten of "blood" or of "the will of 
 flesh," and describes the former class as receiving " authority to become 
 children of God" — a phrase that recalls the "adoption by Caesar'^ 
 above mentioned. But it is nothing to be "lifted up" about, if "to be 
 lifted up" means "to be proud." John, it is true, represents the Son 
 of God as being " lifted up (vyJAovadai),^' but it is the " lifting up " on the 
 Cross. He also has "authority," but it is "authority to lay down life that 
 he may take it again." The silence of Mk and the teaching of Epictetus 
 may have influenced John in the development of the Christian doctrine of 
 the divine Fatherhood. 
 
 201 
 
[1712] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Father (human) ^ 
 
 irarrjp 
 
 14 
 
 19 
 
 37 
 
 12 
 
 Feast 2 
 
 eOpTT] 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 17 
 
 Fire (of coals) ^ 
 
 dp Spa Kid 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 [1712] Fish* 
 
 oyJAdpiov 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 5 
 
 * [1711 d] " Father " (human). Jn viii. 44 also uses irarrip thrice 
 concerning the devil as the father of liars etc., thus making 1 5 instances 
 where it is not applied to God. (As to insertion in this list, see 1670 — 1.) 
 
 2 [1711 e] " Feast." Mk xiv. 2, Mt. xxvi. 5 Mj) ev rfj eoprr,, Mk xv. 6, 
 Mt. xxvii. 15 Kara Se eoprrjv etfo^ft.... Lk. (besides ii. 41, 42) has xxii. I 
 TJyyiCfv der) ioprr) rav d^vp,a>v. Jn mentions several feasts for which Jesus 
 goes up to Jerusalem. 
 
 3 [1711/] "Fire (of coals)." 'AvOpaKid in Jn xviii. 18 is the "fire of 
 coals" in the High Priest's hall, Mk xiv. 54 <^co$-, Lk. xxii. 55 — 6 rrvp... 
 (f)ois, Mt. xxvi. 58 om. (180 — 5). Luke's astonishing phrase nvp irepidiTTa) 
 is unlike any use of irepidirro) in Steph. except Phalar. Epist. v. p. 24 
 (L. S. 28) eve^i^daafifv avrov k. iT€pir]y\rafjL(v, "we put him in and kindled [a 
 fire] round [him } round the man enclosed in the bull] " where Steph. 
 adds "recte, ut videtur, Lennep. nvp r)^\rap,€v" 
 
 [1711^] Ephrem (p. 237) says " Near the coal fire he denied, near the 
 coal fire he confessed," which suggests that some may have regarded the 
 fire in Peter's Denial as a symbol of a " fiery trial " of temptation, and 
 later on, of purification (xxi. 9) "they see z. Jire of coals laid ready... and 
 a loaf." The phrase " cake baken on the coals'''' occurs in O.T. only in the 
 story of Elijah's being strengthened (i K. xix. 6) for the journey to Horeb 
 in which may be seen a parallelism to the Eucharistic " breakfast" in Jn 
 whereby the Apostles are strengthened to preach the Gospel to the world. 
 The Heb. word used for "coal" in i K. xix. 6 occurs nowhere else 
 (Gesen. 954 <2) in O.T. except in Is. vi. 6, where the Prophet Isaiah is 
 purified by a " coal " from the altar for his prophetic task. Ephrem's 
 tradition, " he confessed near a coal fire," is curiously like Philo's tradition 
 that the avOpa^, i.e. ^^coal" or ^^ carduncle" represents Judah as being 
 (i. 60) "a confessing (e^ofioXoyrjriKos) disposition," which "is inflamed in 
 the eucharist of {i.e. thanksgiving to) God (ireTrvpaTai ev evxapi(TTia Beov)." 
 Not improbably John had in view traditions of this kind. 
 
 [1711 /i] It may be worth noting that (i) Aquila has ylrrj(f)os i.e. stone, 
 or pebble, for "coal" in Is. vi. 6, (2) LXX freq. has avBpa^, "coal," to 
 represent a precious stone (Gen. ii. 12, Ex. xxviii. 18, xxxvi. 18, Ezek. x. 
 9 etc.), (3) Rev. ii. 17 combines "manna" with "white slone {y^rrj^ov 
 XfVKrjv)" as a gift to "him that overcometh" — an expression that has 
 perplexed commentators and perhaps remains to be explained (2409 a). 
 
 4 [1712 «] "Fish." Jn uses IxBvs to mean "fish" (xxi. 6, 8, 11), 
 apparently restricting oylrdpiov to mean "fish" for eating (1736^). 
 
 202 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1712] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Flesh 1 
 
 adp^ 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 13 
 
 For (conj.) (narr.)^ 
 
 yap 
 
 c. 33 
 
 12 
 
 11 
 
 c. 30 
 
 For ever 3 
 
 els Tov ala>va ) 
 els Tovs alwvas ) 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 12 
 
 Free (adj.)* 
 
 iXfvdepos 
 
 O 
 
 I 
 
 O 
 
 2 
 
 Free (vb.) 
 
 iXevBepoco 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 Freely, openly^ 
 
 (ev) Trapprjala 
 
 ' 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 9 
 
 1 [1712^] "Flesh." Of Jn's 13 instances, 7 are from vi. 51—63 "my 
 flesh " etc. 
 
 2 [1712 c] " For " (narr. here meaning (1672*) Evangelistic statement). 
 This is more characteristic of Mk than of Jn ; but it is inserted for 
 comparison with "because" (narr.) (1708). In Jn the question is 
 complicated by the great difference of opinion among commentators as to 
 passages that are and that are not. Evangelistic comment (2066). 
 
 3 [1712 rt^] "For ever." In Mk iii. 29, xi. 14 (parall. Mt. xxi. 19) "for 
 ever " is connected with a negative and with condemnation (" hath not 
 forgiveness /or ever,^' "let none eat fruit from thee /or ever") ; in Lk. i. 
 33, 55 with an affirmative and with promise ("shall reign.. /or ever " "to 
 Abraham and his seed /or ever"). In Jn iv. 14 "shall not thirst y^r ever," 
 vi. 51 "shall live /or ever," and sim. vi. 58, viii. 51, 52, x. 28, xi. 26, 
 xiv. 16, it is connected, positively or negatively, with promise, like alavios 
 (1710 i) in Jn. See also 1672 a. On Jn viii. 35, see 2263 e. 
 
 * [1712^] "Free" (adj.). Mt. xvii. 26 "Then are the sons /ree,'' 
 i.e. free from paying tribute. This occurs in a difficult context describing 
 the finding of the stater in the fish's mouth. Origen {ad loc.) says, "They 
 are free who abide in the truth (Huet ixeivavres rfj aXrjOfia Pins. eV, or leg. 
 efiixelvavres) of the Word of God and thereby know the truth that they 
 may be also freed by (ott' ? leg. vtt') it." Origen had in mind Jn viii. 32 — 6 
 "If ye abide in my word. ..ye shall know the truth and the tru^k shall 
 make you /ree.... 'Everyone th.a.t committeth sin is the bondservant [of sin]. 
 And the bondservant abideth not in the house for ever ; the son abideth 
 for ever. If therefore the Son shall make you free ye shall be /ree 
 indeed." The connexion between a Gospel of sonship and a Gospel 
 oi /reedont is manifest : and it is recognised abundantly in the Pauline 
 Epistles. But the Triple Tradition says practically nothing about "■/ree- 
 doml^ and very little, directly, about '■'' S07iship^^ though Matthew and 
 Luke frequently imply it in doctrine about the Father in Heaven. It 
 remained for the Fourth Gospel to give prominence to the spiritual 
 doctrine latent in the tradition peculiar to Matthew, " The sons are free." 
 
 ^ [1712/] " Freely, openly." Mk viii. 32 " He was speaking the word 
 openly {irappricria)." Jn uses it twice in Christ's words : xviii. 20 " I have 
 spoken openly to the world," xvi. 25 (R.V.) " I shall tell yon plainly of the 
 Father." See 1744 (xi) a and 1917 (i). 
 
 203 
 
[1713] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Gabbatha 
 
 Ta^^add 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 Girdi 
 
 bia^oivvvjii, 
 
 ^(avvvjxi 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 5 
 
 Glorify2 
 
 bo^dCoi 
 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 9 
 
 21 
 
 Glory3 
 
 do^a 
 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 13 
 
 i8 
 
 [1713] Go (metaph.)* 
 
 virdyo) 
 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 c. i8 
 
 Greeks^ 
 
 "EWrjves 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 1 [1712^] " Gird," in Jn, is always literal, of the Lord or Peter xiii. 4, 
 5, xxi. 7, 18 {6zs). Uepi^oivvvfii (not in Mk-Mt.) occurs thrice in Lk. xii. 
 35) 37) xvii. 8, alw. metaphor or parable. 
 
 2 [1712 /i] " Glorify," in the Synoptists, is mostly applied to men 
 ''''glorifying God" because of miracles. In Jn, it is used concerning the 
 glorifying of the Father by the Son, and the glorifying of the Son by the 
 Father, but most freq. of the Son's being '''' glorified^"^ with reference to the 
 Crucifixion and its sequel. Comp. Heb. ii. 9. Only once is it used in 
 Jn concerning a man glorifying God (xxi. 19) " signifying by what death 
 he {i.e. Peter) should glorify God." 
 
 3 [1712/] "Glory." Mk viii. 38 "when he shall come iti the glory of 
 his Father ^^ parall. Mt. xvi. 27 sim., but parall. Lk. ix. 26 "/« his glory and 
 that of the Father" ; Mk x. 37 "that we may sit in thy glory ^^ parall. Mt. 
 XX. 21 "that these may s\\....in thy kingdom''^ (Lk. om.) ; Mk xiii. 26 "the 
 Son of man coming in (Mt. on the) clouds (Lk. cloud) with power a?td 
 great glory ^^ (parall. Mt. xxiv. 30, Lk. xxi. 27). 
 
 [1712y] These three passages speak of the "glory" of the Son as 
 future. Jn i. 14, ii. 11 speak of it as manifested by the Son in the past 
 (" we beheld his ^/(9ry," "manifested ^ns glory" at Cana) : xi. 40 (comp. 
 xi. 4) " thou shalt see the glory of God" means apparently " thou shall see 
 God's glory manifested in the raising of Lazarus"; xii. 41 says that 
 Isaiah "saw his \i.e. Christ's] glory" : xvii. 5, 22, 24 speak of "glory" 
 (apparently that of the divine unity, implying the devotion of the Son and 
 the love of the Father) as possessed by the Son " before the world was," 
 and as already " given " to the disciples by the Son ; at the same time the 
 Son prays " that they may be beholding my glory, which thou hast given 
 to me, because thou lovedst me from the foundation of the world." 
 
 * [1713 a] " Go " (metaph.). Mk xiv. 21, Mt. xxvi. 24 " the Son of man 
 goeth {yrrdyei)," where parall. Lk. xxii. 22 has Tropeverai. On the difference 
 between the two verbs, see 1652 — 64. 
 
 5 [1713^] "Greeks." Jn vii. 35 "Will he go to the Dispersion of 
 (2046) the Greeks, and teach the Greeks?" In this specimen of 
 Johannine irony the Jews unconsciously predict what seems to them 
 absurd. The same thing is predicted in action subsequently (Jn xii. 20) 
 "Now there were certain Greeks of them that came up...." Mk vii. 26 
 alone has the fem. 'EWrjvis where the parall. Mt. xv. 22 omits it. 
 
 204 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1713] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Greek, in^ 
 
 'EXXj; i/io-rt 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 Grief, sorrow ^ 
 
 \v7rr] 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 Groan, murmur^ 
 
 efi^pifidofiai 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 Hate^ 
 
 ficaeo) 
 
 I 
 
 5 
 
 7 
 
 12 
 
 Hebrew, in^ 
 
 'E^pa'i(TTL 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 5 
 
 I (nom.) (1704) 
 
 iyca (incl. Kayoi) 
 
 i6 
 
 37 
 
 25 
 
 155 
 
 I-am (ist pers.) 
 
 dfii 
 
 4 
 
 14 
 
 i6 
 
 54 
 
 I am [he] (Chri.)^ 
 
 iya> eljjii 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 i(?) 
 
 9 
 
 Interpret (1728 4) 
 
 epixrjv€V(0 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 1 [1713 c] " In Greek." Jn xix. 20 " It was written in Hebrew and in 
 Roman [i.e. in Latin] and z« Gj-eekP 
 
 2 [1713^] "Grief," "sorrow." Jn xvi. 6, 20 — 22 describes Jesus as 
 mentioning on the last night the " sorrow " of the disciples that is 
 described by Luke as occurring on the last night (Lk. xxii. 45) " He 
 found them sleeping for sorrow." 
 
 3 [1713^] "Groan," "murmur." 'En^pi[jidofiai in Jn xi. 33, 38 is prob. 
 used, in part, allusively to explain the difficulty caused by its use in 
 Mk i. 43, Mt. ix. 30, where it might seem to some to represent Jesus 
 as "roaring against" those whom He healed. See 1811 a — c. 
 
 4 [1713/] "Hate." Mk xiii. 13 "Ye shall be /lated by all for my 
 name's sake," parall. to Mt. xxiv. 9 (and x. 22), Lk xxi. 17. Lk. xiv. 26 
 makes " hating one's own life " a condition for discipleship, an expression 
 not found in Mk or Mt. Jn adopts it, with a qualification (xii. 25) " He 
 that hateth his life in this world" (1450). 
 
 5 [1713^] " In Hebrew," in Jn, thrice of names, v. 2 (?) " Bethzatha," 
 xix. 13 "Gabbatha," xix. 17 "Golgotha": also xix. 20 "written in 
 Hebrew, in Roman, in Greek," and xx. 16 "She saith to him in Hebrew., 
 Rabboni." 
 
 6 [1713 >^] "I (emph.) am [he]" (Chri.). Mt.'s single instance is in 
 the Walking on the Waters (Mt. xiv. 27) where it is also inserted by 
 Mk (vi. 50) and Jn (vi. 20). (Lk. omits the whole narrative.) 
 
 [1713/] Mk's second instance is in the Trial, in answer to the 
 question "Art thou the Christ?" where Mk xiv. 62 has ^^ I am" (but 
 Mt. xxvi. 64 " Thou saidst it," Lk. xxii. 70 " Ye say that / am (on eya> 
 dpi)" not included above as not being the utterance of Christ in His 
 own person). 
 
 [1713y] Lk. places a form of the phrase, with avros, after the Resurrec- 
 tion, xxiv. 39 " See my hands and my feet that it is I myself {on iyoa elpi 
 
 avTOS) 
 
 [1713 /&] In Jn, besides the utterance in the Walking on the Waters 
 (vi. 20), the phrase is used, with no predicate expressed, in viii. 24 
 
 205 
 
[1714] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Is 
 
 eoTt 
 
 
 C.75 
 
 C. I20 
 
 c. 100 
 
 c. 170 
 
 Israelite 1 
 
 'la-parjXfiTTjs 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 Jesus 
 
 Irjaovs 
 
 
 C. 82 
 
 c. 150 
 
 c. 87 
 
 c. 237 
 
 Jew, a^ 
 
 ^lovbalos 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Jews (plur.)3 
 
 *lov8dloi 
 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 68 
 
 [1714] John (Peter's 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 father)* 
 
 *la>dvr}s 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 "Jordan, beyond "s 
 
 Trepav tov 'lop 8 
 
 dvov 2 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 "Judas,notIscariot"6 
 
 'lovdas, ovx 6 
 
 'lo-- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Kapt6>Tr)s 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 " Except ye believe that / am [he] " where R.V. marg. gives " I am " 
 absolutely, and so in viii. 28. The meaning in these and other instances 
 needs detailed comment (2220 foil.). The command Deut. xxxii. 39 Ibere 
 iSere on eroa eiMi "See, see, that i am," is interpreted by Philo (i. 258) 
 as a command to " behold the existence {virap^iv) of God." 
 
 1 "Israelite," Jn i. 47 "an Israelite indeed in whom is no guile." 
 See 1702 «. 
 
 2 [1713/] "Jew, a," occurs in Jn iii. 25 "questioning... with a Jew'*'* 
 (txt. perh. corrupt), sarcastically in iv. 9 " How is it that thou being a 
 Jew askest drink of me?" and contemptuously in xviii. 35 "Am I 
 a Jew ? " 
 
 3 [1713 ;;?] "Jews" (plur.). This includes "king of the Jews,'' Mk (5), 
 Mt. (4), Lk. (3), Jn (6). Apart from this title, the Synoptists use the 
 word only as follows, Mk vii. 3 " The Pharisees and all the Jews,'* 
 Mt. xxviii. 1 5 " This saying was spread abroad among the Jews" 
 Lk. vii. 3 "He [i.e. the centurion] sent unto him [i.e. Jesus] elders of 
 the Jews," xxiii. 51 "Arimathaea, a city of the Jews." On Jn's use of 
 " Jews," mostly in a bad sense, see 1702. On Jn iv. 22 see 1647 — 8 : 
 xviii. 36 (Chri.) may mean " So far from my being 'king of the Jews' in 
 your sense, my servants would contend against '' the Jews'" repeating 
 Pilate's phrase. 
 
 4 [1714^] "John" (Peter's father). Jn i. 42 "Thou art Simon, the 
 son oi John: thou shalt be called Cephas"; xxi. (thrice) 15, 16, 17 
 " Simon [son] oijohn, lovest thou me ? " 
 
 ^ [1714 (^] "Beyond Jordan" occurs in Mt. iv. 15 quoting Is. viii. 23 
 and apparently meaning "west of the Jordan." It was an ambiguous 
 term. Lk. never uses it. The Synoptists and Jn apparently use it 
 always (except in Mt. iv. 15) to mean "east of the Jordan." See 1813 b. 
 
 6 [1714 <:] "Judas, not Iscariot" is unique in Jn xiv. 22. But the 
 name Judas, apart from genealogies and not applied to Iscariot, occurs 
 in Mk vi. 3 "the brother of James and of Joses and o{ Judas" Mt. xiii. 55 
 "his brothers James...and /«^«j," Lk. vi. 16 ''^ Judas of James" (in the 
 list of the Twelve). This last is parall. to Mk iii. 18 " Thaddaeus," 
 
 206 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1714] 
 
 English Greek Mk Mt. Lk. Jn 
 
 Judge (vb.)^ Kpiva o 6 6 19 
 
 Mt. X. 3 ''Tkaddaeus" (Tisch. " Leddaeus"). If this "Judas" was 
 variously characterized in early times, Jn's characterization would have 
 the advantage of not committing the writer to one tradition against 
 another. 
 
 1 [1714^] "Judge, to." This verb will be repeated in the Jn-Mt.-Lk. 
 Vocab. (1859 a) : but it is too characteristic of the Fourth Gospel not 
 to be given here although it does not belong to the Synoptic Tradition — 
 which, strangely enough, contains nothing about "judging." Even the 
 Double Tradition contains no precept about judging justly ; and the 
 negative precept in it (Mt. vii. i, Lk. vi. 37) ^'' Judge not that ye may 
 not (Lk. and ye shall not) be judged''^ might be taken as prohibiting 
 all judgment, even judging righteously. 
 
 [1714 e'\ Mt. V. 25 " (R.V.) Agree with i^lcrOi evvomv) thine adversary," 
 where the parall. Lk. xii. 58 has 86s epyaatav dTrrjXXdx^ai [ott'] avrovj 
 can hardly be intended to command "agreement" with unjust, ex- 
 tortionate, or oppressive claims, without any regard to circumstances. 
 Moreover, Steph. and Thayer give no instance of (vvoelv, "agree with." 
 Its regular meaning is " be well disposed to," " have good will to " : and 
 it is possible to entertain this feeling even for the unjust, and even while 
 one is defending one's just claims against the unjust. Is "the adversary" 
 Satan, or an avenging angel, or a personification of the prayer of the 
 injured person ? It is hard to say. Luke puts before the difficult 
 passage the words (xii. 57) "But why, even of yourselves, yz/^^ ye not 
 that which is righteous?" That is intelligible and fair. But it does not 
 explain how we are justified in "agreeing with" an " adversary " under 
 all circumstances. Moreover Matthew omits this fair and intelligible 
 precept. The whole is very obscure. 
 
 [1714/] John accumulates passages to shew that the divine judgment 
 consists (in one sense) in 72^/ judging (viii. 15 "I judge /lo man ") but 
 in making the guilty judge thernselves through the conviction of the 
 Logos within their hearts, so that the Son really does ^''judge^^ in that 
 sense (viii. 16 "And yet, if I Judge, my judgment is true"). The Son 
 came, "not to judge" but to "save," and to bring "light." Yet the 
 rejection of the light causes "judgment," by the laws of spiritual Nature, 
 to fall on those who reject it. At the same time John records an appeal 
 to the Jews (resembling Lk. xii. 57 above quoted) for "justice" in the 
 Gentile sense of the term, conformity with the moral, as distinct from the 
 Mosaic Law (Jn vii. 24 " Judge not according to appearance, but Judge 
 righteous Jtidgment "). See also 1859 a. 
 
 [1714^] The Epistle to the Romans is profuse in condemnations of 
 ^^Judging" (Rom. ii. 1—27, xiv. 3 — 22) and the First Epistle to the 
 
 A. V. 207 15 
 
[1715] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Keep, watch 1 
 
 Tqpioi 
 
 I 
 
 6 
 
 o 
 
 i8 
 
 [1715] Know (1)2 
 
 olba 
 
 22 
 
 25 
 
 24 
 
 85 
 
 Know (2)2 
 
 yLvd)(rK(o 
 
 13 
 
 20 
 
 28 
 
 56 
 
 Last day, in the^ 
 
 (ev) rfi etrxarr] rjfxipa O 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 7 
 
 " Law, your " "^ 
 
 TOP VOfXOV VpOiV 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 Lay down one's life^ 
 
 TiBr]fii y^vx^v 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 8 
 
 Corinthians says (iv. 5) ^'- Judge nothing before the time," apparently 
 looking forward to the Day of Judgment. But the Apostle himself goes 
 on to say of a certain offender {ib. v. 3) " I have already judged him 
 that hath thus wrought this thing." In proportion as the expectation 
 of an immediate Day of final Judgment diminished, it would be necessary 
 to bring out the spiritual meaning of Christ's doctrine about not "judging," 
 and to shew that the old Greek and Hebrew rules about "judging 
 justly" were to be fulfilled, not supplanted, by the New Law of love. 
 
 1 [1714/;] "Keep." Trjpioa, ^'' keep^' (metaphorically) a commandment 
 etc., occurs in Mt. xix. 17, xxiii. 3, and in Jn viii. 51, 52, 55, xiv. 15 etc. 
 In Mk vii. 9, Iva rfjv napadoo-iv vpa>v Trjprja-rjTe (but D, SS etc. have 
 Krrrja-rjTe) is parall. to Mt. xv. 3 8ia rrjv it. vp5>v. See 1816. 
 
 2 "Know." On the distinction between oi8a "know" and yivwo-Koi 
 *' come to know," " recognise " see 1621 — 9. 
 
 3 [1715 a] "Last day." Jn does not use eaxaros except in this phrase ; 
 LXX has " last of the days." For Synoptic ea-xaros see 1685. 
 
 •* [1715^] "Law, your." Jn viii. 17 ^' In your law it is written...." 
 x. 34 "Is it not written in your law..?.^'' No other instance is given 
 by Westcott, and probably none could be given, of any prophet or 
 teacher, Hebrew or Jewish, speaking of the Law of Moses to his 
 countrymen as ^^your law." Theoretically it could be justified as mean- 
 ing "the Law that you yourselves recognise as given to you and as 
 binding on you." But, if our Lord used the phrase thus, why is it not 
 found in any of the Synoptists ? The natural conclusion is that the 
 Fourth Gospel anticipates the phraseology of a later date when Christians 
 had separated themselves from the Law so that they spoke of it to Jews 
 as '■'■ yours r In Pilate, of course, this is natural, and it implies contempt 
 (Jn xviii. 31) "Judge him according to your lawT 
 
 [1715^] A similar anachronism is to be found in Christ's words to 
 the Disciples, (Jn xv. 25) "That the word might be fulfilled which is 
 written in their law., ' They hated me without a cause.' " 
 
 ^ [1715^] " Lay down one's life." Jn x. 11, 15, 17, 18 {bis\ xiii. y], 38, 
 xv. 13. The phrase is used 7 times by our Lord, including one instance 
 where he says (xiii. 38) rr]v yj/. a-ov vrrep epov Srjo-eis ; in answer to Peter's 
 protest (xiii. 37) rrjv yjr. pov VTrep aov dr](r<o (1336). 
 
 208 
 
English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Lazarus ^ 
 
 Ad^apos 
 
 Life (spiritual) 
 
 M 
 
 Life (physical) 2 
 
 M 
 
 Life eternal 
 
 ^corj alwvios 
 
 Light3 
 
 (fycos 
 
 [1716] Linen cloth* 
 
 odoviov 
 
 Little, a (adv.)^ 
 
 /JLlKpOV 
 
 Live, cause to. 
 
 
 quicken^ 
 
 ^(BOTTOteO) 
 
 FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1716] 
 
 Mk Mt. Lk. Jn 
 
 o 4 II 
 4 7 4 36 
 0010 
 
 2 3 3 17 
 
 1 7 7 22 
 o o [i] 4 
 2209 
 
 1 [1715^] "Lazarus," in Lk., is the name of the beggar in the story 
 of Dives and Lazarus ; in Jn it is the name of the brother of Martha 
 and Mary (1702^). 
 
 2 [1715/] " Life (physical)." Lk. xvi. 25 " Thou receivedst to the full 
 thy good things during thy /z/k (eV rrj (afj o-ov)." Bios in Mk xii. 44 
 (Lk. xxi. 4) means the widow's 'Hiving^'' and sim. in Lk. xv. 12, 30, 
 comp. Lk. viii. 14 ("the pleasures of life (r. ^iov)"). Mt. and Jn nowhere 
 use /3ioy. 
 
 3 [1715^] "Light." Mk xiv. 54 "Warming himself near the /igk^ 
 [of the fire]," and sim. Lk. xxii. 56 " seated near the light^^ see 180 — 5. 
 Where Mt. v. 14 — 16 has "ye are the light^^ and "let your light shine," 
 there intervenes a precept (v. 15) about the ^'- lamp^'' Xvxyos^ and the 
 parall. Mk (iv. 21) mentions only "Z^;;?/." Mk never uses "light" 
 metaphorically. Lk. xvi. 8 in the Parable of the Unjust Steward, peculiar 
 to himself, speaks of ^^ sons of light, ^^ and so do Jn xii. 36 and i Thess. v. 5. 
 Comp. Eph. V. 8 "Walk as children of light:' On "light of the world," 
 see 1748. 
 
 * [1716 rt;] "Linen cloth." 'OBovlov occurs in Lk. xxiv. 12 in a doubly 
 bracketed passage parall. to Jn xx. 5. It means "linen bandage." 
 Mk XV. 46, Mt. xxvii. 59, Lk. xxiii. 53, in their parall. to Jn xix. 40 have 
 '■'• linen (aivdova)" ; but Mt.-Lk. (520—1) deviate in the context from Mk, 
 and prob. Jn is emphasizing Mk's tradition by insisting that the body of 
 our Lord, when buried, was not only " swathed in linen " but " bound 
 fast with linen bandages." 
 
 5 [1716 <^] "Little, a" (adv.). In Mk-Mt., only in the narrative of 
 Gethsemane, Mk xiv. 35, Mt. xxvi. 39 trpoekOoiv yuKpov, and in Peter's 
 Denial, Mk xiv. 70, Mt. xxvi. 73 yLera fxiKpov. In Jn, fxiKpov is always 
 prophetic, xiii. 33, xiv. 19, xvi. 16 — 19, and means "a little while." 
 Jn also has vii. 33, xii. 35 yuKpov xP^^^^i ^ non-synoptic phrase. 
 Mk i. 19, Lk. V, 3 have oXiyov (adv.) "a little space," Mk vi. 31 
 (adv.) "a little time." 
 
 6 " Live, cause to." Jn v. 21 (h's), vi. 63. 
 
 209 15 — 2 
 
[1716] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Love (n.)^ 
 
 dyaTrr) 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 7 
 
 Love (vb.)( 1)2 
 
 ayairao) 
 
 5 
 
 7 
 
 II 
 
 37 
 
 Love (vb.) (not 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "kiss") (2)3 
 
 <l>Ck4<^ 
 
 o 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 13 
 
 1 [1716 r] "Love" (n.) belongs to Jn-Mt.-Lk. Vocab. but is ins. here 
 as being a characteHstic word of the Fourth Gospel. In Mt. it occurs 
 only in xxiv. 12 "The love of the many shall wax cold," an insertion, 
 peculiar to Mt., in the discourse on the Last Days. In Lk., it occurs 
 only in xi. 42 "Ye pass by judgment and the love of God," parall. to 
 Mt. xxiii. 23 "Ye have left undone the weightier matters of the Law, 
 judgment and mercy and faith." Perhaps Lk interpreted " the weightier 
 matters of the Law " as referring to the first and greatest commandment, 
 to "love God." It is noteworthy that Mk nowhere mentions "love." 
 
 2 [1716^] " Love" (vb.) ayairdoi. Of the Synoptic instances, 2 in Mk, 
 4 in Mt., I in Lk., are in quotations from O.T. All Mk's instances 
 (except x. 21 "He {i.e. Jesus) loved him {i.e. the ruler)") are in the 
 discussion on the command to love God and one's neighbour (xii. 
 
 30—33). 
 
 3 [1716^] "Love" (vb.) (f>i\ea). On the distinction between dyandco 
 and (^tXe'o) in Christ's Dialogue with Peter, see 1436 — 7. The first few 
 instances of each word in Jn are as follows : — 
 
 I. iii, 16 ovras yap rjyaTrrjaev 6 I. v. 20 6 yap irarrip (fiiXeT. rov 
 
 dcos rov KOCTfxov. vlov Ka\ rravra bciKwcnv avrat 
 
 a avTos TTOui. 
 
 2. iii. 19 rjydTTTjcrav 01 civdpcoTroi 2. xi. 3, 36 iSe, ov (jiiXels dadevel 
 
 fiaXkov TO aKOTOs rj to (fiS)S. ...iSe 7r5)s eCJiiXei avTov. 
 
 3. iii. 35 6 TraTTjp dyavra top vlov 3. xii. 25 6 (piXwv ttjv "^vx^v avTov 
 
 Ka\ TrdvTa deda>K€v iv Tjj X^''P'' dnoWvei avTTjv. 
 
 avTov. 
 
 [1716/] ^iXe'o) sometimes implies the love that comes from use and 
 wont, and hence from home-life, and dyandco sometimes implies the love 
 that looks abroad. Comp. Jn xv. 19 "If ye were from the world the 
 world would love (e^iXfi) [you as being] its own {to tdiov)." The nouns 
 do not exactly follow the verbs in all their shades of meaning. *tXia 
 occurs nowhere in N.T. except Jas iv. 4 " the friendship of the world." 
 Jn can say " God is dyd-rrr]" but he could not say " God is (f)i\ia,^^ 
 although he says (xvi. 27) avTos yap 6 TraTrjp ^iXet vfxds otl vfids efie 
 7r€(f)i\T]KaT€, " The Father /lalk a fatherly love for you because ye have 
 had a brotherly love for me." As compared with ayaTra'o), cfyiXcco might 
 be used of still retaining a " friendship " or " liking " after the higher love 
 has passed away (see 1436 and 1728 m). 
 
 [1716^] *iXeco occurs in Mk xiv. 44, Mt. xxvi. 48, Lk. xxii. 47, meaning 
 ''kiss." 
 
 210 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1717] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Manifest (vb.)(i)^ 
 
 €fji(f>avi^<o 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 Manifest (vb.) (2)2 
 
 (}iav€p6(o 
 
 i+W 
 
 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 [1717] Manna3 
 
 Hdvva 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 Martha* 
 
 MdpBa 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 9 
 
 Mary (sister of 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Martha)^ 
 
 Mapid(fjL) 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 9 
 
 Messiah^ 
 
 Meacrias 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 1 [1716/^] "Manifest" (vb.) (i) €fi(f>aviC(o belongs to Jn-Mt. vocab. 
 It occurs in Mt. xxvii. 53, of "the bodies of the dead" that arose and 
 " were manifested to many," J n xiv. 2 1 " I will manifest myself to him," 
 xiv. 22 " What is come to pass that thou art about to manifest thyself 
 to us and not to the world?" In the Pentateuch, the word occurs only in 
 Ex. xxxiii. 13, 18 where Moses says to God (LXX) ^''Manifest thyself 
 {€lx(f)dvi(rov aeavTov) to me." The word is also used of God's self- 
 manifestation in Wisd. i. 2, and of phantasmal apparitions in Wisd. 
 xvii. 4. Josephus {Ant. i. 13. i) uses it of God manifesting Himself to 
 Abraham. The Gk word would naturally convey to a reader of the LXX 
 the notion of a visible "manifestation," and it would naturally prepare 
 a reader of Jn for the following question, " How can the Lord manifest 
 Himself to us and not to the world?" 
 
 2 [1716/] "Manifest" (vb.) (2) (jyavepoco occurs in Mk iv. 22 "For 
 there is nothing hidden except in order that it may be manifested 
 {(f)av€p(od^)" where Mt. x. 26 has dTroKoXvirrco, Lk. viii. 1 7 (f)av€p6v 
 yevrjo-eTai. Mk App. [xvi. 12, 14] has "he was manifested^'' of Christ 
 risen, a phrase also found in Jn. For the adj. (I)avep6s, see 1686. 
 
 [1716y] Jn xxi. I (bis) uses '''' manifested himself ^^ and xxi. 14 ''''was 
 manifested" to describe Christ's self-manifestations after His resurrection, 
 whereas i Cor. xv. 5 — 7 uses J^^?/, i.e. " appeared" or " was seen." Jn's 
 first use of the word is in the person of John the Baptist i. 31 "That he 
 \i.e. Jesus] should be manifested to Israel, for this cause came I...." 
 
 3 " Manna." Jn vi. 31, 49. 
 
 * [1717 «] "Martha." Jn xii. 2 ^''Martha served," comp. Lk. x. 40 
 ^''Martha was cumbered about much serving" (1717^, 1771^). 
 
 ^ [1717 <^] "Mary" (sister of Martha). Jn xii. 3 "J/iatry... anointed 
 the feet of Jesus," comp. Lk. x. 39 ^^ Mary^ who also sat at the Lord's 
 feet" {VJllb). 
 
 6 [1717^] "Messiah." In Jn i. 41 "We have found the Messiah" is 
 said by Andrew to Peter. The context adds " which is, being interpreted, 
 Christ." The woman of Samaria says (iv. 25) " I know that Messiah 
 Cometh." The context again adds " which is called Christ." The word 
 is not found elsewhere in N.T. See 1728 /g. 
 
 211 
 
[1717] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Minister (n.)^ 
 
 dlUKOVOS 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 Minister (vb.)^ 
 
 8taK0V€(0 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 8 
 
 3 
 
 1 [1717^] "Minister" (n.). The n. diaKovos is used in Mk ix. 35 
 parall. to Mt. xxiii. 11 and in Mk x. 43 parall. to Mt. xx. 26. Both 
 passages deal with Christ's doctrine of Service as constituting the true 
 primacy. This is expressed in Jn xii. 26 (after the Washing of Feet) 
 where he uses both the noun and the verb, " If any one de 7ni7iistering 
 {diaKovTJ) to me, let him follow me, and where I am, there also shall my 
 minister be. If any one be mittisterifig {biaKovfi) to me, him will the Father 
 honour." The other instances, in Jn, are in the "sign" at Cana, ii. 5 
 " His mother saith to the ministers^'' ii. 9 " But the ministers knew, they 
 that had drawn the water." 
 
 2 [1717 <?] "Minister" (vb.). Lk. never uses the n. hiaKovo^^ either in 
 the Gospel or in the Acts, but Lk. xxii. 26 " let him become as he that 
 7ninistereth''^ uses the vb. parall. to the n. in Mk x. 43, Mt. xx. 26 "shall 
 be your minister.^^ In the parall. to Mk ix. 35, "he shall be last of all 
 and minister of all," Mt. xxiii. 11 "he shall be your 7ninister^^ Lk. ix. 48 
 has "he that is least among you all, the same is great." The vb. is used 
 once in connexion with a "supper" by Jn (xii. 2) x] de Mdp6a dcrjKovei. 
 Lk. uses the n. SiaKovla (not found elsewhere in the Gospels) also about 
 Martha in connexion with the statement that she " received {vncde^aro)" 
 Jesus, (Lk. x. 40) ri de Mdp6a TrepicaTrdro Trept TroXXrjv SiaKoviav. 
 
 [1717/] Mk X. 43—4 and Mt. xx. 26 — 7 place " shall be stave of all 
 (dovXos)" and "shall be your stave" after "shall be your mifiister,^' giving 
 the impression that they are synonymous terms, and that the meaning of 
 " shall be slave of all " is " shall be reduced, as a punishment, to the level 
 of slave of all." Perhaps for this reason Lk. xxii. 26 substitutes " let him 
 become" for "shall be" in order to indicate that the meaning is (Gal. v. 13) 
 "in love de ye staves to one another." And perhaps he avoids 
 "minister," as it had come to have an ecclesiastical meaning. 
 
 [1717^] Greeks might be repelled by Mk's apparent use of "slave" 
 and "minister" as parall. terms. As to slaves, Epictetus says {Fragm. 8) 
 " Freedom and slavery are, severally, names of virtue and vice. Both are 
 results of will (7rpoaipe'crea)s)....No man is a slave as long as he keeps his 
 will free." As for the man that cringes to fortune or to his fellow-men 
 (iv. I. 57) "Even though twelve rods" [the insignia of a consul] "precede 
 him, call him a slave." A "minister" is a very different thing : " I count 
 God's will," he says (iv. 7. 20), " better than mine. I will attach myself to 
 Him, as His minister and follower," (iii. 22. 69) "The true philosopher 
 (lit. Cynic) should give himself wholly to the ministry of God." See 
 1784 — 92 on Jn xv. 15 "No longer do I call you slaves." 
 
 212 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1718] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek Mk ' 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Morrow, on the^ 
 
 [1718] Murmur, murmur- 
 ing2 
 
 My, mine (1704) 
 Myself (1704)3 
 
 rfj cTTavpiov I 
 
 yoyyv^o), -o-fxos O 
 ifios (not incl. ^ov) 2 
 ifxavTov, -6v o 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 5 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 37 
 i6 
 
 Nathanael(1671^) 
 Nation (sing.)* 
 
 'NaOavarjX O 
 eOvos 2 
 
 o 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 5 
 
 1 [1717 /i] " Morrow, on the." Mk xi. I2 "On the morrow when they 
 came forth from Bethany," Mt. xxvii. 62 " On the morrow, which is the 
 day after the Preparation." In Jn, " on the morrow " occurs i. 29, 35, 43, 
 in such a way as to lead the reader to perceive, but only after a careful 
 reckoning of the days, that a week, excluding the sabbath, has elapsed. 
 A week of "six days" is also more definitely expressed in Jn xii. i, 
 as closing Christ's work in the flesh. 
 
 Kvpiov — not used by Mk or Jn— occurs Mt. (3), Lk. (4), alw. in words 
 of the Lord. 
 
 2 [1718^] "Murmur," "murmuring." In Mt. (xx. 11 (pec.)) the 
 "murmuring" is against the householder, who gives the denarius to all 
 alike. It is inserted by Lk. (v. 30) in a Triple Tradition (where Mk ii. 16, 
 Mt. ix. II, have simply "said") — describing complaints made by the 
 Pharisees against Jesus for eating with publicans and sinners. Else- 
 where, in portions of Lk's Single Tradition (xv. 2, xix. 7) Stayoyyv^co is 
 used to describe similar complaints. 
 
 [1718^] In Jn, the first three mentions of "murmuring" (vi. 41, 43, 
 61) refer to the offence caused by Christ's saying that He is the bread that 
 came down from heaven, and that His flesh and blood are to be given as 
 the food and drink of men. In O.T., the Israelites "murmur" for the 
 first time when they crave drink and food (Ex. xv. 24, xvi. 7 — 13). 
 
 3 [1718^] "Myself." In Mt. viii. 9, Lk. vii. 7,8 the centurion uses 
 the word " /wyj^i^" and it occurs nowhere else in Mt.-Lk. In Jn it occurs 
 always in words of Christ about Himself. 
 
 4 [1718^] "Nation" (sing.). (For plur., see 1687.) Two of the 
 Synoptic instances occur in the phrase "nation against nation^'' (Mk xiii. 
 8, Mt. xxiv. 7, Lk. xxi. 10). Mt. alone adds to the Parable of the Vine- 
 yard xxi. 43 " Therefore I say unto you. The kingdom of God shall 
 be taken away from you, and shall be given to a nation bringing forth the 
 fruits thereof." 
 
 [1718 e'\ Lk. represents the elders of the Jews as saying to Jesus con- 
 cerning the centurion (vii. 5) " He loveth our nation (i.e. the Jews)," and 
 as saying to Pilate (xxiii. 2) " We found this man perverting our nation" 
 
 [1718/] The instances in Jn are in speeches of the chief priests and 
 the Pharisees (xi. 48) " The Romans will come and take away both our 
 
 213 
 
[1719] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Near (adv.) 1 
 
 iyyvs 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 II 
 
 Nicodemus 
 
 NiKodrjfios 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 5 
 
 Night (metaph.)^ 
 
 vv^ 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 [1719] Not yet3 
 
 OVTTO) 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 13 
 
 place and our nation" Caiaphas (xi. 50) " That one man should die for 
 the people (Kaov), and that fke whole nation perish not," with the comment 
 *' he prophesied that Jesus should die for the nation ; and not for the 
 nation only, but that he might also gather together into one the children 
 of God that are scattered abroad," and Pilate (xviii. 35) "Thine own 
 nation and the chief priests delivered thee unto me." 
 
 1 [1718^] "Near" (adv.). Jn compensates for the abundant use of 
 the adv. by the non-use of the vb. eyyt^o Mk (3), Mt. (7), Lk. (18) (1687). 
 
 2 [1718/^] "Night" (metaph.). Jn ix. 4^ "The night cometh when 
 no man can work," xi. 10 " But if a man walketh in the nighth^ stumbleth 
 because the light is not in him," The second of these passages indicates 
 internal darkness, not the " night " of temptation but the " night " of "sin." 
 The first (ix. 4 a) must be taken with (ix. 4 b) " Whenever I am in the 
 world I am the light of the world," and it indicates a period in which the 
 world rejects the light, so that " no man," not even the Light, or Logos, 
 ^'can work" — not, at least, for "the world." 
 
 [1718/] Apart from actual metaphor we may note what may be called 
 "sympathetic" emphasis laid on "night" by some Evangelists as being 
 not only the actual time of an occurrence but also (apparently) as being 
 an appropriate time, because the occurrence is of the jtature of a trial or 
 temptation. Thus in the Prediction of Peter's Denial, Mk xiv. 30 has 
 *' to-day, this night^^ Mt. xxvi. 34 "this night" But there Hebraic and 
 Greek reckonings of " day " and " night " might influence the text. Or 
 Mark might add "this night" to emphasize the accuracy of the prediction. 
 The Walking on the Waters mentions first (Mk vi. 47, Mt. xiv. 23, Jn vi. 
 16) "evening," and then (Mk vi. 48, Mt. xiv. 25) "the fourth watch of the 
 night" (Jn vi. 17) " it was now dark." 
 
 In Lk. xii. 20 and xvii. 34 "on this night" is connected with the sudden 
 death of the rich man, and with the coming of the Day of Judgment. 
 
 [1718y] In Jn xiii. 30 "he [Judas Iscariot] went forth: now it was 
 night^'' it is manifest 'that "sympathetic" emphasis is intended, and it is 
 probably intended also in Jn xxi. 3. Similarly " darkness " probably has 
 a "sympathetic" meaning in Jn vi. 17, xx. i, where the disciples are 
 (owing to different causes) apart from their Lord. The coming of 
 Nicodemus to Jesus (Jn iii. 2) "by night^ and the repetition of the phrase 
 in Jn xix. 39, are probably intended to illustrate his character. 
 
 3 [1719 d\ " Not yet " occurs in Lk only once, and concerning the past 
 (xxiii. 53). Where Mk xiii. 7, Mt. xxiv. 6 have " The end is not yet^^ 
 
 214 
 
UNIVERSITY ;. 
 
 OF y 
 
 ^LIFORN)^; 
 
 FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY 
 
 [1719] 
 
 English 
 
 Now {i.e. this 
 
 moment) 
 Now {i.e. at the 
 
 present time)* 
 
 Greek 
 
 apTi 
 
 Mk Mt. Lk. Jn 
 
 O 7 O 12 
 
 14 
 
 29 
 
 Lk. xxi. 9 has "noi straightway {ovk eu^e'coy)." Jn assigns the word four 
 times to Jesus, concerning His "hour" or "season" or "ascension" 
 (ii. 4, vii. 6, 8, xx. 17) as being '"'■ not yet" also Jn vii. 8 " I go 7iot yet up 
 to this feast (v.r. not)^^ 
 
 * [1719^] "Now (i/{}j/)." Jn sometimes uses vvv Sc, as in classical 
 Gk — without ref. to past time, but with ref. to what might have been — 
 for "but, [as things] now [are]," viii. 40, ix. 41, xv. 22, 24, xviii. 36 (xv. 24 
 may mean " but now [at last] "). Lk xix. 42 perh. means " but as things 
 are," but more prob. " but now \it is too late and] it is hidden from thine 
 eyes " (as in Lk xvi. 25 " but now [on the other hand\" with reference to 
 the past time when Lazarus received evil things). See 1915 (i) foil. 
 
 [1719 dr] In Jn iv. 23, v. 25 "The hour is coming and [indeed] now is," 
 there is a contrast between the past, when the "hour" might be called 
 " future " or " coming" and the present, when the hour " is." Generally, 
 in Jn, vvv seems to imply a contrast with the past, unless it is expressly 
 contrasted with the future as in xvi. 22 " Now on the one hand {}xev) ye 
 have sorrow, but..." xiii. 36 "Thou canst not now... hut thou shalt here- 
 after." 
 
 [1719 d] Hence we should suppose a reference to the past in Jn ii. 8 
 " Draw water now [i.e. now that the water-pots have been duly filled]" 
 iv. 18 "He whom thou now hast [as thy husband, like thy five past 
 husbands]. . .^^ vi. 42 "We know his father and mother {and his past life 
 amo7tg us]: how then doth he now say...?" ix. 21 "[//"<? was blind] but 
 how he ?tow seeth we know not." 
 
 [1719^] There is ambiguity in xi. 22 "If thou hadst been here my 
 brother had not died ; aftd now {kuX vvv) \1 in spite of his death] I know 
 that whatsoever thou shalt ask of God; God will give thee." In classical 
 Gk Koi vvv would naturally mean ^^ even now": but it could hardly be 
 used in this sense at the beginning of a sentence; because in that position, 
 Kai would naturally be taken as " and." The question is complicated by 
 the use of koi vvv in LXX, where vvv represents more than a dozen Heb. 
 words, see 1915 (i) foil. 
 
 [1719/] In view of Jn's usage, vvv should probably be rendered ^^now 
 at last" '"''now in the time foreordained by the Father" in Jn xii. 27 
 "Now is my soul troubled," xii. 31 ^' Now is the judgment of this world, 
 now shall the ruler of this world be cast out," and so in xvii. 5, 7, 13. 
 
 [1719^] In Jn xi. 8 ^'' but Jtow [i.e. recently] {yvv) the Jews were 
 seeking," vvv is used for the classical vvv 8tj. But is this the meaning 
 
 215 
 
[1720] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Officer, or minister^ 
 Openly, freely 2 
 [1720] Own 3 
 
 (ev) 7rappr](ria 
 t8ios 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 
 4 or 5 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 9 
 
 9 
 
 15 
 
 in Jn xxi. 10 "Bring of the fish that ye [have] caught noia {enidaaTe j/Cj/)"? 
 Considering (i) the position of the word — at the end of the sentence, 
 where it must necessarily be emphatic — (2) the superfluity of "recently" 
 in such a context, and (3) above all, the ordinary meaning of vvv in Jn, 
 it seems best to translate thus, "the fish that ye have caught at /ast" 
 i.e. after long toiling (xxi. 3) " in that night," before they heard the voice 
 of the Saviour and obeyed His command. See 1915 (i) foil. 
 
 1 [1719/^] "Officer": used in Mt. v. 25 of the "officer" arresting a 
 debtor and in Mk-Mt. elsewhere of the " officers " that arrested Jesus. 
 In Lk. i. 2, iv. 20, the word means a "minister" of the Gospel or of the 
 Synagogue. In Jn it always means "officers" of the Jews sent to arrest 
 Jesus, except in xviii. 36 (R.V. txt) " then would my servants fight," on 
 which see Paradosis (1388—92). 
 
 2 « Openly." See " Freely" (1712/) and 1917 (i) foil. 
 
 3 [1720^] "Own" (i) in "his own disciples." This phrase, not 
 elsewhere found in N.T., is used by Mk in the sole instance in which 
 he uses the adj. ^^ own." Jn uses '^ his own (pi. masc.)," but never ^^ his 
 own disciples!^ After saying that Jesus " spake not without a parable," 
 in which Mt. agrees with Mk, the latter alone continues thus, Mk iv. 34 
 "But privately to his own disciples he expounded all things." These 
 words must be compared with 
 
 Mk iv. 10. Mt. xiii. 10. Lk. viii. 9. 
 
 "And when he was " The disciples." " His disciples." 
 
 alone, they that were 
 about him with the 
 Twelve...." 
 
 [1720 <^] These facts suggest, in Mk, conflation from some Hebrew 
 word capable of meaning "privately" and also, in various senses, 
 "disciples." And, as a fact, the Hebrew beth^ "house," in various 
 contexts means (i) "at home," "privately," (2) "disciples" (as Beth 
 Hillel) — which might be subdivided into {2. a) "they that were about 
 him," (2 b) the inner circle of " the Twelve." Mt. and Lk. have simply 
 (2). Mk has in one passage (iv. 10) conflated three renderings, and in 
 another (iv. 34) two of them. In Esth. v. 10, "his house'''' is variously 
 rendered (a) "his house" (/3) "his own {to. Uia)." Ezr. vi. 11 "his house" 
 is parall. to i Esdr. vi. 31 "his own (rcov I8ia>v avrov)" See also 370. 
 
 [1720 c] There may have been early controversy as to the existence 
 of an inner circle of " his own " disciples within the Twelve {e.g. Gal. ii. 9 
 
 216 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1720] 
 
 "the pillar" Apostles) which might induce Mt.-Lk. to omit the epithet 
 as unedifying : but more probably the epithet did not exist in traditions 
 (earlier than Mk) to which Mt. and Lk. have returned. 
 
 [1720 rt?] Jn uses ol tdioi — but without ixaBrjrai — in a double sense, 
 ist of the Jews and of Christ's brethren, who did not, as a whole, receive 
 Him, 2nd of those among them who did (exceptionally) receive Him 
 (i. ii) "He came to [his] own [home] {to. Xdia) and [Ms] own (ol i'Sioi) 
 did not receive him ; but, as many as received him, to them gave he...." 
 (xiii. i) "Having loved [Ms] own (rovs Idiovs) that were in the world...." 
 Whether Jn wrote with, or without, a reference to Mk's phrase " Ms own 
 disciples," it is probable that he would deprecate any suggestion of a 
 distinction between " disciples " that were in some pecuhar sense Christ's 
 ^'- own^^ and others that were not. 
 
 [1720^] "Own" (2) in its general use. "ihios expresses, or implies, 
 contrast — like " own " in English (" my own [and not another's])." The 
 only Johannine instance where contrast might be questioned is Jn i. 41 
 (" He first findeth Ms own brother {jov a. rov Ihiov) ") where it might be 
 argued that Jn simply means " Ms brother," on the following grounds : 
 
 [1720y] (i) Jn never uses the possessive kavrov^ -S)v, found in Mk vi. 4 
 (Tisch.), viii. 35 (but Tisch, avrov), xi. 7 (marg.), Mt. viii. 22, xviii. 31, 
 xxi. 8 (but Mk avrcov), xxv. I (but Tisch. avrwv), xxv. 4, 7, Lk. ii. 3, 39, 
 iv. 24 (Tisch.), ix. 60, xi. 21, xiii. 19, 34 (eavTrjs), xiv. 26 (but Tisch. avTov)y 
 xiv. 26 (no v.r.), xiv. 27, 23i xv. 20 (but Tisch. avrov), xvi. 4, 5, 8, xviii. 13 
 (but Tisch. avTov), xix. 13, xix. 36 (but Tisch. avTav). 
 
 [1720^] (ii) In the LXX, idios corresponds to avrov in i Es. v. 8 
 CKacrros (Is rfjv Ibiav ttoXlv parall. to Ezr. ii. I a.vf]p els noXiv avrov. It 
 corresponds to the simple Heb. pers. suffix in Job ii. 11" every one from 
 Ms [own] place," Idias, and in Dan. i. 10 "So should ye endanger 7ny 
 head" Theod. fxov, but Dan. i. 10 rnvSwevcroi rw Idito rpa-)(rfKco. 
 
 [1720 >^] (iii) In recording the visit of the Lord to His "country," 
 where all the Synoptists (W.H. txt (Mk vi. i, 4, Mt. xiii. 54, Lk. iv. 24)) 
 have simply ''^ Ms (avrov) country," Jn alone uses tdios (Jn iv. 44 rjj Idia 
 Trarpidi). [But Mt. marg. xiii. 57 r^ Ibia ir.] 
 
 On these three grounds it may be argued that Jn may have used i'Stos 
 to express the Synoptic avrov. 
 
 [1720 z] Against these arguments it may be replied that there is a 
 special reason here for supposing emphasis to be intended, namely^ 
 the repetition of the article (1982). When the article is repeated with 
 i8tos elsewhere (v. 43, vii. 18) the meaning is ^^ Ms own [and not an- 
 other's]," e.g. vii. 18 "He that speaketh from himself seeketh Ms own 
 glory." "Yhios with the repeated article is very rare in N.T. and appears 
 to be always emphatic. Acts i. 25 '"''Ms own place," xx. 28 "/«V own 
 blood." It is also highly characteristic of this Evangelist that he should 
 in this indirect way suggest, instead of stating, that after Andrew had 
 
 217 
 
[1720] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Parable, s. Proverb 
 
 Trapoi/xt'a 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 4 
 
 Paraclete^ 
 
 TrapaKXrjTos 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 4 
 
 Philip (the apostle) ^ 
 
 ^(Xlttttos 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 12 
 
 *' first " found *' h's own " brother, Andrew's companion (1901 d) did the 
 same thing. On the whole, then, 'Idios is probably emphatic in Jn i. 41. 
 
 1 [1720y] "Paraclete." Jn xiv. 16 " I will ask the Father and he 
 shall give you another Paraclete that he may be with you for ever, [even] 
 the Spirit of truth, whom the world cannot receive...," xiv. 26 "the 
 Paraclete^ the Holy Spirit, whom the Father will send in my name...," 
 XV. 26 "the Paraclete... \.hQ Spirit of truth," xvi. 7 " If I go not away, the 
 Paraclete will assuredly not come to you, but if I go, I will send him unto 
 you." Comp. i Jn ii. i "We have a Paraclete., with the Father, Jesus 
 Christ, a righteous [Paraclete]." 
 
 [1720 k] " Paraclete," i.e. " called in [to aid]," " advocatus," or " Advo- 
 cate," was a Greek word, Hebraized as Parklete, in the sense of a legal 
 advocate. But the ancient "advocate" differed from the modern in 
 that the former did not take a reward but pleaded a friend's cause for 
 the friend's sake. The nearest Synoptic equivalent to Christ's promise of 
 a Paraclete is 
 
 Mk xiii. II Mt. x. 20 . Lk. xxi. 15 
 
 ** For it is not ye that "For it is not ye "I will give you a 
 
 speak, but the Holy that speak, but the mouth and wisdom that 
 
 Spirit." Spirit of your Father all your adversaries 
 
 that speaketh in you." shall not be able to 
 
 withstand or gainsay." 
 
 Jn's doctrine guards against a narrowing of the Synoptic tradition, 
 especially Lk.— as though the object of the Paraclete would be merely to 
 help the Christian to make a successful defence when brought before 
 kings and rulers. On Parklete., see Hor. Heb. on Jn xiv. 16. 
 
 [1720/] The variations in the Synoptists favour the view that Jesus 
 used some expression like the Aramaic Parklete, which was variously 
 paraphrased by the Synoptists. Against any superstitious notion that the 
 Advocate would procure special favours from God, contrary to justice, Jn 
 guards by saying that it is " the Spirit of truths'' or " the Holy Spirit," or 
 "Jesus Christ, a righteous [Paraclete]." 
 
 2 [1720 ?n\ " Philip," the only Apostle described by Jn in his first 
 chapter as being (i. 43) "found" by Jesus Himself. The others, and 
 Nathanael, either (i. 37—8) "followed" Jesus, or were (i. 41, 45) "found" 
 by other disciples. 
 
 218 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1721] 
 
 English Greek 
 
 Pool ^ KoXvfi^rjBpa 
 
 [1721] Proverb, parable ^ napoifiia 
 
 Ak 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 4 
 
 1 [1720 «] " Pool " is used in connexion with the healing of a man 
 described as "in infirmity" (Jn v. 2 — 7) and the name Bethzatha, 
 Bethsaida, etc. varies greatly in MSS. and versions. " Pool " is also used 
 in connexion with the healing of a man born blind, where it is called 
 (Jn ix. 7) ''the pool of Siloam" (1708/^). 
 
 2 [1721 a] " Proverb," Trapoifxla, is rendered by R.V. (txt) " parable "— 
 the usual rendering of Trapa^oXrj (which Jn never uses) — in Jn x. 6 " This 
 proverb spake Jesus to them, but they {cKelvoi de) understood (eyvcocrav) 
 not what things they were that he was speaking to them {rlva rjv a eXaXei 
 avToh)." He had been saying that (x. i — 5) the "sheep" follow the 
 " shepherd " whose " voice " they " know," but do not follow a " stranger." 
 These facts were, and are, '' proverdta/" both as to the literal shepherd of 
 sheep and as to the metaphorical " shepherd of the people " mentioned in 
 the Bible and the Iliad ; and they could hardly be misunderstood. But 
 perhaps "understood not etc." means that those whom Jesus was 
 addressing had no conception of the idea of the true shepherd. They 
 could not misunderstand the proverb, but they could and did fail to 
 understand the spiritual truth that it represented. 
 
 [1721 (^] Jn's other instances are xvi. 25 — 9 "These things have 
 I spoken unto you in proverbs. There cometh an hour when I shall no 
 longer speak to you in proverbs but I shall bring you word plainly about 
 the Father." To this the disciples reply " See, now [at last] (1719/) (i'Se 
 i/vv) thou speakest plainly and speakest no proverb ^^ contradicting their 
 Master. But His answer to them, and the sequel, shew that they were 
 wrong, and that His words had not been "plain" to them. 
 
 [1721 c\ Why does John avoid the Synoptic word " parable " (1687) and 
 introduce, in its place, a word unused by the Synoptists? Partly, 
 perhaps, because the Synoptic tradition varied. Mark alone (iv. 2>'^ says 
 that Jesus taught by parables ""as they were able to understand^ 
 Matthew alone (in the parallel to Mk iv. 33 — 4) quotes an O.T. saying 
 about " things hidden from the foundation of the world " (xiii. 35). Luke 
 omits all this. Matthew (as well as Luke) omits Mark's statement that 
 Jesus '^ explained in private all things to his own disciples.^'' Moreover, 
 Mark (iv. 11 — 12) and Luke (viii. 10) differ considerably from Matthew 
 (xiii. II — 13) in their descriptions of the reason for teaching in parables 
 (Mk-Lk. "//^<2/... hearing they may not understand," Mt. '' because... hesir'mg 
 they hear not neither do they understand "). 
 
 [1721 d] In any case, Jn prefers to say that Jesus taught by 
 ''proverbs,'' i.e. by truths of general import, whereas the Paraclete was to 
 teach truths of particular import, appealing to the experience of the 
 
 219 
 
[1721] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Quicken^ 
 
 ^(OOTTOUO) 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 Raise up^ 
 
 dvi(TTT]iii (active) 
 
 O 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 4 
 
 Receive (a person) ^ 
 
 Xafi^dvoi 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 II 
 
 Remain, s. Abide 
 
 fxevo) 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 40 
 
 Remember* 
 
 fivr]fiov€V<o 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 ' 
 
 3 
 
 individual. Uapomia does not appear to mean " dark saying" either in Jn 
 or anywhere in Greek literature. But a proverb, or general saying, 
 being brief, and dispensing with qualifications and modifications (which 
 the hearer has to supply according to circumstances) is always liable to 
 become a "dark saying" to those that will not take the trouble to think 
 about its special meaning or application. 
 
 1 " Quicken," see (1716) " Live, make to." 
 
 2 [1721^] "Raise up," in Mt, only xxii. 24 "raise up seed," quoting 
 Deut. XXV. 5 ; Jn vi. 39, 40, 44, 54 " raise up [from the dead]," always foil, 
 by " on the last day." (The numbers above do not include eyeipo).) 
 
 3 [1721/] " Receive (a person)." (The numbers above do not include 
 dixonai (1689^).) In all but two passages (Jn vi. 21, xix. 27) the receiving 
 means spiritual reception, z.e. "receiving" doctrine, influence, or spirit. 
 In the saying " He that receiveth me receiveth him that sent me," Jn xiii. 
 20 uses Xaix^dv(o whereas Mk ix. ^y, Mt. x. 40, Lk. ix. 48 use dixofiai. The 
 latter word Jn never uses except in Jn iv. 45 " the Galilaeans received 
 (ede^avTo) him" describing our Lord's visit to His native place where He 
 was no^ honoured. Perhaps Jn means that they merely "welcomed" or 
 "entertained" Him, because of the signs He had wrought, but did not 
 believe in Him. Jn uses Xajx^dvoi in the Prologue (i. 12) " But as many 
 as received him, to them he gave authority to become children of God." 
 The word Xafx^dvo) is used by Mk-Mt. (but not by Lk.) in the Eucharistic 
 precept ''''Receive [it]. This is my body," and in Jn xx. 22 ''''Receive the 
 Holy Spirit." Lk. xxii. 17 has "Receive (Xd^ere) this, z.^. the cup, and 
 divide it among yourselves." See 1341. 
 
 [1721^] AafjL^dvo) Tivd meaning "welcome" must be distinguished 
 from X. Tivd meaning "take," e.^. (Mk ix. 36) ''''taking a child," (Lk. xx. 
 29) " taking a wife," (Jn xix. 6) " take him and crucify him." The 
 instances of "welcoming" in Jn are applied to the receiving of the 
 Logos, of Christ, of those whom He sends, of the Spirit, of the mother 
 of Jesus when committed to the beloved disciple. 
 
 ^ [1721 >^] "Remember," only in words of the Lord, Mk viii. 18 (Mt. 
 xvi. 9) " remember ye not ? " about the loaves, Lk. xvii. 32 " remember 
 Lot's wife." Jn's instances are all in the Last Discourse, (xv. 20, xvi. 4) 
 about ^'' remembering^^ Christ's warnings, and xvi. 21 "she remembereth 
 not the anguish." 
 
 [1721 /] Forms of fxvTja-d^vai occur in Mt. (3), Lk. (6), Jn (3). Jn's 
 
 220 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1722] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Retain (sins) (?)i 
 
 Kpareco 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 Romans 2 
 
 'Pcofialoi 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 Roman, in^ 
 
 'PcofiaicrTL 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 Sake of, for the (w. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 persons)* 
 
 8id 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 o 
 
 9 
 
 Salim^ 
 
 2aXei/x 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 [1722] Scripture, another^ 
 
 ' ere pa ypa(f)ri 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 Scripture, the 
 
 V yp(^4>v 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 lO 
 
 Scripture, this 
 
 r) ypacfif] avrrj 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 instances all say that the disciples (ii. 17, 22, xii. 16) "remembered 
 (efxvrja-drjaav) " prophecies about Christ, or words of Christ, (ii. 22) " when 
 he was raised from the dead," or (xii. 16) " when he was glorified." 
 
 1 [172iy] " Retain (sins)," only in Jn xx. 23 " whose soever sins ye 
 retain they are retained^ liv nvcov KparrJTe [sc. ras ajxaprtas^ KeKpdTrjvTat," 
 The meaning is obscure (2517 — 20). See also 1691. 
 
 2 [1721 /&] " Romans," Jn xi. 48 " The Romans will come and take 
 away both our place and our nation." 
 
 3 [1721 /] " In Roman," Jn xix. 20 " It was written in Hebrew, and in 
 Roman [i.e. in Latin], and in Greek." 
 
 * [1721 7f{\ " For the sake of (a person).'' This excludes hia rovro etc. 
 On the Synoptic " sake," eveKa, see 1692. On the double meaning of 8ia, 
 see 1884 a—d, and 2294 foil. On vrrep see 2369—71. 
 
 '"^ [1721 7i] " Salim." Only in Jn iii. 23 " ^non near to SalimP Both 
 localities are variously identified. " ^non " may mean " fountains." 
 "Salim" may mean "peace." Comp. Gen. xxxiii. 18 (R.V. txt) "peace," 
 <marg.) "Shalem"; Ps. Ixxvi. 2 "in Salem," LXX "peace." 
 
 6 [1722 «] "Scripture, another" etc. "The Scripture" occurs in Jn 
 at least twice without any Scriptural quotation in the context, ii. 22 
 (R.V.) " When therefore he was raised from the dead his disciples 
 remembered that he spake this ; and they believed the scripture^ and 
 the word which Jesus had said," xx. 8 — 9 (R.V.) "Then entered in 
 therefore the other disciple also, which came first to the tomb, and he 
 saw, and believed. For as yet they knew not the scripture that he must 
 rise again from the dead." Westcott {ad loc.) and Lightfoot (Gal. iii. 22) 
 take "the Scripture" as Ps. xvi. 10 "Thou wilt not leave my soul in 
 Sheol," or some other single passage of Scripture in the Evangelist's 
 mind. But against this are the following facts. 
 
 [1722 <^] "The Scripture" (sing.) occurs in N.T., Clement of Alexandria, 
 and Origen, in two senses, ist, and most freq., the Scripture speaking 
 through a single text (as we say, " The Bible says^ ' Pride cometh before 
 a fall'"), 2nd, the Scripture as a whole, or as a person representing 
 God's voice, or will, or action. Before considering these usages, it will 
 be convenient to discuss the plural. 
 
 221 
 
[1722] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 English Greek Mk Mt. Lk. Jn 
 
 Scriptures, the al ypa(f)ai 2431 
 
 [1722 c] " The Scriptures " (pi.) is the fomi preferred by the Synoptists 
 to mean all the books of Scripture, and hence, loosely, the Scripture as 
 a whole. They never use the sing, except in Mk xii. 10 " Have ye not 
 even read tAts scripture^ 'The stone...'.?" [where Mt. xxi. 42 has, loosely, 
 " Have ye never read in the scriptures^ 'The stone...'?" and Lk. xx. 17 
 " What then is this that is written (ri ovv io-rXv to yeypafxfievov tovto), 
 'The stone...'?"] and Lk. iv. 21 "This day is fulfilled this scripture 
 in your ears," i.e. the passage of Isaiah just read. 
 
 [1722^] "The Scriptures" (pi.) is the form used by Mk-Mt. ia) with 
 reference to the resurrection of the dead (Mk xii. 24, Mt. xxii. 29 " Ye err 
 not knowing the scriptures^'' Lk. om.) and {b) with reference to the 
 "dehvering up" of the Messiah (Mk xiv. 49, Mt. xxvi. 56 "that the 
 scriptures (Mt. + of the prophets) might be fulfilled," comp. Mt. xxvi. 54 
 "how then should the scriptures be fulfilled?" Lk. om.). The first of 
 these passages indicates a belief on the part of Mark and Matthew that 
 the doctrine of the general resurrection of the dead runs through the 
 Scriptures, but Luke does not imply this. The second indicates a belief 
 in Mark that the doctrine of Paradosis runs through the Scriptures ; but 
 Matthew limits this to " the scriptures of the prophets^'' and Luke again 
 dissents. 
 
 [1722 e'\ " The Scriptures " is used twice by Luke in the Walk to 
 Emmaus (xxiv. 27 — 32) "And beginning from Moses and from all the 
 prophets he interpreted to them in all the scriptures the things con- 
 cerning himself.... While he opened to us the scriptures^'' and, later on, 
 xxiv. 44 — 5 " how that all things must needs be fulfilled which are written 
 in the law of Moses, and the prophets, and the psalms, concerning me. 
 Then opened he their mind that they might understand the scriptures.^'' 
 The object of this appeal to "the Scriptures" was to shew that "it 
 behoved" the Messiah (Lk. xxiv. 26) "to suffer these things and to enter 
 into his glory " ; and, in this process, the promise to Abraham, the 
 sacrifice of Isaac, his restoration as it were (Heb. xi. 18 — 19) "from 
 the dead," the typical life of Joseph, the Story of the Brazen Serpent, 
 and many other things "written in the Law of Moses" might play a part. 
 Thus we can understand that St Paul may be referring to the general 
 tenor of Scriptural types as well as texts when he says i Cor. xv. 3 — 4 
 " Christ died for our sins according to the scriptures... he hath been raised 
 on the third day according to the scriptures.^"" 
 
 [1722/] These facts indicate room for individual difference of 
 expression. On such a point, for example, as the Paradosis, or "delivering 
 up," of Christ, Mark might say that it was predicted by " the scriptures," 
 Matthew might correct this by saying " the scriptures of the prophets^'' 
 
 222 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1722] 
 
 Luke might prefer not to apply so broad a term as "Scriptures" to 
 a single Messianic event. When Luke uses the plural he applies it 
 to the whole of the divine Messianic plan for redeeming mankind. On 
 the other hand another author might dislike the plural " Scriptures " 
 except where the term denoted the different " writings " of the Bible and 
 a passing from one " writing" to another or a comparison of one with 
 another. 
 
 [1722^] "The Scriptures," in Jn. This last remark prepares us for the 
 fact that John, as against ten instances of "the Scripture," uses the 
 Synoptic term ''^ the Scriptures'''' only once, (v. 39) "Ye search the 
 sc?iptu7'es, for ye {emph.) think to have in them eternal life." The 
 context appears to shew that the meaning is: "Ye pass from book to 
 book, searching, and comparing, and studying this passage and that, and 
 losing the whole in the parts, failing to recognise the testimony of the 
 Scripture while poring over the Scriptures." 
 
 [1722^] Returning to "the Scripture" (sing.), and considering it 
 first outside Jn, we find that it mostly introduces a quotation : Acts i. 
 16—20 ^^ the s. that the Holy Spirit uttered. ..(Ps. Ixix. 25 and cix. 8)," 
 viii. 32 — 5 "The passage of the s. that he was reading... from this s." 
 Rom. iv. 3 "What saith the s....," ix. 17 '^ The s. saith to Pharaoh...." 
 (simil. x. II, xi. 2, Gal. iv. 30, i Tim. v. 18, Jas ii. 23, iv. 5 {?) — all of 
 which have "saith" etc.), Jas ii. 8 "according to the s. 'Thou shalt love 
 thy neighbour,' " i Pet, ii. 6 " it contains in s" 
 
 [1722/] "The Scripture" in N.T. apart from quotations. Where 
 there is no such form as " saith," " uttered," " contains," and no quotation, 
 " the Scripture " is regarded as a whole and sometimes personified. Even 
 where there is a quotation, it is personified in Gal. iii. 8 " The j-., fore- 
 seeing... preached^'' There is no quotation in Gal. iii. 22 '•''The s....shut 
 up all things under sin...," 2 Pet. i. 20 "every prophecy of j...." Gal. iii. 
 22 resembles Rom. xi. 32 " God hath shut up all men..." which indicates 
 that " Scripture," in Gal. iii. 22, means " the will of God as expressed in 
 Scripture." There is no single passage of Scripture that mentions this 
 " shutting up " : the Apostle is probably referring to a number of passages 
 such as those quoted in Rom. iii. 10 — 18, and also to Ps. cxliii. 2 and 
 Deut. xxvii. 26 quoted in Gal. ii. 16, iii. 10. Schottgen (Gal. iii. 8) quotes 
 Siphra 186^ for a similar personification of Scripture: "What did 
 Scripture have in view, in placing the New Year and the Day of Atone- 
 ment between Passover and Pentecost?" 
 
 [1722 y] "The Scripture" in Clem. Alex, and Origen. The Greek 
 Fathers most akin to the Fourth Gospel are Clement of Alexandria and 
 Origen. Clement uses " the Scripture saith," to introduce quotations or 
 allusions, but also such phrases as (883) "collecting testimonies from 
 Scripture (ex y.)," (890) "wresting the Scripture {ttjp 7/.)," "believing the 
 Lord's Scripture {ttj KvpiaKfj y.)," meaning Scripture as a whole. Origen 
 
 A. V. 223 16 
 
[1722] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 also (Huet i. 26 — 7) speaks of "the Scripture" as having a body and 
 a soul. He says that our faculties are strengthened by reading "the 
 Scripture," that "the whole Scripture {iraa-av ttjv y.)" is (Huet i. 204 D) 
 "God's one complete and perfectly adapted instrument." Similarly 
 he says in the Philocalia., chap. x. "There is not a jot or tittle written in 
 the Scripture that... does not perform its work." Chrysostom says (on 
 Rom. xvi. 5) " not even apparently small points in the Scripture are placed 
 there at random or in vain." Suicer also quotes Chrys. Homil. xcii. torn. 
 vi. " Whatsoever things the Scripture saith, these things are more trust- 
 worthy than the things that are seen {Trio-Torepa twv opco^eVcoj/)." Clem, 
 personifies Scripture when he says that it (882) " sells to strangers those 
 who have fallen away" (comp. 506 ''''saith they are sold," and see Judg. ii. 
 14, iii. 8, iv. 2, X. 7, i S. xii. 9, Is. 1. i which describe Jehovah as " seUing 
 Israel" because of its sins). 
 
 [1722 k'\ " The Scripture," in Jn, apart from the two passages under 
 consideration, occurs as follows, vii. 38 "Even as the s. [hath] said...," 
 obscure, perh. quotation, but perh. general tenor of Scriptural promises 
 to them that (vii. 37) "thirst." On. vii. 42 "Did not the s. say that the 
 Christ comes from the seed of David and from Bethlehem the village 
 where David was?" Westcott himself refers the reader to Is. xi. i, Jer. 
 xxiii. 5, Mic. v. 2, without mentioning any one of these as specially in the 
 EvangeHst's mind. Probably the meaning is " the general tenor of the 
 Psalms and the Prophets concerning the birth and birthplace of the Son 
 of David," who, it was assumed, must be born in the city of David. 
 In X. 34 — 5 "Is it not written... I f...//z^ scripture cannot be destroyed 
 (Xv^jjvai) (lit. loosed)," the reference may be to the passage just quoted 
 (" I said ye are gods ") but it is more in accordance with Johannine style 
 to suppose Scripture as a whole to be intended (for "loosing" comp. ii. 19 
 and perh. i Jn iv. 3). After xiii. 18, xix. 24, 36 "that the s. might 
 be fulfilled," there follow quotations. In xvii. 12, there is probably 
 a reference to the previously quoted Scripture so that we must render, 
 "that the {above-quoted^ xiii. 18] s. might be fulfilled." In xix. 28, 
 "Jesus,... that the s. might be perfectly accomplished, saith, 'I thirst,'" 
 the words 'I thirst' are printed by W.H. as a quotation. In xix. 37, 
 a quotation is introduced with the phrase, "And again another s. 
 saith:' 
 
 [1722/] There remain for consideration Jn ii. 22 " they believed the 
 scripture,^' xx. 9 "they knew not the scripture:' As to the former, 
 Origen, in a very full comment, suggests no one passage of Scripture that 
 the Evangelist must have had in view. Nor does Chrysostom. Cyril 
 (Cramer ad loc.) paraphrases in the plural^ " comparing with the issue the 
 things that had been written {ra yeypafiixeva)" Also in his brief com- 
 mentary on the context of the second passage, Chrysostom mentions no 
 definite text of Scripture. Westcott, though maintaining that one definite 
 
 224 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1723] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 [1723] See (1)1 
 
 ^XfVo) 
 
 15 
 
 20 
 
 14 
 
 17 
 
 See (2)1 
 
 6edofiai 
 
 [2] 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 See (3)1 
 
 decopeo) 
 
 7 
 
 2 
 
 7 
 
 23 
 
 See (4)1 
 
 opaay 
 
 7 
 
 13 
 
 12 
 
 30 
 
 Seize, catch, take^ 
 
 7rid((0 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 8 
 
 passage is intended, does not profess to say with certainty what it is 
 (Westc. Jn ii. 22 "hardly any other than Ps. xvi. 10," but on Jn xx. 9 "the 
 reference is probably to Ps. xvi. 10"). It is extremely unlikely that 
 Christians in the first century would have fastened their faith in the 
 Scriptural prediction of the Messiah's resurrection on one passage 
 (excluding, for example, Isaiah and Hosea, and limiting themselves to a 
 single text in the Psalms). Much more probably they would have adopted 
 Luke's view that the Saviour, after the Resurrection, "beginning from 
 Moses and from all the prophets," revealed to the disciples (xxiv. 27, 32, 
 45) " all the Scriptures," i.e. the tenor of the Scriptures. It would be 
 quite in harmony with Johannine style and thought to represent this by 
 " ^ke Scripture." 
 
 1 [1723 «] "See." On jSXeVo) see 1607, on dedoiiai 1604, on decopeco 
 1598—1603, on opdo) 1605—6 and 1703 a. 'iSeli/ is the most frequent word 
 for "seeing" in all the Gospels, but less freq. in Jn than in the rest. On 
 Jn's use of eldov see 1610. 
 
 2 [1723 d] " Seize." In Jn xxi. 3, 10 Trid^o) is used of catching fish. 
 Elsewhere in Jn it always describes attempts of the Jews to " catch " 
 Jesus. 
 
 The Synoptists differ among themselves in their language in 
 
 Mk xii. 13 Mt. xxii. 15 Lk. xx. 20 
 
 ipa avTov dype^a-cjcnv ottws avrbv wayide^- Xva iirCkd^uiVTaL airov 
 
 'Xdyif. awcrcv ev \6yi^. \670u c5<rTe irapadoOvai, 
 
 airbv ry dpxv nal ry 
 i^ovaig, tov ijyefidvos. 
 
 — where Lk. is at some pains to shew that the " catching " was to be more 
 (at all events in its results) than mere " catching in word." 
 
 Mk xiv. I Mt. xxvi. 4 Lk. xxii. 2 
 
 irws avrbv iv 56K(p iVa...56X(f} KpaTiqcriaaiv rb irCoi dyiXuiaiv avrbv. 
 
 KpaTiffaavTes diroKTd- Kal diroKTeivwaiv. 
 
 VO}(TLP. 
 
 [1723 <:] In view, perhaps, of various and slightly conflicting tra- 
 ditions, Jn uses habitually one word, without adding Xoym or fioXw. Its 
 use (in the sense of "catching" a prisoner) in writings so various as Acts 
 xii. 4, 2 Cor. xi. 32, Rev. xix. 20, shews that it must have been freq. 
 in Christian communities. In Cant. ii. 15 *•'• catch foxes," LXX Trido-are 
 
 225 16 — 2 
 
[1723] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 English Greek Mk Mt. Lk. Jn 
 
 Send^, including — 7re/z7ro) i 4 lo 32 
 "He that sent (me, 
 
 him)"^ 6 ir4^y\ras {fxCyavTov) O O O 26 
 
 Sym. has (rvWd^cre. In Sir. xxiii. 21 TrLao-OrjaeTai, A has KokaarOrja-eTai. 
 [In Jer. xviii. 20 KoXacris is perh. a conflate rendering of a word meaning 
 "pit," which suggests "snaring" or "catching."] 
 
 For " Seize," Kpareco, see 1691 a. 
 
 1 [1723 rtf] "Send" etc., Trefnra. In the canonical LXX this word 
 occurs only 6 times (whereas aTroo-rfXXo) occurs about 480). It is the 
 mark of a non-Hebraic style, occurring 4 times in Wisd. and 14 in Mace. 
 In the Pentateuch, it occurs only where Rebecca (Gen. xxvii. 42) ^^ sent 
 and called Jacob," who is presumably in the same house with her or not 
 far off. In the Synoptists, it is used of sending (on a short errand) 
 messengers, soldiers, executioners, servants etc., who for the most part 
 have to return with something accomplished or with some report. Mk's 
 only instance, however, is Mk v. 12 "send us into the swine" (parall. 
 Mt. aTToo-TelXov, Lk. eTrirpe'^r} drreXBe'Lv). The Synoptists use far more 
 frequently aTroa-TeXXw, which is also used by Jn, thus : — Mk (20), 
 Mt. (22), Lk. (25), Jn (28). 
 
 [1723 <?] " Send " etc. in Jn. Jn's frequent use of 7re>7ra> arises in part 
 from the frequency of the phrase "He that sent" (almost always applied 
 to the Father) in the words of Christ, occurring more than 20 times. If 
 this phrase were deducted, Jn would use 7re/x7ra> only about six times, 
 i.e. less frequently than Luke. Except in Jn i. 22, 33 ("that we may give 
 an answer to them that sent us," " he that sent me to baptize ") nip-rroi 
 always occurs in words of Christ. Apart from the phrase " He that sent^^ 
 are (xiii. 20) "He that receiveth whomsoever I send^^^ (xiv. 26) "[The 
 Spirit] which the Father will send in my name," (xv. 26) " [The Paraclete] 
 whom I will send to you from the Father," (xvi. 7) " But if I go, I will 
 send him [the Paraclete] unto you," (xx. 21) "Even as the Father hath 
 SENT {dniaraXKiv) me, I also (xayo)) send (Tre/iTrco) yoU." 
 
 [1723yj ne/iTTO) and aTroo-reXXo). This (xx. 21) terminates the instances 
 in Jn both of dTroo-reXXco and of Tre/xTrco ; and it cannot be doubted that 
 Jn intends a difference of meaning by the different words. Had he 
 wished to use the perfect of Trefxnco ("hath sent," 7r€7rofx(f)a), no gram- 
 matical considerations need have deterred him ; for there are two instances 
 of it in the LXX alone (i Esd. ii. 26, 2 Mace. xi. 32). 
 
 [1723^] ne/xTTO) is never used in the First Epistle at all, but aTroo-reXXco 
 is used concerning the Father's sending of the Son in three solemn 
 passages (i Jn iv. 9, 10, 14) and six times in the Last Prayer in the 
 Gospel, where we find (xvii. 18) "Even as thou didst send {dTreo-reiXas) 
 me into the world, I also (/cd-yo)) did SEND (aTreo-reiXa) them into the 
 
 226 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1724] 
 
 English Greek Mk Mt. Lk. Jn 
 
 Servant (Chri. pre- 
 cepts, not parables)! dovXos i 3 i 6 
 Sheep ^ irpo^arov 2 II 2I7ori9 
 
 [1724] Sick 3 do-Oevrjs I 3 I o 
 
 Sick, be^ da-Beveco I 3 I 8 
 
 Sickness 3 dadeveia 0142 
 
 world." Comparing the passage in question (xx. 21) with xvii. 18 and 
 with others where dTroareWco is defined by various contexts (i Jn iv. 9, 10, 
 14), we are perhaps justified in thinking that aTrooTeXXco means " sending 
 away into the world at large," but ireiiirco " sending on a special errand." 
 The Saviour sends all the Apostles collectively into the world to preach 
 the Gospel (aTroo-reXXet), but He sends them on special errands to Jews, 
 Gentiles, Rome, Athens, Antioch etc. {Trefnrei). If so, the distinction in 
 Jn XX. 21 is between the mission of the incarnate Son now accomplished, 
 and the mission of His followers now beginning : " Even as the Father 
 HATH SENT (aTTcoraX/ce) me [into the world], I also send (Tre/xTrco) you 
 [severally to the several nations of the world]." 
 
 1 [1723/^] " Servant " (Chri. precepts, not parables). AoOXoy, "servant" 
 or " slave," in parables, occurs in Mk xii. 2, 4, xiii. 34, and much more 
 freq. in Mt.-Lk. But, in Synoptic precepts, it occurs only Mk x. 44 
 " Whosoever may desire among you to be first shall be servant of all," 
 Mt. XX. 27 sim. Lk. diff. (on which see 1276 — 80) ; Mt. x. 24 — 5 " nor is 
 a servant above his lord... and the servant as his lord" (where Lk. vi. 40 
 differs) ; Lk. xvii. 10 (after a parable) " Say ye, we are unprofitable 
 servants.^'' As regards Traty, see 805 — 11, and 1862. 
 
 [1723 i'\ It was shewn above (1717 d^g) that Epictetus regards 
 a "servant" or "slave" — if a slave in mind and not merely in social 
 condition — as essentially bad, being the slave of his fears, passions etc. 
 So Jn says (viii. 34) "Everyone that doeth sin is (W.H.) a slave [of sin]," 
 and adds that (viii. 35) " the slave doth not abide in the house for ever," 
 contrasting the "slave" with the "son," who "abides for ever (2263^,/")." 
 Later on, he follows Matthew (x. 24 — 5) above quoted in saying (xiii. 16) 
 (rep. XV. 20) " A servant is not greater than his lord," applying the word 
 to the apostles. Later still, he says (xv. 15) "No longer do I call you 
 servants because the servant knoweth not what his lord doeth." He 
 adds, " But you have I called friends.^'' On the connexion between this 
 and Lk. xii. 4 " you, my friends^^ see 1784 — 92. These and many other 
 facts indicate a mental friction arising from the collision, or intermixing, 
 of Greek and Hebrew words and notions about "service." 
 
 2 [1723y] " Sheep." Comp. Mt. x. 6, xv. 24 " the lost sheep of the 
 House of Israel," with Jn x. 16 "other sheep that are not of this fold," 
 where Jn suggests that the precept in Mt. x. 6 was but for a time. 
 
 3 [1724«] "Sick" etc. Jn nowhere uses the word i/do-oy. Mt. once 
 
 227 
 
[1725] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Signify 1 
 
 O-Tjuaivo) 
 
 Simon (father of 
 
 
 Judas Iscariot)^ 
 
 2ifj.a)v 
 
 Soldier^ 
 
 O-rpaTLCDTTJS 
 
 Sop* 
 
 y\ta}}XLov 
 
 Speak, I (Chri.)'^ 
 
 XaXe'o) 
 
 [1725] Standi 
 
 OTJ^KO) 
 
 Stand (appl. to Jesus)^ tarqyn 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 6 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 4 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 c. 30 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 (viii. 17) uses dadeveia in a quotation from Is. liii. 4 (Heb. not LXX). In 
 canon. LXX da-deveia occurs only 5 times, once (Job xxxvii. 7) in error, 
 and twice (Jer. vi. 21, xviii. 23) to express moral "stumbling." 
 
 1 [1724^] "Signify." Always in the phrase (xii. 33, xviii. 32, xxi. 19) 
 " signifying by what death " he should die, or glorify God. Apart from 
 Acts XXV. 27 {^''signify the charges against him"), it occurs in N.T. else- 
 where only in Acts xi. 28 ^'•signified through the Spirit," Rev. i. i '"''signified 
 ...to his servant John." 
 
 2 [1724 c\ " Simon " (father of Judas Iscariot) : Jn vi. 71 ''lovhav Si/Ltcoi/os- 
 'icTKapicorov, xiii. 2 'louSay "Slfioivos 'icrKapicoTrjSf xiii. 26 'lovda '2ifXQ}vos 
 'icTKapicorov. 
 
 3 [1724^] "Soldier," in Jn, all in the narrative of the Passion 
 (xix. 2—34). 
 
 * [1724 e] " Sop," only in Jn xiii. 26 — 30, and not elsewhere in N.T. 
 
 ^ [1724/] "I speak" (Chri.). The numbers include the first pers. 
 sing, of any tense of XaXeco in Christ's words. See 1704. Mt.'s single 
 instance is xiii. 13 "Therefore speak I to them in parables," and Lk.'s is 
 xxiv. 44 " These are my words which I spake unto you." 
 
 ® [1725 a] " Stand," a-TrjKa), generally means " stand fast (or, upright) " 
 as in Rom. xiv. 4, i Cor. xvi. 13, Gal. v. i. It is appropriate in Mk xi. 25 
 "When ye stand steadfastly praying," but not so obviously in Mk iii. 31 
 (where D has ea-rSiTes) unless it means that the mother and brethren of 
 Jesus "took their stand" at the door with persistence. In Jn viii. 44, 
 the meaning is " He was a murderer from the beginning and did not 
 standfast in the truth." In i. 26 /xeVos vfxmv orrjKfi, " there statideth in the 
 midst of you [a certain one], whom ye know not," the verb perh. has (as 
 Origen suggests ad loc.) a spiritual as well as a local meaning. 
 
 "^ [1725 <^] "Stand," tarrjixiy appl. to Jesus. The Synoptists associate 
 the " standing " of Jesus (Mk x. 49, Mt. xx. 32 crrds, Lk. xviii. 40 crTaOds 
 (1725^)) with a cure of blindness. The tradition peculiar to Lk. vi. 17 
 "having gone down [from the mountain] he stood (Jea-rrj) with them," 
 suggests a parallel between the Sermon on the Mount and the Law given 
 on Mount Sinai, whence Moses descended and spoke to his brethren. 
 Lk. V. I " standing (ea-ras) by the Lake " (in the Call of Peter and the 
 
 228 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1725] 
 
 Miraculous Draught) suggests parallelism to Mk i. i6 "passing (Mt. 
 iv. 8 walking) by the sea" (in the Call of Peter), or to Jn xxi. 4 "he 
 stood iecTTr)) on (ety) the beach" (in the Repentance of Peter and the 
 Miraculous Draught). On Lk. xxiv. 36, "stood in the midst" (Jarq ev 
 fieaco) see 1793 — 7. 
 
 [1725 c] " Stand steadfastly," aradr/vai, is applied to Jesus in Mt. xxvii. 
 II, Lk. xviii. 40, and is prob. not adequately rendered by R.V. "stood," 
 which suits the form used by Mk x. 49, Mt. xx. 32 aras. Lk. uses a-radeis 
 because he means that Jesus " stood still," " refused to go on " in spite of 
 His followers, who were rebuking the blind man because they did not 
 want to have the procession interrupted. Mk xiii. 9 aradrjaeaBe does not 
 mean "ye shall stand," but "ye shall stand {]qy. i. 18) as ''pillars^ before 
 kings for my sake," i.e. stand as steadfast witnesses for me (where Mt.- 
 Lk., missing the meaning of this, have Mt. x. 18 dxOrja-eo-Bc, Lk. xxi. 12 
 aTrayofievovs). In the LXX, o-raOrjvai, when not meaning "weighed," 
 regularly means " established," or is, at all events, distinct from " stood," 
 £.£-. Ex. xl. 17, Numb. ix. 15 (R.V.) "reared up," Deut. xix. 15 (A), 
 2 K. xiii. 6, Eccles. ii. 9, Dan. vii. 4, 5, i Mac. xiv. 29. In Judg. xx. 2, 
 eardBrjcrav (A ea-rr]) is prob. intended to represent the Heb. exactly, " pre- 
 sented themselves," "took their stand" (Gesen. 426). 
 
 [1725 d] IraOrivcu, in N.T. generally, must be distinguished from o-Tijvai. 
 On Col. iv. 12 tva a-TaBfjre, Lightf. says "standfast" — not as R.V. "stand" — 
 " doubtless the correct reading rather than or^re; comp. Mt. ii. 9, xxvii. 1 1, 
 where also the rec. txt substitutes the weaker word." Hence we should 
 
 render Mt. ii. 9 ^^ stood sti7/," and Lk. xxi. 36 "that ye may be able to 
 
 stand fast'" (where D alters (TTadfjvai to o-rrjareo-de). In Lk. xviii. 11 — 13, 
 a contrast is intended between the Pharisee " standing erect {o-raBeis) " and 
 the Publican "standing (ea-Tms) afar off." Lk. xxiv. 17 is one of the very 
 few passages correctly rendered by R.V. " t/iey stood sti/t." 
 
 [1725 e] " Stand as a steadfast witness " is a meaning of a-TaBrjvat that 
 naturally follows from the above-mentioned Hebrew notion of a prophet 
 as (Jer. i. 18) "an iron pi/tar" — the word "pillar" meaning "that which 
 stands" — standing to testify for Jehovah : and such a meaning would be 
 favoured by the saying of Deuteronomy xix. 15 "in the mouth of three 
 witnesses shall every word de made to stand" LXX o-rrjo-erai, but A 
 oTadrjaerai, and alluded to in the latter form in Mt. xviii. 16. Hence, 
 something more than the mere attitude of " standing " is implied in the 
 precept (Acts v. 20) " Stand and (a-TaBevTes) speak in the temple to the 
 people," where the angel means " stand fast as wittiesses for the Lord," 
 and this is the meaning of araBeis applied to Peter and Paul in Acts ii. 14, 
 xvii. 22, xxvii. 21. This, too, is probably the meaning in the tradition 
 peculiar to Matthew (xxvii. 11) "Now Jesus stood [erect], or stood [as 
 a witness for God], before the Governor." 
 
 [1725/] Jn has (besides the above-mentioned (1725 a) i. 26 crrriKei) 
 
 229 
 
[1725] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 vii. 37 "Jesus stood (iarrrjKfi) and cried saying, If any man thirst, let 
 him come unto me," xx. 14 ''[Mary Magdalene] beholdeth Jesus standing 
 (kfiTtiiTa)^^ XX. 19 "Jesus came and stood in the midst {eoTr] ds to ixiaov)^ 
 rep. in xx. 26, and xxi. 4 " Jesus stood on {tcrrr) els) the shore." On the 
 last three instances, see 1796. 
 
 [1725^] It is a commonplace with Philo that (i. 94) "None but the 
 true God standeth {ecnStTa),^^ and he speaks of (i. 93) "the standing, whole- 
 some, and right Logos." Comp. i. 269, 276, 425, 586, 591, 687, 688. 
 " That which is phenomenal," he says (i. 383) " does not sta7id.'" Simon 
 Magus is said to have claimed to be the Standing One (Clem. Alex. 456). 
 Origen (Huet ii. 128 — 9) connects the "standing (o-rT^Ket)" in Jn i. 26 with 
 the "standing (larTrjKei)" in vii. 37, and speaks of the Father as pre- 
 eminently " standing " : " But there stands also His Logos ever ijt the act 
 of saving {eo-rrjKe de kuI 6 Aoyos avrov del iv rcS (Toi^eiv) — whether He be 
 flesh, or whether He be amidst of men, not apprehended, nay, not even 
 seen {kuv yiv-qrai arap^ kqv fxecros fj avOpoanoav ov KaraXan^avofxevos aXX' 
 
 ouSe ^XeTTOfxevos) — but He stands also teaching, inviting all to drink " 
 
 (and then he quotes Jn vii. 37 " If any man thirst..."). No doubt Origen 
 also has in view (as regards " stood and cried " and the invitation to 
 " drink") Prov. viii. 2 — 3 "Wisdom standeth (ea-TrjKe)... She crieth aloud," 
 and Prov. ix. 5 "Eat ye of my bread and drink of the wine that I have 
 mingled." Probably John had the same passage in view. 
 
 [1725/^] The phrases ^^ saw... Jesus standiftg" and " I dehold... the Son 
 of man standing" (like that connected with Mary Magdalene "she beheld 
 Jesus standing'^) 2ixe used of the Martyr Stephen in Acts vii. 55—6, with 
 the addition, "at the right hand of God." Chrysostom (Cramer ad loc.) 
 says, "Why, then, 'standing' and not 'seated'.? To shew the active help 
 (dvTLXrjyjrLv) [extended] to (els) the Martyr. For also about the Father it 
 is said, 'Arise, O God' (ai/aora, 6 Oeos), and again, 'Now will I arise 
 (dvao-Trjo-ofiai), saith the Lord.'" But the word "Arise" thus quoted twice 
 from the Psalms is quite different as to its Hebrew meaning from the 
 word €(TTr]Ka, used of (Gen. xviii. 2) the three angels ^''standing" before 
 Abraham, and of God (Ps. Ixxxii. i) ''^standing in the congregation of the 
 gods," and of Wisdom (Prov. viii. 2) ^^ standing in the midst of the ways" 
 and "crying aloud." The latter means "stand as a pillar," "stand fast," 
 "stand as a watchman or sentinel." The explanation given by Basilius 
 (Cramer ad loc.) is more like that of Philo and Origen, and more con- 
 sonant with the LXX use of eo-rtjKa or eo-rrjv : " I think the standing and 
 fixedness (tt}v fiev a-rda-iv k. t. Kadidpvonv) suggests the compactness of 
 nature and its universal stability {t6 Trdyiov r^s (f>vcr€(os k. travTrj orao-i/ioi/ 
 viro(f)aiv€iv).'^ The Revelation (iii. 20) represents Jesus as saying, " Behold, 
 I stand at the door and knock." Perhaps John wished to describe Him, 
 after the Resurrection, as thus "standing," and Mary Magdalene as the 
 first to respond to the call. 
 
 230 
 
 1 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1726] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 [1726] Stone (vb.)i 
 
 \iddCa> 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 "Stoop and look in "^ 
 
 ' TrapaKVTTTO) 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 [I] 
 
 2 
 
 Sychar^ 
 
 2vxdp 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 Synagogue, put out 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 of* 
 
 aTTOcrvvdycoyos 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Take, seize, catch^ 
 
 TTta^ft) 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 ' fiapTvpem 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 33 
 
 Testify, testimony. 
 
 papTvpia 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 14 
 
 witness^ 
 
 fiaprvptov 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 fxdprvs 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 That, or because 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 (2174 foil.) 
 
 OTl 
 
 C. lOO 
 
 c. 140 
 
 c. 180 
 
 c. 270 
 
 1 [1726«] "Stone" (vb.). Always applied to an attempt to "stone" Jesus, 
 Jn X. 31 — 3, xi. 8 (comp. viii. 59 "they therefore took up stones to cast at 
 him"). Ai^a^Q) is also in [Jn viii. 5]. Ai^o/SoXeco occurs Mk (o), Mt. (2), 
 Lk. (I), Jn (o). 
 
 2 [1726^] "Stoop and look in" (so R.V. in Gospels, but?). In Jn, 
 only in xx. 5, 1 1, of the beloved disciple and Mary looking into the sepul- 
 chre ; perh. also in [[Lk. xxiv. 12]]. In N.T. elsewhere, only in Jas i. 25, 
 I Pet. i. 12, of a metaphorical looking into the Law of Liberty or the 
 mysteries of Redemption. See 1798—1804. 
 
 3 "Sychar," Jn iv. 5, SS " Shechem," see Ejtc. " Sychar." 
 
 * "Synagogue, put out of,'^ Jn ix. 22, xii. 42, xvi. 2. Not elsewhere in 
 N.T. 
 
 5 "Take." See notes on "seize" (1723^—^), and on "receive" (1721/—^). 
 
 6 [1726 c] " Testify," " testimony" etc. The word fiaprvpia is very rare 
 in canon. LXX. It nowhere represents a Heb. word, exc. in the 
 phrase Ex. xx. 16, Deut. v. 20, Prov. xxv. 18 p.. "^(vdrj, in i S. ix. 24 
 (A) €ls papTvplav (B -ov), and in Ps. xix. 7 "The testimony of the Lord is 
 sure, making wise the simple." 
 
 [1726 d^ Epictetus, toward the end of the first century, had probably 
 made pxiprvpia (to denote the " testimony " that every good man is bound 
 to give to God) a household word among many serious Greeks (i. 29. 48) 
 " What testimony dost thou give to God ? " (iv. 8. 32) " He testifieth a 
 testimony to virtue." (Comp. i. 29. 49, iii. 22. 86.) The same writer 
 introduces God as saying to man (i. 29. 47) " Testify unto me," describes 
 (i. 29. 49) what man is to '•^ testify ^^ and inculcates (i. 29. 56) ^Uestifyi^ig 
 by action to one's words." He also freq. uses p^dprvs in this sense 
 (iii. 26. 28) " God doth not cease to care for His ministers and witnesses." 
 Reasons have been given above (1696^) for Jn's avoidance of the term 
 pdpTvs, as being, in some Christian circles, used in the technical sense of 
 " martyr." On the Synoptic phrase els paprvpiov, see 1695 d. 
 
 231 
 
[1727] 
 
 SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 That, i.e. in order 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 that (1695 c) 
 
 Lva 
 
 C.65 
 
 c. 40 
 
 c. 50 
 
 c. 150 
 
 Thomas 1 
 
 Qconas 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 7 
 
 Thou (nom.) (2402) 
 
 (TV 
 
 lO 
 
 18 
 
 C.26 
 
 c. 60 
 
 Tiberias 2 
 
 Ti^epids 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 [1727] Together^ 
 
 OflOV 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Trouble* 
 
 rapdao-co 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 6 
 
 1 "Thomas." Mk iii. 18, Lk. vi. 15 MadBaiov k. Oafidv, Mt. iii. 3 
 Ooifms K. Ma66aios 6 reXavrjs. 
 
 2 [1726 d] " Tiberias," in N.T. only in Jn vi. i " the sea of Galilee 
 which is [the sea] of Tibet'ias^^ vi. 23 "There came boats from Tiberias^'' 
 xxi. I "Jesus manifested himself again to the disciples at the sea of 
 Tiberias:' Mk-Mt. use "sea of Galilee" or "sea," Lk. "lake" or "lake 
 of Gennesaret." 
 
 3 [1727 a\ " Together," Jn iv. 36, xx. 4, xxi. 2. In N.T., the only other 
 instance is Acts ii. i " They were all together in the same place," where it 
 appears not to be superfluous but to imply unity of purpose. This is also 
 implied in Jn iv. 36 "that he that soweth may rejoice together and he that 
 reapeth," where instead of oixov koI we should have expected ofioims kuL 
 Probably it is also implied in the account of the two disciples " running 
 together" to the sepulchre, Jn xx. 4 erpexov de ol 8vo o/xov (comp. the 
 Targ. on Gen. xxii. 8 eiropevBrjaav dfx(f)6T€poi (xxii. 6 ol 8vo) ap,a, Onk. " as 
 one,'' Jer. I "m heart entirely as one"). The last instance in Jn denotes 
 the unity of the Seven shortly before the Feast on the One Bread, where 
 the first places in the list are given to Peter the Denier and Thomas the 
 Unbeliever (Jn xxi. 2) "There were together Simon Peter and Thomas...." 
 In the canon. LXX, o\i.ov occurs nowhere except Ezr. ii. 64 AR bp.ov 
 (B om.), Job xxxiv. 29 op,ov (n o\x.olov). It is 13 times in Wisd. and Mace. 
 
 * [1727 <^] "Trouble," rapacro-o), in the Synoptists, means (pass.) 
 "alarmed," Mk vi. 50 (parall. Mt. xiv. 26), Mt. ii. 3, Lk. i. 12, xxiv. 38. 
 In Jn, it occurs (Chri.) in xii. 27 "Now is my soul troubled" and xiv. i, 
 27 "Let not your heart be troubled" On its threefold application to 
 Christ as "troubling himself," "troubled in soul," and "troubled in 
 spirit" (xi. 2,2)^ xii. 27, xiii. 21) see 920. 
 
 [1727 c\ " Freedom from trouble," drapa^ia, is, according to Epictetus, 
 the gift of God to man, and no one has a right to be '■''troubled," {Ench. § 5) 
 "Men are troubled {rapdo-creL) not by facts but by their notions about facts. 
 For example, death is not terrible — since else it would have appeared 
 [so] to Socrates — but the notion about death, the notion that it is terrible 
 — this it is that is the terror. When therefore we feel pestered (e/irro- 
 diCo>p.e6a), or troubled, or grieved (XvTrw/xe^a), let us never blame others, 
 but only ourselves, that is to say, our own notions." No group of words 
 
 232 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1727] 
 
 Mk 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 True (i)i 
 
 aXr)6r)S 
 
 True (2)2 
 
 aXr]6iv6s 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 14 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 9 
 
 is perhaps more frequent in Epictetus than those bearing on '^troud/e" 
 and "freedom from trouble'''' ; and it is almost certain that Jn, in describing 
 Christ as thrice " troubled," and as on one occasion " troubling himself," 
 is writing with allusion to this Stoic doctrine which must have been 
 familiar to all educated Greeks at the beginning of the second century, 
 
 1 [1727^] "True" (i), aXT/^j^y, in Synoptists, only in Mk xii. 14, 
 Mt. xxii. 16 "We know that thou art true" parall. Lk. xx. 21, "We know 
 that thou sayest and teachest rightly." It is not surprising that Lk. 
 deviates : for " true " is perh. only once applied to persons in canon. 
 LXX (Nehem. vii. 2 " a faithful man," avrjp a.) : and Steph. gives very few 
 instances, except where the poets speak of a '■'• t7'uthful accuser," a 
 ^'' truthfulix'iQVid,^^ ox {Iliad xii. 433) "an honest sempstress" (lit. truthful 
 in weighing out her work). Jn thrice applies it to persons, once, generally, 
 vii. 18 "he that seeketh the glory of him that sent him is true^^ \.q. not 
 tempted to falsehood by self-interest, or affectation, and twice of God, 
 iii. 33 "God is true,^^ viii. 26 "He that sent me is true.''^ 
 
 [1727^] In Jn vi. 55 "my flesh is true food and my blood is true 
 drink," Origen (once) and other authorities have "truly," and Chrys., 
 while reading " true," appears to give " truly " as one of two interpretations. 
 But it may be used in the sense in which Socrates maintained (Plato 36 — 
 40) in the Philebus, that some pleasures are "true {dXrjBels)" others 
 "false." So in the Phcedo^ Socrates speaks of (Plato 69 b) '■'•true virtue." 
 
 2 [1727/] " True " (2), oXtjOlvos, in classical Greek, means " genuine," 
 and could not mean "truthful" except in special contexts as when one 
 speaks of a "genuine prophet, judge etc." In this sense it occurs in 
 Lk. xvi. II "If ye have not been faithful in the unrighteous mammon, 
 who will entrust to you the genuine [riches].''" But in LXX it is applied 
 to God, as in Exodus (xxxiv. 6) ^''abounding in truth," aXrjdivos ; and where 
 Ezr. ix. 15 has "O Lord,... thou 2iX\. righteous {dUaios)" the parall. i Esdr. 
 viii. 89 has aXr]6iv6s. Philo ii. 599 contrasting "the genuine God" with 
 "the falsely so-called god," and St Paul (i Thess. i. 9 "Ye turned.... from 
 idols to serve a living and genuiiie God "), use the word in its classical 
 sense: but in Rev. iii. 7 — 14, vi. 10, where "true," aXT/^trds-, is combined 
 with " holy " and " faithful," the meaning seems to be " truthful." 
 
 [1727^] In Jn, an attempt is made to combine the Greek meaning 
 of '•'"genuine" with the Hebraic meaning of ^^true" (i.e. "faithful to one's 
 word," " keeping one's promise "). A false god, or a false prophet, might 
 speak ^'' truth" — and deceive, "keeping the word of promise to the 
 ear" — as wizards and witches do in Shakespeare. Isaiah says bitterly to 
 Israel, trusting in false lights (1. 11) "Walk ye in the light of your fire.'* 
 
 233 
 
[1727] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 English Greek Mk Mt. Lk. Jn 
 
 Truly 1 (s. 1696 rt) dkrjdw 2337 
 
 Jn's Prologue calls the Logos (i, 9) "the light, t/ie genuine \light\J^ and 
 the Epistle says (i Jn ii. 8) "A new commandment I write unto you, 
 which thing is true {oKrjOes) in him and in you, because the darkness is 
 passing away and the h'gAt, the genuine \light'\ {to (pas to a\T]0iv6v), now 
 shineth." This means that the new light is not only "true" but "the 
 only genuine light," the source of all light from the beginning of the world, 
 now at last to be revealed not in twilight but in daylight. 
 
 [1727^] In Jn, akrjOivos is never confused with dXr)6r)s. It never 
 means merely "true" in the sense of veracious. As in Hebrews (viii. 2) 
 "the /r«^ tabernacle " is the one that "the Lord pitched and not man," 
 and the earthly sanctuary is regarded not as being the *' true one " but 
 only (Heb. ix. 24) "typical of the true \one\^^ so in Jn, (vi. 32) " the true 
 bread" and (xv. i) "the true vine" mean that the ideal is now at last 
 revealed. It has been stated above that '"'' genuine^'' when applied to a 
 "prophet" or a "judge," necessarily includes the additional meaning of 
 *''' truthful^'' and so it does in Jn viii. 16 "My judgment is genuine 
 [judgment]" i.e. not biassed, xix. 35 "His testimony is ge7iuine [testi- 
 monj/]" i.e. the testimony of an eye-witness, one that has enjoyed the 
 sight, or vision, of that to which he testifies. In vii. 28 " I have not 
 come of myself, dut he that sent me is — ," the antithesis requires that the 
 italicised clause should mean " but I have a real mission " as opposed to 
 a false prophet, who has no '"'■reaP mission. Hence what has to be sup- 
 plied is "<2 real and true Sender.^'' The " reality " (no doubt) here includes 
 not only ^''really'''' sending but also sending with a "r^^/" message., i.e. a 
 true message. Hence akriQivo^ may here be described as including — but 
 not as meaning — " true." 
 
 [1727 z] Jn iv. y] (R.V.) " Herein is the saying true., One soweth, and 
 another reapeth (eV yap Tovrcd 6 \6yos ccttIv oXtjOlvos on, ^AXXo?...)" is not 
 a correct rendering. The meaning is — as Cyril, in effect, says about the 
 context (Cramer ad loc.) and as Origen's comment suggests {ad loc. Huet 
 ii. 233 — 4, 241 — 2) — "The cynical worldly saying about 'one sowing and 
 another reaping' ^nds its ideal and true expression in the world of the 
 spiritual harvest to which I have bidden you ' lift up your eyes,' in which 
 the sower and the reaper rejoice together." This, says Cyril, "does not 
 happen in the material world but // does in the spirituaV ^AXrjdiuos, then, 
 (as in Hebrews) means here "really, ideally, or spiritually existent." 
 Chrysostom, although misled by reading 6 dXrjdrjs, is not much misled as 
 to the sense : " This saying was in use among the common folk {ol 
 7roXXot)...and He means that this spying j^nds its truth more especially 
 herein {evTavda naXio-Ta ttjv aXrjdeiav e;^ei)," and he explains " herein " as 
 referring to the spiritual sowing of the prophets. 
 
 1 [1727y] "Truly," in Lk., only in (Chri.) " I say unto you 0/ a truth 
 
 234 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1727] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Truth 1 
 
 aXrjOeia 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 25 
 
 (a.)" Lk. ix. 27, xii. 44 (D dfiriv), xxi. 3 : never (Chri.) in Mk-Mt. but used 
 in assertions that Peter is " truly " one of Christ's disciples or that Christ 
 is the Son of God (Mk xiv. 70, Mt. xxvi. 73, Mk xv. 39, Mt. xiv. ^^y 
 xxvii. 54). 
 
 [1727 >^] In Jn it is applied to assertions of believers about Christ in 
 iv. 42 ^'- truly the Saviour of the world," vi. 14, vii. 40 ^^ truly the 
 prophet." In vii. 26, " Can it be that the rulers truly recognised (oXtjOcos 
 eyvooa-av) that this is the Christ ?" the meaning may be "that they really 
 recognised [I.e. knew m their hearts though they would not own it] " or 
 " can it be really true that they recognised." 
 
 [1727/] In Jn, it occurs in Christ's words as follows, i. 47 " See, [here 
 is one that is] truly an Israelite," viii. 31 "[then] are ye truly my 
 disciples," xvii. 8 " and they recogftised truly {eyvoaa-av dXrjdws) that I came 
 forth from thee." In these three cases the meaning is probably " in fact 
 [and not merely in name\^' or " in heart [and not merely in word]" and 
 perh. in i. 47 there is some play on the word " Israel," the root of which, 
 though distinct from Yashar^ " upright," " straightforward," is identical 
 with the latter without vowel points. [ Yashar =Trom.m. once dXrjdeia, five 
 times d\r]dLv6s.] This is more likely than that Jn (like Lk.) should repre- 
 sent Jesus as using "truly" in the sense "I speak the truth." 
 
 1 [1727 m] " Truth," in the Synoptists, occurs only in the phrase " in 
 truth" (Mk xii. 14, 32, Mt. xxii. 16, Lk. iv. 25, xx. 21, xxii. 59 eV dXrjdetas, 
 exc. in Mt. xxii. 16 iv a.), and in Mk v. 33 "told him all the truth." As 
 an attribute of God, or a subject of Christ's teaching, it is non-existent in 
 the Three Gospels. 
 
 [1727 n] "Truth," with "grace" in Jn, occurs twice where the 
 Prologue (i, 14 — 17) describes the incarnate Logos as "full of grace and 
 truth" and "the Law" {i.e. the Law mentioned in O.T.) as "given through 
 Moses" but "the grace and the truth^'' (i.e. perh. the grace and the truth 
 mentioned in O.T.) as "brought into being through Jesus Christ." The 
 O.T. constantly couples " mercy " and " truth " where we should rather 
 speak of "kindness and truth." Jn, systematically avoiding the Greek 
 word "mercy (eXeos)" (Heb. "kindness (or, mercy)") probably represents 
 it here by "grace" i.e. "graciousness." We might expect that the Fourth 
 Gospel would proceed to develop this twofold revelation of (i) '■'■ grace" 
 (2) ^^ truth." But the Pauline Epistles had sufficiently developed the 
 doctrine of ^'- grace." The Fourth Evangelist says that we have received 
 from the fulness of the Logos (i. 16) "grace for grace," but after this 
 passage he never mentions " grace " again in the Gospel or First Epistle. 
 He concentrates himself on the doctrine of "truth." 
 
 [1727^] "The truth," in Jn, cannot be discussed apart from "the 
 
 235 
 
[1727] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 Spirit." For John regards it primarily as a correspondence between God 
 and the Word, or the Father and the Son, in "the Spirit." This 
 harmonizes with the philosophy of Epictetus about "the spirit" of man 
 and its mission. Explaining how the images of things we see are 
 conveyed through the eyes, Epictetus says (ii. 23. 3) " Did God give you 
 eyes for nothing.? Did He for nothing infuse in them a spirit so strong 
 and of such a graphic power that it darts out far away and takes the 
 impressions of the things seen ? What messenger could be so quick and 
 careful?" So St Paul asks (i Cor. ii. 11) "What man knoweth the things 
 of the man, save only the spirit of the maji ? " i.e. the " Spirit " that is 
 " infused " in his senses ; and he says that, similarly, the things of God are 
 searched by " the Spirit of God^ 
 
 [1727/] The Johannine phrases of connexion between " the truth " 
 and " the Spirit " are largely explained by the facts of the last paragraph. 
 Sometimes they are both regarded as spheres, sometimes " the Spirit " is 
 a witness to, or a guide to, the sphere of spiritual " truth." The "genuine 
 {akr}Bt,v6s)" worshipper is to worship (iv. 23 — 4) {bis) '^ in spirit and 
 truth" Satan (viii. 44) "did not stand fast in the truth" and "there is 
 no truth in him" The Last Discourse thrice mentions (xiv. 17, xv. 26, 
 xvi. 13) ^'' the Spirit of the truth" and says that it will guide the disciples 
 (xvi. 13) '"''into all the truths The Epistle not only repeats (i Jn iv. 6) 
 ''Uhe Spirit of the truth" but adds (v. 6) "the Spirit it is that testifieth, 
 because the Spirit is the truth" — that is to say, the Spirit, like the 
 "swift messenger" described by Epictetus, cannot help "testifying" 
 because its very being is that kind of eternal coming and going in the 
 correspondence or harmony between God and His children by which man 
 is enabled to " search the deep things of God." 
 
 [1727 q\ " The truth," or " the Spirit of truth," being identified with 
 the "correspondence" between the Father and the Son, might be called 
 the Spirit of sonship, or the Spirit of Freedom as opposed to that of 
 Slavery. Hence our Lord says (viii. 32) "The truth shall make you free" 
 (as St Paul says, 2 Cor. iii. 17 "where the Spirit of the Lord is, [there] 
 freedom is "). And since many religions move the mind mainly through 
 fear, and their priests and prophets and "holy men" make gain out 
 of false fears, stress is laid by John upon the connexion between 
 "holiness" and truth (xvii. 17) "Make them holy in thy truth" The 
 Logos also says to God the Father (xvii. 17) "Thy Logos is truth" : and 
 since, through this Logos or Truth, one passes to Hfe in the Father, Jesus 
 is represented as saying (xiv. 6) " I am the way, the truth, and the 
 life." 
 
 [1727 r] This doctrine of " truth " the Evangelist describes as being 
 put before both the Jewish and the Gentile world in vain. The Jews, 
 when they hear Christ saying (viii. 32) " Ye shall know the truth and the 
 truth shall make you free," put aside " the truth " and fasten on " free " 
 
 236 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY 
 
 [1728] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 £1728] Up, s. Above 
 
 ai/o) 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 Washi 
 
 VITTTQ) 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 13 
 
 Washi, i.e. bathe 
 
 \ov(3i 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 Water (Chri.)^ 
 
 v8(op 
 
 2 
 
 O 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 Whence ?3 
 
 iroOev 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 13 
 
 Where ?* 
 
 TTOV 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 7 
 
 i8 
 
 Whole, healthy 5 
 
 vyiTjS 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 6 
 
 as an insult : " We are Abraham's seed and have never been in bondage 
 to any man " — the fact being that they had no right conception of " free- 
 dom" and hence no right conception of " truth." Again, when Jesus says 
 to Pilate (xviii. ;^y) "Everyone that is of tke truth hearkeneth to my 
 voice," the Roman Governor, who has some smattering of Greek 
 philosophy, taking the view attacked by Epictetus, replies, not asking 
 what '•''the truth" may be, but questioning whether there is any such 
 thing, " What is truth ? " This is the last mention of the word in the 
 fourth Gospel. 
 
 1 [1728 a] "Wash," j/iTrro), in Jn, refers, 5 times, to the washing of the 
 blind man in the pool of Siloam, and 8 times to the Saviour washing the 
 feet of the disciples. Mk vii. 3, Mt. xv. 2 refer to the Jewish washing of 
 hands before meals. Mt. vi. 17 '■''wash thy face" is the only instance 
 (Chri.) in the Synoptic Gospels. Jn xiii. 10 "he that is bathed (A.V. 
 washed) " distinguishes the washing of the whole body from the washing 
 of a part. 
 
 2 [1728/^] "Water" (Chri.), in Mk ix. 41 "a cup of water^' is parall. 
 to Mt. X. 42 "a cup of cold [water] (\|/-vxpo{}) " : Mk xiv. 13 (Lk. xxii. 10) 
 "a man bearing a pitcher of water'''' is wholly omitted by Mt. : Lk. vii. 44 
 *'thou gavest me no water for my feet" is peculiar to Lk., and so is 
 Lk. xvi. 24 (parable) " that he may dip the tip of his finger in waterJ^ 
 None of these passages are doctrinal. The Johannine instances — with 
 the exception of ii. 7 — are all doctrinal (iii. 5) "born oi water and spirit," 
 iv. 10 — 15 (the dialogue on the "living water"), vii. 38 "rivers of living 
 water." 
 
 3 [1728^] "Whence." lioOev freq. occurs in discourses as to the 
 origin of the Spirit, the Messiah, and Jesus, among the Jews and in 
 words of the Lord Jn iii. 8, vii. 27 {bis), 28, viii. 14 {bis) ix. 29, 30, also 
 in Pilate's question (xix. 9) " Whence art thou .? " (2403). 
 
 4 [1728^] "Where." Hov, in Jn, occurs first in i. 38 "Rabbi, where 
 abidest thou ? " and then freq. of the goal or abiding-place of the Lord, or 
 of the Spirit, Jn iii. 8, vii. 35, viii. 14 {bis\ xiii. 36, xiv. 5, xvi. 5 ; also in 
 Mary Magdalene's doubt (xx. 2, 13, 15) ^^ where they have laid him." 
 
 5 [1728 e'\ " Whole," " healthy." Jn's instances of vyir^s all refer to the 
 man healed on the Sabbath, v. 6—15, vii. 23. In Jn v. 4, it is part of an 
 
 237 
 
[1728] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Wilderness (of 
 
 Arabia)! 
 Will2 
 
 eprjfios 
 
 O 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 6 
 
 o 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 II 
 
 Witness, s. testify, 
 testimony 
 
 p,apTvp€a> 
 p-apTvpia 
 paprvpiov 
 
 o 
 3 
 3 
 
 I 
 o 
 3 
 
 I 
 I 
 3 
 
 33 
 14 
 o 
 
 Work (n.)3 
 
 paprvs 
 epyov 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 6 
 
 2 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 27 
 
 interpolation. In Mk v. 34, laBi vyir)s diro rrjs pdamyos <rov — where it is 
 one of three Mk-clauses, of which Lk. has one, and Mt. two — it seems to 
 be a conflation. In Mt. xii. 13, "it was restored whole^ as the other^" 
 Mk Lk. omit ^^ whole as the other J^ Lk. has the vb vyiaivo) (3), not in Mk, 
 Mt, or Jn. 
 
 1 [1728/] "Wilderness" (of Arabia), in Jn iii. 14, vi. 31, 49 referring 
 to the brazen serpent, or the manna, "in the wilderness." [In xi. 54 Jn 
 appears to mean "the wilderness of Judaea," and in i. 23 Jn (like the 
 Synoptists) quotes Is. xl. 3.] On eprjpos (adj.) see 1679. 
 
 2 [1728^] " Will," in Mk, occurs only in Mk iii. 35 " Whosoever shall 
 do the will of God^'' where parall. Mt. xii. 50 has "the will of 7ny Father'''^ 
 and Lk. viii. 21 "the word of God." The contrast in Lk. xxii. 42 "Not 
 my will but thine " (expressed by the vb. BiXu) in the parall. Mk xiv. 36, 
 Mt. xxvi. 39) occurs in Jn v. 30 " I seek not mine own will but the will 
 of him that sent me," and vi. 38 " not that I may do mine own will but 
 the will of him that sent me." The children of God are said to be 
 begotten (Jn i. 13) "not from the will of the flesh nor from the will oi 
 man (? dvhpo^) but from God." 
 
 3 [1728 >^] "Work" (n.). The only Synoptic precept about works of 
 righteousness is in Mt. v. 16 "that they may see your good works" unless 
 one can be said to be implied in the parable in Mk xiii. 34 " having given 
 ...to each his work." Jn mentions "works" in two ways, ist as good or 
 bad, in men, who accordingly come to the light or flee from it (Jn iii. 19, 
 20, 21, vii. 7, viii. 39) and comp. viii. 41 "ye do the works of your father," 
 the " father " being afterwards called " the devil " : 2nd, as the " works " 
 appointed for the Son by the Father. Evil " works " are recognised in 
 two of the three instances of the word in the Epistle (i Jn iii. 8) "that he 
 may destroy the works of the devil," (iii. 12) "because his works were 
 evil," (iii. 18) "let us not love in word... but in work and truth." 
 
 [1728/] Epictetus says (i. 29. 56) "It is not maxims that are now 
 wanting. The books are choke full of Stoic maxims. What then is 
 wanting ? The man to use these maxims. The man to testify in action 
 (ep-yo)) to his words (rots \c^oi^)P Pouring scorn on the philosopher that 
 tests his progress by the amount of his reading, he bids him seek 
 
 238 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1728] 
 
 English 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Work (vb.)i 
 
 epya^ojuat 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 7 
 
 World, age 2 
 
 aicov 
 
 2 
 
 7 
 
 5 
 
 I 
 
 World 
 
 Koaixos 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 
 3 
 
 75 
 
 Ye (nom.) (2399) 
 
 vfiels 
 
 lO 
 
 31 
 
 C. 20 
 
 68 
 
 Yet, not 3 
 
 ovTroa 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 13 
 
 progress in action (i. 4. 11). Jn agrees with him in the importance 
 that he attaches to action, but differs from him in one very important 
 point. In Epictetus, "action" consists (i. 4. 11, ii. 14. 7) in so regulating 
 one's desires and impulses that one may be " in harmony with what goes 
 on {tol^ yivo\iivois)l^ and that nothing may happen to us against our will. 
 In Jn, "action" consists in such deeds as a father would do to children 
 or a brother to brothers. 
 
 J [1728y] "Work" (vb.) epyaCo^iai, occurs in Mk xiv. 6 (parall. 
 Mt. xxvi. 10) "she /latk wrought (rjpydaaTo) a good work on me," where 
 Lk. om., and Jn differs. Lk. has xiii. 14 "there are six days in which 
 one must work." ^Epydrrjs, " labourer " or " doer," occurs Mk (o), Mt. (6), 
 Lk. (4), Jn (o). 
 
 2 [1728 k] " World," i.e. the creation of the world. Jn ix. 32 " From 
 the \creatio7i of the\ world (ck tov aiavos) it was never heard...." The 
 numbers above do not include the phrase els rbv al5>va (or els tovs al5>vas\ 
 on which see " For ever " (1712 d). 
 
 3 [1728/] "Not yet," in Lk., only in xxiii. 53 '' not yet laid." In 
 Mk iv. 40, viii. 17, 21, Mt. xvi. 9 "Have ye not yet faith, understanding 
 etc." In Mk xiii. 7, Mt. xxiv. 6 "But not yet \% the end." In Mk xi. 2 
 " had not yet sat." In Jn, " not yet " occurs in connexion with " my hour, 
 or season," ii. 4, vii. 6, and with "his hour" vii. 30, viii. 20. Comp. 
 XX. 17 '''' Not yet\i.2i\& I ascended...." 
 
 [1728 /g] 'Epixr}V€v(o, in N.T., is connected with Jn i. 42 Krjcfydsy ix. 7 
 StXcoti/A, Heb. vii. 2 MeXxia-edeK. MeOepiirjvevo) is in Mk v. 41, xv. 22, 34, 
 Mt. i. 23, Jn i. 38, 41. The Synoptists always translate the Aramaic 
 " Cephas " and " Messias " into Gk. ; Jn transliterates the Aramaic and 
 adds the Gk. interpretation. 
 
 A. V. 239 17 
 
[1728] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 ADDITIONAL NOTE ON dyandv AND <f)t\elu 
 
 [1728 m] The variations in the use of dyairdv and <^Lkelv 
 may be illustrated by Xen. Mem. II. vii. 9, 12, where Socrates 
 tells Aristarchus that, because he gives his fourteen dependent 
 female relations nothing to do, he (at present) does not ''like 
 (cjxXetv) " them nor they him ; but, if he will give them some 
 occupation, then, says Socrates, " You will /ike {(jytkelv) them, 
 seeing they are profitable to you, and they will /ove (dyaTrdv) 
 you when they see that you take pleasure in them." The 
 narrative goes on to say that Aristarchus took this advice, 
 and " They began to like (<l>i,\€lv) him as their protector and 
 he began to love (dyaTrdv) them as being profitable to him " — 
 •a curious reversal of terms that may be explained as humorous 
 •(if Aristarchus was a little too fond of money) but hardly as 
 unintentional. L.S. (dyairdv) quotes this passage as shewing 
 that dyaTrdv "strictly differs from (fiCkelv as implying regard 
 or affection rather than passion " : but no passion is contem- 
 plated here either in d. or in <^. Steph. {dyaTrdv) also quotes 
 Dio 44, p. 1 75 J i^i^'TjO-CLTe avrov oo? Trarepa /cal r/yaTrijaare a)? 
 €vepyeT7]v, "you were fond of him as a father and loved hivci as 
 a benefactor." 
 
 [1728 ft] The following passage from Plato's Lysis suggests 
 that dyaTrdv sometimes implies "being drawn towards," and 
 (fnXelv ''drawing towards oneself," (215 b) '"And he that needs 
 (Beofievofi) nothing would consequently be drawn towards 
 nothing (ovSe to dyaTrwr] dv) ? ' ' He would not' ' And that 
 which he was not drawn towards, he consequently would not 
 draw towards himself (o he fxr] dyaTTwi), ovB' dv </)fcXo?) ? ' " 
 The element of choice (but sometimes also sexual love) in 
 (ptXelv comes out also in passages where some man or woman 
 is said to be loved or favoured above another (Steph. Iliad 
 vii. 204, ix. 450 etc.). In Aelian Var. Hist. ix. i Trdvv o-(f)6hpa 
 
 240 
 
FROM JOHANNINE VOCABULARY [1728] 
 
 dyairrjo-a^ avrov^ koX vir avrcov (ptXrjOeU iv to5 fiepei,, the 
 phrase iv rcS fjuepec, " for their part," is probably to be explained 
 as Xen. Anab. vii. 6. 36 eV tw y^kpei Kal irapa to /juepo^, "in the 
 discharge of duty and beyond duty." Hence the meaning 
 probably is "being loved by them in their turn!' almost 
 equivalent to "as in duty bound'' ; and it perhaps implies a 
 slight contrast to the "exceeding affection {cn^o'^pa d'yairrjaa'^y' 
 on the other side. 
 
 [1728^] These facts are important as shewing that a 
 distinction between d^airdv and (f>LXelv was recognised in 
 Greek literature — as also the distinction in Latin between 
 "amo" and "diligo" (Wetst. on Jn xi. 3) — from Plato down- 
 wards. But John would also be influenced by the LXX, 
 where <j>t\€lv more often (14) represents the Hebrew "kiss" 
 than the Hebrew "like" or "be fond of" (10), and in the 
 latter sense is applied to " liking " food or drink in Gen. xxvii. 
 4, 9, 14, Prov. xxi. ly, Hos. iii. i. It also describes Jacob's 
 favouring Joseph in Gen. xxxvii. 4, and is used of " lovers," in 
 a bad sense, in Jer. xxii. 22, Lam. i. 2. The dislike of the 
 LXX to apply this comparatively low-class word to the 
 Wisdom of God comes out clearly in Prov. viii. 17 "I love 
 (dyaTrdco) them that love {(j>L\ovvTa^) me," where the same 
 Heb. verb that is rendered <J3iXelv when applied to men is 
 rendered dyawdv when applied to the Wisdom of God — 
 assuredly not for variety or euphony, but for seemliness 
 
 [1728/] John, who says that God is dydirr), and that the 
 fundamental command of Christ is dyairdv, could not but use 
 dyairdv to signify the highest kind of love. The lower word, 
 (f)L\elv^ John uses as follows, (i) Twice (xi. 3, 36) it is put 
 into the mouths of the sisters of Lazarus and the Jews, as the 
 word used by them about Christ's special love, where the 
 Evangelist himself prefers to say (xi. 5) rjydiTa. (2) Once 
 (xx. 2) it is used by the Evangelist to describe the beloved 
 disciple himself when he had temporarily fallen into unbelief 
 and was for the moment not worthy of the higher love. 
 
 241 17—2 
 
[1728] SYNOPTIC DEVIATIONS 
 
 (3) In our Lord's lips it is used thrice, in special contexts 
 (v. 20, xvi. 27 bis) metaphorically about "taking into the 
 circle of one's friends and households" (4) Twice (xii. 25, 
 XV. 19) the Lord uses it to describe the sensual and selfish love 
 of one's life or the love of the world for its favourites: (5) He 
 also uses it once, and for the last time (xxi. 17) concerning 
 the lower love, to cause the repentant Peter to be {ib.) 
 " grieved," that he may rise from the lower love to the higher. 
 (6) In the context, it is used four times (xxi. 15, 16, 17 bis) in 
 the same sense by Peter and the Evangelist. These are all 
 the instances of the Johannine use of the word. 
 
 1 [1728 ^] See 1784 — 92. Comp. Rev. iii. 19 "as many as I place among 
 my friends {^CKm) I reprove and chasten." In Tit. iii. 15 ao-rraa-m r. 
 (PiXovvTas rjfxas iv Tri'oTfi, the meaning is doubtful. Not much can be 
 inferred from i Cor. xvi. 22 et ns ov ^Ckci t. Kvpiov, as ov (f)ika> is freq. in 
 Gk. literature in a sense nearly equivalent to exdaipco. The fourth and 
 last instance of 0. in N.T., outside the Gospels, is Rev. xxii. 15 nds (f)iX(ov 
 K. TToicov yp-evdos. The rarity of (f). in the Epistles, and the fact that the 
 Synoptists scarcely use it except of the "kissing" by Judas, make Jn's use 
 of it all the more remarkable, and confirm the view that he has a purpose 
 in employing the word and in distinguishing it from dyaTrav on which 
 see 1744 (i)— (xi). 
 
 242 
 
BOOK III 
 
 JOHANNINE AND SYNOPTIC 
 AGREEMENTS 
 
 243 
 
CHAPTER I 
 
 WORDS PECULIAR TO JOHN AND MARK 
 
 § I. Antecedent probability 
 
 [1729] Mark is the most concrete of the Evangelists, John, 
 the most abstract. Mark deals mostly with " mighty works," 
 especially works of healing (and these, largely, of an exorcistic 
 character) ; John describes only seven " signs," and no 
 exorcisms. In Mark, Christ's sayings are brief, and the 
 Evangelistic comments turn largely on local and contem- 
 porary affairs (the death of John the Baptist, Herodias, 
 Herodians, washings of the Pharisees, Corban, etc.) : John 
 — whether in reporting Christ's words or in commenting on 
 them — deals in discourses and long dialogues and cosmo- 
 politan or celestial things. Hence we should not expect to 
 find much affinity between the vocabulary of these twa 
 Evangelists. 
 
 [1730] There is another reason for supposing, ante- 
 cedently, that John would have few or no words or phrases 
 peculiar to himself and Mark. Mark (318), at all events in 
 large part, contains traditions that have been borrowed by 
 Matthew and Luke. If therefore John also borrowed from 
 Mark, he might of necessity, in many cases, agree with 
 Matthew and Luke where the three borrowed identically. 
 And indeed we may well ask, Why should John ever borrow 
 
 245 
 
[1731] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 from Mark anything that Matthew and Luke agreed in 
 rejecting — whether as being erroneous, or obscure, or too 
 detailed — unless, in each case, he had some special motive 
 for so doing? 
 
 § 2. The fact 
 
 [1731] The fact is, however, that John has several striking 
 agreements with Mark alone, where Matthew and Luke 
 abandon Mark (besides others with Mark and Matthew 
 together where Luke alone abandons Mark). By way of 
 explaining this antecedently improbable fact, some have 
 suggested that these agreements — which, for brevity, we 
 may call " John-Mark agreements " — are of late date, added 
 to Mark after the publication of Matthew and Luke, and 
 borrowed by John from a larger edition of Mark, which is 
 the one we now use. But these John-Mark agreements do 
 not bear the stamp of late addition. They do not remove 
 difficulties, or soften abruptness. On the contrary, they often 
 create abruptness or difficulty. Moreover Matthew, as well 
 as John, sometimes follows Mark where Luke abandons 
 Mark, as in the Walking on the Waters, and the Anointing 
 of Christ by a woman ; and this is a serious blow to the 
 hypothesis that all the agreements of John with Mark where 
 Luke deviates from Mark are late additions. These facts 
 tend to shew, not only that John borrowed from an early 
 edition of Mark — or from early traditions contained in Mark 
 — but that he also sometimes borrowed, perhaps by preference, 
 such passages as might cause difficulty to an educated 
 Evangelist like Luke. 
 
 [1732] What John's special purpose may have been in 
 borrowing these traditions from Mark — whether to clear up 
 obscurity, or to substitute a spiritual for a materialistic 
 interpretation, or to do both these things — cannot be fully 
 discussed except as part of a detailed examination of the 
 relation between the Fourth Gospel and the Three. For the 
 
 246 
 
TO JOHN AND MARK [1733] 
 
 present, we have to bear in mind, ist, that the John-Mark 
 agreements in the following list are probably not late but 
 early traditions, and 2nd, that previous investigations^ favour 
 the view that they must be connected with Luke's deviations 
 from Mark. There are not enough of them to make an 
 alphabetical arrangement in English necessary, especially as 
 some derive their interest not from their English meaning, but 
 from their being unusual and perhaps low-class Greek ; — such 
 as the word Kpd^arro^, for '^ bed" in the Lord's command 
 " Take up thy bed and walk " ; the word '' pistic " which is 
 given by R.V. margin (txt "spikenard") in the account of 
 the Anointing of the Lord ; and a word meaning literally 
 "blows with the palm of the hand," or "slappings," in the 
 account of the Passion. 
 
 § 3. Parallels and Quasi-parallels 
 
 [1733] Of the three words Kpdfiarro^, ttccttck')], and 
 pdiritTfjua, the last two are marked f to denote that they 
 are not only peculiar to Mark and John but also parallel ; 
 that is to say, they are used in the description of the same 
 detail of the same event. But the first, Kpd^aTTo<i, is marked .-^f 
 to denote, by the query, that the contexts differ. In Mark, 
 the command "take up thy bed" is uttered to a paralytic, in 
 John, to an "impotent" man lying near a pool. The same 
 query is applied to the word " beggar," Trpoaalrrjf;, and to 
 " spit," TTTvco, to denote not parallelism, but quasi-parallelism, 
 as is explained in the foot-notes. On the other hand no 
 query is attached to " two hundred " or " three hundred " 
 because the traditions about " buying bread for two hundred 
 denarii" or "selling ointment for three hundred denarii" — 
 although assigned by John to Philip and to Judas Iscariot 
 severally, and not thus assigned by Mark nor stated by the 
 latter in exact agreement with John — undeniably refer to the 
 
 1 See 1282—8, 1309, 1311, 1344, 1373. 
 
 247 
 
[1733] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 same detail in the same narrative. True parallelism also will 
 be found in the references to the crown " of thorns " under the 
 adjective (iKdvOivo^, and " embalming," ivTa(f>LaafJL6^, both of 
 which however are, in effect, to be found in Matthew as well 
 as in Mark. The description of Peter as "warming himself" 
 at the fire in the High Priest's hall is, perhaps, the only other 
 point of interesting agreement between the two Evangelists. 
 As to the words not marked f, such as "thunder" ^povrr/, 
 "porter" Ovpwpo^, "catch" (or "apprehend") KaraXafi^dvo) 
 etc., they mostly occur in altogether different contexts and 
 will be found of very little importance as bearing on the 
 relation between the Fourth Gospel and the Three. 
 
 248 
 
TO JOHN AND MARK [1734] 
 
 JOHN-MARK AGREEMENTS! 
 
 [1734] t uKavdivos^ 
 
 ^pOVTT) 
 
 Ak 
 
 Jn 
 
 
 Mk 
 
 Jn 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 aTTOKOTTTG)^ 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 I 
 2 
 
 t yivofiai (in con- 
 nexion w. 
 
 + evTa<piaaiJL6s'^ 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 1 [1734 a^] An asterisk attached to a word denotes that Mk and Jn use 
 it in different senses : t denotes that the word not only has the same 
 meaning in Mk and Jn but also occurs in parallel passages : ? t indicates 
 quasi-parallelism, on which see 1733. Words not annotated occur in the 
 same sense but in quite different contexts. 
 
 2 [1734 a] 'AKavdivos, " of thorns," (Mt. xxvii. 29, Jn xix. 2 TrXe^avres 
 (TT. i^ dicavdav) is in Mk XV. 17 nXe^avTes clkAvQivov (tt., Jn xix. 5 (fiopcov 
 T. aKuvOivov (TT., concerning the "crown of thorns," all reference to which 
 is omitted by Lk. This word, in effect, belongs to the list of words used 
 by Mk Mt. and Jn in common (1805—6). 
 
 3 [1734 (^] 'Attokotttco, "cut off," Mk ix. 43 (Mt. xviii. 8 e/cKOTrrco), ix. 45. 
 Jn xviii. 10, 26 uses the word about Malchus, prob. with a double meaning, 
 Malchus being taken as the representative of the High Priest. Comp. 
 Deut. xxiii. i (2), Gal. v. 12, and (for the notion of retribution) Deut. xxv. 
 12, 2 S. iv. 12 Aq., Judg. i. 6, 7. 
 
 * [1734 c] Tivonai in connexion with 'Icodvrjs. 'EyeVero 'ladvrjs occurs in 
 
 Mk i. 4, and in Jn i. 6 eyevero avdpcoTros ovofia avT(o 'icodvrjs. *Hi/, 
 
 not eyevero, is the more usual word to introduce a new character in N.T. 
 (Lk. ii. 25, 36, Jn iii. i, xi. i, 2). Lk. uses iyevero to introduce the father 
 of John the Baptist (Lk. i. 6) " Zachariah." The first book of Samuel 
 opens with the words " and there was a itian^^ and Job with " a man there 
 wasP The LXX has i S. i. i tJv (A f'yerero), Job i. i ^v : add Judg. xiii. 
 2 17J/ (A eyeVero), xvii. I iyeveTo (A eyev^di]), I S. ix. I LXX om. vb. but 
 A ^v. Jn i. 6 contrasts iyevero, applied to "a man," with ^v, applied to 
 "the Word" (1937). 
 
 ^ [1734 <^] AiaKoaioi, "two hundred." Mk vi. 37, Jn vi. 7 "bread for 
 200 denarii " (1710 e, 1733). Comp. Jn xxi. 8 " about 200 cubits away." 
 
 6 [1734^] 'EvTa(f)i.a(rfjL6s, "embalming," is in Mk xiv. 8 (Mt. xxvi. 12 
 evTa<f)Ld(rai), Jn xii. 7. Practically this word belongs to the Mk-Mt.-Jn list. 
 Jn xix. 40 evTa<pid^eiv refers to Nicodemus and Joseph. 
 
 249 
 
[1735] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 
 Mk 
 
 Jn 
 
 
 Mk 
 
 Jn 
 
 [1735] €ws (w. indie, 
 pres.)^ 
 t depfiaivofiai^ 
 'l€po<ro\vp,e7Tai 
 
 I 
 2 
 
 3 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 ?t fjBeXov (without 
 rel. or ol)^ 
 
 6vp(0p OS 
 
 KaraXa/x/Savo)^ 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 3 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 1 [1735 a] €(os with indie, pres., " while," in Mk, only in Mk vi. 45 ecos- 
 avTos dnoXvei, where parall. Mt. xiv. 22 ecos ov atroXva-r}. Jn ix. 4 etos 
 (marg. o)s) rjpipa iarriv " while it is yet day," xxi. 22 (lit.) " If I desire 
 him to remain while I am coining {e(x)s epxop^ai)," rep. in xxi. 23. Comp. 
 I Tim. iv. 13 " While I ajn coining (ews epxopai) give heed to the reading." 
 See 1638, also 2089, 2201. 
 
 '■^ [1735 d] "uOeXov wijthout relative or ov. The importance of this 
 agreement arises from the fact that Mark and John use the rare form 
 rfBeXov in the Walking on the Waters, but in different contexts, the former 
 " He desired to /fass by them," the latter " They desired, therefore, to receive 
 him": — Mk vi. 48 rjdeXev TrapeXBelv avrovs, Jn vi. 21 rjdeXov ovv Xa^elv 
 avTov. Negations and relative constructions (such as Mt. xxvii. 15, 
 Jn vi. II, xxi. 18) being excluded, ^OeXov occurs elsewhere only in 
 Mk vi. ig ^\ . .desired. . .a.r\d could not," and Jn vii. 44, xvi. 19 : also in Acts 
 X. 10, xiv. 13, xix. 33 always about desire of which the fulfilment is pre- 
 vented (in Jn xvi. 19 by fear). The ist pers. is so used in Gal. iv. 20 
 (comp. Test. Abr. § 5 r]6iXa). In LXX, it occurs in Esth. i. 1 1 (A TjdeXrja-fv), 
 Dan. vii. 19 ^BeXov e^aKpL^da-acrdai, Theod. e^rjTovv aKpi^cos, viii. 4 erroUi 
 ti)s rjBeXe, Theod. enoiijaev Kara, ro dfX-qpa avTov, also I Macc. iv. 27 (v/ith 
 oia), 2 Mace. iv. 16, xv. 38. 
 
 [1735^] The difficulty of supposing that Jesus entertained an unful- 
 filled desire might well cause corrections of the text in Mk vi. 48. D reads 
 jjdeXrjaevj which — when compared with Deut. ii. 30 " Sihon desired not 
 that we should go across through him (i.e. through his land)," ovk ijdeXrjo-e 
 TrapeXdclv rjpds — suggests an interpretation, " Jesus willed that they should 
 go across^^ or, (comp. Jn vi. 21) that they should be ^''immediately on the 
 land to which they were going.''^ But others may have read ^BeXov napeX- 
 Qciv avTov taking it to mean " they desired that he should come to [them]." 
 John may have paraphrased this as " they desired to receive him." 
 
 3 [1735^] eepp.aivop.ai, "warm oneself," Mk xiv. 54, 67, Jn xviii. 18, 25, 
 always of Peter "warming himself," at the High Priest's fire. Jn xviii. 18 
 also mentions the servants and officers "warming themselves." See 
 " Fire of Coals " (1711/—//). 
 
 ^ [1735^] KaraXap^dva) means "catch," or " take " in Mk ix. 18 and in 
 Jn xii. 35, " lest the darkness catch, surprise, or overtake you." In Jn i. 5, 
 R.V. txt has " the light shineth in the darkness and the darkness appre- 
 hended (KareXa^fv) it not," but the margin has "overcame." It never 
 means " overcome " except so far as that may be implied in " catching," or 
 
 250 
 
TO JOHN AND MARK [1736] 
 
 Mk Jn Mk Jn 
 
 [1736] ?t/cpa/3arroyl 5 4 fiia-Baros^ I 2 
 
 " takingP It seems to mean " take " in the sense of " apprehend (mentally) " 
 (compare our vernacular "Do you take me?") in Micah vi. 6 (LXX) ex- 
 pressing " Whereby may I attain to^ or apprehend^ the Lord ? " This 
 meaning of intellectual apprehension is very common in Greek philosophic 
 writers and in Philo, e.g. (i. 579, ii. 654) " Real Being is not apprehended 
 by any man," " One must needs begin by becoming a God before one can 
 have strength to apprehend God." Simon Magus (Hippol. vi. 18) main- 
 tained that the First Principle of things was an " inapprehensible silence." 
 
 [1735/"] St Paul plays on KaraXa^^dvoi and Xan^dvco in a manner best 
 expressed perhaps by "take," thus (Phil. iii. 12) "Not that I have 
 
 already taken (eXa^ov) [the prize] but I press on, if perchance I might 
 
 overtake (or, take as my prize., KaTokd^o)) that for which I have been take?t 
 over (or, taken as his captive., KareXrjiJLCpdTjv) by Christ." Perhaps Jn 
 wishes — by using a word habitually employed in two distinct meanings — 
 to suggest that the mere intellectual apprehension of light would be 
 distinct from moral " reception " ( Jn i. 1 1 Tvapaka^i^dva)) and would, if it 
 were possible, result in an imprisonment, " taking captive," of the light. 
 If so, we are not called on to decide whether he means (i) " did not take 
 captive,^' or (2) " did not apprehend'''' ; for in that case he means both. 
 
 [1735^] Origen says (Huet ii. 74 b) "/;? two ways {hix'^si) the darkness 
 hath 'not apprehended' the Hght." But his interpretations are (i) the 
 darkness \i3iS persecuted the light but not taken it captive., or suppressed '\t ; 
 (2) the darkness, in following after the light and coming too close to it, 
 has not overtaken it, but has fallen into the snare (so to speak) set for it 
 by the light, and has perished by absorption in the light. Chrysostom 
 takes much the same view, but adds that the hght "is unsubduable 
 (aKara-yoji/tcrroi/), not being willing to dwell in the souls that do riot desire 
 to be enlightened {ovk €ii<piKox(opovv rals firj (fiaTio-dijuai ^ovXofievais 
 ^vxals)'^ — which rather suggests intellectual "apprehending." 
 
 [1735 h] In the interpolated Jn [viii. 3—4], KaTaXafx^dva (bis) means 
 " catch." 
 
 1 [1736 «] Kpd^aTTos, "pallet," a word condemned by Phrynichus, is 
 repeatedly used in Mk ii. 4—12, Jn v. 8 — 11, about the healing 
 of a man to whom Jesus says, "Arise, take up thy pallet." But in several 
 important circumstances the narratives differ. The word is therefore 
 marked ?t. Elsewhere in N.T. the word is used only in Mk vi. 55, Acts 
 V. 15 and ix. 33 [of cures, in both cases in Acts, wrought by Peter]. 
 
 2 [1736 b] MiadcoTos, in Mk i. 20 of Zebedee's " hired servants," Jn x. 
 12, 13 "hireling," as opposed to the Good Shepherd. 
 
 251 
 
[1737] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 
 Mk 
 
 Jn 
 
 
 Mk 
 
 Jn 
 
 t vdpbos^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 * TTTjy^^ 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 t TTICTTIKOS^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 TrXoidpiov ^ 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 [1737] ?f7rpo(TaiTr)s^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 ?l ITTVO)^ 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 1 T>idp8osy "spikenard," Mk xiv. 3, Jn xii. 3, see below (1736 </). 
 ?tnappTi<r£a, Mk (i), Jn (9), see 1252—4, 1432—5, 1744 xi. a, 1917 (i) foil. 
 
 2 [1736 c] UrjyT]. The asterisk denotes that the meanings are entirely 
 different. Mk v. 29 uses Trrjyfj about "the woman with the issue." In Jn 
 iv. 6 — 14 it is used of Jacob's well and once in metaphor. 
 
 3 [1736^] TIio-TiKos, of doubtful meaning, occurs in Mk xiv. 3, Jn xii. 
 3 '•^pistic nard." This adjective is nowhere else known to be applied to 
 things, but it is applied to a "faithful" wife by Artemidorus (a.d. c. 150) 
 ii. 32, TTLo-TiKf] Kol oiKovpoff, clsewherc ii. 66, iii. 54 irioTr] koL oUovpos. 
 Wetstein (Mk xiv. 3) gives abundant instances of o-mKarov as the name of 
 an ointment (from " spica "). Codex D om. the clause, but d has " pistici," 
 J^ " piscicae," vulg. " spicati," a " optimi." Wetstein quotes passages indi- 
 cating that this ointment {o-TriKdrov) was in use among women of luxury. 
 Possibly an early Galilaean tradition, finding in the original some form of 
 o-iriKdrov, played upon it by saying " not a-TTLKdrov but TriaTiKov." Jerome 
 (Swete on Mk xiv. 3) played thus on the word, " ideo vos vocati estis 
 'pistici,'...." There is no evidence to shew that it was a tradesmen's 
 term meaning " genuine." 
 
 4 [1736 e] UXoidpiov " little boat," and o>Tdptov (1738 l>) lit. " little ear," 
 are two diminutives peculiar to Jn and Mk. Jn has also ovdptov "ass," 
 o-^dptov " fish," and iraiMpiov " youth." Variations in the MSS., and Jn's 
 apparent liking for diminutives, lessen the weight of any inference from 
 his use of them in common with Mk [In Lk. v. 2, W.H. have txt TrXota, 
 marg. TrXoidpta]. According to W.H., Jn gives the name (vi. 24) nXoidpia 
 to vessels previously called (vi. 23) irXota. He seems to do this in 
 xxi. 3 — 8, perhaps wishing to suggest in xxi. 8 that the boat, being small, 
 was readily brought ashore (but? "in the little boat"). 
 
 ^ [1737 «] Upoo-aLTrjs "beggar," Mk x. 46 the blind Bartimaeus, Jn ix. 
 8 a man born blind. Since the narratives are not parallel except in the 
 coincidence of "blindness" the word is marked .'*t. It should be added 
 that the parall. Lk. xviii. 35 has inaiTOiv. But the parall. Mt. xx. 30 
 (which mentions two blind men) omits all mention of " begging." 
 
 Upoa-aiTTjs is used by Lucian (iii. 264, Navig. 24) to mean " a common 
 beggar," or " beggar of the lowest class," " The millionaires of the present 
 day, in comparison with me, are [such as Homer's] Irus and \coin7nori\ 
 beggars ("Ipoi koL Trpoo-aiVai)." Steph. quotes Plut. Helle7i. ProbL p. 294 A 
 " taking rags and wallet and becoming a \co1n7noj1] beggar.^^ 
 
 6 [1737 b'\ nrvQ), " spit," is marked .? \ (not .? t) to indicate that only one 
 of the two instances in Mk is in a quasi-parallel with Jn. Mk vii. 33 
 
 252 
 
TO JOHN AND MARK [1738] 
 
 
 Mk 
 
 Jn 
 
 
 Mk 
 
 Jn 
 
 TTCOpOCO 1 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 'Pa^/3ovi/ei2 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 t pcnria-fxa^ 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 O-TT^KO)* 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 [1738] frpiaKoaioi^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 (f)avep6(o^ 
 
 I 
 
 9 
 
 (f)av€pa)S ^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 xO^tapxos^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 t (ordpiov^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 refers to the healing of a man deaf and dumb, to which there is nothing 
 even remotely similar in Jn. Mk viii. 23 refers to the healing of a blind 
 man, and so does Jn ix. 6. The two passages, therefore, agree in 
 describing Jesus as healing blindness by "spitting," but they differ in 
 other respects. 
 
 1 [1737 (t] nwpdo), "harden" is in Mk vi. 52 "But their heart was 
 Aarde7ied," viii. 17 "Have ye your heart hardened}'''' of disciples"; Jn xii. 
 40 only in a free quotation (Is. vi. 10) "He hardened their heart," of the 
 Jews, eTTcbpcocrej/, on the meaning of which see 2449 a. 
 
 2 [1737^] 'Pa^^ovvei, uttered by (Mk x. 51) Bartimaeus, (Jn xx. 16) 
 Mary Magdalene. The former occurs in a prayer " that I may receive my 
 sight," the latter in an exclamation after Mary's eyes have been opened to 
 see the risen Saviour. 
 
 2 [1737 e] 'Pd'Trio-p.a, lit. " slapping," in Mk xiv. 65, Jn xviii. 22, xix. 3, 
 refers to blows given to Jesus, comp. Is. 1. 6 (LXX) els pairi(Tp.aTa. The 
 parall. Mt. xxvi. 67 has the vb. panlCoa. The n. paTrio-fjia was condemned 
 (492 — 3) by Phrynichus, and Lk. uses neither pdma-pa nor pairiCa : but 
 the former might commend itself to Mk and Jn owing to its Messianic 
 associations in Isaiah. The parall. Lk. xxii. 63 has depovres. 
 
 * 2t^kco, " stand fast," Mk iii. 31, xi. 25, Jn i. 26, viii. 44. See 1725 «. 
 
 ^ TpiaKoo-ioi, "three hundred," Mk xiv. 5, Jn xii. 5, "sold for three 
 hundred denarii (1710 e, 1733)." 
 
 6 [1738 d\ ^avepooy, " manifest " (vb.), is in Mk iv. 22 along with eXOrj 
 €ts (f)av€p6v : the parall. Mt. x. 26, and Lk. xii. 2, have d7ro<aXv(t)dr)(TeTaL 
 along with yvcoadrjo-erai, and the parall. Lk. viii. 17 has (pavepov yevrja-erai 
 along with yvaxrOfi koI eis (f)avep6v eXdj]. In Jn xxi. I (h's), 14, it is thrice 
 used of Christ's " manifesting himself" or " being manifested " after the 
 Resurrection, and so, too, in Mk App. [xvi. 12, 14]. 
 
 7 ^avepas, "openly." Mk i. 45, Jn vii. 10 both refer to Christ's not 
 going " openly " or " publicly " to a city or to a festival at Jerusalem : but 
 the circumstances are quite different. 
 
 ^ XiXiapxos, " captain of thousand," is in Mk vi. 21 "his great men and 
 chiliarchs^^ Jn xviii. 12 "the cohort therefore and the chiliarchP 
 
 9 [1738^] 'Qraptoj/, "ear" (Ut. "little ear") is in Mk xiv. 47 (Mt. xxvi. 
 51 mrioj/, Lk. xxii. 50 ovs) and Jn xviii. 10. Note that Jn xviii. 26 (in 
 parenthetic explanation) has oirlov (1736 <?) and so has Lk. xxii. 51. 
 
 253 
 
[1739] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 § 4. Jn xii. 9 " the common people" lit. ''the great 
 multitude'' 
 
 [1739] To the preceding list we may perhaps add the 
 phrase used by John alone (xii. 9, 1 2) o%Xo9 ttoXu?, contrary 
 to Greek syntax. Mark xii. 37 has ttoXu? o%Xo9, in 
 accordance with Greek syntax. Matthew and Luke nowhere 
 use iroXv^ o;^Xo9 with o. " 'O ttoXv? o;^Xo9 " has a meaning of 
 its own, quite distinct from 7roXv9 o;!^Xo9. Concerning the 
 former, " the great multitude," Philo says (ii. 4) " they welcome 
 vice " : and this and kindred phrases mean (Lobeck, Phryn. 
 p. 390) "the riff-raff." In Mk xii. 37 ''the common people 
 were hearing him gladly," Syr., Diatess., and SS have " all the 
 multittide" the Latin MSS. have "multa turba," D has koI 
 iroXi)^ oxKo^ Kal....i.e, "and [there was] a great multitude 
 and...." All these readings avoid the suggestion of "a foolish 
 vulgar mob " which Mark's true text might convey. See full 
 quotations in Stephen's Thesaitrus and Field. The paralL 
 Mt.-Lk. omit the whole clause. Even where Mk (xi. 18) 
 says " all the multitude (o%Xo9) were astonished at his 
 teaching" — a phrase that need not suggest contempt — Lk. 
 (xix. 48) has " all the people (Xa6<;) hung on his lips." 
 
 [1740] Jn has xii. 9 (BNL) eyvw ovv 6 oxKo^i iro\v<^ iic twv 
 ^lovBaicov, xii. 12 (BL) 6 0^)^X09 7roXt'9 6 iXOcDv eZ9 ryv eoprrjv.,. 
 (but ^^ o%Xo9 TToXv^ iXd.), and the question arises why he thus 
 (if these MSS. are correct) breaks the rules of Greek syntax. 
 It is intelligible that such a phrase as irvevfia ar^iov, " Holy 
 Spirit," should be (very rarely) treated as a compound noun, 
 and have the article irregularly prefixed (i Cor. vi. 19 
 W. H. marg.). But it is quite unintelligible that in 6 7roXu9 
 o'xXo^ — a- recognised form of speech, meaning " the riff-raff" — 
 a writer should interchange the noun and the adjective, 
 breaking one of the strictest canons of Greek, unless he 
 intended to convey some different meaning. Perhaps John 
 
 254 
 
TO JOHN AND MARK [1741] 
 
 wished to meet the charge brought by enemies of the Church 
 against Mark's tradition, not by suppressing the words (which 
 Matthew and Luke, if they knew them, have done) but by 
 adopting them with a modification intended to express that 
 the phrase did not have the bad signification that was 
 ordinarily attached to it. B is sometimes untrustworthy as 
 to the letter when near C (1961) as here, and the expla- 
 nation of B's reading, if correct, is very obscure. Possibly 
 some editions of Mark contained a marginal correction o%Xo9 
 7roXu9 for ttoXu? o'^Xo^. The former, finding its way into the 
 text without omitting o, may have been adopted by John, 
 meaning, in xii. 9, " t/ie great midtitude of the citizens," and, 
 in xii. 12, ''the great multitude of the pilgrims." He will not 
 say 6 7ro\v<i ox^ofi, for that would mean "the riff-raff." He 
 says 6 6x^0^ ttoXv?, ^' tke midtittcde in great numbers!' 
 
 § 5, Inferences 
 
 [1741] No less than four of the words marked f above*^ 
 belong to the Anointing of Christ by a Woman — a narrative 
 given by all the Evangelists but Luke, and one that has 
 caused difficulty to commentators from early times because 
 of its points of agreement and disagreement with Luke's 
 narrative of the Anointing by a Woman that was a Sinner, 
 Another refers to "the crov/n of thorns," mentioned, with 
 slight difference, by Matthew, but wholly omitted by Luke. 
 Another describes the humiliating blows inflicted on Christ ; 
 and here, too, Matthew uses an almost identical word, but 
 Luke an entirely different one^. These facts confirm the 
 view that John's intervention is in some way connected with 
 Luke's deviation or omission ; and they suggest that in a few 
 
 1 'EvTa(f)ia(rfx6s (Mt. evTa(f)Ld^(o), vdpdos, ttio-tlkos, TpiuKoa-ioi. 
 
 ^ ^AKavBivos and paTriaixa, Mt. dKavd&v and epaTria-av, Lk. om. and 
 
 )€pOVT€S. 
 
 A. V. 255 18 
 
[1742] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 such special cases John (contrary to his usual custom) adopted 
 the actual words of Mark in order to explain them in a new 
 sense. 
 
 [1742] Two words, severally marked ? f and ? |, " beggar " 
 and " spit," belong to John's Healing (in Jerusalem) of " a man 
 born blind." In Mark, the former word (" beggar," irpoaairr]'^) 
 belongs to the Healing (near Jericho) of the blind " Bartimaeus " 
 — which is supposed to be related by all the Synoptists^; but 
 the latter word (" spit," tttvw (1737 b)) belongs to the Healing 
 of a blind man near " Bethsaida," a story peculiar to Mark. 
 It must be added that a narrative peculiar to Matthew^ 
 describes the healing of two blind men at a place unnamed, 
 containing many features in common with the Healing of 
 Bartimaeus. The impression left by all these narratives is, 
 that there was early difficulty in distinguishing the cures of 
 the blind wrought by Jesus ; that Matthew and Luke omitted 
 Mark's detail about the use of " spittle " in performing some of 
 these cures ; and that John reverted to the old tradition. These 
 facts once more confirm the view that John intervened on 
 account of the omission of primary facts by secondary Evan- 
 gelists : but in this case the burden of omission is thrown, not 
 on Luke alone but on Matthew as well. The same conclusion 
 is suggested by Mark's and John's traditions concerning two 
 hundred and three hundred denarii^ 
 
 [1743] Comparing this Vocabulary with the following 
 ones in this Book the reader will find that the proportion of 
 words marked f is very large. And the fact that, in some of 
 these instances, Matthew is nearly identical with Mark so that 
 
 1 The three narratives probably refer to the same event. But Mt.-Lk. 
 omit " Bartimaeus," and Mt. represents two blind men as being healed. 
 
 2 Mt. ix. 27 — 30. 
 
 3 [1742 d\ The former is omitted by Matthew, as well as by Luke, in 
 the Feeding of the Five Thousand. The latter, in the Anointing of 
 Christ by a Woman, is modified by Matthew, who substitutes " much " 
 (xxvi. 9 "it could have been sold for much^^) for the definite sum 
 mentioned by Mark and John. 
 
 256 
 
TO JOHN AND MARK [1744 (i)] 
 
 John is practically in agreement with Matthew as well as 
 Mark, ought to make the inquirer defer any final judgment 
 that he might be disposed to base upon the present Hst till he 
 has seen the Hst of words peculiar to John, Mark, and 
 Matthew, which, if Mark is earlier than Matthew and if 
 Mark is largely followed by Matthew, may shew that John 
 follows Mark even more than appears from the facts given 
 above. 
 
 [1744] Meantime, regard being had to the fact admitted 
 by all critics, that John wrote long after Mark, and to the 
 probability (assumed as a certainty by some) that Mark had 
 an authoritative position at the end of the first century, a 
 good case is already made out for the contention that John 
 intervenes in favour of Mark where the later Evangelists 
 deviate from him. This contention does not assume that, in 
 these instances, Mark and John are historically right. The 
 former may have led the latter to an erroneous intervention. 
 But the point is, not that Mark is in such cases right, but that 
 Mark is supported by John. It will subsequently be con- 
 sidered whether John also intervenes in favour of Matthew 
 and of Luke, singly, or in favour of Matthew and Luke, 
 jointly, where the two agree. But that will not affect the 
 present question, which is, whether John occasionally inter- 
 venes in favour of Mark. 
 
 ADDITIONAL NOTE ('AyaTraco in Jn-Mk narr.) 
 
 [1744 (i)] 'A7a7raft), in strict narrative (1672*), does not 
 occur in Matthew and Luke, but occurs once in Mark in the 
 story of the man with "great possessions," of whom Mark 
 says (x. 2i) "Jesus looked on him and loved him (6 Se T. 
 e'/i^ySXe-v/ra? aurot) rj^yaTrrjcrev avTov)." But the end was that " he 
 went away sorrowing," after being commanded to sell whatever 
 he had and to " give to the poor." The character and conduct 
 
 257 18—2 
 
[1744 (ii)] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 of the man are discussed by Clement of Alexandria, Origen, 
 Ephrem, and Chrysostom, and we learn from them that there 
 was difference of opinion. But none of these writers deal 
 effectually^ with the difficulty — difficulty to some early 
 Christians though perhaps only a pathetic fact to us — that 
 this unique mention of Christ in the Synoptic Gospels as 
 " loving " some one, ends in what seems worse than nothing — 
 " he went away sorrowing." The difficulty is so great that 
 we cannot be surprised at the omission of the clause (" looked 
 on him and loved him ") by Matthew and Luke. 
 
 [1744 (ii)] One way of removing or minimising the 
 difficulty in Mark would be to take " loved " as meaning 
 " treated kindly, or gently " ; and one of the best English 
 scholars of the last century says, " Perhaps we might translate 
 'caressed him,'^" quoting a passage from Plutarch in support 
 of this rendering. He might also have alleged Clement of 
 Alexandria (940) " Accordingly Jesus does not convict him 
 as one that had failed to fulfil all the words of the Law ; on 
 the contrary He loves and greets him with unusual courtesy 
 {a<yaira /cal vTrepaaTra^eraoy Moreover codex d renders the 
 Greek by "osculatus est eum." Ephrem and Epiphanius both 
 have " rejoiced^!' These facts suffice to shew that, in the much 
 discussed precept about selling all one's goods and giving to 
 the poor^, this particular phrase, "Jesus looked on him and 
 
 1 Tertullian is briefer than any of these, and most severe, De Mono- 
 gatn. 14 "Discessit et ille dives, qui non ceperat substantiae dividendae 
 egenis praeceptum, et dimissus est sententiae suae a Domino. Nee ideo 
 duritia imputabitur Christo de arbitrii cuiuscumque Uberi vitio." This 
 can hardly be called "effectual." 
 
 ^ Field, Ot. Norv. ad loc. 
 
 2 [1744 (ii) «] Ephrem p. 168 " Sed cum observator legis monstrasset 
 se legem diligenter servasse, tunc legislator de eo gavisus est et exultavit," 
 Epiphan. 690 B cira <f)T}ai, Tavra iravra eTroiijcra ck vcottjtos fxov. k. 
 aKova-as ^x^Pl- This he repeats expressly, bia yap rov el-n-elp on exaprjy 
 "by saying that he 'rejoiced.'" 
 
 * [1744 {u)d] Besides the authorities above quoted, Justin and 
 Irenaeus and many other early writers have quoted freely the different 
 
 2s8 
 
TO JOHN AND MARK [1744 (iii)] 
 
 loved him!' would be likely to attract special attention because 
 of its apparently ineffectual result. 
 
 [1744 (iii)] Before referring to John's use of ayairaw in 
 narrative, some notice will be necessary of its use in Greek 
 literature as bearing on Field's suggested translation of Mark, 
 ''Jesus caressed him." 'AyaTrdco seems, from the Odyssey 
 onwards, to have meant a *' going forth to meet," a " demon- 
 stration of affection \" It does not occur in ^schylus or 
 Sophocles. But Euripides has it twice, and dyaTrd^o) once — 
 — always meaning "pay the last obsequies" to the dead^ 
 Xenophon and Plutarch use it in the sense of "fondling" the 
 young^ But in very many cases it means simply " love," 
 without allusion to external action, differing perhaps, some- 
 times, from (j)i\eo) in that dyairdco less frequently refers to 
 "favour" and sexual love. The LXX uses dyairdw very 
 frequently in every sense of the word " love," but hardly 
 ever in the sense above mentioned — " manifesting love in 
 action"^!' The aorist rjydirr^aa occurs for the first time in the 
 
 versions of this story, and passages of Irenaeus (i. 3. 5 quoting as Syr. 
 Burk., and i. 20. 2) shew that it was much quoted by early heretics. 
 
 1 [1744 (iii) a\ It does not occur in the Iliad. But ayaTra^w, which 
 occurs once (xxiv. 464) ayaTva^inev avrrjv, means "make the first ap- 
 proaches to." 'Ayairao) occurs (L. S.) twice in the Odyssey^ xxiii. 214 
 " Be not angry that I did not embrace thee thus (<Ȥ' dydwrjo-a) at the first," 
 (referring to 207 — 8 where Penelope kisses and embraces Ulysses), xxi. 
 289 "Dost thou not /m£ \tky good fortune]1" i.e. "art thou not well 
 pleased" — a freq. meaning in later Gk. esp. with negative. 'AyaTra^co, 
 -ofiai, in Odyssey freq. means " embrace." 
 
 ^ [1744 (iii) b^ Eurip. Hel. 937 Trpoa-co (T<p* dirovra baKpvois av rjydircov^ 
 Suppi. 764 (pairjs av el TraprjaB^ or rjyaTra vcKpovs. The reply is " Did he 
 himself wash the wounds of the unhappy men?" Comp. Phoen. 1327 
 V€KVV TOL TTaidos dyuTrd^cov f'/iov. 
 
 2 [1744 (iii) ^] Plut. (153) Vz'l. Pericl. I kuvcoi/ riKva..Av toIs koK-kol^ 
 Tre pi(j)€povTas k. dyanavras. Also Steph. quotes {? ref) "Xen. Cyrop. vii. 5. 
 18 p. 447" p-ovovovK iv Tois dyKdXaxs irepK^ipopnv avrovs dyana)VT€s. 
 
 * [1744 (iii)rtf] In Ps. xciv. 19 "thy comforts delight {Wi. fondle) my 
 soul," riydTTTjo-av, Ai^^ rjvcjipavav, Is. V. 7 " the plant of his fondling 
 (r)ya7rr]fji€vov)." By error the LXX has Ps. cxix. l66 r^ydirr^a-a^ confusing 
 the word with the Heb. for €7rob](ra, which Aq. and Sym. have. 
 
 259 
 
[1744 (iv)] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 Temptation of Abraham (" thine only son, whom thou lovest 
 {r^ryaTTTjaa^)'' and frequently thus to represent the Hebrew 
 past where it approximates to the English present: but in 
 the next instance (" and he loved her ") and in many others 
 it represents the English past^ In the LXX, then, the 
 context must in each case be called in to determine the 
 meaning. 
 
 [1744 (iv)] In the Pauline Epistles, the active verb, when 
 not used of human love, is almost always in the aorist, 
 referring to the love of Christ in act, as redeeming mankind, 
 Rom. viii. 37 " we are more than conquerors through him that 
 loved {dya7rri(TavTo<;) us 2," Gal. ii. 20 " the Son of God, who 
 loved me and gave himself for me," Eph. v. 2 " as Christ also 
 loved you and gave himself up for you (marg. us)," v. 25 "even 
 as. Christ also loved the church and gave himself up for it." 
 So in Rev. iii. 9 " Behold I will make them to come and 
 worship before thy feet and to know that I loved thee" it is 
 the Son, not the Father, that is speaking, and "I loved thee" 
 implies " I delivered and made thee victorious'^ !' 
 
 1 [1744 (iii) el Gen. xxii. 2, xxiv. 67. The imperf., which is very rare, 
 occurs in Gen. xxxvii. 3 Tyyarra rrapd, I S. i. 5 rjycnra virep ravr-qv (but v. 
 T. is a LXX addition) where "love" implies favouritism. Comp. Gen. 
 XXV. 28 TfyaTrrjo-e 8e 'icraaK tov 'Ho-av...'Pe/3eKKa de rjyaTra rov 'Iukm^ (where 
 the Heb. tenses differ) and i S. xviii. 28 iras 'lo-p. r^ydira avrov, where LXX 
 differs from Heb. and perh. takes the meaning to be "loved him [David] 
 more than Saul." 
 
 2 [1744 {iv)d] In view of the preceding (Rom. viii. 35) "love of 
 Christ," and the prevalent Pauline use of aor. of dyaTrdco, this must refer 
 to the Son, not to the Father. Comp. Phil. iv. 13 "I have strength 
 [for] all things in him that makes me powerful" i.e. "Christ" (comp. 
 I Tim. i. 12). But it does refer to the love of the Father in Eph. ii. 4 — 5 
 "God... for the great love wherewith he loved us... quickened us together 
 with Christ," and to the love of the Father and the Son in 2 Thess. ii. 16 
 "now our Lord Jesus Christ himself, and God our Father, who loved 
 (6 ayaTTjyo-as) us..." where, though dyaTrrja-as agrees grammatically with 
 Oeos K. Trarrip, it is intended to include the redeeming love of the Son. 
 
 ^ [1744 (iv) d] Ign. Magn. 6 eVei olv ev vols Trpoyeypap-jjievois rrpoad)- 
 TTOis TO ndv ttXtjSos iOewprjcra iv Triarec k. rjydTrrjaa seems to mean " Since 
 
 260 
 
TO JOHN AND MARK [1744 (vi)] 
 
 [1744 (v)] Coming to Johannine usage, and bearing in 
 mind this double use of the verb to express the emotion and 
 the act, we should first note an insistence on the latter aspect 
 in I Jn iii. i8, "Little children, let us not love in word nor 
 with the tongue, but in work and truths The whole of the 
 Epistle insists on the active nature of God's love and of man's 
 love so far as it imitates the divine original. 
 
 [1744 (vi)] Then, in the narrative portions of the Gospel, 
 we find the following: iii. i6 "For God so loved {rjyd'mrjcFev) 
 the world that he gave the only begotten Son...V' xi. 5 "Now 
 Jesus was wont to love {r^ydira) Martha and her sister and 
 Lazarus V' xiii. i "Now before the feast of the Passover, Jesus, 
 knowing that his hour had come that he should pass out of 
 this world to the Father, having loved {d'yairrjaa'^) his own 
 that were in the world — to the end he loved them (eh r6\o<i 
 r)ryd7rr](T6v avTov^;)," xiii. 23 " There was lying at table one of 
 his disciples, in the bosom of Jesus, whom Jesus was wont to 
 love (ov rjjdira [o] 'I.)," xix. 26 " Jesus therefore having seen his 
 [lit. the] mother, and the disciple standing by, whom he was 
 wont to love (ov r^^dira)" xxi. 7 " So that disciple whom Jesus 
 was wont to love saith to Peter, It is the Lord (Xeyec ovv 6 ^jl. 
 eKelvo^ ov r^ydira 6 'I. to5 Tierpw, 'O /cvpco^ iarLv)!' After 
 this, comes the dialogue between our Lord and Peter, (" lovest 
 (dyaTrdf;) thou me more than these ? " " lovest thou me } ") — 
 not a part of narrative, but not without bearing on the use of 
 
 then I beheld in faith and embraced [in the spirit] the whole multitude 
 [of the Magnesian Church] in the above-mentioned persons [of their 
 deputation]," Polyc. 2 eycb k. to. deo-fid fxov a rjydirrjo-as " I and my bonds, 
 which thou didst lovingly welcome^'' perh. personified as in Phil. i. 14 
 "trusting in my bonds^' — the "bonds" being, in each case, a sign or 
 messenger from God, revealing His power to strengthen His martyrs. 
 
 1 Probably an utterance of the Evangelist (not of Christ, 1497). 
 
 2 [1744 (vi) a\ " Woiit^'' perh. better " always used'''' (s. Skeat), is an 
 attempt to render the imperfect. Other statements about man's love are 
 iii. 19 "men loved the darkness rather than the light," xii. 43 "for they 
 \i.e. the rulers] loved the glory of men rather than the glory of God." 
 
 261 
 
[1744 (vii)] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 the word in narrative — and finally xxi. 20 " Peter, having 
 turned, noteth the disciple that Jesus was ivont to love, follow- 
 ing ifiXkirei Tov fJL. ov rjydira 6 'J. aKoXovOovvra)!' 
 
 [1744 (vii)] Reviewing these passages, we find that the 
 first mention of the Son's being " wont to love " introduces the 
 greatest of all His "signs," the victory over death at the grave 
 of Lazarus. As to the next, it will hereafter (2319 foil.) be 
 shewn that "loved them to the end (et? TeKo's rj'yaTnjo-ev avroix;)" 
 means, not only "loved them to the end," but also "loved them 
 to the supreme and victorious consummation of lover It refers 
 to the Washing of Feet as well as to the Sacrifice on the 
 Cross. In the former, the Lord is regarded (1283) as wiping 
 off upon Himself the impurities of the disciples, so that all of 
 them that will accept His love accept at the same time His 
 purification — all but Judas, who will not accept it. 
 
 [1744 (viii)] In the same scene that brings before us 
 one disciple spiritually refusiiig this act of love'^, there is 
 introduced about another disciple, "in the bosom of Jesus," 
 the novel phrase " whom Jesus was wont to love!' At first, 
 this adjective clause is not inseparable from " disciple." It 
 is not " the disciple that Jesus was wont to love," but " one of 
 the disciples'' ; and there is added "whom Jesus was wont to 
 love." So stated, it might apply to several disciples, of whom 
 this disciple was one. But it recurs as " the disciple standing 
 by. whom Jesus was wont to love^" and lastly as " tJie disciple 
 
 ^ [1744 (viii) d\ Peter refuses it (for the moment) in word and out- 
 wardly (" Lord, thou shalt never wash my feet ") but accepts it in spirit. 
 Judas accepts it outwardly but rejects it spiritually. 
 
 ^ [1744 (viii) b'\ The intervention of " standing by," and the consequent 
 possibility of pause, afford a loop-hole for regarding the relative here as 
 not essential to the antecedent. It might just possibly mean " the disciple 
 [about whom I have so often spoken] standing by, one of whom Jesus was 
 very fond." But there is no such loop-hole in the next instance. The 
 usage of the LXX (1744 (iii) e) would facilitate the use of rjydTra to mean 
 " was specially fond," " loved above others." 
 
 262 
 
TO JOHN AND MARK [1744 (x)] 
 
 that Jesus was wont to love," and in this last instance pre- 
 eminence is unmistakeable. 
 
 [1744 (ix)] Whether intentional or not, there is certainly 
 a striking contrast between the incipient disciple in Mark, 
 who proved to be no disciple — although he called Jesus 
 " Good teacher " and although Jesus " loved him " — and " the 
 disciple that Jesiis loved''' in the Fourth Gospel. The former 
 "went away sorrowing." To the latter the Lord, when on 
 the point of death, entrusts His own mother. To him, alone, on 
 the shore of Tiberias, it is given to say, "It is the Lord," when 
 Peter and the rest had not yet discerned Him. He, too, 
 though not " following " the Lord in the path assigned to 
 Peter (the path of the Cross) is nevertheless seen " following " 
 in another way ; and the last recorded utterance of the 
 Saviour includes a mysterious saying suggestive of the 
 prolonged abidance of this disciple upon earth : " If I will 
 that he tarry till I come^ what is that to thee ? " 
 
 [1744 (x)] This typical aspect of "the disciple that Jesus 
 loved " is quite compatible with the literal aspect in which he 
 is regarded as literally lying on the bosom of Jesus. Origen 
 assuredly accepted the latter, but he accepted the former also. 
 " The Word of God on earth," he says, " since He is become 
 man, we see as a being of man's nature... but, if we have lain 
 on the breast of the Word made flesh, and if we have been able 
 to follow Him when He goeth up to the High Mountain, we 
 shall say, * We saw^ his glory.' " And again, " We must there- 
 fore dare to call the Gospels the prime of the Scriptures, and 
 the Gospel according to John the prime of the Gospels. Of 
 this Gospel none can receive the meaning except he have 
 fallen back (Jn xiii. 25 avaTredoliv) on the breast of Jesus, 
 and except he have received Mary from Jesus so that she 
 becomes (lit. becoming) his own mother also. And this 
 
 ^ [1744 (x) d\ Orig. Philocal. 19. The reference is to the Transfigura- 
 tion. He quotes Jn i. 14 edfaa-dfieOa as etdofxev, " we saw." 
 
 263 
 
[1744 (xi)] JOHN AND MARK 
 
 other future * John ' must also become such a one that (so 
 to speak) the ' John ' is pointed out by Jesus as being ' Jesus.' 
 For, if there is no other son of Mary (according to those who 
 entertain wholesome opinions about her) except Jesus, and 
 [if] Jesus says to His mother, ' Behold, thy son,' and not, 
 * Behold, this, too, [is] thy Son ' — this is all the same as if He 
 has said * Behold, this is Jesus, whom thou didst bear.' For 
 indeed every one that is initiated (Gal. ii. 20) liveth no longer 
 [of himself] but Christ liveth in him : and, since Christ liveth 
 in him, it is said concerning him to Mary, ' Behold, thy Son, 
 the Christ !i"' 
 
 [1744 (xi)] It may be taken as certain that John has some 
 meaning and purpose (beyond mere graphic or euphonic 
 variation) in his various descriptions of the beloved disciple ; 
 and it is highly probable that Origen has helped us to 
 elucidate a part of his purpose, in bringing before us this 
 unnamed and mysterious character as a permanent witness 
 — " tarrying " till the Lord's " coming " — to the all-conquering 
 love of Christ. And having regard to the early and wide 
 discussions about the parallel phrase in Mark, we may regard 
 it as by no means improbable that the Fourth Evangelist is 
 tacitly contrasting this "disciple that Jesus loved "with the 
 ineffectual approacher to discipleship, of whom Mark records 
 that he called Jesus "teacher," and that Jesus "looked on him 
 and loved him," and yet that, in the end, " he went away 
 sorrowing^" 
 
 1 Orig. Huet ii. 6. 
 
 2 [1744 (xi) d\ As to ? t Trapprjo-la, omitted by error in 1736 but placed 
 in note there, it will be shewn that John may be writing with allusion to 
 Mk viii. 32 77. TOP Xoyov eXdXet (omitted by Mt.-Lk.) or even in parallelism 
 to Mk as given by SS and /&. See 1917 (i) foil. 
 
 264 
 
CHAPTER II 
 
 WORDS PECULIAR TO JOHN AND MATTHEW 
 
 § I. Parallelisms very few 
 
 [1745] In this list, though larger than that of words 
 peculiar to John and Mark, only one word will be found 
 marked -f, and that with a query, namely, ^rjiia, "judgment 
 seat," concerning which John says that Pilate " sat down on a 
 judgment seat" just before he said to the Jews, " Behold your 
 king." Matthew has " While he was sitting on the judgment 
 seat, his \i,e. Pilate's] wife sent unto him,.." Then follows 
 the mention of her dream, of which John makes no mention. 
 The word occurs frequently in the Acts to mean the 
 " platform," or " tribunal," of a judge, so that it might well be 
 used by the two Evangelists independently. The absence of 
 the article, however, in John ("<2 judgment seat ") may indicate 
 that he is calling attention to a fact that might pass unnoticed 
 by readers of Matthew ^ 
 
 [1746] The reader will notice the large number of asterisks 
 denoting that Matthew and John use the same word in 
 
 1 [1745 rt] Comp. Joseph. Bell. ii. 14. 8, where Florus erects "<3: 
 tribunal" and then crucifies a number of Jews in front of it. Pilate may- 
 have first " sat on the tribunal " in the Praetorium (as Matthew says) and 
 may have then had a special '"'- tribunaV^ set up in Gabbatha for the 
 purpose of final decision. Such a course would be all the more natural 
 as the Chief Priests (Jn xviii. 28) would not come into the Praetorium to 
 hear his decision. The Article is inserted before iS^jua when used in N.T. 
 absolutely elsewhere, Acts xii. 21, xviii. 12, 16, 17, xxv. 6, 10, 17. 
 
 265 
 
[1747] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 different senses, as where the former uses Bwpeav to mean 
 " with a liberal hand/' but the latter to mean " without a 
 cause." So ^pcjai^ in Matthew means "rust," but in John 
 " food " ; and ri/jir/ means in Matthew " price," but in John 
 " honour^" For the most part the words in this list tell us 
 nothing" of interest. For example, Xa/^Tra?, t.e. " torch " or 
 "lamp," is connected by Matthew with the Virgins that go 
 out to meet the Bridegroom and by John with the soldiers 
 that arrest Jesus: a/jLvpva, "frankincense," in Matthew refers 
 to the offering of the Magi to the infant Jesus, in John to the 
 act of Joseph of Arimathaea and Nicodemus placing the 
 Lord's body in the tomb. 
 
 [1747] It will be found suggested in one of the foot-notes 
 (1752 a—/) that, when John applies to Jesus the word 
 jcpauyd^Q), " cry aloud," — used by some authors to mean 
 "scream" or "cry in terror" — he may be possibly alluding to a 
 tradition peculiar to Matthew, who quotes a saying of Isaiah 
 " He shall not ay a/oi/d," and who uses Kpavyd^co in his 
 peculiar rendering of the prophecy. But this is a conjecture 
 that would need support from many other Johannine passages 
 of allusive tendency. There is greater probability in the 
 hypothesis that John's version of the naming of Peter, " Thou 
 s/ia/t be called Cephas, which is by interpretation Petros [i.e. 
 Stojie\" was written with allusion to the tradition peculiar to 
 Matthew " Thou art Petros [i.e. Stone]." But this hypothesis 
 is not based on anything in the list given below, because it 
 does not rest on any word peculiar to John and Matthew. 
 
 § 2. ^^ Light of the zvorld" " my brethren " 
 
 [1748] Taking the list as a whole we find no one word, by 
 itself, as to which John can be said with confidence to be 
 alluding to Matthew. But the two words making the phrase 
 <^a)9 KOGfiov, " light of the world," stand on a different footing. 
 
 ^ In the Jn-Mk list only one word (7777717) was thus marked. 
 266 
 
TO JOHN AND MATTHEW [1749] 
 
 In Matthew, our Lord says " Ye are the light of the world " ; 
 in John, " / am the light of the world." It has been maintained 
 in an earlier part of this series (435) that Matthew is in error, 
 and that John, when emphasizing the doctrine that Christ is 
 the Light of the world and that other people have the light, 
 was not writing without some allusion to this corruption, 
 peculiar to Matthew, namely that Jesus said to the disciples, 
 " Ye are the light of the world." This appears extremely 
 probable \ 
 
 [1749] Another combination of two words peculiar to 
 Matthew and John is the phrase ''my bretJiren'' in Christ's 
 words after the Resurrection I Matthew says that the 
 women, when the risen Saviour met them, ''took hold of his 
 feet'' and that He said " Go back, bear word to my brethren 
 that they go away into Galilee^" In John, the Lord says to 
 Mary Magdalene " Touch me not, for I have not yet ascended 
 to the Father : but go to my brethren and say to them, I am 
 
 1 [1748 «] Mt. V. 14 "Ye are (v/xeTs- eVre) the light of the worlds It 
 has been shewn (435) that this might be an error, either through Gk or 
 through Heb. corruption, for "ye have the light of the world." Both 
 Jewish and Christian doctrine would teach that the saints are (Phil. ii. 
 15) "lights," or (Jn v. 35) " lamps," but not "the lighf : and no authority 
 has been alleged for the view that even the collective body of the saints 
 could receive this name. No other Synoptist supports Mt. in his version, 
 and Jn may not improbably be writing allusively to it, and with the 
 purpose of tacitly correcting it, in the following passages : (i. 8) " He 
 \i.e. John] was not the light," (viii. 12, ix. 5) " I am the light of the world^^ 
 (xii. 35) "Walk (R.V.) while ye have the light,'' xii. 36 (R.V.) " While j^ 
 have the light believe on the light that ye may become sons of light." 
 That a body of men should believe themselves to be a collection of 
 " lights " reflecting the Light of the World, differs radically from the 
 doctrine that the same men should believe themselves to be " the Light of 
 the World" : and Jn appears to be protesting against the latter belief. 
 
 2 [1749 d\ This is to be distinguished from Mk iii. 33—4, Mt. xii. 
 48 — 9, Lk. viii. 21 "my mother and my brethren," where our Lord gives 
 a spiritual interpretation to "my brethren." The only other instance 
 (Chri.) of "my brethren" is Mt. xxv. 40 (in parable). 
 
 ^ Mt. xxviii. 10. 
 
 267 
 
[1749] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 ascending unto my Father and your Father and my God and 
 your God^" The tradition of Matthew uses the past "took 
 hold," which John perhaps read as the imperfect "began (or, 
 wished) to take hold" — the action being checked by the 
 words of Jesus, " Do not touch me I" Luke omits all mention 
 of this manifestation of Christ to women. Mark's Gospel 
 breaks off just before it. The Mark-Appendix, which takes 
 up the narrative, simply says that the Saviour "appeared 
 (i(f>dv7j)^ first to Mary Magdalene." There is a very strong 
 probability indeed that John here, writing with allusion to the 
 narrative peculiar to Matthew, wishes (i) to retain the 
 beautiful tradition " Go tell mj/ brethren " as part of the first 
 utterance of the ascending Saviour, (2) to indicate that the 
 women did not " take hold " of His feet^ 
 
 ^ Jn XX. 17. 
 
 - [1749^] Even Thomas is not represented in Jn as actually 
 "touching" or "taking hold of" the risen Saviour. The Apostle is 
 described as being invited to " reach " his " hand." But apparently he 
 believes without this evidence (Jn xx. 29 " Because thou hast seen thou 
 hast believed ! "), 
 
 3 [1749^] 'Ecj)dvr) is here used for the more common acfidr]. It is also 
 used in Mt. i. 20, ii. 13, 19, but with kqt ovap, "in a dream." In Lk. ix. 8 
 'HXms €(f)dvr] it is without kut ovap. It is also applied to the shining of a 
 star (Mt. ii. 7) or to a character bright as a star (Phil. ii. 15). 
 
 4 [1749^] '^ My brethren" might be interpreted literally by Gentile 
 readers ignorant of Christian vocabulary. In Mt., J<* reads " the 
 brethren." The Johannine context, " my Father and your Father," makes 
 it clear that the brotherhood is spiritual. In Acts i. 14, "his brethren" 
 means James and Jude etc. because preceded by "his mother." 
 
 268 
 
TO JOHN AND MATTHEW [1752] 
 
 JOHN-MATTHEW AGREEMENTS^ 
 
 Mt. Jn Mt. Jn 
 
 [1750] 
 
 alyiaXos 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 dpTrd^co 
 
 apri 
 
 7 
 
 12 
 
 ?t ^^/xa2 
 
 * ^pCoa-is^ 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 diyjrda}^ 
 
 * 8o)p€dv (adv.)^ 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 iXevdepos^ 
 
 ipf^avi^oi"^ 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 €VTa(f)id^a) ® 
 
 * i^€TdCco^ 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 Kardyvvfii ^^ 
 
 Kpavyd^co^^ 
 
 I 
 
 6 
 
 \dOpa 
 
 5 6 
 
 [1751] * dcopedv (adv.)^ 2 I iXevdepos^ I 2 
 
 I I 
 
 I 3 
 [1752] Kpavyd^Q)^^ I 6 Xa^pa 2 I 
 
 1 [1750 «i] An asterisk attached to a word denotes that Mt. and Jn 
 use it in different senses : t denotes that the word not only has the same 
 meaning in Mt. and Jn but also occurs in parallel passages. 
 
 2 Brjpa, "judgment seat/' Mt. xxvii. 19 "//^^ j.," Jn xix. 13 "« j." See 
 1745. 
 
 3 [1750 a] BpSxTis, in Mt. " rust," in Jn " food." 
 
 4 [1750 d] Aiyjrdco, " I thirst," in Mt. xxv. 35, ^7, 42, 44 means physical 
 thirst, in Mt. v. 6 "hunger and thirst after righteousness''^ (where Lk. vi, 
 21 has merely "hunger now"). In Jn, the woman of Samaria interprets 
 Christ's "shall never thirst" literally (" that I may not thirst''). Apart 
 from this dialogue, the word is never used literally in the Fourth Gospel, 
 unless it be in xix. 28 where it is printed by W.H. as a quotation. If it is, 
 the most likely source is Ps. xlii. 2 " My soul is athirsf' (not as W.H., Ps. 
 Ixix. 21). In that case the meaning would be spiritual as well as literal. 
 
 ^ [1751 «] Acopeai/ (adv.), in Mt. x. 8 {bis) "freely," in Jn xv. 25 (quoting 
 Ps. XXXV. 19) "without a cause," "gratuitously." 
 
 ^ [1751 b'\ 'EXfvdeposj in Mt. xvii. 26 "the sons are free," Jn viii. 33 — 6 
 "ye shall become free. ..the Son shall free (eXev^eptoo-j/) you. ..ye shall be 
 free." 'EKxew, Mt. ix. 17 "spill" (Jn ii. 15 "pour out" money) may be 
 regarded as = Lk. v. ^y eKxvwopai, and is therefore omitted above. 
 
 '' 'Ep(f)avi^ai, "manifest" vb., see 1716 h. 
 
 8 [1751 (t] 'Ej/ra0ia^aj, "embalm," Mt. xxvi. 12. The parall. Mk xiv. 8 
 has €VTa<pLa(Tp6v. Jn has the n. parallel to Mk (1734 <?), and the vb. xix. 40 
 *' as it is the custom to embalm " not parall. to Mk or Mt. 
 
 ^ 'E^era^co, in Mt. ii. 8, x. 11, "ascertain" ; in Jn xxi. 12, "question." 
 
 ^^ Kardyvvpij in Mt. xii. 20 (loosely quoting Is. xlii. 3) "a bruised reed 
 he shall not break'' ; in Jn xix. 31 — 3 of " breaking" limbs. 
 
 1^ [1752 d\ Kpauya^o), " cry aloud," is used eight times in N.T. Seven 
 of these are {a) Jn xii. 13, of the multitude shouting " Hosanna ! " {b) Jn 
 xviii. 40, xix. 6, 12, 15, Acts xxii. 23, of the multitude clamouring for some 
 
 J69 
 
[1752] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 one's death, {c) Jn xi. 43 "He cried aloud {iKpavya(rev\ Lazarus ! [Come] 
 out, hither ! " 
 
 [1752 ^J-] The remaining instance is {d) Mt. xii. 19 " He shall not strive 
 (fpiaci) nor cry aloud (ovde Kpavydaei), nor shall one hear in the streets his 
 voice," quoting Is. xlii. 2 " He shall not cry, nor Iz/l up, nor cause to be 
 heard his voice in the street." LXX renders "lift up" (as though it were 
 "hft (the burden of sin)," i.e. "forgive") by dvrjo-ei, "forgive" — as in Is. i. 
 14, ii. 9 (and freq.) — having ov KeKpd^erai (A Kpd^eTai) ovde avrjarei. Mt. 
 quotes Isaiah's context in full as illustrating Christ's avoidance of publicity 
 in His acts of heahng (Mt. xii. 16 " He rebuked them that they should 
 not make him manifest "). Perhaps Mt. takes " cry " as " cry, or summon, 
 to arms," a meaning of the Niph. (Gesen. 858 d) : but Kimchi and Ibn 
 Ezr. {ad loc.) explain it as denoting the loud harsh tone used by a judge 
 in order to impress his hearers with a sense of authority. Sym. sub- 
 stitutes " shall be deceived {i^aTraTrjOrjo-eTai) " for " lift " — an error arising 
 from Hebrew confusion. 
 
 [1752 c] These facts indicate that there were early difficulties in 
 interpreting the Isaiah passage, and that there would be, toward the end 
 of the I St century, different views about applying to the Messiah either 
 KpdC<o (LXX) or Kpavyd^co (Mt.). Kpavyd^co, in O.T., is used only in Ezr. 
 iii. 13 of a multitude crying aloud with mingled feelings ; and Atticists^ 
 when not applying it to clamouring crowds, would probably use it (as 
 Plat. I^ep. X. 607 B (in poet, quot.)) of a " yelping " hound, or (Demosth. 
 Con. p. 1258, 26) of a drunkard "yelling." Phrynichus says that Kpavyaa- 
 fids- (for KCKpayfios) is illiterate. Epictetus applies Kpavyd^a> (apart from 
 the discordant cry of a raven (iii. i. 37)) to shouting in the theatre, crying 
 to Caesar for help, and to a bad-tempered master bawling at his slaves 
 (iii. 4. 4, 22. 55, 26. 22) — in all cases implying want of self-control. 
 
 [1752^] For these reasons many Evangelists would shrink from 
 applying /cpa^co, and still more KpavydC<o, to Christ. But Matthew extends 
 his quotation of Isaiah so that it might be read thus, " He shall not cry- 
 aloud... until he bring forth judgment to victory.''^ This might mean that 
 the " crying aloud^^ did not take place till Chrisfs death when He overcame 
 death upon the Cross : and Matthew, though he does not use KpavydCco in 
 connexion with the last cry, uses there the kindred word (xxvii. 50) 
 Kpd^as, alone among the Evangelists. 
 
 [1752 e} Others might take the view that both Kpd^a and Kpavyd^co 
 were forbidden by the words of Isaiah to be applied to the Messiah : and 
 neither of these words is applied to Him by Mark or Luke. On the 
 Cross, Jesus is described by Mark as ^oa)v <f>a>vrj fieydXr) or dcjiels (Pq)pt]v 
 fieyakrjv, by Luke as (fjcovrjcras (f^covrj p.€yu\rj, but not as ^^ cryi?ig" or 
 '"''crying aloud^ 
 
 [1752/] John takes a different course. He represents Jesus as ^'•crying 
 (Kpd^oi) " in solemn announcements of doctrine (vii. 28, 27i xii. 44) thrice, 
 
 270 
 
TO JOHN AND MATTHEW [1754] 
 
 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Jn 
 
 
 Mt. 
 
 J« 
 
 
 XaXta 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 Xafirrds 
 
 
 
 
 XdyX*?^ 
 
 [[I]] 
 
 I 
 
 * fieSvco^ 
 
 
 
 [1753] 
 
 fiea-Tos^ 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 vvcrcTai^ 
 
 [[I]] 
 
 
 
 OV flOVOV^ 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 * irepio-o-os^ 
 
 
 
 
 TrXeupd^ 
 
 [[I]] 
 
 4 
 
 TToXvTlflOS^ 
 
 
 
 [1754] 
 
 Trpcoia^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 qu. 2ia)j/i<^ 
 
 
 
 
 * a-<\r)p6s^^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 (T\ivpvay^ 
 
 
 
 
 (rviJL(f)€p(o 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 * crcf)payiC(o^^ 
 
 
 2 
 
 but not on the Cross, where the simple words " saith " or " said " are used 
 (xix. 26 — 30 Xeyet, cIttcv). But he applies " trrj/ aloud (Kpavyd^co)" to the 
 single occasion (xi. 43) of the raising of Lazarus. Then, too, Jesus " wept " 
 and " troubled himself."' Perhaps the Evangelist felt that the Messiah, 
 who could neither " weep " nor " cry aloud " for His own sake, might be 
 rightly described as "crying aloud" for the sake of Lazarus, His "friend," 
 whom He "loved." 
 
 1 Ac)-yx^, " spear." See 1756. 
 
 2 Mcdvco (-ofjLai), " to be satisfied with wine," or "intoxicated." In Jn 
 ii. 10 "when they have drwik freely (pass.)," not so strong as in Mt. xxiv. 
 49 (act.) (parall. Lk. xii. 45 p-edvo-Keadai). 
 
 3 Mfo-rdy, "full," in Jn always literal, in Mt. xxiii. 28 metaphorical. 
 * Nuo-o-o), " pierce." See 1756. 
 
 ^ Ou fiovov, "not only," in Mt., only in xx. 21 '"'■ Not only the [work, or,, 
 miracle] of the fig-tree shall ye do." 
 
 6 JlipKKTos^ "superabundant," Mt. v. yj^ 47. In Jn x. 10 "that they 
 may have life {C<^rjv) and have it superabundantly (Trepiaa-ov) " the adj. is: 
 used adverbially, a usage of which instances are given in pi. Trepiara-d, and 
 also in sing, compar. Trepio-o-orepov (by L. S. and Steph.), but no instance 
 of irepia-o-ov. 
 
 7 nXevpd, " side." See 1756. 
 
 8 UoXvTiiJLos, " precious," Mt. xiii. 46 " one precious pearl," Jn xii. 3 " of 
 nard pistic (1736 ^af) preciousP 
 
 ^ Upcdia, "early," apa being understood. In Mt. xxvii. i, Jn xxi. 4, 
 npcoias de {jn + TJbr]) yevofievrjs (Jn yivofxevqs) occurs to introduce (in Mt.) 
 the morning of the crucifixion and (in Jn) the manifestation of the risen 
 Saviour to the seven disciples. 
 
 10 [1754 «] Stcoj/, "Sion," quoted by Mt. xxi. 5 and Jn xii. 15 from. 
 Zech. ix. 9, see 1456^ and 1757. 
 
 11 2kXi]p6s, "hard," Mt. xxv. 24 "a /z^r^man," Jn vi. 60 "the saying is 
 hard." 
 
 12 2/ivpj/a, "frankincense," Mt. ii. 11, the gift of the Magi to Christ in 
 the cradle ; Jn xix. 39, the gift of Nicodemus to Christ in the tomb. 
 
 13 S^payt^o), "seal," Mt. xxvii. 66 "sealing" the stone of Christ's, 
 sepulchre, Jn iii. 33, vi. 27 metaph. = " attesting." 
 
 A. V. 271 19 
 
[1755] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Jn 
 
 [1755] 
 
 *Tifir)^ 
 
 2 
 
 I * Tpcoyo) 
 
 
 v7rdvTr)(ns^ 
 
 2 
 
 I ^opeo)^ 
 
 
 
 §3. 
 
 Inferences 
 
 Mt. Jn 
 I 5 
 
 [1756] Two inferences may be drawn from the facts given 
 above. One relates to the three words with [[i]] opposite to 
 them, Xor^yj], vvcr<T(o, and irXevpd, "spear," "pierce," "side." 
 They all come from one passage, found in some of the best 
 Greek MSS. of Matthew, and given by R.V. in marg. thus, 
 "And another (aX\o(; Se) took a spear and pierced his side 
 and there came out water and bloods" These resemble the 
 words of John, " But one {aXh! eU) of the soldiers with a spear 
 pierced his side and there came out straightway blood and 
 waters" Matthew places the piercing before the death, and 
 gives no explanation of it ; John places it after the death, and 
 explains that the soldiers had received orders to kill those 
 who were on the crosses. If the passage was originally a 
 part of Matthew and was omitted by the Syriac and Latin 
 versions because of its inconsistency with John, we should 
 then have to suppose that John (on the hypothesis that he 
 knew Matthew's Gospel) was here intervening to place the 
 piercing in its right order, as having occurred after, not before, 
 
 1 Tt/Li77, in Mt. xxvii. 6, 9, " price " ; in Jn iv. 44 " honour." 
 
 2 [1755 d\ Tpwyo), " eat," in Mt. xxiv. 38, " eating [gluttonously] " ; in 
 Jn alw. in good sense (exc. xiii. 18 (quot. Ps. xli. 9, but LXX eadicov)) of 
 spiritual "eating." 
 
 ' 'YndvTrjo-LSj "meeting," Mt. viii. 34 (exorcism), xxv. i (parable) 
 f^epx€(rBai els v. : Jn xii. 13 has the same phrase in the Riding into 
 Jerusalem. 
 
 '* ^opea, "wear," in Mt. xi. 8 "they that Ti/ear soft clothing" (parall. 
 Lk. "in glorious raiment and luxury"), Jn xix. 5 ^^ wearing- the crown of 
 thorns." 
 
 ^ Mt. xxvii. 49. ^ Jn xix. 34. 
 
 272 
 
TO JOHN AND MATTHEW [1757] 
 
 Christ's death. But had he done this, he would not — so far 
 as we can judge from the list given above — have used 
 Matthew's exact words. Regarded as an intervention of 
 John, the phenomena would be unique. Regarded as a 
 careless and misplaced interpolation from Johannine tradition 
 (in which perhaps the Johannine AAA€IC was taken as AAAOC) 
 the insertion in Matthew is fairly explicable. 
 
 [1757] The second inference is of a more general character. 
 It is derived from the fact that we find only one word marked 
 ?f, but many words marked * ; that is to say, when John 
 happens to use a somewhat rare word peculiar to Matthew, 
 he frequently uses it in a different sense from Matthew's, and 
 almost always in an entirely different contexts The word 
 't.Kiov is marked qu. That is because it is quoted both by John 
 and by Matthew from Zechariah ; and it has been shewn above 
 (1456^) that John actually ventures to differ from both the 
 prophet and the Evangelist by omitting the word " meek," 
 which is an integral part of the prophecy. In this list, then, 
 there are (practically) none of the agreements that we found 
 in the John-Mark list. Consequently, when we come, later 
 on, to a number of passages where John agrees with traditions 
 reported identically by Mark and Matthew (but not by 
 Luke), it is a reasonable inference that John's real agreement 
 is with Mark. John's agreement with Matthew is most 
 reasonably explained by the fact that he and Matthew are 
 borrowing from identical passages of Mark. 
 
 1 [1757 d\ It is fair to add that Mt. and Jn agree in applying the word 
 Xvo) to metaphorical " loosing." But they never do it in parallel contexts, 
 even where it might be expected (2517 — 20). 
 
 273 19—2 
 
CHAPTER III 
 
 WORDS PECULIAR TO JOHN AND LUKE 
 § i. Antecedent probability 
 
 [1758] Luke is recognised by all as having not only 
 written in his own style but also compiled traditions in 
 various styles, the differences between which are clearly per- 
 ceptible. This may be seen in the Pauline, Petrine, and other 
 portions of the Acts. It is also manifest in his Gospel, 
 which contains (i) a short Preface in Attic style, (2) a History 
 of Christ's Birth and Childhood in Hebraic style, (3) a History 
 of Christ's acts and short sayings in which he agrees largely 
 with Mark, (4) a Collection of Christ's longer sayings (inclu- 
 ding the Lord's Prayer, the Beatitudes and their context, etc.) 
 in which he closely agrees with Matthew, (5) a Collection of 
 parables in common with Matthew, (6) a Collection of 
 parables and other traditions peculiar to himself, in which a 
 variety of styles is manifest, (7) an Account of the Passion, 
 differing in style and matter from those of Mark and 
 Matthew, (8) an Account of the Resurrection quite different 
 in subject-matter from that in Matthew, and differing in style 
 from Luke's own History of the Birth and Childhood. 
 
 [1759] A compilation of this kind, even though revised 
 by the compiler, and in parts perhaps rewritten by him, would 
 naturally have a wider vocabulary than a book written in one 
 style. Hence we may naturally expect Luke to include a 
 large number of words that would be independently employed 
 
 274 
 
JOHN AND LUKE [1761] 
 
 by any educated evangelists at the end of the first century, 
 though not used by Mark or Matthew. We should therefore 
 expect to find the "John-Luke" more numerous than the 
 "John-Matthew" and very much more numerous than the 
 " John-Mark " agreements, but — in view of the instances where 
 John supports Mark against Luke's silence or deviation — to 
 find also that the number of words marked f, as being paral- 
 lelisms between John and Luke, is very small. 
 
 § 2. T/ie fact 
 
 [1760] The fact harmonizes with this expectation. The 
 list of verbal agreements is very long, and would be longer 
 still if we placed in it some words that belong rather to 
 grammar than to vocabulary^ and will be mentioned later on. 
 But even when the word is rare, there is hardly ever any strict 
 parallelism in the context. " Napkin," for example, in Luke's 
 parable, wraps up a talent, but in John it is used for entomb- 
 ments ^ "Breast," in Luke, occurs twice to describe "beating 
 on the breast " ; but in John it refers to the disciple lying on 
 the breast of Jesus^. 
 
 [1761] Such parallelisms as there are will be found to be 
 confined either to Luke's Single Tradition, or to the Double 
 Tradition of Matthew and Luke. As to this, it was pointed 
 out above (1450) that John supports Luke against Matthew 
 in retaining the apparently harsh precept about "hating one's 
 own life^" Another instance will be given from the Double 
 Tradition (1784 — 92), where Christ's appellation of the dis- 
 ciples as " my friends," which occurs in Luke's version (but 
 
 ^ [1760 d\ For example, \i.€Ta is common to all the Gospels, but \i.ira 
 ravra is peculiar to Jn-Lk. Nvv (Chri.) is almost peculiar to Jn-Lk. Upos 
 after verbs of "speaking" (exc. in the phrase "to one another") is prob. 
 peculiar to Jn-Lk. See 2394 d, 1915 (vi) d, and 2366 d. 
 
 2 Lk. xix. 20, Jn xi. 44, xx. 7 crovbdptov. 
 
 3 Lk. xviii. 13, xxiii. 48, Jn xiii. 25, xxi. 20 (tttjOos. 
 
 * This, however, not being a word but a phrase, does not appear in 
 the list below. 
 
 275 
 
[1762] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 not in Matthew's), is repeated by John. Luke's Single 
 Tradition describes the Saviour as coming after the Resurrec- 
 tion and " standing in the midst " of the disciples : a similar 
 phrase is used by John. These are about all the parallelisms, 
 strictly so called, that can be found between John and Luke. 
 
 § 3- Quasi-parallels 
 
 [1762] Other instances, however, occur where John and 
 Luke use the same words, and these rare words, in describing 
 events that are apparently not identical though sihiilar. For 
 example, the word infjuaaaco, " wipe," is used by both writers 
 in describing the Anointing of Jesus by a woman. Luke 
 says, ''with the hair of her head she began to wipe [his feet]," 
 and again, " with her hair she wiped'' them. John speaks of 
 Mary the sister of Martha as "the one that wiped his feet 
 with her hair," and afterwards describes the act, ''she wiped 
 with her hair his feet." But Luke, in the Anointing, calls the 
 woman " a sinner," and speaks of Mary the sister of Martha 
 elsewhere, without any suggestion of identity. Commentators 
 are divided, and have been from very early times, in their 
 attempts to explain John's agreement with Mark and Matthew 
 in their general account of the Anointing, but with Luke in 
 this detail. For the present* it must suffice to say that the 
 phrase in the two Gospels, although apparently not referring 
 to the same event, appears nevertheless allusive in the later 
 (John) to the narrative contained in the earlier (Luke). 
 
 [1763] " Disembark," airo^alvw, occurs in Luke's version 
 of the CaUing of Peter on the lake of Gennesaretl In this, it 
 is said that Jesus " saw two boats standing by the lake but 
 the fishermen had disembarked from them " ; Peter, one of the 
 fishermen, had " toiled all night " and " taken nothing " ; but, 
 
 1 The point will be fully discussed in The Fourfold Gospel (see 
 Preface above, p. ix). ^ u^ y ^ ^^-^ 
 
 276 
 
TO JOHN AND LUKE [1763] 
 
 at Christ's command, they let down their nets and take such a 
 multitude of fishes that " the nets were breaking." According 
 to John^ Jesus, after the Resurrection, "stood on the beach" 
 and called to the disciples who "in that night had caught 
 nothing." At His command they cast the net on the right 
 side of the ship^ and take one hundred and fifty-three great 
 fishes, yet "the net was not rent." It is after catching 
 this draught that, according to John, "they disembarked 
 on the land." ^ A.iro^aLV(i), though frequently thus used in 
 classical Greek, nowhere else has this meaning in the Greek 
 Testament Old or New^ Hence this single verbal coinci- 
 dence would suffice to claim attention : but when it is com- 
 bined with the similarities in the context, the total effect 
 suggests that John is writing allusively to Luke's tradition, 
 or, at all events, that the two traditions are in some way 
 related. 
 
 1 Jn xxi. 4 — 9. 
 
 2 [1763 d\ There is nothing in Lk. parall. to Jn xxi. 6 " cast your net on 
 the right side of the ship." But in Ps. Ixxxix. 12 "the right (lit. the 
 south) " is rendered ^'- sea'' in LXX by Hebrew confusion. Comp. Lk. v. 4 
 "put out into the deep and let down your nets for a draught." 
 
 3 [1763 <^] In LXX, it is freq. and means "turn out," "prove to be," 
 and it means this in Lk. xxi. 13, Phil. i. 19. " Disembark " = e^epXOMat in 
 Mk vi. 34, Mt. xiv. 14. These facts make the Jn-Lk. agreement some- 
 what more remarkable. 
 
 277 
 
[1764] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 JOHN-LUKE AGREEMENTS^ 
 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 £1764] * dycoviCofim^ 
 dXrjdivos^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 9 
 
 dbiKia^ 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 2 
 
 dvTiKiya)^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 ?t dno^aivo)^ 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 [1765] diroKpio-is 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 dpidfios^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 apKTTao) 
 
 ^ 
 
 2 
 
 apxovTfs^ (Jews) 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 1 [1764 «i] An asterisk denotes that the same word is used in different 
 senses by Jn and Lk. e.^. dyaivl(op,aL, Jn " fight," Lk. " strive (to)." No 
 words are marked t, because there is no certain instance of parallelism. 
 ? t denotes a quasi-parallel context. ^Odoviov and TrapaKvirra) occur in 
 a passage enclosed by W.H. in double brackets, which will be discussed 
 later on (1798—1804). 
 
 2 'Aycoi/t^o/xai, in Lk. xiii. 24 "Strive to enter" (parall. Mt. vii. 13 
 "enter"), Jn xviii. 36 "My officers would strive" \.q. fight. 
 
 3 [1764 <«] 'ASiKi'a, "unrighteousness," which in Lk. xiii. 27 is parall. to 
 Mt. vii. 23 dvop.ia, occurs, in Jn, only in vii. 18, " this man is true and there 
 is no unrighteousness in him" : but it is also in i Jn i. 9, v. 17. For the 
 most part Jn uses " darkness," or " lie," to express " unrighteousness." 
 
 * 'AXT/^ii/ds-, "true," i.e. genuine, Lk. xvi. 11, see 1121/— i. 
 
 * [1764 <^] "Kvvas, Lk. iii. 2 " Li the high-priesthood oi Annas and 
 Caiaphas." That of Annas ended {Enc. "Annas") A.D. 15. That of 
 Caiaphas lasted A.D. 18 — 36. Jn xviii. 13 — 24 explains that Annas was 
 the father-in-law of Caiaphas, and leads us to infer that he at all events 
 occasionally exercised the civil authority of the high-priesthood, since 
 Christ's captors (xviii. 13) "led him to Annas first." 
 
 ^ 'Ai/riXeyo), Lk. ii. 34 "a sign spokeji against" Jn xix. 12 '■'' speaketh 
 against Caesar." 
 
 ^ \\7ro^aivco, " disembark," see 1763. 
 
 ® *Api$n6sj "number," Lk. xxii. 3 "of the number of the Twelve," 
 Jn vi. 10 "in number about five thousand." 
 
 ^ [1765 <2] "KpxovTi^ (of the Jews), mentioned in the sing, by Mt. ix. 18 
 "a [certain] ruler" where parall. Mk v. 22, Lk. viii. 41 indicate that 
 he was a ''^ ruler of the synagogue." But, in the pi., Lk. xxiii. 13, 35, 
 xxiv. 20 refer to members of the Sanhedrin (there is nothing to indicate 
 the meaning in Lk. xiv. i). In Jn vii. 26, 48, xii. 42 it probably means 
 members of the Sanhedrin, and Jn iii. i " Nicodemus...a ruler of the 
 Jews" is subsequently represented as taking part in the deliberations of 
 the Sanhedrin (vii. 51). 
 
 278 
 
TO JOHN AND LUKE [1769] 
 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 * ^adCs^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 /3a7rr&)2 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 [1766] ^ovXevofiai 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 ^o{)s 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 ^paxicav^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 /Spaxv 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 yeirav 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 yvoopi^Q) 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 [1767] •yvtooTos* 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 * ypdfifia^ 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 biabihoayLL 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 edos 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 el8o9^ 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 elardyto 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 [1768] ?t i<^lda■(Tco^ 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 ifi7rlfi7r\r)[jii^ 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 evBdde 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 eviavTos^ 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 evrevdev 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 evcomov^^ 
 
 22 
 
 I 
 
 [1769] ^irjyeofiac^^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 € 7re ira 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 1 Ba^vs, " deep," Lk. xxiv. i ' ear/y (lit. deep) dawn," Jn iv. 1 1 " the 
 well is deep.^' 
 
 2 BaTTTO), "dip," Lk. xvi. 24 "that he should </z)5... and cool my tongue," 
 Jn xiii. 26 {dis) of Jesus '"'' dipping'''' the sop. 
 
 3 Bpaxtwi/, "arm," Lk. i. 51 " He hath shewed strength with his arm^'' 
 (quot. Ps. Ixxxix. 10, or xcviii. i), Jn xii. 38 (quoting Is. liii. i), "To whom 
 hath the arm of the Lord been revealed 1 " 
 
 ^ ri/ojo-rds', " acquaintance," Lk. ii. 44, xxiii. 49 of the " acquaintance " 
 of Christ's parents, and of Christ, Jn xviii. 15, 16 of the beloved 
 disciple as being an '•'■acquaintance of the high priest." 
 
 ^ Tpd^-jxa, in Lk. xvi. 6, 7 " Take thy bond^'' Jn v. 47 " his \i.e. Moses's] 
 writings^'' vii. 15 " How knoweth this man letters'^ ^^ 
 
 6 EiSoff, " appearance," Lk. iii. 22 " in bodily appearance^^'' ix. 29 " The 
 appearance of his face became different," Jn v. yj " Ye have neither seen 
 his \i.e. God's] appearance^ 
 
 ^ [1768 ci\ 'EKfj.d(Tcroi 6pi^iv, "wipe with hair," occurs in Lk. vii. 38, 44 
 and Jn xi. 2, xii. 3, concerning the " wiping" of Christ's feet with the hair 
 of a woman described by Lk. as " a sinner," but by Jn as Mary the sister 
 of Lazarus (1762). Jn (xiii. 5) also uses the word concerning the "wiping" 
 of the feet of the disciples by Christ. 
 
 8 'EpTTifxTrXrjpi, " fill." Lk. i. 53 " The hungry he hsith^lled with good 
 things," vi. 25 "Woe unto you, O ye that are y?//^^ now," Jn vi. 12 " But 
 when they [i.e. the 5000] were^t/ed." 
 
 ^ 'EviavTos, "year," Lk. iv. 19 (Is. Ixi. 2) ''the acceptable year of the 
 Lord," Jn xi. 49, 51, xviii. 13 ''the high priest in thBX year " i.e. Caiaphas. 
 
 10 [1768 d] 'Ei^a)7rioi/, " before the face of," " in the sight of," in Jn, only 
 in XX. 30 "many other signs, therefore, did Jesus in the sight ^ the 
 disciples," comp. Lk. xxiv. 43 "and he did eat in their sight (J. atraii/)." 
 Jn is probably referring to manifestations, like that in Lk. xxiv. 43, of the 
 risen Saviour, "in the sight of" the disciples alone. 
 
 11 'E^rjyeofiai, "relate," "describe." Lk. xxiv. 35 "they described that 
 
 279 
 
[1770] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 * eTTiKeifiai^ 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 (/j.arto"/xof 2 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 KrJTTOS 
 
 
 4 
 
 koXttos^ 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 [1770] kvk\6<o* 
 
 
 I 
 
 Kvpios, 6 5 (Jesus) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 (narr.) 
 
 c. 14 
 
 5 
 
 Xayxdvay^ 
 
 
 I 
 
 * Ad^apos"^ 
 
 4 
 
 II 
 
 AeveiTTjs^ 
 
 
 I 
 
 * Xoyi^ofxai^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 [1771] Uttt]^^ 
 
 
 4 
 
 Map^all 
 
 3 
 
 9 
 
 Mapta(/x)i2 
 
 2 
 
 9 
 
 * fJi1]VV(0^^ 
 
 ' 
 
 ' 
 
 which had occurred to them in the way," i.e. the appearance of the risen 
 Saviour, Jn i. i8 "the only begotten hath described him," i,e. God, whom 
 "no man hath seen." 
 
 1 'ETTLKeifiai in Lk. v. I, xxiii. 23, means "to be pressing upon, or 
 importunate," in Jn xi. 38, xxi. 9 "lying on the top of." 
 
 2 'IfiOTia-fios, "clothing," Lk. vii. 25, ix. 29 ; Jn xix. 24 (quoting Ps. xxii. 
 18 "on my vesture they cast lots"). 
 
 2 KoXnos, "bosom," Lk. vi. 38 "good measure... into your l>osom" xvi. 
 22, 23 of Abraham's ^^ dosom,^' Jn i. 18 "the bosom of the Father," xiii. 23 
 " in the bosoin of Jesus." 
 
 ^ KvkXoo), " surround," Lk. xxi. 20 " Jerusalem surrounded by armies," 
 Jn X. 24 " the Jews therefore surrounded him," i.e. Jesus. 
 
 ^ Ktlptoff, 6, " the Lord," meaning Jesus (not in vocative), see 1779 — 81. 
 
 ^ Aayx«»'«o, "draw lots for," "obtain by lot," Lk. i. 9, Jn xix. 24. 
 
 ^ Ad^apo^^ Lk. xvi. 20 — 5, Lazarus the beggar; Jn xi. i — 43, xii. i — 17, 
 the Lazarus that was raised from the dead. 
 
 ^ Aei;eiV?;y, " Levite," Lk. x. 32 in the parable of the Good Samaritan, 
 Jn i. 19 "priests and Levites." 
 
 ^ Aoy[^op.ai., "reckon," "consider," in Lk. xxii. 37 (quoting Is. liii. 12) 
 " he was reckoned," in Jn xi. 50 " nor do ye consider." 
 
 ^<^ Avir-q, "sorrow," Lk. xxii. 45 "He found them sleeping for sorrow" 
 Jn xvi. 6, 20 — 22 in words of Christ, concerning the ^^ sorrow" of the 
 disciples at the thought of being parted from their Master. 
 
 11 [1771^] Mdpda, in Lk., only in x. 38, 40, 41 ; in Jn xi. i — 39 (the 
 raising of Lazarus) and xii. 2 "Martha was serving (dtT/Kovet)," which 
 corresponds to the noun "service" in Lk. x. 40 " M. was distracted about 
 much service (diaKoviav)." 
 
 12 [1771 d] Mapia(/i), in Lk., only in x. 39, 42 ; in Jn xi. i — 45 (the 
 raising of Lazarus) and xii. 3 " Mary... anointed the feet of Jesus." Lk. x. 
 39 describes her as " sitting at the feet of the Lord," and Jn xi. 20 as 
 " sitting in the house." 
 
 ^^ Mrjvvco, in Lk. XX. 37 " Moses indicated in the passage about the 
 bush," in Jn xi. 57 "if any man knew. ..he was \.o give information." 
 
 280 
 
TO JOHN AND LUKE [1774] 
 
 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 
 * iJLOvoyevrjs^ 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 riKtia)^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 [1772] 
 
 odoviov^ 
 
 [[I]] 
 
 4 
 
 OKTQ) 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 
 TrapaKviTTO)^ 
 
 [[I]] 
 
 2 
 
 7repiT€fivco 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 
 nXrjpTjs (of Christ) 
 
 5 I 
 
 I 
 
 Trpdacra)^ 
 
 6 
 
 2 
 
 [1773] 
 
 Trporpexoi 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 2ap.apia 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 
 * SiXcoajU,^ 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 aovbdpiov 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 
 (rrfjdos 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 (Tvyy(vr)9 
 
 3 or 4 
 
 I 
 
 [1774J 
 
 (rvvridepai^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 (TCOTTJp ^ 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 1 Moi'oyei/J7S'. Lk. vii. I2, viii. 42, ix. 38 of "an only child" ; Jn i. 14, 
 18, iii. 16, 18 "the only begotten" Son of God. 
 
 2 [1771 c] NiKaw, " conquer," Lk. xi. 22 " But when the man that 
 is stronger than he shall come against him and conquer him," Jn xvi. 33 
 "Be of good cheer, I have conquered the world." In the rest of N.T. 
 vi/cao) occurs only in Rom. iii. 4 (quotation), xii. 21 {bis)^ i Jn (6), Rev. (14 
 oris). 
 
 3 'O^dvtoj/, "linen bandage," perh. in Lk. xxiv. 12, see 1798, 1804. 
 
 * Tlapa<v7rra>, " Stoop (?) and look into," like odovcov in last note, occurs 
 perh. in Lk. xxiv. 12, see 1798—1804. 
 
 5 [1772 a] nX^prjs " full," applied to Christ in Lk. iv. i "/?/// of the 
 Holy Spirit," Jn i. 14 (of the Logos) '"''full of grace and truth." Both 
 passages occur at the outset, where the two Evangelists are describing 
 Christ's entrance into public life. Both might naturally be written with 
 some reference to contemporary discussions about the manner in which 
 (Col. ii. 9) "the fulness of the Godhead dwelt" in Jesus " bodily." Luke, 
 who uses the expression "bodily" in connexion with the "dove," might 
 interpret the "fulness" as referring to the Holy Spirit descending at 
 baptism. John might see the "fulness" in the human, yet divine, 
 " graciousness and truth," i.e. probably " kindness and truth," manifested 
 in the incarnate Logos and imparted by Him to men. Acts xi. 24 "full 
 of the Holy Spirit" is applied to Barnabas (comp. Acts vi. 3, vii. 55). 
 If Christ's disciples were commonly described as "full of the Holy 
 Spirit," John may well have considered that the "fulness" of Christ, at 
 the outset of the Gospel, needed a different description. 
 
 ^ [1772 (^] npao-o-o), in Lk., (iii. 13. xix. 23) ^'- exact^'' elsewhere (xxii. 23, 
 xxiii. 15, 41 bis) ^^ do [eviiy In Jn iii. 20, 6 cftavXa Trpacrcroiv opp. to iii. 21 
 6 Se TTOLcov rrjv aXrjBeiav : in Jn v. 29 ol to. dyada noiTjcravTes precedes 01 ra 
 (f)avXa Trpd^avres. Comp. Rom. vii. 1 9 ov yap o BeXa ttoim dyadov, dX\a o 
 01) OeXo) KaKov tovto Trpdcrcra). 
 
 '^ 2iXcoa/x, "Siloam," Lk. xiii. 4 "tower," Jn ix. 7 "pool." 
 
 ^ ^vvTidefiai, "agree," Lk. xxii. 5 "they agreed to give him [Judas 
 Iscariot] money," Jn ix. 22 " The Jews had agreed^"* to cast out of the 
 synagogue any one that professed belief in Christ. 
 
 ^ [1774 «] 'EaTTjp, "Saviour," Jn iv. 42 "This is indeed (/ie Saviour of 
 
 381 
 
[1775] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 Lk. Jn Lk. Jn 
 
 <ra>rr)pla^ 4 I raxeas 2 I 
 
 TfXeioco^ 2 5 vfierepos I 3 
 
 [1775] v7rofiifJLVT)<TKOi I I ?t (piXos (not appl. 
 
 to Christ)^ 14 6 
 
 //te world." This remarkable utterance is assigned to Samaritans. 
 " Saviour of the world," in N.T., occurs elsewhere only in i Jn iv. 14 
 " The Father hath sent his Son [to be the] Saviour of the world." Lk. 
 has i. 47 " My spirit hath rejoiced in God my Saviour" and ii. 1 1 " There 
 was born for you to-day a Saviour" 
 
 1 [1774 b'\ ^(OTTjpia, " salvation." On Jn iv. 22 " Salvaliou is from the 
 Jews," see 1647. In Lk., it occurs in his Introduction i. 69 — yy, and in the 
 story of Zacchaeus, Lk. xix. 9 "to-day hath salvation come to this 
 house." 
 
 2 [1774 ir] TfXeido), " accompHsh," or "perfect," occurs in Lk. ii. 43 
 "when they had accomplished the days," Lk. xiii. 32 "on the third day I 
 am to be perfected {rcXeioviiai)." In Jn iv. 34, v. 36, xvii. 4, it is used of the 
 Son "perfecting" the work appointed by the Father. In xvii. 23 "that 
 they all may he perfected into one," it describes the unity of the Church. 
 The last instance is xix. 28 " that the Scripture may be accomplished." 
 
 3 [1775 d\ ^lKos, "friend," occurs once in Mt. xi. 19, applied to Christ 
 (parall. to Lk, vii. 34) "friend o( publicans and sinners." Apart from this, 
 it occurs, in Lk., in the Discourse of Christ where, after the appointment 
 of the Twelve, Jesus prepares them for persecution. Mt. x. 24, 28 omits 
 
 'friends," thus : "The disciple is not above the teacher... And yy be not 
 afraid of them that kill the body." Lk. separates these precepts, having 
 (vi. 40) "The disciple is not above the teacher," and, much later (xii. 4) 
 "■ But I say unto you., [being] my friends, be not afraid of them that kill 
 the body." John, in the Last Discourse, has a division similar to that of 
 Luke, first (Jn xiii. 16) " The bondservant is not greater than his lord, nor 
 yet an apostle greater than he that sent him," and then (Jn xv. 14, 15, 20) 
 " Ye are my friends, if ye continue doing that which I command you. 
 No longer do I call you bondservants... but I have called yo\ifrie?tds.... 
 The bondservant is not greater than his lord : if they persecuted me, they 
 will also persecute you." 
 
 [1775 b] This then is one of the few passages where Jn follows a 
 tradition found in Lk. alone, or rather in Lk.'s version of the Double 
 Tradition. But, whereas Lk. wraps up a great deal in the appositional 
 phrase " you, [being] my friends," Jn shews both why the disciples are 
 henceforth to be called friends and what they must be prepared for, as 
 the consequence of the title. On this tradition, and its origin, see 
 1784-92. 
 
 282 
 
TO JOHN AND LUKE [1776] 
 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 
 Lk. Jn 
 
 (fypeap 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 (f)(OTi^(0 ^ 
 
 I I 
 
 Xdpis 2 
 
 8 
 
 4 
 
 ois (when) 3 
 
 150116 15 
 
 § 4. "Son of Joseph'' 
 
 [1776] In addition to the single words above mentioned 
 there are several phrases of great importance peculiar to Luke 
 and John*. Foremost among these, in Johannine order, 
 comes (i) "Son of Joseph" applied to Christ. There are 
 also (2) the above-mentioned application of " the Lord " to 
 Jesus in narrative; (3) "sons of light" used in both Gospels 
 by Christ ; (4) " my friends" applied by Jesus to the disciples; 
 (5) " ]tsus... stood in the midst,'' describing Christ's manifesta- 
 tion after the Resurrection ; (6) the combination of the rare 
 words *' glancing into " and " linen bandages " in a description 
 of what was seen by a disciple in Christ's sepulchre after He 
 
 ^ ^coriXa), " enlighten," in Lk. xi. 36 in a simile, of a " lainp " ; Jn i. 9, in 
 a metaphor, of " the true light.^'' 
 
 2 [1775 c\ Xdpis, " grace," Lk. i. 30 " thou hast found grace with God," 
 at the Annunciation, ii. 40, 52 of the "grace" of God on Jesus as a child 
 and as a youth, iv. 22 of the words of "grace" from His mouth, vi. 32, 33, 
 34 " What t/ian^ have ye ? " xvii. 9 " Does he give thanks ? " In Jn, it 
 occurs of (i. 14 — 17) '•'■grace and truth" (as distinct from "Law") coming 
 to man through the incarnate Logos. 
 
 3 [1775^] 'Qy, "when," occurs (15) in Jn with aorist (incl. ^r)— a 
 frequent meaning in LXX. Except in xix. 33 (where tbs- occurs in 
 parenth.) Jn always has Se, or ovv^ before, or after, (as "when." With 
 imperf. (xx. 11 cKXaiev) it means ^^ white" {"whz'te she was weeping"). 
 On Jn xii. 35—6 (dis) see 2201. 
 
 [1775^] The number given above (15 or 16) in Lk. excludes xxiv. 32 
 {Ms) (R.V.) ^^ white" (with imperf.), xii. 58 ^^ white thou art going," xx. ^7 
 " when (or, since) he calleth." In Lk., as never precedes ovv, and it never 
 precedes Se except in Lk. v. 4, vii. 12. Mk-Mt. prefer ore (e.g. in Mk xi. i, 
 Mt. xxi. I, contrasted with Lk. xix. 29 cos). 
 
 * There is also the tradition about " hating one's own life " which has 
 been discussed above (1450) as a specimen of Jn's allusiveness. It occurs 
 in Lk.'s version of the Double Tradition. On /Sao-ra^co o-Tavpov, see 1792 1>. 
 
 283 
 
[1777] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 had risen — a passage certainly genuine in John, but bracketed 
 by W. H. in Luke. Each of these requires separate discussion, 
 and they will now be taken in their order. 
 
 [1777] Mark and Matthew say that when Jesus visited 
 " his own country," people in the synagogue said " Is not this 
 the carpenter," or, "the son of the carpenter?^" Luke, relating 
 a visit to " Nazareth where he had been brought up," makes 
 the people in the synagogue say, " Is not this [t/ie] son of 
 Joseph}-'' John gives no such utterance in his account of our 
 Lord's visit to Galilee where He quotes the proverb about " a 
 prophet in his own country^^" : but in his account of Christ's 
 Eucharistic teaching in the synagogue at Capernaum'^ he 
 makes the Jews say " Is not this Jesus the son of Joseph whose 
 father and mother we (emph.) know.?-^" Mark and Matthew 
 agree with John in mentioning or implying "mother" (Mk 
 " the son of Mary," Mt. " is not his mother called Mary?") and 
 both add a mention of brothers and sisters : but the names of 
 the brothers vary. 
 
 [1778] At the outset of the Gospel, John represents Philip 
 as saying to Nathanael, " We have found him of whom Moses 
 in the Law wrote, and the Prophets [wrote], Jesus \the'\ son of 
 Joseph, [Jesus] of Nazareth'^." Nathanael raises no objection 
 except on the ground of " Nazareth," and almost immediately 
 afterwards confesses Jesus to be " the Son of God " and "King 
 of Israel." Thus John's narrative brings Nathanael's belief 
 in " the son of Joseph " as being also " the Son of God," into 
 contrast with the unbelief of the Jews in "the son of Joseph" 
 because they "know" His "father and mother." Luke 
 certainly does not believe Jesus to have been " son of 
 Joseph" any more than he believes him to have been 
 
 1 Mk vi. 3, Mt. xiii. 55. 
 
 2 Lk. iv. 22 oi»;^i vio? €(TTiv 'I. ovros- ; 
 
 3 Jn iv. 43—4. ^ Jn vi. 59. 
 ^ Jn vi. 42 ov\i. ovTos eariv 'I. o vlos 'I. ; 
 
 ® Jn i. 45 ^Irjcrovv vlov rov *lcocrfj(f) tov dno N. 
 
 284 
 
TO JOHN AND LUKE [1779] 
 
 born at Nazareth. It is the Jews, according to Luke, that 
 are in error. The Jews call Nazareth (Lk. iv. 23) "thy 
 country I' Luke calls it (Lk. iv. 16) " Nazareth where he was 
 brought up " : and similarly Luke intends us to believe that 
 the Jews were deceived about Christ's being "the son of 
 Joseph" and that Jesus did not undeceive them. John seems 
 to differ from Luke on both points. But in any case the great 
 error of the Jews, according to John, would seem to have 
 consisted in their imagination that the Son of God could not 
 be incarnate in a man whose "father and mother" they 
 " knew." We cannot, however, say that John is here alluding 
 to Luke's particular phrase, " son of Joseph," for it must have 
 been the subject of many controversies before the end of the 
 first century, and John may be alluding to these as a whole, 
 differing from Luke's view of the controversy, but not referring 
 specially to Luke's language. 
 
 § 5. " The Lord" meaning ''Jesus'' 
 
 [1779] In Evangelistic narrative — strictly so called, i.e. 
 excluding speech of any kind as well as the speech of Christ 
 — "the Lord" means "Jesus" about fourteen times in Luke^ 
 and five times in John: and there is a great difference between 
 the two in usage as well as in frequency. In Luke, for 
 example, this title introduces the raising of the widow's 
 son at Nain (" anH when the Lord saw her he had compassion 
 on her") and the sending of the Seventy ("Now after these 
 things the Lord appointed seventy others") and Christ's 
 
 1 [1779 a] Lk. vii. 13, 19, x. i, 39, 41, xi. 39, xii. 42, xiii. 15, xvii. 5, 6, 
 xviii. 6, xix. 8, xxii. 61 {bis), comp. xxiv. 3 to crcofia [[rov Kvplov 'It^o-oO]]. 
 Some Latin MSS., as well as NAD, have it (SS "our Lord") in Lk. xxii. 
 31. In xii. 42, xvii. 5 (if compared with Mt. xviii. 21), xxii. 61, there is 
 mention of Peter in the context or in parallel Mt. In Lk. xxii. 31, if 
 genuine, it precedes an utterance of our Lord to Peter. 
 
 285 
 
[1780] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 definition of the faithful steward (in reply to a question of 
 Peter's) " And the Lo7'd said, Who then is the faithful and 
 wise steward...?" Luke also describes John the Baptist as 
 sending disciples "to the Lord" \ Mary, the sister of Martha, 
 as "sitting at the Lord's feet," and ^^ the Lord'' as gently 
 rebuking Martha. In all these cases, the phrase containing 
 " the Lord " is an integral part of the narrative. 
 
 [1780] But this is not so clearly the case in John e.g. iv. i 
 "When, therefore, the Lord knew... he left Judaea," where the 
 sentence might be regarded not exactly as narrative, but 
 rather as comment intended to explain the situation and to 
 prepare the way for what was done. Still less can the phrase 
 be called "integral" in vi. 23 " Howbeit there came boats 
 from Tiberias nigh unto the place where they ate the bread 
 after the Lord had given thanks" — which R.V. prints as a 
 parenthesis, being indeed a parenthetic explanation of the 
 situation. So, too, in xi. 2 (R.V.) " It was that Mary which 
 anointed the Lord with ointment," the sentence is not a part of 
 the narrative of the raising of Lazarus (which immediately 
 follows) but a parenthetic definition of this particular Mary 
 — since there were others of that name. There remain xx. 20 
 "rejoiced at seeing the Lord" and xxi. 12 "knowing that it 
 was the Lord.'' Both of these may perhaps be explained with 
 reference to a previous mention of " the Lord " in speech. In 
 the former case, Mary had on that same day come to the 
 disciples saying " I have seen the Lord" and bringing a 
 message to them. Then when He appeared to them they 
 rejoiced that they too had "seen the Lord." In the latter 
 case, the beloved disciple had just said to Peter (xxi. 7) " It 
 is the Lord," and the narrative proceeds, " Simon Peter, having 
 heard the words^ ' It is the Lord' " Afterwards, when the 
 disciples were convinced that this was true, the Evangelist 
 
 ^ Jn xxi. 7 on is prob. equival. to inverted commas, or "the words 
 (2189—90). 
 
 286 
 
TO JOHN AND LUKE [1782] 
 
 not unnaturally records their conviction by a repetition of 
 the same phrase ("it is the Lord''). Or perhaps the meaning 
 maybe "knowing [and saying to themselves] 'It is the Lord!" 
 [1781] The fact above noted (1779 «) that some of the 
 passages in Luke mentioning " the Lord " are connected 
 with Peter, deserves to be studied along with the fact that 
 the fragment of the Gospel of Peter speaks of Christ as " the 
 Lord!' and by no other term, and this, before the Resurrection. 
 In that fragment, He is not called " Jesus," even by enemies : 
 they cannot, of course, call Him Lord, but they use the 
 personal pronoun or leave a pronoun to be supplied \ Also, 
 in a passage where Luke has "The Apostles said to the 
 Lord, 'Increase our faith,'" the preceding verse in Luke about 
 " forgiving seven times " is parallel to a passage in Matthew 
 in which Peter asks how many times one must forgive a 
 brother 2. Most of the passages in Luke are peculiar to his 
 Gospel : and they give the impression of having been taken 
 from some book (perhaps containing the teaching or preaching 
 of Peter) in which Jesus was habitually called '^ the Lord!' 
 There is no ground for thinking that in this point John 
 alludes to Luke or imitates his usage. 
 
 § 6. " Sons of light " 
 
 [1782] Luke has, in the Parable of the Unjust Steward, 
 (xvi. 8) " The sons of this world are, for their own generation, 
 more prudent than the sons of the light!' John has (xii. 36) 
 " Believe in the light that ye may become sons of light!' In 
 Luke, " the sons of this world " would naturally take, as its 
 
 1 [1781 «] Evang. Pet. § i "Herod the king commands the Lord io 
 be taken (7rap[aXj7/x]<^^^i'at)...§ 2 Joseph the friend of Pilate and of the 
 Lord... diSk^d the body of the Lord... Pila-te sending to Herod asked for 
 hzs body... Herod said, Brother Pilate, even if no one had asked for him 
 we should have buried hi'm...^' 
 
 2 Lk. xvii. 5 " increase our faith," preceded by xvii. 4 " if seven times 
 a day he sin," which is parall. to Mt. xviii. 21 foil, containing Peter's 
 question "until seven times?" 
 
 A. V. 287 20 
 
[1783] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 antithesis, " the sons of the world to come," of which Wetstein 
 and Schottgen give abundant instances while giving none of 
 " the sons of light." But the occurrence of '' so7is of Ugh f and 
 ''children of light'' in two of the Epistles^ shews that such 
 expressions must have been in early use among Christians. 
 The Book of Enoch contains several kindred phrases, in- 
 dicating that " light " will not only " appear to the righteous " 
 but will pass upon them : '' The light of the Lord of spirits is 
 seen on the face of the holy and righteous and elect " ; it also 
 classes " the holy ones who are in heaven " with " the elect 
 who dwell in the garden of life and every spirit of light " ; and 
 it speaks of " the spirits of the good who belong to the 
 generation of lighf^r 
 
 [1783] Matthew and Luke record Christ's doctrine that 
 " the light of the body is the eye," but they say nothing about 
 " the light of the soul " : and some readers might infer that 
 each man's " light " belongs to himself, instead of being the 
 Light of the World accepted by each through the eye of the 
 soul. Mark does not mention the word " light " except 
 as that of the fire at which Peter warms himself On the 
 subject of spiritual light he has nothing except a sentence or 
 two about a "lamp." Yet the three Synoptists say just 
 enough to shew that our Lord must have said a great deal 
 more about the "light" that "the Lord of spirits" imparts 
 to men. There were many reasons why He might prefer the 
 Enoch metaphor of " light " to the metaphor subsequently 
 adopted by the Talmudists, " The sons of the world that is to 
 come." The latter might be restricted to the future and to 
 those who should hereafter have risen from the dead. The 
 former might be applied, as St Paul applies it, to living 
 Thessalonians and Ephesians, with the practical precept, 
 
 1 I Thess. V. 5 "Ye are sons of light and sons of day," Eph. v. 8 "But 
 now are ye light in the Lord, walk as children of light!''* 
 
 2 Enoch (ed. Charles) xxxviii. 2 — 4, Ixi. 12, cviii. 11. These extracts 
 are of different dates but all {ib. p. 33) " before the beginning of the 
 Christian era." 
 
 288 
 
TO JOHN AND LUKE 
 
 [1784] 
 
 " Walk as children of light." There is not the slightest reason 
 to think that John, in using the phrase "sons of light," is 
 referring to Luke's single use of it. 
 
 §7. ''My friends'' 
 
 [1784] Where Luke represents our Lord as saying to the 
 
 disciples "my friends," the parallel Matthew contains two 
 
 prominent thoughts. The first is, that the disciple is not 
 
 greater than his master, so that the former ought to be 
 
 prepared to share the persecutions endured by the latter. 
 
 The second is, that the disciples must not be afraid of any 
 
 earthly enemy, for he has no power beyond the grave. Luke 
 
 and John separate the two^ as follows : 
 
 Mt. X. 24 — 8 Lk. vi. 40 
 
 "A disciple is not "A disciple is not 
 
 above his teacher above his teacher, 
 
 butevery one [when] 
 
 perfected shall be 
 
 as his teacher..." 
 
 his 
 nor a bond-servant 
 above his lord... if 
 they called the Mas- 
 ter of the House 
 Beelzebul, how 
 
 much more them of 
 his household (otKia- 
 Kov%) ! Fear them 
 not therefore. . .What 
 I say to you in the 
 darkness, say(et7raTe) 
 in the light... And be 
 not afraid of (aVo) 
 them that kill the 
 body..." 
 
 xn. 3—4 
 *' ...Wherefore, 
 what things ye said 
 (ctTrarc) in the dark- 
 ness shall be heard 
 in the X\^\....But 
 I say unto you \be- 
 ing\ my friends^ Be 
 not afraid of them 
 (accus.) that kill 
 the body...." 
 
 Jn xiii. 16 — 17 
 "A bond-servant 
 is not greater than 
 his lord nor one 
 sent (Ht. apostle) 
 greater than he that 
 sent him. If ye 
 know these things, 
 blessed are ye if ye 
 be doing them." 
 
 XV. 14— 15» 20 
 " Ye are my friends 
 if ye be doing that 
 which I command 
 you. No longer do 
 I call you bond- 
 servants... but I have 
 called ^ow friends... 
 Remember the word 
 that I said to you, 
 The bond-servant is 
 not greater than his 
 lord. If they per- 
 secuted me thev will 
 also persecute you." 
 
 ^ Moreover, in Lk. and Jn, the fij'st thought has nothing to do with 
 
 289 20 — 2 
 
[1785] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 [1785] Here Matthew uses first " bond-servant," and then 
 "them of his household," to express the relation of the 
 disciples to their Teacher. Luke, giving the words as two 
 distinct utterances made at different times, makes no reference 
 to " bond-servants " nor to " them of his household," but in the 
 second he inserts, "/ say unto you \being\ my friendsr John 
 agrees with Luke in mentioning ^'friends'' in the second 
 utterance ; but he disagrees from Luke, and agrees with 
 Matthew, in retaining the word ''bond-servant!' He represents 
 Jesus as saying to the disciples, in effect, " I called you once 
 bond-servants^ and indeed it is true that, if their lord be 
 persecuted, the bond-servants must expect persecution: but 
 now I call you my friends..,!' 
 
 [1786] In order to explain Matthew's omission of " I say 
 unto you, my friends (dat.)," recourse may be had to the 
 analogy of the Sermon on the Mount, where he frequently 
 omits introductory clauses inserted by Luke stating the 
 persons to whom, and the circumstances in which, the ut- 
 terances were severally made, because he prefers to treat the 
 whole as one continuous discourse. Moreover the Greek 
 dative of " friends," following " to you," might easily be taken 
 as vocative, and consequently as not very important. Indeed, 
 if " my friends " occurred in the Aramaic original, it may have 
 very well been actually vocative, but may have been inter- 
 preted by Luke as implying a reason for not fearing: " I say 
 unto you, my friends!' — i.e. '' since you are my friends," or 
 '* [being] my friends ((plXoc^)!' — " do not be afraid." This 
 makes excellent sense, but translators might be excused for 
 not rendering a vocative thus, and some, not seeing its force, 
 might omit the noun. 
 
 [1787] This explanation however fails to take into account 
 that Matthew here uses a word (" them of his household ") 
 
 persecution ; the inference, in Jn, from "not greater than his lord," is (Jn 
 xiii. 16—17) that the disciple must serve his brethren as the Lord served 
 them. 
 
 290 
 
TO JOHN AND LUKE [1788] 
 
 that might be taken as meaning ''relations'' or '^friends and 
 relations!' — a word, too, that is actually taken by him in this 
 sense (quoting Micah) a little later on : "I came to set a man 
 at variance against his father. ..and a man's foes [shall be] 
 they of his own householder In Micah, the Hebrew is "men 
 of his house " ; in Matthew, the Syriac has " sons of his house." 
 Either of these terms might well be rendered 'friends'' in 
 Greek. Suppose, then, that a Greek Evangelist attempted to 
 explain to Greeks the words in Matthew, "A disciple is not 
 above his teacher, nor a bond-servant above his lord... if they 
 called the Master of the House Beelzebul, how much more 
 the fnen of his house ! Fear them, not therefore..."', might he 
 not think it necessary to bring out the meaning of this 
 ambiguous term " men of his house " ? This he might do by 
 calling attention to the fact that Jesus had previously used 
 the term "bond-servants" and that this new term meant 
 something different: "The Lord had before called them 
 bond-servants but now He called them friends, saying, Fear 
 them not...".? 
 
 [1788] According to this view John is intervening in the 
 Double Tradition in order to bring out the full meaning of a 
 doctrine that he conceived to be partially and imperfectly 
 expressed by Matthew and Luke; and, while adopting Luke's 
 phrase " my friends" he throws the essence of Matthew's 
 version into the first person as the teaching of Christ, " I 
 before called you bond-servants, but now I call you friends." 
 A Greek would naturally take " bond-servant " as antithetical 
 to "friendl" John perhaps regards "bond-servant," not as 
 
 1 [1787 «] Mt. X. 36 quoting Mic. vii. 6 "The son dishonoureth the 
 father... a man's enemies are the men of his own house (LXX oi iv rw 
 oiKO) avTov)." In the LXX of Esther, ''friends {(1)lXoi)" is loosely used to 
 denote the inner circle of the counsellors of the King or of Haman, 
 Esth. i. 3, ii. 18, vi. 9 " princes," i. 13 the " wise men that knew the times," 
 vi. 13 "wise men." 
 
 2 [1788 a] This antithesis would be familiar to those whom Epictetus 
 taught to say (iv. 3. 9) "I a.m free and a. friend of God^' (comp. iii. 22. 
 
 291 
 
[1789] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 antithetical, but rather as inferior, and preparatory, to 
 "friend." But that will be considered later on\ 
 
 [1789] It is possible, and indeed probable, that our Lord 
 repeated more than once His doctrine of encouragement 
 under persecution: and a juxtaposition of ''servant'' and 
 ''friend'' occurs in the passage in which Isaiah, after describing 
 the making of an idol by " the carpenter " and " the gold- 
 smith," encourages his countrymen in the name of Jehovah to 
 refuse to conform to idolatry: " But thou, Israel my servant, 
 Jacob whom I have chosen, the seed of Abraham (R.V.) my 
 friend ; thou whom I have taken hold of from the ends of the 
 earth... j^<3:r thou not, for I am with thee^" This suggests 
 a possibility that the doctrine of ''friendship" with God, 
 and of a distinction between His ''friends" and His " servants',' 
 may have formed a larger part of the higher Jewish teaching, 
 and also of Christ's Gospel, than is generally supposed. 
 
 95 and 24. 60). Not improbably, John had Epictetus in view in another 
 use of the word "friend." Pilate, servilely truckling to the Jews, is 
 intimidated by their cry (Jn xix. 12) "If thou let this man go, thou art 
 not a friend of Caesar'^ Epictetus frequently satirises the man that is 
 proud to call himself " a friend of Caesar " (a title resembling our " Right 
 Honourable" applied to Privy Councillors): (iv. i. 8—14) "I am of 
 senatorial rank," says one, " and I am a friend of Caesar, and I have 
 served as consul, and I have crowds of slaves... Who can put constraint 
 on me, save Caesar, who is Lord of all.?" To which the philosopher 
 replies that, if this poor rich man can have constraint put upon him by 
 Caesar, he is, by his own confession, a slave, his only distinction from 
 common slaves being that he is—" a slave in a large house." Just so, he 
 says, the servile Nicopolitans "have a way of shouting 'By Caesar's 
 fortune, we are free ' ! " 
 
 1 Jesus says (Jn xv. 15) ^^ No ioftger do I call you bond-servants," which 
 suggests that the " bond-service " was recognised by Him as a rudimentary 
 stage, and not condemned by Him as essentially bad. 
 
 2 [1789^] Is. xli. 8 " Israel, my servant,'' LXX Trals- /xou, but the other 
 translators SoOXe ^lov, "Abraham, my friend'' (Ibn Ezra, "my lover"), 
 LXX ov r^ydnrja-a, Aq. dyairrjTov fxov, Sym. rov (fiCKov {xov. Comp. 2 Chr. 
 XX. 7 "the seed of Abraham thy friend," LXX a-Trepixan 'A. rS riyaTrrjixevco 
 iTov, i.e. " thy beloved seed of Abraham," al. ra <^iXw, al. rov (piXov. 
 
 292 
 
TO JOHN AND LUKE [1790] 
 
 [1790] Take, for example, the following parallel between 
 the Fourth Gospel and Philo in which the essence of free 
 service is defined : 
 
 Jn XV. 15 Philo i. 401 
 
 "The bond-servant knoweth " For wisdom is God's friend 
 
 not what his lord doeth : but (<^tXov...^6a)) rather than bond- 
 
 I have called you friends : for servant {hovXov) : wherefore also 
 
 all things that I heard from my [the sacred writer] says clearly 
 
 Father I have made known un- about Abraham ' Shall I hide 
 
 to you." [it] from Abraham vay friend} 
 
 Ji>' 
 
 Philo's reference is to the passage in Genesis where God 
 reveals His purpose of destroying Sodom. The Hebrew omits 
 " friend," having simply, " Shall I hide from Abraham that 
 which I do ? " ; but the LXX has " from Abraham my 
 servant" {iraiho^, not "bond-servant"), and the Jerusalem 
 Targum has " from Abraham my friend'^ T Without stopping 
 to investigate the origin of the variations in quoting from, or 
 translating, Genesis, we may take it to be almost a matter of 
 demonstration that the implied Johannine definition of a free 
 servant, or friend, of a " lord," as one that " knoweth what his 
 lord doeth" is connected with the thought of Abraham "the 
 friend of God," which pervades Jewish literature, and which 
 has left its mark upon the most Jewish of our Canonical 
 Epistles =^. 
 
 1 [1790 rt:] Gen. xviii. 17, Philo has M?) eirKoXv-^co eyco diro ^A^paafx rov 
 (piXov fiov; where LXX has M?) KpvyJAO) iyoi airo 'A. rov iraibos fiov a eya 
 
 TTOlS) ; 
 
 2 The Targum has, for " friend," Dm, which closely resembles the last 
 three letters of the preceding word "Abraham" (DHI). 
 
 3 [1790 b] Jas ii. 23 " he was called tke friend of GodJ^ From the 
 Jews the name passed to the Arabians with such effect as to supplant the 
 old name, " Hebron," of Abraham's burying place, known in modern 
 times as El Khalil, "The Friend." It would be interesting to ascertain 
 whether Epictetus was to any extent indebted to Jewish thought, or 
 to Jewish expression (through Philo or other writers) for such sayings as 
 that quoted above (1788 a) " I am free and a friend of God^ that I may 
 willingly obey Him." 
 
 293 
 
[1791] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 [1791] These circumstances, no doubt, weaken the 
 evidence for the view that John in his doctrine about the 
 "friends" of Christ is alluding to the Double Tradition. 
 For they seem to shew that Jewish doctrine about "the 
 friends of God " and Christian doctrine about " the friends 
 of Christ " may have been ampler than we supposed ; and 
 John may have been describing one part of this ample 
 province while Matthew and Luke may have been describing 
 another. Moreover, if the reader looks at the context of the 
 passage in Isaiah he will see that there is no antithesis between 
 Israel the "-^ servant'' and Abraham tJu '^ lover'' of God. On 
 the contrary, it is implied that because Israel is the true seed 
 of Abraham the ''lover',' tJierefore he is the ''' servant'.' The 
 honourable title of " servant " is given to the Messiah in the 
 following words, " Behold my servant whom I uphold, my 
 chosen in whom my soul delighteth^" Jews might say "The 
 distinction between ' servant ' and ' freeman ' is not a true one 
 with respect to God. We are all His servants. But some of 
 us are His free and willing servants, others His slavish and 
 unwilling servants. We recognise the difference ; but whereas 
 the Greeks can express this in two nouns, Trat? and SoOXo?, 
 we cannot, or at all events seldom do, in our Scripture." 
 
 [1792] This is perfectly true, and it confirms our hesitation 
 in finding a real antithesis in the passage quoted from 
 Matthew above ("A disciple is not above his teacher, nor 
 a bond-servant above his lord..."). '^ Bond-servant" may have 
 been used by Matthew here as we have found it used (1789 a) 
 by most of the translators in Isaiah where the LXX has 
 ''servant',' to mean "a devoted servant" of God. The two 
 clauses, then, in Matthew, are more probably parallel than 
 antithetical, and John would be wrong in finding an antithesis 
 in them. But did he find one } If he had done so, and if he 
 had used Bov\o<; in the sense of " servile," or " slavish," would 
 
 1 Is. xlii. I. 
 294 
 
TO JOHN AND LUKE [1792] 
 
 he have introduced our Lord as saying to the disciples, in 
 effect, (Jn xv. 15) ''No longer do I call you 'slavish' or 
 ^servile''*} Much more probably John found among educated 
 Greeks a misappreciation of the Jewish use of "bond-servant," 
 which had led Luke to omit it in an important passage of the 
 Double Tradition. And where Luke omitted, there — as is 
 frequent in matters of importance — John intervened \ 
 
 ^ [1792 d\ The conclusion that Jn is here alluding to Mt. x. 24 — 5 in 
 the Double Tradition is confirmed by the fact that elsewhere he seems to 
 allude to passages not indeed in Mt.'s context but in Lk.'s parallels to Mt.'s 
 context. Mt. x. 36 — 7 says "-^ man^s enemies (exOpoi) [shall de] they of 
 his household. . .he that loveth father or mother above me is not worthy of 
 me." The italicized words might be paraphrased ''A maiis haters must 
 be his relations^'' or, " A maji must hate his relations.^'' Lk. xiv. 26 says 
 " If a man cometh unto me and hateth ?iot his own father and mother... 
 yea, and his own life.. Me cannot be my disciple," and we have seen above 
 (1450) that John alludes to " hatiftg one's own life." 
 
 [1792 <^J The next verse in Mt. is, "Whosoever taketh (kafi^dvei) not 
 his cross." The parall. Lk. has " supporteth (^aa-rd^ei) his own (eavrov) 
 cross." This last phrase occurs nowhere else in the Synoptists, who have 
 in their Triple Tradition (Mk viii. 34, Mt. xvi. 24, Lk. ix. 23) " Let him 
 tahe up (apdro)) his cross." In the narrative of the Crucifixion, no 
 Synoptist uses the word "support," but the three — though not in exact 
 agreement — describe Simon the Cyrenian as bearing the cross altogether 
 or in part. Jn on the other hand expressly says that Jesus went forth 
 (xix. 17) ^^ supporting {^aard^av) the cross for hi/nself (eavrS)." It is easy 
 to conceive that such traditions as " whosoever would follow the Lord 
 Jesus must take, or bear, his cross " may have been confused with " bear 
 His cross," and such confusions may have led Luke to substitute "support 
 his own cross " (like St Paul's " each man must bear his own burden "). 
 Others may have objected to this emphasis. John may have thought 
 that so emphatic a phrase was best reserved for our Saviour Himself — 
 especially in view of heretical legends that Simon not only bore the cross 
 but also suffered crucifixion in Christ's place. See 928 (i) — (x). 
 
 [1792 ^] John's apparent interventions in the traditions about (i) "my 
 friends," (2) "bond-servants," (3) "hating one's own life," all of which 
 occur in a few verses of Matthew or in Luke's parallels, make it probable 
 that he was also familiar with the phrase (4) " support one's own cross " : 
 and the cumulative evidence increases the probability that he intervenes 
 in the first three passages. 
 
 295 
 
[1793] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 § 8. " Standing in (iv or eU) the midst " applied to Jesus 
 
 [1793] "In the midst" occurs in Mark and Matthew 
 concerning the little child, whom Jesus " made stand (earijaev) 
 in the midst ^them \i.e. the disciples] " as His representative^ 
 and in Mark and Luke concerning a man called by Jesus to 
 stand "in the midst '^ of the synagogue, before being healed-. 
 Matthew has it in Christ's promise to be with " two or three " 
 of His disciples, "There am I in the midst of th^va'' a tradition 
 peculiar to himself, which is repeated at the close of his 
 Gospel in a different form, " Behold I am with you^" The 
 A both says, " When ten sit and are occupied in words of the 
 Law the Shekinah is among them, for it is said, (Ps. Ixxxii. i) God 
 standeth in the congregation of the mighty. And whence [is 
 the same proved concerning] even five ? Because it is said, 
 He judgeth in the midst (LXX eV yu-eo-ft)) of gods'*." Thus, 
 although Matthew does not mention " standing in tJie midstl' 
 we see that his doctrine about Christ's abiding presence might 
 naturally be expressed thus in Jewish Tradition. 
 
 [1794] The Epistle to the Hebrews says, "He that is 
 sanctifying and they that are being sanctified are all from 
 
 ^ [1793 a\ Mk ix. 36, Mt. xviii. 2 eoTrjo-ev avro iv fiearm aiirSiv. The 
 parall. Lk. ix. 47 has €(rrr)a€v avro irap" eavra. The action might remind a 
 Jew of Deut. xviii. 15, " The Lord thy God will cause to stand up for thee 
 a prophet from the midst of tkee, of thy brethren, like unto me." Samuel 
 anointed David (i S. xvi. 13) ^^in the midst of his brethren." The Spirit 
 of the Lord came on a prophet (2 Chr. xx. 15) "" ift the midst of the con- 
 gregation." As the tree of life is (Gen. xx. 9) "/« the midst ^the garden," 
 and (Ex. viii. 22) " the Lord /;/ the midst of the earth," so an impartial 
 judge must be (metaphorically) Ps. Ixxxii. i "/« the midst of (R.V. 
 among) those whom he judges, and a prophet (Is. vi. 5) " in the midst of 
 those to whom, or against whom, he testifies. (Ps. xxii. 22) " I will declare 
 thy name unto my brethren, /;/ the midst ofxSxt. congregation will I praise 
 thee." 
 
 '^ Mk iii. 3 cyetpe (Lk. vi. 8+ kqI (Trr]6L) els to fieaov (Mt. om.). 
 
 3 Mt. xviii. 20, xxviii. 20. 
 
 * Aboth iii. 9. 
 
 296 
 
TO JOHN AND LUKE [1795] 
 
 one. For this cause he is not ashamed to call them 'brethren,' 
 saying, I will announce thy name to my brethren: in the midst 
 of the congregation will I sing hymns to {yyi.vr](T(jii) thee\" 
 This is from the 22nd Psalm beginning " My God, my God, 
 why hast thou forsaken me?" Justin Martyr, after quoting 
 {Tryph, 98) Ps. xxii. i — 23 (including the words " in the midst 
 of the congregation will I sing hymns to thee") says that 
 Jesus " Stood in the midst (iv yu-eo-ft)) of His brethren the 
 Apostles... and (}) spending the time (Stdyayvy with them, 
 sang" hymns to God," where the context ("who repented... 
 after He rose from the dead") indicates that he does not 
 refer to the " hymn " sung at the Eucharist^, but to Luke's 
 tradition that Christ ''stood in the midst {iv fieo-atY" of the 
 disciples after the Resurrection. In the Apocalypse, "the 
 Lamb" is seen "standing in the midst of the elders," i.e. in 
 the midst of the Church, or "walking in the midst of the seven 
 candlesticks," ix. in the midst of the Seven Churches ; and 
 the Oxyrhynchian Logia represent Jesus as saying " / stood 
 in the midst of the world and I appeared to them in the fleshy" 
 [1795] Two Evangelists alone, Luke and John, apply 
 the phrase "stood in the midst" to Jesus in their narratives. 
 
 1 Heb. ii. 12, quoting Ps. xxii. 22. 
 
 2 [1794 «] Tryph. 106. Aiayco also means '"'• nourish.^'' Comp. Acts i. 
 4 ''''being assembled together with them," marg. ^''eating with them" 
 {(rvvdki(6^€vos) where Field rejects both renderings. If Justin refers to 
 the period after the Resurrection, could he be reading, instead of avvaKi^o- 
 fxevos, crvvaXaXa^ofxevos? 'AXaXa^co is freq. in LXX, and sometimes = " sing 
 in triumph," " shout in triumph." The act. and mid. fut. are interchanged 
 in V. r. It might be supposed to represent the Heb. " Hallel." 
 
 3 Mk xiv. 26, Mt. xxvi. 30 vixvrjoravTcs e^rjXSov^ not in Lk. 
 
 * Lk. xxiv. 36. The Acts of John ^ however, says that before Jesus 
 went forth to Gethsemane, He said (§11) "Let us sing a hymn to the 
 Father " and '''■placing Himself in the midst {iv fiecra de avros yevofxevos) " 
 bade them say Amen to His utterances. 
 
 ^ Rev. V. 6, ii. i, comp. i. 13, vii. 17. The passage in the Logia, how- 
 ever, continues, "and I found all men eating and drinking...," so that it 
 does not refer to the appearance of Christ after the Resurrection. It 
 seems to describe the Incarnation. 
 
 297 
 
[1796] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 Luke uses it only once concerning a manifestation of Christ 
 after the Resurrection, to which, as we have seen (1794), Justin 
 Martyr appears to refer. At the moment when the disciples 
 were hearing the tidings " He hath appeared to Simon," 
 suddenly " He himself stood in the midst of them." To 
 convince them of His identity He said, " Have ye aught to 
 eat (^pooai/jLov) ? " and ate some fish in their presence^ 
 
 [1796] The Fourth Gospel begins with a kindred ex- 
 pression uttered by the Baptist, " There standeth fast {o-rrjKei) 
 midst {fxeaos:) of you one whom ye know not^" words probably 
 (as suggested above (1725 <3:)) intended to have a mystical 
 allusion to the pre-existing and all-supporting Logos. The 
 next application of the adjective to Jesus is in the crucifixion 
 where John says that they crucified "Jesus i7i the midst 
 {^ikaovfy Then, after the Resurrection, he says that Jesus 
 " came and stood in (lit. to) the midst^,'' and gave the disciples 
 the Holy Spirit and the power of remitting and retaining sins. 
 On the next occasion, in order to convince Thomas, " cometh 
 Jesus and stood in (lit. to) the midst^T But on neither of these 
 occasions does He eat with the disciples nor they with Him : 
 and for some reason or other, John uses the peculiar phrase 
 " to the midst " and not Luke's phrase '* in the midst of them^ 
 On the third manifestation Jesus "stands," but not "in (lit. to) 
 the midst " : He " stood on (lit. to) the beach " of the Lake of 
 Tiberias. There He asks a question rendered by R.V. in 
 terms similar to those of the question recorded by Luke, 
 " Have ye aught to eat (irpoo-cjiajiov) ?^ " But this rendering 
 
 ^ Lk. xxiv. 36 — 43. 2 jn i. 26. 
 
 ^ Jn xix. 18. The Synoptists mention one malefactor on the "right" 
 and another on the "left," and do not use /xeVo?. Jn does not here make 
 these distinctions of " right " and " left." 
 
 * Jn XX. 19 TJXBev 6 ^Irjo-ovs Koi ecrrr) els to fieaov. 
 
 " Jn XX. 26. 
 
 6 [1796 a] Jn xxi. 5 (R.V.). Field " Have ye taken anyfsh}" Field 
 shews that ex^re ; regularly means " Have you [had] any [sport] ? " " Have 
 
 298 
 
TO JOHN AND LUKE [1798] 
 
 is probably not quite accurate. And, instead of eating in 
 their presence, He "comes" to them and gives them the 
 food that He has provided. 
 
 [1797] If Luke's Gospel was authoritative, or even in wide 
 circulation, at the time when John wrote, it is difficult to 
 doubt that the latter wrote here with allusion to the former. 
 And John's omission of all mention of (i) Christ's eating, and 
 his parallel statement that (2) Christ gave food to the disciples, 
 indicate that he believed the former tradition to have arisen 
 out of a misunderstanding of the latter. 
 
 § 9. " Stooping (f) and looking in " 
 
 [1798] We come now to the two words distinguished by- 
 bracketed numbers. The passage where they occur in Luke 
 is enclosed by W.H. in double brackets, thus : 
 Lk. xxiv. 12 — 13 Jn xx. 3 — 11 
 " [[But Peter having " There went out therefore Peter and 
 risen up ran to the tomb the other disciple and they began to come 
 and, having stooped (?) to the tomb. But the two were running 
 and looked (-rrapaKvif/a^), together. And the other disciple ran 
 seetk (/3A.e7r€t) t/ie linen first, more quickly than Peter, and came 
 cloths (oOovia) alone first to the tomb and, having stooped (?) 
 (jjiova) : and he depart- and looked (irapaKvil/as;), he seeth (^A-eVct) 
 ed to his home (tt/oos lying [there] (Ketjaem) the linen cloths 
 avTov) wondering at (oOovlo). Howbeit he entered not in. 
 that which had come There cometh therefore Simon Peter also, 
 to pass.]] And behold, following him, and he entered into the 
 two of them were going tomb : and he beholdeth {dcwpet) the linen 
 on that same day etc." cloths lying and the napkin (which had 
 
 you [caught] anything?" Staph, shews that irpoacfidyiov is a low-class 
 word meaning something "eaten in addition [to bread]" and hence, more 
 particularly, oyJAapiov, " fish." R.V. seems to have taken it as " [fit] for " 
 (TTpdff) "eating" {(payelv). The question arises whether Luke (xxiv. 41 
 '''■Have ye aught to eat {ex^ri tl ^pa>(TLp.ov) here?") has made the same 
 mistake. If so, e;^ere interrog. ought to appear in the list of John-Luke 
 agreements, marked with an asterisk. 
 
 299 
 
[1799] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 Lk. xxiv. 12 — 13 Jn xx. 3 — 11 
 
 [Here follows the story been upon his head) not lying with the 
 of the journey to Em- linen cloths, but apart, rolled up into one 
 maus.] place. Then therefore entered in the 
 
 other disciple also, he that came first to 
 the tomb: and he saw and believed.... 
 The disciples therefore departed again to 
 their own homes. But Mary was stand- 
 ing at the tomb outside weeping. While, 
 therefore, she was weeping, she stooped (?) 
 [and looked'] into the tomb and beholdeth 
 two angels...." 
 
 § 10. What does TrapaKvirTO) mean ? 
 
 [1799] UapaKVTrTQ) is translated above with a query 
 " stooped and looked," nearly as R.V. But that is probably 
 incorrect. In Greek of every kind and period, the word is ap- 
 plied to those who take a rapid — but not necessarily careless — 
 glance at anything (i) out of a window, open door, hole of a 
 cave, etc., or (2) in at a window, door, or other aperture. This 
 is its meaning in Demosthenes, Aristophanes, Theocritus, and 
 Luciano Hence Achilles Tatius applies it to youth, which 
 just ""peeps up " and vanishes'^. Hence Demosthenes uses it of 
 those who ''^ give just one glance" to the affairs of Athens and 
 then go about their own business-, and Dio Cassius says "one 
 cannot ]\xs\.peep at playing with empire and theti go back into 
 one's hole^r "When the weather won't let us sail," says 
 Epictetus, " we sit on thorns, perpetually glancing out — which 
 way is the wind*.-*" In LXX it means '' glancing out, or, /«" 
 
 ^ [1799 rt] See Staph. In Lucian's Index it is always used with fiovov, 
 /iT;8f, or fitKpov (if we read npoKvylras tS BpiyKoo (for TrapaKvyjras) in Dial. 
 Mer. 12, Vol. iii. p. 313) "just glancing," "not even a glance." 
 
 2 Steph. qu. Achill. Tat. ii. 35 TrapaKvyjrav fiovov olxfrai. It is used of 
 coy glances (Steph.) in Aristoph. Pac. 983, Thesm. 797 — 9, Theocr. iii. 17. 
 
 3 Steph. Demosth. 46, 27, Dio Cass. 52, 10. * Epict. i. 
 I. 16 KaoTffjLfoa ajrafxevoi k. TrapaKinrTOfifv avv€xa>s tis avffios ttvcI; 
 
 300 
 
TO JOHN AND LUKE [1800] 
 
 (1804 <:). In the description of Sisera's mother, who is 
 perhaps continuously looking out of the window, Codex A 
 substitutes SLeKVTrrev for B's irapeKv^ev'^. Philo uses irapa- 
 KVTTTco metaphorically, to note the absurdity of supposing 
 that the "ignorant" can even ''glance into, or, catch a glimpse 
 of',' the counsels of " an imperial souP." 
 
 [1800] The Epistle of St James, at first sight, appears to 
 use TrapaKvirrWy instead of iyKvirra), to mean, " looking con- 
 tinuously upon," "peering intently into." But the writer is 
 distinguishing those who perceive their own faces in a mirror, 
 and go away and forget, from the man that first glances at, or, 
 catches a glimpse of, the perfect law and then abides by it, 
 being captivated by its beauty: "But he that hath caught 
 a glimpse of the perfect law of liberty and hath abode by it, 
 not letting himself become a forgetful hearer but a doer of 
 work — he will be blessed in his doing^" The Epistle of St 
 Peter speaks of " angels " as desiring to " catch a glimpse of 
 the developments of the mysteries of the prophesied re- 
 demption of mankind 1 The context here suggests that the 
 
 1 Judg. V. 28. Note the imperf., A also adds k. KarefidvOavev. 
 
 2 [1799 <^] Philo ii. 554 rrov yap toIs idiMTais irpb fiiKpov dents els 
 fjyeixoviKTjs 'v//'i'X'7^ TrapaKV-^ai ^ovXevfxaTa ; Here irpo fiiKpov seems to mean 
 that they cannot glance into them even " a little while before [their fulfil- 
 ment]." This is the meaning assigned to npo fiiKpov in Steph. (7rp6) and 
 in L.S. referring to Poll. i. 72. 
 
 [1799^] Philo frequently uses other forms of Kvirroi, mostly in 
 metaphor, to describe the soul of man looking out, or up, or beyond, the 
 bars of material nature into the spiritual world e.g. diaKvirro), vnepKVTrra}, 
 less freq. dva<v7rTa) and etcKinrTco (Philo i. 16, 471, 478 (lit.), 488, 570; ii. 
 17 (lit.), 44 (Ht.), 62, 85, 195, 299, 540 (Ht.), 546, 665). Steph. quotes 
 irpoKviTTO) of the mind (Sext. Emp. p. 441) "peering through the avenues 
 of the senses as it were through chinks." 
 
 ^ [1800 a\ Jas i. 25 6 de TrapaKvyJAas fis vofxov reKeiov top rrjs eXevdepias 
 KOI Trapafxeivas. Perh. the context implies a contrast. Those who " ta/^e 
 careful note (Karai/oe'o)) " of their faces in the glass cannot, somehow, 
 remember them for a moment. Some, " catching a mere glimpse " of 
 the Perfect Law, abide, and cannot forget it. These are blessed. 
 
 * [1800 <^] I Pet. i. 12 els a eiridvpovaiv ayyeXoi irapaKvy^rai. Hort 
 
[1801] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 " angels " are good, but the difficulty of deciding whether they 
 are good or bad is illustrated by the usage in the Acts of 
 Thomas where the verb is used in consecutive chapters to 
 describe first, a spectator " gla?icing (or, peeping) into" the 
 several torture pits of hell, and then the attempts of the 
 tortured souls to "peep out of the cave in which they are 
 imprisoned \ HapaKVTrrQ) does not appear in any case to 
 mean " stoop down and look at," " pore over," or " examine 
 minutely"." 
 
 [1801] The Gospel of Peter says that the women, finding 
 the sepulchre of Christ opened, '* approached and glanced in 
 there and saw there a young man sitting in the midst of the 
 graved" This may perhaps correspond to Luke's description 
 of the women as " bending their faces to the earth " when they 
 see '*two men," after entering the tomb*; but it is also used 
 
 assumes that the angels "look down from heaven" as in Enoch ix. i 
 TrapfKv^av eVi Tr}v yrjv, but this is not certain, see 659. Hort says {ad toe.) 
 "When used figuratively, it (z.<f. tt.) commonly implies a rapid and 
 cursory glance, never the contrary. Here, however, nothing more seems 
 to be meant than looking down out of heaven." In Enoch, the word 
 means that the angels, hearing the cry of the oppressed come up to 
 heaven, " glanced on the earth " and saw bloodshed everywhere. Im- 
 prisoned "angels" (Jude 6) might wish irapaKvirreLv "peep <?«/" (not 
 "/«") as below. 
 
 1 [1800 c] Act. Thom. § 52—4 " He caused me to peep into {ir. els) 
 each pit... and peeping iji I saw mud and worms — peeping into which 
 I saw souls... But many souls were trying to peep out from it {cKeWev 
 TrapeKVTTTov) wishing for a breath of air, but their keepers would not let 
 them/^<?^ out (Trapa/cvTrTcii/)." 
 
 '^ [1800^] This meaning is reserved for eyKVTrra, Clem. R. 40 eyKCKv- 
 <f)6T(S els Ta ^d$r) rrjs Oeias yvmarecos, 45 els ras ypa(fids, 53 els to. Xoyia tov 
 Beov, Polyc. Pkit. 3 (poring over {els) the Epistles of St Paul), Clem. 
 Horn. iii. 9 (dat.) Scriptures. 
 
 3 [1801 <a:] Evang. Petr. 13 npna-eXdovaai TrapeKV^av eKel. 
 
 * [1801 b] Lk. xxiv. 3 elo-eXdovaai indicates that the women had entered 
 the tomb. Evang. Petr. speaks of them as " having approached {irpoaeXdov- 
 aai)." Could Lk. have understood TrapaKvirroi as " stooping down " ? It 
 would be less improb. that he should have read it as 7rpo<vrrT(o (see 
 1799 «). 
 
 302 
 
TO JOHN AND LUKE [1802] 
 
 by John to describe Mary as " catching a glimpse (lit.) into (et?) 
 the tomb " and beholding " two angels." Finally, to come to 
 the John-Luke passages under consideration, Luke describes 
 Peter, near the tomb, as ''glancing in" and " seeing the linen 
 cloths alone" and "going to his home." John assigns the 
 ''glancing m!' not to Peter, but to another disciple, who 
 outran Peter. This disciple (John says) subsequently entered 
 the tomb and " saw and believed " ; Peter also entered and 
 saw, but is not said to have " believed." 
 
 [1802] Although the two disciples have the same evidence 
 before them, the Fourth Gospel here restricts the mention of 
 "belief" to "the other disciple" i^'he believed'') implying that 
 Peter did not " believe." It is not surprising that some au- 
 thorities substitute "they believed^." But perhaps the earliest 
 tradition taught that Peter believed in consequence of Christ's 
 appearing to him ("He appeared to Cephas; then to the 
 Twelve^") — whereas others had previously believed because 
 they had " seen a vision of angels^ " or had been enabled to 
 "catch a glimpse of" the mystery of the Resurrection, and, 
 as St James says, to "abide" in the possession of that 
 truth. It will be observed that the bracketed passage in 
 Luke, though it gives such prominence to Peter as to mention 
 no companions*, nevertheless does not say that Peter believed, 
 but merely that he " went away to his home wondering." 
 
 ^ SS, Chrys., and a comment in Cramer ad loc. Codex N, prob. by 
 homoioteleuton, omits xx. 5 b and 6, so that it makes no mention of 
 Peter's entering the tomb, and then alters "they knew" to "he knew" for 
 consistency. 
 
 2 I Cor. XV. 5. 3 Lk. xxiv. 23. 
 
 * [1802 d\ Contrast this with Lk. xxiv. 24 " Some of those with us 
 went to the tomb." " Those with him " (and still more easily " those with 
 us") might be confused in Hebrew with " Simon. ''^ And this may 
 explain Ign. Smyrti. § 3 "When He came to those with Peter (i.e. the 
 Eleven) {rovs Trepi IleVpoi/)." Hence we may explain conflations, and 
 interchanges, of "those with him," "disciples," "the Eleven," "those with 
 Peter," "Peter" etc. Mary, or the women, bring tidings of the Re- 
 surrection (Mk App. (I) xvi. 10) "to those that had been with hiin 
 
 A. V. 303 21 
 
[1803] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 [1803] The inconsistency in Luke, who in the bracketed 
 passage mentions Peter alone, but, later on, "some of those 
 with us," as going to the tomb, is an additional reason for 
 supposing that the former passage is genuine, and that Luke 
 copied it verbatim from early tradition, not altering the words 
 although he knew that " Peter," in such traditions, often 
 meant more than one disciple, and although he himself implies 
 more than one later on. The bracketed words are omitted, 
 it is true, by D, by several Latin MSS,, and by other 
 authorities : but almost all of these MSS. place John before 
 Luke m tJuir pages, and, after writing John's elaborate 
 account, the scribes of these MSS. might naturally shrink from 
 inserting Luke's account using the same rare words but in a 
 narrative so curt and (as it would seem to them) so one-sided ^ 
 Moreover, in answer to those who maintain that the passage 
 is interpolated in Luke from John, it may be urged that 
 it is incredible that anyone but a heretic or a rejecter of the 
 Fourth Gospel could interpolate such a truncated and falsified 
 version of John's consistent narrative, without even taking the 
 trouble to reconcile it with Luke's later statement (" some of 
 those with us "). 
 
 [1804] The most probable conclusion is, that the words 
 in Luke are not an interpolation but an isolated tradition 
 inserted by him in his Gospel, as he found it, without attempt 
 to explain its exact meaning or to reconcile it with other 
 traditions, and that John writes with allusion not only to 
 Luke, but also to other traditions in which the rare word 
 
 (i.e. with Jesus\'' (Mk App. (II)) ''to those with Peter,'' (Lk. xxiv. 9) "to 
 the Eleven and the rest." Perh. there is conflation in Mk xvi. 7 "to his 
 disciples and Peter'" (compared with the parall. Mt. xxviii. 7 "to his 
 disciples'") and in Lk. ix. 32 " But Peter and those with him." Note also 
 Mk iv. 10 '■''those with him [Jesus] {p\ nepl aurov) with {(tvv) the twelve" 
 parall. Mt. xiii. 10 "the disciples^' Lk. viii. 9 "his disciples" Comp. the 
 chapter on " Nos qui cum eo fuimus" in Sons of Francis hy A. Macdonell 
 (p. 27 foil). 
 
 * The Diatessaron also omits the words. 
 
 304 
 
TO JOHN AND LUKE [1804] 
 
 under consideration was connected with " angels " and with 
 the mystery of the Resurrection of Christ. Luke mentions 
 " two disciples," immediately after this visit to the tomb, as 
 having this mystery revealed to them, when their hearts had 
 been opened to discern the Scriptures. John says that the 
 two disciples that visit the tomb "knew not yet the 
 Scriptures " ; yet one of them was enabled to " catch a 
 glimpse" of facts that led him to "see and believe," even 
 before Peter had believed. Mary Magdalene attained yet 
 more. She remained by the tomb weeping, and she "caught 
 a glimpse (lit.) into [the spiritual revelation of] the tomb 
 (TrapeKvyjrev ek to /jLvrj/ubetov),'' where she beheld, not " lineft 
 cloths alone]' but ''angels',' preparing the way for a full 
 revelation of the risen Saviour. John is perhaps alluding 
 to Luke in his detail of the " linen cloths " lying " apart " 
 from the head covering, which seems to be an interpretation 
 of Luke's " linen cloths alone {fiova)" But the question before 
 us is whether John is writing allusively to Luke in respect 
 of the words irapaKvirro) and oOovia. To this the preceding 
 investigations give an affirmative answer. And, as in the 
 instances of " Psjvva^, eKfidcro-w, diro^aivwy €(tt7j €l<; /jueaov, so 
 as regards irapaKvirrw and odovia, John appears to be not 
 only allusive, but also corrective \ 
 
 1 [1804 d\ W.H. also enclose in double brackets {a) Lk. xxiv. 36 kcli 
 Xe'yei avrols, Eiprjvrj vfiiv^ {b) xxiv. 40 Koi tovto elirav edei^ev avrols ray 
 X^lpas KoX Toi/s iToBas. Comp. (l) Jn xx. 19 koi Xe'yet avrols, Eiprjvr) vfxlv, 
 Koi TOVTO eiTrav edei^ev Koi Tas ;(elpaff koi ttjv TrXevpav avrols. In Lk., D and 
 the best Lat. MSS. om. both a and d. SS om. d. Lk. never uses the 
 historic present Xeyei (freq. in Mk and Jn) of Jesus. If therefore (a) is 
 genuine, it was prob. inserted by Lk. from some ancient tradition, which 
 Lk. preferred not to revise or alter (1803). The Latin MSS. may have 
 omitted it because Lk.'s text goes on to say that the disciples "were 
 afraid," and such fear would more naturally precede, than follow, the 
 words " Peace be unto you." As to (d), it could not have been interpolated 
 from Jn without the violent alteration of rrXevpav to TrdSas, which seems 
 improbable. But it may have been a genuine insertion of Lk. — perh. 
 
 305 21—2 
 
[1804] JOHN AND LUKE 
 
 added by him in a late edition of which there were only a few copies — 
 omitted by the Latin MSS. because Jn's account seemed preferable. 
 
 [1804/^] It is probable that Jn wrote with a view to these traditions of 
 Lk. and especially to Lk.'s tradition that our Lord said '"''Handle 7ne 
 {^\a<f)T](raTe fif) " to the Eleven. According to Jn there was no mention 
 of " handling " to the assembled disciples, until Thomas had refused to 
 believe without the evidence of touch, for which he was rebuked in 
 a second manifestation. The word "handle" occurs in i Jn i. i "and 
 our hands /lancikd" probably attesting the genuine Incarnation against 
 heretics of Gnostic tendencies, who asserted that Christ had not come in 
 the flesh. It does not appear to refer, as the word does in Lk., to any 
 actual " handling " of the Lord's body after the Resurrection. St Paul 
 uses it in a bold metaphor in the Acts xvii. 27 " to seek God, if haply 
 they might handle him (or, feel him with their hands) and [thus] find 
 him." 
 
 [1804 c\ UapaKVTTTay in LXX — apart from Judg. v. 28, where (1799) A 
 reads buKvirrcv, and from I K. vi. 4 6vpi8as 7rapa<v7rTOfi4vas Theod. diaKvn- 
 TOjxivas — means " looking through a window," Gen. xxvi. 8 of Abimelech 
 seeing Isaac with Rebecca, i Chr. xv. 29 of Michal seeing David dancing, 
 Prov. vii. 6 of the " strange woman," whom the LXX erroneously regards 
 as looking at the young man passing in the street. Cant. ii. 9 of a lover 
 in the street looking through the windows of the house of his beloved. In 
 Sir. xxi. 23 it is used of a fool prying through an open door (paradoxically 
 used in a good sense in Sir. xiv. 23). The Heb. word regularly rendered 
 rrapaKvirro), is never thus rendered when applied to God looking out of 
 heaven^ e.g. Ps. xiv. 2, liii. 2 (comp. Ixxxv. 12), Lam. iii. 50 Siaxi'Trra), Ps. 
 cii. 19 eKKVTrro) etc. 
 
 [1804^] The Syriac of irapaKvirrdi in Jn xx. 5, 11 and Lk. xxiv. 12 is 
 simply "look" (without "stoop"). The Latin versions have (Jn xx. 5) 
 a {?) " proscultans," d and ^ " se inclinasset et prospexisset," d and e 
 "prospiciens,"/"se inclinasset" ; (Jn xx. 11) a "...dspexit" (.?[a]dspexit), 
 d and / " inclinavit se et prospexit," d and e " prospexit," / " inclinavit 
 se et prospexit." Lk. xxiv. 12 is om. by a, d, d (with D) and e ; f has 
 " procumbens." In Jn xx. 11, Chrys. throws no light, but Cramer has 
 (from Euseb. of Caes.) ert Se koL dno iroXXov Xoyov irapeKVTTTev, where the 
 imperf. as in Judg. v. 28 (A) perh. denotes (1799) continuousness. 
 
 306 
 
CHAPTER IV 
 
 WORDS PECULIAR TO JOHN, MARK, AND MATTHEW 
 
 § I. Introductory remarks 
 
 [1805] Antecedently we might expect that the number of 
 Johannine words pecuHar to Mark and Matthew would be 
 smaller than the number peculiar to Mark alone. Mark's 
 style is occasionally uncouth, and, where Matthew corrects 
 it, John cannot be identical with both. Take, for example, 
 the narrative of the crown of thorns : 
 
 Mk XV. 17 (lit.) 
 ''And they put on 
 (cvStSvtTKovo-iv) him 
 purple (TTopcjivpav) 
 and place round 
 (TTipLTLOeaqLv) him 
 having woven a 
 thorn[y] (dKdvBivov) 
 crown." 
 
 Mt.xxvii. 28 — 9 (lit.) 
 "And having put 
 off from him [his 
 own clothes] ^ (ck- 
 8i;cravT€S avTOv) a 
 scarlet cloak (x^^t- 
 IxvSa KOKKiv-qvY they 
 placed round (Trcpi- 
 WrjKav) him and 
 having woven a 
 crown from thorns 
 (c^ aKavOoJi/) they 
 placed [it] on (cire- 
 67}KavY his head.*' 
 
 Jn xix. 2 (lit.) 
 "...having woven 
 a crown from thorns 
 (c^ aKavdi^vY they 
 placed it on (cTre- 
 driKav)\i\?, head (dat.) 
 and a purple gar- 
 ment they clothed 
 him withal (t/xariov 
 
 7rop(f>vpovv TTCptC- 
 
 l^aXov avToV)." 
 
 1 V. r. "having put on /am" and "purple garment and scarlet cloak." 
 
 2 W.H. eneOrjKav eni, B TrepiedrjKav eVt, lit. "placed it round on." 
 
 3 [1805 a] This passage well illustrates the danger of arguing from 
 mere statistics apart from circumstances. In the Jn-Mk list, aKavdivos 
 
 307 
 
[1806] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 [1806] Here, there seems to have been a very early- 
 confusion between €NAY(jO " put on," and €KAYOO " put off," 
 and between ''placing a purple garment round" the body and 
 ''placing a crown of thorns round'' the head. Mark uses 
 "place round'' concerning the crown. Matthew uses " place 
 on " concerning the crown, and, to make the distinction quite 
 clear, adds " t/ic head!' John also, like Matthew, has " placed 
 it on his head!' Like Matthew, too, he has the phrase "having 
 woven from thorns]' where Mark has " thorny!' It is very 
 probable that John accepted these corrections of Mark from 
 Matthew^: but in any case the result is that the three writers 
 do not agree together in the exact use of the verb of crowning 
 (" put on " or " put round ") or as regards the construction of 
 the crown (Mk "thorny," Mt.-Jn "from thorns"). 
 
 [1807] Bearing these facts in mind we may well regard 
 the number of words peculiar to the three Evangelists as 
 large, and the proportion of words marked f in the appended 
 list as surprisingly large. Endeavouring to classify them, we 
 find that one is a proper name, "Golgotha^" ; and another is 
 a technical term, " Hosanna^" The parallel Luke in both 
 passages gives the substance of Mark-Matthew but omits 
 " Golgotha " and " Hosanna." Perhaps some confusion be- 
 tween "skull" and "place of skull" induced Luke to omit 
 
 appeared, because of Jn xix. 5 "wearing the thorny crown." The 
 adjective occurs nowhere but in Mk xv. 17, Jn xix. 5. But the noun^ and 
 the whole phrase, " having woven a crown from thorns!'' occur both in 
 Mt. and in Jn. The Jn-Mt. list, however, could not include "thorn," 
 as the word (occurring in the Parable of the Sower in Mk-Mt.-Lk.) is 
 not peculiar to Jn and Mt. 
 
 1 [1806^] As regards Jn xix. 2 "clothed (Tre pu^aXov)," it happens that 
 Lk. xxiii. 1 1 {Trepi^aXoiv i(r6rjTa Xafiirpdv) has this very word to denote 
 Herod's clothing Christ with gorgeous raiment in mockery. Jn may 
 have had this in mind. Tlepi^dWa), however, is a more appropriate word 
 than TrfpiTidijfii to express clothing except as applied to a scarf or short 
 cloak placed round the neck. Steph. quotes Herodian iii. 7. 12 ttjv 
 xKap.v8a nepieOtcrav. 
 
 2 roXyoBd, see 1810, note 4. ^ 'Qa-awd, see 1816 d. 
 
 308 
 
TO JOHN, MARK, AND MATTHEW [1809] 
 
 the former : and some doubt about the fitness of such a term 
 as " Hosanna " in a Gospel for educated Greeks unacquainted 
 with Hebrew may have induced him to omit the latter. 
 
 [1808] Apart from the Passion, the only words of im- 
 portance are '•' money-changer^ " in the Purification of the 
 Temple, and "sell^" in the Anointing of Christ by a woman. 
 A third, "evening^" — unimportant unless evidence should 
 shew that the word may point to original symbolism — is 
 found in the Walking on the Waters. In all these cases 
 a reason for John's intervention may be found in Luke's 
 omission. The latter omits, in his account of the Purification, 
 the detail about the " money-changers ".; and he altogether 
 omits the narrative of the Walking on the Waters, and 
 substitutes for Mark's narrative of the Anointing another 
 of an entirely different tendency. 
 
 [1809] In the Passion, the words marked f are " cohort^" 
 ''crown [of thorns]-^", " plait V' " praetoriumV' **put round," 
 and " sponge^." In every case, Luke has omitted not only 
 each word but also the whole narrative containing the word. 
 In Luke, there is no " crown of thorns." The mocking of 
 the "cohort" is either omitted, or replaced by an entirely 
 different story concerning the soldiers of Herod Antipas, 
 whose "palace" he perhaps identifies with the Synoptic 
 " praetorium." The incident of the " sponge " full of vinegar 
 — explained by John (1813 c) in connexion with " hyssop," 
 perhaps originally the hyssop-bunch used on the Passover 
 night — Luke wholly omits. This is not the place to consider 
 whether John is right in all his interventions : the object now 
 is merely to demonstrate that John's agreements with Mark 
 and Matthew coincide almost in each case with omissions or 
 deviations of Luke. 
 
 1 KoWv^KTrrfs, see 1812 d. ^ EEtTrpao-KO), see 1814 a. 
 
 3 'O^/ria, see 1813 a. 4 STreTpa, see 1815 c. 
 
 " 2T4cf)avos, see 1805—6. " nXeVo), see 1814 d. 
 
 '' IlpaLToypiov, see 1814 c. ^ IlepiTldrjfMi and (nroyyosj see 1813 C. 
 
[1810] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 
 JOHN- 
 
 •MARK-MATTHEW 
 
 AGREEMENTS! 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. Jn 
 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Jn 
 
 [1810] 
 
 ^r}er}S (1727 ^) 
 
 I 
 
 I 14 
 
 dvaxoipeo)'^ 
 
 I 
 
 lO 
 
 I 
 
 
 OTTtoXeta^ 
 
 
 ' 
 
 2 I 
 
 Ti^'"-^ 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 
 t ToXyoed* 
 
 
 I 
 
 I I 
 
 yv fives'^ 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 
 8evT€^ 
 
 
 3 
 
 6 2 
 
 SiaKOvos^ 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 [1811] 
 
 doXos^ 
 
 
 2 
 
 I I 
 
 efi^pifxaofiaL^ 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 2/ 
 
 ! [1810 «j] No word has an asterisk attached to it in this Hst because 
 no word is used by Jn in a different sense from that which it has in 
 Mk-Mt. : t denotes that the word not only has the same meaning in Jn 
 and Mk-Mt. but also occurs in parallel passages: .''f indicates quasi- 
 parallelism, on which see 1817 ; the only word thus marked is (nrelpa, 
 "cohort." The list does not include parts of speech used in a special 
 sense, e.£: 8id with accus. of person, "for the sake of" (1721 w). 
 
 2 'Ai/ax^peo), "retire," Mk iii. 7 (Mt. xii. 15), Jn vi. 15. 
 
 3 [1810 rt] 'ATTcoXeia, in Mt. vii. 13, Jn xvii. 12, means "(spiritual) 
 destruction," and Jn xvii. 12 calls Judas Iscariot "the son of des^ruc/wn." 
 In the parall. to Mk xiv. 4, Mt. xxvi. 8 "Why this destructio7i or wasteV 
 Jn xii. 4 mentions '''■Judas IscariotP The Original may have contained 
 some mention of " destruction^' variously interpreted as (Mk-Mt.) " waste" 
 (Jn) "[son of] destruction.'^ 
 
 * VokyoOd^ i.e. "skull." Mk xv. 22, Mt. xxvii. 33, Jn xix. 17. The 
 parall. Lk. xxiii. 33 simply gives " skull," and not the Heb. equivalent. 
 
 ^ [1810 (^] Tv/xj/os-, "naked," in Mt. only in a Parable xxv. 36 ^'' naked 
 and ye clothed me" (rep. xxv. 38 — 44). In Mk xiv. 51 — 2 (twice) it refers 
 to a young man deprived of his "linen garment" ; in Jn xxi. 7, to Peter, 
 " naked," but " girding himself" before entering his Master's presence. 
 
 6 [1810^] AfVTf, ''hither^' in (rt) Mk vi. 31 ''[Come] hither ye by 
 yourselves into a desert place and rest (or, refresh yourselves) a little," 
 {b) Mt. xi. 28, '•'{Come] hither unto me all that are weary. ..and I will give 
 you rest (or, refreshment)," and {c) Jn xxi. 12 "-{Come] hither.^ break your 
 fast," occurs in words of Christ inviting the disciples to "take refresh- 
 ment" {avdiTav(Tiv^ -opai), or to "break their fast": {a) is in the Triple 
 Tradition without parall. in Mt.-Lk., (d) is in Mt.'s Single Tradition, 
 immediately after a passage of the Double Tradition (Mt. xi. 27, Lk. x. 22 
 " All things were delivered to me by my Father..."), (c) in Jn, refers to the 
 period after the Resurrection. 
 
 ^ AiaKovos, "minister." In the parall. to Mk x. 43 didicovos, Lk. xxii. 
 26 has 8iaKova)v, so that, practically, this word is common to the Four 
 Gospels {VJVJ d^g) in Christ's Doctrine of Service. 
 
 ^ AoXos-, "guile," Mk vii. 22, xiv. i (Mt. xxvi. 4), Jn i. 47. 
 
 ^ [1811 a] ^Efi^pinda-Om is in Mk xiv. 5 (R.V.) " murmured against 
 
 310 
 
TO JOHN, MARK, AND MATTHEW [1811] 
 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Jn 
 
 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Jn 
 
 iiravpiov 
 
 (1717/^) I 
 
 I 
 
 5 
 
 BaXaacra 
 
 {t^s 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 (dat.) her." It describes persecutors (Euseb. v. i. 66) "roaring-" and 
 gnashing their teeth, madmen (Steph. iii. 825 a) fxaviadeis koI efi^pifiov- 
 fievoi. Lucian i. 484 couples eve^pifirja-aro rj Bpifia with "Cerberus barking." 
 The vb. and der. nouns describe God's anger in Ps. vii. 12 (Aq.), Is. xvii. 
 13 (Sym.), Ezek. xxi. 31 (Theod.) etc. Comp. Dan. xi. 30 (LXX). 
 
 [1811 <^] In Mk i. 43, Mt. ix. 30 it is applied to Jesus (R.V. txt) 
 '''■strictly (marg. sternly) charging" those whom He has healed. But Gk. 
 usage seems to demand some such rendering as "roar" — used of Jehovah 
 (R.V.) in Jer. xxv. 30 {pis\ Hos. xi. 10 {bis\ Joel iii. 16, Amos i. 2. 
 
 Jn applies it to Jesus twice (xi. 33 — 8), describing how, when He 
 saw Mary and the Jews weeping for Lazarus, (i) eve^piprjqraTo ry Trvgti- 
 fiari KOI irdpa^ev eavrbv kcu ^Ir^aovs ovv rrakiv (2) ip^pipoapevos iv iavra 
 
 epxerai els to pvrjfielov. According to the analogy of the dative in the 
 three Synoptic instances, the dat. r« Trvevfian should be the object of the 
 verb ; and this is not inconsistent with a parallelism between tm irvcvpaTL 
 and ev eavra, for if anyone " roars against " his own spirit, he may be said 
 to be doing it "in himself," i.e. not against another. But the meaning is 
 uncertain and perhaps intended by the Evangelist to be so, except so far 
 as it contains an allusion to, and perhaps a protest against, the tradition 
 of Mk and Mt. (discarded by Lk.) that Jesus '■'■ roared against" those 
 whom He healed — traditions perhaps based on a statement that He 
 " cried out against " unclean spirits or diseases, not against the diseased. 
 
 [1811 c\ As regards the positive Johannine meaning, if " spirit " is the 
 object of " roared against" some might suppose that the Logos is regarded 
 as rebuking Himself and forcing Himself to weep and to be troubled in 
 sympathy with the friends of Lazarus, although He knows that Lazarus is 
 not really dead. But we have to compare tw rrvevpaTi here with the only 
 other Johannine use of it (Jn xiii. 21) "he was troubled in the (i.e. his) 
 spirit." This suggests that John does not follow the grammatical 
 construction of the Synoptists in the use of this rare verb, but that 
 he uses it absolutely, without expressing an object, first, " roaring in his 
 spirit" and then " roaring again in himself." If so, the Evangelist leaves 
 it to us to imagine what the Messiah is ^^ roaring against." Presumably, 
 it is against all the evil that makes men slaves instead of being the free 
 children of God. One aspect of this is death, through fear of which men 
 were (Heb. ii. 15) "all their lifetime subject to bondage." See also 
 (1727^) "trouble." 
 
 ^ [1811^] GaXacrcra xTjy T., ^'^ Sea of Galilee" is used by Jn (vi. i) 
 followed by " Tiberias^" so as to explain its meaning. Lk. substitutes " lake'^ 
 whenever that sea is mentioned or implied. Jn calls it merely (xxi. i) 
 "Tiberias " when he connects it with the manifestation of the risen Saviour. 
 
 OF THE 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
[1812] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 Mk Mt. Jn Mk Mt. Jn 
 
 Bap(T€(o^ 2 3 I 6Xi\lfis^ 342 
 
 [1812] rdf3 9 4 15 t KOXXV^KTTTJS^ I I I 
 
 Xvrreofxai, 262 fiavOdvco I 3 2 
 
 fifOepfirjvevay 3 I 2 fiiKpov (1716^) 229 
 
 [1813] i/tVro) (1728^) I 2 13 vo€(o^ 3 4 I 
 
 t oylria^' ^62 irapayoi^ 331 
 
 Tripav (rov^opb.Y 2 3 3 f TrepiTiBr^fii^ 3 3 I 
 
 ^ [1811 ^] Gap(r€(o, " be of good cheer," in Jn, only xvi. 33 " Be of good 
 cheer, I have overcome the world." In Mk vi. 50, Mt. xiv. 27 '■''Be of 
 good cheer (dapa-elTe), it is I, be not afraid," Jn (vi. 20) omits Bapa-elre. 
 0avpxurT6s, "wonderful," should have been inserted here, occurring in 
 Mk xii. II, Mt. xxi. 42 (quoting Ps. cxvii. 23) and in Jn ix. 30. 
 
 2 [1811/] eXi'^tr, "tribulation," is used by Jn only in xvi. 21, 33 
 " remembereth no more the anguish" " In the world ye have tribulation." 
 In Mk iv. 17, Mt. xiii. 21 '"'■tribulation or persecution," Lk. viii. 13 has 
 "trial" or "temptation" {ir^ipacrp-o^). 
 
 3 [1812 «] "iSe, "see!" is never used by Mk and Mt. in parallel 
 passages, nor by Jn in any parall. either to Mk or to Mt. 
 
 ^ [1812 b'\ KoXXv^carrjs, " moneychanger,'" occurs in the Purification of 
 the Temple in Mk xi. 15, Mt. xxi. 12, Jn ii. 15. But Jn places the Puri- 
 fication at the beginning, Mk-Mt. towards the end, of Christ's preaching. 
 
 ° No€a), "perceive," in Jn, only in quotation Jn xii. 40 (Is. vi. 10). 
 
 ^ [1813 rt] '0\//'ia, "evening," occurs in Jn (i) in the Walking on the 
 Waters, Mk vi. 47, Mt. xiv. 23 — 4, Jn vi. 16, (2) in the first Manifestation 
 of the risen Saviour to the assembled disciples, Jn xx. 19. Luke has a 
 parallel to the latter, but not to the former. In Mk-Mt.'s version of the 
 Walking on the Waters, the disciples fear because they think Him 
 '•'- a phantasm'''' (SS "devil"); in Lk.'s version of the Manifestation they 
 fear because they think He is "« spirit^^ D '■''phantasm^'' Ign. Smyrn. 3 
 " bodiless deinoji.'''' Jn has no mention of " a spirit " or " phantasm " 
 in either narrative, 
 
 " Uapayei, "pass by," occurs in Mt. xx. 30, Jn ix. i, in the Healing of 
 the Blind, concerning Jesus " passing by," but in quite different circum- 
 stances. 
 
 ^ [1813 b] Uepav Tov 'lopddvov, " beyond Jordan." Lk. prob. om. the 
 term as ambiguous, see i K. iv. 24 R. V. " on this side (marg. beyond) the 
 river ^^ LXX tripav tov n. Ezr. iv. 16, 17, 20 '^ beyond the river" is parall. 
 to I Esdr. ii. 24, 25, 27 "in Celosyria (or Syria) and Phenice." 
 
 '^ [1813^] nepiTiBrjfii, "put round," is in Mk xv. 36, Mt. xxvii. 48, 
 Jn xix. 29 about the offering of the vinegar by means of a " sponge." 
 Perhaps Mk-Mt. took a "hyssop-bunch," of which the "sponge" may 
 have been composed, as a stalk of hyssop. See The Fourfold Gospel. 
 
 312 
 
TO JOHN, MARK, AND MATTHEW [1815] 
 
 
 Mk Mt. Jn 
 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Jn 
 
 [1814] t Tnirpda-KQ)^ 
 TrXrjpcofia 
 
 I 3 I 
 3 I I 
 
 t 7rX6Ka)2 
 
 TToWaKlS 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 TTopveia 
 
 [1815] 1 TVpCoi^ 
 
 I 3 I 
 5+[l]2 + [l] 2 
 
 t irpaiT<i)piov^ 
 'Pa^/3€l 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 8 
 
 ?t (TTrelpa^ 
 
 I I 2 
 
 t (TTToyyos 
 
 (imc) 
 
 I 
 
 ^ 
 
 I 
 
 1 [1814 «] UiTTpdarKco, "sell," is in Mk xiv. 5, Mt. xxvi. 9, Jn xii. 5, 
 about the perfume that " could have been so/{/" for (Mk-Jn) " 300 denarii," 
 (Mt.) " much." 
 
 2 [1814^] nXe'KO), "plait," is in Mk xv. 17, Mt. xxvii. 29, Jn xix. 2 
 concerning the crown of thorns. 
 
 2 [1814^] UpaiTcipiov, " praetorium," or "palace," occurs in Mk xv. 16, 
 Mt. xxvii. 27 as the place to which the soldiers take Jesus, a/^fer Pilate 
 had pronounced sentence, where they clothe Him with purple and crown 
 Him with thorns, just before the Crucifixion. Jn xviii. 28 mentions it as 
 the place to which the soldiers take Jesus from Caiaphas to Pilate for 
 trial, and from which Pilate brings Jesus out clothed in purple and 
 wearing the crown of thorns before pronouncing sentence. It is implied 
 that Jesus is led back to it, as Pilate (xix. 9) " entered into the praetorium 
 again " and there speaks to Jesus. Luke never mentions the "praetorium," 
 nor the " crown of thorns," but represents Herod as having clothed Jesus 
 in "bright raiment." The Acts mentions the word once in Acts xxiii. 35 
 " Having bidden him to be kept in Herod's Praetorimn" It is possible 
 that Luke took the " Praetorium " in Jerusalem mentioned by Mk-Mt. as 
 being Herods ^'' palace.^'' This might induce John to emphasize the 
 meaning of the word so as to correct Luke's error. On the mis- 
 understanding that seems to have led Luke to introduce Herod in the 
 narrative, see 56, 502 — 3. 
 
 * [1815^] IIpcoi "early" (marked % because it may refer to the same 
 event in Mk-Jn, but certainly does not in Mt.-Jn), in Mk xvi. 2 "very 
 early ^'' and in Jn xx. i '"'■early, it being still dark," is used about the visit 
 of the women (Jn mentions Mary Magdalene alone) to Christ's tomb. 
 Mk App, xvi. 9 "having risen early'' is used about Christ's manifestation 
 to Mary Magdalene. 
 
 [1815 d'\ In describing the trial, Mk xv. i describes the Sanhedrin as 
 assembling ^^straightway early" i.e. immediately on dawn, while Jn xviii. 
 28 uses " early," perhaps meaning a somewhat later hour, to describe the 
 leading of Jesus from Caiaphas to Pilate. 
 
 ^ [1815 <;] STreipa, "cohort," is not mentioned by Mk xv. i6, Mt. xxvii. 
 27 till after Pilate's sentence when "the whole cohort" is "called 
 together" to mock the condemned. Jn mentions it earlier as having been 
 (xviii. 3) "taken" by Judas to arrest Jesus, and as (xviii. 12) "seizing" 
 
[1816] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 Mk Mt. Jn Mk Mt. Jn 
 
 t OT4<f)avos (1805 ?(rvv<rTavp6a>^ III 
 
 — 6) I I 2 (Txla-fia^ I I 3 
 
 [1816] re pas I I I riypcco (1714/%) I 6 l8 
 
 vyir]S (1728 e) I I 6 virdyo) 
 
 (metaph.)^ i i c. i8 
 XfiH-atv I i4-[i] I x^P^'w I 3 3 
 
 ■)(a>pLov I I I t Idcravvd^ 2 3 ^ 
 
 § 2. Absence of Quasi-parallels 
 
 [1817] Comparing this list with previous ones we find the 
 number of quasi-parallels {i.e. words marked ?f because 
 though the word is the same the context is altered in such 
 a way as to imply disagreement) very small indeed, only one 
 (a-Treipa) being thus marked. There are more quasi-parallels 
 in the John-Mark list and in the John-Luke list. The reason 
 for their absence here is, perhaps, that this list represents the 
 cases where John agrees with no^ Mark alotte but Mark 
 supported by Matthew. The combined evidence of Mark and 
 Matthew might seem to John too weighty to reject in the 
 details of such narratives as the Purification of the Temple 
 
 Him ; and, when he comes to describe the mocking, he simply mentions 
 "the soldiers." 
 
 It has been suggested (1365) that John may have been led to infer that 
 Judas "received a cohorf^ ixova. a confusion of the tradition that he 
 "received a sign" — "sign" and "cohort" (in the form o-rjfiaia) being 
 similar Greek words. But Mt. xxvii. 27 awrjyayov in avrov oXrjv rffv 
 crTTflpav, " they gathered together against him the whole of the cohort " is 
 an ambiguous expression. It might very well have been understood as 
 meaning " They gathered together the whole of the cohort to take Jesus," 
 and perhaps John understood it thus. 
 
 ^ '^vvcTTavpoixi.i see 1817 c. 
 
 2 [1815^ Sxio-fia, "rent," "schism," in Mk ii. 21 (Mt. ix. 16) "a worse 
 rentj^ lit., but in parable. In Jn vii. 43, ix. 16, x. 19, it describes a 
 "schism" among the Jews, some favouring, some rejecting, Christ. 
 
 3 [1816 «] 'YTrayo) (metaph.) "depart," "go home," Mk xiv. 21, 
 Mt. xxvi. 24, "the Son of man departeth (Lk. xxii. 22 iropeveTai).'^ On 
 virdyo) and TTopevofjiai, see 1652 — 64. 
 
 ^ [1816 <^] 'aaavvd, " Hosanna," Mk xi. 9—10, Mt. xxi. 9 (rep. xxi. 15), 
 Jn xii. 13, is parall. to Lk. xix. 38 "in heaven peace and glory (1807)." 
 
 314 
 
TO JOHN, MARK, AND MATTHEW [1817] 
 
 a«d the Passion. And in points that might be called matters 
 of taste, e.g. the question whether "Hosanna" should be 
 retained or paraphrased in Greek Gospels, the usage of Mark 
 when confirmed by Matthew might decide John to adopt the 
 Jewish term in preference to the paraphrase in Luke. There 
 are no words marked * as being used in a different sense by 
 John from the sense in Mark and Matthew^ 
 
 ^ [1817 <?;] Xcope'oj, "find room for," "hold," is the nearest approach to 
 such a word, for it also means "go" in Mt. xv. 17 but not perhaps in Jn 
 except in viii. 37 (R.V. txt) ^'- hath not/ree course in you." Prob. however 
 Field is right in upholding A.V. (R.V. marg.) '''■hath no place in you," 
 He compares Alciphr. Epist. iii. 7 where a doctor "wonders where and 
 how food finds a place in a glutton's stomach." 
 
 [1817/^] For the Jn-Mk-Mt. use of "sea" in "sea of Galilee," and of 
 "beyond" in "beyond Jordan," see eakaaaa (1811 d) and irepav (1813^). 
 
 [1817 c'\ 2vv(rTavp6<o, "crucify together with," might perhaps have been 
 marked ?f or even t. It occurs in Mk xv. 32, Mt. xxvii. 44 shortly before 
 Christ's death, but in Jn xix. 32 shortly after it. In Mk Mt. it means 
 "crucified wzth" Jesus, but Jn applies it to the second malefactor 
 "crucified with'''' the first inalefactor. See 1678. 
 
 315 
 
CHAPTER V 
 WORDS PECULIAR TO JOHN, MARK, AND LUKE 
 
 § I. Introductory remarks 
 
 [1818] Antecedently, if we knew nothing about the Three 
 Gospels except that Matthew and Luke borrowed from Mark, 
 and nothing about the Fourth except that it was written 
 at a time when the Three had become authoritative, we 
 might expect the number of Johannine words peculiar to 
 Mark and Luke, and also those marked f as being in parallel 
 passages, to be as large as the same numbers in the John- 
 Mark-Matthew list 
 
 [1819] But Luke follows Mark most closely in narratives 
 of a thaumaturgic character and especially in exorcisms ; and 
 these are just the subjects that John avoids or passes lightly 
 over. Moreover, Luke, even where following Mark closely, 
 alters low- class Greek words such as Kpd^aTTo<;, which John 
 retains. And generally, since we find John not only sup- 
 porting Mark when Luke deviates from him, but also taking 
 different views from Luke, we ought to be prepared to find 
 the number of John-Mark-Luke agreements small, and the 
 number of parallelisms very small indeed. 
 
 §2. ''Latchet" '' spices,'' ''rouse up'' 
 
 [1820] And this is the case. Only one word, /yua?, "latchet," 
 is marked f without query, occurring in the Baptist's descrip- 
 tion of the coming Deliverer, the " latchet " of whose shoe he 
 
 316 
 
JOHN, MARK, AND LUKE [1823] 
 
 declares himself unworthy to loose. Matthew, instead of 
 "loosing the shoe-latchet," has "bear the shoes," perhaps 
 blending together the performance of two menial services as 
 explained in the foot-note (1833 d\ This deviation of 
 Matthew from Mark, while Luke and John adhere to the 
 word "latchet," accounts for the one Johannine word in the 
 following list, parallel and peculiar to Mark and Luke. 
 
 [1821] The word "spices," dpco/jLara, marked ?f, is of 
 interest, although not exactly parallel. In Mark and Luke it 
 refers to ''spices" prepared by the women for the body of 
 Christ. But Matthew, though closely agreeing with Mark in 
 the context, makes no mention of " spices," nor of any 
 preparations for embalming on their part. John uses the 
 word concerning the "spices'' actually used by Joseph and 
 Nicodemus in the burial of Christ: and, as he speaks of these, 
 and makes no mention of "spices" in his account of the visit 
 of the women to the tomb, we are led to infer that he agreed 
 with Matthew that the women came simply " to behold the 
 tomb." John appears to be tacitly correcting what seemed 
 to him wrong in Mark and Luke by inserting what seemed 
 to him right (1832 d). 
 
 [1822] The word Steyeipco, " rouse up," though not marked 
 f, derives interest from its extreme rarity (as indicated in the 
 foot-note (1832 c)) and from the possibility that it may point 
 to some explanation of Luke's omission of the story of Christ 
 walking on the water, which John inserts. On the other 
 hand John omits the story of Christ falling asleep in the boat 
 and awaking and rebuking the storm, which Luke inserts. 
 And this rare word SieyeLpco is used by Mark and Luke in 
 the one narrative to describe Jesus, but by John in the other 
 to describe the sea, as being " roused up." 
 
 §3. Mark, Luke, and John, on ''rejection'' 
 
 [1823] The word dOereo), "reject" or "set at naught," is 
 nowhere parallel in Mark and Luke, but it occurs in Luke 
 
 317 
 
[1824] 
 
 WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 and John, as will be seen below, in the phrases "he that 
 rejecteth you" and " he that rejecteth mel' with words of 
 warning as to the consequences of rejection. 
 
 [1824] Mark uses it in a saying of the Lord that the 
 Pharisees ''reject the word of God'' in order that they may 
 keep their own tradition \ that is to say, they allow a man to 
 break the commandment about honouring one's father, under 
 the shelter of the word " Corban." Matthew, too, has this. 
 But, besides other deviations, Matthew uses " transgress " 
 instead of " reject^!' 
 
 [1825] The difference between Luke and John is worth 
 looking into, and Luke should also be compared with the 
 parallel Matthew: 
 
 Lk. X. 1 6 
 " He that heareth 
 
 you heareth me, and 
 
 he that rejecteth you 
 
 rejecteth me. But 
 
 he that rejecteth me 
 
 rejecteth him that 
 
 sent me." 
 
 Mt. X. 40 — I 
 " He that receiveth 
 you receiveth me, 
 and he that receiv- 
 eth me receiveth him 
 that sent me. He 
 that receiveth a pro- 
 phet in the name of 
 a prophet...." 
 
 Jn xii. 44 — 8 
 "He that believ- 
 eth on me believeth 
 not on me but on 
 him that sent me... 
 And if any man hear 
 my words and ob- 
 serve them not, I 
 (emph.) judge him 
 not... He that reject- 
 eth me and taketh 
 not my words (piy- 
 /xara) [into his heart] 
 hath him that judg- 
 eth him. The word 
 that I spake — that 
 [word] shall judge 
 him in the last day." 
 
 [1826] It will be noted that Matthew, omitting all mention 
 of ''rejecting" confines himself to the doctrine of "receiving." 
 
 1 [1824 rt] Mk vii. 9 aBsrfiTe, Mt. xv. 3 Trapa&aivere. The same thing 
 is expressed by Mk vii. 13, Mt. xv. 3 aKvpovv. Lk. omits all this. 
 
 318 
 
TO JOHN, MARK, AND LUKE 
 
 [1828] 
 
 His tradition may be rearranged, to shew its parallelism with 
 the Triple Tradition and with the tradition of John on 
 "receiving!' thus: 
 
 Mk ix. 37 
 "Whosoever 
 shall receive 
 (Se^T/rat) [one] 
 of such little 
 children in my 
 name receiveth 
 me, and whoso- 
 ever is receiv- 
 ing {BexqTai) me 
 is receiving not 
 me but him 
 that sent me." 
 
 Mt. X. 40 
 " He that 
 receiveth you 
 receiveth me, 
 and he that 
 receiveth me 
 receiveth him 
 that sent me." 
 
 Lk. ix. 48 
 "Whosoever 
 shall receive 
 this Httle child 
 in my name 
 receiveth me, 
 and whoso- 
 ever shall re- 
 ceive me re- 
 ceiveth him 
 that sent me." 
 
 Jn xiii. 20 
 "He that re- 
 ceiveth whom- 
 soever I shall 
 send receiveth 
 me, and he 
 that receiveth 
 me receiveth 
 him that sent 
 me^" 
 
 [1827] Reviewing the evidence, we note, first, that the 
 earliest of the Four Gospels (Mark) uses the word ''reject'' 
 to signify the rejection, not of mans word but of God's word, 
 namely, the command to honour parents. The next in date, 
 Matthew (using the word " transgress " for *' reject "), sub- 
 stantially agrees with Mark. These two Evangelists say, in 
 effect, that the Pharisees rejected the Word of God in order 
 to keep the words of men, and that Christ condemned this. 
 
 [1828] Luke omits the whole of this. But the distinction 
 between rejecting the words of individuals and rejecting the 
 laws of natural religion, or the Word of God, is a very 
 important one. If the Third Evangelist failed to bring this 
 out, it was all the more necessary for the Fourth to do so 2. 
 
 1 Jn xiii. 20, as also Jn xii. 44 — 8, uses Xafi^dvco " take [into one's heart]" 
 instead of the Synoptic dexofj-ai " receive " : but, for brevity and parallelism, 
 XajxISdvo) in Jn xiii. 20 is rendered " receive " above. 
 
 2 [1828 a] The distinction may be illustrated by what is probably 
 one of the earliest of the Pauhne Epistles, where the Apostle, after 
 forbidding fornication, says (i Thess. iv. 8) "He that rejecteth [this 
 doctrine] (6 d^ercoj/) rejecteth not man, but God, who is [ever] giving 
 (dldovra) his holy Spirit upon (els) us." 
 
 A. V. 
 
 319 
 
 22 
 
[1829] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 [1829] There is also another reason why the Fourth Gospel 
 should intervene. The earliest of the Gospels does not say " He 
 that receiveth you receiveth me," but " He that receiveth one 
 of such little ones." There is a great difference between the 
 two. Mark's version struck at the root of apostolic or clerical 
 arrogance. Luke's version in the Triple Tradition (" Whoso- 
 ever shall receive this little child") gave no clear precept as 
 to the future ; and his version in the Double Tradition (" He 
 that heareth you") was limited to the Seventy, who are 
 mentioned in the preceding verses. Matthew's version (" He 
 that receiveth you") is limited to the Twelve. Christians, 
 therefore, with only the Three Gospels in their hands, might 
 still require some further answer to the question " Whom are 
 we to receive as coming from Christ ? " 
 
 [1830] The full consideration of John's implied answer 
 to this question, and of all the passages bearing on the 
 Doctrine of Receiving, must be deferred \ Meantime, even 
 a glance at the parallels suggests that John is writing with 
 allusion to Luke's version of the Double Tradition, accepting 
 his tradition verbally, so far as regards the use of the verb 
 " reject," but surrounding it with such a context as to free it 
 from all risk of being abused. Instead of Luke's ambiguous 
 "heareth me" (which might mean hearing without doing), 
 John (xii. 44 — 8) substitutes " believeth on me," connecting a 
 subsequent mention of "hearing" with '^not observing." 
 Then, in case any domineering elders or bishops might judge 
 those who "rejected" them, as rejecting Christ, he represents 
 Christ Himself as deprecating such "judgment" ("/(emph.) 
 judge him not "). John seems to have in mind a tradition 
 similar to that of St Paul "Judge nothing before the time." 
 The true judge is not to be this or that teacher or collection 
 of teachers, but " the word that I spake " ; and the time of 
 judging will be "the last day." John, like Mark, seems to 
 
 ^ They will be discussed in The Fourfold Gospel. 
 320 
 
TO JOHN, MARK, AND LUKE [1831] 
 
 represent Christ as appealing, against conventional judgments, 
 to the first principles and fundamental decrees of humanity, 
 the laws of spiritual Nature, those words, or laws, which 
 "shall never pass away." 
 
 [1831] Our conclusion with reference to the Johannine 
 use of dOereco, and the Johannine phrase "/le that rejecteth me',' 
 is that John is almost certainly writing with allusion to 
 Luke's tradition ''he that rejecteth yoti etc." It is also by no 
 means improbable that, in the phrase " He that rejecteth me 
 and taketh not my words [into his heart]," he is alluding to 
 the tradition of Mark about Christ's condemnation of the 
 Pharisees, "Ye reject the Word of Godl' taking it in its 
 broadest sense, not limiting it to the commandment " Honour 
 thy father and thy mother," but taking it as the uttered 
 thoughts of the Father in Heaven, expressed from the 
 beginning through the Logos, and, recently, by the " words 
 (prjixara) " of the Logos incarnate upon earth. 
 
 321 22 — 2 
 
[1832] WORDS PECULIAR 
 
 JOHN-MARK-LUKE AGREEMENTSi 
 
 
 Mk 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 
 Mk 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 [1832] a^fWa>2 
 
 2 
 
 5 (rep.) 
 
 I 
 
 airopioi^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 ?t ap(OfjLa* 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 aTifxa^oi^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 ya(o(f)v\aKiov 
 
 
 
 
 yefiiCto 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 (2333) 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 dieyeipa)^ 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 [1833] eWeyofiai^ 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 * (kavvo)^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 i^ayat 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 * iirtdvixia^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 1 [1832 a{\ An asterisk denotes that the same word is used in different 
 senses by Jn-Mk and Lk., e.g. i\avva> Mk vi. 48, Jn vi. 19 "row," but Lk. 
 viii. 29 " driven [by an evil spirit] " : t denotes a parallelism, ? t a quasi- 
 parallelism. For other signs, see the foot-notes. 
 
 2 [1832 «] 'A^ereo), "reject," see 1823—31. It is used with accus. 
 of pers., only in Mk vi. 26, Lk. x. 16, Jn xii. 48, i Thess. iv. 8. In Mk vi. 
 26 it perh. means " break faith with her," as in Jerem. xii. 6, Lam. i. 2 (X) 
 rjOivqcrav avTTjv. 
 
 3 'ATTopeco, Mk vi. 20 (act), Lk. xxiv. 4 and Jn xiii. 22 (mid.). 
 
 * [1832 ^J*] 'Apanara, " spices," in Mk xvi. I, Lk. xxiii. 56, xxiv. i, refers 
 to " spices " prepared by the women for the body of Jesus and brought to 
 the tomb on the morning of the Resurrection ; in Jn xix. 40 it refers to 
 " spices " used by Joseph and Nicodemus in entombing the body. 
 Mt. xxviii. I (parall. to Mkxvi. i) mentions no "spices," and says that the 
 women came simply " to behold the grave." 
 
 ^ 'Ari/xa^cD is in the Parable of the Vineyard, Mk xii. 4, Lk. xx. 11 
 ''''treated disgj'acefully ^^"^ in Jn viii. 49 "But ye dishonour me." 
 
 6 [1832^] Ateyetpo), "quite rouse," or "rouse up," is used of Jesus in 
 the Stilling of the Storm Mk iv. 39, Lk. viii. 24 {bis) " They roused him 
 up... He was roused up 2iX\di rebuked the wind" : Jn has in the Walking on 
 the Waters, (vi. 18) "The sea — by reason of a great wind blowing — was 
 roused up.''^ Outside 2 Pet. (i. 13, iii. i) the word does not occur elsewhere 
 in N.T., and it does not occur at all in canon. LXX. 
 
 '' [1833 rt] 'EKXe'yo/xat, in Lk., occurs only once in Christ's words, Lk. x. 
 42 ^^ M2iry hath chosen the good part." Lk.'s other instances are vi. 13 
 ''^having chosen twelve," ix. 3$ "my choseti son," xiv. 7 "they chose the 
 first seats." See 1709 b. 
 
 8 [1833 <5] 'EXauvo) in Mk vi. 48, Jn vi. 19, is used of the disciples 
 "rowing" in the Walking on the Waters (Mt. xiv. 24 has " by the waves)." 
 Lk. viii. 29 has the word in a different sense, " He was drive7t by the 
 devil." 
 
 ^ [1833^] 'ETTiOvfiia in Mk iv. 19, Jn viii. 44, means "lusts" ; Lk. xxii. 
 15 is different, "with desire have I desired to eat this passover." 
 
 322 
 
TO JOHN, MARK, AND LUKE [1834] 
 
 
 Mk 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Mk 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 2 
 
 Ka6api(Tp.6s^ I 
 p.apTvpLa 
 (inQc-d) 3 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 14 
 
 OVTCiS 
 
 (to) TpLTOV 
 
 (1695^) 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 I 
 
 I 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 7revTT]<ovTa I 
 irpo^aais^ I 
 vScop (Chri.)^ 2 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 I 
 7 
 
 1 [1833^] 'I/xa?, "latchet," in Mk i. 7, Lk. iii. 16, Jn i. 27 about 
 ^'■loosing" the '' latchei of the shoe," where Mt. iii. 11 has ^^ carry 
 (^ao-TCLo-ai) the shoes." (i) '^ Loosing- the shoe" and (2) "carrying bathing 
 utensils to the bath" were recognised duties of a slave to his master. 
 Possibly Mt. has confused and combined parts of the two. In any case, 
 Jn follows Mk (and Lk.) as against Mt. 
 
 2 [1833 e] KadapLo-iJios, " purification," occurs in the Cure of a Leper, 
 Mk i. 44, Lk. V. 14 "Shew thyself to the priest and offer concerning thy 
 purification^^ where Mt. viii. 4 has " Shew thyself to the priest and offer 
 the gift?'' The other instances are Lk. ii. 22, Jn ii. 6, iii. 25. Jn nowhere 
 mentions lepers or anything connected with them. 
 
 2 [1834^] KaraKeijLtat, "lie [sick]," is used by Mk i. 30, where the 
 parall. Mt. viii. 14 has ^e^Xrjfievrjv, '■'■ prostrated [with sickness^' and the 
 parall. Lk. iv. 38 a-wexofievrj. In the Healing of the Paralytic, Mk ii. 4 
 describes the letting down of "the pallet where the paralytic lay" (Mt. ix. 
 2 has, again, "prostrated"). Lk., at the end of the story, says (Lk. v. 25) 
 "He took up that on which he lay [sic^]." Jn, in the quasi-parallel 
 Healing of the man with an "infirmity," uses k. twice (Jn v. 3 — 6) 
 KaTeK€iTo TrXrjdos Ta>v da6evovvT(ov...TovTov I8a>v 6 ^Irjcovs KaTaKeip,€VOu. 
 
 [1834 (^] KaTaKctfiai is used also in Mk ii. 15, xiv. 3, Lk. v. 29, vii. 27 
 and I Cor. viii. 10 of "lying [at table]"; and for this reason Mt. may 
 have preferred another word. As regards Mk, Lk., and Jn, the facts 
 prove nothing except that they did not object to using the word (though 
 ambiguous) in the sense of " lie [sick]." 
 
 * [1834 c] UXPjdos, " multitude," occurs in Mk iii. 7, 8 noXv 7r\?jdos, and 
 TrXrjdos TToXv, of the multitudes coming to Jesus, Jn v. 3 irXrjOos of the sick. 
 HXfjBos IxOvcov TToXv is in Lk. v. 6, and diro tov TrXrjdovs Ta>v IxBvcov in Jn 
 xxi. 6, describing a miraculous draught of fishes (Lk. long before, Jn soon 
 after, the Resurrection). 
 
 ^ [1834 d] Upoipao-is, " pretext," is in Mk xii. 40, Lk. xx. 47 7rpo(f)d(T€t 
 p.aKpd TTpoa-evxop'evot, Jn xv. 22 irpocfiao-iv ovk exovcriv. 
 
 ^ [1834^] "Ydcop, "water" (in Christ's words), occurs in Mk xiv. 13, 
 Lk. xxii. 10 " There shall meet you a man bearing a pitcher of water." 
 Mt. xxvi. 18 omits the whole sentence. See 1728^. 
 
 323 
 
[1835] JOHN, MARK, AND LUKE 
 
 § 4. " The Holy One of God'' 
 
 [1835] To these words may be added the phrase ^7^09 
 Tou ^eoO, "the Holy One of God," applied to our Lord by 
 a demoniac in Mark and Luke^ and used by John in Peter's 
 Confession, "We... know that thou art the Holy One of God^" 
 
 1 Mk i. 24, Lk. iv. 34, " Hast thou come to destroy us? I know thee 
 who thou art, the Holy One of GodP 
 
 2 [1835 «] Jn vi. 69. Aaron is called (Ps. cvi. 16) "-the Holy One of 
 God," apparently with reference to Numb. xvi. 5 — 7 "The man whom the 
 Lord shall choose, he shall be holyP Comp. Jn x. 36 " Whom the Father 
 made holy {rjylaffcv) and sent into the world." Peter's confession (in Jn 
 vi. 69) seems to imply in the first part a Prophet (" thou hast the words of 
 eternal life") and in the second part the ideal Priest ("the Holy One of 
 God"). 
 
 [1835 b'\ It is interesting to contrast the two stories — perfectly 
 compatible with each other and perhaps even complementary — in which 
 Peter is represented by Luke as saying at first (v. 8) " Depart from me, 
 for I am a sinful man, O Lord ! " while, later on, John (vi. 67) represents 
 Jesus as saying to the Disciples " Do ye also desire to depart.?" and Peter 
 replies, in effect, refusing to depart (" Lord, to whom shall we go .'' "). 
 
 324 
 
CHAPTER VI 
 
 WORDS MOSTLY PECULIAR TO JOHN, MATTHEW, 
 AND LUKE 
 
 § I. Verbal agreements mcmerous, but parallelisms 
 non-existent 
 
 [1836] The list of words peculiar to John, Matthew, and 
 Luke, is longer than any of the last five lists. This is not 
 surprising, since these three Gospels deal largely or mainly 
 with the words of the Lord, whereas Mark deals mainly with 
 the acts. Acts may with advantage be variously reported, 
 and we learn much about them from a variety of reporters 
 describing various aspects of the same thing. Words are best 
 reported just as they are uttered. We cannot therefore be 
 surprised that the three long Gospels that attempt to record 
 Christ's words contain such words as " hallow " (or " sanctify"), 
 the verb " sin," the noun " love," and such words as '* light " 
 and "darkness" in a metaphorical sense etc. What is re- 
 markable is, that in the whole of the long Vocabulary given 
 below we shall not find a single word (1866 (i) foil.) of which 
 we can confidently say that it is used in the same context in 
 parallel passages of John ^ Matthew^ and Ltike, apart from Mark. 
 
 [1837] Yet the list will not be without use in more ways 
 than one. In the first place, it will shew the limited scope of 
 Mark, by exhibiting the words that he never uses — except 
 
 325 
 
[1838] WORDS MOSTLY PECULIAR 
 
 perhaps in a quotation or some quite subordinate fashion^ — 
 and it will indicate how much needed to be supplied by 
 subsequent Evangelists in order to elucidate Christ's doctrine. 
 In the next place, by giving us a bird's-eye view of the 
 common vocabulary of the three " doctrinal Gospels," as we 
 may call them — and by shewing that, whereas the two 
 Synoptists (Matthew and Luke) agree almost verbatim for 
 sentences and even for short sections, the Fourth, even while 
 using the same vocabulary, rarely or never uses it in the same 
 context — it may lead us to appreciate, by contrast, the 
 significance of John's frequent parallelism with Mark, with 
 whose vocabulary he has so little in common. 
 
 [1838] Large parts of the Double Tradition, beautiful 
 though they are, have no direct bearing on Christ's unique 
 nature, mission, and doctrine. The exhortations, for example, 
 not to be anxious about the morrow, might have proceeded 
 from Hillel, or John the Baptist, or Epictetus^ Not much is 
 to be learned from a comparison of the vocabulary of these 
 passages with the vocabulary of the Fourth Gospel. The 
 Sermon on the Mount is full of concrete terms such as "lilies," 
 "spin," "barn," "oven," not used by John, nor entitled to a 
 place below, and omitted because their insertion would teach 
 the reader nothing except what he knows already, that the 
 author of the Fourth Gospel does not deal largely in such 
 particularities. But the insertion of a few important abstract 
 or doctrinal terms used by Matthew and Luke but not by 
 John may throw light on differences of doctrine or differences 
 in expressing it. Some of these — though not strictly entitled 
 
 1 [1837 d\ E.g. the word " peace " is nowhere in Mk except in Mk v. 
 34 " Go in peace," and " Abraham " nowhere except in a quotation about 
 (Ex. iii. 6, quoted in Mk xii. 26) "The God of A. and of Isaac and of 
 Jacob." 
 
 2 Comp. Epict. iii. 22. 69 "the philosopher must be devoted with his 
 whole being and without distraction to the service of God," and (iii. 26. 
 28) "God doth not fail to care for them that serve Him." 
 
 326 
 
TO JOHN, MATTHEW, AND LUKE [1839] 
 
 to a place in this Vocabulary — are given below in Greek, and 
 are inserted here in English alphabetical order with their 
 Greek equivalents : — 
 
 Alms iX67jfjLocrvv7], angry (to be) opyl^eaOao, babes vijirioc, 
 beseech Seofjuat,, brother (thy) (metaph.) aB€\(l)6<; aov, enemy 
 ix^po^, gather (TvWey(o, humble (adj. and vb.) raTreti/o?, -oo), 
 justify BiKaLoco, mercy eXeo?, prudent <t>p6vLfio^, understanding 
 (adj.) avvero^;, wisdom (Chri.) ao(f>ia, wise (To<f>6<;. 
 
 § 2. '^ Lay the head to rest^' 
 
 [1839] It was shewn above (1451 — 8), that this phrase is 
 not known to exist in Greek literature (including the LXX) 
 outside the Gospels, and an attempt was made to prove that 
 it is used by John in the sense in which all admit it to have 
 been used by Matthew and Luke ("lay the head to rest"). 
 Only, whereas the two earlier Evangelists employ it literally, 
 the fourth Evangelist applied it spiritually to our Lord's 
 finding rest for His head on the bosom of the Father. So 
 it was maintained above. But now, if it appears that this is 
 the only phrase peculiar to John, Matthew, and Luke, and 
 that the contexts are not parallel, the reader may naturally 
 say, " Unique exceptions are always to be suspected. The 
 abstinence of the Fourth Gospel from the phrases of the 
 Double Tradition of Matthew and Luke is so complete 
 that it does not seem antecedently probable that this single 
 phrase was borrowed. We admit that k\Iv(o K6(f)akr)v cannot 
 be rendered otherwise than * lay the head to rest' But that 
 meaning may have been much more common in the first 
 century than we suppose. John may have used the phrase 
 thus without any allusion to Matthew and Luke. And this 
 is all the more probable because there is no connexion or 
 affinity of thought between the contexts in the Double 
 Tradition and John." 
 
 327 
 
[1840] WORDS MOSTLY PECULIAR 
 
 [1840] This objection may be partly answered by shewing 
 that there is an affinity of thought — though latent — between 
 the two contexts. The former, the Double Tradition, speaks 
 of "following." According to Matthew (and Luke is very 
 similar) a "scribe" said to Jesus "Teacher, I will follow thee 
 whithersoever thou art departing." To this He replied, "The 
 foxes have holes and the birds of the heaven nests but the Son 
 of man hath not where to lay his head^" This appears to mean 
 (somewhat as Chrysostom suggests) " You expect to follow 
 me to a palace and to share in the conquests of the Messiah, 
 but I have not even a home of my own." But does this 
 exhaust the meaning .? Does it even express the meaning — 
 if we are to take the *words in their mere literal sense — 
 without exaggeration ? Literally speaking, were there not 
 many places where the Son of man could " lay his head " ? 
 
 [1841] Origen's allusion to the words, although fancifully 
 expressed, seems to touch the spiritual truth at the bottom of 
 them when he says that Jesus could not " lay his head " in 
 Jerusalem but only in Bethany as being "the House of 
 Obedience^." That is to say, the Lord found rest and repose 
 in obeying and doing the will of the Father. This harmonizes 
 with the words, " My meat is to do the will of him that sent 
 me." The " scribe," if Chrysostom's view is correct, supposed 
 that a literal " following " was to end in a " laying of the head 
 to rest " in a literal palace. Jesus replies that, in that sense, 
 He has " no place to lay his head " on earth. That final rest 
 could only come when the labour on earth was accomplished 
 
 1 [1840 «] Mt. viii. 19 — 20. Lk. ix. 57—8 substitutes ^'gomg itt the 
 way" for ^'' scribe.^' Perhaps there was some early confusion between 
 (Mt.) " a guide in the way [of the Law]," i.e. o?ie causing to go, and 
 (Lk.) ''going." 
 
 2 Origen (on Mt. xxi. 27) Huet i. 446 C, where see the context. He 
 seems to mean that Jerusalem was a House of Disobedience because the 
 disobedient resided in it, and Bethany a House of Obedience, partly 
 because of his interpretation of the name, partly because of the obedience 
 of the disciples residing there. 
 
 328 
 
TO JOHN, MATTHEW, AND LUKE [1843] 
 
 and the labourer rested in the bosom of the Father. Accord- 
 ing to this view, our Lord, in His reply to the scribe, does not 
 mean to insist on the fact that He had no fixed abode of His 
 own, and, still less, to suggest that there were not many 
 friends and devoted disciples ready to give Him hospitality. 
 His real meaning was that, in the scribe's sense of the term, 
 the Son of man had no " resting-place." 
 
 [1842] It was, of course, inevitable that the Apostles and 
 Missionaries of the first century would often be able to say, 
 with St Paul, in a literal sense, " We both hunger and thirst 
 and are naked and are buffeted and have no certain dwelling 
 place^r But by the end of that century there would inevit- 
 ably be some, of vagrant disposition, to whom the absence of 
 a " certain dwelling place " would not be unwelcome provided 
 that it did not bring with it " hunger and thirst " : and 
 accordingly we find the Teaching of the Apostles forbidding 
 believers to entertain any missionary, or, as it says, " apostle," 
 for more than two days^ Long before that precept was 
 written, it would probably be necessary to warn some converts 
 against supposing that they were " following " Christ by merely 
 making themselves homeless " apostles." The Synoptists, it 
 is true, emphasize Christ's saying that ''following'' must go 
 with '' taking tip the cross " : but, even there, Luke thinks it 
 desirable to warn his readers that they must " take up the cross 
 daily^r 
 
 [1843] John brings out the true meaning of " following " 
 in a dialogue between our Lord and Peter, who does not 
 indeed (like the "scribe") proclaim that he will "follow," 
 but asks " Why cannot I follow thee now } I will lay down 
 
 ^ I Cor. iv. 1 1 a(TTarov[i^v. 
 
 2 Didach. xi. 3 — 5. 
 
 3 Mk viii. 34, Mt. xvi. 24, Lk. ix. 23, '' If any one desireth to come 
 '(Mk Mt. eXdelv, Lk. epxeo-dai i.e. co?7ze daily, 2496^) after me, let him deny 
 
 himself and take up his cross (Lk. + daily ^ kuO' r)fxipav) and follow me." 
 
[1844] WORDS MOSTLY PECULIAR 
 
 my life for theeV Jesus had, at an earlier period, told the 
 Jews that they could not follow Him, and He has just 
 declared that it applies to the disciples also for the present^. 
 It is this that elicits Peter's vehement question. No direct 
 answer is given to it^ But the Washing of Feet taken 
 with its sequel constitutes an indirect answer, namely, that 
 "following" the Son means serving the Son, and serving 
 the Son means serving the brethren with the love with 
 which He loved and served them''. This doctrine is carried 
 on to the last page of the Gospel. Peter is warned that, in 
 his own case, " following " will lead him to the cross. But he 
 " turns and sees " the other disciple also " following " — the one 
 that used to lie on the breast of Jesus. Then he learns that 
 this disciple may perhaps " tarry " till the Lord comes, so that 
 it is possible to " follow " Him in many ways. 
 
 [1844] If it is admitted that the Fourth Gospel contains 
 a great deal that bears on the right and the wrong kind of 
 " following," then it will hardly be denied that this particular 
 tradition about the " scribe," who did not know what 
 " following " meant, would probably attract the Evangelist's 
 attention. It would be so likely to be misunderstood by 
 opposite parties. The enemies of Christ might take it as 
 a mere pathetic self-deploration, " I have no home, no resting- 
 place ! " False apostles might allege it as an excuse for 
 
 1 Jn xiii. 37. This was exactly true. The Apostle dzd " lay down his 
 life" thus, and Christ does not deny it in His reply. Lk. (xxii. 33) 
 represents Peter as saying " I am ready to go both to prison and to 
 death." This was not exactly true. The Apostle was no^ "ready." 
 
 2 Jn xiii. 33 "Even as I said to the Jews, 'Where I go ye cannot 
 come,' [so] I say to you also now." 
 
 3 The answer is Jn xiii. 38 " T/iot^ wilt lay down thy life for me ! 
 Verily, verily, I say unto thee, The cock shall surely not crow till thou 
 hast thrice denied me." The italicised words are half exclamation, half 
 interrogation (2236 foil.). Later on (xxi. 18 — 19), the Lord commands and 
 predicts that the Apostle will "follow" Him on the way to the Cross. 
 
 ^ Jn xiii. 34, XV. 12. 
 
TO JOHN, MATTHEW, AND LUKE [1846] 
 
 vagrancy. It might close the minds of literalists and simple 
 people against the conception of the true rest and the true 
 resting-place. An old tradition quoted by Clement of 
 Alexandria and found in recently discovered Logia represents 
 Christ as saying " He that reigns shall rest^!' Justin Martyr 
 twice quotes a tradition associating the ''reign" with the 
 " cross"^" The Epistle to the Romans speaks of "suffering 
 with [Christ] that we may be glorified with" Him^ The 
 Second Epistle to Timothy mentions together "enduring" 
 [with Christ] and "reigning with" Him, apparently as part 
 of a "faithful saying*." All these traditions, outside the 
 Gospels, shew how natural it would be to regard Jesus as 
 beginning on the Cross His " rest " as well as His " reign." 
 
 [1845] The Double Tradition and the Fourth Gospel, if 
 both are regarded as referring to the "resting" of Christ, 
 harmonize with these early traditions — which they may have 
 helped to originate — as well as with each other. But if in the 
 Johannine passage we substitute "bowing the head in submis- 
 sion," instead of " laying the head to rest," we disconnect it 
 from these external traditions amid which it finds a natural 
 place, and connect it with such doctrine as that of the 
 Epistle to the Hebrews, " He learned obedience through 
 the things that he suffered^" — which is not the aspect 
 presented by the Fourth Gospel. There is no Gospel that 
 so consistently as the Fourth associates crucifixion with 
 "reigning" by describing it as "glorifying" and "lifting up." 
 
 [1846] These considerations may suffice to answer the 
 objection that " there is no connexion or affinity of thought " 
 between the contexts of the phrase under discussion in John 
 and the Double Tradition. For the rest, it has been pointed 
 
 1 Clem. 453 and 704. 
 
 2 ApoL § 41 and Try ph. § ']% erroneously quoting Ps. xcvi. (see context). 
 
 3 Rom. viii. 17. * 2 Tim. ii. 12. 
 « Heb. V. 8. 
 
[1847] WORDS MOSTLY PECULIAR 
 
 out that John does intervene more than once in important 
 doctrines of the Double Tradition— such as the relation 
 between the ** friends" and the *' servants " of Christ 
 (1784 — 92), the meaning of "hating one's own life" and 
 the circumstances in which such "hate" is justified (1450), 
 and also as regards the doctrine of "rejection" added by 
 Luke in the Double Tradition where Matthew confines 
 himself to the doctrine of "receiving" (1823—31). The 
 difference was that in these cases Matthew and Luke did 
 not agree in the use of the particular words repeated by 
 John, whereas here Matthew and Luke do thus agree. 
 Matthew for example (1784) had "bond-servant," Luke 
 had "friends," and John repeated both terms. Here John 
 repeats a couple of words in which the two agree. Such 
 a repetition, though unique, is, under the circumstances, not 
 very surprising. 
 
 § 3- John-Matthew-Luke Agreements (in English). 
 
 [1847] From what has been said, it will be inferred that 
 comparatively little information of a critical kind will be 
 derived from the Vocabulary given below. Its main results 
 will be to shew what a large province of doctrine Mark left 
 untouched ; how many words Matthew, Luke, and John have 
 in common ; how often Matthew and Luke agree verbatim ; 
 and how absolutely John refrains from using the.\r phrases or 
 expressing their thoughts in the same way. These facts, 
 however, are of some interest in themselves, and they can 
 be made clear to readers unacquainted with Greek. For 
 their sakes, the words will be given first in English alpha- 
 betical order^ and with the sign (ii) — signifying " Double " — 
 attached to those words that occur in parallel passages of 
 
 1 This list will not include particles, such as ye, given below in the 
 Greek list alone. 
 
 332 
 
TO JOHN, MATTHEW, AND LUKE [1849] 
 
 the Matthew-Luke Double Tradition. The Greek equivalent 
 will be added so that the reader may pass from this list to 
 the Greek list and its foot-notes, which follow later on. 
 
 [1848] (ii) Mk Abraham 1 'AjS pad/a, (ii) age (or stature) 
 rjXiKLa, another (s. other), asleep (to fall) KOLfjudo/jLat, ass 6vo^. 
 
 (?) Bear (a child) tUtco, (ii) behold OedofiaL, Beth- 
 lehem B7]6\6e/jL, (ii) blessed [laKapio^, blow (or breathe) Trveo), 
 (ii) bondage (to be in) hovXevco, bone oareov, (ii) " boy " 7rat9, 
 (ii) bride vv/ji(j)7], burn Kaiw. 
 
 Caiaphas Katd(f)a<;, (ii) clean KaOapo^, (ii) come yjkw, 
 (ii) confess^ ofioXoyeco, (ii) cubit ttt^^u?. 
 
 (ii) Darkness (metaph.) a/corta, (tkoto^, (ii) dash (s. stum- 
 ble), (ii) devil Sm/SoXo?. 
 
 Ear coTiov, (ii) exalt (or lift up) vylroco. 
 
 (ii) Faithful inaTo^, finish reXeco, flock Trolfjuvrj, (ii) food 
 Tpo(j)T], foundation KarapoXr), (ii) friend (^/Xo?, furlong ardhio^. 
 
 (ii) Guide (vb.) oSijyeoy. 
 
 [1849] (ii) Hallow dycd^co, hide /(pvirrco, hope (vb.) iXTTi^o). 
 
 Inquire 7rvv6dvo/xat. 
 
 Joseph (husband of Mary) Twctt;^, (ii) judge (vb.) Kpivco, 
 (ii) judgment Kplat^. 
 
 (ii) Law v6fio<;, (ii) lay (one's head) kXlvco KecfiaXrjv, (ii) lie 
 (i.e. be placed) KelfMat, lift up eiraipw, (ii) lift up (or exalt) 
 vyfroco, (ii) light (metaph.) c/)*?, (ii) like (adj.) 6fMOLo<;, (ii) lot 
 fjLepo^, love (n.) dyaTrrj. 
 
 (ii) Mourn dpyvico, (ii) mouth arofia, murmur yoyyv^co, 
 (ii) myself ifiavrov. 
 
 1 [1848 a\ Occasionally, a word, e.g. " Abraham," that occurs in Mark 
 as part of a quotation, or in some manner quite unimportant as compared 
 with its use in the Double Tradition, is included in this list. Such a 
 word is denoted by "Mk." The words " alms," " angry," and a few others, 
 non-existent in Jn, but characteristic of the Double Tradition, have already 
 been given in English above (1838) in a separate group, and are not 
 repeated here, but in the Greek vocabulary they will be included with 
 the rest. 
 
 2 Not used in N.T. of confessing sins (except in i Jn i. 9). 
 
 333 
 
[1850] WORDS MOSTLY PECULIAR 
 
 Nazoraean (for Nazarene) Na?&)/3a?09. 
 
 (ii) Mk open (vb.) avolyco, (ii) other (another) erepo^, owe 
 (Jn ought) 6<f)ei\(D. 
 
 Pass fiera^alva), (ii) Mk peace elpr/vi], (ii) persecute Blookco, 
 present (I am) Trdpetfii. 
 
 [1850] (ii) Reap depi^ca, rejoice greatly ar/a\\Ld(o, reprove 
 iXiyx^* remember fjuL/jLvrjaKo/uiai, (ii) reveal diroKaXvirrw, right- 
 eousness BLKaLoarvvrjy ruler (Jewish) (sing.) cipxcov. 
 
 Samaritan %afiapeLTr](i, (ii) sanctify dytd^oj, (ii) scatter 
 a/copTTL^o), (ii) serve (s. bondage), shut fcXeico, sickness daOeveiay 
 (ii) sin (vb.) d^iaprdvoi), sit Kade^op^ai, sleep (n.) virvo^y 
 (ii) Solomon ^oXojjlwv, strange[r] dWoTpLo^;, suffice dpKico, 
 (ii) stumble irpoo-KOTrra). 
 
 Tend (as a shepherd) TroLfjuaivo), testify fiapTvpea), (ii) thief 
 /cXeTTTT;?, (ii) toil (vb.) KOTridco, turn round (to speak) o-T/06</)ft). 
 
 Wedding (feast) ydfxo^, witness, bear (s. testify), (ii) wolf 
 \vKo^y (ii) worthy d^uo^y wrap (?) ivTvXia-a-co (1866 (i)). 
 
 334 
 
TO JOHN, MATTHEW, AND LUKE [1851] 
 
 WORDS MOSTLY PECULIAR TO JOHN, MATTHEW, 
 AND LUKEi 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 [1851] (ii) 'A^padfi^ (Mk) 7 
 
 15 
 
 II 
 
 ayaXXiao)^ 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 dyaTrrj'^ I 
 
 I 
 
 7 
 
 (ii) dycdCco^ 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 (ii) d8eX(f)6s (Tov^ 
 
 
 
 (ii) aSj7?7 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 (metaph.) 7 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 dWorptos^ 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 1 [1851 «i] Words marked (ii) occur at least once in parallel passages 
 of the Double Tradition of Matthew and Luke, e.g. dyid^o), Mt. vi. 9, 
 Lk. xi. 2, " Hallowed be thy name." These are often given in Gk to 
 shew verbatim agreement or the nature of disagreement. 
 
 The words distinguished by " Mk " occur in Mk, but only in quotations 
 of O.T. or in such other special circumstances that it did not seem good 
 to omit the word from a list attempting to give a general view of the 
 Jn-Mt.-Lk. vocabulary. 
 
 A few words non-existent in Jn have been inserted in special cases 
 {e.g. ex&pos, (To(f)La) where they seemed likely to throw light on the relation 
 of JntoMt.-Lk. (1838). 
 
 "Pec." means that the context is peculiar to the single Evangelist Mt. 
 or Lk. 
 
 2 [1851 a] "K^padp. is included because its single occurrence in Mk 
 (xii. 26) is a quotation (parall. to Mt. xxii. 32, Lk. xx. 2>7)' Six of the 
 instances in Lk. are in the story of Lazarus. The instances in Jn are all 
 in viii. 33 — 58. The parall. instances in Double Tradition are Mt. iii. 9, 
 Lk. iii. 8 irarepa cxofiev rov *K...iy€ipm reKva rw 'A., and Mt. viii. II (sim. 
 Lk. xiii. 28) dvaKkiOrjCTovTai, nerd 'A. k. 'itraaK k. 'la/coo/S. 
 
 ^ [1851/5'] 'AyaXAidco, Mt. v. 12 ;(aipere k. dyaXkidade, Lk. i. 47 
 TjyaXkiaaev ro Trvevixd fxov eVt ra Oecd, x. 21 eV avrfj ttj copa rfyaWidcraTO ro) 
 7rv€V[xaTi ra dyt'co, Jn V. 35 vfJLels de rjdeXrjaare dyaXXuiOrjvaL Tvpos (opav iv r. 
 (fxorl avToVf viii. 56 'A^padp.. ..ijyaXXidaaTo tva tdr]... 
 
 * [1851 <:] 'Aydrrr], Mt. xxiv. 12 ^vyrjaerai 17 dydTrrj t. ttoXXcoi/. In 
 Lk. xi. 42 Trapepx^o'Oe r. Kpi(nv Koi t. dydiTr}v r. Oeov, the parall. Mt. xxiii. 
 23 has d(f)r]KaT€ T. ^apvrepa r. vopov, r. KpiaLV koi t. eXeos koi t. iriaTiv. 
 
 ^ 'Ayitt^o), Mt. vi. 9, Lk. xi. 2 dycaa-drjTco to ovopd aov. 
 
 6 [1851^] 'ASeX^os- aov, "thy brother," (metaph.) occurs in Mt. vii. 3, 
 4, 5, Lk. vi. 41, 42 {dls) about "the mote in lAy brother's eye," and 
 in Mt. xviii. 15 {bis), Lk. xvii. 3 "if thy brother sin against thee." It 
 occurs also in Mt. v. 23 — 4 {bis) "be reconciled to thy brother J'' 
 
 7 "A8i]s, Mt. xi. 23, Lk. x. 15 eays (Lk. +tov) adov Kara^-qa-rj. 
 
 8 'AXXoTpioff, Lk. xvi. 12 iv rS dXXoTpito (neut.) : in Mt.-Jn it is masc. 
 
 A. V. 335 23 
 
[1852] WORDS MOSTLY PECULIAR 
 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. Jn 
 
 [1852] (u) &fxapTav(o^ 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 (ii) 
 
 dvoiyoi^{Mk) II 
 
 7 II 
 
 (ii) 5^to.3 
 
 9 
 
 8 
 
 I 
 
 (ii) 
 
 aTroKaXvTrro)* 4 
 
 5 t 
 
 dpK€(0^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 
 apxw'^ ^(Jewish) 
 (sing.) 2 
 
 2 or 3 I 
 
 [1853] a(7^eV«a7 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 
 Bj/^Xf€>8 5 
 
 2 I 
 
 ydfios^ 
 
 8 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 
 yfio 4 
 
 8 I 
 
 ^ [1852^] 'Afiaprdvo), Mt. xviii. 15, 21 "if thy brother sin," "how 
 many times shall my brother sin against me," sim. parall. Lk. xvii. 3 — 4. 
 Jn has V. 14 "Sin no more," ix. 2 — 3 "Who did sin, this man or his 
 parents...? Neither did this man sin nor his parents." It also occurs in 
 Jn[viii. 11]. 
 
 2 [1852 d] ^Avoiyo). Included in this list (though it occurs once in 
 Mk (vii. 35) i]voLyrj(rav avrov al dKoai) because it is in the parall. Mt. vii. 
 7 — 8, Lk. xi. 9 — 10 "knock and it shall be opened." In Jn it is always 
 used of the opening of the eyes of the man born blind, except in i. 51 
 *'the heaven opened" x. 3 "to him the porter openeth." In Jn i. 51 it 
 may be used (646 a) to mean " permanently opened " in contrast to the 
 momentary " opening," or (Mk i. 10) " rending," manifested to the 
 Baptist. If so, the Johannine allusion would be to the Triple Tradition. 
 
 3 " k^ios occurs in the parall. Mt. iii. 8, Lk. iii. 8 a. riyy peravoias, and 
 Mt. X. 10, Lk. X. 7 a. yap 6 epydrTjs, also in Jn i. 27 ov ovk elpl a^ios 
 (Mk-Mt.-Lk. iKavos) iva Xvaco avrov rbv Ifidvra rov virobrjp.aTos. 
 
 * 'ATTOKaXuTrro), Mt. x. 26, Lk. xii. 2 " there is nothing covered that 
 shall not be revealed," and Mt. xi. 25 — 7 {bis), Lk. x. 21 — 2 {bis) Koi 
 diTCKaXv^as avrd vT]7riois...(S iav (Lk. dv) ^ovkqrai 6 vlos dTroKokvylrai. In 
 Jn only xii. 38 quoting Is. liii. i "To whom hath the arm of the Lord 
 been ?'evea/ed?" 
 
 ^ 'ApKc'co, Mt. XXV. 9 (pec), Lk. iii. 14 (pec), Jn vi. 7, xiv. 8. 
 
 6 [1852 c] "Apxoiv sing, meaning " ruler of the Jews," " of a synagogue" 
 etc., occurs in Mt. ix. 18 (rep. ix. 23) "px""' Lk. viii. 41 dpx(>>v rrjs (rvvaycoyr/s, 
 but Mk V. 22 has els rav dpxi-o'vvayoiyaiv, SO that practically Mk, too, has 
 dpX(ov. It occurs in Jn iii. I 'NiK6dr)fios...dpxoov rav 'lovdalav. In Triple 
 Tradition, Lk. xviii. 18 ris...dpxo>v (Mk x. 17, Mt. xix. 16 els) and in 
 Double Tradition Lk. xii. 58 V7rdy€ts...en dpxovra (Mt. v. 25 diff.) prob. 
 mean a Jewish " ruler." On dpxovres (Jewish) pi. see 1765 a. 
 
 ^ ^haOeveia, in Mt., only in viii. 17 avros r. dadeveias rjpcov eXa^ev, 
 quoting Is. liii. 4 (Heb.). 
 
 8 BrjBXeefjL, in Jn, only in vii. 42 " Hath not the Scripture said that the 
 Christ Cometh. ..from Bethlehem..?." The question is urged as an objec- 
 tion against those who said " This is the Christ." 
 
 ^ Vdpos, in Jn ii. i — 2 (sing.) of the marriage in Cana. It is pi. in Mt. 
 and Lk. exc Mt. xxii. 8, 11, 12. 
 
 '^^ [1853 d\ Ve, in Jn, only in iv. 2 Kairoiye (Bruder p. 146 kgltoi ye) 
 
TO JOHN, MATTHEW, AND LUKE [1855] 
 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. Jn 
 
 yoyyv^o)! 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 (ii) deofiaL^ 
 
 I 
 
 8 o 
 
 [1854] (ii) 8tci^o\os^ 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 diKaioa-vvr]^ 
 
 7 
 
 I 2 
 
 (ii) SiKatoo)-^ 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 o 
 
 (i'l) 8ia}K(o^ 
 
 6 
 
 3 2 
 
 (ii) SovXeuo)^ 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 (ii) etp77i/7;8^]yii^^ 
 
 4 
 
 i3+[[i]]6 
 
 [1855] eXe'yx«» 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 eXerjfioarvvrj 
 
 3 
 
 2 O 
 
 a compound unique in N.T. But Kairoi is in Acts xiv. 17, Heb. iv. 3. Te 
 occurs in the Triple Tradition in Mt. ix. 17, Lk. v. 36, ^7 el de /ijyye (parall. 
 Mk ii. 21 61 Se /i,J7); also in Lk.'s version (x. 6) of Double Tradition (parall. 
 Mt. X. 13 eav Se firj) ; and in Mt. pec. and Lk. pec. 
 
 ^ Toyyu^o), Mt. xx. 1 1 (of the labourers in a parable), Lk. v. 30 (of " the 
 Pharisees and their scribes "). 
 
 2 Aeofxai, non-occurrent in Jn (1667) but in Mt. ix. 38, Lk. x. 2 derjdrjTe 
 
 OVV TOV KVploV TOV dcpLCTflOV. 
 
 3 [1854 rt:] Am/3oXos-, Mt. iv. i — ii, (sim.) Lk. iv. 2 — 13 (of the Tempta- 
 tion) ; also in Mt.'s Single Tradition xiii. 39, xxv. 41 ; and in the 
 explanation of the parable of the Sower Lk. viii. 12 6 dia^oXos (parall. 
 Mk iv. 15 f5 ^aravas, Mt. xiii. 19 6 rrovTjpos). Jn vi. 70 "One of you is 
 a devil" viii. 44 " Ye are of your father the devil^^ xiii. 2 " The devil 
 having now put it into the heart of Judas." 
 
 * [1854 <5] AiKaioavvr], Lk. i. 75, Jn xvi. 8—10 (on "conviction"). In 
 parall. to Mt. v. 6 "hunger... after righteousness" Lk. vi. 21 has "hunger 
 now." (See 1691 e.) 
 
 ^ AiKatoco, Mt. xi. 19 ediKaiooOT] rj aocjiia drro tSov epycov avrrjs, parall. 
 Lk. vii. 35 ibiKaiatQ-q r] cro(ji[a drro TrdvTcov rcov tckvcov avrris. 
 
 ^ [1854 tr] AiooKco. Mt. xxiii. 34 e^ avrcov diroKTevclre <a\ arTavpaxrere... 
 KOL 8ia>^€T€ drro noXecos els ttoXlv, parall. Lk. xi. 49 e^ avTwv diroKTevovcrLv 
 KCLL bico^ovcTLv. Jn V. 1 6 bici TovTo edioDKOv ol 'lovSaioi TOV ^Itjctovv, XV. 20 el 
 €fi€ ibioi^av Ka\ vpds bico^ovaiv. 
 
 "^ [1854 d] AovXevoi, Mt. vi. 24 {dis)^ Lk. xvi. I3{dis) ov8e\s {Lk. + olKeTr]s) 
 bvvaraL bvcrX Kvpiois bovXeveiv ...ov bvvaaOe Oeco bovXeveiv kcll ixap.(ova. 
 Jn viii. S3 ovbevl bebovXevKanev TrcoTrore (which would be, literally, a 
 violation of the precept Deut. xiii. 4 avra bovXevo-ere (AF, om. by LXX 
 in error), l S. vii. 3 bovXeva-are avrm fiovco, but the Jews mean ovbevl 
 
 dvOpODTTOo). 
 
 ^ [1854 el ElprjvT], incl. because its single occurrence in Mark is the 
 unimportant phrase (Mk v. 34) " Go in peace" whereas it occurs in 
 Mt.-Lk. in the important tradition Mt. x. 34 (sim. Lk. xii. 51) "Think 
 not that I came to send peace on the earth." Jn xx. 19, 21, 26 describes 
 Jesus as thrice saying '^ Peace [be] unto you." W.H. insert the clause 
 in double brackets in Lk. xxiv. 36. 
 
 ^ 'EXeyxco, Mt. xviii. 15 '''■shew him [i.e. thy brother] his fault" Lk. iii. 
 19 "[Herod Antipas] being reproved hy him \i.e. John the Baptist"]. 
 
 337 23—2 
 
[1856] 
 
 WORDS MOSTLY PECULIAR 
 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 eXeo? 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 o 
 
 i\iriC<o^ I 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 (ii) efiavTov^ 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 i6 
 
 ? evTvXia-ao) (see 
 
 
 
 cTraipco^ 
 
 I 
 
 6 
 
 4 
 
 1866 (i) foil.) I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 [1856] (ii) hepos* 
 
 9 
 
 c. 34 
 
 I 
 
 (ii).X^pci.5(Mk) 7 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 {n)TJK(0^ 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 (ii) rjXcKia^ I 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 (ii) BedofMUi^ 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 (ii) ^6pita>» 3 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 [1857](ii)%rea>l0 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 'laxrrjcf)^^ (Mary's 
 husband) 7 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 ^ eXTri'^o), Mt. xii. 21 quoting Is. xlii. 4 "And in his name shall the 
 Gentiles /lope" Jn v. 45 " Moses on whom ye have set your hope 
 {^XnUaTe)." See 2474. 
 
 2 'E/xavToi/, Mt. viii. 9 "having under myself soldiers," parall. to 
 Lk. vii. 7 — 8 {bis\ uttered by the centurion whose servant is healed. 
 In Jn it is always uttered by Christ. 
 
 3 'ETratpo), in Mt., only xvii. 8 e-n-dpavTes di tovs 6(f)BaXp.ovs avrav. 
 
 * [1856 <«] "Erepos, Mt. xi. 3, Lk. vii. 19 rj erepov TrpoadoKwpev (foil, by 
 Lk. rj dWov (marg. erepov) TrpoadoKcopev, which, if dXXov is genuine, 
 indicates that the disciples of the Baptist softened his message into 
 "Are we to expect another of the same kind?" but the txt is doubtful), 
 Mt. xii. 45, Lk. xi. 26 erepa Trvevpara irovrfporepa. It occurs, in Jn, only 
 in xix. 37 Koi ttoXlv erepa ypa(f)r] Xeyei, also in Mk App. [xvi. 12], 
 
 ^ 'Ex^pos, Mt. V. 44 (Lk. vi. 27, 35) dyaTrdre rovs e^Opovs vp,S)v. It 
 occurs in Mk xii. 36 as a quotation (Ps. ex. i) parall. to Mt. xxii. 44, 
 Lk. XX. 43. 
 
 ^ "Hfco), Mt. viii. 11, Lk. xiii. 29 rj^ovo-iv, Mt. xxiv. 50, Lk. xii. 46 ^^ec 
 6 Kvpios T. dovXov.... It is applied by Christ to Himself in Jn viii. 42 e-ycb 
 yap CK r. Seov e^rfKdov Ka\ t^ko), COmp. I Jn V. 20 6 vlos r. deov r]<ei, 
 Heb. X. 7, 9 rJKco (from Ps. xl. 7), Heb. x. 37 6 epxopevos ■q^ei (from 
 Hab. ii. 3). 
 
 ^ 'HXiKia, Mt. vi. 27, Lk. xii. 25 "add one cubit unto his stature.^^ 
 Jn ix. 21, 23 "He is of age {rjXiKiav ex")-" 
 
 ^ Qedopai, Mt. xi. 7, Lk. vii. 24 ri e^rjXdare els rrjv eprjpov 6ed(racrdai ; It 
 occurs in Mk App. [xvi. 11, 14]. 
 
 ^ Bepi^co, Mt. vi. 26, Lk. xii. 24 ov (nreipovcnv ov8e Bepi^ovaiv, Mt. xxv. 
 24 — 6 (Lk. xix. 21 — 2) depl^cov ottov (Lk. 6) ovk eo-7reipas...0epi(cov oirov 
 (Lk. BepL^oi 6) OVK ecnreipa. Jn iv. 36 — 8 (3 times) 6 Oepi^wv, (once) Oepi^eiv. 
 
 ^^ Qprjveco, Mt. xi. 17, Lk. vii. 32 e$pr]vr}crapev Ka\ ovk eKoyjraa-Be (Lk. 
 eKXavo-are). In Jn xvi. 20 KXavaere Ka\ Oprjvqo-ere vpels. 
 
 " [1857 rt] "Icoo-^cf) (Mary's husband), in Mt.-Lk., occurs only before 
 Christ begins to preach, exc. Lk. iv. 22 ou^i vlos eanv 'I. ovros ; which 
 resembles Jn vi. 42 ovxi- ovros eo-nv 'Irjcrovs 6 vlos 'I. ; See 1776 — 8. 
 
 338 
 
TO JOHN, MATTHEW, AND LUKE [1858] 
 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 (iii) Kayo)^ 
 
 9 
 
 5 
 
 30 
 
 (ii) Ko^apos^ 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 Kade^ojxaL^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 Kcudcfias'^ 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 5 
 
 [1858] Kaico^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 Kara^oXr]^ 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 (ii) KaroKeo)'^ 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 (ii) Kelfxai^ 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 7 
 
 KXeico^ 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 (ii) KXerrrrjs'^^ 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 ?t (ii) kXiVo)!! 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 KOifidofiai,^^ 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 ^ [1857 d] Kayco, marked (iii) because it occurs in Mt. and Lk. (unlike 
 the words marked (ii)) in the Triple Tradition, where Mk xi. 29 has 
 e-rrepcorrjo-o) vjxas eva Xoyov, but Mt. xxi. 24, Lk. xx. 3 have eparrjo-co vpds 
 Kayo) Xoyov eva (Lk. om. eva) (456 (iii)). It does not occur in both versions 
 of any parallel passages of the Double Tradition of Mt.-Lk. 
 
 ^ [1857 c] Ka6ap6s, Mt. xxiii. 26 Iva yevrjrai k. to eKTos avrov KaOapov, 
 parall. to Lk. xi. 41 Ihov Trdvra Kadapd vfuv ea-rtv. Lk. omits Mt. v. 8 
 fxaKapini oi KaOapoX rjj Kapdia. In Mt. xxvii. 59 aivbovi KoBapq, the epithet 
 is om. by parall. Mk xv. 46, Lk. xxiii. 53. All Jn's instances are in the 
 Last Discourse, xiii. 10 {dis\ 11, xv. 3. 
 
 3 Kade^opai, applied to the child Jesus in Lk. ii. 46, and used by Jesus 
 concerning Himself in Mt. xxvi. 55. Mk uses only icddrjixai, KaBi^ca. 
 
 * YLaidc^ias, in Lk., only iii. 2 eVt apxiepecos^Avva k. Kat,d(Pa (17643). 
 
 ^ Katfo, in Mt., only v. 1 5 ovde Kaiovcriv Xv^vov : in Lk., only xii. 35 
 earraxrav vp(ov...ol Xv)(yoL Kaiopevoi'. Jn v. 35 calls the Baptist o Xv-)(yos 6 
 Kaiopevos. It means "burn" in Jn xv. 6 els ro trvp ^dXXova-iv k. KaUrai. 
 
 ^ Kara^oXr], in Jn, only xvii. 24, -qyaTrrjcrds p.e trpb Kara^oXrjs Kocrfiov. 
 
 "^ KaroiKeco, Mt. xii. 45, Lk. xi. 26, eiaeXdovra KarotKel e'/cel. 
 
 * KeT/xoi, Mt. iii. 10, Lk. iii. 9 f} d^lvr) Trpos r. pi^av r. devSpcov Kelrai. 
 There is some similarity between Jn xx. 12 oirov eKeiro to crmpa r. 'It/ctov, 
 and Mt. xxviii. 6 t. tottov ottov eKeiTO (Mk xvi. 6 6 tottos ottov edrjKav avTov). 
 
 ^ KXeico, in Jn, only xx. 19, 26 r. Ovpcbv KeKXeicrpevcov. 
 
 1^ KXeTTTTjs, Mt. vi. 19 — 20 (sim. Lk. xii. 23) "where thieves break 
 through " ; also Mt. xxiv. 43 (Lk. xii. 39) " if he had known in what watch 
 (Lk. hour) the thief cometh." In Jn x. i — 10 "the thief 2i\\d. the robber" 
 are contrasted with the Good Shepherd : in Jn xii. 6 Judas Iscariot is 
 said to have been " a thief." 
 
 1^ [1858.3:] KXiVo), marked ."^t because it is probably quasi-parallel. It 
 occurs in Mt. viii. 20, Lk. ix. 58 ovk exei ttov r. Ke(fiaXT)v kXivtj, Jn. xix. 30 
 KXivas T. Ke(f)aXr}v Trapidaxev r. irvevp.a. Prob. both mean " leaning the 
 head" in the sense of "finding rest," and Jn prefers this expression to 
 eKoifi^Br) " fell asleep (in death) " (1839—46). Elsewhere in N.T. it occurs 
 only in Lk. ix. 12, xxiv. 5, 29, Heb. xi. 34. 
 
 12 Kotjuao/xat, Mt. xxvii. 52 "the saints that had fatten as/eep" xxviii. 13 
 " while we were steeping" Lk. xxii. 45 " steeping for sorrow," Jn xi. 1 1 — 12 
 " Lazarus... is yrt//^« asteep..Ai\iQ is fatten asteep he witt recover." 
 
 339 
 
[1859] WORDS MOSTLY PECULIAR 
 
 Mt. Lk. Jn Mt. Lk. Jn 
 
 [1859] (ii) KOTTtao)^ 223 (ii) fcptVco^ 6 6 19 
 
 (n) KpiaiS^ 12 4 II Kpi/TTTCO^ 7 3 3 
 
 (ii) Xt^o^oXeo)^ 2 I O (ii) Xixos*^ 2 I 2 
 
 {i\) fiaKcipios^ 13 15 2 fxapTvpeo)^ I I 33 
 
 1 KoTTtao, Mt. vi. 28, Lk. xii. 27 " they /oi7 not, neither do they spin." 
 
 2 [1859rt] KptVo), Mt. vii. i,Lk.vi.37 "y?^^^notthatyebenot(Lk. "and 
 ye shall not be ") judged^'' Mt. xix. 28 (parall. to Lk. xxii. 30, but with 
 important differences in context) ''''judging the twelve tribes of Israel." 
 Jn contains no prohibition against "judging," but a prohibition against 
 judging wrongly and a command to judge righteously (vii. 24) ^'' Judge 
 not according to appearance but judge righteous judgment," and Jn adds 
 (viii. 15) "Ye judge after the flesh, I judge no man, and yet if I be 
 judging my judgment is true." 
 
 ^ [1859 <^] KptoTis occurs in Mt. xi. 22, Lk. x. 14 Tvpo) Ka\ 2tScoi/t olv^kto- 
 Tepov earai iv rjpepa Kplaecos (Lk. ev t. Kpicrei). But Mt. xi. 24 y^ ^odopau 
 dveKTorepov earai iv rjjxipa Kpiaecos rj croi, and Mt. x. 15 dvcKT. ecTai yfj 2. 
 KOL r. iv rjpepa Kpicrecos rj rfi TToXet iKeivrj, may both be taken as parall. to 
 Lk. X. 12 '2o86pois iv rfi rjp. iKeivr) dvcKT. earai fj rfj TrdXei iKeivj]. Other 
 parallels are Mt. xii. 41 — 2, Lk. xi. 31 — 2 iv rfj Kplaet. {bis) (and Mt. xxiii. 23 
 
 r. KpiCTLV KOLl T. TkeOS KOL T. TTLCTTLV, Lk. xl. 42 T. KpicTlV Kol T. dydTTTJV T. 6eOv). 
 
 The Gospel of Jn seems to define r] Kpia-is in iii. 19 as a "loving of the 
 darkness rather than light " : it never mentions rifiipa Kpia-eas but has 
 V. 29 els dvda-Taariv Kpicreois and xii. 3 1 vvv Kpiaris iariv t. Kocrpov tovtov. 
 The Epistle has (i Jn iv. 17) iv rfj rjpipa Trjs Kpia-ecos. 
 
 ^ [1859 c] KpuTTTO). There is no parallelism in any of the instances. 
 'EKpv^rj occurs in Lk. xix. 42 vvv be iKpv^jj diro ocpdakpcov aov (referring 
 to " the things that belong to peace" which are " hidden" from Jerusalem) 
 and Jn viii. 59, xii. 36 iKpy^rj, of Jesus "hidden" from the Jews. 
 
 [1859 d] The doctrine " There is nothing hidden that shall not be re- 
 vealed," is expressed by Mk iv. 22, Lk. viii. 17, Kpvirrov and dTroKpvcfiov, Mt. 
 X. 26 KeKoXvppevov and KpvnTov, Lk. xii. 2 avyKeKaXvppevov and KpvrrTov. 
 
 ^ AiOo^oXeco, Mt. xxiii. 37, Lk. xiii. 34 Xido^oXovaa r. direcrTaXpevovs. 
 
 ^ AuKOff, Mt. X. 16, Lk. X. 3 aTroareWo) vpds...iv pecrco Xvkmv. 
 
 ^ [1859^] MaKapios, Mt. V. 3— II (sim. Lk. vi. 20—22) ^^ Blessed 2x0, 
 the poor...," and Mt. xi. 6, Lk. vii. 23 ^^ Blessed is he that shall not be 
 made to stumble in me," Mt. xiii. 16 (sim. Lk. x. 23) ^''Blessed are your 
 eyes..." : Mt. xxiv. 46, Lk. xii. 43 '"'' Blessed \s that servant...." Jn. xiii. 17 
 " If ye know these things, blessed are ye if ye be doing them," xx. 29 
 ^''Blessed are they that have not seen and yet have believed." The 
 former of Jn's instances resembles Lk. xi. 28 (pec.) " Blessed are they 
 that hear the word of God and keep it." 
 
 ^ Maprupeco, Mt. xxiii. 3 1 coo-re paprvpelre eavroist Lk. iv. 22 iravres 
 ifiapTvpovv avT(o. 
 
TO JOHN, MATTHEW, AND LUKE [1861] 
 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 [1860] (ii)/ie>p( = "lot," 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "destiny")! 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 /Licra/SaiVo) ^ 
 
 6 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 (li) * fxcra^v^ 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 fiijxvr](TKoyLai^ 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 3 
 
 Na^(opaios^ 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 (ii) VrjITLOL^ 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 (ii) vo/Jios^ 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 14 
 
 (ii)* vvfx(f)r]^ 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 [1S61] (ii) 68r)ye<o^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 (ii) o/ioios^^ 
 
 9 
 
 9 
 
 2 
 
 (ii) SfioXoyeo)^^ 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 oVos^^ 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 (ii) opyt'^o/xat^^ 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 oariov i* 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 (ii) ovxi (2231 a) 
 
 9 
 
 17 
 
 6 
 
 o^eiXti)!'' 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 ! Mepos, Mt. xxiv. 5 1, Lk. xii. 46 r. fiepos avrov fxeTo. r. VTroKpircov drja-fif 
 Jn xiii. 8 ovk. ex^is fiepos fxer ip.ov. It also means "part," "district." 
 
 2 MerajSaiVco, alw. literal in Mt., and in Lk. x. 7 and Jn vii. 3 ; spiritual 
 in Jn V. 24, and in Jn xiii. i Iva p-^ra^^ e/c r. Koa-pov. 
 
 ^ Mera^v, marked* (1734 <3:i), means, in Mt. xxiii. 35 (sim. Lk. xi. 51) 
 '"''between the sanctuary and the altar," in Jn iv. 31 "in the meanwhile" 
 
 * Mipvr)o-<opai, in Jn ii. 17, 22, xii. 16 alw. of disciples "remembering" 
 the correspondence between Scripture and words or deeds of Christ. 
 
 ^ Na^copmos, Mt. ii. 23, xxvi. 71, Lk. xviii. ^7, Jn xviii. 5, 7, xix. 19. 
 
 ^ Nj^TTtoi, Mt. xi. 25, Lk. X. 21 dTreKoXvyj/'as avra vrjTriois, also Mt. xxi. l6 
 (pec.) (quoting Ps. viii. 2) eic o-Toparos vtjttIcov kol BrjXa^ovTav. 
 
 ^ Nd/xos, Mt. V. 18 (sim. Lk. xvi. 17) pia K€pea...d7r6 tov vopov, Mt. xi. 1 3 
 (sim. Lk. xvi. 16) ol 7rpo(f)rjTai k. 6 vopos ecos 'icoavov. See also in Triple 
 Tradition Mt. xxii. 36, Lk. x. 26. 
 
 ^ l<ivp<prj, Mt. X. 35 (sim. Lk. xii. 53 (bz's)) '''' daughter-iJi-law against her 
 mother-in-law," Jn iii. 29 " He that hath the bride." 
 
 ^ 'OSr/yeo), Mt. XV. 1 4 (sim. Lk. vi. 39) " But if the blind guide the 
 blind," Jn xvi. 13 "The Spirit of truth shall guide you." 
 
 10 "Opoios, Mt. xi. 16, Lk. vii. 32 '"'' Like children sitting in the market- 
 places," and freq. in Mt. Lk. parables. Jn viii. 55 ^^ like unto you, a liar," 
 ix. 9 " he is like him." 
 
 " [1861 ^?] 'O/xoXoye'o), Mt. x. 2>'^ {bis) (sim. Lk. xii. 8 {bis)) "whoever 
 shall confess me...." Jn ix. 22, xii. 42 says that the Jews had agreed to 
 excommunicate a ^'■confessor" of Christ and that hence some believers 
 feared to ^^ co7tfess" Jn never uses e^opoKoyovpai, which in Mk i. 5, 
 Mt. iii. 6 means '-'• confess {sins)" but he uses opoXoyea thus in i Jn i. 9. 
 
 12 [1861 b] "Ovos, Mt. xxi. 2 — 7 has ovos kul ttcoXos, Mk xi. 2 — 7, 
 Lk. xix. 30 — 35 have ttcoXos alone, Jn xii. 14 has ovdpiov alone (though 
 xii. 15 quotes ttcoXov ovov) in the Entry into Jerusalem. Lk. xiii. 15 has 
 ovos in the discussion about " loosing " one's ass on the Sabbath. 
 
 13 'opyiCopai, Mt. xxii. 7, sim. Lk. xiv. 21 (the Parable of the Feast that 
 was declined). Not parallel elsewhere. 
 
 1* 'Oo-reoj/, Mt. xxiii. 27, Lk. xxiv. 39, Jn xix. 36. 
 
 15 '0<^€iXa), in Lk. xvii. 10, Jn xiii. 14, xix. 7 "ought," elsewhere "owe." 
 
[1862] WORDS MOSTLY PECULIAR 
 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 [1862](ii)7rartl 
 
 ndpeifxi^ 
 
 8 
 
 I 
 
 5 
 
 9 
 
 I 
 6 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 7rapaxp^/xa2 
 
 (ii) TTTJXVS'^ 
 
 2 
 I 
 2 
 
 lO 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 ^ [1862 <3;] Uais occurs in Mt. viii. 8, Lk. vii. y etVe Xoyco koI ladrja-craL 
 (Lk. la6r]Toi) 6 TTOLs fiov. Comp. Jn iv. 51 "His bond-servants (dovXot) 
 came to meet him saying that his son (lit. doy) (Trais) was aUve," where 
 the context relates how Jesus from a distance (being apparently in or 
 near Cana) healed the son of a person in the royal retinue {^aa-iKmos) 
 " whose son {vl6s) was sick at Capernaum." By repeatedly mentioning 
 " son (vlos) " the narrative makes it clear that Traty, in Jn, must here mean 
 '^son" and not ^^servan^." 
 
 [1862^] The Double Tradition of Mt.-Lk. (Mt. viii. 5—13, Lk. vii. 
 I — 10) describes Jesus as having "entered into Capernaum" when He 
 receives a request to heal (Mt. viii. 6) a ^^ doy (Trals)," or (Lk. vii. 2) 
 ^''bond-servant ((^oCXos)," of a centurion. Mt. describes the man as making 
 his request in person, Lk. as making it through others; both use the 
 phrase (Mt. viii. 8, Lk. vii. 7) 6 Trals- \i.ov. Most commentators take Mt. 
 and Lk. as referring to the same event, and, if so, must regard "^^y/" in 
 Mt. as meaning '"'' bond-servant.''^ 
 
 [1862^] Irenaeus (ii. 22. 3) "(Jn) Filium (Mt.-Lk.) centuriotiis absens 
 verbocuravit,F<2^^,(Jn)yf//«j/2/«j7//7/2V"— whether quoting wrongly through 
 lapse of memory, or combining details from narratives that he supposed 
 to relate the same event — demonstrates the ease with which the two 
 stories about the centurion might be confused with the Johannine story, 
 and the ambiguity that might attach to "^<9y" in the earliest of the three. 
 It is probable, though by no means certain, that Jn wrote with a view to 
 this ambiguity. 
 
 [1862^] Mt. xvii. 18 edepanevdr] 6 nais, parall. to Lk. ix. 42 Idaaro 
 Tov TraTSa, is in the Triple Tradition, where Mk ix. 24 has Traiblov, 
 previously called by all (Mk ix. 17, Mt. xvii. 14, Lk. ix. 38) vlos. 
 
 2 Hapaxprjfia, see 1693^. 
 
 3 Udpeifxi, Mt. xxvi. 50, Lk. xiii. i, Jn vii. 6, xi. 28. 
 
 * Htjxvs, Mt. vi. 27, Lk. xii. 25, eVl r. rjXiKUiv...7rr]xvv, Jn xxi. 8 ws aTro 
 Trrjx^f^ 8ia<oai(i)v. 
 
 5 [1862^] Uio-Tos, in Mt.-Lk. "faithful," Mt. xxiv. 45 (Lk. xii. 42) tis 
 apa eo-TLV 6 ttiotos dovXos (Lk. olKovofios) <ai (Lk. 6) (fipovifxos; Mt. xxv. 
 21, 23 (twice) ev SovXe dyade kol Trio-re, eVi oXiya rjs ttkttos, Lk. xix. 17 
 evye, dya6e dovXe, on ev eXa;^i(rra> Triarbs iyivov, Jn xx. 27 (to Thomas) 
 " Be not unbelieving (airiarros) but believing {ttlotos)." 
 
 ^ Uveco, Mt. vii. 25, 27, Lk. xii. 55, Jn vi. 18, is in the description of a 
 tempest; in Jn iii. 8 it is connected with regeneration, to nvevfia ottov 
 deXei TTvel. 
 
TO JOHN, MATTHEW, AND LUKE [1864] 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. Jn 
 
 TTOlfXaiVOi^ I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 TTOIIXVT}^ 
 
 I 
 
 I I 
 
 [1863] Trpo roO (w. inf.) i 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 (ii) TrpocrKOTTTO)^ 
 
 2 
 
 I 2 
 
 TTwOdvofiai^ I 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 "Safiapeirrjs^ 
 
 I 
 
 3 3 + [i] 
 
 (li) a-KopTTiCco^ I 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 (ii) (TKOTia' 
 
 2 
 
 I 8 
 
 [1864] (ii)o-/coTos(metaph.)^5 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 (ii) 2oXo/iO)i/^ 
 
 5 
 
 3 I 
 
 (ii) o-o0ia (Chri.)^^ 2 
 
 4 
 
 O 
 
 (ii) o-o(^os" 
 
 2 
 
 I o 
 
 arddios^^ I 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 (ii) o-ro/ia^^ 
 
 II 
 
 9 I 
 
 o-rpe^o) ^* 6 
 
 7 
 
 4 
 
 o-uXXe-yco ^^ 
 
 7 
 
 I o 
 
 1 not/xatj/<B, Mt. ii. 6 (quoting Mic. v. i), Lk. xvii. 7 (pec.) "Which of 
 you shall have a bond-servant ploughing or sheep-tending {TroifiaivovTo)" 
 Jn xxi. 16 ^^Und my young sheep." 
 
 2 UoLfivrj, Mt. xxvi. 31 (quoting Zech. xiii. 7 wrongly), Lk. ii. 8, Jn x. 16 
 " they shall become one ^ock, one shepherd." 
 
 3 npoo-KOTTTO), Mt. iv. 6 (Lk. iv. 11) "Lest thou dask thy foot" (Ps. 
 xci. 12), Mt. vii. 27 ''^ smote upon that house," Jn xi. 9, 10 '"'' stumble." 
 
 * JIvvOdvofjLai, Mt. ii. 4 i'rTvv6dv€To...nov 6 Xp. yevvdrai, Jn iv. 52 envdeTO 
 ovv r. &pav Trap' avrcov. 
 
 ^ ^aixapflrrjs, Mt. x. 5 ei? ttoXij/ 2. /xt) eiaeXBrjTe. W.H. bracket Jn iv. 9. 
 
 6 S/copTTt^w, Mt. xii. 30, Lk. xi. 23 "He that gathereth not with me 
 scatteretk," Jn x. 12 "the wolf scattereth them," xvi. 32 "....that ye shall 
 be scattered." 
 
 ^ [1863^] '2K0TLa, Mt. X. 27 o Xeyco vpTiv iv r. cTKoriq, eiVare (imper.), 
 parall. Lk. xii. 3 dvd^ av oo-a iv r. crKOTta e'LTrare (indic); also in Mt. iv. 16 
 (giving a version of Is. ix. i) 6 Xaos 6 KaOrjfievos iv aKoria. 
 
 ^ [1864 <?:] Skotos (metaph.), Mt. vi. 23 el ovv to (pcos to iv crol (tkotos 
 iaTiv TO o-KOTos TToaov, parall. Lk. xi. 35 fxrj to (f)S)S to iv aol trKoros- iaTiv. 
 Mk has a-KOTos once (xv. 33) but in a literal sense. See 1110 a. 
 
 9 2oXo/i<oV, Mt. vi. 29, Lk. xii. 27 ovbi 2., Mt. xii. 42, Lk. xi. 31 r. o-o(f)lav 
 2....7rXeToi/ 2., Jn x. 23 iv tjj (ttoo. tov 2. 
 
 ^^ 2ocfiLa, Mt. xi. 19, Lk. vii. 35 idKaiwdr] rj ao^ia, Mt. xii. 42, Lk. xi. 31 
 aKovo-ai T. crocf)[av 2oXofj,aivos. 2o<pLa also occurs (outside Christ's words) 
 in Mk vi. 2 (sim. Mt. xiii. 54) tls rj o-ocfyia....; 
 
 11 2o(f)6s, Mt. xi. 25 (Lk. x. 21) 6ti eKpv^as (Lk. dneKpyyl/as) TavTa diro 
 <TO(f)aiV Koi avv€TO}V. 
 
 ^2 2raStos-, Mt. xiv. 24 (txt.), Lk. xxiv. 13, Jn vi. 19, xi. 18. 
 
 13 2ro/xa, Mt. xii. 34, Lk. vi. 45 " out of the abundance of the heart the 
 mouth speaketh," Jn xix. 29 "[they] brought it to his mouth." 
 
 1* [1864^] 2Tpa(f)€is is applied to Jesus, "turning round," before 
 speaking, in Mt. ix. 22, xvi. 23 ; Lk. vii. 9, 44, ix. 55, x. 23, xiv. 25, xxii. 61, 
 xxiii. 28. Lk. uses the word in no other sense. Jn uses it thus once 
 (i. 38) to introduce the first words uttered by Jesus, addressed to His first 
 two converts, Andrew and another. 
 
 1^ 2vXXi?y<u, Mt. vii. 16 fxr]Ti avWiyovanv dno aKavOcov aTa<pvXds, Lk. vi. 
 
 343 
 
[1865] WORDS MOSTLY PECULIAR 
 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 [1865](ii)(rv,/6r6si 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 (ii) Tarreivos, 
 
 -00)2 4 
 
 6 
 
 o 
 
 T€ 
 
 3 
 
 9 
 
 3 
 
 T€\€(0^ 
 
 7 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 (?) tUtco* 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 I 
 
 (n) Tpo(\>r)^ 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 (ii) vndpxovTa^ 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 o 
 
 VTTVOS^ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 [1866] (iii) vaT€pov 8 
 
 7 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 (ii) v\lr6a)^ 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 44 ov yap i^ aKav65>v arvWeyovatv (rv<a. Mt. xiii. 28 — 48 uses (rvXXeyco of 
 gathering the tares that are to be burned ; Jn xv. 6 uses a-vvdyco of 
 gathering withered branches for the same purpose. 
 
 1 Suj/erdy, Mt. xi. 25, Lk. x. 21 otto (To(f)5)v kol (rvvercov (see note on 
 
 (TO(f)6s). 
 
 2 [1865 «] TaTreij/do) is in Mt. xxiii. 12 (sim. Lk. xiv. 11) (dzs) "Whoso- 
 ever shall hujnble himself shall be exalted...," rep. in Lk. xviii. 14. 
 TaTreivos is only in Mt. xi. 29 (pec), Lk. i. 52 (pec). Mt. xviii. 4 '"''humble 
 himself as this little child" seems to be an explanation of Mk x. 15 
 " receiving the kingdom of God as a little child," Mt. xviii. 3 " turn and 
 become as little children." 
 
 Epictetus regularly uses raTreirds- {-6(i>) in the sense of "servile": 
 (iv. 4. i) "The desire of wealth makes men servile and subject to others," 
 (i. 3. i) " One who believes that God is his Father ought to have no servile 
 thoughts about himself" etc. 
 
 3 [1865 <^] TeXe'o), Mt. five times (vii. 28, xi. i, xiii. 53, xix. i, xxvi. i) 
 in such phrases as ot^ eriXea-ev 6 'I. tovs Xoyovs tovtovs, introducing a new 
 section of narrative. Jn xix. 28 — 30 etScby 6 'I. on fjdr} iravra TereXca-Tai.... 
 eiTTfv Tere'Xeo-rai. 
 
 * TiKTO), Mt. i. 21 re^erai 8e vlov (uttered to Joseph) may be regarded 
 by some as parall. to Lk. i. 31 re^t] vlov (uttered to Mary): in Jn, only 
 xvi. 21 77 yvvT) orav riiCTr] Xvtttjv e;(€t. 
 
 ^ Tpo(f)T], Mt. vi. 25 ovxi V yj/'vxr) ttXcIov co-tlv t. rpocfirjs; parall. Lk. xii. 
 23 T) yap -v//-. TrXeioj/ eariv r. Tpocfyrjs : Jn iv. 8 Iva Tpo(f)ds dyopda-ayariv. 
 
 ^ 'YTrdpxovra, Mt. xxiv. 47, Lk. xii. 44 eVi irdaiv to7s v.... KaraaTi^aeL avTov. 
 
 ^ "Yttvos, Mt. i. 24, Lk. ix. 32, Jn xi. 13. 
 
 ^ "YoTfpoj/, Mt. xxii. 27 varepov be Trdvroiv diridavev fj yvvr], Lk. xx. 32 
 vo-repov k. fj yvvrj diredavev. The word is marked (iii) because the 
 passage in which Mt. and Lk. agree is in the Triple Tradition, where 
 Mk xii. 22 has eaxarov iravTcov : in Jn, only in Jn xiii. 36 aKoXovdrjaeis Se 
 varepov. 
 
 » [1866 rt;] 'Y\/^d<B, Mt. xi. 23, Lk. x. 15 (to Capernaum) "Shalt thou be 
 exalted to heaven?" also Mt. xxiii. 12 {bis) (parallel to Lk. xiv. 11 {bis\ 
 and xviii. 14 {bis)) "Whosoever shall exalt himself...." In Jn, always 
 (iii. 14 {bis)^ viii. 28, xii. 32, 34) concerning the "lifting up" of the Son of 
 man (illustrated once by the " lifting up " of the brazen serpent). 
 
 344 
 
TO JOHN, MATTHEW, AND LUKE [1866] 
 
 Mt. Lk. Jn Mt. Lk. Jn 
 
 (ii) (f)i\os^ I 15 6 (ii) (fipovifxos^ 720 
 
 (ii) (ficos (metaph.)^ 6 4 23 (ii) axmep^ 10 2 2 
 
 OiTLOV^ I I I 
 
 1 [1866<^] ^1X09, Mt. xi. 19, Lk. vii. 34 ^^ a. /rzend of publicans and 
 sinners." On Christ's phrase " my friends," see 1784 — 92. ^iXeoa occurs 
 Mk (i), Mt. (5), Lk. (2), Jn (13), but not always with the same meaning. 
 It means "kiss" in Mk xiv. 44, Mt. xxvi. 48, Lk. xxii. 47. In Lk. xx. 46 
 '"Having salutations" is parall. to Mt. xxiii. 6 — 7 "But they /^z/^....and 
 salutations." Since it never means "love (persons)" in Lk., and since 
 it occurs once in Mk (meaning " kiss ") it is not placed above. ^tXew 
 means "love (persons)" in Mt. x. 37 {bis) and always in Jn exc. xii. 25 
 "he that loveth his life." See 1716^— ^ and 1728 w—^. 
 
 ^ ^povifMos, Mt. xxiv. 45, Lk. xii. 42 tls apa earlv 6 Triaros dovXos k. 
 (fipovi/jios. 
 
 ^ <E>a)y, Mt. vi. 23, Lk. xi. 35 to (pcos to iv aol, Mt. x. 27 6 Xe'yo) vfxiv iv r. 
 (TKOTLa etTrare (imper.) ev r. (fxoTi, but parall. Lk. xii. 3 ocra eV r. (tkotIo. 
 e'lTraTe (indic.) ev r. (fxoTl d<ova6r)a-eTai. In Jn xii. 36 Hva vio\ (fxoToy 
 yevrjo-Oe is parall. in form, though not in context, to Lk. xvi. 8 (fypovipcoTepoi 
 virep T. vlovs r. (fycoTos. On Jn-Mt. "light of the world," see 1748. 
 
 * "Qa-irep, Mt. xxiv. 27, Lk. xvii. 24 loairep yap rj do-TpaTrrj.... In Lk. 
 and Jn, alw. foil, by ydp exc. Lk. xviii. 1 1 coo-irep (v.r. &>$•) oi XoittoL 
 
 ^ [1866 c] 'Qtiov is used by Mt. xxvi. 51 in the wounding of the High 
 Priest's servant (Lk. ovs, Mk and Jn coTaptov) but by Lk. xxii. 51 (pec.) in 
 the healing, and by Jn xviii. 26 in a reference to the wounding. 
 
 345 
 
[1866 (i)] JOHN, MATTHEW, AND LUKE 
 
 ADDITIONAL NOTE {ivrvXiaao)) 
 
 [1866 (i)] 'ErruXi(7o-a> occurs in Matthew's and Luke's versions of the 
 Triple Tradition describing Christ's burial thus : 
 
 Mk XV. 46 Mt. xjtvii. 59 Lk. xxiii. 53 
 
 Kal dyopdffas ffiv56va Kal Xa^cdv rb trw/xa 6 Kal KadeXicv iverOXt^ev 
 
 KadeXihu avTOv iveiXrjffev 'I(i3cr7j(f> evervKi^ev avrb avro <nv86vt. 
 
 TTJ aivbbvL. [ej/] aivbbvL Kadapq.. Jn xix. 40 ^drjcrau. 
 
 In Mark, R.V. has '''"wound him''^ (A.V. '•'■ wrapped hi7n''^) ; in Matthew 
 and Luke, R.V. has '''■wrapped it.^^ It has been explained elsewhere 
 (520 — 1) that Mark might deliberately use eveikelv, " bindfast^'' in order to 
 shew the reality of the death, and of the burial, and the impossibility of 
 a hasty removal of the body apart from the burial clothes, a point urged 
 by Chrysostom^. But Matthew and Luke may have objected to the word 
 (especially when applied, as by Mark, not to " body " but to " him ") as 
 being unseemly, because it is used of fettering prisoners, swathing 
 children hand and foot, holding people fast in a net, entangling them in 
 evil or in debt, and generally in a bad sense 2. 
 
 [1866 (ii)] 'EvrvXtVo-w, apparently a much rarer word than eVeiXe'co, is 
 free from the objection of being used in a bad or hostile sense ; for it is 
 used of wrapping oneself up in a cloak or a rug, and, so far as can be 
 
 1 [1866 (i)^] Chrys. (on Jn, Migne p. 465) "John says that he was 
 buried with a great amount of myrrh, which glues as it were the linen 
 cloths to the body like the soldering of lead (^ fio\v^8ov ovx fjTTov 
 (TvyKoXXa ra o-afiari to. odovia).^' 
 
 - [1866 (i)(^] Steph. quotes Synes. Ep. 105 p. 248 B iveiXovfievov vols 
 
 TTpbs TO. yeatdr] fieOeXKOvcriv, Plut^ Afor. p. 830 E 6 UTra^ eveiXrjdels (aeri 
 alieno) [xevei ;^pe&)crr7;ff. Artemid. i. 13 connects it with helplessness or in- 
 activity, dpya yap ra I3pe(f)r) koi iveiXovficva ras x^^P^^t ^^- 54 ''• ^^^tciv 
 €V€LXrjp,evr)v e'xeiv dia to dpyrjv elvau... Plutarch Caes. 66 says that Caesar 
 oxTTrep 6r)piov eVeiXeiro rals Tvavrav ;^epo-ti'. Steph. adds Artox. C. 1 1 Kvpov 
 Tois TToXc/xtois' ev€iXovp.evov, QuintUS 14, 294 K^p6y...7roXeeo"cr/ /a' eveiXrjaavTO 
 KaKoiaiy and Hesych. explains evetXrjTai as e^rjpicorai. These passages and 
 others quoted by Steph. suggest that Polyc. Philipp. § i rovs eveiXrjpdvovs 
 Tois dyioTrpcTriaiv deapois drivd icmv diadrjpara draws a contrast between 
 the physical fettering of martyrs and their spiritual adornment, because, 
 though they are "/«j-/ dound" in them, they do not regard themselves as 
 (Ps. cvii. 10) "fas/ bound in misery and iron," but as wearing "diadems" 
 of the elect. At the same time Polycarp emphasizes the necessity of 
 helping those who are thus unable to help themselves. 
 
 346 
 
JOHN, MATTHEW, AND LUKE [1866 (iv)] 
 
 judged from the Thesaurus, never implies constraint i. But no instance 
 is alleged of its meaning "wrap up a covering," "roll up a napkin" 
 except in John xx. 7 "[Simon] beholdeth the linen cloths lying, and the 
 napkin, which had been on his head, not lying with the linen cloths, but 
 apart, rolled up (eVrervXtyjueVov) (lit.) into one place." 
 
 [1866 (iii)] 'Ei/TvXto-o-o) as used by John and meaning "r^// up'''' is not 
 similar in meaning to e. as used by Matthew-Luke meaning '-''wrap.'''' 
 Nor are the two words in parallel contexts. Yet, having regard to the 
 extreme rarity of the word in Greek literature of every age and to the fact 
 that it does not occur anywhere in O.T. or N.T. except here, it is difficult 
 to avoid the inference that John uses it with reference to the diverging 
 traditions of the Synoptists — Mark using " bindfast^^'' Matthew and Luke 
 " wrap.^^ John (xix. 40), avoiding the word eveiXeco, substitutes a word that 
 means the same thing, edrjaav, " bound" and he adds, as Chrysostom -says, 
 a mention of "abundance of myrrh" which would have the effect of 
 '•'' binding fast^" like "the soldering of lead." At the same time, while 
 substantially siding with Mark, John accepts the rare word of Matthew 
 and Luke as expressing a fact, though not exactly the fact they describe. 
 " There was^^ — John seems to say — " a ' wrapping^ or rather a ' ivrapping 
 upi in connexion with the burial of the Lord. But it referred to the 
 burial garments alone'^, not to the body itself" 
 
 [1866 (iv)] Some illustration of the facts above mentioned may be 
 derived from the facts mentioned elsewhere (640 — 61) as regards what 
 Mark (i. 10) calls the " rending {p-yl^at) " of the heavens, whereas Matthew 
 (iii. 16) and Luke (iii. 21) use the word ^'- open {avoiyw).^^ John omits this, 
 but has later on (i. 51) "Ye shall see the heaven set open (di/oiyo))," 
 agreeing verbally with Matthew and Luke but by no means in parallel 
 context. 'EvrvXtWoj is far rarer than avotyw, and is used by the three 
 Evangelists in contexts that are much more nearly parallel than those 
 referring to avoiyo). The demonstration, therefore, is far stronger here 
 that John is writing allusively to the Synoptists, and he appears to be not 
 only justifying Mark but also explaining what he may have thought 
 a misunderstanding in Matthew and Luke. 
 
 ^ [1866 (ii) al Aristoph. Nub. 983 iv IfiariOis Trpodi^do-iceis evrervXixdai, 
 Plut. 692 AvTTjv ivTv\i^a(T r^avxr}. Steph. also quotes Athen. 3 p. 106 F, 
 107 A, where it describes the wrapping up of the liver etc. He refers to, 
 but does not quote, Diocl. ap. Antiatt. Bekk. p. 97, 9. It does not occur 
 in LXX (where eveikelaBai occurs once), and would seem to be a very rare 
 word in Gk literature of all periods. 
 
 2 [1866 (iii) a] Comp. Lk. [xxiv. 12] " t/ie linen cloths alone (fiova),'" and 
 Jn XX. 5 — 7 ^^ the linen cloths... the linen cloths... the napkin...;/^/ with the 
 linen cloths, but apart ^^ and see 1804 on '-''the linen cloths alone" a phrase 
 that may have been the subject of many interpretations. 
 
 347 
 
CONCLUSION 
 
 § I. Review of the evidence 
 
 The Vocabularies given above have exhibited results that 
 may be tabulated as follows: 
 
 [1867] (i) Synoptic Vocabulary, i.e. the Vocabulary of 
 the Triple Tradition. This differs widely from the Johannine. 
 Where the same words are used by all four Gospels, the 
 Fourth often uses metaphorically what the Three use literally. 
 
 [1868] (2) Johannine Vocabulary. This would be found 
 very small indeed as compared with the Vocabulary of 
 Matthew by itself, or with that of Luke by itself, and even 
 when compared above with the limited number of words used 
 by Mark, Matthew, and Luke in common, it is small. It 
 omits words of local or temporary interest and rings the 
 changes on a small number of elementary words and their 
 synonyms. 
 
 [1869] (3) John-Mark Agreements. The verbal agree- 
 ments are few, Mark being the most concrete, and John being 
 the most abstract, of the Evangelists. But the number of 
 parallelisms is large, or — if regard be had to the small number 
 of verbal agreements — very large indeed. They are also 
 undeniable. For example, no one denies that the sayings 
 about " buying for two hundred denarii " and " selling for 
 three hundred denarii" are recorded by Mark and John in 
 connexion, severally, with the same events. 
 
 [1870] (4) John-Matthew Agreements. The verbal agree- 
 ments are more numerous than those in the John-Mark list. 
 
 348 
 
CONCLUSION [1871] 
 
 But there are no parallelisms unless we suppose that John, 
 when mentioning "« tribunal" in connexion with Pilate, 
 wishes to distinguish it from 'Hhe tribunal" mentioned by 
 Matthew. There are, however, the phrases " my brethren " 
 and " light of the world," assigned both by Matthew and by 
 John to our Lord but in different contexts — and the latter 
 (1748) with the several prefixes, " Ye are," and " I am." 
 
 [1871] (5) John-Luke Agreements. The verbal agree- 
 ments are very numerous indeed, exhibiting the two Evan- 
 gelists as educated writers naturally using a similar vocabulary 
 (except where Luke gave up, and John retained, special words 
 of low-class Greek — perhaps endeared to some readers by old 
 Evangelic associations). But parallelisms either are non- 
 existent or are of a corrective character. For example, John 
 twice uses Luke's word e/cyLtacrcr&) to emphasize apparently 
 the fact that the woman that " wiped " the Lord's feet was 
 not a " sinner," but Mary the sister of Martha. Since also the 
 evidence indicated that we ought to include in Luke's text 
 the description of Peter's visit to Christ's sepulchre ^ there 
 appeared to be another quasi-parallelism that must be 
 described as corrective. And other corrective passages ap- 
 peared to exist in John, in connexion with the phrase "stood 
 in the midst," applied to our Lord after the Resurrection by 
 him and Luke. 
 
 ^ [1871 d\ The passage, like others in Luke's account of the Re- 
 surrection, might have been added by Luke himself in a second edition 
 of his Gospel. I am informed by my friend Dr Israel Gollancz that 
 there is evidence to shew that in the poems of Langland certainly, and 
 perhaps in those of Chaucer, there are copies containing additions that 
 proceeded from the author himself. In the days before printing, an 
 author's second edition, if made shortly before his death, might appear at 
 first in only a few copies, whereas the first edition might count its 
 hundreds or thousands. This might discredit the additions in the second 
 edition, so that even those scribes that copied it might think it necessary 
 to correct the second by the first, omitting what appeared to some " the 
 corrupt interpolations of the later copies." 
 
 349 
 
[1872] CONCLUSION 
 
 [1872] (6) John-Mark-Matthew Agreements. Here, as 
 in the John-Mark list, the number of verbal agreements is not 
 large, but the parallelisms are proportionately very numerous; 
 and the facts indicate that, in these, John is not following 
 Matthew but Mark, whom Matthew has previously followed. 
 
 [1873] (7) John-Mark-Luke Agreements. The verbal 
 agreements are not numerous — the vocabulary of Mark and 
 that of Luke being seldom likely to be similar except where 
 both are describing exorcisms, a subject never mentioned by 
 John. There is only one parallelism, namely, in the descrip- 
 tion of the Baptist as not worthy to loose the " latchet " 
 of Christ's shoe, where Matthew has "carry the shoes.'* 
 One quasi-parallelism appears to be of a corrective nature, 
 bearing on the " spices " used, or to be used, in embalming 
 the body of Christ. Mark and Luke connect these with the 
 women, Matthew omits "spices," and says that the women 
 came to "behold" the tomb. John assigns the "spices" to 
 Nicodemus and Joseph. The paucity of parallelisms contrasts 
 with the abundance in the John-Mark-Matthew list. 
 
 [1874] (8) John-Matthew-Luke Agreements. The verbal 
 agreements are very numerous indeed: but there is not a single 
 parallelism. There is, however, an allusive use of Matthew- 
 Luke's phrase " lay the head to rest," applied by John (1839) 
 to the description of Christ's death. John sometimes alludes 
 (1450, 1784) to Matthew's or Luke's version of the Double 
 Tradition and {e.g, 1866 (i) foil.) to Matthew's and Luke's 
 versions of the Triple Tradition ; but in no case does John 
 agree exactly with Matthew and Luke combined, or with 
 either separately. 
 
 § 2. What remains to be done 
 
 [1875] It may be objected against the preceding system 
 of Vocabularies that it is incomplete, and — so far as concerns 
 the attitude of the Fourth Gospel to the collective evidence of 
 the Three — negative. " The first " — it may be said — " of the 
 
 350 
 
CONCLUSION [1876] 
 
 eight Vocabularies tells us what words are characteristic of 
 Mark-Matthew-Luke and absent or rare in John : the second 
 tells us what are characteristic of John and absent or rare in 
 Mark-Matthew-Luke. But this is largely negative informa- 
 tion. Where is the Vocabulary of words common to the 
 Four^ the John- Mark- Matthew -Luke Vocabulary'^ That 
 would give us purely positive information, for want of which 
 the preceding investigation must be pronounced defective." 
 
 [1876] Let us consider this objection in the light of facts 
 as presented by page i A of Mr Rushbrooke's Synopticon, 
 which prints in large red capitals all the words common to 
 the Four Gospels in the description of John the Baptist and 
 his baptism of Christ. They are as follows: "Voice of one 
 crying in the wilderness, straight[en] the way of the Lord... 
 Isaiah the prophet... I bapti[ze] in water... com[ing] of whom 
 I am not... the shoe... Jordan... baptiz[ing]... Spirit descend[ing] 
 as a dove from heaven... him... baptiz[ing] in the Holy Spirit... 
 the Son (v.r. elect)." Now suppose we were to tabulate these 
 words alphabetically, should we derive any information from 
 them apart from a close examination of their context ? For 
 example, the last two words " the Son" (if genuine) occur in 
 John the Baptist's testimony " I have borne witness that this 
 is the Son of God." But the Synoptic mention of " Son " at 
 the conclusion of the account of the Baptism refers it to a 
 Voice from heaven, " This is (or, Thou art) my beloved So7t!' 
 Again, Luke distinctly says that the Spirit " descended in 
 bodily shape as a dove " ; Mark and Matthew say " He saw " 
 the descent, the former apparently, the latter certainly, 
 referring " He " to Jesus (596). The Fourth Gospel makes 
 the Baptist clear up this doubt by saying, "/ have beheld 
 the Spirit descending as a dove." These distinctions are 
 most important. But what important gain would there be 
 from simply reading, in a " John-Mark-Matthew-Luke Vocabu- 
 lary," such an entry as " irepLo-repd Mk (2), Mt. (3), Lk. (2), 
 Jn(3)"? 
 
 A. V. 351 24 
 
[1877] CONCLUSION 
 
 [1877] If mere tabulation would be useless as to the words 
 specified above (" Son " and " dove ") which belong to a 
 narrative (the Baptism of Christ) where the Fourth Gospel 
 intervenes in the Triple Tradition, much more would the 
 charge of uselessness apply to such words as must necessarily 
 form the common stock of all Gospels, e.g. '* man," " woman," 
 "live," "die," "soul," "spirit," "heaven," "earth," etc. We 
 may therefore dismiss the project of a complete Fourfold 
 Vocabulary as not likely to be what Bacon calls " luciferous." 
 But we cannot dismiss so readily the thought — suggested by 
 the last paragraph — that a close critical examination of the 
 Johannine and the Synoptic narratives of the Baptism, and 
 of other passages where John intervenes, would be of great 
 value. Take, for example, the Feeding of the Five Thousand, 
 where all the Evangelists except Luke mention "grass" in 
 various ways. In a mere Fourfold Vocabulary this fact 
 would not appear because Luke uses "grass" in other 
 contexts. Even if a note were added, calling attention to 
 Luke's omission, its significance would be lost among other 
 notes necessarily attached to the word " grass " if it had to be 
 annotated at all. It is only in a commentary on the four 
 accounts of the miracle, that this and other points of Johan- 
 nine agreement, or disagreement, with this or that Synoptist, 
 could be satisfactorily discussed. 
 
 § 3- Johannine Grammar 
 
 [1878] It might seem, then, that the next step should be 
 to examine in order all the passages where the Fourth Gospel 
 intervenes in the tradition of the Three. Equipped, as we 
 now are from the preceding Vocabularies, with information as 
 to the words that John favours and disfavours, his metaphorical 
 method, and his apparent preference for Mark or Mark- 
 Matthew (as compared with Luke) we could apply this know- 
 ledge to each narrative in turn, shewing how the Fourth 
 
 352 
 
CONCLUSION [1880] 
 
 Gospel sometimes deviates from all three in virtue of his 
 peculiar method or style, and sometimes approximates to 
 one, or two, of the three in conformity with his rule of 
 preference. 
 
 [1879] But we do not know quite enough about John as 
 yet to do this effectually. It is not enough about any writer 
 — least of all about a writer in Greek, a language abounding 
 in facilities for expressing thought and emphasis by variety 
 of order and construction — to know merely what verbs, nouns, 
 and prepositions he likes and dislikes. We must also know 
 something of his syntax. There are more ambiguities in the 
 Fourth Gospel than in all the Three taken together, and it is 
 easy to put one's finger on the cause of many of them. One, 
 for example, is the attempt to express meaning by order of 
 words or by reference to context. The very last words of 
 Christ in freedom, uttered before He is led away in bonds to 
 Annas, are what, proceeding from a classical Greek author, 
 would have to be rendered, " The cup that my Father hath 
 given me I will assuredly not drink it." There can be no 
 doubt here that the words are to be read either interrogatively 
 or as an exclamation implying surprise that Peter should try 
 to prevent Him from drinking the cup: but there are many 
 other passages where the meaning is far from clear until they 
 have been illustrated by the comparison of a large number of 
 similar instances. 
 
 [1880] Again, it is a peculiarity of John's style, and some- 
 times almost an obtrusive one, that he repeats some statements 
 twice, others thrice, and that a sevenfold arrangement appears 
 in parts of his narrative, and he occasionally prefers to make 
 a literally inaccurate but practically accurate assertion, e.g. 
 " Jesus baptized," and then, instead of cancelling it, to supple- 
 ment it by an exact statement of the fact, that Jesus Himself 
 did not baptize, but His disciples did. These peculiarities, 
 and several others, fall under the head of Johannine Arrange- 
 ment of Words, so that they have not been discussed in the 
 
 353 24—2 
 
[1880] CONCLUSION 
 
 preceding pages where words alone have been considered. 
 Without some study of Johannine Grammar as well as 
 Johannine Vocabulary, we should be at a disadvantage in 
 approaching a discussion of the Fourfold Gospel. The next 
 step, therefore, to be taken will be the publication Q>i Johannine 
 Grammar^ as the Second Part of this work, with an Index to 
 the two Parts. 
 
 354 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 355 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 PREPOSITIONS 1 IN THE FOUR GOSPELS 
 
 § I. Introductory remarks 
 
 [1881] No English alphabetical lists could well represent 
 the differences between the Johannine and the Synoptic use 
 of prepositions and particles. And even Greek statistics, 
 without careful annotation, might be misleading. Prepositions 
 that are used by the Synoptists frequently, but almost always 
 literally, may be used by John almost as frequently but 
 hardly ever literally. It is useless to be informed that two 
 writers use 'Hn'' with the same frequency, if one mostly uses 
 it in such phrases as ''in that hour," ''m those days," ''in 
 Capernaum," etc., and the other in such phrases as " abide in 
 me." 
 
 [1882] The same thing holds good about " to " or " into!' 
 This, in the Synoptists, is mostly literal; but in John it is very 
 frequently metaphorical — in the phrases "come into the 
 world," "sent into the world." Frequently, too, John expresses 
 " believe in " by " believe into (et?)." Luke uses airo, "from!' 
 more than thrice as often as John, but John would be found 
 
 1 The Johannine Prepositions will be discussed singly from the 
 grammatical point of view in the Second Part of this work, the Johannine 
 Grammar. Here they are treated collectively as illustrating the contrast 
 between the Johannine and the Synoptic vocabulary. And the list will 
 include one or two words {e.g. ovv) of a specially illustrative character. 
 
 357 
 
[1883] PREPOSITIONS 
 
 to exceed Luke in special phrases, e.g. ''from himself I' ''from 
 myself!' "from God" etc., where the words have a moral or 
 spiritual meaning. Hence eV, eU^, eV and Trpo? are not 
 inserted in the following list ; but " on " (eVt with gen.) is 
 inserted for a special reason. It is not used by John in 
 Christ's words more than once, and then only toward the end 
 of his Gospel in the declaration of an accomplished mission, 
 " I have glorified thee on the earth " ; the reason is that this 
 preposition does not lend itself to spiritual metaphor. So, 
 too, irapd with accusative meaning "by the side of" occurs 
 often in the Synoptic "by the sea" etc.; John uses it not with 
 accusative but with genitive, to express the Son's coming 
 "from the side of," or "from the house of," the Father. 
 Lastly, the mediatorial preposition "for" virep with the 
 genitive, occurs far more frequently in the Fourth Gospel 
 than in all the Three together. 
 
 [1883] In the fohannine Grammar, John's use of "there- 
 fore" ovv, will be discussed under "Conjunctions," but some 
 remarks on it may be useful here. In narrative, John is very 
 fond of it, as carrying on the story from step to step in logical 
 sequence. Ovv in the Fourth Gospel is very much like the 
 English "so " in a story for children : " He did this, so [as a 
 natural consequence] she did that." John also frequently 
 inserts it in describing the talk — often idle talk — of the 
 multitudes, or of " the Jews," whom he represents as chattering 
 with a false appearance of logical sequence. But he hardly 
 ever inserts it in his record of Christ's words, perhaps because 
 he does not like to represent Him as prone to arguing. 
 Hence, though the particle occurs in the Fourth Gospel about 
 195 times, against 90 times in the Three, it is not found more 
 than 8 times in Christ's words (1885 d). In the Epistle it is 
 never used at all. 
 
 ^ Except when eZy is used for eV. 
 
 358 
 
IN THE FOUR GOSPELS [1884] 
 
 §2. A few statistics about Prepositions 
 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 [1884] hia (accus. of pers.)^ 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 etff (for eV)2 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 7 
 
 5 
 
 eveica, -ev, €LV€k.€V (1692 a) 
 
 4 or 5 
 
 7 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 ini (accus.) (total) 
 
 34 
 
 C.67 
 
 C. ICO 
 
 19 
 
 „ (accus.) (Chri.)^ 
 
 i8 
 
 c. 41 
 
 c. 61 
 
 2 
 
 „ (dat.) (Chri.) 
 
 5 
 
 12 
 
 16 
 
 
 
 „ (gen.) (Chri.)4 
 
 9 
 
 22 
 
 17 
 
 I 
 
 1 [1884 «a!] Ata Ttva, in N.T., mostly means " for the sake of benefiting, 
 satisfying, supporting, glorifying etc. a person " (not " because of what a 
 person has done in the past") : nor can (Mk ii. 4, Lk. v. 19, viii. 19) 
 " because of the crowd," with a negative, be regarded as exceptions, since 
 " crowd" is there regarded impersonally. But " I covno. for your sake {did 
 ere)" might be used to mean " I come to see you [and not to see anyone 
 else]," and so Jn xii. 9 ov 8ia r. 'I. fiovov means " not to see Jesus only." In 
 Jn xii. 1 1 iroWol dt' avTov vTrrjyov... seems to mean " Many of the Pharisees 
 were in the habit of going away [from their own party] for the sake of 
 seeing him [Lazarus] and were becoming believers in Jesus." Jn vii. 43 
 " there was a division /^r his sake " may mean " for the sake of [supporting 
 or attacking] him" ; Jn xii. 42 '"''for the sake ^the Pharisees they did not 
 confess him " may be explained as Gal. ii. 4 '"''for the sake of the false 
 brethren," which Lightfoot renders "/^ satisfy^ to disarm^ the false 
 brethren." 
 
 [1884^] All this bears on Jn vi. 57 where ^^\\v'\Vi^ for the sake of ^^o^ 
 Father " and " Xwmgfor my sake " must not be confused with living " by 
 means of {hid with gen.). It is true that " eating " is mentioned in the 
 context. But the primary meaning probably is that the Son " lives y<?r the 
 sake ^/glorifying the Father." See 2294—2300. 
 
 2 [1884 c'\ Ety for eV. These numbers are taken from Bruder — after 
 rejecting Mk i. 39 (reading ^X^ci/ not ^v), ii. i, Lk. xii. 21 {ih Qeov 
 TrXovTwv), and inserting Jn xx. 19, 26 eo-rrj els to fiecrov. Jn's other 
 instances are i. 18 6 a>v els t6v koXttov tov Trarpoff, xvii. 23 Iva Sxri 
 T€Te\ei(i)ixevoi els ev and xxi. 4 earT] 'irjaovs els (marg. eiri) tov alyiaXov. 
 Lk.'s instances are all local. Concerning Christ's manifestation after the 
 Resurrection Lk. xxiv. 36 has avTos eo-Trj ev ixeato avTcov. 
 
 3 [1884^1 'Etti (accus.) (Chri.) in Jn, only i. 51 "the angels of God 
 ascending and descending upon (eVi) the Son of man" (from Gen. 
 xxviii. 12, LXX en avTfjs, D eV avTrj) and xiii. 18 "hath lifted up his heel 
 against me " (from Ps. xii. 9). 
 
 * [1884^] 'Etti (gen.) (Chri.) in Jn, only xvii. 4 "I [have] glorified thee 
 on (eVi) the earth." 
 
 359 24—5 
 
[1885] PREPOSITIONS 
 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 €a>s (prep. w. noun)^ 
 
 5 
 
 c. 19 
 
 8 
 
 [I] 
 
 KOTO, (accus.) 
 
 c. 14 
 
 21 
 
 37 
 
 7 
 
 „ (gen.)^ 
 
 7 
 
 i6 
 
 6 
 
 I 
 
 [1885] fiT,8(is^ 
 
 8 
 
 5 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 /Ltj^TTore, or /xj) Trore* 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 
 7 
 
 I 
 
 oo-Ttf (of persons)^ 
 
 4 
 
 27 
 
 II 
 
 I 
 
 0^1/6 
 
 3 or 4 
 
 56 
 
 30 
 
 c. 195 
 
 Trapd (accus.) 
 
 7 
 
 7 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 „ (gen.)7 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 9 
 
 25 
 
 7r€ pi (accus.) 8 
 
 lO 
 
 8 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 vTTf'p (gen.) 9 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 I +[2] 
 
 13 
 
 1 "Eojy prep. w. noun, in Jn, is only in viii. 9 " from the first unto the 
 last " — an interpolated passage. 
 
 2 [1884/"] Kara (gen.), in Jn, only xix. 11 Ovk ft^fs e^ovcriav kot e/Aou 
 ovbcp.iav. 
 
 3 [1885^] M7;§eiy. The Johannine non-use of any form of /xjySfiy 
 indicates that Jn does not contain such prohibitions as " Tell no man" 
 " Let no man know it," " Take nothing for the journey " etc. (Mk i. 44, 
 Mt. viii. 4, ix. 30, Lk. v. 14 etc.). 
 
 * [1885 <^] Mi^TTore, in Synopt., alw. means "lest" exc. perh. Lk. iii. 15 
 " reasoning... (R.V.) whether haply he were the Christ." In Jn vii. 26 
 p,r}TroT€...€yva}aav, it means ^^ Can it be that...!" 
 
 ^ [1885^] "OoTis, of pers., in Synopt, mostly means "every one that" 
 or "that" used as a defining relative. But in Jn it seems to be a 
 supplem£ntary relative {^'' who" — ^^ and he") Jn viii. 53 "Art thou greater 
 than our father Abraham who {oa-ns) is dead... ? " See 2413. 
 
 6 [1885 d] Ovv. Jn altogether differs from Mt.-Lk. in his use of ovv. 
 They mostly use it in Christ's words. Jn uses it freq. in the words of 
 others (i. 21, 25, iv. 11 etc.) and in narrative i. 22, 39, ii. 18, 20 etc., but 
 very rarely indeed in Christ's words (vi. 62, viii. 24, 36, 38, xii. 50, xiii. 14, 
 xvi. 22, xviii. 8) about 8 times. In Mt.'s Sermon on the Mount alone, it 
 occurs 1 3 times. 
 
 7 [1885^] llapa (gen.). Jn's use is almost always in the phrase '"''from 
 God (or, the Father)" eg. i. 6, 14, v. 44, vi. 45, 46 etc. 
 
 8 Ilepi (accus.), see n. on virip. 
 
 ^ [1885/] 'YTTep (gen.). Mk ix. 40 "He that is not against us \s for 
 us" and sim. Lk. ix. 50, but ^^a.ga\nst you... for you"'; Mt. om., but has Mt. 
 v. 44 " pray /or them that persecute you," where'Lk. vi. 28 has " pray for" 
 expressed by irepi. [Lk. xxii. 19, 20] is doubtful. 
 
 [1885^] Jn's first instance is i. 30 " This is he about (vnep v. r. nept) 
 whom I said...." John the Baptist is speaking of Christ, and virip is all 
 
 360 
 
IN THE FOUR GOSPELS [1885] 
 
 
 Mk 
 
 Mt. 
 
 Lk. 
 
 Jn 
 
 vno (accus.)i 
 „ (gen.)^ 
 
 30^4 
 8 
 
 5 
 23 
 
 7 
 23 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 the more remarkable because (i) he has, in Jn i. 15, 'ladvrjs fxaprvpeT trfpl 
 avTov, (2) everywhere else in Jn virep means '''•for the sake o/^ Perh. i. 30, 
 having a shade of difference from i. 1 5, means " in behalf of whom" 
 i.e. as His representative. 
 
 [1885^] In Jn xiii. 37, 38 virip is twice used about Peter's profession 
 that he would "lay down his life/(?r" Christ; in xvii. 19 "I sanctify 
 myself /<?r them" seems to refer to Christ's self-devotion on the cross ; in 
 almost all other passages the word is certainly used in connexion with 
 Christ's dying for man, whether mentioned by Christ Himself, or 
 (xi. 50 — 2, xviii. 14) by Caiaphas, or by the Evangelist referring to 
 Caiaphas. The prevalence of the word, therefore, in fn is due to the 
 prevalence of mediatorial doctrine. 
 
 1 [1885 z] 'Ytto (accus.) in Jn, only i. 48 vrco rqv arvKrjv foil, by i. 50 
 vTroKaTco rrjs o-VK^y, on which see 2372 — 3. 
 
 2 [1885y] 'Ytto (gen.). The rarity ofyno w. gen. in Jn arises from his 
 preference of active to passive, as in Jn x. 14 R. V. " mine own know me," 
 but V. r. and A.V. " I am known of mine." The only genuine instance is 
 Jn xiv. 21... cKeivos icTTLV 6 dyairoiv pe, 6 8e dyanav pe dyanrjOrjafTai vrrb tov 
 irarpos pov, /cayco dya7rr](ra) avrov... where tov Se dyaTravra epe would be 
 avoided by many writers as being in form, though not in fact, ambiguous. 
 
 361 
 
[1885 (i)] ADDENDA 
 
 ADDENDA 
 
 [1885 (i)] Vocabulary I (1672—96) gives a characteristic but not 
 a complete list of words used in the Three Gospels and comparatively 
 seldom or never in the Fourth. The textual list was intended for readers 
 unacquainted with Greek. The annotations called attention to points 
 some of which the author hopes to discuss in a treatise on " The Fourfold 
 Gospel." The list omitted many words such as " camel," " candlestick " 
 (A. v.), " herd," " mother-in-law," concerning which everybody knows that 
 the Synoptists use them and John does not. Their inclusion appeared 
 likely to make the Vocabulary inconveniently large without greatly 
 increasing its utility for the general reader. But here, for the benefit of 
 the student of the Greek Testament, the omitted words are set down in 
 Greek alphabetical order. The list is not complete even now. It omits 
 prepositions and particles discussed elsewhere, and also words used 
 differently by the different Synoptists e.g. 8ia(f)€p(o, Karapri^o), /coTrro), and 
 Aeyio)!/. But still, if the student combines the following list with the 
 instances marked in Vocabulary I as Jn (o), he will have a tolerably 
 complete view of the words used by the Three Gospels and never used by 
 the Fourth. 'AyeXr] 2, 3, 2 = d. Mk (2), Mt. (3), Lk. (2), and so of the 
 rest : — 
 
 [1885 {i)a] 'AyeXrj 2, 3, 2 : ddvparos I, I, I : a^vnos 2, I, 2 : aKpov 2, 2, 
 I : aXa^aarpov 2, I, I : &\uvs 2, 2, I : ^AX(fiaLos 2, I, i : dvayKci^a) i, i, i : 
 dvexofiai I, I, I : an-atpo) I, I, I : dnodrjfieco I, 3, 2 : dirodoKi fiasco 2, 1,3: 
 dTroKadiOTrjui 3, 2, I : d7roKC(f)aX[^(o 2, I, I : d7roKvXia> I, I, I : aparjv I, I, I : 
 dcTKOs 4, 4, 4 : dcTTrd^ofxai 2, 2, 2 : dcnraafxos I, I, 5 • d(f)aip€a> I, I, 4 (1709 d). 
 BdBos I, I, I : ^beXvy/xa I, I, I : ^i^Xos I, I, 2. TaXTjvr] I, I, I : 
 
 yaarrjp I, 3) 2 : yevrj/xa I, I, I : Tevvqirapir I, I, I. Aia^XcTroi I, I, 
 
 I : dia0rjKr] I, I, 2 : Sidvoia I, I, 2 : SiaTrepdco 2, 2, I : diap^(r(ra) I, I, 2 : 
 dva-KoXays I, I, I : Bcj/xa I, 2, 3. EtKoyv I, I, I : etayda I, I, I : 
 
 eKdidoifit I, 2, I : evdrrj &pa 2, 3, I : ivrpiirop-ai I, I, 3 : e^rjKOvra 2, 2, I : 
 eni^XTjua I, I, 2 : €7riypa(j)r] 2, I, 2 : itriaKid^oi I, I, 2 : eprjfKocns I, I, I : 
 €vdvs (adj.) I, I, 2 : evKOTrcoTepov 2, 2, 3. ZrjfXLoa) I, I, I. Qepos 
 
 1, I, I : $i^Xd^a) I, 2, 2 : 6v(ria l, 2, 2. Ka/x7/Xos 2, 3, I : Kapiro^opioa 
 
 2, I, I : (carayeXao) I, I, I : KaTaTreracTfia I, I, I : KaTapdofiai I, I, I : 
 KaTacrK€vd^a> I, I, 2 : KaraaKTjvoo} I, I, I : KaracpiXeo) I, I, 3 : Karivavri 3, 2, 
 I : Kpda-TTfdov I, 3, I : Kprjixvos I, I, I : Kvpr)vaios I, I, I. 
 
 [1885 (i)^] Adxavov I, I, I : Xifios I, I, 4 : Xvxvla I, i, 2. Merpeo) 
 
 2, 2, I : fiodios I, I, I : fivoTrjpiov I, I, I. Neavio-Kos 2, 2, I : wfKpcov 
 
 I, 2, I. SvXa (pi.) 2, 2, I. *08ovs I, 8, I : opfido) I, I, I : 
 
 opx^ofiai I, 2, I : 6a(f)vs I, I, I. Uapexfo I, 1,4: Trevdepd I, 2, 3 : 
 
 nepiXvnos 2, I, I : irepia-aevfia I, I, I : Trepia-a-oTepos 3, I, 4 (1683^) : 
 niva^ 2, 2, I : noXefios 2, 2, 2 : irovqpia I, I, I : Troppca I, I, 2 : TrpoBeais I, 
 
 362 
 
ADDENDA [1885 (ii)/^] 
 
 I, I : TTpcoTOKadedpia I, I, 2 : 7rp(OTOK\i(ria I, I, 2 : trvpyos I, I, 2. 
 'Pa/36oj 1,1, I : priyvvp-L 2, 2, 2. SaXevo) 1,2, 4 : aeXrivi] I, I, I : 
 
 (rivaTTi I, 2, 2 : crtv§a)j/ 3, I, I : a-Krjvrj 1,1,2: (TKta I, I, I : (tkvXXw I, 1,2: 
 (Tiropifios I, I, I : crrd;(i;ff 3, I, I : areyr] I, I, I : crvKov I, I, I : crvvXaXeco I, 
 I, 3 : (TvvTTvly(o 2, I, 2 : a-vvTrjpea) i, I, I. TeXwrioi' I, I, I : rt'XXo) I, 
 
 I, I : Tpdx^'jXos 1,1,2. 'YTraKOvo) 2, I, 2 : v7rop.ev(o I, 2, I. 
 
 ^aivofiai (mid. or pass.) i+[i], 13, 2 : (f)ip.6co 2, 2, i : (f>ov€v(o i, 5, i : 
 (fiovos 2, I, 2 : (^payjxos I, I, I. "iTevdoTrpocfiTjTTjs I, 3, I. 
 
 [1885 (ii)] Vocabulary II (1707 — 28) omitted a large number of words 
 used by John alone, but used by him only once or twice, so that they 
 could not be called characteristic, e.^. aXor], apa(f)09, ^atov, yeverr]. These 
 belong either to special narratives, or else to special details, not given by 
 the Synoptists ; and their inclusion seemed likely to make the Vocabulary 
 inconveniently long without compensating advantage to the reader 
 unacquainted with Greek. But there is much to be learned from some of 
 these, e.^. from John's unique use of fxiaiva (" lest they (the chief priests) 
 should de defiled'''') immediately before the priests accuse Christ of " doing 
 evil^'' when compared with Matthew's statement "That which cometh out 
 of the mouth defileth {kowoi) the man." Some of them will be discussed 
 in Part II of this work, e.g. aXkofiai (2314 — 6), others, it is hoped, 
 in a future treatise. For the convenience of the student, instead of 
 figures stating how often the word occurs in the Fourth Gospel, the 
 list appends references to the several passages. No Synoptist uses the 
 following words : 
 
 [1885 (ii)«] 'Ay-yeXXo) XX. 18, dyvi^co xi. 55, aXXoixai iv. 14, dXoT] xix. 39, 
 djivos i. 29, 36, dvarpeTrat ii. 1 5, duepxofiai vi. 3, dvBpcorroKrovus viii. 44, 
 aTTddeo) iii. 36, apac^os xix. 23, dpecrros viii. 29, dpviov xxi. 15, dpx^iTpUXivos 
 ii. 8 — 9. Baiov xii. 13 (2047), ^aaiXiKos iv. 46, 49, ^i^paxrKO) vi. 1 3. 
 
 TeveTT} ix. I, yepcov iii. 4, yrjpdo-Kco xxi. 1 8, yXoxroroKO/xov xii. 6, xiii. 29. 
 AaKpvco xi. 35, StaTpi/3o) iii. 22, diduKros vi. 45, dapia iv. lO, s. also 1682^. 
 'E/38d/iJ7 apa iv. 52, eKKevreo) xix. 37, CKvevcn v. 1 3, eXarroco iii. 30, iXdrrav ii. 
 10, eXiyp-a xix. 39, ipiropLov ii. 16, ificfivo-dco xx. 22, ivKa'ivia x. 22, i-trdparos 
 vii. 49, iiriyeios iii. 12, eiriXeyco v. 2, eirixpLco ix. II, evrovpdvios iii. 12, 
 epavvd(o v. 39, vii. 52, evdvvco i. 23, e;^^6y iv. 52. 
 
 [1885 (ii) d] ZPjXos ii. 17, ^77x770-49 iii. 25. 'HXoy xx. 25 ((^/j). 
 
 Q€0(r€^r]s ix. 31, ^77K»7 xviii. II, Qpiyifxa iv. 12. Kadaipo) xv. 2, Karr^yopia 
 
 xviii. 29, (r«i/) K48pQ3v xviii. i, K«p/a xi. 44, Kep/xa ii. 15, KepfiaTia-Trjs ii. 
 14, KTyTTovpos- XX. 15, kXtJpo XV. 2 — 6 (4 times (1674)), KXwTray xix. 25, 
 Koi/xj/o-i? xi. 13, Kopyj/orepov e;^co iv. 52. Aarpeiaxvi. 2, XeVrtoi/ xiii. 4, 5, 
 
 Xldivos ii. 6, Ai^oo-rpwroff xix. 13, Xirpa xii. 3, xix. 39, Xoidopeco ix. 28. 
 Maivopai x. 28, MaX;^o? xviii. 10, p.dxop.ai vi. 52, /xeo-oo) vii. 14, pialvo) xviii. 
 28. Neva) xiii. 24, vnrrqp xiii. 5. 'Odonropla iv. 6, o^g) xi. 39, 
 
 oIp.ai xxi. 25, oi/aptoi^ xii. 14 (1736 <?), ottXoi/ xviii. 3, 6crp,rj xii. 3, o\//'ts- vii. 24, 
 xi. 44. Uaibdpiov VI. 9 (1736 <?), TrapafxvOeofiai, xi. 19, 3 1, Trevdepos 
 
 363 
 
[1885 (ii)<;] ADDENDA 
 
 xviii. 13, TrfpiSf'o) xi. 44, TrepiioTrjixi xi. 42, 7ropcf)vp€os xix. 2, 5? Tdtrty vi. 55, 
 TTpo^aTiKT} V. 2 (2216), Trpo^drtov xxi. 16, 1 7, 7rpo(raiT€(o ix. 8 (s. also 
 ■jrpoaaiTrjs 1737 «), Trpoo-Kvvrjrrjs iv. 23, irpoa-cfxiyiov xxi. 5) "n-repva xiii. 1 8, 
 TTTva-fia ix. 6 (s. also tttvo), 1737 <5). 
 
 [1885 (ii) <:] 'Pe'o) vii. 38. '^afxape'iTis iv. 9 (^/V), o-kAos- xix. 31, 32, 
 
 33j a-KTjvoirrjyia vii. 2, o'lciyi'da) i. 1 4, (ttoo. v. 2, x. 23, (rvveio-epxofiai vi. 22, 
 xviii. 15, avvfxadrjTTjs xi. 16, avpo) xxi. 8, (rxoiviov ii. 15. Ta;(«oj/ xiii. 
 
 27, XX. 4 (1918), TCKviov xiii. 33 (1676 «), rerapraloy xi. 39, rerpap-r^vos iv. 35, 
 tLtKos xix. 19, 20, ruTToy xx. 25 (^z^), Tv(^\6a> xii. 40. 'Ydpla ii. 6, 7, 
 
 iv. 28, vir6deiyp.a xiii. 15, vo-o-coTroy xix. 29, v(f>avT6s xix. 23. *aiVa) 
 
 (active) i. 5, v. 35, <f)av6s xviii. 3, cf)avXos iii. 20, v. 29 (1772 d\ (jioivi^ xii. 
 13 (2047), (fipayiWiov ii. 15. Xap,ai ix. 6, xviii. 6, x^'-H'^PPos xviii. I, 
 
 ;^oXda) vii. 23. ^evdos viii. 44, yjreiKrTrjs viii. 44, 55, ■^u^yos xviii. 18. 
 
 OF THE 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF 
 
 364 
 
BY THE SAME AUTHOR 
 
 A. & C BLACK, SOHO SQUARE, LONDON 
 
 CLUE 
 
 A GUIDE THROUGH GREEK TO 
 HEBREW SCRIPTURE 
 
 Demy 8i;o. cloth. Price js. 6d. net. 
 
 " So far as we can judge, they (the arguments) are learned and 
 ingenious, though perhaps insufficient to carry the whole weight of his 
 hypothesis." — Times. 
 
 "Worked out in great detail and with unflagging interest. For 
 Dr Abbott throws life into everything he touches.... A contribution to 
 the ' Synoptic Problem,' claiming examination and commanding atten- 
 tion." — Expository Times. 
 
 "We have nothing but thanks to offer Dr Abbott for the patient 
 industry with which he has collected and put before us, with great 
 clearness, dozens of experiments upon which even those who are not 
 experts either in Hebrew or Greek or Biblical criticism can exercise their 
 common sense." — Guardian. 
 
 " A very ingenious and very interesting argument." — Daily News. 
 
 " Of extraordinary interest and suggestiveness." — 
 
 Manchester Guardian. 
 
 " The theory may be commended as most ingenious, and its applica- 
 tion as very interesting and full of light on many vexed readings." — 
 
 Scotsman. 
 
 "Certainly, as far at least as the Septuagint is concerned, he has 
 found a Vera Causa." — Aberdeen Free Press. 
 
 " Learned, acute, and ingenious." — British Weekly. 
 
THE CORRECTIONS OF MARK 
 
 ADOPTED BY MATTHEW AND LUKE 
 Demy Svo. cloth. Price 15J. net. 
 
 " There is something very attractive in the way in which Dr Abbott 
 forces the documents to tell their secret history, not by brilliant guess- 
 work but by the use of rigid scientific method." — Manchester Guardian. 
 
 " There is a great deal of valuable information in this second instal- 
 ment of Dr Abbott's great work, whether one agrees with the main thesis 
 or not." — Guardian. 
 
 " Full of acute and learned criticism." — Pilot. 
 
 "The industry and ingenuity displayed through the work are marvel- 
 lous. In this attempt to solve the Synoptic variations Dr Abbott is as 
 ploddingly persevering as he is dazzlingly original." — Expository Times. 
 
 " One excellent feature in it is the effort to bring the whole evidence 
 within reach of an intelligent English reader." — Dundee Advertiser. 
 
 "As an exposition of the documentary theory of the origin of the 
 Gospels, Dr Abbott's work promises to hold a high place." — 
 
 Glasgow Herald. 
 
 " Deserves to be read with the utmost care." — Outlook. 
 
 " A monument of patient, scholarly labour." — Christian World. 
 
 FROM LETTER TO SPIRIT 
 
 AN ATTEMPT TO REACH 
 
 THROUGH VARYING VOICES 
 
 THE ABIDING WORD 
 
 Demy ivo. cloth. Price 20s. net. 
 
 " The candid and reverent spirit in which the book is written wins the 
 reader's sympathy.. ..The criticism exhibited is often acute and it is set 
 forth with an accumulation of detail which is evidence of persevering 
 
research ;... For the writer's ability, labour, and candour we have great 
 respect. ...'"— Guardiatt. 
 
 " The book is noteworthy as a defence on new grounds of the historical 
 tradition present in the Fourth Gospel, and the author's diligence in 
 collecting details from every quarter must be universally admired." — 
 
 Athe7t<zum. 
 
 "A monument of painstaking comparison and analysis The 
 
 appendices and indices teem with suggestive material He has steeped 
 
 himself in the spirit, and he has logically explained much which to other 
 critics is mere opportunity for wrigghng." — Outlook. 
 
 " The notion that St John wrote not to supplement the Synoptics but 
 to substitute a spiritual for a materialistic conception of Jesus... is 
 exceedingly suggestive and worked out with much ingenuity." — 
 
 Daily News. 
 
 "A fresh illustration of the author's sound learning and keen exegetical 
 insight." — Daily Chronicle. 
 
 " Very original and suggestive." — Cambridge Review. 
 
 "To the proving of his case Dr Abbott brings all the wealth of 
 curious learning and the singular fertility of linguistic conjecture for 
 which he is so justly distinguished among Biblical critics of the day." — 
 
 ScotsKian. 
 
 "There is in the book.. .a large amount of careful work which will be 
 found helpful to all who are seeking their way through the letter to the 
 spirit of the Gospels." — Bookman. 
 
 " Has the true scientific temper The discussion does not fail to be 
 
 stimulating and suggestive." — Literary World. 
 
 "The result at once of great learning, indomitable industry, and 
 remarkable ingenuity, this is a work that stimulates and rewards." — 
 
 Aberdeen Free Press. 
 
 " Often throughout the book the incidental matters which crop up are 
 of the greatest interest. For instance, what Dr Abbott says on the 
 probability of Christ's teaching about 'taking on oneself the yoke' 
 becoming misunderstood and perverted to " ' taking up the cross ' is 
 
 luminously suggestive It is a storehouse of learning, and, quite apart 
 
 from the conclusions which Dr Abbott seeks to establish, it will be valued 
 for the recondite material both from Jewish and Christian early writings 
 which it brings together and makes easily accessible." — Christian World. 
 
 " He spares no pains to bring a very ingenious discussion up to date 
 and well within the reach of those who have no knowledge of Greek or 
 Hebrew." — Dundee Advertiser. * 
 
 " The accumulation of such facts is a task of great labour, but is 
 valuable to all workers in the field of Biblical criticism, whether they 
 
 agree with Dr Abbott's view of the Synoptic problem or not The 
 
 curious facts which he has gathered about the Rabbinical beliefs con- 
 cerning ' voices from heaven ' contain much that is new to us." — Pilot. 
 
"A valuable contribution to the Synoptic problem." — Leeds Mercury. 
 
 "The strength of his position lies in the accumulation of particulars. 
 He must be examined page by page and point by point." — 
 
 Expository Times. 
 
 " Warm thanks are due to the author for the immense labour he has 
 undertaken." — Primitive Methodist Quarterly Review. 
 
 " With thorough and penetrating scholarship, and a degree of toil 
 beyond all praise, Dr Abbott has sought out parallels to facts and 
 expressions in the Gospels for the purpose of elucidating their meaning, 
 
 and tracing them to their original sources Such a work as this, which 
 
 certainly puts to shame the sluggishness and the spiritual indifference, 
 and the miserable formality ordinarily displayed in the study of the 
 Gospels, will require prolonged and serious investigation, such as cannot 
 be given to it in a notice like the present. It materially advances our 
 comprehension of the intellectual conditions and methods of instruction 
 of Christ's age...." — Baptist Magazine. 
 
 " They are full of minute and curious learning, and help to advance 
 Dr Abbott's plea that the study of the Aramaic versions is of essential 
 importance for the interpretation of the Gospels." — Maftchester Guardian. 
 
 "The book is not more remarkable for its striking hypotheses than it 
 is for its careful and systematic collection of evidence.... Dr Abbott's recent 
 series of volumes (soon happily to be followed by another) really constitute 
 a new and enlightening commentary on some of the most important 
 passages in the New Testament. And the commentary is equally 
 
 illuminative of the Rabbinical passages quoted It is full of learning, 
 
 of originality, but above all of suggestiveness Page after page 
 
 scintillates with brilliant points Dr Abbott has clearly relied a good 
 
 deal on secondary sources, but he has so carefully verified and examined 
 his materials, he has applied to them so penetrating and sound a criticism, 
 that his book is distinguished by its accuracy in details. Dr Abbott 
 stands forth as a conspicuous example of the salvation which lies in 
 precision of thought and exactness of method." — Jewish Quarterly Review. 
 
 The Classical Review., stating in detail " what results the writer has 
 attained which seem tolerably certain to be correct," adds " Incidentally 
 Dr Abbott gives us a most valuable dissertation of 43 pages on Bath Kol, 
 i.e. Voices from Heaven in Jewish Tradition, reprinting in an Appendix 
 Pinner's collection of examples from the Talmuds and Targums ; he 
 gives us a useful restatement in another Appendix of the reasons for 
 believing that the so-called Second Epistle of St Peter is a forgery, and 
 in yet another a convincing review of Eusebius' promise to record the 
 evidence accessible to him that bore on the canonicity or authenticity of 
 Christian writings. He demonstrates anew the correctness of Bishop 
 
 Lightfoot's interpretation of that promise The temper of Dr Abbott's 
 
 writing is worthy of his subject... he has shown us the true significance of 
 unregarded words." 
 
PARADOSIS 
 
 OR 
 
 "IN THE NIGHT IN WHICH HE 
 WAS (?) BETRAYED." 
 
 Demy Svo. cloth. Price yj. Gd. net. 
 
 " We are inclined to think that the present instalment, although the 
 
 thinnest in bulk, is the most valuable of the four Dr Abbott exhibits 
 
 his customary industry, acuteness, and learning One finds oneself, 
 
 much more often than usual, able to follow not only with interest, but 
 with wiUing assent." — Guardian. 
 
 The Dundee Advertiser.^ while calling attention to the " conjectures in 
 the chain of argument," says "There is, however, a strong temptation to 
 think Dr Abbott's hypothesis established when it is seen to be the key 
 that fits into one difficulty after another," and adds " For ingenious and 
 scholarly work there is nothing being done at present in the English 
 language like the series of volumes by Dr Edwin A. Abbott. It is 
 research work, painstaking and slow and elaborate." 
 
 " In great detail and with learned elaboration the various passages are 
 examined ; but the main topic of this book is often the occasion for 
 interesting digressions into paths in which Dr Abbott is always an 
 instructive, if not always a convincing, companion." — 
 
 Londo7t Quarterly Review. 
 
 " A marvel of minute scholarship and of patient industry." — 
 
 Westminster Magazine. 
 
 " He has, in a rare degree, the true scientific temper, which knows 
 that far-reaching implications may be hidden in apparently trivial facts. 
 Indeed it may safely be said that, had he never established a single 
 conclusion, his investigations would, for their patient and unobtrusive 
 thoroughness, alone suffice to earn him an honourable name. This latest 
 
 book, the fourth part of the ' Diatessarica,' is a case in point The real 
 
 value of the book, however, is not in the conclusion but in the way in 
 
 which the conclusion is supported Dr Abbott works out his argument 
 
 with great elaborateness and detail, and to follow it conscientiously is to 
 be amply repaid, whether one end in agreement or dissent. One of 
 Dr Abbott's incidental remarks is too valuable to pass without reference : 
 ' We need,' he says, * to become more, not less, anthropomorphic in our 
 thoughts about God, after the pattern of the best anthropomorphism of 
 
the prophets of Israel and the Son of God.' Not many more useful 
 reminders could come to those who have the forming of modern 
 theology." — Christian World. 
 
 " Unwearied industry and remarkable ingenuity, a word which we use 
 honoris causa^ distinguish this as they distinguish all Dr Abbott's 
 work." — spectator. 
 
 "The criticism is marked by that singular nicety that marks Dr 
 Abbott's work, particularly in an explanation of the intrusion of 'Galilee^ 
 into the Resurrection narratives." — Pall Mall Gazette. 
 
 "We are struck once more by the ingenuity with which Dr Abbott 
 follows his theory of an Aramaic original, and finds in subsequent 
 misunderstandings of its text a reason for many of the divergences in the 
 
 canonical Gospels The conjectural character of a great deal of his 
 
 work is inevitable in such an unexplored field, but he is providing us with 
 a mass of new material for the literary study of the Gospels, especially in 
 the direction of accounting for discrepancies in parallel narratives." — 
 
 Ma?ichester Guardian. 
 
 " In fearless scientific criticism of the Gospels as documents, 
 Dr Abbott occupies a front place among modern scholars, but his 
 criticism is instinct with deep reverence, and always in his own happy 
 phrase *an attempt to reach through varying voices the abiding 
 word.' " — Literary World. 
 
 " We gladly confess that we have learned a great deal from the worlf \ 
 before us." — Record. 
 
 " It is characterized by the same extreme care and minuteness of 
 detail and thoroughness of scholarship which are found in preceding 
 volumes." — Leeds Mercury. 
 
 "A scholarly work, worthy of Dr Abbott's great reputation as a 
 Biblical critic." — Outlook. 
 
 " This is the fourth part of Dr Abbott's great work, ' Diatessarica,' and, 
 like its predecessors, ' Clue ' and ' From Letter to Spirit,' is full of acute 
 criticism and painstaking inquiry. It is indeed monumental in its breadth 
 
 and thoroughness Novel as this interpretation is, no one has a right 
 
 to set it aside who does not study the contents of this learned, reverent, 
 and careful work." — Baptist Magazine. 
 
 CAMBRIDGE: PRINTED BY JOHN CLAY, M.A. AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS. 
 
U C.BERKELEY LIBRARIES 
 
 RETURN 
 TO 
 
 ^^i^iSW 
 
 CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT 
 
 202 Main Library 
 
 LOAN PERIOD 1 
 ^ HOME USE 
 
 2 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 6 
 
 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS 
 
 1 -morith loans may be renewed by calling 642-3405 
 
 6-month loans may be recharged by bringing books to Circulation Desk 
 
 Renewals and recharges may be mode 4 days prior to due dote 
 
 DUE AS STAMPED BEL 
 
 ow 
 
 .27iGC; . 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 KaCR. MAY 2 
 
 1 1981 
 
 
 
 
 
 DEC nf5 
 
 A nn A onnn 
 
 
 
 APR 8 L\m 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY 
 FORM NO. DD6, 60m, 1 1 /78 BERKELEY, CA 94720 
 
 
 t t:- 
 
r#' 
 
 r